7.4L 454 Mercruiser Manual

MAIN MENU
SERVICE
MANUAL
Number 16
MARINE ENGINES
GM V-8
454 CID (7.4L) / 502 CID (8.2L)
Book 1 of 2
Sections 1 thru 4
Printed in U.S.A.
1996, Mercury Marine
90-823224--2 796
We could not possibly know of and advise the service

trade of all conceivable procedures by which a service might be performed and of the possible hazards
and/or results of each method. We have not undertaken any such wide evaluation. Therefore, anyone
who uses a service procedure and/or tool, which is
not recommended by the manufacturer, first
must completely satisfy himself that neither his nor
the products safety will be endangered by the service procedure selected.
All information, illustrations and specifications contained in this manual are based on the latest product
information available at time of publication.
It should be kept in mind, while working on the product, that the electrical system and ignition system are
capable of violent and damaging short circuits or severe electrical shocks. When performing any work
where electrical terminals could possibly be
grounded or touched by the mechanic, the battery
cables should be disconnected at the battery.
Any time the intake or exhaust openings are exposed
during service they should be covered to protect
against accidental entrance of foreign material which
could enter the cylinders and cause extensive internal damage when the engine is started.
It is important to note that, during any maintenance procedure, replacement fasteners must have
the same measurements and strength as those removed, whether metric or customary. Numbers on
the heads of the metric bolts and on surfaces of metric nuts indicate their strength. Customary bolts use
radial lines for this purpose, while most customary nuts do not have strength markings. Mismatched
or incorrect fasteners can result in damage or malfunction, or possible personal injury. Therefore, fasteners removed should be saved for re-use in the
same locations whenever possible. Where the fasteners are not satisfactory for re-use, care should be
taken to select a replacement that meets the
same specifications as the original.
Notice
Throughout this publication, Dangers, Warnings
and Cautions are used to alert the mechanic to special instructions concerning a particular service or
operation that may be hazardous if performed incorrectly or carelessly. Observe them carefully!
These Safety Alerts alone cannot eliminate the hazards that they signal. Strict compliance to these special instructions when performing the service, plus
common sense operation, are major accident prevention measures.
! DANGER
DANGER - Immediate hazards which will result in
severe personal injury or death.
! WARNING
WARNING - Hazards or unsafe practices which
could result in severe personal injury or death.
! CAUTION
CAUTION - Hazards or unsafe practices which
could result in minor personal injury or product
or property damage.
Notice to Users of This

Manual
This service manual has been written and published
by the service department of Mercury Marine to aid
our dealers, mechanics and company service personnel when servicing the products described herein.
It is assumed that these personnel are familiar with
the servicing procedures of these products, of like or
similar products manufactured and marketed by
Mercury Marine, and that they have been trained in
the recommended servicing procedures for these
products which include the use of mechanics
common hand tools and the special Mercury
Marine or recommended tools from other suppliers.
90-823224--2 796
Engine Mechanical
Components
Replacement Parts
! WARNING
Many of the engine mechanical components are designed for marine applications. Unlike automotive
engines, marine engines are subjected to extended
periods of heavy load and wide-open-throttle operation and, therefore, require heavy-duty components.
Special marine engine parts have design and manufacturing specifications which are required to provide long life and dependable performance. Marine
engine parts also must be able to resist the corrosive
action of salt or brackish water that will rust or corrode standard automotive parts within a short period
of time.
Failure to use recommended Quicksilver service replacement parts can result in poor engine performance and/or durability, rapid corrosion of parts subjected to salt water and possibly complete failure of
the engine.
Use of parts other than recommended service replacement parts, will void the warranty on those parts
which are damaged as a result of the use of other
than recommended replacement parts.
Electrical, ignition and fuel system components

on MerCruiser Engines and Stern Drives are designed and manufactured to comply with U.S.
Coast Guard Rules and Regulations to minimize
risks of fire or explosion.
Use of replacement electrical, ignition or fuel
system components, which do not comply to
these rules and regulations, could result in a fire
or explosion hazard and should be avoided.
When servicing the electrical, ignition and fuel
systems, it is extremely important that all components are properly installed and tightened. If
not, any electrical or ignition component opening would permit sparks to ignite fuel vapors from fuel system leaks, if they existed.
ii
90-823224--2 796
V-8 Models Covered in This Manual

Gen V Engines
Model
Serial Number
Stern Drive Engines
MCM 7.4L Bravo
OD830779 to OF800699
MCM 7.4L Bravo Three
OD838819 to OF800699
MCM 7.4LX MPI
OF595275 to OF801999
MCM 454 Magnum (Carburetor)
OD837587 to OF801999
MCM 454 Magnum EFI, EFI/MP and MPI
OF111570 to OF802349
OD831432 to OF114528
MCM 502 Magnum EFI, EFI/MP, MPI
OD840650 to OF802599
Inboard Engines
MIE 7.4L (Carburetor)
OD840300 to OF820141
MIE 7.4L EFI/MP and MPI
OF490697 to OF820103
OD857200 to OF819619
Ski Engines
MIE 454 Magnum EFI, EFI/MP and MPI Tournament

Ski
OF215800 to OF820099
Gen VI Engines
Model
Serial Number
Stern Drive Engines
MCM Bravo 7.4L (Carburetor)
OF800700 and above
MCM 7.4LX EFI
OF820000 and above
MCM 7.4LX MPI
OF802000 and above
OF801700 and Above
MCM 454 MPI
OF802350 and above
MCM 502 MPI
OF802600 and above

Inboard Engines
OF820142 and above
MIE 7.4L EFI
OF874815 and above
MIE 7.4L MPI
OF820104 and above
MIE 8.2L MPI
OF775694 and OF775695
MIE 8.2L MPI
OF819620 and above
90-823224--2 796
iii
iv
90-823224--2 796
Service Manual Outline
Important
Information
Section 1 - Important Information

A - General Information
B - Maintenance
C - Troubleshooting
Section 2 - Removal and Installation
A - MCM Models - Bravo and Blackhawk Drives
B - MCM Models - Bravo and Blackhawk with
Driveshaft Extension
C - MIE Models - Velvet Drive Transmissions
D - MIE Models - Hurth Transmissions
Section 3 - Engine
A - 454 CID / 7.4L / 502 CID / 8.2L
Section 4 - Electrical Systems
A - Starting System
B - Ignition System
C - Charging System
D - Instrumentation
E - Electrical Kits
F - Wiring Diagrams
Section 5 - Fuel System
A - Fuel Delivery Systems and Fuel Pumps
B - Weber 4 Barrel Carburetor
C - Electronic Fuel Injection
(Throttle Body and Multi-Port Injection)
Section 6 - Cooling System
A - Seawater Cooled Models
B - Closed Cooled Models
Section 7 - Exhaust System
A - General
B - Manifold and Elbows
C - Risers
D - Collectors
Section 8 - Drives
A - Velvet Drive In-Line Transmission
B - Velvet Drive V-Drive Transmission
C - Hurth Down Angle Transmission
D - Hurth V-Drive Transmission
E - Drive Shaft Models/Propeller Shaft
Section 9 - Power Steering
A - Pump
90-823224--2 796
Removal and
Installation
Engine
Electrical System
Fuel System
Cooling System
Exhaust System
Drives
Power Steering
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
GENERAL INFORMATION
Index
1
A
Table of Contents
Page
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1A-1
How to Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1A-1
Page Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1A-1
How To Read Parts Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1A-2
Directional References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1A-3
Engine Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1A-3
Engine Serial Number Locations . . . . . . . . . . . 1A-4
Propeller Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1A-4
Water Testing New Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1A-4
Boat and Engine Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1A-5
Boat Bottom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1A-5
Marine Fouling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1A-6
Weight Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1A-6
Water in Boat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1A-7
Elevation and Climate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1A-7
Index
1A-0 - GENERAL INFORMATION
90-823224--2 796
Introduction
How to Use This Manual
This comprehensive overhaul and repair manual is

designed as a service guide for the models previously listed. It provides specific information, including
procedures for disassembly, inspection, assembly
and adjustment to enable dealers and service mechanics to repair and tune these engines.
This manual is divided into sections which represent

major components and systems.
Before attempting repairs or tune-up, it is suggested

that the procedure first be read through to gain knowledge of the methods and tools used and the cautions
and warnings required for safety.
Some sections are further divided into parts which

more fully describe the component.
Sections and section parts are listed on the Service
Manual Outline page following V-8 Models Covered
in This Manual page.
Page Numbering
Two number groups appear at the bottom of each
page. Following is an example and description.
72426
Index
90-823224--2 796
GENERAL INFORMATION - 1A-1
How To Read Parts Manual
CYLINDER BLOCK AND CAMSHAFT
M0033-D8
PART NO.
841-81631
N.S.S.
22-87238
19-34270
17-35465
22-72640
23-85674
72638
431-5943
35378
43-35338
43-48338
10-34505
12-39167
REF.
NO.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
c
DESCRIPTION
CYLINDER BLOCK ASSEMBLY

PLUG, expansion (1-1/4) (GM #3738306)
DRAIN COCK, cylinder block
PLUG, expansion - cylinder block (1-5/8 Diameter)
PIN, dowel - block to head (5/16 Diameter)
PLUG, expansion - camshaft bearing hole
BEARING UNIT, camshaft (set)
LIFTER, hydraulic valve
CAMSHAFT
CHAIN, camshaft timing
SPROCKET, camshaft timing
SPROCKET, crankshaft timing
BOLT, camshaft timing sprockets (3/4)
WASHER, camshaft timing sprocket bolt
QUAN.
1
2
2
8
4
1
1
16
1
1
1
1
3
3
841-8163 Cylinder Block Assembly includes only standard pistons,

piston rings, crankshaft bearings and camshaft bearings.
A. Part Number: For part ordering - Note N.S.S. for Reference Number 2, Plug, expansion - that means Not Sold Separately by Mercury Marine, however, in this case, the G.M. Part Number (for the plug) is given in the Description Column.
B. Reference Number: For part Shown on exploded parts view.
C. Description: This is the most important column because it gives:
1) Description of Part: Ref. No. 1 is a Cylinder Block Assembly, No. 9 is a Camshaft, etc.
2) What parts are included with a certain part: Notice how the Description of Part, for Ref. Nos. 1 and 8 thru 14, are
at the left side of the column. Description of Part for Ref. Nos. 2 thru 7 are indented under Cylinder Block Assembly.
If Ref. No. 1 (Cylinder Block Assembly) was ordered, all indented parts (Ref. Nos 2thru 7) would come with the part.
Ref. Nos. 8 thru 14 would not come with Ref. No. 1 and would have to be ordered separately. If 2 Cylinder Blocks
were listed, both cylinder blocks would come with the indented parts. In some cases, an indented part will have anoth
er part indented under it. The second indented part will come with the first indented part.
3) Serial number break: If serial number information is listed, check product serial number to ensure that correct part
is ordered.4) Special information: Many times special information will be shown after description such as; L.H. Rota
tion, R. H. Rotation, Filter up, Filter Down, etc. This will help in selecting the correct part.
D. Quantity: Quantity that has to be ordered.

E. Special Information Block: Additional information, part numbers for gasket sets, etc.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Directional References
Engine Rotation
Front of boat is bow; rear is stern. Starboard side is

right side; port side is left side. In this maintenance
manual, all directional references are given as they
appear when viewing boat from stern looking toward
bow.
Engine rotation is determined by observing flywheel

rotation from the rear (stern end) of the engine looking forward (toward water pump end). Propeller rotation is not necessarily the same as engine rotation.
When ordering replacement engine, short blocks or
parts for engine, be certain to check engine rotation.
Do not rely on propeller rotation in determining engine rotation.
FORE or BOW
(FRONT)
STARBOARD
(RIGHT)
PORT
(LEFT)
72001
Standard Left-Hand Rotation
AFT or STERN
(REAR)
72000
Index
90-823224--2 796
Engine Serial Number

Locations
Propeller Information
Refer to the Propeller section in appropriate MerCruiser Stern Drive Service Manual, or order publication 90-86144-92, Everything you need to know
about propellers.
Changing diameter, pitch or coupling of a propeller
will affect engine RPM and boat performance. The
blade configuration also will affect performance. Two
like propellers, same pitch and diameter, from two different manufacturers also will perform differently.
It is the responsibility of the boat manufacturer and/or

selling dealer to equip the boat with the correct propeller to allow the engine to operate within its specified RPM range at wide-open-throttle (W.O.T.).
72923
Because of the many variables of boat design and

operation, only testing will determine the best propeller for the particular application.
To test for correct propeller, operate boat (with an average load onboard) at W.O.T. and check RPM with
an accurate tachometer. Engine RPM should be near
top of the specified range so that, under heavy load,
engine speed will not fall below specifications.
Stern Drive (MCM)

a - Serial Number Plate
b - Starter Motor
If engine exceeds the specified RPM, an increase in

pitch and/or diameter is required.
If engine is below rated RPM, a decrease in pitch
and/or diameter is required.
Normally, a change of approximately 150 RPM will be

achieved for each single inch of pitch change of a
propeller.
! CAUTION
a
72924
Inboard (MIE)
a - Serial Number Plate
b - Starter Motor
If a propeller is installed that does not allow engine RPM to reach the specified full-throttle RPM
range, the engine will labor and will not produce full power. Operation under this condition
will cause excessive fuel consumption, engine
overheating and possible piston damage (due to
detonation). On the other hand, installation of a
propeller, that allows engine to run above the
specified RPM limit, will cause excessive wear on
internal engine parts which will lead to premature
engine failure.
Water Testing New Engines

Use care during the first 20 hours of operation on new
MerCruiser engines or possible engine failure may
occur. If a new engine has to be water-tested at full
throttle before the break-in period is complete, follow
this procedure.
Index
90-823224--2 796
1. Start engine and run at idle RPM until normal operating temperature is reached.
For best speed and minimum spray, the corner between the bottom and the transom should be sharp.
2. Run boat up on plane.

3. Advance engine RPM (in 200 RPM increments)
until engine reaches its maximum rated RPM.
IMPORTANT: Do not run at maximum RPM for
more than 2 minutes.
b
c
Boat and Engine

Performance
a
72003
a - Flat
b - Sharp Corner
c - Transom
Boat Bottom
For maximum speed, a boat bottom should be as flat
as possible in a fore-aft direction (longitudinally) for
approximately the last 5 ft. (1.5 m).
The bottom is referred to as having a hook if it is

concave in the fore-and-aft direction. A hook causes
more lift on the bottom near the transom and forces
the bow to drop. This increases wetted surface and
reduces boat speed. A hook, however, aids in planing
and reduces any porpoising (rhythmical bouncing)
tendency. A slight hook is often built in by the manufacturer. A hook also can be caused by incorrect
trailering or storing the boat with support directly under the transom.
b
a
72004
a - Hook
b - Transom
a
72002
a - Critical Bottom Area
Index
90-823224--2 796
A rocker is the reverse of a hook. The bottom is convex or bulged in the fore-and-aft direction. It can
cause the boat to porpoise.
following:
Avoid an electrical interconnection between the
MerCruiser Product, Anodic Blocks, or MerCathode System and the paint by allowing a minimum of 1 in. (26mm) UNPAINTED area on transom of the boat around these items.
b
a
72005
a - Rocker
b - Transom
Any hook, rocker or surface roughness on the bottom, particularly in the all-important center-aft portion
will have a negative effect on speed, often several
miles per hour on a fast boat.
Marine Fouling
Fouling is an unwanted build-up (usually animal-vegetable-derived) occurring on the boats bottom and
drive unit. Fouling adds up to drag, which reduces
boat performance. In fresh water, fouling results from
dirt, vegetable matter, algae or slime, chemicals,
minerals and other pollutants. In salt water, barnacles, moss and other marine growth often produce
dramatic build-up of material quickly. Therefore, it is
important to keep the hull as clean as possible in all
water conditions to maximize boat performance.
b
71176
Antifouling paint, if required, may be applied to boat

hull observing the following precautions.
a - Antifouling Paint
b - MINIMUM 1 Inch (26 mm) UNPAINTED Area
IMPORTANT: DO NOT paint anodes or MerCathode System reference electrode and anode, as
this will render them ineffective as galvanic corrosion inhibitors.
Weight Distribution
! CAUTION
Avoid corrosion damage. Do not apply antifouling paint to MerCruiser drive unit or transom assembly.
IMPORTANT: If antifouling protection is required,
Tri-Butyl-Tin-Adipate (TBTA) base antifouling
paints are recommended on MerCruiser boating
applications. In areas where Tri-Butyl-Tin-Adipate base paints are prohibited by law, copper
base paints can be used on boat hull and boat
transom. Corrosion damage that results from the
improper application of antifouling paint will not
be covered by the limited warranty. Observe the
Weight distribution is extremely important; it affects

a boats running angle or attitude. For best top speed,
all movable weight - cargo and passengers - should
be as far aft as possible to allow the bow to come up
to a more efficient angle (3 to 5 degrees). On the negative side of this approach is the problem that, as
weight is moved aft, some boats will begin an unacceptable porpoise.
Secondly, as weight is moved aft, getting on plane
becomes more difficult.
Finally, the ride in choppy water becomes more uncomfortable as the weight goes aft. With these factors in mind, each boater should seek out what
weight locations best suit his/her needs.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Weight and passenger loading placed well forward

increases the wetted area of the boat bottom and,
in some cases, virtually destroys the good performance and handling characteristics of the boat. Operation in this configuration can produce an extremely
wet ride, from wind-blown spray, and could even be
unsafe in certain weather conditions or where bow
steering may occur.
Weight distribution is not confined strictly to fore and
aft locations, but also applies to lateral weight distribution. Uneven weight concentration to port or starboard of the longitudinal centerline can produce a severe listing attitude that can adversely affect the
boats performance, handling ability and riding comfort. In extreme rough water conditions, the safety of
the boat and passengers may be in jeopardy.
Water in Boat
When a boat loses performance, check bilge for water. Water can add considerable weight to the boat,
thereby decreasing the performance and handling.
Make certain that all drain passages are open for
complete draining.
Elevation and Climate

Elevation has a very noticeable effect on the
wide-open- throttle power of an engine. Since air
(containing oxygen) gets thinner as elevation increases, the engine begins to starve for air. Humidity,
barometric pressure and temperature do have a noticeable effect on the density of air. Heat and humidity
thin the air. This phenomenon can become particularly annoying when an engine is propped out on a
cool dry day in spring and later, on a hot, sultry day
in August, doesnt have its old zip.
Although some performance can be regained by
dropping to a lower pitch propeller, the basic problem
still exists. The propeller is too large in diameter for
the reduced power output. The experienced marine
dealer or a Quicksilver Propeller Repair Station can
determine how much diameter to remove from a lower-pitch propeller for specific high-elevation locations. In some cases, a gear-ratio change to the drive
unit to more reduction is possible and very beneficial.
It is a known fact that weather conditions exert a profound effect on power output of internal combustion
engines. Therefore, established horsepower ratings
refer to the power that the engine will produce at its
rated RPM under a specific combination of weather
conditions.
Index
90-823224--2 796
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY BLANK TO

ALLOW FOR CORRECTIONS OR ADDITIONS
AT A LATER DATE
Index
90-823224--2 796
72526
MAINTENANCE
Index
1
B
Table of Contents
Page
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-1
Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-1
To Be Done by Dealer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-2
Tune-Up Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-4
MCM (Stern Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-4
MIE (Inboard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-5
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-6
All Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-7
20-Hour Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-7
End of First Season Checkup . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-7
Fuel Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-8
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-8
Crankcase Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-9
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-10
Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-10
Coolant for Closed Cooling System . . . . . 1B-10
Maintaining Crankcase Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . 1B-10
Overfilled Engine Crankcase . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-10
Checking Engine Oil Level/Filling . . . . . . . 1B-10
Changing Oil and Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-10
Maintaining Power Steering Pump
Fluid Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-11
With Engine Warm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-11
With Engine Cold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-11
Filling and Bleeding Power Steering System 1B-12
Maintaining Closed Cooling Coolant Level . . 1B-13
Flushing Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-13
MCM (Stern Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-13
MIE (Inboard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-15
Maintaining Transmission Fluid Level . . . . . . 1B-15
Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-16
Throttle Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-16
Shift Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-17
Engine Coupler/U-Joint Shaft Splines . . . 1B-18
Drive Shaft Extension Models . . . . . . . . . . 1B-18
Starter Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-19
Cold Weather or Extended Storage . . . . . . . . 1B-19
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-19
Layup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-20
Draining Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-22
Recommissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-34
Index
1B-0 - MAINTENANCE
90-823224--2 796
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Intervals
Maintenance intervals and the tasks to be performed, as shown in this current schedule, or as found in a previously printed schedules, are generally based on an average boating application and environment. However,
individual operating habits and personal maintenance preferences can have an impact on the suggested intervals. In consideration of these factors, MerCruiser has adjusted some maintenance intervals and corresponding
tasks to be performed. In some cases, this may allow for more individual tasks to be performed in a single visit
to the serving dealer, rather than multiple visits. Therefore, it is very important that the boat owner and servicing
dealer discuss the current Maintenance Schedule and develop appropriate maintenance intervals to coincide
with the individual operating habits, environment, and maintenance requirements.
Always disconnect battery cables from battery BEFORE working around electrical systems components to prevent injury to yourself and damage to electrical system should a wire be accidentally shorted.
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE THAT CAN BE PERFORMED BY OWNER/OPERATOR
NOTE: Only perform maintenance which applies to your particular power package.
Task
Interval
Engine Crankcase Oil - Check level

Closed Cooling Coolant - Check level
Power Steering Fluid - Check level
Stern Drive Unit Oil - Check level
Battery - Check level and inspect for damage
Fuel Pump Sight Tube (If Equipped) - Check that no
fuel is present
W kl
Weekly
Power Trim Pump Oil - Check level

Anodes - Inspect for erosion
Gear Housing Water Pickups - Check for marine
growth or debris
Drive Belt(s) - Inspect condition and check tension
Every 100 hours of operation or 120 days.

Whichever occurs first.
Power Package - Exterior Surfaces - Spray with rust

preventative
Saltwater Use: Every 50 hours of operation or 60

days, Whichever occurs first.
Freshwater Use: Every 100 hours of operation or
120 days, Whichever occurs first.
Power Package Exterior Surfaces - Clean and paint
Once a year
Propeller Shaft - Lubricate
Cooling System - Flush seawater section
Saltwater Use: After every use.
Index
90-823224--2 796
MAINTENANCE - 1B-1
Maintenance Schedule (Continued)

To Be Done by Dealer
Task
Interval
Seawater Pickup Pump - Disassemble and inspect
Whenever insufficient seawater flow is suspected.

(If operating temperature exceeds normal range.)
Crankcase Oil and Filter Change

Ignition system - Clean and Inspect condition.
Flame Arrestor and Crankcase Ventilation Hose Clean and Inspect.
Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve (If So
Equipped) - Change
Stern Drive unit Oil - Change
Gimbal Ring Clamping Screws - Retorque to 40 ft.
lb. (54 Nm)
Rear Engine Mounts - Check torque to 30-40 ft. lb.
(47-54 Nm)
Gimbal Bearing - Lubricate
Cooling System - Clean and Inspect
Engine Alignment - Check
Engine Coupling Universal Joint Shaft Splines Lubricate
Steering System - Lubricate and inspect for loose,
damage or missing parts.
Electrical System - Check for loose or damaged
wiring.
End
E
d off first
fi boating
b i season
and thereafter,
every100 hours of operation
or once yearly, whichever
occurs first.
Cooling System Hoses and Clamps - Inspect for

damage and deterioration. Check Clamps for
tightness.
Closed Cooling System Pressure Cap - Clean,
inspect and test .
Continuity Circuit - Check components for loose
connections, broken or frayed wires.
Shift and Throttle Cable and Linkage - Lubricate
and inspect for loose, damaged or missing parts
Engine Exhaust System - Inspect externally for
damage, deterioration and restrictions. Check for
tightness.
Ignition System - Check Timing and adjust as
needed.
Index
1B-2 - MAINTENANCE
90-823224--2 796
Maintenance Schedule (Continued)

To Be Done by Dealer
Task
Steering Head and Remote Control - Inspect and
Lubricate.
Carburetor (If So Equipped) - Inspect and adjust.
Interval
End of first boating season and thereafter, every
100 hours of operation or once yearly,
yearly whichever
occurs first.
Throttle Body (Fuel Injection Models) - Inspect

Fuel Filters - Replace
Quicksilver Mercathode System - Test output.
Closed Cooling Coolant - Test for Alkalinity
O
Once
a Year
Y
Heat Exchanger - Clean seawater section.

Drive Unit Bellows and Clamps - Inspect
Universal Joint Cross Bearings- Inspect
Closed Cooling Coolant - Replace
End of first boating season and thereafter, every

200 hours of operation or once yearly, whichever
occurs first.
Every Two Years
Index
90-823224--2 796
MAINTENANCE - 1B-3
Tune-Up Specifications
MCM (Stern Drive)
Model
Propshaft Ratings
HP (KW)
MCM 7.4L
MCM 7.4L
PT Bravo
Three
MCM 454
Magnum
MCM 454
EFI
MCM 502
Magnum
MCM 502
EFI
Magnum
300 (224)
300 (224)
350 (261)
385 (287)
390 (291)
415 (309)
Number of Cylinders
V-8
Displacement
Bore/Stroke In. (mm)
Compression Ratio
454 C.I.D (7.4L)
502 C.I.D. (8.2L)
4.25x4.00 (108x101.6)
4.47 x 4.00
(113.5 x 101.6)
8.0:1
8.6:1
Compression Pressure
Idle RPM
(in Forward Gear)
Max. RPM (at W.O.T.)
150 PSI (1034 kPa)

650
4200-4600
Oil Pressure
(at 2000 RPM)
650
4600-5000
4 PSI (28 kPa)
Fuel Pump Pressure

(at 1800 RPM)
3-7 PSI (21-48 kPa)

37 PSI
(255 kPa)
Fuel Rail Pressure

(Running) (E.F.I. Only)
Electrical System
37 PSI
(255 kPa)
12 V Negative () Ground
450 cca
575 mca
90A/h
Firing Order
650 cca,
825 mca,
or 150A/h
1-8-4-3-6-5-7-2
550 cca,
700 mca or
120A/h
Spark Plug Type
AC MR43T/Champion RV15YC4/NGK BR6FS
Spark Plug Gap
.035 in (0.9 mm)
Timing (at Idle RPM)
8 Degrees BTDC
Preliminary Idle Mixture

Thermostat
600
30-70 PSI (207-483 kPa)
Min. Oil Pressure

(at Idle)
Min. Battery
Requirements
600
1 1/4 Turns
143 F
(62 C)
650 cca,
825 mca,
or 150A/h
1 1/4 Turns
160 F
(71 C)
143 F
(62 C)
160 F
(71 C)
Index
1B-4 - MAINTENANCE
90-823224--2 796
MIE (Inboard)
Model
Propshaft Ratings
HP (KW)
MIE 7.4L
MIE 454 EFI
MIE 8.2L
310 (231)
395 (231)
400 (298)
Number of Cylinders
V-8
Displacement
Bore/Stroke
Compression Ratio
454 C.I.D (7.4L)
502 C.I.D. (8.2L)
4.25x4.00 In. (108x101.6 mm)
4.47x4.00 (113.5x101.6)
8.0:1
Compression Pressure
Idle RPM
(in Forward Gear)
Max. RPM (at W.O.T.)
8.6:1
150 PSI (1034 kPa)
650
600
600
4000-4400
4600-5000
4400-4800
Oil Pressure
(at 2000 RPM)
30-70 PSI (207-483 kPa)
Min. Oil Pressure

(at Idle)
Fuel Pump Pressure
(at 1800 RPM)
4 PSI (28 kPa)

3-7 PSI (21-48 kPa)
Fuel Rail Pressure

(Running) (E.F.I. Only)
3-7 PSI (21-48 kPa)

37 PSI (255 kPa)
Electrical System
Min. Battery
Requirements
150 PSI (1034 kPa)
12 V Negative () Ground
450 cca, 575 mca or
90A/h
Firing Order
650 cca, 825 mca, or

150A/h
550 cca, 700 mca or

120A/h
1-8-4-3-6-5-7-2
Spark Plug Type
AC MR43T/Champion RV15YC4/NGK BR6FS
Spark Plug Gap
.035 in (0.9 mm)
Timing (at Idle RPM)
8 Degrees BTDC
Preliminary Idle Mixture

Thermostat
1-1/4 Turns
1-1/4 Turns
143F
(62 C)
160 F
(71 C)
143F
(62 C)
LH ROTATION
FRONT
Firing Order
1-8-4-3-6-5-7-2
72008
Index
90-823224--2 796
MAINTENANCE - 1B-5
Fluid Capacities
NOTICE
All capacities are approximate fluid measures.
All capacities are U.S. Quarts (Litres).
MCM AND MIE

454 CID / 7.4L
MODEL
Crankcase Oil1 (With Filter)
Seawater Cooling
7 (6.6)
System2
Closed Cooling System

1
MCM AND MIE

7.4L MPI
MCM AND MIE

502 CID / 8.2L
7 (6.6)
20 (19)
28 (26.5) 1 18 (17) 2
18 (17) 2
28 (26.5) 2
Closed cooling system with manifolds included in coolant side of system.
2 Closed
cooling system without manifolds included in coolant side of system.
IMPORTANT: It may be necessary to adjust oil levels depending on installation angle and cooling systems (heat exchanger and fluid lines).
MAKE AND MODEL
Hurth
Velvet Drive
CAPACITY QUARTS (LITRES)
630A
3-1/4 (3)
630V
4.25 (4.0)
800A2
5-3/4 (5.5)
800AM
4-2/5 (4.2)
1:1
FLUID TYPE
Dexron
III Automatic
D
A
i Transmission
T
i i
Fluid
2 (1.9)
NOTE: Always use dipstick to determine exact quantity of fluid required

NOTE: Seawater cooling system capacity information is for winterization use only
Index
1B-6 - MAINTENANCE
90-823224--2 796
All Models
After Break-in Period
20-Hour Break-In Period
To help extend the life of your MerCruiser power

package, the following recommendations should be
considered;
IMPORTANT: The first 20 hours of operation is

the engine break-in period. Correct break-in is
essential to obtain minimum oil consumption
and maximum engine performance. During this
break-in period, the following rules must be
observed:
Use a propeller that allows the engine to operate

at or near the top of the maximum RPM range
(See Specifications section) when at full throttle
with a normal boat load.
Do not operate below 1500 RPM for extended

periods of time for first 10 hours. Shift into gear as
soon as possible after starting and advance
throttle above 1500 RPM if conditions permit
safe operation.
Operation at 3/4 throttle setting or lower is recommended. Refrain from prolonged operation at
maximum (full throttle) RPM.
Do not operate at one speed consistently for

extended periods.
At the end of the first season of operation, an

Authorized MerCruiser Dealer should be contacted
to discuss and/or perform various scheduled
maintenance items. If you are in an area where the
product is operated continuously (year-round
operation), you should contact your dealer at the end
of the first 100 hours of operation, or once yearly,
whichever occurs first.
Do not exceed 3/4 throttle during first 10 hours.

During next 10 hours, occasional operation at full
throttle is permissible (5 minutes at a time
maximum).
Avoid full throttle acceleration from IDLE speed.
End of First Season Checkup
Do not operate at full throttle until engine reaches

normal operating temperature.
Index
90-823224--2 796
MAINTENANCE - 1B-7
Fuel Specifications
sign of leakage or deterioration requires replacement before further engine operation.
Fuel
Because of possible adverse effects of alcohol in

gasoline, it is recommended that only alcohol-free gasoline be used where possible. If only
fuel containing alcohol is available, or if the presence of alcohol is unknown, increased inspection frequency for leaks and abnormalities is required.
! CAUTION
Use of improper gasoline can damage the engine
seriously. Engine damage that results from use
of improper gasoline is considered misuse of the
engine and is not covered under MerCruiser Warranty.
USA and Canada
Fuel having a posted pump Octane Rating of 87 (R +
M) / 2 minimum. Premium gasoline [92 (R + M) / 2] is
also acceptable . DO NOT use leaded gasolines.
Outside USA and Canada
Fuel having a posted pump Octane Rating of 92 RON
minimum. Premium gasoline (98 RON) is also acceptable. If unleaded is not available, use a major
brand of leaded gasoline.
Gasolines containing alcohol, either methyl alcohol
(methanol) or ethyl alcohol (ethanol) may cause increased:
Corrosion of metal parts.
Deterioration of elastomer and plastic parts.
! WARNING
Avoid gasoline fire or explosion. Improper installation of brass fittings or plugs into fuel pump or
fuel filter base can crack casting and/or cause a
fuel leak.
IMPORTANT: When operating a MerCruiser engine on gasoline containing alcohol, storage of
gasoline in the fuel tank for long periods should
be avoided. Long periods of storage, common to
boats, create unique problems. In cars, alcohol-blend fuels normally are consumed before
they can absorb enough moisture to cause
trouble, but boats often sit idle long enough for
phase separation to take place. In addition, internal corrosion may take place during storage if alcohol has washed protective oil films from internal components.
Fuel permeation through flexible fuel lines.
GASOLINE / ALCOHOL BLENDS
Wear and damage of internal engine parts.
Many new motor vehicle owner manuals are warning

about the potential damage from using gasoline containing alcohol, especially METHANOL. They cite
possible fuel system damage and performance problems. These are just two of the hazards that may be
caused by alcohol. These same problems as well as
the additional safety risk of fire and explosion from
fuel system leaks apply to marine inboard engines.
METHANOL is more severe in its bad effect than is
ETHANOL. Alcohol is also more severe in older engines since newer engines have materials which are
more resistant to alcohol.
Starting and operating difficulties.

Some of these adverse effects are due to the tendency of gasolines containing alcohol to absorb moisture
from the air, resulting in a phase of water and alcohol
separating from the gasoline in the fuel tank.
The adverse effects of alcohol are more severe with
methyl alcohol (methanol) and are worse with increasing alcohol content.
! WARNING
Fire and Explosion Hazard: Fuel leakage from
any part of the fuel system can be a fire and explosion hazard which can cause serious bodily
injury or death. Careful periodic inspection of the
entire fuel system is mandatory, particularly after
storage. All fuel system components including
fuel tanks (whether plastic, metal or fiberglass),
fuel lines, primer bulbs, fittings, fuel filters and
carburetors should be inspected for leakage,
softening, hardening, swelling or corrosion. Any
Index
1B-8 - MAINTENANCE
EFFECTS OF GASOLINE / ALCOHOL BLENDS

ON MARINE ENGINES
Corrosion of metals may result from use of alcohol-gasoline blends. Portable or permanently installed fuel tanks of metal or fiberglass, fuel filters,
fuel lines and float bowls may be affected by alcohol
blended fuels. Many fiberglass fuel tanks are slowly
dissolved by alcohol, leading immediately to filter and
carburetor plugging and eventually to tank failure.
Fuels containing alcohol will absorb moisture from
the air. At first, this moisture will remain in solution,
90-823224--2 796
but once the water content of the fuel has built up to

about one-half of one percent, it will separate out
(phase separation), bringing the alcohol with it. This
alcohol-water mixture settles to the bottom of the fuel
tank and if this mixture gets into the engine, the engine can be seriously damaged internally, as it may
wash the protective film of oil off the bore of any cylinder that it enters. Before the engine can be restarted,
it is necessary to remove the separated alcohol and
water layer, flush out the fuel system with clean fuel
and remove and dry the spark plugs.
BOAT / MOTOR STORAGE
When operating a MerCruiser engine on gasoline
containing alcohol, storage of gasoline in the fuel
tank for long periods of time should be avoided.
Long periods of storage, common to boats, create
unique problems. In cars, gasoline/alcohol blend
fuels normally are consumed before they can absorb
enough moisture to cause trouble, but boats often sit
idle long enough for phase separation to take place.
In addition, internal corrosion may take place during
storage if alcohol has washed protective oil films from
internal components.
WINTER STORAGE
If boat is to be placed in winter storage, carburetors
must be run dry at idle RPM. Permanent fuel tanks
should be drained completely and Quicksilver Gasoline Stabilizer and Conditioner added to any fuel remaining in the tank. Portable fuel tanks should be
emptied completely.
WARRANTY
Performance problems and fuel system or other
damage resulting from the use of gasoline-alcohol
blended fuels are not the responsibility of MerCruiser
and will not be covered under our warranty.
CONTINUING EVALUATIONS
The effects of gasoline with ETHANOL and METHANOL are still being evaluated by the United States
Coast Guard, the National Marine Manufacturers Association (NMMA), Mercury Marine and other engine
and boat manufacturers.
TEST FOR ALCOHOL CONTENT IN GASOLINE

The following is an acceptable and widely used field
procedure for the detection of alcohol in gasoline.
Use any small transparent bottle or tube that can be
capped and is, or can be, provided with graduations
or a mark at about 1/3 full. A pencil mark on a piece of
adhesive tape may be used.
Procedure
1. Fill the container with water to the mark.
2. Add fuel almost to fill the container, leaving some
air space, then cap the container. The proportions of fuel to water are not critical, but there
should be 2 to 3 times as much fuel as water.
3. Shake container vigorously and allow it to sit upright for 3 to 5 minutes. If the volume of water
appears to have increased, alcohol is present. If
you are not sure, there is no need for concern. If
the dividing line between water and fuel becomes
cloudy, use the middle of the cloudy band.
Crankcase Oil
To help obtain optimum engine performance and to
provide maximum protection, we strongly recommend the use of Quicksilver 4-Cycle Marine Engine
Oil. If not available, a good grade, straight weight, detergent automotive oil of correct viscosity, with an API
classification of SF or SG, may be used.
The following chart is a guide to crankcase oil selection. Oil filter should always be changed with oil.
In those areas where recommended straight weight
oil is not available, a multi-viscosity 20W-40 (SF or
SG) or, as a second but less preferable choice,
20W-50 (SF or SG) may be used.
IMPORTANT: The use of non-detergent oils, multi-viscosity oils (other than 20W-40 or 20W-50),
low quality oils or oils which contain solid additives specifically are not recommended.
We have recommended pump posting of alcohol

content of gasoline. Further we recommend using
gasoline known not to contain any METHANOL or
ETHANOL when possible.
72010
Index
90-823224--2 796
MAINTENANCE - 1B-9
Power Steering Fluid

Use Quicksilver Power Trim and Steering Fluid, or
automatic transmission Fluid (ATF), Dexron, Dexron
II, Dexron IIl.
Transmission Fluid
Velvet Drive - 10 wt. tractor hydraulic fluid meeting
the C-3/TO-2 specification (preferably Mobil 424,
Chevron, or Citgo).
Hurth - Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) Dexron II
or Dexron IIl.
Coolant for Closed Cooling System

! CAUTION
Alcohol or Methanol base antifreeze or plain water, are not recommended for use in fresh water
section of cooling system at any time.
you are not getting a false reading, make sure the

following steps are done before checking the oil level.
Boat at rest in the water, or
If boat is on a trailer, raise or lower bow until the
boat is setting at the approximate angle that it
would be if setting at rest in the water.
Allow sufficient time for oil to drain into the crankcase if engine has just been run or oil has just
been added.
Checking Engine Oil Level/Filling

IMPORTANT: ENGINE CRANKCASE OIL MUST
BE CHECKED AT INTERVALS SPECIFIED IN
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE CHART. It is normal for an engine to use a certain amount of oil
in the process of lubrication and cooling of the
engine. The amount of oil consumption is greatly
dependent upon engine speed, with consumption being highest at wide-open-throttle and decreasing substantially as engine speed is reduced.
We recommend that the coolant section of closed

cooling system be filled with Quicksilver Pre-Mixed
Engine Coolant. In areas where the possibility of
freezing does not exist, it is permissible to use a solution of rust inhibitor and water (mixed to manufacturers recommendations).
1. Stop engine and allow boat to come to a rest.
MerCruiser V-8 engines can use any type of permanent antifreeze or any brand antifreeze solution that
meets GM specification 1825M.
4. Remove dipstick and note the oil level.
Maintaining Crankcase Oil

Level
2. Allow oil to drain back into oil pan - approximately

5 minutes.
3. Remove dipstick. Wipe clean and reinstall. Push
dipstick all the way into dipstick tube.
5. Oil level must be between the FULL and ADD
marks.
6. If oil level is below ADD mark, proceed to Steps
7 and 8.
7. Remove oil filler cap from valve rocker arm cover.
8. Add required amount of oil to bring level up to, but
not over, the FULL mark on dipstick.
Overfilled Engine Crankcase

Overfilled crankcases (oil level being too high ) can
cause a fluctuation or drop in oil pressure and rocker
arm clatter on MerCruiser engines. The over-full
condition results in the engine crankshaft splashing
and agitating the oil, causing it to foam (become aerated). The aerated oil causes the hydraulic valve lifters to bleed down. This, in turn, results in rocker
arm clatter and loss of engine performance, due to
the valves not opening properly.
Care must be taken when checking engine oil level.
Oil level must be maintained between the ADD mark
and the FULL mark on the dipstick. To ensure that
Changing Oil and Filter

1. Start engine and run until it reaches normal operating temperatures.
IMPORTANT: Change oil when engine is warm
from operation, as it flows more freely, carrying
away more impurities.
2. Stop engine.
3. Remove drain plug from oil pan or from oil drain
hose.
Index
1B-10 - MAINTENANCE
90-823224--2 796
NOTE: If drain plug is not accessible because of boat

construction, oil may be removed through dipstick
tube, using a Quicksilver Crankcase Oil Pump. (See
Quicksilver Accessory Guide.)
3. Level should be between the FULL HOT mark

and ADD mark on dipstick.
4. After oil has drained completely, reinstall drain

plug (if removed) and tighten securely.
5. Remove and discard oil filter and its sealing ring.
6. Coat sealing ring on new filter with engine oil, and
install. Tighten filter securely (following filter manufacturers instructions). Do not over-tighten.
7. Fill crankcase with oil.

8. Start engine and check for leaks.
72518
a - Proper Fluid Level with Engine Warm
Maintaining Power Steering

Pump Fluid Level
With Engine Warm
4. If level is below ADD mark, but fluid is still visible

in pump reservoir, add required amount of Quicksilver Power Trim and Steering Fluid or automatic
transmission fluid (ATF), Dexron, or Dexron II,
through fill cap opening, to bring level up to FULL
HOT mark on dipstick. DO NOT OVERFILL.
1. Stop engine and position drive unit so that it is

straight back.
5. If fluid is not visible in reservoir, a leak exists in the

power steering system. Find cause and correct.
2. Remove fill cap/dipstick from power steering

pump and note fluid level.
b
a
With Engine Cold

1. With engine stopped, position drive unit so that it
is straight back.
2. Remove fill cap/dipstick from power steering
pump and note fluid level.
3. Level should be between FULL COLD mark and
bottom of dipstick.
72517
a - Fill Cap / Dipstick

b - Power Steering Pump
72519
a - Proper Fluid Level with Engine Cold
Index
90-823224--2 796
MAINTENANCE - 1B-11
4. If level is below bottom of dipstick, but fluid is still

visible in pump reservoir, add required amount of
Quicksilver Power Trim and Steering Fluid or automatic transmission fluid (ATF), Dexron Dexron
II, or Dexron III, through fill cap opening, to bring
level up to FULL COLD mark on dipstick. DO
NOT OVERFILL.
2. Turn steering wheel back and forth to end of travel in each direction several times, then recheck
fluid level and add fluid, if necessary.
If fluid is not visible in reservoir, a leak exists in the

power steering system. Find cause and correct.
DO NOT operate engine without water being

supplied to seawater pickup pump, or pump impeller may be damaged and subsequent overheating damage to engine may result.
Filling and Bleeding Power

Steering System
IMPORTANT: Power steering system must be
filled exactly as explained in the following to be
sure that all air is bled from the system. All air
must be removed, or fluid in pump may foam during operation and be discharged from pump reservoir. Foamy fluid also may cause power steering system to become spongy, which may result
in poor boat control.
1. With engine stopped, position drive unit so that it
is straight back. Remove fill cap/dipstick from
power steering pump. Add Quicksilver Power
Trim and Steering Fluid or automatic transmission fluid (ATF), Dexron, Dexron II or Dexron III,
as required, to bring level up to FULL COLD mark
on dipstick.
IMPORTANT: Use only Quicksilver Power Trim
and Steering Fluid or automatic transmission
fluid (ATF), Dexron, Dexron II or Dexron IIl in power steering system.
3. Install vented fill cap.
! CAUTION
4. Start engine and run at fast idle (1000-1500

RPM) until engine reaches normal operating
temperature. During this time, turn steering
wheel back and forth to end of travel in each direction several times.
5. Position drive unit so that it is straight back and
stop engine. Remove fill cap from pump. Allow
any foam in pump reservoir to disperse, then
check fluid level and add fluid, as required, to
bring level up to FULL HOT mark on dipstick. DO
NOT OVERFILL. Reinstall fill cap securely.
IMPORTANT: Drive unit must be positioned
straight back and power steering fluid must be
hot to accurately check fluid level.
6. If fluid is still foamy (in Step 5), repeat Steps 4 and
5 until fluid does not foam and level remains constant.
Index
1B-12 - MAINTENANCE
90-823224--2 796
Maintaining Closed Cooling

Coolant Level
! WARNING
Allow engine to cool down before removing pressure cap. Sudden loss of pressure could cause
hot coolant to boil and discharge violently. After
engine has cooled, turn cap 1/4 turn to allow any
pressure to escape slowly, then push down and
turn cap all the way off.
Flushing Cooling System

If engine is operated in salty, polluted, or mineral-laden water, flush cooling system (preferably after each
use) to reduce corrosion and prevent the accumulation of deposits in the system. Thoroughly flush cooling system prior to storage.
MCM (Stern Drive)

BOAT OUT OF WATER
1. Coolant level in heat exchanger should be full (to

bottom of filler neck).
1. Install flushing attachment over water pickup

holes in gear housing as shown.
IMPORTANT: When reinstalling pressure cap, be

sure to tighten it until it contacts stop on filler
neck.
2. Attach a garden hose between the flushing attachment and a water tap.
2. Coolant level should be between the ADD and

FULL marks on coolant recovery reservoir with
the engine at normal operating temperature.
a
72693
a - Flushing Attachment
b - Hose
! WARNING
72520
a - Coolant Recovery Reservoir
When flushing, be certain the area around propeller is clear, and no one is standing nearby. To
avoid possible injury, remove propeller.
! CAUTION
Do not run engine above 1500 RPM when flushing. Suction created by seawater pickup pump
may collapse flushing hose, causing engine to
overheat.
Index
90-823224--2 796
MAINTENANCE - 1B-13
4. Lower drive unit to full IN position.
! CAUTION
Watch temperature gauge on dash to ensure that
engine does not overheat.
3. Partially open water tap (approximately 1/2 maximum capacity). DO NOT use full water pressure.
4. Place remote control in neutral, idle speed position, and start engine.
5. Operate engine at idle speed in neutral for 10
minutes, or until discharge water is clear, then
stop engine.
6. Shut off water tap. Remove garden hose and
flushing attachment.
! CAUTION
overheat.
! CAUTION
5. Partially open water tap (approximately 1/2 maximum capacity). DO NOT use full water pressure.
BOAT IN WATER
1. Raise drive unit to full UP position.
2. Install flushing attachment over water pickup
holes in gear housing as shown.
3. Attach a garden hose between the flushing attachment and a water tap.
6. Place remote control in neutral, idle speed position, and start engine.
minutes, then stop engine.
8. Shut off water tap.
9. Raise drive unit to full UP position.
10. Remove garden hose and flushing attachment.
72693
a - Flushing Attachment
b - Hose
Index
1B-14 - MAINTENANCE
90-823224--2 796
MIE (Inboard)
! CAUTION
! CAUTION
If boat is in the water, seacock, if so equipped,

must remain closed until engine is to be
re-started, to prevent water from flowing back
into cooling system and/or boat. If boat is not
fitted with a seacock, water inlet hose must be left
disconnected and plugged (to prevent water
from flowing back into cooling system and/or
boat). As a precautionary measure, attach a tag
to the ignition switch or steering wheel of the
boat with the warning: Open seacock or reconnect water inlet hose before starting engine.
IMPORTANT: If a seacock is to be installed for
this purpose, valve used must have an internal
cross-sectional area equal to or greater than water inlet hose to prevent restricting water flow
during normal operation. A 1-1/4 in. (32 mm), or
larger, brass ball valve or gate valve is recommended.
1. If boat is in water, close seacock, if so equipped,
or disconnect and plug seawater inlet hose to
prevent seawater from entering boat.
2. Remove inlet hose from seawater pickup pump.
3. Using an adaptor, connect a garden hose from a
water tap to seawater pump inlet.
4. Partially open water tap (approximately 1/3 maximum). Do not use full water pressure.

minutes, or until discharge water is clear. Stop
engine.
7. Shut off water tap. Remove garden hose and
adaptor from pump inlet and reconnect water inlet hose. Be sure to tighten hose clamp securely.
IMPORTANT: If boat is in the water, do not open
water inlet valve until engine is to be restarted to
prevent contaminated water from flowing back
into engine. If boat is not fitted with a valve, leave
water inlet hose disconnected and plugged.
Maintaining Transmission
Fluid Level
IMPORTANT: Be sure to push dipstick all the way
down into dipstick tube when checking fluid
level.
1. Remove dipstick to check transmission fluid level. Fluid level may be over the full mark because
fluid from the cooler and lines has drained back
into the transmission. If fluid level is low, add the
specified fluid through the dipstick hole until full
mark on dipstick is reached. DO NOT OVERFILL.
5. Place the remote control lever in neutral position

and start engine.
! WARNING
! CAUTION
overheat.
72527
Hurth
Index
90-823224--2 796
MAINTENANCE - 1B-15
Lubrication
Throttle Cable
MODELS WITH 4 BARREL CARBURETOR
72526
Velvet Drive
IMPORTANT: To accurately check fluid level, engine MUST BE run at 1500 RPM for 2 minutes immediately prior to checking level.
72014
2. Start engine and run at 1500 RPM for 2 minutes

to fill all circuits, lines, and cooler.
3. Stop engine and quickly check level before fluid
drains back into transmission. Add fluid if necessary.
4. If fluid level is extremely low, check transmission
case, cooler, and hoses for leaks.
a - Pivot Points
b - Guide Contact Surface
MODELS WITH THROTTLE BODY FUEL

INJECTION
IMPORTANT: Velvet Drive - transmission - use 10

wt. tractor hydraulic fluid meeting the C-3/TO-2
specification (preferably Mobil 423, Chevron, or
Citgo).
Hurth transmission - use Dexron II or Dexron III

automatic transmission fluid (ATF).
b
a
75038
a - Pivot Points
Index
1B-16 - MAINTENANCE
90-823224--2 796
MODELS WITH MULTI-PORT FUEL INJECTION
MIE MODEL TYPICAL SHIFT CABLE AND

TRANSMISSION LINKAGE
a
b
72791
a - Pivot Points
71208
Shift Cable
Hurth
a - Pivot Points
b
a
a
72016
MCM Models - Typical Shift Cable

a - Pivot Points
a
b
72528
Velvet Drive
a - Pivot Points
Index
90-823224--2 796
MAINTENANCE - 1B-17
Engine Coupler/U-Joint Shaft Splines

NOTE: Engine coupler and shaft splines are greased
with Quicksilver Engine Coupler Spline Grease,
92-816391A4; universal joints are greased with
Quicksilver 2-4-C Marine Lubricant.
Drive Shaft Extension Models
NOTE: Refer to MerCruiser Stern Drive Service

Manual for stern drive unit removal and installation,
if necessary.
a
IMPORTANT: Stern Drive Unit does not have to be

removed to grease coupler.
b
72018
Transom End
a - Lubrication Points
a
72529
MCM Models
a - Quicksilver Engine Coupler Spline Grease
b - Grease Fitting(s) Use Grease Fitting If Drive Is Installed
a
72028
Engine End
a
72531
Typical Bravo Drive

a - Quicksilver Engine Coupler Spline Grease
Index
1B-18 - MAINTENANCE
90-823224--2 796
Starter Motor
Cold Weather or Extended

Storage
MIE MODELS
! WARNING
Precautions
When performing the following procedure, be

sure to observe the following:
Be sure that engine compartment is well ventilated and that no gasoline vapors are present
to avoid the possibility of a fire.
Be sure to ground coil high-tension wire to
block. Failure to ground coil wire may cause
damage to ignition coil in addition to being a
safety hazard.
Stay clear of all moving parts.
1. Remove ignition coil high-tension wire from distributor cap tower and ground it to engine block
with jumper wire. While cranking engine with
starter motor, lubricate starter motor front bushing through oil cover with motor oil or its equivalent. Reinstall coil high-tension wire.
2. Remove plastic plug from flywheel housing. Lubricate starter motor shaft with motor oil through
hole in flywheel housing. Reinstall plastic plug.
! WARNING
BE CAREFUL while working on fuel system; gasoline is extremely flammable and highly explosive under certain conditions. Be sure that ignition key is OFF and do not smoke or allow
sources of spark and/or open flames in the area.
! WARNING
To prevent a potential fire hazard, be sure that engine compartment is well ventilated and that
there are no gasoline vapors present during
starting or fogging of engine.
! CAUTION
DO NOT operate engine without cooling water
being supplied to seawater pickup pump or water
pump impeller will be damaged and subsequent
overheating damage to engine may result.
! CAUTION
Seawater (Raw-water) section of cooling system
MUST BE COMPLETELY drained for winter storage, or immediately after cold weather use, if the
possibility of freezing temperatures exists. Failure to comply may result in trapped water causing freeze and/or corrosion damage to engine.
! CAUTION
72019
If boat is in the water, seacock (water inlet valve),

if so equipped, must be left closed until engine is
to be re-started, to prevent water from flowing
back into cooling system and/or boat. If boat is
not fitted with a seacock, water inlet hose must
be left disconnected and plugged (to prevent water from flowing back into cooling system and/or
boat). As a precautionary measure, attach a tag
to the ignition switch or steering wheel of the
boat with the warning: Open seacock or reconnect water inlet hose before starting engine.
Index
90-823224--2 796
MAINTENANCE - 1B-19
IMPORTANT: Observe the following information

to ensure complete draining of cooling system.
Engine must be as level as possible.
A wire should be repeatedly inserted into all
drain holes to ensure there are no obstructions in passages. Remove petcock, if necessary, to insert wire completely into drain hole.
IMPORTANT: To prevent threads in manifolds, elbows and cylinder blocks from rusting out during storage, reinstall plugs using Quicksilver
Perfect Seal on threads. Never leave drain plugs
out during storage.
! CAUTION
Stern drive unit should be stored in full down
position. Universal Joint bellows may develop a
set if unit is stored in raised position and may
fail when unit is returned to service.
NOTE: If possible, place a container under drains

and hoses to prevent water from draining into boat.
! CAUTION
If engine is equipped with Closed Cooling System, Closed Cooling section must be kept filled
with a solution of ethylene glycol antifreeze and
water (mix antifreeze to manufacturers recommended proportions to protect engine to lowest
temperature to which it will be exposed). DO NOT
USE PROPYLENE GLYCOL antifreeze in closed
cooling section. Seawater section, however,
must be drained completely.
! CAUTION
A discharged battery can be damaged by freezing.
Layup
NOTICE
Refer to Cold Weather or Extended Storage,
Precautions, in this section, BEFORE proceeding.
1. Fill fuel tank(s) with fresh gasoline that does not

contain alcohol and a sufficient amount of Quicksilver Gasoline Stabilizer and Conditioner to treat
the gasoline.
IMPORTANT: If boat is to be placed in storage
(with fuel containing alcohol in fuel tanks), carburetors or vapor separator tanks must be run
dry at idle RPM. Fuel tanks should be drained
completely and Quicksilver Gasoline Stabilizer
and Conditioner added to any fuel remaining in
the tank. Also, refer to Fuel Specifications, see
Table of Contents.
2. Replace all fuel filters
3. Start engine and check for fuel leaks.
4. Run engine sufficiently to heat it to normal operating temperature; shut off engine and change oil
and filter.
5. If boat has been operated in salty, polluted or mineral-laden waters, flush cooling system.
6. Prepare fuel system for extended storage as follows:
a. For engines with carburetors:
Remove flame arrestor assembly and restart
engine. While operating engine at fast idle
(1000-1500 RPM), fog internal surfaces of induction system and combustion chambers by
squirting approximately 8 ounces (227
grams) of Quicksilver Storage Seal or SAE
20W engine oil into carburetor bores. Stall
engine by squirting last 2 ounces (57 grams)
of Storage Seal or oil rapidly into carburetor.
Turn ignition to OFF.
b. For fuel injected engines with VST:
! WARNING
Fuel injection system is pressurized. A special
procedure must be used to remove this pressure
before removing the plug from vapor separator
tank. DO NOT attempt to remove plug without
having pressure removed. Fuel could spray on
hot engine causing fire or explosion.
Index
1B-20 - MAINTENANCE
90-823224--2 796
(1) Relieve fuel pressure from system. Refer

to Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure in
Section 5C.
(2) Remove plug from top of vapor separator
tank.
(3) Add approximately 1 fluid ounce (30 ml)
of Quicksilver 2-Cycle Outboard Oil to
fuel in the vapor separator tank.
(4) Shut off the fuel supply to the engines
fuel pump.
(5) Start engine and run at idle speed until the
vapor separator tank and fuel injection
system is empty.
(6) Reinstall the plug in top of vapor separator tank.
c. For fuel injected engines with Cool Fuel
system:
(4) Allow engine to cool down.

(5) Remove the water separating fuel filter.
(6) Pour out a small amount of fuel into a suitable container, then add approximately 2
fluid ounces (60 ml) of Quicksilver
2-Cycle Outboard Oil to fuel in the water
separating fuel filter.
(7) Install water separating fuel filter.
(8) Shut off the fuel supply to the engine.
(9) Start and run engine at idle speed for two
minutes.
(10) Stop engine, remove and discard new
water separating fuel filter and in line fuel
filter.
(11) Install new filters.
(12) Close fuel shut-off valve, if so equipped.
(1) Fill fuel tank(s) with fresh gasoline (that

does not contain alcohol) and a sufficient
amount of Quicksilver Gasoline Stabilizer
for Marine Engines to treat gasoline. Follow instructions on container.
7. Close fuel shutoff valve, if so equipped.
(2) If boat is to be placed in storage with

fuel containing alcohol in fuel tanks (if
fuel without alcohol is not available):
Fuel tanks should be drained completely
and Quicksilver Gasoline Stabilizer for
Marine Engines added to any fuel remaining in the tank. Refer to FUEL REQUIREMENTS for additional information.
10. Drain seawater section of cooling system, as outlined in Draining Instructions following.
(3) Prepare fuel system for extended storage

as follows:
8. Clean flame arrestor and crankcase ventilation

hoses and reinstall.
9. Lubricate all items outlined in Lubrication.
11. Closed Cooling System Models: Test coolant

to ensure that it will withstand lowest temperature
expected during storage.
12. Service batteries.
13. Clean outside of engine and repaint any areas required with Quicksilver Primer and Spray Paint.
After paint has dried, spray Quicksilver Corrosion
and Rust Preventive Type II or wipe down with
Quicksilver Storage Seal or SAE 20W engine oil.
14. For drive unit, refer to appropriate stern drive
manual.
Index
90-823224--2 796
MAINTENANCE - 1B-21
Draining Instructions
4. Remove hose or drain plug from bottom of port

and starboard exhaust manifolds.
DRAINING SEAWATER (RAW-WATER) COOLED

MODELS
NOTE: With the engine level, sufficient draining of

manifolds will occur when the hose or drain plug is removed from the elbow in the exhaust manifold.
NOTICE
Refer to Cold Weather or Extended
Storage, Precautions, in this section,
BEFORE proceeding.
MCM (Stern Drive) Models:
1. Engine must be as level as possible to ensure
complete draining of cooling system.
2. Remove drain plugs (port and starboard) from
cylinder block.
a
Engine with Drain Plug In Exhaust Manifold
a - Bottom Hose, Exhaust Manifold To Thermostat Housing
74130
Starboard Side Shown (Port Similar)

a - Drain Plug
74130
3. Repeatedly clean out drain holes using a stiff

piece of wire. Do this until entire system is
drained.
NOTE: It may be necessary to lift, bend, or lower

hoses to allow water to drain completely when hoses
are disconnected.

a - Drain Plug
Index
1B-22 - MAINTENANCE
90-823224--2 796
5. Remove the engine water circulating pump hose

as shown.
7. On Cool Fuel Models or Carbureted models

wit port side water tube: Remove the drain
screw from the fuel cooler.
a
72587
a - Hose, Water Circulating Pump To Thermostat Housing
6. On 7.4L and 454 Magnum Engines: Remove

the oil/power steering fluid cooler seawater hose,
as shown.
75018
b
a - Cool Fuel Model
b - Carbureted Model
a
72925
a - Hose, Seawater Pump To Cooler
Index
90-823224--2 796
MAINTENANCE - 1B-23
8. On 502 Engines: Remove the oil/power steering

fluid cooler seawater hoses, as shown.
a. Remove seawater pump inlet hose as shown.
b
a
72926
70346
Engines With Combination Seawater / Mechanical Fuel Pump

a - Seawater Pickup Pump
b - Inlet Hose
b
a
72352
Engines WIth Cool Fuel System

b
a - Seawater Inlet Hose

b - Hose To Cooler
70585
a - Hose, Oil / Power Steering Cooler To Heat Exchanger
Index
1B-24 - MAINTENANCE
90-823224--2 796
9. Insert a small wire (repeatedly) to make sure that

speedometer pitot tube, trim tab cavity vent hole,
and trim tab cavity drain passage are unobstructed and drained.
IMPORTANT: MerCruiser recommends that propylene glycol antifreeze (nontoxic and biodegradable, which makes it friendly to lakes and rivers) be used in sea-water section of the cooling
system for cold weather or extended storage.
Make sure that the propylene glycol antifreeze
contains a rust inhibitor and is recommended for
use in marine engines. Be certain to follow the
propylene glycol manufacturers recommendations.
10. For additional assurance against freezing and
rust, remove the thermostat cover and thermostat. Fill the engine seawater cooling system with
a mixture of antifreeze and tap water mixed to
manufacturers recommendation to protect engine to the lowest temperature to which it will be
exposed during cold weather or extended storage. Using a new gasket, reinstall thermostat and
cover. Tighten cover bolts to 30 lb. ft. (41 Nm).
NOTE: Hoses shown removed only to indicate flow.

Do not remove hoses.
71217
a
Typical Bravo Drive Unit
a - Speedometer Pitot Tube

b - Trim Tab Cavity Vent Hole
c - Trim Tab Cavity Drain Passage
c
f
a. Crank engine over slightly with starter motor

to purge any water trapped in seawater pickup pump. DO NOT ALLOW ENGINE TO
START.
d
e
g
b. After cooling system has been drained completely, coat threads of drain plugs with
Quicksilver Perfect Seal. Install all drain
plugs and tighten securely. Reconnect all
hoses and tighten all hose clamps securely.
72589
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
Cover
Gasket
Spacer
Thermostat
O-Ring
Housing
Fill Here
Index
90-823224--2 796
MAINTENANCE - 1B-25
MIE (Inboard) Models:

NOTICE
BEFORE proceeding.
NOTE: Some engines may be equipped with drain

plugs in the elbows on exhaust manifolds. Remove
drain plugs only.

cylinder block.
a
72609
Engine With Drain Plugs In Exhaust Manifolds

a
74130

a - Drain Plug

drained.
a

are disconnected.
4. Remove hose or drain cock from bottom of port
and starboard exhaust manifolds.
74130
Starboard Shown (Port Similar)

a - Drain Plug

manifolds will occur when exhaust manifold-to-thermostat housing hoses or drain cocks are removed.
Index
1B-26 - MAINTENANCE
90-823224--2 796

as shown.
b
a
a
72352

b - Hose To Cooler
7. Remove the transmission fluid cooler hose as

shown.
72587
6. Remove hose from the seawater pump, as

shown.
a
72721
b
a
70346

a - Seawater Pickup Pump
b - Hose, Seawater Inlet
a
71782
Typical Transmission Fluid Cooler Locations

a - Hose
Index
90-823224--2 796
MAINTENANCE - 1B-27
8. Crank engine over slightly with starter motor to

purge any water trapped in seawater pickup
pump. DO NOT ALLOW ENGINE TO START.
9. After cooling system has been drained completely, coat threads of drain plugs with Quicksilver
Perfect Seal. Install all drain plugs and tighten securely. Reconnect all hoses and tighten all hose
clamps securely.
IMPORTANT: MerCruiser recommends that propylene glycol antifreeze (nontoxic and biodegradable, which makes it friendly to lakes and rivers) be used in sea-water section of the cooling
system for cold weather or extended storage.
Make sure that the propylene glycol antifreeze
contains a rust inhibitor and is recommended for
use in marine engines. Be certain to follow the
propylene glycol manufacturers recommendations.
10. For additional assurance against freezing and

rust, remove the thermostat cover and thermostat. Fill the engine seawater cooling system with
a mixture of antifreeze and tap water mixed to
manufacturers recommendation to protect engine to the lowest temperature to which it will be
exposed during cold weather or extended storage. Using a new gasket, reinstall thermostat and
cover. Tighten cover bolts to 30 lb. ft. (41 Nm).
NOTE: Hoses shown removed only to indicate flow.

Do not remove hoses.
a
b
c
d
e
g
72589
e
d
c
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
Cover
Gasket
Spacer
Thermostat
O-Ring
Housing
Fill Here
Index
1B-28 - MAINTENANCE
90-823224--2 796
DRAINING SEAWATER SECTION OF CLOSED

COOLING (COOLANT) MODELS
4. Remove hose from engine oil/power steering

fluid cooler as shown.
MCM (Stern Drive) Models:

NOTICE
BEFORE proceeding.
2. Remove drain plug from heat exchanger.
a
70584
7.4L/454 Magnum Engine

a - Hose, Oil Cooler To Heat Exchanger
70583
a - Heat Exchanger
b - Drain Plug

drained.

are disconnected.
70585
502 Magnum Engine

Index
90-823224--2 796
MAINTENANCE - 1B-29
5. Remove seawater pump inlet hose as shown.
6. Follow instructions a or b:
a. On Engines Without Risers: Disconnect
T-fitting-to-heat exchanger hose from heat
exchanger.
a
b
71170

b - Hose To Cooler
70586
Typical Engine Without Risers Shown

a - Hose, Heat Exchanger To T-Fitting
b
a
72352
Engines With Cool Fuel System

b - Hose To Cooler
b. On Engines With 3 in. (76 mm) or 6 in. (152

mm) Risers And Hoses Routed to Riser
Fitting Pointed Toward Flywheel End: Remove heat exchanger-to-riser hose from port
and starboard riser and remove heat exchanger-to-T fitting hose from heat exchanger.
c
b
70588
a
Typical Engine With Risers Shown
a - Hose, Heat Exchanger To Port Riser
b - Hose, Heat Exchanger To Starboard Riser
c - Hose, Heat Exchanger To T-Fitting
Index
1B-30 - MAINTENANCE
90-823224--2 796
7. On Bravo Drive Equipped Models: Insert a

small wire (repeatedly) to make sure that speedometer pitot tube, trim tab cavity vent hole, and
trim tab cavity drain passage are unobstructed
and drained.
MIE (Inboard) Models

NOTICE
BEFORE proceeding.

are disconnected.
2. On Engines Without Risers: Disconnect port

and starboard heat exchanger-to-exhaust elbow
hoses and lower to drain.
71217
Typical Bravo Drive Unit

8. Crank engine over slightly with starter motor to

purge any water trapped in seawater pickup
9. After seawater section of cooling system has
been drained completely, coat threads of drain
plugs with Quicksilver Perfect Seal. Install all
drain plugs and tighten securely. Reconnect all
71504
Typical Engine Without Risers

a - Hose, To Starboard Exhaust Elbow
b - Hose, To Port Exhaust Elbow
Index
90-823224--2 796
MAINTENANCE - 1B-31
3. On Engines with 3 in. (76 mm) or 6 in. (152

mm) Risers: Remove heat exchanger-to-riser
hose from port and starboard riser.
NOTE: Engine oil cooler is mounted beneath rear

mounted heat exchanger tank.
71447
a
71507
Typical Engine With 3 in. (76mm) Riser [Starboard Similar; 6 in. (152mm) Risers Similar]
a - Hose, Heat Exchanger To Riser Fitting
7.4L Engine With Rear Mounted Heat Exchanger

(Hurth Transmission)
4. Disconnect and lower oil cooler-to-heat exchanger hose from oil cooler, as appropriate on your engine.
a
71517
71782

(Velvet Drive In-Line and V-Drive Transmissions)
7.4L / 8.2L Engine With Front Mounted Heat Exchanger

Index
1B-32 - MAINTENANCE
90-823224--2 796
5. Remove the transmission fluid cooler hose, as

appropriate on your engine, to drain hose and
cooler.
71170
b
Engines Combination Seawater Pump / Mechanical Fuel Pump

b - Hose To Cooler
71782

(Velvet Drive In-Line and V-Drive Transmissions)
a - Hose, Transmission Cooler To Oil Cooler
b
a
72352
Engines With Cool Fuel System

b - Hose To Cooler
7. Crank engine over SLIGHTLY, with starter motor,

to purge any water trapped in seawater pickup
8. After seawater section of cooling system has
been drained completely, coat threads of drain
plugs with Quicksilver Perfect Seal. Install all
drain plugs and tighten securely. Reconnect all
a
72721
Typical Hurth Transmission

a - Hose, Transmission Fluid Cooler
Index
90-823224--2 796
MAINTENANCE - 1B-33
Recommissioning
NOTICE
BEFORE proceeding.
1. Check that all cooling system hoses are connected and tight and all petcocks and drain plugs
are installed and tight.
2. Inspect all drive belts.
3. Perform all lubrication and maintenance specified for completion At Least Once Yearly in
maintenance chart, except items which were performed at time of engine layup.
4. For drive unit, refer to appropriate stern drive
manual.
! CAUTION
When installing battery (in next step), be sure to
connect positive battery cable to positive (+) terminal and negative (grounded) battery cable to
negative () battery terminal. If battery cables are
reversed, damage to electrical system WILL result.
5. Install fully charged battery. Clean battery cable
clamps and terminals to help retard corrosion.
6. Start engine and closely observe instrumentation
to ensure that all systems are functioning properly.
7. Carefully inspect entire engine for fuel, oil, water
and exhaust leaks.
8. Check fuel pump sight tube.
9. Check steering system and shift and throttle controls for proper operation.
Index
1B-34 - MAINTENANCE
90-823224--2 796

AT A LATER DATE
Index
90-823224--2 796
MAINTENANCE - 1B-35

AT A LATER DATE
Index
1B-36 - MAINTENANCE
90-823224--2 796
TROUBLESHOOTING
Index
1
C
Table of Contents
Page
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-1
Used Spark Plug Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-2
Spark Plug Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-2
Normal Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-2
Chipped Insulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-2
Wet Fouling (Oil Deposits) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-2
Cold Fouling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-3
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-3
High Speed Glazing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-3
Scavenger Deposits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-3
Pre-Ignition Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-4
Reversed Coil Polarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-4
Splashed Deposits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-4
Mechanical Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-4
Poor Boat Performance and/or Poor
Maneuverability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-5
Improper Full Throttle Engine RPM . . . . . . . . . 1C-6
RPM Too High . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-6
RPM Too Low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-6
Engine Cranks Over but Will Not Start
or Starts Hard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-7
Important Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-7
Testing Thunderbolt IV HEI System . . . . . . 1C-8
Testing Thunderbolt V Ignition System . . . . 1C-9
Fuel System Rich . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-10
Fuel System Lean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-10
Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-10
Engine Will Not Crank Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-11
Charging System Inoperative . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-11
Noisy Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-11
Instrumentation Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-12
Page
Radio Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-12
Poor Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-13
Carburetor Malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-14
Engine Runs Poorly at Idle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-15
Engine Runs Poorly At High RPM . . . . . . . . . 1C-16
Engine Acceleration Is Poor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-17
Troubleshooting with Vacuum Gauge . . . . . . 1C-17
Engine Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-18
Important Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-18
Valve Cover Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-18
Cylinder Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-19
Camshaft Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-19
Crankshaft Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-20
Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-21
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-22
Low Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-23
High Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-23
Excessive Oil Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-24
Water In Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-25
Important Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-25
Water on Top of Pistons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-25
Water in Crankcase Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-26
Engine Overheats (Mechanical) . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-26
Engine Overheats (Cooling System) . . . . . . . 1C-27
Insufficient Water Flow from Belt Driven
Seawater Pickup Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-28
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-29
Poor, Erratic, or No Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-29
Noisy Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-30
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-30
Troubleshooting Silent Choice Exhaust
Silencer System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-31
Index
1C-0 - TROUBLESHOOTING
90-823224--2 796
Precautions
! WARNING
Always disconnect battery cables from battery
BEFORE working on fuel system to prevent fire
or explosion.
! WARNING
Be careful when cleaning flame arrestor and
crankcase ventilation hose; gasoline is extremely flammable and highly explosive under certain
conditions. Be sure that ignition key is OFF. DO
NOT smoke or allow sources of spark or open
flame in area when cleaning flame arrestor and
crankcase ventilation hose.
! WARNING
Be careful when changing fuel system components; gasoline is extremely flammable and
highly explosive under certain conditions. Be
sure that ignition key is OFF. DO NOT smoke or
allow sources of spark or flame in the area while
changing fuel filter. Wipe up any spilled fuel immediately.
! WARNING
Avoid gasoline fire or explosion. Improper installation of brass fittings or plugs into fuel
pump or fuel filter base can crack casting and/or
cause a fuel leak. Follow specific procedure, given in Section 4 of this manual, for all fuel line
connections.
! WARNING
fuel leak.
Apply #592 Loctite Pipe Sealant with Teflon to

threads of brass fitting or plug. DO NOT USE
TEFLON TAPE.
Thread brass fitting or plug into fuel pump or

fuel filter base until finger tight.
Tighten fitting or plug an additional 1-3/4 to

2-1/4 turns using a wrench. DO NOT
OVER-TIGHTEN.
Install fuel line. To prevent over-tightening,

hold brass fitting with suitable wrench and
tighten fuel line connectors securely.
Check for fuel leaks.
! WARNING
Make sure no fuel leaks exist before closing engine hatch.
! CAUTION
being supplied to water pickup holes in gear
housing, or water pump impeller will be damaged
and subsequent overheating damage may result.
! CAUTION
supplied to seawater pickup pump on engine, or
pump impeller may be damaged and subsequent
overheating damage to engine may result. Engine may be operated with boat out of water, if instructions under Running Engine with Boat Out
of Water, following, are completed.
! WARNING
When running engine with boat out of water, be
certain that area in vicinity of propeller is clear
and that no person is standing nearby. As a precautionary measure, it is recommended that the
propeller be removed.
! CAUTION
DO NOT run engine above 1500 RPM, as suction
created by seawater pickup pump may collapse
water supply hose and cause engine to overheat.
! WARNING
Be sure that engine compartment is well ventilated and that no gasoline vapors are present to
prevent the possibility of a FIRE or EXPLOSION.
! WARNING
DO NOT leave helm unattended while performing
idle speed adjustment.
Index
90-823224--2 796
TROUBLESHOOTING - 1C-1
Used Spark Plug Analysis
Chipped Insulator
Use the following illustrations for determining serviceability of spark plug. Spark plug condition also
can suggest a variety of possible engine malfunctions and, therefore, can indicate needed engine repairs. When old plugs are replaced, replace entire
set. Perform plug service only on those plugs suitable
for additional service, using the following procedures:
Chipped insulator usually results from careless plug

regapping. Under certain conditions, severe detonation also can split insulator firing ends. Plug must be
replaced.
1. Remove any oil deposits with solvent and dry

plugs thoroughly.
2. Open electrode gap wide enough to permit cleaning and filing.
3. Remove combustion deposits from firing end of
spark plug with a plug cleaner. Blow off with compressed air to remove abrasives.
72420
4. File electrode surfaces to restore clean, sharp

edges. Again remove filings with compressed air.
5. Reset gap to specifications by bending only side
electrode with proper tool.
Wet Fouling (Oil Deposits)

Plug becomes shorted by excessive oil entering
combustion chamber, usually in engine with many
hours of operation. Worn piston rings, cylinder walls,
valve guides or valve stem seals are causes of oil entering combustion chamber. Only engine repairs will
permanently relieve oil wet fouling.
Spark Plug Analysis

Normal Condition
Few deposits are present and probably will be light
tan or gray in color. This plug shows that plug heat
range is compatible with engine, and engine is electrically and mechanically in good running condition.
With proper plug servicing (clean, file and regap), this
plug can be reinstalled with good results.
IMPORTANT: New engines or recently overhauled engines may wet foul plugs before normal
oil control is achieved with proper break-in procedures. Such fouled plugs may be serviced
(clean, file and regap) and reinstalled.
72420
72420
Index
90-823224--2 796
Cold Fouling
High Speed Glazing
Dry, black deposits indicate rich fuel mixture or weak

ignition. Clogged flame arrestor, flooding carburetor,
sticky choke or weak ignition components all are
probable causes. If, however, only one or two plugs
in set are fouled, check for sticking valves or bad ignition leads. After correcting cause, service (clean, file
and regap) plugs and reinstall.
Insulator has yellowish, varnish-like color, indicating

that temperatures suddenly have risen, usually during hard, fast acceleration under heavy load. Normal
deposits do not get a chance to blow off. Instead, they
melt and form a conductive coating. Replace plugs.
If condition recurs, use colder heat range plug and
service plugs more frequently.
72421
72421
Overheating
Scavenger Deposits
Insulator is dull white or gray and appears blistered.

Electrodes are eroded and there is an absence of deposits. Check that correct plug heat range is being
used. Also check for over-advanced ignition timing,
cooling system malfunction, lean fuel/air mixtures,
leaking intake manifold or sticking valves. Replace
spark plugs.
Powdery white or yellow deposits are built up on

shell, insulator and electrodes. This is normal appearance with certain branded fuels. Accumulation
on ground electrodes and shell areas may be unusually heavy, but may be easily chipped off. Plugs can
be serviced (clean, file and regap) and reinstalled.
72422
72421
Index
90-823224--2 796
Pre-Ignition Damage
Splashed Deposits
Pre-ignition damage is caused by excessive high

temperatures. Center electrode melts first, followed
by ground electrode. Normally, insulators are white
but may be dirty if plug has been misfiring. Check for
correct plug heat range, advanced ignition timing,
lean fuel mixture, incorrect fuel used, malfunctioning
cooling system, leaking intake manifold or lack of lubrication.
Spotted deposits, which sometimes occur after long

delayed tune-up, accumulate after a long period of
misfiring. When normal combustion temperatures
are restored, upon installation of new plugs, deposits
loosen from top of piston and head and are thrown
against hot insulator. Clean and service plugs and reinstall.
72423
72422
Mechanical Damage
Reversed Coil Polarity

Concave erosion of ground electrode is an indication
of reversed polarity. Center electrode will show only
normal wear. Engine will misfire and idle rough. To
correct, reverse primary coil leads. Replace spark
plugs.
72422
Mechanical damage to spark plug firing end is

caused by foreign object in combustion chamber. Because of valve overlap, small objects can travel from
one cylinder to another. Check all cylinders, intake
manifold and exhaust material to prevent further
damage.
72423
IMPORTANT: When working on engine, spark

plug holes and carburetor throat should be kept
covered to prevent foreign objects from entering
combustion chamber.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Poor Boat Performance and/or Poor Maneuverability

Symptom
Cause
A. Improper drive unit trim angle
B. Improper weight distribution
C. Boat is underpowered
B
Bow
too low
l
D. Permanent or power hook in boat bottom

E. False bottom full of water
F. Improperly adjusted trim tabs (after planes)
G. Dirty boat bottom (marine growth)
A. Improper drive unit trim angle
B. Propeller pitch too great
C. Dirty boat bottom (marine growth)
B
Bow
too high
hi h
D. Poor running engine

E. Improper weight distribution
F. Rocker in boat bottom
G. False bottom full of water
H. Improperly adjusted trim tabs (after planes)
A. Drive unit installed too high on transom
B. Dirty or rough boat bottom
C. Damaged propeller; pitch too small; diameter
too small
P
Propeller
ll ventilating
il i
D. Keel located too close to propeller or too deep

in the water
E. Water pickup or thru hull fittings located too
close to propeller
F. Hook in boat bottom
G. Propeller plugged up with weeds
Index
90-823224--2 796
Improper Full Throttle Engine RPM

RPM Too High
Cause
Special Information
Propeller
Damaged; pitch too low; diameter too small;

propeller hub slipping.
Boat
Water pickup or thru hull fittings mounted too

close to propeller (ventilation); keel located too
close to propeller and/or too deep in the water
(ventilation). Drive installed too high on
transom; wrong gear ratio.
Operation
Engine coupler slipping
Unit trimmed out too far.

far
RPM Too Low

Cause
Special Information
Propeller
Damaged; pitch too great; diameter too great.
Boat
Dirty or damaged bottom; permanent or power

hook in bottom; false bottom full of water. Drive
installed too low on transom; wrong gear ratio.
Operation
Unit trimmed in too far.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Engine Cranks Over but Will

Not Start or Starts Hard
Important Information
1. First, determine which engine system is causing
the problem. To make an engine run, basic components - fuel, spark (ignition), and compression
- are required. If all three components are present, the engine should run. If any one of the three
are missing, weak, or arriving at the wrong time
the engine will not run.
2. Determine if there is fuel present by looking down

the carburetor venturi while actuating throttle.
There should be a stream of fuel coming out of
the accelerator pump nozzles if the carburetor
has fuel.
3. Check ignition system operation. Remove coil
wire from tower on distributor cap. Hold coil wire
near ground and check for spark while cranking
engine over. Repeat procedure with spark plug
wires. If there is spark at the spark plug wires, remove the spark plugs and make sure they are
correct type and heat range, and not fouled or
burned.
4. Run a compression check on engine to make
sure the engine is mechanically OK.
Thunderbolt IV (HEI) Ignition (No Spark)

Cause
Moisture on ignition components
Special Information
Distributor cap or spark plug wires arcing
Battery, electrical connections, damaged wiring

Ignition switch
Shift interrupter switch (Alpha One Models Only)
Shorted tachometer
Disconnect tachometer and try again
Ignition timing
Spark plugs
Fouled, burned, cracked porcelain
Spark plug wires
Faulty insulation, broken wires
Cracked or dirty distributor cap

Faulty ignition components
Check components
Engine synchronizer (if equipped) hooked up

series on purple ignition wire (dual engines only)
Synchronizers must be hooked up directly coil

terminal (parallel chute)
Index
90-823224--2 796
Testing Thunderbolt IV HEI System

! WARNING
Be sure that engine compartment is well ventilated and that there are no gasoline vapors present during the following test to prevent a potential fire hazard.
IMPORTANT: Use a voltmeter when making these tests. DO NOT use a test light.
Check all Terminal Connections

at Distributor, Ignition Module
and Ignition Coil
Replace
Ignition
Module
Battery OK?
Distributor Clamping Screw
Tight?
0 Volts
No Spark
Replace Ignition
Module Harness
With Key in RUN Position,

Check for 12 Volts at Positive
(+) Terminal on Ignition Coil
0
Volts
Check Engine
and Instrument
Wiring Harness,
Battery Cables,
Key Switch
Spark
at Coil
Replace Ignition
Sensor in
Distributor
Spark
at Coil
Install New
Ignition Coil
0 Volts
12 Volts
Unplug WHT/
RED bullet connector from Dist.
Term., then
Check for Voltage
on This Lead
Voltage
Replace Ignition
Sensor in
Distributor
0
Volts
Check for 1-12 Volts at WHT/

RED Terminal on Distributor
1 to 12 Volts
Remove High-Tension Lead
from Distributor to Coil. Insert
a Spark Gap Tester from Coil
Tower to Ground. Remove
WHT/GRN Lead from Distributor Terminal - Ignition Key in
RUN Position. Strike the Terminal on the WHT/GRN Lead
against Ground
No Spark at Coil
Substitute a New Ignition Coil.
Repeat Above Test
No Spark at Coil
Replace Ignition Module
Note 1 : Early , large ignition modules did not have a replaceable wiring harness.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Testing Thunderbolt V Ignition System
Check to ensure that tachometer

GRY lead is not shorted to
ground () at the tachometer or
within the harness.
No Spark
and Ignition Coil.
Battery OK?
Tight?
No Spark
12 Volts
0
Volts
0
Volts
Check Engine
and Instrument
Wiring Harness,
Battery Cables,
Key Switch
Unplug WHT/
RED bullet connector
from Distributor.
Check for 12 volts
on lead coming
from module.
12 Volts
Reconnect WHT/RED
bullet connectors.
Tower to Ground. Disconnect
WHT/GRN Lead from Distributor. Place Ignition Key in RUN
Position. Rapidly strike the Terminal of the WHT/GRN Lead
that comes from module,
against Ground ().
(See IMPORTANT below)
Spark
at Coil
Replace Ignition
Sensor in
Distributor
No Spark at Coil
Substitute a New Ignition
Coil. Repeat Above Test
Spark
at Coil
Install New
Ignition Coil
No Spark at Coil
IMPORTANT: The WHT/GRN lead must be touched against ground () 2-3 times per second
to simulate a running engine. Repeat this test several times to ensure that spark is present.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Fuel System Rich

Cause
Warm engine carburetor percolation
Special Information
Fuel boils out of float bowl when shut off and
warm. Floods intake manifold.
Clogged flame arrestor

Automatic choke not opening
Float adjustment
Float leaks or is saturated with fuel
Needle and seat leaking
Carburetor gaskets leaking
Excessive fuel pump pressure
Cracked or porous carburetor body
Unseats needle and seat
Fuel System Lean

Cause
Special Information
Empty fuel tank

Fuel shut-off valve closed (if equipped)
Vapor lock
Engine will not start after warm engine shut

down
Automatic choke
Stuck open, wrong adjustment
Miscellaneous
Cause
Special Information
1. Low grade or stale fuel

2. Water in fuel
Index
90-823224--2 796
Engine Will Not Crank Over

Cause
Special Information
Remote control lever not in neutral position

Battery charge low; damaged wiring; loose electrical connections
Circuit breaker tripped
Blown fuse
Ignition switch
Slave solenoid
Faulty neutral start safety switch
Open circuit
Starter solenoid
Starter motor
Mechanical engine malfunction
Charging System Inoperative

Cause
Special Information
Loose or broken drive belt

Engine RPM too low on initial start
Rev engine to 1500 RPM
Loose or corroded electrical connections

Faulty battery gauge
Best way to test is to replace gauge
Battery will not accept charge
Low electrolyte or failed battery
Faulty alternator or regulator

Refer to Section 4C for complete
Charging System diagnosis procedures
Noisy Alternator
Cause
Special Information
Loose mounting bolts

Drive belt
Worn, frayed, loose
Loose drive pulley

Worn or dirty bearings
Faulty diode trio or stator
Index
90-823224--2 796
Instrumentation Malfunction
Cause
Special Information
Faulty wiring, loose or corroded terminals

Faulty key switch
Test, as outlined in Section 4D
Faulty gauge
Test, as outlined in Section 4D
Faulty sender
Test , as outlined in Section 4D
Radio Noise
Cause
Special Information
A popping noise that will increase with engine

RPM. Noise will stop as soon as engine is
turned off.
Ignition System - wrong spark plugs; cracked

distributor cap; cracked coil tower; leaking sparkplug wires; moisture on ignition components
High pitched whine in the radio
Alternator - poor brush contact on the slip rings
A hissing or crackling noise when instruments

are jarred with ignition on
Instrumentation - loose connections, or

antennae wire routed too close to instruments
Varying unexplained noises
Accessories - bilge pump, bilge blower; fish finder, depth locator; cabin heater motor, etc. Disconnect one at a time until noise disappears.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Poor Fuel Economy

Cause
Special Information
Fuel leaks
Operator habits
Prolonged idling; slow acceleration; failure to cut

back on throttle once boat is on plane; boat
overloaded; uneven weight distribution
Engine laboring
Bent, damaged, or wrong propeller. Water test

boat for proper operating RPM at wide-openthrottle
Clogged flame arrestor

Engine compartment sealed too tight
Not enough air for engine to run properly
Boat bottom
Dirty (marine growth), hook, rocker
Carburetor
Idle mixture settings, accelerator pump adjustments,linkage binding, choke adjustment, carburetor flooding over, main fuel jets
Improper fuel
Crankcase ventilation system not working
Engine needs tune-up
Engine running too cold or too hot
Plugged or restricted exhaust
Engine
Low compression
Index
90-823224--2 796
Carburetor Malfunctions
Symptoms
Cause
A. Needle and seat
B. Float adjustment
C. Saturated float
Flooding
Fl
di
D. Gaskets leaking
E. Cracked fuel bowl
F. Fuel percolation
G. Automatic choke
2. A. Idle RPM too low
B. Idle mixture screws
C. Idle passages dirty
R
Rough
h idl
idle
D. Throttle valves not closing

E. Engine flooding
F. Vacuum leak
G. Throttle body heat passages plugged
A. Accelerator pump
B. Leaking gaskets
C. Automatic choke
D. Power piston or power valve
Hesitation
H
i i or acceleration
l
i flflatness
E. Throttle valves
F. Throttle body heat passages plugged
G. Main metering jets
H. Float adjustment
I.
Secondary air valve wind-up
Index
90-823224--2 796
Engine Runs Poorly at Idle

Symptoms
Cause
A. Main metering jets
B. Leaking gaskets
C. Float adjustment
E i surges
Engine
D. Saturated float
E. Power piston or valve
F. Throttle valves
A. Power piston or valve
B. Float adjustment
Low top speed
L
d or lack
l k off power
C. Main metering jets
D. Leaking gaskets
A. Idle RPM too low
Poor
cold
ld engine
i operation
i
P
C. Throttle valves
D. Automatic choke
E. Engine flooding
A. Idle RPM too low
C. Engine flooding
Engine
E
i stalls
ll
D. Automatic choke
E. Dirt in carburetor
F. Accelerator pump
G. Leaking gaskets
Hard starting
Refer to Engine Starts Hard
Index
90-823224--2 796
Engine Runs Poorly At High RPM

Cause
Special Information
Also refer to Poor Boat Performance

Crankcase overfilled with oil
Check oil level with boat at rest in the water.
Anti-siphon valve (if equipped)
Restricting fuel supply
Plugged fuel tank vent

Fuel supply
Refer to Carburetor Malfunctions

(See Table of Contents)
Ignition timing
Low grade of fuel or water in the fuel
Spark plugs
Fouled, burned, cracked porcelain, incorrect

heat range
Spark plug wires
Poor insulation, broken wires
Distributor cap or rotor
Dirty or cracked
Coil
Distributor
Excessive play in shaft
Engine overheating
Refer to Engine Overheats
Low compression
Worn valves, rings, cylinders, etc.
Restricted exhaust
Index
90-823224--2 796
Engine Acceleration Is Poor

Cause
Special Instructions
Also refer to Poor Boat Performance

Idle mixture screws
Incorrect ignition timing
Incorrect distributor or amplifier advance curve
Refer to Section 4B
Accelerator pump
Check for stream of raw fuel from accelerator

pump discharge nozzle, when opening throttle
with engine shut off
Cracked or dirty distributor cap or rotor

Vacuum leak
Intake manifold or carburetor base
Spark plugs
Fouled, burned; wrong heat range; cracked

porcelain
Float adjustment
Dirty carburetor
Low compression
Troubleshooting with Vacuum Gauge

Reading
Cause
Steady reading between 15-21 inches at idle

RPM
Normal
Extremely low reading, but steady at idle RPM
Vacuum leak; incorrect timing; underpowered

boat; faulty boat bottom
Fluctuates between high and low at idle RPM
Blown head gasket between two adjacent

cylinders
Fluctuates 4 or 5 inches very slowly at idle RPM
Carburetor needs adjustment; spark plug gap

too narrow; valves are sticking
Fluctuates rapidly at idle, steadies as RPM is

increased
Valve guides are worn
Continuously fluctuates between low and normal

reading at regular intervals at idle RPM
Burned or leaking valve
Index
90-823224--2 796
Engine Noise
4. Try to isolate the noise to location in engine: front

to back, top to bottom. This can help determine
which components are at fault.
5. Sometimes noises can be caused by moving

parts coming in contact with other components.
Examples are: flywheel or coupler; exhaust flappers rattling against exhaust pipe; crankshaft
striking (pan, pan baffle, or dipstick tube); rocker
arm striking valve cover; and loose flywheel cover. In many cases if this is found to be the problem, a complete engine teardown is not necessary.
No definite rule or test will positively determine

source of engine noise; therefore, use the following
information only as a general guide to engine noise
diagnosis.
1. Use a timing light to determine if noise is timed
with engine speed or one-half engine speed.
Noises timed with engine speed are related to
crankshaft, rods, pistons, piston pins, and flywheel. Noises timed to one-half engine speed
are valve train related.
2. The use of a stethoscope can aid in locating a
noise source; however, because noise will travel
to other metal parts not involved in the problem,
caution must be exercised.
3. If you believe noise is confined to one particular
cylinder, ground spark plug leads, one at a time.
If noise lessens noticeably or disappears, it is isolated to that particular cylinder.
6. When noise is isolated to a certain area and component, removal and inspection will be required.
Refer to proper sections of service manual for information required for service.
7. If noise cannot be distinguished between engine
and drive unit, remove drive from boat. Run a water supply directly to engine. Run engine without
the drive to determine if noise is still there.
Valve Cover Area

Location
Possible Cause
Rocker arm striking valve cover
Rocker arm out of adjustment
V l cover area,
Valve
area timed
i d to one-half
h lf engine
i
speed, noise could be confined to one cylinder
or may be found in any multitude of cylinders
Worn rocker arm

Bent push rod
Collapsed filter
Index
90-823224--2 796
Cylinder Area
Location
Possible Causes
Sticking valve
Carbon build-up
Connecting rod installed wrong
Cylinder
C
li d area, may b
be confined
fi d to one cylinder
li d
or found in more than one cylinder
cylinder, timed to
engine speed
Bent connecting rod

Piston
Piston rings
Piston pin
Cylinder worn
Camshaft Area
Location
Possible Causes
Crankshaft timing sprocket
Timing chain
C
h ft
f area, ffrontt off engine,
i
titimed
i d tto one h
lf
Camshaft
half
engine speed
Fuel Pump
Valve Lifter
Cam Bearings
Fuel Pump
C
h ft area, center
t off engine,
i
titimed
d tto one h
lf
Camshaft
half
engine speed
Valve Lifter
Cam bearing
Camshaft area, rear of engine, timed to one half

engine speed
Distributor gear
Valve lifter
Cam bearings
Loss of oil pressure
C
Camshaft
h ft area, th
throughout
h t engine,
i
titimed
d tto one
half engine speed
Valve lifters
Cam bearings
Index
90-823224--2 796
Crankshaft Area
Location
Possible Causes
Crankshaft timing sprocket
gi , timed
C k h f area,, ffront off engine,
Crankshaft
i d to
engine speed
Timing chain
Main bearing
Rod bearing
Crankshaft striking pan or pan baffle
Crankshaft area,
area center of engine,
engine timed to
engine speed
Main bearing
Rod bearing
Loose flywheel cover
Loose coupler
C k h f area,
Crankshaft
i
timed
i d to
area rear off engine,
engine
engine speed
Loose flywheel
Main bearing
Rod bearing
Loss of oil pressure
Crankshaft area,
area throughout engine,
engine timed to
engine speed
Main bearings
Rod bearings
Index
90-823224--2 796
Miscellaneous
Noise
Possible Cause
Advanced timing
Low octane fuel
E i spark
k kknock
k
Engine
Engine running hot
Carbon deposits in engine
Wrong ignition timing
Carburetor set too lean
Faulty accelerator pump
Popping
P
i through
h
h carburetor
b
Vacuum leak
Valve adjustment
Valve timing
Burned or stuck valve
Vacuum leak
Leaking exhaust (manifolds or pipes)
Hi i
Hissing
Loose cylinder heads
Blown head gasket
Vacuum leak
Whistle
Dry or tight bearing in an accessory
Leaking high tension lead
S k jjumping
Sparks
i
Cracked coil tower

Cracked distributor cap
Drive belt slipping
S
Squeaks
k or squeals
l
Dry or tight bearing in an accessory

Parts rubbing together
Rattling in exhaust pipe area
Exhaust shutters
Index
90-823224--2 796
Oil Pressure
Cause
Special Information
Measuring oil pressure
Use a good automotive oil pressure test gauge.

Do not rely on the oil pressure gauge in the boat.
Check engine oil level with boat at rest in the water
Oil level should be between the ADD and FULL

marks
Oil level in crankcase above FULL mark
May cause loss of engine RPM, oil pressure

gauge fluctuation, drop in oil pressure, and
hydraulic valve lifter noise at high RPM
Oil level in crankcase below ADD mark
Low oil pressure; oil pressure gauge fluctuation;

internal engine noise and/or damage
Change in oil pressure
This may be a normal condition. Oil pressure

may read high in the cooler times of the day, and
when engine is not up to operating temperature.
As the air temperature warms up and engine is
running at normal opening temperature, it is
normal for oil pressure to drop.
Low engine oil pressure at idle
With modern engines and engine oils, low oil

pressure readings at idle do not necessarily
mean there is a problem. If valve lifters do not
clatter (at idle), there is a sufficient volume of
oil to lubricate all internal moving parts properly.
The reason for the drop in oil pressure is that
engine heat causes an expansion of the internal
tolerances in the engine and, also, the oil will
thinout somewhat from heat.
Low engine oil pressure at idle after running at a

high RPM
Refer to No. 5 and 6, preceding
Boats with dual engines
It is not uncommon to see different oil pressure

readings between the two engines, as long as
both engines fall within specifications.
Differences in oil pressure can be attributed to
differences in engine tolerances, gauges, wiring,
senders, etc.
Boats with dual stations
Refer to No. 8. preceding
Index
90-823224--2 796
Low Oil Pressure

Cause
Special Information
Low oil level in crankcase

Defective oil pressure gauge and/or sender
Verify with an automotive test gauge. Refer to

Section 4D for instrument testing.
Thin or diluted oil
Oil broken down; contains water or gas; wrong

viscosity; engine running too hot or too cold;
excessive idling in cold water (condensation)
Oil pump
Relief valve stuck open; pickup tube restricted;

worn parts in oil pump; air leak on suction side of
oil pump or pickup oil tube
Oil leak can be internal or external
Oil passage plugs leaking, cracked or porous

cylinder block
Excessive bearing clearance
Cam bearings, main bearings, rod bearings
High Oil Pressure

Oil too thick
Wrong viscosity, oil full of sludge or tar
Defective oil pressure gauge and/or sender
Verify with an automotive test gauge
Clogged or restricted oil passage

Oil pump relief valve stuck closed
Index
90-823224--2 796
Excessive Oil Consumption

Cause
Special Information
Normal consumption.
One quart of oil consumed in 5-15 hours of

operation at wide-open-throttle (especially in a
new or rebuilt engine) is normal
Oil leaks
Clean bilge, run engine with clean white paper

on bilge floor, locate oil leak(s)
Oil too thin
Oil diluted or wrong viscosity
Oil level too high

Drain holes in cylinder head plugged
Oil will flood valve guides
Defective valve seals

Intake manifold gasket leaking
Worn valve stems or valve guides
Defective oil cooler (if so equipped)
Crack in cooler tubes
Defective piston rings
Glazed, scuffed, worn, stuck, improperly

installed; ring grooves worn; improper break-in;
wrong end gap
Defective cylinders
Out of round, scored, tapered, glazed; excessive

piston to cylinder clearance; cracked piston
Excessive bearing clearance
NOTE: ENGINE CRANKCASE OIL MUST BE CHECKED AT INTERVALS SPECIFIED IN MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULE in Section 1B. It is normal for an engine to use a certain amount of oil in the process of lubricating
and cooling the engine. The amount of oil consumption is greatly dependent upon engine speed, with consumption being highest at wide-open-throttle and decreasing substantially as engine speed is reduced.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Water In Engine
If water is contained to cylinder(s) only, it is usually

entering through the intake system, exhaust system,
or head gasket.
If the water is contained to crankcase only, it is usually caused by a cracked or porous block, a flooded
bilge, or condensation.
IMPORTANT: First determine location of water in

engine. This information can be of great help
when trying to determine where the water came
from and how it got into the engine. The three
most common problems are water on top of pistons, water in crankcase oil, water in crankcase
oil and on top of pistons.
The first step, after locating water, is to remove all the
water from the engine by removing all spark plugs
and pumping cylinders out by cranking engine over.
Next change oil and filter. Now, start engine and see
if problem can be duplicated. If problem can be duplicated, there more than likely is a mechanical problem. If the problem cannot be duplicated, the problem
is either an operator error or a problem that exists
only under certain environmental conditions.
If the water is located in both the cylinder(s) and the

crankcase, it is usually caused by water in the cylinders getting past the rings and valves, or complete
submersion.
Checking for rust in the intake manifold or exhaust
manifolds is a good idea. Rust in these areas will give
clues if the water entered these areas.
Water on Top of Pistons

Cause
Special Information
Operator shut engine off at high RPM

Engine diesels or tries to run backwards
Engine out of tune, poor fuel, high idle RPM,

timing set too high
Rain water running into flame arrestor
Hatch cover
Spark plug misfiring
Improper combustion causes moisture in the air

to accumulate in the cylinder
Backwash through the exhaust system

Improper engine or exhaust hose installation
Cracked exhaust manifold
Improper manifold to elbow gasket installation
Loose cylinder head bolts
Blown cylinder head gasket
Check for warped cylinder head or cylinder block
Cracked valve seat

Porous or cracked casting
Check cylinder heads, cylinder block, and intake

manifold
Index
90-823224--2 796
Water in Crankcase Oil

Cause
Special Information
Water in boat bilge
Boat has been submerged or bilge water was

high enough to run in through dipstick tube
Water seeping past piston rings or valves
Refer to Water in Engine (On Top of Pistons)
Engine running cold
Defective thermostat, missing thermostat;

prolonged idling in cold water
Intake manifold leaking near a water passage

Cracked or porous casting
Check cylinder head, cylinder block, and intake

manifold
Engine Overheats (Mechanical)

Cause
Special Information
Engine RPM below specifications at wideopen-throttle (engine laboring)
Damaged or wrong propeller; growth on boat

bottom;false bottom full of water
Wrong ignition timing
Timing too far advanced or retarded
Sticking distributor advance weights

Spark plug wires crossed (wrong firing order)
Lean fuel mixture
Refer to Carburetor Malfunctions in this section
Wrong heat range spark plugs

Exhaust restriction
Valve timing off
Jumped timing chain, or improperly installed

A blown head gasket(s) normally cannot be
detected by a compression check. Normally the
engine will run at normal temperature at low
RPM, but will overheat at speeds above 3000
RPM.
Blown head gasket(s)
Insufficient lubrication to moving parts of engine
Engines that are seawater cooled: Using a

clear plastic hose, look for air bubbles between
seawater pump and engine. If there are no
bubbles present, install clear plastic hose
between thermostat housing and manifold(s).If
air bubbles are present at a higher RPM, it is a
good indication there is a blown head gasket.
Defective oil pump, plugged oil passage, low oil
level
Index
90-823224--2 796
Engine Overheats (Cooling System)

Cause
IMPORTANT: The first step is to verify if the engine is actually overheating or the temperature
gauge or sender is faulty.
Loose or broken drive belt
Special Information
IMPORTANT: Best way to test gauge or sender is
to replace them.
Seawater shutoff valve partially or fully closed

(if equipped)
Clogged or improperly installed sea strainer
Loose hose connections between seawater
pickup and seawater pump inlet (models with
belt driven seawater pump only)
Pump will suck air. Pump may fail to prime or will

force air bubbles into cooling system.
Seawater inlet hose kinked or collapsed

Seawater pickup clogged
Obstruction on boat bottom causing water
turbulence
Obstruction will be in front of seawater pickup,

causing air bubbles to be forced into cooling
system
Defective thermostat
Exhaust elbow water outlet holes plugged
Insufficient seawater pump operation
Worn pump impeller
Obstruction in cooling system such as casting

flash, sand, rust, salt, etc.
Refer to water flow diagram for engine type

being serviced
Engine circulating pump defective

Also refer to Engine Overheats (Mechanical)
IMPORTANT: In addition to previous checks,
make the following checks if engine is equipped
with closed cooling.
Low coolant level
Antifreeze not mixed properly
Antifreeze should be mixed 50/50 or maximum

60/40 (60% antifreeze, 40% water)
Heat exchanger cores plugged

Water hoses reversed at the water distribution
block
Refer to water flow diagram in Section 6
Index
90-823224--2 796
Insufficient Water Flow from Belt Driven Seawater Pickup Pump

Cause
Drive belt
Special Information
Loose, worn or broken
Seawater shutoff valve partially or fully closed

Clogged or improperly installed sea strainer
Loose hose connections between seawater pickup
and seawater pump inlet
Pump will suck air, pump may fail to prime or will

force air bubbles into cooling system
Seawater inlet hose kinked or plugged

Seawater pickup plugged
Obstruction on boat bottom causing water turblence.
Obstruction will be in front of seawater pickup,

causing air bubbles to be forced into cooling
system
Faulty seawater pump
Index
90-823224--2 796
Power Steering
Poor, Erratic, or No Assist
Cause
Drive belt
Special Information
Worn, broken or out of adjustment
Low fluid level

Air in system
Air leak in lines, pump, or air from installation.

Refer to Section 9A for bleeding procedure.
Leaking hoses
Refer to Section 10A for bleeding procedure.
Steering cables and/or steering helm
Cable or helm partially frozen from rust or

corrosion; cable over-lubricated; improper cable
installation.
Binding in stern drive unit
Refer to appropriate Stern Drive Service Manual
Restriction in hydraulic hoses
Causes a loss of pressure
Control valve not positioned properly, not

balanced properly, or the mounting nut is loose
Mounting bracket adjusting screw loose or
mounting tube is loose
Faulty pump
Flow control valve may be sticking
Worn piston ring or scored housing bore in cylinder.
Causes loss of pressure
Leaking valve body or loose fitting spool
Index
90-823224--2 796
Noisy Pump
Cause
Drive belt
Special Information
Check belt tension
Low fluid level

Air in fluid
Air leak in lines, pump, or air form installation
Faulty pump
Use stethoscope to listen for noise in pump
Restricted fluid passages
Kinks or debris in hoses or debris in passages
Stop nut adjusted improperly
Steering cables installed that do not meet BIA

standards
Fluid Leaks
Cause
Loose hose connections
Special Information
Refer to Section 10A for bleeding instructions
Damaged hose
Oil leaking from top of pump
System overfilled; fluid contains water; fluid

contains air
Cylinder piston rod seal

Faulty seals in valve
Faulty seals in o-rings in pump
Cracked or porous metal parts
Index
90-823224--2 796
NOTE: Perform the following tests with engine(s) not

running.
Troubleshooting Silent
Choice Exhaust Silencer
System
Compressor will not run

1. Testing mode switch (ignition switch in RUN position).
a. Purple wire must have battery voltage. If not,
fuse is blown or wiring is faulty.
b. Brown wire must have battery voltage when

mode switch is held in THRU-TRANSOM position. If not, switch is faulty.
c. Gray wire must have battery voltage when
the mode switch is held in THRU-PROP position. If not, switch is faulty.
72533
2. Testing air pump (ignition switch in RUN position).

a. Check that black wire, in terminal block, is
grounded to engine.
b. Brown wire in terminal block, must have battery voltage when mode switch is held in
THRU-TRANSOM position. If not, wiring is
faulty. If voltage is present, air pump is faulty.
Air pump runs - system inoperative
With air pump running, check hoses, fittings, solenoid, and relief valve for air leakage. Replace parts
as needed.
System operates but goes THRU-PROP after air

pump stops running
1. Check that air pressure is not leaking past solenoid. If so, replace.
2. Check that air pressure is not leaking back
through air pump. If so, replace check valve.
3. Check that air pressure is not leaking at air cylinder assemblies. If so, replace faulty ones.
System stays in THRU-TRANSOM mode, will not

go back to THRU-PROP mode
Gray wire, in terminal block, must have battery voltage when mode switch is held in THRU-PROP position. If not, wiring is faulty. If voltage is present, solenoid is faulty.
f
e
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
72534
Air Cylinder Assembly

Air Pump
Solenoid
Check Valve
Relief Valve
Air Intake Valve
Mode Switch
Index
90-823224--2 796
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
2
A
72580
MCM MODELS - BRAVO AND

BLACKHAWK DRIVES
Index
Table of Contents
Page
Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-1
Tools/Lubricants/Adhesives/Sealants . . . . . . . 2A-1
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-2
Engine Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-2
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-3
Engine Installation/Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-3
Engine Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-6
Fuel Supply Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-7
Throttle Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-7
Weber 4 Barrel Carburetor . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-7
Throttle Body Injection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-8
Multi-Port Injection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-9
Index
2A-0 - MCM MODELS - BRAVO AND BLACKHAWK DRIVES
90-823224--2 796
Torque Specifications
FASTENER LOCATION
Lb. In.
Lb. Ft.
Cable Barrel
Drive Unit
S f C
Shift
Cable
Nm
Spread Cotter Key
Cable End Guide
See Note
Hose Clamps
Securely
Rear Engine Mounts
35-40
47-54
23
31
Power Steering Fluid Hose Fitting

Earlier Style Large
Small
100
11
Later Style
Rear Engine Mounts
23
31
35-40
47-54
Remote Control
S f C
Shift
Cables
Cable Barrel
Securely
Cable End Guide
See Note
Remote Control
Throttle C
Cable
Cable Barrel
Securely
Cable End Guide
See Note
Note: Tighten, then back nut off one half turn.
Tools/Lubricants/Adhesives/Sealants
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
Engine Alignment Tool
91-805475A1
Engine Coupler Spline Grease
91-816391A4
Liquid Neoprene
Loctite Pipe Sealant With Teflon
92-27511-2
Obtain Locally
Index
90-823224--2 796
MCM MODELS - BRAVO AND BLACKHAWK DRIVES - 2A-1
Removal
! CAUTION
IMPORTANT: Stern drive unit must be removed

prior to engine removal. Refer to Stern Drive Service Manual.
Engine Removal
1. Disconnect battery cables from battery.
2. Remove instrument harness connector plug from
engine harness receptacle after loosening
clamp.
DO NOT allow lifting sling to hook or compress

engine components or damage will occur.
! CAUTION
Multi-Port engines MUST be lifted with a lifting
arm or damage to engine components will occur.
12. Support engine with suitable sling through lifting
eyes on engine and remove front and rear engine
mounting bolts. Retain hardware.
a
! WARNING
Be careful when working on fuel system. Gasoline is extremely flammable and highly explosive
under certain conditions. Do not smoke or allow
spark or open flame in area. Wipe up any spilled
fuel immediately.
3. Using wrench to stabilize brass filter nut at fuel inlet, loosen fuel line fitting, disconnect and suitably
plug fuel line to prevent fuel in tank from leaking
into bilge.
72578
4. Disconnect throttle cable from carburetor, or

throttle body on Fuel Injection models, and retain
locknuts and hardware.
5. Disconnect bullet connectors of trim sender wires
(coming from transom assembly) from engine
harness.
NOTE: After wires are disconnected be sure to loosen them from clamps or sta-straps retaining them to
engine or hoses.
6. Disconnect MerCathode wires from MerCathode
controller if mounted on engine (some models).
7. Disconnect seawater inlet hose from gimbal
housing.
72580
8. Disconnect exhaust elbow hoses (bellows).

9. Remove both shift cables from shift plate. Retain
10. Disconnect any grounding wires and accessories
that are connected to engine.
11. Disconnect (and suitably plug) fluid hoses from

power steering control valve on transom.
! CAUTION
Center lifting eye (located on top of thermostat
housing) is used for engine alignment only. DO
NOT use to lift entire engine.
72579
a - Suitable Sling
b - Engine Lifting Eyes
13. Carefully remove engine. DO NOT hit power

steering control valve.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Installation
! CAUTION
Fuel Injection engines MUST be lifted with a lifting arm or damage to engine components will occur.
Engine Installation/Alignment
1. Follow instructions a- e:
a. Be certain fiber washers (cemented in place)
on inner transom plate are present. Inspect fiber washers. Replace if worn or damaged.
2. Attach a suitable sling to lifting eyes on engine

and adjust so that engine is level when suspended. (Refer to Removal section for location of lifting eyes.)
b. Install double wound lockwashers onto inner

transom plate inside fiber washer.
3. Lift engine into position (in boat), using an overhead hoist.
c. Be certain rear engine mount locknuts are in

position as shown.
4. Align rear engine mounts with inner transom

plate mounts while simultaneously aligning exhaust tubes with exhaust pipe hoses (bellows).
d. Lubricate exhaust bellows with soap and water to ease installation.

e. Lubricate engine coupler splines with Quicksilver Engine Coupler Spline Grease.
IMPORTANT: Engine attaching hardware must be

installed in sequence shown.
5. Install both rear engine mounting bolts and
hardware as shown. Torque to 35-40 lb. ft.
(47-54 Nm).
a
a
b
c
d
72023
e
g
a
b
c
d
Double Wound Lockwasher

Fiber Wound Lockwasher (Cemented In Place)
Inner Transom Plate Mount (Engine Support)
Locknuts (Engine Mounting Bolts)
72535
! CAUTION
! CAUTION
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
Bolt, Rear Engine Mounting

Washer, Large Steel
Metal Spacer
Rear Engine Mount
Double Wound Lockwasher
Fiber Washer
Inner Transom Plate Mounts
Locknut (Hidden In This View)
Index
90-823224--2 796
7. Align engine as follows:
! CAUTION
When lowering engine into position DO NOT set
engine on shift cable. Shift cable outer casing
can be crushed causing difficult or improper
shifting.
a. Attempt to insert solid end of Quicksilver

Alignment Tool through gimbal bearing and
into engine coupler splines. If it will not insert
easily proceed to following.
6. Set engine down on stringers and relieve hoist

tension. Disconnect sling from engine lifting eyes
and switch sling to center lifting eye.
b. If the tool does not fit, remove it and carefully

raise or lower the from end of the engine, as
necessary, and attempt to insert the alignment tool.
c. Repeat step b until the alignment tool installs easily (SLIDES IN AND OUT FREELY
WITH TWO FINGERS) all the way into and
out of engine coupler splines.
b
a
72024
a - Center Lifting Eye
70013
! CAUTION
DO NOT use an alignment tool from another manufacturer. Alignment tools other than Quicksilver
Alignment Tool 91-805475A1, may cause improper alignment and damage to gimbal bearing and/
or engine coupler.
a - Alignment Tool (Use Only Quicksilver Alignment Tool

(91-805475A1)
b - Insert This End of Alignment Tool through Gimbal Housing
Assembly
! CAUTION
To avoid damage to gimbal bearing, engine coupler, or alignment tool:

DO NOT attempt to force alignment tool!
DO NOT raise or lower engine with alignment
tool inserted (or partially inserted) in gimbal
bearing or engine coupler.
27647
a - Alignment Tool
b - Gimbal Bearing
c - Engine Coupler
Index
90-823224--2 796
IMPORTANT: Turn both front engine mount adjustment nuts an equal amount in direction required to align engine.
a. On Engines with Thru-Prop Exhaust:
d. Adjust front engine mounts until they rest on

boat stringers.
e. Relieve hoist tension entirely and fasten both

front mounts to boat stringer using appropriate hardware (lag bolts or thru-bolts, etc.).
f.
Recheck alignment with alignment tool. Tool

must enter coupler splines freely. If not, readjust front mounts.
g. When alignment is correct, tighten locknut or

nut with lockwasher on each mount securely.
h. Bend tab washer down against flat on adjusting nut.
72537
a - Hose Clamps - Tighten Securely

b - Exhaust Tube - Long Tube, Port Side - Short Tube,
Starboard Side
b. On Engines with Thru-Transom Exhaust:

a
NOTICE (THRU-TRANSOM EXHAUST)

Exhaust hoses must be connected to exhaust elbows so that they do not restrict the
flow of discharge water from exhaust elbow.
If hoses are connected incorrectly, discharge water from exhaust elbow will not
flow around entire inside diameter of hose.
This will cause a hot spot in the hose which
may eventually burn through.
d
72922
a - Locknut
b - Adjustment Nut
c - Turn Adjustment Nut In This Direction (Counterclockwise)
To Raise Front Of Engine
d - Slotted Hole To Front Of Engine
e - Tab Washer
i.
CORRECT
Remove alignment tool if not already removed.
8. Tighten all exhaust system hose clamps securely

as follows (use two hose clamps on each connection):
INCORRECT
72538
Index
90-823224--2 796
c. On Engines with Silent Choice Exhaust

System:
c
a
b
2. Connect instrument harness to engine harness

with hose clamp. Tighten clamp securely.
72539
a
b
c
d
Silencer Valve
Exhaust Hose and Clamps For Thru Transom
Exhaust Hose and Clamps For Intermediate Exhaust Pipe
Exhaust Hose and Clamps For Exhaust Pipe
b
72025
9. Proceed to Engine Connections section instructions following.
a - Engine Wiring Harness Receptacle Bracket

b - Instrumentation Wiring Harness Plug
c - Hose Clamp - Tighten Securely
Engine Connections
3. Connect trim position sender leads from gimbal

housing to leads from engine harness.
IMPORTANT: When routing all wire harnesses

and hoses, be sure they are routed and secured
to avoid coming in contact with hot spots on engine and avoid contact with moving parts.
1. Connect seawater hose to water tube at gimbal housing with hose clamp. Tighten clamp
securely.
NOTE: In the following view the engine is not in position, for visual clarity in this step.
d
a
c
72582
a
b
c
d
BROWN/WHITE (From Engine Harness)

BLACK (From Engine Harness)
BLACK (From Transom)
BLACK (From Transom Assembly)
b
72590
a - Water Inlet Tube

b - Hose Clamp (Tighten Securely)
c - Seawater Inlet
Index
90-823224--2 796
! WARNING
fuel immediately.
FUEL SUPPLY CONNECTIONS
! WARNING
2. Install cable end guide on throttle lever, then push

cable barrel lightly toward throttle lever end. (This
will place a slight preload on cable to avoid slack
in cable when moving remote control lever.) Adjust barrel on throttle cable to align with anchor
stud.
3. Secure throttle cable with hardware (retained) as
shown. Tighten cable end guide nut until it bottoms out and then back off one full turn. Tighten
cable barrel securely. DO NOT OVER-TIGHTEN, as cable must pivot freely.
fuel leak.

TEFLON TAPE.


OVER-TIGHTEN.

4. Connect fuel line from fuel tank(s) to engine.

Make certain connections are secure. Check for
leaks.
5. Connect throttle cable using hardware retained
and adjust following instructions a or b:
b
c
d
b
72014
a
b
c
d
Cable End Guide

Attaching Hardware (DO NOT Over-Tighten)
Cable Barrel
Anchor Studs
4. Place remote control throttle lever in the

wide-open-throttle (W.O.T.) position. Check to
ensure that throttle shutters (valves) are completely open and throttle shaft lever contacts carburetor body casting.
Throttle Connections
WEBER 4 BARREL CARBURETOR
1. Place remote control handle(s) in neutral, idle position.
IMPORTANT: Be sure that cable is routed in such
a way as to avoid sharp bends and/or contact
with moving parts. DO NOT fasten any items to
throttle cable. Outer cable must be free to move
when cable is actuated.
Index
90-823224--2 796
5. Return remote control throttle lever to idle position and check to ensure that throttle lever contacts idle speed adjustment screw.
THROTTLE BODY INJECTION

cable barrel end lightly toward throttle lever end.
(This will place a slight preload on shift cable to
avoid slack in cable when moving remote control
lever). Adjust barrel on throttle cable to align with
hole in anchor plate.
2. Secure throttle cable with hardware as shown
and tighten securely.
3. Place remote control throttle level in the wide
open throttle (W.O.T.) position. Check to ensure
that throttle plates are completely open.
4. Return remote control throttle lever to idle position.

b
c
70392
Idle Position
a - Throttle Lever Contacts (b) In idle Position
b - Idle Speed Adjustment Screw
b
d
a
71159
Wide-Open-Throttle Position
a - Throttle Shaft Lever Contacts (b) At W.O.T. Position
b - Carburetor Body Casting
a - Cable End Guide

b - Flat Washer and Locknut - Tighten Until Bottoms Out,
Then Back Off One Half Turn
c - Cable Barrel
d - Flat Washer and Locknut
Index
90-823224--2 796
MULTI-PORT INJECTION
1. Place remote control handle(s) in neutral idle
position.
a way to avoid sharp bends and/or contact with
moving parts. DO NOT fasten any items to
NOTE: If Boat is equipped with Quicksilver Zero Effort Controls, the throttle cable mounting stud must
be most forward position on throttle lever.
2. Remove flame arrestor.
a
73855
a - Position For Zero Effort Controls

71481

a - Flame Arrestor (Earlier Style)

b - Locknuts

hole in anchor plate. Ensure hole in barrel positions cable as shown.
b
71711
a - Cable Barrel
b - Anchor Plate
Index
90-823224--2 796
6. Return remote control throttle lever to idle position and check to ensure that throttle plates are
completely closed.
g
7. Reinstall flame arrestor and tighten locknuts securely. Position crankcase vent hose against
flame arrestor as shown.
e
71764
c
-
a - Crankcase Vent Hose

72791
IMPORTANT: Do not attach any accessory

ground () wires to transom plate ground point.
Accessory ground wires should only be attached
to ground stud on engine.
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
8. Connect any grounding wires or accessories that

may have been disconnected.
71761
9. Models with MerCathode: Connect wires to

MerCathode controller assembly as shown.
Apply a thin coat of Quicksilver Liquid Neoprene
to all connections.
Cable End Guide

Cable Barrel
Bolt
Locknut
Throttle Lever
Flat Washer and Lockwasher
Throttle Plates
c
b
a
22232
a - ORANGE Wire - From Electrode On Transom Assembly

b - RED/PURPLE Wire - Connect (Other End) to Positive
(+) Battery Terminal
c - BLACK Wire - From Engine Harness
d - BROWN Wire - From Electrode on Transom Assembly
W.O.T.
a
IDLE
72794
a
b
c
d
Throttle Lever
Positive Stop Screw
Throttle Stop Lever
Throttle Stop Screw
Index
90-823224--2 796
IMPORTANT: Adjust shift cables as outlined in

appropriate Stern Drive Service Manual.
10. Refer to appropriate Stern Drive Service Manual
and install and adjust drive unit and remote control shift cables, using hardware retained.
b. Later Style Control Valve: Torque both fittings to 23 lb. ft. (31 Nm). Route hoses as
shown for each model.
a
IMPORTANT: After fluid hose installation in the
following, bleed power steering system as outlined in SECTION 1B - Maintenance of this manual, or refer to the appropriate Stern Drive Service Manual.
73786
! CAUTION
All Models Except 502 EFI
Route hoses exactly as shown below. This will

help avoid stress on the hose fittings and will
help avoid kinks in the hose.
IMPORTANT: Make hydraulic connections as
quickly as possible to prevent fluid leakage.
a - Hose Fittings
IMPORTANT: Be careful not to cross-thread or

over- tighten fittings.
11. Connect both hydraulic hose fittings.
a. Earlier Style Control Valves: Torque the
large fitting to 23 lb. ft. (31 Nm). Torque the
small fitting to 100 lb. in. (11 Nm).
a
73860
502 EFI with Oil Cooler Return Lines on the

Starboard Side of the Cooler
a - Hose Fittings
12. Connect battery cables to battery by FIRST connecting positive (+) battery cable (usually RED)
to positive (+) battery terminal. Tighten clamp securely. Then, connect negative () battery cable
(usually BLACK) to negative () battery terminal.
Tighten clamp securely.
NOTE: Spray terminals with a battery connection

sealant to help retard corrosion.
22023
a - Small Fitting
b - Large Fitting
Index
90-823224--2 796

AT A LATER DATE
Index
90-823224--2 796
2
B
70246
MCM MODELS - BRAVO AND BLACKHAWK

DRIVES WITH DRIVESHAFT EXTENSION
Index
Table of Contents
Page
Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-1
Tools / Lubricants / Sealants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-1
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-2
Engine Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-2
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-4
Engine Installation/Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-4
Engine Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-9
Throttle Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-11
Index
2B-0 - BRAVO AND BLACKHAWK DRIVES WITH DRIVESHAFT EXTENSIONS
90-823224--2 796
Fastener Location
Bearing Support
(Tailstock) To Inner
Transom Plate
Drive Shaft
Rear Engine Mount
Bracket
Lb. Ft. Lb. In.

35-40
Tools / Lubricants / Sealants

Nm
47-54
50
68
Drive Shaft Shield

Extension Housing To
Flywheel Housing
30
41
23
31
Flywheel Housing
Early Style Power
Steering Hose Fittings
Large
Small
Later Style Power
Steering Hose Fittings
Remote Control
Throttle Cable
Cable Barrel
Cable End
Guide
100
23
Description
Part Number
Quicksilver Engine
Alignment Tool
91-805475A1
Quicksilver Liquid
Neoprene
92-25711-2
Quicksilver 2-4-C
Marine Lubricant
With Teflon
Universal Protractor
Loctite Pipe Sealant
With Teflon
92-825407A3
Obt i Locally
Obtain
L
ll
11
31
Securely
See Note
Front and Rear

Engine Mounts
Hose Clamps
Securely
Battery Cables
NOTE: Tighten, then back nut off one-half turn
Index
90-823224--2 796
BRAVO AND BLACKHAWK DRIVES WITH DRIVESHAFT EXTENSIONS - 2B-1
12. Remove top and then bottom drive shaft shields

at engine end of extension drive shaft.
Removal
IMPORTANT: It is not necessary to remove the
engine to service the drive shaft and/or bearing
support (tailstock). Refer to instructions as outlined in Section 8E - Drive Shaft Repair or
Bearing Support Repair for servicing these
items only.
IMPORTANT: Stern drive unit does not have to be
removed prior to engine removal. If stern drive is
going to be removed, refer to appropriate Stern
Drive Service Manual.
Engine Removal
a
2. Remove instrument harness connector plug from

engine harness receptacle after loosening
clamp.
! WARNING
fuel immediately.
3. Using wrench to stabilize brass coupling at fuel
filter inlet, loosen fuel line fitting, disconnect and
suitably plug fuel line to prevent fuel in tank from
leaking into bilge.
4. Disconnect throttle cable from carburetor and retain locknuts and hardware.
b
72033
a
b
c
d
Top Shield
Bottom Shield
4 Screws / Nuts (2 Hidden)
3 Screws (Hidden)
13. Mark extension drive shaft U-joint yoke/output

flange connections at engine end (to assist in exact same positioning during reassembly). Disconnect drive shaft from output flange.
c
5. Disconnect bullet connectors of trim sender wires

(coming from transom assembly) from engine
harness.
NOTE: After wires are disconnected, be sure to

loosen them from clamps or Sta-Straps retaining
them to engine or hoses.
6. Disconnect MerCathode wires from MerCathode
controller if mounted on engine (some models).
7. Disconnect seawater inlet hose from engine.
b
8. Disconnect exhaust elbow hoses (bellows).
a
70237
9. Remove both shift cables from shift plate. Retain

Engine End Shown

a - Matching Parts On Flange and Drive Shaft Connection

b - Extension Drive Shaft U-Joint Yoke
c - Output Flange
11. Disconnect (and suitably plug) fluid hoses from

power steering control valve on transom.
Index
90-823224--2 796
! CAUTION
! CAUTION
IMPORTANT: To avoid the need for a complete realignment (after engine repair), DO NOT MOVE
FRONT AND REAR MOUNT ADJUSTMENT. Remove mounting bolts from boat stringers.
eyes on engine and remove front and rear engine mounting bolts from boat stringers. Retain
hardware.
15. Carefully remove engine.
! CAUTION
Mutli-Port Injection engines MUST be lifted with
a lifting arm or damage to engine components
will occur.
a
c
c
a
b
72578
72922
72580
72579
Typical Mounting Shown

a - Suitable Sling
c - Mounting Bolts
Index
90-823224--2 796
Installation
Engine Installation/Alignment
5. As shown, attach engine output flange to drive

shaft flange exactly as marked during disassembly. Torque fasteners to 50 lb. ft. (68 Nm).
ENGINE MOUNT ADJUSTMENT WAS NOT

DISTURBED DURING SERVICE
! CAUTION
! CAUTION

engine components or damage to them will occur.
c
70237
! CAUTION
Multi-Port Fuel Injection engines MUST be lifted
with a lifting arm or damage to engine components will occur.
1. Attach a suitable sling to lifting eyes on engine
and adjust so that engine is level when suspended. (Refer to Removal section for location of lifting eyes.)
2. Lift engine into approximate position (in boat), using an overhead hoist.
3. Set engine on stringers.
4. Grease drive shaft universal joints with Quicksilver 2-4-C Marine Lubricant With Teflon.
Engine End Shown

a
b
c
d
e
Output Shaft Flange

Drive Shaft
Screw 7/16-20 x 1-1/2 In. (38 mm) Long (4 Used)
Nut 7/16-20 (4 Used)
Matching Marks Made Upon Disassembly - Aligned
IMPORTANT: Failure to properly position output

shaft flange may result in bearing damage.
6. Relieve hoist tension from engine, then slide engine fore or aft as needed to obtain 1/4 in. (6 mm)
clearance between flange shoulder and extension shaft housing bearing.
c
! CAUTION
When attaching shaft in next step, BE SURE that
the pilot on drive shaft flanges are engaged in input shaft and output shaft flanges. Flanges
MUST BE flush to each other prior to tightening
screws or screws may come loose during operation.
b
a
! CAUTION
Failure to align shaft flanges with matching
marks made on disassembly may cause improperly aligned drive unit and extension drive shaft
U-joint centerlines resulting in a severe vibration
problem.
72591
a - Flange Shoulder
b - Bearing
c - 1/4 In. (6 mm)
Index
90-823224--2 796
7. Position engine for correct engine and drive shaft

lateral alignment as follows:
Torque screws and nuts to 30 lb. ft. (41 Nm).
a. Measure the length of (a) and (b) to the centers of bolt holes. They MUST BE EQUAL. If
they are not equal, slide the aft and forward
ends of the engine equal amounts in opposite
directions to obtain equal lengths for (a) and
(b).
b. Recheck Step 6. If Step 6 is not as specified,
adjust and recheck Step 7a. Continue this
process until both Steps 6 and 7a are as specified.
72028
a - Shaft Housing
b - Bottom Shield
c - Screws (3 Used - Two Hidden in This View) (Use Loctite 271)
b
70246
Engine End Shown
These Dimensions Must Be Equal
8. After engine has been aligned correctly, fasten

front and rear engine mounts to stringers. Tighten
mounting bolts securely.
9. Apply Loctite 271 to threads of bottom drive shaft
shield retaining screws and install bottom shield
on engine end as shown. Torque screws to 30 lb.
ft. (41 Nm). Then install top shield as shown.
a
d
c
b
72033
a
b
c
d
Top Shield
Bottom Shield
4 Screws/Nuts (2 Hidden)
3 Screws (2 Hidden)
Engine End Shown
Index
90-823224--2 796
ENGINE MOUNT ADJUSTMENT WAS

DISTURBED DURING SERVICE
NOTE: A Universal Protractor is recommended for

measuring the angles in the following steps.
IMPORTANT: In the following steps, the protractor readings will be taken off of vertical and horizontal surfaces; therefore, both the 0 degree and
the 90 degree marks will be used. It should be
kept in mind that these are reference marks only
and the assigned numbers should be ignored. It
is only necessary to determine the number of degrees and to which side (left or right) of the reference marks the indicator needle rests. PROTRACTOR MUST BE VIEWED FROM THE SAME
SIDE OF POWER PACKAGE THROUGHOUT INSTALLATION.
IMPORTANT: Be sure that boat does not move

once reading has been taken from input shaft
flange, as this reading establishes a reference
point for aligning drive shaft and engine following. If boat is moved, reference point may be altered and subsequently, improper drive shaft and
engine alignment may occur. Alignment tool
MUST BE in place during entire alignment procedure if drive unit is not installed.
72592
a
a - Indicator Shaft Flange
b - Protractor
c - Indicator Needle
72429
a - Reference Marks
1. Refer to Section 8E - Drive Shaft Models/Propeller Shaft, and remove drive shaft.
2. Position base of protractor against input shaft
flange, as shown. NOTE and RECORD the number of degrees and to which side of the reference
mark the indicator needle has moved in the following chart.
Reading from Step 1. __________ degrees to the
_________ side of reference mark.
NOTE: For ease of installation we recommend the

use of a chain leveler in the following steps.
3. Adjust engine mounts so that an equal amount of
up and down adjustment exists.
4. Attach a suitable lifting chain to lifting eyes on engine and adjust so that engine will be level when
suspended, then place engine into its approximate position (in boat) using an overhead hoist.
5. Refer to Section 8E - Drive Shaft Models/Propeller Shaft, and install drive shaft while observing
precautions in Section 8D, especially about
aligning gimbal bearing U-joint centerlines with
extension drive shaft U-joint centerlines at bearing support input shaft. DO NOT install shields at
this time.
Index
90-823224--2 796
! CAUTION
! CAUTION
Engine MUST BE aligned correctly to achieve

proper engine operation and to prevent damage
to drive shaft. If drive shaft is run at an incorrect
angle, damage to universal joint bearings may result.
6. Position base of protractor on drive shaft; then
raise or lower engine (as boat construction permits) until indicator needle is 1 degree to 3 degrees on either side of reading taken in Step 1.
Record this reading in the following chart for later
use.
b
a
Failure to properly position output shaft flange

(as described following) may result in bearing
damage.
8. Relieve hoist tension from engine, then slide engine fore or aft as needed to obtain 1/4 in. (6.4
mm) between flange shoulder and extension
shaft housing bearing, as shown.
c
b
a
70238
72591
a - Drive Shaft
b - Protractor
c - Output Shaft Flange
a - Flange Shoulder
b - Bearing
c - 1/4 In. (6 mm)
Reading from Step 6. __________ degrees to the

_________ side of reference mark.
9. Position engine for correct engine and drive shaft

lateral alignment as follows:
7. Adjust stringer height so that the stringers just

contact the engine mount bases.
a. Measure the length of (a) and (b) to the centers of bolt holes. They MUST BE EQUAL. If
they are not equal, slide the aft and forward
ends of the engine equal amounts in opposite directions to obtain equal lengths for (a)
and (b).
a
b
70246
These Dimensions Must Be Equal

b. Recheck Step 8. If Step 8 is not as specified,
adjust and recheck Step 9a. Continue this
process until both Steps 8 and 9a are as specified.
Index
90-823224--2 796
10. After engine has been aligned correctly, fasten

front and rear engine mounts to stringers. Tighten
securely.
12. Position protractor on drive shaft and recheck

angle. Angle should be the same as that recorded in Step 6. If not, raise or lower all four engine mount adjustment nuts an equal amount until correct angle is reached.
13. Tighten ALL engine mount nuts securely. Bend
washer tab down on each adjustment nut.
a
a
a
72922
e
b
c
Typical Mounting Shown

a - Mounting Bolts
11. Position protractor on starter housing cover

plate, as shown. Now, raise or lower front engine
mount adjusting nuts as required so that protractor needle reads exactly the same number of degrees as that recorded in Step 1.
a
c
72922
a - Locknut
b - Adjustment Nut
c - Turn Nut In This Direction (Counterclockwise) To Raise
Front Of Engine
d - Slotted Hole Toward Front Of Engine
e - Tab Washer
72593
Thru-Prop Exhaust Shown

a - Flywheel Housing
b - Starter Housing Cover Plate
c - Protractor
Index
90-823224--2 796

shield retaining screws and install bottom shields
on engine and transom end as shown. Torque
screws to 30 lb. ft. (41 Nm). Then install both top
shields as shown. Torque screws and nuts to 30
lb. ft. (41 Nm).
Engine Connections
1. Connect seawater inlet hose to seawater pump
as shown. Tighten hose clamp securely.
a
c
b
e
d
b
70245
Top Shield and Bottom Shield at Transom End

(Engine End Similar)
a
b
c
d
e
70346
Top Shield
Bottom Shield
Bolt 3/8-16 x 7/8 In. (22.2 mm)
Nut 3/8-16
Screws (Use Loctite 271)
Engines With Mechanical Fuel Pump / Seawater

Pump
a - Seawater Inlet Hose Connection
b - Mechanical Fuel Pump
b
a
72352
Engines Without Mechanical Fuel Pump

b - Hose To Cooler
Index
90-823224--2 796

with hose clamp. Tighten clamp securely.
! WARNING
fuel immediately.
! WARNING
fuel leak.
a
c

TEFLON TAPE.


OVER-TIGHTEN.

72025
a - Engine Wiring Harness

b - Instrumentation Wiring Harness Plug
c - Hose Clamp - Tighten Securely
3. Connect two trim position sender leads from gimbal housing to leads from engine harness.

Make certain connections are secure. Check for
leaks.
c
72582
a
b
c
d
BROWN / WHITE (From Engine Harness)

BLACK (From Engine Harness)
Index
90-823224--2 796
Throttle Connections

1. Place remote control handle(s) in neutral, idle position.
a way as to avoid sharp bends and/or contact
with moving parts. DO NOT fasten any items to

cable barrel lightly toward throttle lever end. (This
will place a slight preload on cable to avoid slack
in cable when moving remote control lever.) Adjust barrel on throttle cable to align with anchor
stud.
3. Secure throttle cable with hardware (retained)
as shown. Tighten cable end guide nut until it
bottoms out and then back off one full turn.
Tighten cable barrel securely. DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN, as cable must pivot freely.
b
70392
Idle Position
a - Throttle Lever Contacts (b) In idle Position
b - Idle Speed Adjustment Screw
b
c
d
b
a
71159
72014
a
b
c
d
Cable End Guide

Attaching Hardware (DO NOT Over-Tighten)
Cable Barrel
Anchor Studs
Wide-Open-Throttle Position
a - Throttle Shaft Lever Contacts (b) At W.O.T. Position
b - Carburetor Body Casting
4. Place remote control throttle lever in the

wide-open-throttle (W.O.T.) position. Check to
ensure that throttle shutters (valves) are completely open and throttle shaft lever contacts carburetor body casting.
Index
90-823224--2 796
THROTTLE BODY INJECTION

hole in anchor plate.
1. Place remote control handle(s) in neutral idle position.


a way to avoid sharp bends and/or contact with
moving parts. DO NOT fasten any items to
4. Return remote control throttle lever to idle position.
c
b
71481
a - Flame Arrestor (Earlier Style)

b - Locknuts

b
a - Cable End Guide

b - Flat Washer and Locknut - Tighten Until Bottoms Out,
Then Back Off One Half Turn
c - Cable Barrel
d - Flat Washer and Locknut
71711
a - Cable Barrel
b - Anchor Plate
Index
90-823224--2 796
6. Return remote control throttle lever to idle position and check to ensure that throttle plates are
completely closed.
g
e
73855
a
c
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
72791

71761
Cable End Guide

Cable Barrel
Bolt
Locknut
Throttle Lever
Flat Washer and Lockwasher
Throttle Plates
c
b
d
W.O.T.
a
IDLE
72794
a
b
c
d
Throttle Lever
Positive Stop Screw
Throttle Stop Lever
Throttle Stop Screw
Index
90-823224--2 796
7. Reinstall flame arrestor and tighten locknuts securely. Position crankcase vent hose against
flame arrestor as shown.

and install and adjust drive unit and remote control shift cables, using hardware retained.
IMPORTANT: After fluid hose installation in the
following, bleed power steering system as outlined in SECTION 1B - Maintenance of this manual, or refer to the appropriate Stern Drive Service Manual.
! CAUTION
71764

help avoid kinks in the hose.
a - Crankcase Vent Hose

IMPORTANT: Do not attach any accessory

ground () wires to transom plate ground point.
Accessory ground wires should only be attached
to ground stud on engine.
IMPORTANT: Be careful not to cross-thread or

over-tighten fittings.
8. Connect any grounding wires or accessories that

may have been disconnected.
9. Models with MerCathode: Connect wires to
MerCathode controller assembly as shown.
Apply a thin coat of Quicksilver Liquid Neoprene
to all connections.
22232
a - ORANGE Wire - From Electrode On Transom Assembly

b - RED/PURPLE Wire - Connect (Other End) to Positive
(+) Battery Terminal
c - BLACK Wire - From Engine Harness
d - BROWN Wire - From Electrode on Transom Assembly
IMPORTANT: Adjust shift cables as outlined in

Index
90-823224--2 796
11. Connect both hydraulic hose fittings.

a. Early Style Control Valves: Torque the large
fitting to 23 lb. ft. (31 Nm). Torque the small
fitting to 100 lb. in. (11 Nm).
a
12. Connect battery cables to battery by FIRST connecting positive (+) battery cable (usually RED)
to positive (+) battery terminal. Tighten clamp securely. Then, connect negative () battery cable
(usually BLACK) to negative () battery terminal.
NOTE: Spray terminals with a battery connection

sealant to help retard corrosion.
22023
a - Small Fitting
b - Large Fitting
b. Later Style Control Valve: Torque both fittings to 23 lb. ft. (31 Nm). Route hoses as
shown for each model
73786
All Models Except 502 Multi-Port Injection

a - Hose Fittings
73860
502 Multi-Port Injection with Oil Cooler Return

Lines on the Starboard Side of the Cooler
a - Hose Fittings
Index
90-823224--2 796

AT A LATER DATE
Index
90-823224--2 796
2
C
72924
MIE - VELVET DRIVE TRANSMISSIONS
Index
Table of Contents
Page
Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-1
Lubricants / Sealants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-1
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-2
Engine Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-2
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-3
Engine Installation and Initial Alignment . . 2C-3
Engine Final Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-4
Engine Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-6
Throttle Cable Installation and Adjustment . . . 2C-8
Weber 4 Barrel Carburetor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-8
Throttle Body Injection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-9
Multi-Port Injection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-9
Shift Cable Installation And Adjustment . . . . 2C-10
Velvet Drive Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-10
Index
2C-0 - MIE MODELS - VELVET DRIVE TRANSMISSIONS
90-823224--2 796
Fastener Location
Lubricants / Sealants
Lb. Ft.
Nm
Battery Cables
Engine Mount Pads
S
Securely
l
Hose Clamps
Mount Locking Nut
Propeller Shaft Coupler To
Transmission Output Flange
50
Description
Quicksilver 2-4-C
Marine Lubricant
With Teflon
Quicksilver Liquid
Neoprene
Part Number
92-825407A3
92-25711--2
68
Trunnion Clamping Screw / Nut

Remote Control
Shift Cable
Remote Control
Throttle Cable
Cable Barrel
Securely
Cable End
Guide
NOTE 1
Cable Barrel
Securely
Cable End
Guide
NOTE 1
NOTE 1: Tighten, then back nut off one half turn.

NOTE 2: Bend tab against adjusting nut.
Index
90-823224--2 796
MIE MODELS - VELVET DRIVE TRANSMISSIONS - 2C-1
Removal
! CAUTION
Engine Removal


2. Remove instrument panel harness connector
plug from engine harness receptacle after loosening clamp.
! WARNING
fuel immediately.
! CAUTION
eyes on engine.
a

inlet, loosen fuel line fitting, disconnect and suitably plug fuel line to prevent fuel in tank from leaking into bilge.
72578
5. Disconnect shift cable from transmission.

7. Disconnect exhaust system hoses.
9. Disconnect propeller shaft coupler from transmission output flange.
72580
72579
a - Suitable Sling
Index
90-823224--2 796
11. Remove front and rear engine mounting bolts.

Retain hardware.
e
a
g
72638
72638
All Engines
e
a
d
All Engines
a - Bolts Or Lag Screws (With Washers)

b - Slot Forward (If So Designed)
g
b
Installation
72594
Engine Installation and Initial

Alignment
Rear Mount - Typical
a. Engine mount(s) or adjustment WAS NOT

DISTURBED during engine service: Proceed to following Step 2.
a
g
b. Engine mount(s) or adjustment WAS DISTURBED during engine service:
IMPORTANT: Engine mounts must be adjusted,

as explained in the following, to center mount adjustment and establish a uniform height on all
mounts.
71182
Ensure that all mounts are:

(1) In the center of their up-and-down adjustment.
(2) Mounting hole, which is a slot, is forward.
(3) Large diameter of mount trunnion extended as shown.
(4) Each mount base is downward. Tighten
clamping screws and nuts slightly to prevent moving in or out. Mounts must be
free to pivot when installing engine.

a
b
c
d
e
f
g
Locking Nut
Adjusting Nut
Trunnion Clamp Screw and Nut, With Lockwasher
Slot Forward
3/8 In. 1/16 In. (10 mm 2 mm)
2-5/8 In. 1/16 In. (67 mm 2 mm)
Mount Trunnion
Index
90-823224--2 796
! CAUTION
! CAUTION
Engine Final Alignment

! CAUTION
To avoid vibration, noise and damage to transmission output shaft oil seal and bearings, engine must be properly aligned.

IMPORTANT: Engine alignment MUST BE RECHECKED with boat in the water, fuel tanks filled
and with a normal load on board.
2. Attach a suitable sling to lifting eyes on engine.

Refer to Removal section for location of lifting eyes.
Engine must be aligned so that transmission output

flange and propeller shaft coupler centerlines are
aligned and coupling faces are parallel within .003 in.
(0.07 mm). This applies to installations with solid couplings, as well as flexible couplings.
IMPORTANT: Engine bed must position engine

so that a minimum of 1/4 in. (6 mm) up-and-down
adjustment still exists on all four mounts after
performing final alignment. This is necessary to
allow for final engine alignment.
3. Lift engine into boat and position on engine bed
so that transmission output flange and propeller
shaft coupler are visibly aligned (no gap can be
seen between coupling faces when butted together). Adjust engine bed height, if necessary,
to obtain proper alignment. DO NOT use mount
adjustments to adjust engine position at this time.
1. Check mating surfaces on transmission output

flange and propeller shaft coupler faces to make
sure they are clean and flat.
2. Center propeller shaft in shaft log as follows:
a. Push down and then lift shaft as far as it will
move. Then place shaft in the middle of the
movement.
b. Move shaft to port and then to starboard as
far as shaft will move. Then place shaft in the
middle of the movement.
4. Check all four mounts to ensure that they are still

positioned properly, then fasten mounts to engine bed with appropriate bolts or lag screws and
hardware. Tighten lag bolts/screws securely.
c. With shaft in center of shaft log, as determined by above procedures a and b, align
engine to shaft.
5. Disconnect and remove sling. Proceed to Engine Final Alignment section following.
a
d
c
b
72595
a
b
c
d
Up
Down
Port
Starboard
Index
90-823224--2 796
3. Check that coupling centerlines align, by butting

propeller shaft coupler against transmission output flange. Shoulder on propeller shaft coupler
should engage recess on transmission output
flange face with no resistance.
NOTE: Some propeller shaft couplers may not have

a shoulder on mating face. On these installations,
use a straight edge to check centerline alignment.
5. If coupling centerlines are not aligned or if coupling faces are more than .003 in. (0.07 mm) out
of parallel, adjust engine mounts as follows:
a. TO ADJUST ENGINE UP OR DOWN: Loosen locking nut on mounts requiring adjustment and turn both front mount or rear mount
adjusting nuts equally.
IMPORTANT: Both front mount (or rear mount)
adjusting nuts must be turned equally to keep engine level from side to side.
WRONG
a
RIGHT
c
WRONG
72597
IMPORTANT: Remote V-Drive Models: refer to remote V-drive manufacturers instructions for
drive shaft (between transmission and remote
V-drive) alignment.
4. Check for angular misalignment, by hand holding
coupling faces tightly together; check for a gap
between faces with a .003 in. (0.07 mm) feeler
gauge at 90 intervals.
a
72594
Typical Mount
a - Locking Nut
b - Adjusting Nut
c - Clamping Screws and Nuts, Wit Lockwashers (Two Each
on Some Models)
d - Slot Forward (If So Designed - NOT Slotted On This Style
Rear Mount)
c
72598
a
b
c
d
Feeler Gauge
Transmission Coupling
Propeller Shaft
Straight Edge
Index
90-823224--2 796
b. TO MOVE ENGINE TO THE LEFT OR

RIGHT: Loosen clamping screw and nut on all
four mount brackets; move engine to the left
or right as necessary to obtain proper alignment. On mounts which do have a slotted
hole, a small amount of adjustment can be
obtained with slot on front end of mounts.
Loosen lag screws (which fasten mounts to
engine bed) and move engine, as required.
Tighten lag screws securely.
c. After engine has been properly aligned:
Tighten engine mount nuts securely, and be
certain to bend one of the tabs on the tab
washer down onto flat of mount adjusting nut.
Torque clamping screws and nuts to 50 lb. ft.
(68 Nm).
IMPORTANT: Large diameter of mount trunnion
MUST NOT extend over 3/4 in. (20 mm) from
mount brackets on any of the mounts.
d
IMPORTANT: All coupler bolts must be SAE

Grade 8 (Metric Grade 10.9) or better, with a
shoulder (grip length) long enough to pass
through the face mating plane of couplers.
6. Connect propeller shaft coupler to transmission
output flange. Attach couplers together with
bolts, lockwashers and nuts. Torque to 50 lb. ft.
(68 Nm).
NOTE: If propeller shaft coupler has setscrews, the

shaft should be dimpled at setscrew locations. Setscrews should be safety wired after being tightened
securely.
Engine Connections
1. Connect seawater inlet hose to seawater pump
as shown. Tighten hose clamp securely.
2. Connect water hoses to seawater pump.
a
a
71170
72599
a - Torque Clmaping Screw and Nut On All Four Mount Brackets To 50 Lb. Ft. (68 Nm)
b - Tighten Locking Nut On All Four Mounts Securely
c - Bend One Of The Tab Washer Down Onto Flat Of Adjusting Nut
d - Maximum Extension Of Large Diameter Of Trunnion - 3/4
In. (20 mm)
Engines With Combination Seawater / Fuel Pump

b - Hose To Cooler
c - Fuel Pump
Index
90-823224--2 796

! WARNING
a
72352

b - Hose To Cooler

with hose clamp. Tighten hose clamp securely.
a
c
b
50921
fuel immediately.
Make certain connection is secure. Check for
leaks.
5. Connect exhaust system tubes and hoses using
at least two hose clamps at each connection.
Tighten hose clamps securely.
NOTICE
Exhaust hoses must be connected to
exhaust elbows so that they do not restrict
the flow of discharge water from exhaust
elbow. If hoses are connected incorrectly,
discharge water from exhaust elbow will not
Harness Connection
a - Engine Wiring Harness Recptable Bracket
b - Instrument Wiring Harness Plug
c - Hose Clamp
CORRECT
! WARNING
fuel leak.

TEFLON TAPE.


OVER-TIGHTEN.
INCORRECT
72538
NOTE: Clamps not shown.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Throttle Cable Installation

and Adjustment

and tighten securely. DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN,
as cable must pivot freely.
Weber 4 Barrel Carburetor
5. Place remote control throttle lever in the wide

IMPORTANT: When installing throttle cable, be

sure that cables are routed in such a way as to
avoid sharp bends and/or contact with moving
parts. DO NOT fasten any items to throttle cable.
1. Lubricate cable ends and barrels.

2. Place remote control throttle lever in idle position
and attach cable end guide to carburetor throttle
lever as shown.
3. Grasp cable behind barrel and push lightly as
shown. Adjust cable barrel to align hole with anchor stud, then slide barrel onto stud.
d
c
b
b
71159
h
f
c
22552
Single Station
d
d
c
b
c
h
f
e
d
70392
22553
Dual Station
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
Throttle Lever Stud

Elastic Stop Nut and Washer
Spacer
Cable Barrel
Anchor Stud
Washer
Elastic Stop Nut
Cable End Guide
a
b
c
d
Throttle Shaft Lever [Contacts (b) at W.O.T. Position]

Carburetor Body Casting
Throttle Lever [Contacts (d) in Idle Position]
Idle Speed Adjustment Screw
Index
90-823224--2 796
Throttle Body Injection
Multi-Port Injection


1. Place remote throttle lever in idle position and

attach cable to throttle body, following cable manufacturers instructions.

lever.) Adjust barrel on throttle cable to align with

a
a
74174
a - Cable End Guide

b - Throttle Lever Stud
c - Locknut and Flat Washer - Tighten Until Nut Bottoms
Out Then Back Off One-Half Turn
d - Throttle Lever

c
b
74941
a - Cable End
b - Cable Barrel
a
71711
a - Cable Barrel
b - Anchor Plate
Index
90-823224--2 796
Shift Cable Installation And

Adjustment
1. Verify shift cable stud is in appropriate stud hole

as indicated. Tighten elastic stop nut securely.
IMPORTANT: When installing shift cables, be

avoid contact with moving parts and/or sharp
bends [all bends must make greater than an 8
inch ( 203 mm) radius]. DO NOT fasten any items
to shift cables.
Shift cable must be hooked up to remote control before starting installation and adjustment procedures.
Refer to Transmission - Propeller Rotation, as previously outlined in the front of this manual, for transmission shift lever direction of movement versus propeller shaft output direction of rotation.
50947
a - Anchor Stud Hole
Velvet Drive Transmissions
2. Place remote control shift lever, and transmission

shift lever in neutral position.
IN-LINE AND REMOTE V-DRIVE
3. Remove nuts and washers from shift cable attaching studs.
IMPORTANT: Velvet Drive Transmission Warranty is jeopardized if the shift lever poppet ball or
spring is permanently removed, if the shift lever
is repositioned or changed in any manner or if remote control and cable do not position shift lever
correctly.
F
b. Push in on control cable end with enough

pressure to remove play, and mark position
a on tube.
d. Measure distance between marks a and b,

and mark position c, half-way between
marks a and b.
a. Check that remote control is in neutral position.
c. Pull out on control cable end with enough

b on tube.
d
4. Locate center of remote control and control shift

cable play (backlash), as follows:
R
c
22457
c
a - Transmission Shift Lever
b - Shift Lever MUST BE Over This Letter When Propelling
Boat FORWARD
c - Shift Lever MUST BE Over This Letter When Propelling
Boat IN REVERSE
d - Poppet Ball MUST BE Centered in Detent Hole for Each
F-N-R Position (Forward Gear Shown)
e - Install Shift Lever Stud in This Hole, If Necessary,
To Center Poppet Ball in Forward and Reverse Detent
Holes
22024
5. Center cable-end play, then adjust cable barrel to

align holes in barrel, and in cable end guide, with
attaching points on transmission.
6. Temporarily install shift cable. Do not secure at
this time.
Index
90-823224--2 796
7. Place remote control shift lever in forward gear

position and check position of transmission shift
lever. Shift lever must be positioned as previously
indicated.
e
g
8. Place remote control lever in reverse gear position and again check shift lever position. Lever
must be positioned as previously indicated.
9. If transmission shift lever will position properly in

one gear, but not in the other, recheck shift cable
adjustment. If transmission shift lever will not
position properly in both gears, move transmission shift lever stud (a), from top hole in shift lever,
to bottom hole, and recheck for proper positioning. If proper positioning is still not obtained,
remote control does not provide sufficient shift
cable travel and must be replaced.
10. Reattach nut and washer to cable end guide stud.
Tighten until snug, then back off one-half turn.
11. Reattach nut and washer to cable barrel stud.
Tighten until they bottom out. Tighten securely,
but do not overtighten.
f
a
c
d
50947
Rear Entry Dual Station Installation

In-Line And V-Drive
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
Cable End Guide

Cable Barrel
Cable Barrel Stud
Spacer
Cable End Guide Stud
b
f
e
c
d
50947
Rear Entry Single Station Installation In-Line

And Remote V-Drive
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
Cable End Guide

Cable Barrel
Cable Barrel Stud
Spacer
Index
90-823224--2 796
NOTE: For models equipped with a dual station shift

bracket such as the one shown, refer to shift cable
manufacturers instructions for adjusting the cable.
Shift lever must be positioned as stated in the
preceding steps.
b
d
a
c
g
f
e
50946
Front Entry Single Station Installation In-Line

And V-Drive
22457
Dual Station Shift Bracket (Not Quicksilver)

b
a
c
g
f
50946
Front Entry Dual Station Installation In-Line

And V-Drive
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
Cable End Guide

Cable Barrel
Cable Barrel Stud
Spacer
Index
90-823224--2 796
5000 SERIES (8 DOWN ANGLE AND V-DRIVE)

For Left-Hand Propeller Shaft Rotation: Shift
cable hookup at remote control must result in shift
cable end guide moving in direction A when remote
control handle is placed in forward position.
IMPORTANT: The distance between studs (Dimension C) shown in the following illustration
is set at 7-1/8 in. (318 mm).
For Right-Hand Propeller Shaft Rotation: Shift

cable hookup at remote control must result in shift
cable end guide moving in direction B when remote
d
a
23242
73284
Remote control must provide a total shift cable travel

(at transmission end) of at least 2-3/4 in. (70 mm).
This is necessary to position transmission shift lever
fully in the forward and reverse gear positions. Insufficient shift cable travel will cause transmission to slip
and eventually fail.
8 Down Angle Shown (V-Drive Similar)

a
b
c
d
Shift Lever
Anchor Stud
Dimension Between Studs - 7-1/8 In. (318 mm)
Shift Cable Bracket
1. Connect and adjust Quicksilver shift cable(s) as

outlined following:
! WARNING
72602
a - 2-3/4 In. (70 mm) Minimum
Avoid serious injury or property damage caused

by improper shifting. Anchor stud for shift cable
must be installed in the correct hole.
a. Be certain anchor stud is installed in the front
hole as shown in the illustration following.
b
73284
a - Shift Cable Bracket

b - Anchor Stud in Front Hole
Index
90-823224--2 796
b. Place remote control shift lever and transmission shift lever in neutral position.
c. Remove nuts and washers from shift cable
attaching studs.
d. Locate center of remote control and control
shift cable play (backlash) as follows:
! CAUTION
Remote control and shift cable must position
transmission shift lever exactly as shown, or
transmission failure may occur. Do not remove
poppet ball or spring.
a
(1) Check that remote control is in neutral

position.
(2) Push in on control cable end with enough

pressure to remove play; mark position
(a) on tube.
(3) Pull out on control cable end with enough
effort to remove play; mark position (b) on
tube.
(4) Measure distance between marks (a) and
(b); mark position (c), half-way between
marks (a) and (b).
b
c
d
73248
Velvet Drive 5000 Series (8 Down Angle Shown,

V-Drive Similar)
72603
e. Center cable-end play, then adjust cable barrel to align holes in barrel and in cable end
guide, with attaching points on transmission.
f.
Temporarily install shift cable. Do not secure

at this time.
g. Place remote control shift lever in gear and
check position of transmission shift lever.
Shift lever must be positioned in the desired
detent hole.

b - Poppet Ball Must Be Centered in This Detent Hole when
Left-Hand Propeller Shaft Rotation Is Desired
c - Poppet Ball Must Be Centered in This Detent Hole when
Right-Hand Propeller Shaft Rotation Is Desired
d - Poppet Ball Must Be Centered in This Detent Hole for Neutral Position
e - Install Shift Lever Stud in This Hole when Using Quicksilver Shift Cables
h. Place remote control shift lever in opposite

gear position and again check transmission
shift lever position. Lever must be positioned
in the desired detent hole.
i.
IMPORTANT: Transmission is fully in gear

when shift lever comes to a stop, in either direction.
is repositioned or changed in any manner or if remote control and shift cable do not position shift
lever exactly as shown.
If transmission shift lever will not position

properly in one gear or both gears, recheck
shift cable adjustment and travel as previously instructed in a-h. If proper positioning is
still not obtained, remote control does not
provide sufficient shift cable travel and must
be repaired or replaced.
j.
Install nut and washer to cable end guide

stud. Tighten until snug, then back off one half
turn.
k. Install nut and washer to cable barrel stud.
Tighten until they bottom out. Tighten securely, but DO NOT OVER-TIGHTEN.
Index
90-823224--2 796
e
d
g
f
71897
71780
g
a
b
c
g
c
f
50073
Typical Single Cable Installation Rear Approach

a
b
c
d
e
f
Cable End Guide

Spacer (As Required)
Bushing(s)
Cable Barrel Stud
71972
Typical Dual Cable Installation Rear Approach

a
b
c
d
e
Cable End Guide

Spacer (As Required)
Bushing(s)
Cable Barrel (s) [Position(s) Only Indicated In
Lower Drawing]
f - Cable Barrel Stud
g - Cable End Guide Stud
Index
90-823224--2 796

AT A LATER DATE
Index
90-823224--2 796
2
D
74504
MIE MODEL - HURTH TRANSMISSIONS
Index
Table of Contents
Page
Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-1
Lubricants / Sealants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-1
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-2
Engine Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-2
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-3
Engine Installation and Initial Alignment . . 2D-3
Engine Final Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-5
Engine Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-7
Throttle Cable Installation and Adjustment . . . 2D-8
Weber 4 Barrel Carburetor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-8
Throttle Body Injection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-9
Multi-Port Injection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-10
Shift Cable Installation And Adjustment . . . . 2D-10
Index
2D-0 MIE MODELS - HURTH TRANSMISSIONS
90-823224--2 796
Fastener Location
Lubricants / Sealants
Lb. Ft.
Nm
Battery Cables
Engine Mount Pads
S
Securely
l
Hose Clamps
Description
Part Number
Quicksilver 2-4-C
Marine Lubricant
92-825407A2
Quicksilver Liquid
Neoprene
92-25711--2
Mount Locking Nut

Propeller Shaft Coupler To
50
68
Trunnion Clamping Screw / Nut

Remote Control
Shift Cable
Remote Control
Throttle Cable
Cable Barrel
Securely
Cable End
Guide
NOTE 1
Cable Barrel
Securely
Cable End
Guide
NOTE 1
NOTE 1: Tighten, then back nut off one half turn.

NOTE 2: Bend tab against adjusting nut.
Index
90-823224--2 796
MIE MODELS - HURTH TRANSMISSIONS - 2D-1

eyes on engine.
Removal
Engine Removal
2. Remove instrument panel harness connector
plug from engine harness receptacle after loosening clamp.
b
72578
! WARNING
fuel immediately.

filter inlet, disconnect and suitably plug fuel line
to prevent fuel in tank from leaking into bilge.
5. Disconnect shift cable from transmission.
7. Disconnect exhaust system hoses.
72580
9. Disconnect propeller shaft coupler from transmission output flange.
! CAUTION
72579
! CAUTION
engine components or damage to them will
occur.
a - Suitable Sling
Index
90-823224--2 796
(4) Each mount base is downward. Tighten

clamping screws and nuts slightly to prevent moving in or out. Mounts must be
free to pivot when installing engine.
11. Remove front and rear engine mounting bolts.

Retain hardware.
e
g
a
a
f
72638
All Engines
a - Bolts Or Lag Screws (With Washers)
b - Slot Forward (If So Designed)
70140
Front Mount - Typical

e

a
Installation
Engine Installation and Initial

Alignment
b
f
a. Engine mount(s) or adjustment WAS NOT
DISTURBED during engine service: Proceed to following Step 2.
b. Engine mount(s) or adjustment WAS DISTURBED during engine service:
IMPORTANT: Engine mounts must be adjusted,
as explained in the following, to center mount adjustment and establish a uniform height on all
mounts.

a
b
c
d
e
f
g
70158
Locking Nut
Adjusting Nut
Trunnion Clamp Screw and Nut, With Lockwasher
Slot Forward
3/8 In. 1/16 In. (10 mm 2 mm)
2-5/8 In. 1/16 In. (67 mm 2 mm)
Mount Trunnion
Ensure that all mounts are:

(1) In the center of their up-and-down adjustment.
(2) Mounting hole, which is a slot, is forward
(if so designed; new style is not slotted).
(3) Large diameter of mount trunnion extended as shown.
Index
90-823224--2 796
b. Models with V-Drive Transmission: Lift engine into boat and position on engine bed so
that enough propeller shaft protrudes
through transmission and output flange for
propeller shaft coupler to be attached. Then,
install coupler and position engine so no gap
can be seen between coupling faces when
butted together. Adjust engine bed height,
if necessary, to obtain proper alignment. DO
NOT use mount adjustments to adjust engine
position at this time.
! CAUTION
! CAUTION
engine components or damage to them will
occur.
2. Attach a suitable sling to lifting eyes on engine.
(Refer to Removal section for location of
lifting eyes.)
IMPORTANT: Engine bed must position engine
so that a minimum of 1/4 in. (6 mm) up-and-down
adjustment still exists on all four mounts after
performing final alignment. This is necessary to
allow for final engine alignment.
a. Models with Down Angle Transmission:

Lift engine into boat and position on engine
bed so that transmission output flange and
propeller shaft coupler are visibly aligned so
no gap can be seen between coupling faces
when butted together. Adjust engine bed
height, if necessary, to obtain proper alignment. DO NOT use mount adjustments to adjust engine position at this time.
72947
c
72948
a
b
c
d
a
72596
a - Propeller Shaft
b - Propeller Shaft Coupler
c - Transmission Output Flange
Propeller Shaft
Propeller Shaft Coupler
No Gap Allowed
3. Check all four mounts to ensure that they are still

positioned properly, then fasten mounts to engine bed with appropriate bolts or lag screws and
hardware. Tighten lag bolts/screws securely.
4. Disconnect and remove sling. Proceed to Engine Final Alignment section following.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Engine Final Alignment

! CAUTION
To avoid vibration, noise and damage to transmission output shaft oil seal and bearings, engine must be properly aligned.
IMPORTANT: Engine alignment MUST BE RECHECKED with boat in the water, fuel tanks filled
and with a normal load on board.
3. Check that coupling centerlines align, by butting

propeller shaft coupler against transmission output flange. Shoulder on propeller shaft coupler
should engage recess on transmission output
flange face with no resistance.
NOTE: Some propeller shaft couplers may not have

a shoulder on mating face. On these installations,
use a straight edge to check centerline alignment.
Engine must be aligned so that transmission output

flange and propeller shaft coupler centerlines are
aligned and coupling faces are parallel within .003 in.
(0.07mm). This applies to installations with solid couplings, as well as flexible couplings.
WRONG
RIGHT
1. Check mating surfaces on transmission output

flange and propeller shaft coupler faces to make
sure they are clean and flat.
WRONG
a. On V-Drive Transmission Models: Proceed
to Step 3.
b. On Down Angle Transmission Models:
Center propeller shaft in shaft log as follows:
72597
4. Check for angular misalignment, by hand holding

coupling faces tightly together; check for a gap
between faces with a .003 in. (0.07 mm) feeler
gauge at 90 intervals.
(1) Push down and then lift shaft as far as it

will move. Then place shaft in the middle
of the movement.
(2) Move shaft to port and then to starboard
as far as shaft will move. Then place shaft
in the middle of the movement.
(3) With shaft in center of shaft log, as determined by above procedures (1) and (2),
align engine to shaft.
b
a
d
c
50609
V-Drive Shown - Down Angle Similar
c
b
a
b
c
d
72595
a - Feeler Gauge (Check At (90 Degree Intervals)

b - Transmission Output Flange
c - Propeller Shaft Coupler
Up
Down
Port
Starboard
Index
90-823224--2 796
c. After engine has been properly aligned:

Tighten engine mount nuts securely, and be
certain to bend one of the tabs on the tab
washer down onto flat of mount adjusting nut.
Torque clamping screws and nuts to 50 lb. ft.
(68 Nm).
5. If coupling centerlines are not aligned or if coupling faces are more than .003 in. (0.07 mm) out
of parallel, adjust and retighten engine mounts as
follows:
a. TO ADJUST ENGINE UP OR DOWN: Loosen locking nut on mounts requiring adjustment and turn both front mount or rear mount
adjusting nuts equally.
IMPORTANT: Both front mount (or rear mount)
adjusting nuts must be turned equally to keep engine level from side to side.
NOTE: Some rear mounts have only one clamping

screw and nut on each side, instead of the style with
two shown following.
IMPORTANT: Large diameter of mount trunnion
MUST NOT extend over 3/4 in. (20 mm) from
mount brackets on any of the mounts.
a
d
a
b
e
c
b
d
70056
Typical Mount
a - Locking Nut
b - Adjusting Nut
c - Clamping Screws and Nuts, With Lockwashers (Two Each
on Some Models)
d - Lag Screws (Or Bolts)
e - Slot Forward (If So Designed - NOT Slotted On This Style
Rear Mount)
NOTE: Engine mount shown is typical. All models

are similar and adjust in the same manner.
b. TO MOVE ENGINE TO THE LEFT OR
RIGHT: Loosen clamping screw and nut on
all four mount brackets; move engine to the
left or right as necessary to obtain proper
alignment. On mounts which do have a
slotted hole, a small amount of adjustment
can be obtained with slot on front end of
mounts. Loosen lag screws or bolts (which
fasten mounts to engine bed) and move engine, as required. Tighten lag screws or bolts
securely.
70057
a - Torque Clamping Screw and Nut On All Four Mount Brackets To 50 Lb. Ft (68 Nm)
b - Tighten Locking Nut On All Four Mounts Securely
c - Bend One Of The Tab Washer Down Onto Flat Of Adjusting Nut
d - Maximum Extension Of Large Diameter Of Trunnion 3/4 In. (20 mm)
IMPORTANT: All coupler bolts must be Grade 8

(Metric Grade 10.9) or better, with a shoulder (grip
length) long enough to pass through the face
mating plane of couplers.
6. Connect propeller shaft coupler to transmission
output flange. Attach couplers together with
bolts, lockwashers and nuts. Torque to 50 lb.ft.
(68 Nm).
Index
90-823224--2 796
NOTE: If propeller shaft coupler has setscrews, the

shaft should be dimpled at setscrew locations. Setscrews should be safety wired after being tightened
securely.

with hose clamp. Tighten hose clamp securely.
a
c
Engine Connections
1. Connect seawater inlet hose to combination seawater/fuel pump assembly as shown. Tighten
hose clamp securely.
22557
Harness Connection
c
a - Engine Wiring Harness Receptacle Bracket

b - Instrument Wiring Harness Plug
c - Hose Clamp
! WARNING
a
70346
fuel leak.

TEFLON TAPE.


2-1/4 turns using a wrench. DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN.

Engines With Combination Seawater / Fuel Pump

b - Hose To Cooler
c - Fuel Pump
b
a
72352

b - Hose To Cooler
Index
90-823224--2 796
! WARNING
fuel immediately.
Make certain connection is secure. Check for
leaks.
4. Connect exhaust system tubes and hoses using
at least two hose clamps at each connection.
Tighten hose clamps securely.
NOTICE
Exhaust hoses must be connected to
exhaust elbows so that they do not restrict
the flow of discharge water from exhaust
elbow. If hoses are connected incorrectly,
discharge water from exhaust elbow will not
Throttle Cable Installation

and Adjustment
2. Place remote control throttle lever in idle position
and attach cable end guide to carburetor throttle
lever as shown.
3. Grasp cable behind barrel and push lightly as
shown. Adjust cable barrel to align hole with anchor stud, then slide barrel onto stud.
d
c
e
b
d
h
f
22552
Single Station
CORRECT
d
c
INCORRECT
b
72538
NOTE: Clamps not shown.
e
22553
Dual Station
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
Throttle Lever Stud

Spacer
Cable Barrel
Anchor Stud
Washer
Elastic Stop Nut
Cable End Guide
Index
90-823224--2 796

and tighten securely. DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN,
as cable must pivot freely.
5. Place remote control throttle lever in the wide



a
b
a
71159
d
c
b
74941
a - Cable End
b - Cable Barrel
a
b
c
d
70392
Throttle Shaft Lever [Contacts (b) at W.O.T. Position]

Carburetor Body Casting
Throttle Lever [Contacts (d) in Idle Position]
Idle Speed Adjustment Screw
Index
90-823224--2 796
Multi-Port Injection
Shift Cable Installation And

Adjustment
IMPORTANT: These Hurth transmissions are full
reversing transmissions. Direction of output/
propeller rotation is determined by hookup of
shift cable at remote control.
Shift cable must be hooked up to remote control
before starting installation and adjustment procedures. Refer to Transmission - Propeller Rotation,
as previously outlined in the front of this manual, for
transmission shift lever direction of movement versus propeller shaft output direction of rotation.
For Right Hand Propeller Rotation Shift cable
hookup at remote control must result in shift cable
end guide moving in direction A, when remote
For Left Hand Propeller Rotation Shift cable
end guide moving in direction B, when remote
74174
a - Cable End Guide

b - Throttle Lever Stud
d - Throttle Lever
23242

! WARNING
Avoid serious injury or property damage caused
by improper shifting. Anchor stud for shift cable
must be installed in the correct hole.
1. Be certain anchor stud is installed in the correct
mount hole as shown by the following illustration.
b
a
c
73588
71020
a
71711
a - Cable Barrel
b - Anchor Plate
Shift Cable Bracket - Anchor Stud Positions

a - Cable Bracket
b - Quicksilver Shift Cable Anchor Stud Location - 630A and
630V
c - Quicksilver Shift Cable Anchor Stud Location - 800A
Index
90-823224--2 796

avoid contact with moving parts and/or sharp
bends [all bends must make greater than an 8
inch ( 203 mm) radius]. DO NOT fasten any items
to shift cables.
d. Measure distance between marks a and

b, and mark position c, half-way between
marks a and b.
b
2. Check shift lever positioning as indicated:

a
IMPORTANT: Check that shift lever is positioned
approximately 10 aft of vertical when in the neutral detent position and that the distance (c)
between studs in the following is set at 7-1/8 in.
(318mm). If necessary, loosen clamping bolt and
position lever so that dimension c is as shown
when in the neutral detent position and retighten
bolt.
22024
6. Center cable-end play, then adjust cable barrel

to align holes in barrel, and in cable end guide,
with attaching points on transmission.
this time.
c
a
a
d
73587
Typical Hurth Transmission Shown

a - Shift Lever
b - Lever, in Neutral Detent, Must Be Approximately
10 Aft of Vertical
c - Dimension Between Studs - 7-1/8 in. (318mm)
d - Clamping Bolt
3. Place remote control shift lever, and transmission shift lever, in neutral position.
a on tube.
c. Pull out on control cable end with enough
b on tube.
73587
Typical
a - Shift Cable End Guide
IMPORTANT: Transmission is fully in gear

when shift lever comes to a stop, in either direction.
position. Check to ensure transmission is fully in
gear, as follows:
a. Hold shift lever in position.
b. Carefully slide shift cable off of anchor
points.
c. Attempt to move shift lever further.
Index
90-823224--2 796
9. Place remote control shift lever in the reverse

gear position. Check that transmission is fully in
gear, following same procedure.
adjustment. If transmission shift lever will not
position properly in both gears, move transmission shift lever stud (a), from top hole in shift
lever, to bottom hole, and recheck for proper
positioning. If proper positioning is still not
obtained, remote control does not provide
sufficient shift cable travel and must be replaced.
73589
CABLE
BARREL
STUD
c
b
e
50228
a - Shift Lever Stud (In Bottom Hole, If Required)

b - Lever, in Neutral Detent, Must Be Approximately
10 Aft of Vertical
c - Shift Lever Top Hole
11. Reattach locknut and washer to cable end guide

stud. Tighten until snug, then back off one-half
turn.
12. Reattach locknut and washer to cable barrel
stud. Tighten until they bottom out. Tighten securely, but do not overtighten.
NOTE: To change cable approach direction on

single or dual station installations, only the spacers/
bushings have to be switched to the opposite stud
(the studs are identical).
CABLE
END GUIDE
STUD
a
f
b
71210
Typical Single Cable - Forward Entry

a
b
c
d
e
f
Cable End Guide

Locknut and Washer
Spacer (Fits over Bushings)
Bushings
Cable Barrel Location
Spacer (Fit over Stud)
Index
90-823224--2 796
e
e
73587
73590
CABLE
END GUIDE
STUD
f
b
b
d
d
CABLE
BARREL
STUD
CABLE
BARREL
STUD
CABLE
END GUIDE
STUD
c
b
50229
a
b
Typical Single Cable - Rear Entry
Typical Dual Cable - Forward Entry
a
b
c
d
e
f
a
b
c
d
e
Cable End Guide

Locknut and Washer
Spacer (Fits over Bushings)
Bushings
Cable Barrel Location
Spacer (Fit over Stud)
71211
Cable End Guides

Locknut and Washer
Spacer (Fits over Stud)
Bushings
Cable Barrel Locations
Index
90-823224--2 796
73591
c
b
a
CABLE
END GUIDE
STUD
CABLE
BARREL
STUD
e
b
50073
Typical Dual Cable - Rear Entry

a
b
c
d
e
Cable End Guides

Locknut and Washer
Spacer (Fits over Stud)
Bushings
Cable Barrel Locations
Index
90-823224--2 796

AT A LATER DATE
Index
90-823224--2 796
ENGINE
3
A
72851
454 CID (7.4L) / 502 CID (8.2L)
Index
90-823224--2 796
454 CID (7.4L) / 502 CID (8.2L) - 3A-3
Table of Contents
Page
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-3
Lubricants/Sealers/Adhesives . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-3
Gen V And Gen VI (Except 7.4L Gen VI)
Engine Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-4
7.4L Gen VI Engine Specifications . . . . . . . . . 3A-10
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-15
Engine Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-15
Cylinder Head Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-15
Engine Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-16
Crankshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-16
Piston and Connecting Rods . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-16
Camshaft and Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-16
Cylinder Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-16
Valve Train . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-16
Intake Manifold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-17
Lubrication System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-17
Bearing Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-18
Piston Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-19
Pre-Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-19
Detonation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-19
Engine Mounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-20
Rocker Arm Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-22
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-22
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-22
Intake Manifold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-22
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-22
Cleaning and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-22
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-23
Rocker Arm / Push Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-24
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-24
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-24
Valve Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-24
Hydraulic Valve Lifters
(Flat and Roller Lifter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-24
Locating Noisy Lifters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-25
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-25
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-26
Valve Stem Oil Seal/Valve Spring . . . . . . . . . . 3A-26
Removal - Head Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-26
Valve Assembly (Exploded View) . . . . . . . 3A-27
Installation - Head Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-28
Cylinder Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-29
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-29
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-29
Cylinder Head and Valve Conditioning . . . . . 3A-30
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-30
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-30
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Valve Guide Bore Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Valve Springs - Checking Tension . . . . . . .
Valve Seat Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Valve Grinding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dipstick Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil Pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Torsional Damper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Crankcase Front Cover / Oil Seal . . . . . . . . . .
Oil Seal Replacement
(Without Removing Front Cover) . . . . . . . .
Crankcase Front Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flywheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Main Oil Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Rod Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inspection and Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Rod/Piston Assembly . . . . . . . . .
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Crankshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page
3A-31
3A-31
3A-32
3A-32
3A-33
3A-33
3A-36
3A-36
3A-37
3A-37
3A-37
3A-38
3A-38
3A-38
3A-39
3A-39
3A-39
3A-39
3A-39
3A-40
3A-41
3A-41
3A-41
3A-41
3A-41
3A-42
3A-42
3A-42
3A-43
3A-43
3A-44
3A-44
3A-44
3A-45
3A-45
3A-45
3A-45
3A-46
3A-47
3A-47
3A-49
3A-49
3A-50
3A-50
3A-51
3A-53
3A-54
3A-54
Index
3A-2 - 454 C.I.D. (7.4L) / 502 C.I.D. (8.2L)
90-823224--2
90-823224--2796
796

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timing Chain and Sprocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Crankshaft Sprocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Timing Chain Deflection . . . . . .
Camshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measuring Lobe Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Camshaft Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cylinder Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil Filter By-Pass Valve and Adaptor . . . . . . .
Inspection and/or Replacement . . . . . . . . .
Page
3A-54
3A-54
3A-55
3A-55
3A-56
3A-56
3A-56
3A-56
3A-56
3A-56
3A-57
3A-57
3A-58
3A-58
3A-58
3A-58
3A-58
3A-59
3A-59
3A-60
3A-60
3A-63
3A-63
Index
796
90-823224--2 796
454 CID (7.4L) / 502 CID (8.2L) - 3A-1
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Index
3A-0 - 454 C.I.D. (7.4L) / 502 C.I.D. (8.2L)
90-823224--2 796
DESCRIPTION
Alternator Brace to Alternator
Lb. In.
Lb. Ft.
192
Nm
9
Alternator Brace to Engine
30
41
Alternator to Mounting Bracket
35
48
Alternator Mounting Bracket
30
41
Camshaft Sprocket Gear
18
24
Carburetor
132
Connecting Rod Caps
15
(3/8-24 Nuts)
50
68
(7/16-20 Nuts)
73
99
35
48
Coupler/Flywheel(MCM)
Crankcase Front Cover
120
14
Crankshaft Pulley
35
48
Cylinder Head
85
115
Distributor Hold Down
20
27
Exhaust Manifold
30
41
Exhaust Manifold Elbow
30
41
Filter Adapter (5/16-18)
20
27
Flywheel
75
100
Flywheel Drive Plate (MIE)
35
48
Flywheel Housing to Block
30
41
Flywheel Housing Cover
80
Front Mount Bracket
30
41
Fuel Pump
25
34
Intake Manifold
35
48 (See Note)
Main Bearing Cap
110
149
Oil Baffle Nuts
25
34
Oil Filter Adapter Nuts
40
54
Oil Pan Bolts (5/16-18)
80
Oil Pan Drain Plug
15
20
Oil Pump
70
95
Oil Pump Cover
80
Power Steering Pump Brace to Block
30
41
Power Steering Pump Bracket
30
41
Rear Mount (MCM)
40
54
Rear Mount (MIE)
50
68
Remote Oil Connector (1/2 in. x 13)
25
34
Rocker Arm Cover

Rocker Arm Bolts
90
7.4L/454
454 Magnum/502
/
10
40
54
45
61
Note: 7.4L / 454 and 502 Multi-Port engines, Torque intake manifold fasteners to 25-30 Lb. Ft. (34-41 Nm).
Index
90-823224--2 796
454 CID (7.4L) / 502 CID (8.2L) - 3A-1
Torque Specifications (Continued)

DESCRIPTION
Lb. Ft.
Nm
Remote Oil Filter Adapter Nut/Fitting
20
27
Seawater Pump Brace
30
41
Seawater Pump Bracket
30
41
Spark Plugs
15
20
Starter Motor
50
68
Thermostat Housing
30
41
Torsional Damper
40
54
Transmission To Housing
50
68
Water Circulating Pump
35
48
Water Temperature Sender
20
27
Index
3A-2 - 454 C.I.D. (7.4L) / 502 C.I.D. (8.2L)
90-823224--2 796
Special Tools
MERCURY MARINE SPECIAL TOOLS
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
Piston Ring Expander
91-24697
Engine Coupler Wrench
91-35547
KENT-MOORE SPECIAL TOOLS
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
Valve Spring Compressor (Head on)
J5892
Valve Spring Compressor (Head off)
J8062
Valve Spring Tester
J8056
Valve Guide Cleaner
J8101
Carbon Remover Brush
J8089
Piston Pin Tool
J24086-B
Piston Ring Groove Cleaner
J3936-03
Piston Ring Compressor
J8037
Connecting Rod Guide Tool (3/8 -24)
J5239
Connecting Rod Guide Tool (7/16-20)
J35228
Oil Pump Suction Pipe Installer
J21882
Lift Indicator Tool
J8520
Torsional Damper Remover and Installer
J23523-E
Crankcase Front Cover Seal Installer
J22102
Crankshaft Gear and Sprocket Puller
J24420-B
Crankshaft Gear and Sprocket Installer
J20158-20
Air Adapter (Cylinder Inflator)
J23590
Main Bearing Remover and Installer
J8080
Rear Main Seal Installer
J38841
Lubricants/Sealers/Adhesives
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
Quicksilver Loctite 8831
92-32609-1
Quicksilver Perfect Seal
92-34227-1
Quicksilver RTV Sealer
92-91601-1
General Motors Cam and Lifter Prelube or Equivalent
Obtain Locally
Index
90-823224--2 796
454 CID (7.4L) / 502 CID (8.2L) - 3A-3
Gen V And Gen VI (Except 7.4L Gen VI) Engine Specifications

UNIT OF MEASUREMENT
In. (mm)
DISPLACEMENT
7.4L
Bore
454 MAGNUM
502 MAGNUM / 8.2L
4.25 (108)
Stroke
4.46 (113.28)
4.00 (101.6)
Compression Ratio
8.0:1
8.6:1
8.75:1
Heads
Cast Iron
(Oval Port)
Cast Iron
(Rectangular Port)
Intake Manifold
Cast Iron (Note 3)
Aluminum With Brass Inserts-High Rise (Note 1)
Block
Cast Iron (4 Bolt Main Bearing Caps)
Rods
Forged Steel
Pistons
Cast Aluminum (Note 2)
Forged Aluminum
Crankshaft
Cast Steel
Forged Steel
Camshaft
Cast Iron (Gen V) Steel (Gen VI)
Note 1: 7.4L / 454 and 502 Magnum Multi-Port engine is equipped with a cast aluminum intake manifold with
brass inserts.
Note 2: 7.4L Bravo Three engines with engine code
UB with serial number OF1589289 and lower will have forged pistons.
XX with serial number OF159290 and higher will have cast pistons
Note 3: Serial numbers OD838819 thru OF800699 are equipped with cast aluminum intake manifolds.
CYLINDER BORE
IMPORTANT: 7.4L Bravo Three engines with engine code UB with serial number OF1589289 and lower have
forged pistons. The piston specifications for the 454 Magnum must be used.
ENGINE
7.4L
454 MAGNUM
502 MAGNUM/
8.2L
Diameter
4.2500-4.2507
(107.950-107.967)
4.2451-4.2525
(107.826-108.013)
4.4655-4.4662
(113.423-113.441)
Out of Round
T
Taper
Production
Production
.001 (0.025) Max
Service
.002 (0.05) Max
Thrust Side
.0005 (0.0127) Max
Relief Side
.001 (0.0254) Max
Service
.001 (0.02) Over Production
PISTON
Clearance
Production
.0030-.0042
(0.0762-0.1066)
.0025-.0037
(0.0635-0.0939)
.0040-.0057
(0.1016-0.1447)
Service
.005 (0.12) Max
.0075 (0.15) Max
.0065 (0.16) Max
Index
3A-4 - 454 C.I.D. (7.4L) / 502 C.I.D. (8.2L)
90-823224--2 796

Unit of Measurement
In. (mm)
PISTON RING
7.4L
454 MAGNUM
502 MAGNUM
8.2L
Top
.0012-.0029
(0.0305-0.0737)
.0017-.0032
(0.044-0.081)
.0017-.0032
(0.044-0.081)
2nd
.0012-.0029
(0.0305-0.0737)
.0017-.0032
(0.044-0.081)
.0017-.0032
(0.044-0.081)
ENGINE
C
o
m
p
r
e
s
s
i
o
n
Groove
Side
Clearance
Production
Service
High Production Limit + .010 (0.02) Max

Top
.010-.018
(0.25-0.46)
.011-.021
(0.28-0.53)
2nd
.016-.024
(0.41-0.61)
.016-.026
(0.41-0.66)
Production
G
Gap
Groove
Side
Clearance
Oil
Service
High Limit Production + .010 (0.25) Max
Production
.0050-.0065 (0.127-0.165)
Service
Production
High Limit Production + .001 (0.25)

.010-.030
(0.254-0.762)
.020-.035
(0.508-0.889)
G
Gap
Service
High Limit
Production
.005 (0.12) Max
.010-.030
(0.254-0.76)
High Limit
Production
.005 (0.12) Max
PISTON PIN
502 MAGNUM
8.2L
ENGINE
7.4L
Diameter
.9895-.9897
(25.132-25.1371)
.9895-.9898
(25.134-24.140)
.0002-.0007
(0.0050-0.0177)
.00025-.00035
(0.0064-0.0088)
Clearance In Pin
Production
Service
Fit In Rod
454 MAGNUM
.001 (0.025) Max

.0021-.0031
(0.0533-0.0787)
Interference
.0008-.0016 (0.021-0.040)
Interference
Index
90-823224--2 796
454 CID (7.4L) / 502 CID (8.2L) - 3A-5

Unit of Measurement
In. (mm)
CRANKSHAFT
ENGINE
Diameter
Taper
M i
Main
Journal
Out of Round
Production
7.4L / 454 MAGNUM

No.1,2,3,4,5
2.7482-2.7489 (69.8042-69.8220)
Production
.0002 (0.005) Max
Service
.001 (0.02) Max
Production
.0002 (0.005) Max
Service
.001 (0.005) Max
No.1,2,3,4
.0007-.0030 (0.043-0.076)
No.5
.0025-.0038 (0.063-0.096)
No.1
.001-.003
(0.03-0.07)
.0010-.0015
(0.0254-0.0381)
No.2,3,4
.001-.003
(0.03-0.07)
.0010-.0025
(0.0254-0.0635)
Main
M
i Bearing
B i
Clearance
Service
S i
No.5
Crankshaft End Play
Taper
Out of Round
Rod Bearing Clearance
.0025-.0040 (.0635-.1016)
.006-.0010 (0.15-0.2)
Diameter
C
Connecting
i
Rod Journal
502 MAGNUM / 8.2L
2.1990-2.1996 (55.8546-55.8698)
Production
.0005 (0.0127) Max
Service
.001 (0.0254) Max
Production
.0005 (0.0127) Max
Service
.001 (0.0254) Max
Production
.0011-.0029 (0.028-0.074)
Service
.003 (0.076) Max
Rod Side Clearance

Crankshaft Runout @ No.3 Main Bearing
.013-.023 (0.35-0.58)
.0015 (0.038) Max
.0035 (0.088) Max
Index
3A-6 - 454 C.I.D. (7.4L) / 502 C.I.D. (8.2L)
90-823224--2 796

Unit of Measurement
In. (mm)
VALVE SYSTEM
7.4L
ENGINE MODEL
454 MAGNUM
Lifter
Hydraulic
Rocker Arm Ratio
1.70 to 1
Face Angle (Intake & Exhaust)
45
Seat Angle (Intake & Exhaust)
46
Seat Runout (Intake & Exhaust)
.002(0.05) Max
Seat Width
Production
Stem
S
C
Clearance
Service
Stem Diameter
502 MAGNUM
8.2L
Intake
1/32-1/16 [.03125 .0625] in. (0.79-1.58 mm)
Exhaust
1/16-3/32 [.0625-.09375] in. (1.58-2.38 mm)
Intake
.0010-.0027 (0.025-0.069)
Exhaust
.0012-.0029 (0.0304-0.0736)
Intake
.001 (0.02)
.003 (0.07)
.0037 (0.09)
Exhaust
.002 (0.05)
.004 (0.10)
.0049 (0.12)
Intake
.372 (9.45)
Exhaust
.372 (9.45)
Valve Margin (Intake and Exhaust)
.0312 (0.79)
Valve Lash (Intake and Exhaust)
Fixed Lash
Index
90-823224--2 796
454 CID (7.4L) / 502 CID (8.2L) - 3A-7

Unit of Measurement
In. (mm)
VALVE SPRING
2.12 (53.9)
454 MAGNUM
502 MAGNUM
8.2L
2.15 (54.6)
Closed at
1.88 in. (47.8 mm)
Does Not
Apply
110 Lbs.
(489 N)
Closed at
1.80 in. (45.7 mm)
74-86 Lbs.
(329-382 N)
Does Not
Apply
Open at
1.34 in. (35.1 mm)
Does Not
Apply
316 Lbs.
(1406 N)
Open at
1.40 in. (35.6 mm)
195-215 Lbs.
(867-956 N)
Does Not
Apply
Installed Height
1.875 (47.6)
1.88 (47.7)
Free Length
Does Not
Apply
1.86 (47.2)
ENGINE MODEL
7.4L
Free Length
Valve
V
l Spring
S i
(Note 1)
(Note 2)
Damper
p or Damper
p
S
Shield
Damper or Damper
Shield
P
Pressure
Approximate Number Of Coils

Valve Spring Fit in Damper Shield
.42-.094
(1.07-2.38)
Interference
4
Does Not
Apply
Note 1: 454/502/8.2L Models Only-Test spring pressure with inner and outer spring assembled.
Note 2: 7.4L Models Only Test spring pressure with damper shield installed.
Index
3A-8 - 454 C.I.D. (7.4L) / 502 C.I.D. (8.2L)
90-823224--2 796

Unit of Measurement
In. (mm)
HYDRAULIC FLAT TAPPET CAMSHAFT
Lobe Lift .002

002 (0.051)
(0 051)
Exhaust
.271 (6.683)
454 MAGNUM
502 MAGNUM
8.2L
.300 (7.62)
Intake
.282 (7.163)
.300 (7.62)
Duration at .050 In. ((1.27mm))

C
Cam
Lift
f
Exhaust
234
224
Intake
238
224
ENGINE MODEL
7.4L
ROLLER TAPPET CAMSHAFT
Lobe Lift .020

020 (0.051)
(0 051)
Exhaust
.284 (7.214)
454 MAGNUM
502 MAGNUM
8.2L
.342 (8.687)
Intake
.282 (7.163)
.342 (8.687)
Duration at .050 In.(1.27mm)

(
)
C
Cam
Lif
Lift
Exhaust
209
227
Intake
209
211
ENGINE MODEL
7.4L
Journal Diameter
1.9482-1.9492 (49.485-49.509)
Journal Out Of Round
.001 (0.025) Max
Camshaft Runout
.002 (0.051) Max
Timing Chain Deflection
.375 (9.5) from taut position [total .75 (19)]
FLYWHEEL
Runout
.008 (0.203) Max
Gasket Surface Flatness
.007 (0.178) Overall Maximum

.003 (0.076) within a 6 in. (152 mm) Span
CYLINDER HEAD
Index
90-823224--2 796
454 CID (7.4L) / 502 CID (8.2L) - 3A-9
7.4L Gen VI Engine Specifications

Unit of Measurement
In. (mm)
Displacement
454 CID (7.4L)
Bore
4.25 (108)
Stroke
4.00 (101.6)
Compression Ratio
8.0:1
Heads
Cast Iron (Oval Port)
Intake Manifold
Cast Iron
Block
Cast Iron (4 Bolt Main Bearing Caps)
Rods
Forged Steel
Pistons
Cast Aluminum
Crankshaft
Cast Steel
Camshaft
Steel
CYLINDER BORE
Diameter
Out of Round
T
Taper
Production
4.2500-4.2507 (107.950-107.968)
Production
.001 (0.025) Max
Service
.002 (0.051) Max
Thrust Side
.0005 (0.0120) Max
Relief Side
.001 (0.0254) Max
Service
.001 (0.0254) Over Production
PISTON
Clearance
Production
.0018-.0030 (0.0457-0.0762)
Service
.0018 (0.0457) Max
Index
3A-10 - 454 C.I.D. (7.4L) / 502 C.I.D. (8.2L)
90-823224--2 796

Unit of Measurement
In. (mm)
PISTON RING
C
o
m
p
r
e
s
s
i
o
n
Oil
Groove
Side
Clearance
Production
2nd
Service
.0012-.0029 (0.0304-0.0737)
High Production Limit + .010 (0.0254) Max
Top
.010-.018 (0.254-0.457)
2nd
.016-.024 (0.406-0.6096)
Production
G
Gap
Groove
Side
Clearance
Gap
Service
High Limit Production + .010 (0.254) Max
Production
.0050-.0065 (0.1270-0.1651)
Service
Production
.010-.030 (0.254-0.762)
Service
PISTON PIN
Diameter
Clearance In Piston
Fit In Rod
.9895-.9897 (25.132-25.1371)
Production
.0002-.0007 (0.0051-0.0177)
Service
.001 (0.0254) Max

.0031-.0021 (0.0180-0.0787) Interference
Index
90-823224--2 796
454 CID (7.4L) / 502 CID (8.2L) - 3A-11

Unit of Measurement
In. (mm)
CRANKSHAFT
Diameter
Taper
M i
Main
Journal
Out of Round
Production
M i Bearing
Main
B i Cl
Clearance
No. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
2.7482-2.7489 (69.8040-69.8220)
Production
.0004 (0.0102) Max
Service
.001 (0.0254) Max
Production
.0004 (0.0102) Max
Service
.001 (0.0254) Max
No. 1
.0017-.0030 (0.043-0.076)
No. 1, 2, 3, 4
.0011-.0024 (.0279-.0610)
No. 5
.0025-.0038 (0.0635-0.0965)
No. 1, 2, 3, 4
.0010-.0030 (0.0254-0.0762)
No. 5
.0025-.0040 (.0635-.1016)
Production
Service
Crankshaft End Play
.005-.0011 (0.1270-0.2794)
Diameter
Taper
C
Connecting
i R
Rod
d JJournall
Out of Round
Rod Bearing Clearance
Rod Side Clearance
2.1990-2.1996 (55.8546-55.8698)
Production
.0005 (0.0127) Max
Service
.001 (0.0254) Max
Production
.0005 (0.0127) Max
Service
.001 (0.0254) Max
Production
.0011-.0029 (0.0279-0.0736)
Service
.001 (0.0254) Max

.013-.023 (0.330-0.5842)
Index
3A-12 - 454 C.I.D. (7.4L) / 502 C.I.D. (8.2L)
90-823224--2 796

Unit of Measurement
In. (mm)
VALVE SYSTEM
Lifter
Hydraulic Roller
Rocker Arm Ratio
1.70 to 1
Face Angle (Intake & Exhaust)
45
Seat Angle (Intake & Exhaust)
46
Seat Runout (Intake & Exhaust)
.002 (0.05) Max
Seat Width
Production
S
Stem
Clearance
C
Service
Intake
.0300-.0600 (0.7620-1.5240)
Exhaust
.0600-.0950 (1.5240-2.4130)
Intake
.0010-.0029 (0.0254-0.0737)
Exhaust
.0012-.0031 (0.0300-0.0787)
Intake
.0037 (0.0939)
Exhaust
.0049 (0.1244)
Valve Lash (Intake and Exhaust)
Net Lash
VALVE SPRING
Free Length
Closed
V l S
Valve
Spring
i
P
Pressure
Installed Height
2.12 (53.9)
1.838 in. (46.6850
(
mm)) at
71-79 Lbs. (316-351
(
N))
Open 1.3470 in. (34.2130 mm) at
238-262 Lbs. (1059-1165N)
1.8380 (46.6850) .07937 (47.6)
Index
90-823224--2 796
454 CID (7.4L) / 502 CID (8.2L) - 3A-13
7.4L Gen Gen VI Engine Specifications

Unit of Measurement
In. (mm)
FLYWHEEL
Runout
.008 (0.203) Max
Gasket Surface Flatness
.004 (0.1016) Overall Maximum

.003 (0.076) within a 6 in. (152mm) Span
CYLINDER HEAD
Lobe Lift .020

020 (0.051)
(0 051)
Exhaust
.284 (7.214)
Intake
.282 (7.163)
Duration at .050 In. ((1.27mm))

C
Cam
Lift
f
Exhaust
209
Intake
209
Journal Diameter
1.9482-1.9492 (49.485-49.509)
Journal Out Of Round
.001 (0.025) Max
Camshaft Runout
.002 (0.051) Max
Timing Chain Deflection
.375 (9.5) from taut position

[total .75 (19)]
Index
3A-14 - 454 C.I.D. (7.4L) / 502 C.I.D. (8.2L)
90-823224--2 796
General
Some of the repairs in this section must be completed
with engine removed from boat. Engine removal
depends upon type of repair and boat design. Place
engine on repair stand for major repairs.
When engine removal is not required, make certain
that battery cables are disconnected at the battery
prior to performing any on-board repair procedures.
Lubricate all moving parts (during reassembly) with
engine oil. Apply Quicksilver Perfect Seal on threads
of and under heads of cylinder head bolts, and on
threads of all cylinder block external bolts, screws
and studs.
MIE (Inboard)
Code
7.4L
XY
7.4L EFI
UK
7.4L MPI
UD
8.2L
FH,HH
454 EFI Ski
UA
Rotation
LH
NOTE:Engines with a 6 or 7 preceding the block

code Gen VI engines. Example: 6XW would be a
7.4L Bravo.
Cylinder Head Identification

7.4L
Engine Identification
The MerCruiser Model can be determined by looking
at the last two letters of the engine code stamped into
the cylinder block. This code number is stamped on
all MerCruiser power packages and replacement
partial engines, but not replacement cylinder block
assemblies.
Gen V and VI Cylinder heads are identified by their

smaller and rounded intake ports.
If the engine serial number and/or model decals are

missing, the engine code letters may help in determining the engine models. Following is a list of GM
engines and their respective code letters.
72913
454 MAGNUM / 502 MAGNUM / 8.2L

Mark IV cylinder heads are identified by HI PERF
cast in the head under the rocker cover. Gen V and
VI cylinder heads are by their large rectangular intake
ports.
a
72312
a - Location Of GM Engine Code
MCM (Stern Drive)
Code
7.4L
XW
7.4L Bravo Three
UW,UB,XX
7.4LX EFI Bravo
UJ
7.4LX MPI Bravo
UC
454 Magnum
XA
454 Magnum MPI
UA
502 Magnum
FJ
502 Magnum MPI
FJ,HJ
Rotation
72914
LH
Index
90-823224--2 796
454 CID (7.4L) / 502 CID (8.2L) - 3A-15
Engine Rotation
Camshaft and Drive
Engine rotation terminology at times has caused confusion. To clarify, engine rotation is determined by observing flywheel rotation from the rear (transmission
or stern drive end) of the engine looking forward (water pump end).
Flat tappet camshafts made of cast iron and roller lifter camshaft are made of steel. All camshafts are driven at one-half crankshaft speed by a timing chain and
sprockets, or by timing gears, and are supported by
five main bearings, which are pressed into the block.
PROPELLER ROTATION IS NOT NECESSARILY

THE SAME as engine rotation.
A helical gear on the aft end of the camshaft drives

the distributor and oil pump.
When ordering replacement engines, short blocks or

parts for engines, be certain to check engine rotation.
Do not rely on propeller rotation in determining engine rotation.
On engines with cast iron camshaft and flat faced lifters, a taper on the lobes, coupled with a spherical
foot on the hydraulic valve lifters, causes the valve
lifters to rotate, thus reducing wear.
Cylinder Head
The cylinder heads are made of cast iron and have
individual intake and exhaust ports for each cylinder.
Stainless steel or graphite composition head gaskets

are used to retard corrosion.
Valve Train
72001
a - Left-hand Rotation (CCW) - All Stern Drive (MCM) Engines

And Inboard (MIE) (Standard) Rotation
Crankshaft
The crankshaft is supported in the block by five insert
type bearings. Crankshaft end thrust is controlled by
flanges on the No. 5 bearing. A torsional damper on
the forward end of the crankshaft serves to help
dampen any engine torsional vibration.
The valves and valve springs are of a heavy-duty design to withstand the high engine speeds encountered. Valve tips have been hardened to extend valve
life. Exhaust valve rotators are used on some engines (7.4L only) to help extend valve life.
Hydraulic valve lifters ride directly on the camshaft
lobes and transmit the thrust of the lobes to the push
rods which in turn actuate the valves through the
rocker arm.
In addition to transmitting thrust of the cam lobes, the
hydraulic lifters also serve to remove any clearance
(lash) from the valve train to keep all parts in constant
contact.
The valve lifters also are used to lubricate the valve
train bearing surfaces.
Piston and Connecting Rods

Piston pins are offset slightly toward the thrust side
of the pistons to provide a gradual change in thrust
pressure against the cylinder wall as the piston travels its path. Pins have a floating fit in the piston and
a press fit in the connecting rod (to hold them in
place).
Connecting rods are made of forged steel and are
connected to the crankshaft through insert type bearings.
Index
3A-16 - 454 C.I.D. (7.4L) / 502 C.I.D. (8.2L)
90-823224--2 796
Intake Manifold
CARBURETED AND THROTTLE BODY
INJECTION
The manifold is of the double level design for efficient
fuel distribution. The upper level of passages feeds
cylinders 2, 3, 5 and 8 while the lower level passages
feed cylinders 1, 4, 6 and 7. All passages are of approximately equal length to assure more even fuel-air
mixture to the cylinders.
The manifold is a cross flow design, with equal length
runners. Injectors are positioned directly above the
intake ports of each cylinder.
Lubrication System
The engine lubrication system is of the force-feed
type in which oil is supplied under full pressure to the
crankshaft, connecting rods, camshaft bearings and
valve lifters, and is supplied under controlled volume
to the push rods and rocker arms. All other moving
parts are lubricated by gravity flow or splash.
A positive displacement gear-type oil pump is
mounted on the rear main bearing cap and is driven
by an extension shaft from the distributor (which is
driven by the camshaft). Oil from the bottom of the
pump in the rear of the oil pan is drawn into the oil
pump through an oil pickup screen and pipe assembly.
If the screen should become clogged, a relief valve
in the screen will open and continue to allow oil to be
drawn into the system. Once the oil reaches the
pump, the pump forces the oil through the lubrication
system. A spring-loaded relief valve in the pump limits the maximum pump output pressure.
After leaving the pump, the pressurized oil flows
through a full-flow oil filter. On engines with an engine
oil cooler, the oil also flows through the cooler before
returning to the block. A bypass valve allows oil to bypass the filter and oil cooler should they become restricted.
bore. Some of the oil is then used to lubricate camshaft bearings. The remainder of the oil is routed to
the valve lifter oil galleries and No. 1, 2, 3, and 4
crankshaft main bearings by means of individual oil
passages which intersect with the annular grooves.
The camshaft bearings have holes which align with
the oil passages or annular grooves in the block and
allow oil to flow in-between the bearings and the camshaft journals. The oil that is forced out the front end
of the No. 1 camshaft bearing drains down onto the
camshaft drive and keeps it lubricated.
The oil which reaches the crankshaft main bearings
is forced through a hole in the upper half of each
bearing and flows in-between the bearings and the
crankshaft journals. Some of the oil is then routed to
the connecting rod bearings through grooves in the
upper half of the crankshaft main bearings and oil
passages in the crankshaft. Oil which is forced out
the ends of the connecting rod bearings and crankshaft main bearings is splashed onto the camshaft,
cylinder walls, pistons and piston pins, keeping them
lubricated. Oil which is forced out the front end of the
No. 1 crankshaft main bearing also assists in lubricating the camshaft drive. A baffle plate, mounted on the
bottom of the main bearings or in the oil pan, prevents
oil thrown from the crankshaft and connecting rods
from aerating the oil in the oil pan.
Oil which reaches the valve lifter oil galleries is forced
into each hydraulic valve lifter through holes in the
side of the lifter. From here, the oil is forced through
the metering valve in each of the lifters (which controls the volume of oil flow) and then up through the
push rods to the rocker arms. A hole in each rocker
arm push rod seat allows the oil to pass through the
rocker arm and lubricate the valve train bearing surfaces. After lubricating the valve train, oil drains back
to the oil pan through oil return holes in the cylinder
head and block.
The distributor shaft and gear also is lubricated by the
oil flowing through the right valve lifter oil gallery.
Some of the oil, after leaving the oil cooler and/or filter, is routed to the No. 5 crankshaft main bearing.
The remainder of the oil is routed to the main oil gallery, which is located directly above the camshaft and
runs the entire length of the block. From the main oil
gallery, the oil is routed through individual oil passages to an annular groove in each camshaft bearing
Index
90-823224--2 796
454 CID (7.4L) / 502 CID (8.2L) - 3A-17
Bearing Failures
70436
Scratched By Dirt
70436
a - Scratches
b - Dirt Imbedded In Bearing Material
Radius Ride
a - Worn Area
a
70436
Tapered Journal
a - Overlay Gone From Entire Surface
70436
Improper Seating
a - Bright Or Polished Sections
a
a
70436
Lack Of Oil
a - Overlay Worn Off
70436
Fatigue Failure
a - Craters or Pockets
Index
3A-18 - 454 C.I.D. (7.4L) / 502 C.I.D. (8.2L)
90-823224--2 796
Piston Failures
PRE-IGNITION CAUSES
Pre-Ignition
1. Hot spots in the combustion chamber from glowing deposits (due in turn to the use of improper
oils and/or fuels).
Pre-ignition is abnormal fuel ignition, caused by combustion chamber hot spots. Control of the start of ignition is lost, as combustion pressure rises too early,
causing power loss and rough running. The upward
motion on the piston is opposed by the pressure rise.
This can result in extensive damage to the internal
parts from the high increase in combustion chamber
temperature.
2. Overheated spark plug electrodes (improper

heat range or defective plug).
3. Any other protuberance in the combustion chamber, such as an overhanging piece of gasket, an
improperly seated valve or any other inadequately cooled section of material which can serve as
a source.
Engine failures, which result from the foregoing conditions, are beyond the control of Mercury Marine;
therefore, no warranty will apply to failures which occur under these conditions.
Detonation
72424
Pre-Ignition Damage
a
Detonation, commonly called fuel knock, spark

knock or carbon knock, is abnormal combustion of
the fuel which causes the fuel to explode violently.
The explosion, in turn, causes overheating or damage to the spark plugs, pistons, valves and, in severe
cases, results in pre-ignition.
Use of low octane gasoline is one of the most common causes of detonation. Even with high octane
gasoline, detonation could occur if engine maintenance is neglected.
OTHER CAUSES OF DETONATION

IMPORTANT: Use of improper fuels will cause engine damage and poor performance.
1. Over-advanced ignition timing.
c
2. Lean fuel mixture at or near full throttle (could be

caused by carburetor or leaking intake manifold).
3. Cross-firing spark plugs.
4. Excess accumulation of deposits on piston and/
or combustion chamber (results in higher compression ratio).
5. Inadequate cooling of engine by deterioration of
cooling system.
72314
a
b
c
d
Ignited By Hot Deposits

Regular Ignition Spark
ignites Remaining Fuel
Flame Front Collide
Index
90-823224--2 796
454 CID (7.4L) / 502 CID (8.2L) - 3A-19
NOTE:Engine failures, which result from the foregoing conditions, are beyond the control of MerCruiser;
therefore, no warranty will apply to failures which occur under these conditions.
Engine Mounts
72425
Detonation Damage
72317
Front Mount - All MCM (Stern Drive) Models

a
d
72318
Rear Mount/Flywheel Housing - All MCM (Stern

Drive) Models
72315
a
b
c
d
Spark Occurs
Combustion Begins
Combustion Continues
Detonation Occurs
Index
3A-20 - 454 C.I.D. (7.4L) / 502 C.I.D. (8.2L)
90-823224--2 796
Engine Mounts (Continued)
73055
Flywheel Housing - All MIE (Inboard) Models
71789
Rear Mount Assembly - MIE 7.4L/8.2L with Hurth

Down Angle and V-Drive Transmission
73056
Rear Mount Assembly - MIE 7.4L/8.2L with

Borg-Warner In-Line Transmission
72319
Rear Mount Assembly - MIE 7.4L with Borg-Warner Remote V-Drive Transmission
72319
a - Rubber Insert Cannot Be Removed
Front Mount Assembly - All MIE Models

a - Rubber Insert Cannot Be Removed
Index
90-823224--2 796
454 CID (7.4L) / 502 CID (8.2L) - 3A-21
Rocker Arm Cover
Intake Manifold
NOTICE
Removal
On Engines with Center Exhaust Outlet Exhaust
Manifolds: It may be necessary to remove exhaust
manifold before removing rocker arm cover. Refer to
Section 7B for removal. Also remove any component
that will interfere with the removal of the manifold.
For repair procedures on Fuel Injection

Engines, refer to Section 5C.
Removal
1. Drain engine cooling system.
1. Disconnect crankcase ventilation hoses.
2. Disconnect hoses from thermostat housing.
2. Remove any items that interfere with the removal

of rocker arm covers.
3. Disconnect intake manifold-to-circulating pump

by-pass hose from circulating pump.
3. Remove rocker arm cover.
4. Disconnect electrical leads interfering with removal.
Installation
5. Disconnect crankcase ventilation hoses from

rocker arm covers.
1. Clean sealing surfaces on cylinder head and

rocker arm cover with degreaser.
2. Place new rocker arm cover gasket in position in
rocker arm cover.
6. Disconnect throttle cable from carburetor. Remove fuel line and sight tube running between
fuel pump and carburetor.
7. Remove distributor cap and mark position of rotor
on distributor housing. Also, mark position of distributor housing on intake manifold. Remove distributor.
IMPORTANT: Do not crank engine over after distributor has been removed.
8. Remove other ignition components.
9. Disconnect any other miscellaneous items that
will prevent removal of manifold.
72928
IMPORTANT: It may be necessary to pry intake

manifold away from cylinder heads and block, in
next step. Use extreme care to prevent damage to
sealing surfaces.
a - Rocker Arm Cover Gasket
10. Remove intake manifold bolts, then remove intake manifold and carburetor assembly.
3. Install rocker arm cover. Torque bolts to 70 lb. in.

(10 Nm).
NOTE:If intake manifold requires replacement,

transfer all remaining parts to new manifold.
4. Reinstall exhaust manifolds, if removed.

5. Reinstall any items which were removed to allow
removal of rocker arm covers.
6. Connect crankcase ventilation hoses to rocker
arm covers.
7. Start engine and check for oil leaks.
Cleaning and Inspection

1. Clean gasket material from all mating surfaces.
IMPORTANT: When cleaning cylinder head mating surface, do not allow gasket material to enter
engine crankcase or intake ports.
Index
3A-22 - 454 C.I.D. (7.4L) / 502 C.I.D. (8.2L)
90-823224--2 796
2. Inspect manifold for cracks or scratches. Machined surfaces must be clean and free of all
marks and deep scratches or leaks may result.
2. Using Quicksilver Bellows Adhesive, glue neoprene gaskets to engine block between cylinder
heads.
3. Check intake passages for varnish buildup and

other foreign material. Clean as necessary.
3. Apply a small amount of RTV Sealer on neoprene

gasket ends.
4. Set intake manifold gaskets in place, aligning bolt
holes.
Installation
IMPORTANT: When installing intake manifold

gaskets, in next step, be sure to do the following:
Be sure to install gasket with marked side up.

Both gaskets are identical.
All MerCruiser V-8 GM engines that have automatic carburetor chokes must use an intake gasket that has an opening for the exhaust crossover port in the intake manifold.
Without this opening the automatic carburetor choke will not operate properly. The
choke will remain ON longer causing rough
engine operation and wasted fuel.
1. Apply Quicksilver Perfect Seal to intake manifold

gaskets around coolant passages (both
sides).
72514
a - Neoprene Gaskets
b - RTV Sealer
c - Gaskets
5. Carefully install manifold assembly. On all engines except 7.4L / 454 / 502 Magnum Multi-Port
Injection, torque bolts to 35 lb. ft. (48 Nm) in sequence as shown.
14
16
4
15
1
5
c
b
a
b
13
72514
a - Exhaust Crossover Port Opening in Gasket

b - Intake Valve Port
c - Coolant Passages
12
11
3
2
10
! WARNING
Be sure to read and follow package label directions when using bellows adhesive.
9
72515
Intake Manifold Torque Sequence
Index
90-823224--2 796
454 CID (7.4L) / 502 CID (8.2L) - 3A-23
6. Connect all electrical leads.

7. Connect hoses to thermostat housing.
8. Install fuel line and sight tube to carburetor and
fuel pump.
arm covers. Reconnect throttle cable to carburetor.
10. Install distributor. Position rotor and housing to
align with marks made during removal, then install distributor cap.
11. Install other ignition components and reconnect
wires.
12. Connect any other items which were disconnected from manifold during removal.
13. Start engine. Adjust ignition timing and carburetor. Check hose connections, gaskets and seals
for leaks.
1. Install push rods in their original locations. Be

sure push rods seat in lifter socket.
2. Install rocker arms, rocker arm balls and rocker
arm bolts in their original locations. Torque to
specification.
Valve Adjustment
No adjustment is required. Valve lash is automatically set when rocker arm bolts are torqued to 45 lb. ft.
(61 Nm).
Hydraulic Valve Lifters

(Flat and Roller Lifter)
1
2
3
14. Inspect fuel line connections for fuel leaks.
4
5
Rocker Arm / Push Rod
7
8
9
Removal
NOTE:When servicing only one cylinders rocker
arms, bring that cylinders piston up to TDC before removing rocker arms. When servicing all rocker arms,
bring No. 1 piston up to TDC before removing rocker
arms.
1
2
3
4
72030
1. Remove rocker arm covers as outlined.

2. Remove rocker arm assemblies and push rods.
7
8
9
IMPORTANT: Place rocker arm assemblies and

push rods in a rack for reassembly in their original locations.

1. Clean parts with solvent and dry with compressed air.
2. Inspect all contact surfaces for wear. Replace all
damaged parts.
Installation
IMPORTANT: When installing rocker arms and
rocker arm balls, coat bearing surfaces of rocker
arms and rocker arm balls with engine oil.
72031
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Push Rod Seat Retainer

Push Rod Seat
Metering Valve
Plunger
Check Ball
Check Ball Spring
Check Ball Retainer
Plunger Spring
Lifter Body
Index
3A-24 - 454 C.I.D. (7.4L) / 502 C.I.D. (8.2L)
90-823224--2 796
Hydraulic valve lifters require little attention. Lifters

are extremely simple in design. Normally, readjustments are not necessary and servicing requires only
that care and cleanliness be exercised in the handling of parts.
Locating Noisy Lifters

Locate a noisy valve lifter by using a piece of garden
hose approximately 4 ft. (1.2 m) in length. Place one
end of hose near end of each intake and exhaust
valve, with other end of hose to the ear. In this manner, sound is localized, making it easy to determine
which lifter is at fault.
Another method is to place a finger on face of valve
spring retainer. If lifter is not functioning properly, a
distinct shock will be felt when valve returns to its
seat.
In most cases, where noise exists in one or more lifters, all lifter units should be removed, disassembled,
cleaned in solvent, reassembled and reinstalled in
engine. If dirt, corrosion, carbon, etc., is shown to exist in one unit, it more likely exists in all the units; thus
it would only be a matter of time before all lifters
caused trouble.
Removal
IMPORTANT: Keep push rod and hydraulic valve
lifter from each valve together as a matched set
and mark them so they can be reinstalled in the
same location later.
Remove as outlined:
1. Remove rocker arm covers.
General types of valve lifter noise are as follows:
2. Remove intake manifold.
1. Hard rapping noise - usually caused by plunger

becoming tight in bore of lifter body so that return
spring cannot push plunger back up to working
position. Probable causes are:
3. Remove rocker arm assemblies and push rods.
a. Excessive varnish or carbon deposit, causing

abnormal stickiness.
b. Galling or pickup between plunger and bore
of lifter body, usually caused by an abrasive
piece of dirt or metal wedged between plunger and lifter body.
4. Remove valve lifters.
NOTE:Gen VI engines with roller lifters have additional valve train components shown below.
b
a
2. Moderate rapping noise - probable causes are:

a. Excessively high leakdown rate.
72329
b. Leaky check valve seat.

c. Improper adjustment.
3. General noise throughout valve train - this will, in
most cases, be a definite indication of insufficient
oil supply or improper adjustment.
a - Lifter Restrictor Retainer

b - Fasteners
4. Intermittent clicking - probable causes are:

b
a. A microscopic piece of dirt momentarily

caught between ball seat and check valve
ball.
b. In rare cases, ball itself may be out of round
or have a flat spot.
c. Improper adjustment.
72340
a - Roller Lifter Restrictor

b - Roller Lifter
5. Remove lifter restrictors on roller lifters models.

6. Remove valve lifters.
Index
90-823224--2 796
454 CID (7.4L) / 502 CID (8.2L) - 3A-25
Installation
3. Using valve spring compressor as shown, compress valve spring and remove valve locks.
IMPORTANT: It is recommended that the engine

oil be changed and a new oil filter be installed
whenever servicing valve lifters or camshaft.
IMPORTANT: Before installing lifters, coat the

bottom of the lifter with engine oil. If new lifters
or a new camshaft have been installed, an additive containing EP lube (such as General Motors
Cam and Lifter Pre-lube or equivalent) should be
poured over camshaft lobes before installing lifters.
IMPORTANT: Before installation, coat entire
valve lifter with engine oil.
72516
IMPORTANT: DO NOT install used valve lifters if

a new camshaft has been installed.
a - Valve Spring Compressor (J-5892)

b - Rocker Arm Nut
1. Install hydraulic valve lifters and components.
4. Slowly release valve spring compressor. Remove cap, shield, and valve spring.
2. Install intake manifold.

3. Install push rods and rocker arms. Torque rocker
arm bolts to specification.
4. Install rocker arm cover.
IMPORTANT: Keep air pressure in cylinder while

springs, caps, and valve locks are removed or
valves will fall into cylinder.
5. Remove oil shields from valve stems.
Valve Stem Oil Seal/Valve

Spring
Removal - Head Installed
1. Remove:
a. Rocker arm cover.
b. Spark plug of affected cylinder.
c. Rocker arm assembly.
2. Install air line adaptor tool (J-23590) in spark plug

hole and apply compressed air to hold valves in
place.
NOTE:If compressed air is not available, piston may

be brought up to TDC and used to keep valves from
falling out of valve guides.
72149
a - Valve Stem Oil Shield
IMPORTANT: Do not turn crankshaft while valve

springs, retainers, and locks are removed or
valves will fall into cylinder.
Index
3A-26 - 454 C.I.D. (7.4L) / 502 C.I.D. (8.2L)
90-823224--2 796
Valve Assembly (Exploded View)

1
1
1
2
3
5
5
7
7
8
72278
454 Magnum / 502 Magnum/ 8.2L
72279
7.4L Only
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Valve Lock
Retainer
Oil Shield Seal
Oil Shield
Outer Spring
Damper Shield
Rotator
Intake Valve
Exhaust Valve
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Valve Lock
Retainer
Oil Shield
Inner Spring
Outer Spring
Shim
Intake Valve
Exhaust Valve
Index
90-823224--2 796
454 CID (7.4L) / 502 CID (8.2L) - 3A-27
454 MAGNUM / 502 MAGNUM / 8.2L
Installation - Head Installed
1. Place shim on valve spring seat.

7.4L
1. Place rotator or shim on valve spring seat.
2. Coat valve stem and new seal with engine oil. Install seal over valve stem.
2. If taken apart, reassemble damper and valve

spring as shown. Make sure tighter wound coils
of spring and damper are on the same end.
3. If taken apart, reassemble damper and valve

spring. Place on top of rotator or shim.
4. Set valve spring assembly and cap in position
over valve stem.
5. Compress spring, using valve spring compressor, and install valve locks (grease may be used
to hold valve locks in place). Slowly release tool,
making sure valve locks seat properly in valve
stem grooves.
72149
3. Place valve spring assembly in position with

tighter wound coils against spring seat.
IMPORTANT: Valve seal and cap must be assembled as shown before installation.
72149
72516

b - Rocker Arm Nut
6. Install push rods and rocker arm assemblies.

Torque to specifications.
7. Install rocker arm cover [torque to 90 in. ft. (10
Nm)] and spark plug [torque to 22 lb. ft. (30
Nm)].
4. Coat valve stem and new seal with engine oil.

5. Set cap and seal assembly on valve stem. Align
valve stem with center of valve seal.
6. Compress valve spring, using valve spring compressor, and install valve locks (grease may be
used to hold valve locks in place). Slowly release
tool to prevent damaging seal. Make sure valve
locks seat properly in valve stem grooves.
7. Install push rods and rocker arm assemblies.
Torque to specifications.
8. Install rocker arm cover [torque to 90 in. ft.
(10 Nm)] and spark plug [torque to 22 lb. ft.
(30 Nm)].
Index
3A-28 - 454 C.I.D. (7.4L) / 502 C.I.D. (8.2L)
90-823224--2 796
Cylinder Head
! CAUTION
Removal
1. Drain engine cooling system.
2. Remove as outlined:
a. Exhaust manifolds.
b. Intake manifold.
c. Rocker arm covers.
d. Rocker arm assemblies and push rods (keep
in order for reassembly in their original locations).
e. Any components attached to front or rear of
cylinder head.
f.
Installation
Spark plugs.
DO NOT use sealer on head gaskets.

1. Place head gasket in position over dowel pins.
2. Carefully set cylinder head in place over dowel
pins.
3. Coat threads of head bolts with Quicksilver Perfect Seal and install finger-tight.
4. To insure gasket sealing, torque head bolts in
three steps, following torque sequence for each
step. Start first step at 20 lb. ft. (27 Nm), second
step at 50 lb. ft. (68 Nm), and finish with a final
torque of
7.4L
85 lb. ft. (115 Nm)
454/502 Magnum
92 lb. ft. (124 Nm)
g. Head bolts.
! CAUTION
The head gasket may be holding cylinder head to
block. Use care when prying off cylinder heads.
DO NOT damage gasket surfaces. DO NOT drop
cylinder heads.
3. Place cylinder head on wooden blocks to prevent
damage to gasket surfaces.

1. Clean gasket material and sealer from engine
block and cylinder heads.
2. Inspect sealing surfaces for deep nicks and
scratches.
72944
Cylinder Head Torque Sequence

5. Install push rods and rocker arm assemblies in
their original positions. Coat threads on rocker
arm bolt with Perfect Seal. Torque
7.4L
40 lb. ft. (54 Nm)
454/502 Magnum
45 lb. ft. (61 Nm)
6. Install as outlined:
3. Inspect for corrosion around cooling passages.
a. Intake manifold.
4. Clean head bolt threads and engine block bolt

hole threads, making sure no dirt, old oil or coolant remain.
b. Rocker arm covers.

c. Exhaust manifolds.
d. Spark plugs.
e. Any components removed from front or rear
of cylinder heads.
Index
90-823224--2 796
454 CID (7.4L) / 502 CID (8.2L) - 3A-29
7. Follow procedures in Section 6A or 6B of this

manual:
Seawater Cooled Models: Provide for adequate
water supply to seawater pickup (see Section
6A).
Closed Cooled Models: Refill closed cooling
section (see Section 6B), and provide adequate
water supply to seawater pickup.
Cleaning
1. Clean push rods and rocker arm assemblies.
2. Clean carbon from valves using a wire wheel.
3. Clean gasket material from cylinder head mating
surfaces.
4. Clean all carbon from combustion chambers and
valve ports using carbon remover brush.
a
! CAUTION
Ensure that cooling water supply is available before starting the engine.
8. Start engine, set timing, set idle speed, and
check for leaks.
Cylinder Head and Valve

Conditioning
Disassembly
72567
1. Using valve spring compressor, compress valve

spring and remove valve locks. Slowly release
tool.
a - Carbon Remover Brush (J-8089)
5. Thoroughly clean valve guides with valve guide

cleaner.
a
a
72564
a - Valve Guide Cleaner (J-8101)
72565
2. Remove all valve components.

3. Remove valves from cylinder head and place in
a rack, in order, for reassembly in their original
locations.
Index
3A-30 - 454 C.I.D. (7.4L) / 502 C.I.D. (8.2L)
90-823224--2 796
Inspection
1. Inspect cylinder heads for cracks in exhaust
ports, water jackets, and combustion chambers
(especially around spark plug holes and valve
seats). Replace heads if any cracks are found.
b. Holding valve head off seat about 1/16 in. (2

mm), move valve stem back and forth in direction shown. Compare stem clearance with
specifications.
2. Inspect cylinder head gasket surface for burrs,

nicks, or erosion or other damage. Also, check
flatness of cylinder head gasket surface, using a
machinists straight edge and feeler gauges as
shown. Refer to Specifications.
c
a
b
a
72566
a - Straight Edge
b - Feeler Gauge
c - Take Both Measurements Diagonally Across Head (Both
Ways) And Straight Down Center Of The Head
IMPORTANT: Cylinder head-to-block gasket surface should be resurfaced if warped more than
specified. When head resurfacing is required,
cylinder head-to-intake manifold gasket surface
on head must be milled to provide proper alignment between intake manifold and head.
3. Inspect valves for burned heads, cracked faces
or damaged stems.
4. Inspect rocker arm bolts and push rod guides for
wear and damage.
IMPORTANT: Excessive valve stem to bore clearance will cause excessive oil consumption and
possible valve breakage. Insufficient clearance
will result in noisy and sticky valves.
72563
a - Valve Stem
b - Dial Indicator
c - Valve Guide
c. If clearance exceeds specifications, it will be

necessary to ream valve guides for oversized
valves, as outlined under Valve Guide Bore
Repair.
Valve Guide Bore Repair

IMPORTANT: Be sure to measure valve stem diameter of both the intake and exhaust valve, as
valve stem diameter may or may not be the same
for both valves.
If .015 in. oversize valves are required, ream valve
guide bores for oversize valves, as follows:
5. Measure valve stem clearance as follows:

a. Attach a dial indicator to cylinder head, positioning it against the valve stem and close to
the valve guide.
Index
90-823224--2 796
454 CID (7.4L) / 502 CID (8.2L) - 3A-31
1. Measure valve stem diameter of old valve being

replaced and select proper size valve guide
reamer from chart below.
Standard Valve
Stem Diameter
Reamer Required For

.015 In. Oversize Valve
.372 In.
J-7049
2. Ream valve guide bores, as shown.
Valve Seat Repair

Valve seat reconditioning is very important, since
seating of valves must be perfect for engine to deliver
maximum power and performance.
Another important factor is valve head cooling. Good
contact between each valve and its seat in head is
important to ensure that heat in valve head will be
properly dispersed.
Several different types of equipment are available for
reseating valve seats. Equipment manufacturers
recommendations should be followed carefully to attain proper results.
a
b c
72927
3. Remove the sharp corner created by reamer at

top of valve guide.
Valve Springs - Checking Tension

NOTE:On 7.4L models, spring tension must be
tested with damper removed. All other models require testing with dampers installed. Refer to Specifications.
IMPORTANT: Springs should be replaced if not
within 10 lb. (44 N) of specified tension.
50668
Typical 3 Angle Valve Seat

a
b
c
d
Top Angle (30)

Seat Angle (46)
Bottom Angle (60)
Seat Width
IIntake - .060-.090 in (1.52-2.29 mm)
Exhaust - .060-.090 in (1.52-2.29 mm)
Regardless of type of equipment, however, it is essential that valve guide bores be free from carbon or
dirt to achieve proper centering of pilot in valve guide,
ensuring concentricity.
b
a
72308
72568
a - Valve Spring Tester (J-8056)

b - Torque Wrench
Measuring Valve Seat Concentricity
Index
3A-32 - 454 C.I.D. (7.4L) / 502 C.I.D. (8.2L)
90-823224--2 796
Valve Grinding
Reassembly
Valves that are pitted must be refaced to the proper

angle. Valve stems which show excessive wear, or
valves that are warped excessively, must be replaced. When a valve head which is warped excessively is refaced, a knife edge will be ground on part
or all of the valve head, due to the amount of metal
that must be removed to completely reface. Knife
edges lead to breakage, burning, or pre-ignition due
to heat localizing on this knife edge. If the edge of the
valve head is less than 1/32 in. (0.8 mm) after grinding, replace the valve.
1. Lubricate valve guides and valve stems with engine oil.

2. Install each valve in the port from which it was removed or to which it was fitted.
3. Install valve rotators, shims, springs, seals, and
caps as shown under Valve Assembly (Exploded View) for each particular engine.
4. Using valve spring compressor, compress valve
spring and install valve locks (grease may be
used to hold locks in place).
Several different types of equipment are available for

refacing valves. The recommendation of the manufacturer of the equipment being used should be
carefully followed to attain proper results.
EXHAUST
INTAKE
72565
50695
Exhaust
a - 372 In. (9.45 mm)
b - 1/32 [.031] In. (0.79 mm) Min.
Intake
a - 372 In. (9.45 mm)
b - 1/32 [.031] In. (0.79 mm) Min.
Index
90-823224--2 796
454 CID (7.4L) / 502 CID (8.2L) - 3A-33
5. Slowly release tool, making sure valve locks seat

properly in grooves of valve stem.
1
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
72278
72279
7.4L
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Valve Lock
Retainer
Oil Shield
Oil Shield Seal
Outer Spring
Damper Shield
Rotator
Intake Valve
Exhaust Valve
454 Magnum / 502 Magnum / 8.2L

a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
Valve Lock
Retainer
Oil Shield
Inner Spring
Outer Spring
Shim
Intake Valve
Exhaust Valve
Index
3A-34 - 454 C.I.D. (7.4L) / 502 C.I.D. (8.2L)
90-823224--2 796
6. Check installed height of valve springs using a

narrow, thin scale cutaway as shown. Measure
from spring seat to top of valve spring, as shown.
If measurement exceeds specified height, install
a valve spring shim and recheck. DO NOT shim
valve springs to give an installed height less than
the minimum specified.
a
50037
72562
Cutaway Scale
a - Cut Away This Portion (1/2 Inch)
b - Valve Spring Installed Height
Index
90-823224--2 796
454 CID (7.4L) / 502 CID (8.2L) - 3A-35
Dipstick Specifications
All Engines
UNIT OF MEASUREMENT
In. (mm)
1/2
(13)
1/2
(13)
1/2
(13)
35-1/4
(895)
FULL
ADD
1/2
(13)
16-43/64
(423)
15-1/8
(384)
33-1/2
(849)
17-13/64
(437)
FULL
ADD
19/32
(15)
19-7/64
(485)
FULL
ADD
59/64
(23)
72341
a - MCM Engines (805567)

b - MIE Velvet Drive In Line Transmissions (821503-3)
c - MIE All Transmissions Except Velvet Drive (821503-4)
Index
3A-36 - 454 C.I.D. (7.4L) / 502 C.I.D. (8.2L)
90-823224--2 796
IMPORTANT: Quicksilver RTV Sealer sets up in

about 15 minutes. Be sure to complete assembly
promptly.
Oil Pan
Removal
1. Drain crankcase oil.
2. Remove dipstick and tube, or tubes, if equipped

with two. Note shape of port and starboard tubes
as shown following to aid in reassembly. On High
Output (H.O.) Engine only, disconnect outlet
hose of seawater pump.
IMPORTANT: On Generation V engines DO NOT

move or disturb the orientation of fitting on bottom of pan or incorrect oil level readings may be
obtained.
72544
a - Joints Of Rear Seal Retainer

b - Joints Of Front Cover
3. Install oil pan gasket in position as shown.

b
NOTE:A one-piece oil pan gasket may be re-used if

it is still pliable and is not cracked, torn or otherwise
damaged.
a
71308
Generation V MIE Engine Oil Pan

a - Factory Positioned Fitting For Tubes (Do Not Move)
b - Port Tube
c - Starboard Tube
3. Remove oil pan.

72545
Installation
1. Clean sealing surfaces of engine block and oil
pan.
2. Apply a small amount of Quicksilver RTV Sealer
to joints of rear seal retainer and joints of front
cover.
a - Oil Pan Gasket
4. Install oil pan. Starting from the center and working outward in each direction, tighten 5/16-18
threaded fasteners to 165 lb. in. (19 Nm).
5. Install dipstick tube(s) and dipstick(s). Be certain,
if equipped with two tubes, that they are fitted
where they were removed, and positioned as
shown following.
Index
90-823224--2 796
454 CID (7.4L) / 502 CID (8.2L) - 3A-37
IMPORTANT: DO NOT move or disturb the orientation of fitting on bottom of pan or incorrect oil
level readings may be obtained.
The oil pump consists of two gears and a pressure

regulator valve enclosed in a two-piece housing. Oil
pump is driven by distributor shaft which is driven by
a helical gear on camshaft.
Removal
1. Remove oil pan as outlined.
2. Remove gasket carefully as the one-piece gasket for the oil pan may be reused if still pliable and
not cracked, torn, etc.
3. Remove baffle.
71308
Generation V MIE Engine Oil Pan

a - Factory Positioned Fitting For Tubes (Do Not Move)
b - Port Tube
c - Starboard Tube
6. Fill crankcase with required quantity of oil of specified viscosity. See Section 1B - Maintenance.
Oil Pump
c
5
6
7
72545
a - Nuts (5)
b - Baffle
c - Oil Pump
10
4
11
4. Remove oil pump.
Disassembly
1. Remove pump cover.
2
Oil Pump Assembly
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011-
Extension Shaft
Shaft Coupling
Pump Body
Drive Gear and Shaft
Idler Gear
Pickup Screen and Pipe
Pump Cover
Pressure Regulator Valve
Pressure Regulator Spring
Retaining Pin
Screws
72277
IMPORTANT: Mark gear teeth for reassembly with

same teeth indexing.
2. Remove idler gear and drive gear from pump
body.
3. Remove retaining pin, spring, and pressure regulator valve from pump cover.
Index
3A-38 - 454 C.I.D. (7.4L) / 502 C.I.D. (8.2L)
90-823224--2 796
Installation
1. Wash all parts in cleaning solvent and dry with

compressed air.
1. Install pump, with extension shaft, to rear main

bearing, aligning extension shaft with distributor
drive shaft.
2. Inspect pump body and cover for cracks or excessive wear.

3. Inspect pump gears for damage and excessive
wear.
2. Install baffle. Tighten baffle nuts to 25 lb. ft. (34

Nm). Tighten oil pump bolt to 70 lb. ft. (95 Nm).
4. Check for loose drive gear shaft in pump body.

a
5. Inspect inside of pump cover for wear that would

permit oil to leak past ends of gears.
6. Inspect pickup screen and pipe assembly for
damage to screen and pipe.
7. Check pressure regulator valve for fit.
IMPORTANT: Oil pump is not serviceable. If any
parts are worn or damaged, replacement of entire
pump assembly and pickup tube is necessary.
Reassembly
b
IMPORTANT: Oil internal parts liberally before installation.
1. Install pressure regulator valve and related parts.
2. Install drive gear in pump body.
3. Install idler gear in pump body with smooth side
of gear toward pump cover opening. Align marks
made in disassembly.
72545
a - Nuts (5)
b - Baffle
c - Oil Pump
3. Install oil pan as outlined. The one-piece gasket

for the oil pan may be reused if still pliable and not
cracked, torn, etc.
4. Fill gear cavity with engine oil.

5. Install pump cover and torque attaching screws
to 80 lb. in. (9 Nm).
6. Turn extension shaft by hand to check for smooth
operation.
Torsional Damper
Removal
1. Remove drive belts.
2. Remove drive pulley and water pump pulley, then
remove torsional damper retaining bolt.
Index
90-823224--2 796
454 CID (7.4L) / 502 CID (8.2L) - 3A-39
IMPORTANT: Do not use a universal claw type

puller to remove torsional damper (in next step)
as outside ring of torsional damper is bonded in
rubber to the hub and use of claw type puller may
break the bond.
3. Remove torsional damper with Torsional Damper
Remover and Installer.
IMPORTANT: Be sure to install threaded rod in

crankshaft at least 1/2 in. (13 mm) to prevent damage to threads.
b. Install plate, thrust bearing, washer and nut
on rod.
c. Install torsional damper on crankshaft by
turning nut until it bottoms out.
72346
a
72345
a - Torsional Damper Remover and Installer (J-23523-E)
Installation
IMPORTANT: The inertia weight section of torsional damper is assembled to the hub with a rubber type material. The installation procedure
(with proper tool) must be followed or movement
of the inertia weight on the hub will destroy the
tuning of the torsional damper.
1. Replace key in crankshaft if it is damaged.
a - Torsional Damper Remover and Installer (J-23523-E)
d. Remove tool from crankshaft.

e. To prevent oil leakage, apply Quicksilver RTV
sealant to keyway.
f.
Install torsional damper bolt. Torque to 90 lb.

ft. (122 Nm).
4. Install drive pulley and water pump pulley. Torque

bolts to 35 lb. ft. (48 Nm).
5. Install and adjust drive belts.
2. Coat seal surface of torsional damper with engine oil.

3. Install torsional damper on crankshaft, using Torsional Damper Remover and Installer as follows:
a. Install appropriate end of threaded rod into
crankshaft.
Index
3A-40 - 454 C.I.D. (7.4L) / 502 C.I.D. (8.2L)
90-823224--2 796
2. Install new seal with open end of seal inward (lip

of seal toward inside of engine), using crankcase
front cover seal installer. Drive seal in until it just
bottoms out. Do not use excessive force.
Crankcase Front Cover/

Oil Seal
Oil Seal Replacement
(Without Removing Front Cover)
REMOVAL
1. Remove torsional damper.
2. Pry seal out of cover from the front with a large
screwdriver, being careful not to distort front cover or damage crankshaft.
INSTALLATION
a
IMPORTANT: Correct rotation oil seal must be
used to prevent oil leak.
72560
a - Crankcase Front Cover Seal Installer (J-22102)
3. Reinstall torsional damper as outlined.
Crankcase Front Cover

Removal
a
1. Remove engine from boat.

2. Remove torsional damper and oil pan.
3. Remove water circulating pump.
73123
4. Remove crankcase front cover.
Front Seal WITHOUT Helical Grooves
5. If damaged, drive oil seal out of front cover (from

the rear) using a punch.
a - Seal Lip Toward Inside of Engine

IMPORTANT: The Gen VI front cover is cast aluminum that has a molded o-ring style gasket.
This gasket is retained in a cast groove. It must
be replaced if damaged.
1. Clean front cover in solvent and dry with compressed air.
a
73124
Front Seal WITH Helical Grooves

a - Seal Lip Toward Inside Of Engine
b - Rotation Of Crankcase As Viewed From Front End Looking Toward Flywheel End.
1. Apply Quicksilver Perfect Seal to seal retainer

mating surface and apply grease to seal lips.
2. Clean old gasket material and sealer from mating

surfaces on cover and cylinder block.
3. Check gasket surface on front cover for distortion, and true if necessary. Surfaces must be
clean and flat or oil leakage may result.
Index
90-823224--2 796
454 CID (7.4L) / 502 CID (8.2L) - 3A-41
Installation
Flywheel
1. Install oil seal in cover with lip of seal toward inside of engine, using crankcase front cover seal
installer. Support cover around seal area with appropriate tool as shown.
Removal
2. Remove transmission, if so equipped.
3. Refer to Flywheel Housing description in this

section and remove flywheel housing and related
parts.
4. Remove MCM coupler or MIE drive plate.
5. Remove flywheel.
72945
a - Crankcase Front Cover Seal Installer (J-22102)

b - Support (To Prevent Distorting Cover)
2. Coat both sides of front cover gasket with

Quicksilver Perfect Seal and place in position on
engine.
72350
Bravo Coupler
3. Install front cover, making sure holes in cover

align with dowel pins in block. Torque front cover
attaching bolts to 120 lb. in. (14 Nm).
4. Install oil pan and torsional damper as outlined.
5. Install water circulating pump.
6. Reinstall engine in boat.
7. Fill crankcase with engine oil.
8. Follow procedures in Section 6A or 6B of this
manual:
Seawater Cooled Models: Provide for adequate
water supply to seawater pickup (see Section
6A).
Closed Cooled Models: Refill closed cooling
section (see Section 6B), and provide adequate
water supply to seawater pickup.
72351
MIE Drive Plate
! CAUTION
Ensure that cooling water supply is available before starting the engine.
9. Start engine and check for water and oil leaks.
Index
3A-42 - 454 C.I.D. (7.4L) / 502 C.I.D. (8.2L)
90-823224--2 796
c. Maximum runout - .008 in. (0.203 mm).
a
b
72352
Drive Shaft Extension Coupler
Inspection
1. Inspect splines in drive plate or coupler for wear.
2. Check flywheel ring gear for worn and missing
teeth.
Installation
NOTE:If crankshaft is to be replaced, but old pilot
bushing is to be reused, bushing can be removed
without damage by filling pilot bushing cavity with
grease, then inserting an old transmission input shaft
in bore of bushing and hitting it with a hammer. This
will create hydraulic pressure in pilot bushing cavity
which should force bushing out.
1. Clean mating surfaces of flywheel and crankshaft. Remove any burrs. Mating surfaces must
be clean bare metal.
72353
a - .008 in. (0.203 mm) Max. Runout

b - Pus Flywheel And Crankshaft Forward As Far As It Will Go
When Taking Reading
4. Install drive coupler or drive plate. Torque bolts to

35 lb. ft. (48 Nm).
5. Install flywheel housing and related parts. Torque
bolts to 30 lb. ft. (41 Nm).
6. Install flywheel housing cover. Torque bolts to 80
lb. in. (9 Nm).
7. Install transmission (MIE). Torque bolts to 50 lb.
ft. (68 Nm).
8. Refer to Section 2 Removal and Installation and
install engine.
2. Aligning dowel hole in flywheel with dowel in

crankshaft, install flywheel. Torque bolts to 70 lb.
ft. (95 Nm).
3. Check flywheel runout as follows:
a. Attach a dial indicator to engine block.
b. Take readings around outer edge of flywheel.
Push in on flywheel to remove crankshaft end
play.
Index
90-823224--2 796
454 CID (7.4L) / 502 CID (8.2L) - 3A-43
Rear Main Oil Seal
The rear crankshaft oil seal can be replaced without

removing the oil pan or rear main bearing cap from
engine.
Clean crankshaft/seal running surface and seal retainer.

IMPORTANT: Correct rotation oil seal must be
used to prevent oil leak.
Removal
Remove seal by using a screwdriver to pry it out of
engine block as shown.
73126
72559
a - Rear Main Seal (Crankshaft Oil Seal)
IMPORTANT: Do not nick or gouge the engine

block or rear main bearing cap sealing surface.
Protect end of crankshaft and crankshaft/seal
running surface from damage, also.
Rear Seal WITHOUT Helical Grooves

a - Seal Lip Towards Inside Of Engine
a
72618
Rear Seal WITH Helical Grooves

a - Seal Lip Toward Inside Of Engine
b - Rotation of Crankshaft As Viewed From Flywheel End
Looking Forward
Index
3A-44 - 454 C.I.D. (7.4L) / 502 C.I.D. (8.2L)
90-823224--2 796
Installation
Checking Clearances
1. Apply Quicksilver Perfect Seal to engine block/

seal mating surface. Apply grease to seal lips.
To obtain accurate measurements while using Plastigage, or its equivalent, engine must be out of the boat
and upside down so crankshaft will rest on the upper
bearings and total clearance can be measured between lower bearing and journal.
2. Install seal using rear main seal installer or suitable device.
To assure the proper seating of the crankshaft, all

bearing cap bolts should be at their specified torque.
In addition, preparatory to checking fit of bearings,
the surface of the crankshaft journal and bearing
should be wiped clean of oil.
IMPORTANT: Inspect bearing caps for orientation marks prior to removal. If no markings exist,
make suitable marks before disassembly so that
they can be reinstalled in their original locations.
1. With the oil pan and oil pump removed, make
suitable marks, if required, on bearing cap(s) to
be inspected. Remove bearing cap(s) as
needed. Wipe oil from journal and bearing cap to
be inspected.
a
72356
a - Suitable Device Shown (Rear Main Seal Installer (J-38841)

Not Shown
Main Bearings
2. Place a piece of gauging plastic the full width of

the bearing (parallel to the crankshaft) on the
journal as shown.
IMPORTANT: Do not rotate the crankshaft while
the gauging plastic is between the bearing and
journal.
IMPORTANT: Before removing main bearing

caps or connecting rod caps, mark them for reassembly in their original locations.
Main bearings are of the precision insert type and do

not use shims for adjustment. If clearances are found
to be excessive, a new bearing, both upper and lower
halves, will be required. Service bearings are available in standard size and .001 in., .002, .010 in. and
.020 in. undersize.
Inspection
In general, the lower half of the bearing (except No.
1 bearing) shows a greater wear and the most distress from fatigue. If, upon inspection, the lower half
is suitable for use, it can be assumed that the upper
half is also satisfactory. If the lower half shows evidence of wear or damage, both upper and lower
halves should be replaced. Never replace one half
without replacing the other half.
72558
a - Gauging Plastic
b - Journal
3. Install the bearing cap and evenly torque the retaining bolts to specifications. Bearing cap MUST
be torqued to specification in order to assure
proper reading. Variations in torque affect the
compression of the plastic gauge.
Index
90-823224--2 796
454 CID (7.4L) / 502 CID (8.2L) - 3A-45
4. Remove bearing cap. The flattened gauging

plastic will be found adhering to either the bearing
cap or journal.
5. On the edge of the gauging plastic envelope
there is a graduated scale which is correlated in
thousandths of an inch. Without removing the
gauging plastic, measure its compressed width
(at the widest point) with the graduations on the
gauging plastic envelope as shown.
8. Proceed to the next bearing. After all bearings

have been checked, rotate the crankshaft to see
that there is no excessive drag. When checking
No. 1 main bearing, loosen accessory drive belts
so as to prevent tapered reading with plastic
gauge.
9. Measure crankshaft end play (see Specifications) by forcing the crankshaft to the extreme
front position. Measure at the front end of the rear
main bearing with a feeler gauge as shown.
a
b
72557
a - Compressed Gauging Plastic
b - Graduated Scale
NOTE:Normally main bearing journals wear evenly

and are not out of round. However, if a bearing is being fitted to an out-of-round journal (.001 in. max.),
be sure to fit to the maximum diameter of the journal:
If the bearing is fitted to the minimum diameter, and
the journal is out of round .001 in., interference between the bearing and journal will result in rapid
bearing failure. If the flattened gauging plastic tapers
toward the middle or ends, there is a difference in
clearance indicating taper, low spot or other irregularity of the bearing or journal. Be sure to measure
the journal with a micrometer if the flattened gauging
plastic indicates more than .001 in. difference.
6. If the bearing clearance is within specifications,
the bearing insert is satisfactory. If the clearance
is not within specifications, replace the insert. Always replace both upper and lower inserts as a
unit.
7. A standard, or .001 in., undersize bearing may
produce the proper clearance. If not, it will be necessary to regrind the crankshaft journal for use
with the next undersize bearing.
72543
a - Measuring Crankshaft End Play - (Force Crankshaft To

Extreme Forward Position )
Replacement
NOTE:Main bearings may be replaced with or without removing crankshaft.
a
c
72359
Main Bearing Inserts

a - Lower Bearing Insert (Install In Cap)
b - Upper Bearing Insert (Install In Block)
c - Oil Groove
After selecting new bearing, recheck clearance.
Index
3A-46 - 454 C.I.D. (7.4L) / 502 C.I.D. (8.2L)
90-823224--2 796
WITH CRANKSHAFT REMOVED

1. Remove and inspect the crankshaft as outlined.
2. Remove the main bearings from the cylinder
block and main bearing caps.
3. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise as viewed from

the front of engine. This will roll upper bearing out
of block.
3. Coat bearing surfaces of new, correct size, main

bearings with oil and install in the cylinder block
and main bearing caps.
4. Oil new selected size upper bearing and insert

plain (no notched) end between crankshaft and
indented or notched side of block. Rotate the
bearing into place and remove tool from oil hole
in crankshaft journal.
4. Install the crankshaft.
5. Oil new lower bearing and install in bearing cap.

6. Install main bearing cap with marks made on disassembly (or arrows, if present) pointing toward
front of engine.
WITHOUT CRANKSHAFT REMOVED

1. With oil pan, oil pump and spark plugs removed,
make suitable marks on cap and remove cap on
main bearing requiring replacement. Remove
bearing from cap.
2. Install main bearing remover/installer in oil hole
in crankshaft journal. If such a tool is not available, a cotter pin may be bent, as shown, to do the
job.
b
7. Torque all main bearing caps, EXCEPT THE

REAR MAIN CAP, to 110 lb. ft. (149 Nm). Torque
rear main bearing cap to 10-12 lb. ft. (14-16
Nm); then tap end of crankshaft, first rearward
then forward with a lead hammer. This will line up
rear main bearing and crankshaft thrust surfaces. Torque rear main bearing cap to 110 lb. ft.
(149 Nm).
Connecting Rod Bearings

Connecting rod bearings are of the precision insert
type and do not use shims for adjustment. DO NOT
FILE RODS OR ROD CAPS. If clearances are found
to be excessive, a new bearing will be required. Service bearings are available in standard size and .001
in. and .002 in. undersize for use with new and used
standard size crankshafts, and in .010 in. and .020 in.
undersize for use with reconditioned crankshafts.
Inspection and Replacement
a
72556
a - Main Bearing Remover / Installer (J-8080)

b - Cotter Pin
IMPORTANT: Before you remove the connecting

rod cap, mark the side of the rod and cap with the
cylinder number to assure matched reassembly
of rod and cap.
1. With oil pan and oil pump removed, mark the side
of the rod and cap with the cylinder number and
remove the connecting rod cap and bearing.
2. Inspect the bearing for evidence of wear and
damage. Do not reinstall a worn or damaged
bearing.
3. Wipe both upper and lower bearing shells and
crank pin clean of oil.
Index
90-823224--2 796
454 CID (7.4L) / 502 CID (8.2L) - 3A-47
4. Measure the crankpin for out-of-round or taper

with a micrometer. If not within specifications, replace or recondition the crankshaft. If within
specifications and a new bearing is to be installed, measure the maximum diameter of the
crankpin to determine new bearing size required.
IMPORTANT: Do not turn the crankshaft with the

gauging plastic installed.
5. If within specifications, measure new or used

bearing clearances with gauging plastic or its
equivalent. If a bearing is being fitted to an
out-of-round crankpin, be sure to fit to the maximum diameter of the crankpin. If the bearing is
fitted to the minimum diameter, and the crankpin
is out of round .001 in., interference between the
bearing and crankpin will result in rapid bearing
failure.
a. Place a piece of gauging plastic, the length of
the bearing (parallel to the crankshaft), on the
crankpin or bearing surface as shown. Position the gauging plastic in the middle of the
bearing shell. (Bearings are eccentric and
false readings could occur if placed elsewhere.)
72362
6. If the clearance exceeds specifications, select a

new, correct size bearing and measure the clearance.
Be sure to check what size bearing is being removed in order to determine proper replacement
size bearing. If clearance cannot be brought to
within specifications, the crankpin will have to be
ground undersize. If the crankpin is already at
maximum undersize, replace crankshaft.
7. Coat the bearing surface with oil, install the rod
cap and torque nuts
3/8 in. nuts
50 lb. ft. (68 Nm)
7/16 in. nuts 73 lb. ft. (99 Nm).
72361
a - Gauging Plastic
b. Install the bearing in the connecting rod and

cap.
c. Install the bearing cap and evenly torque
nuts. Refer to Specifications.
d. Remove the bearing cap and using the scale
on the gauging plastic envelope, measure the
gauging plastic width at the widest point as
shown.
Index
3A-48 - 454 C.I.D. (7.4L) / 502 C.I.D. (8.2L)
90-823224--2 796
8. When all connecting rod bearings have been installed, tap each rod lightly (parallel to the crankpin) to make sure they have clearance.
9. Measure all connecting rod side clearances (see
Specifications) between connecting rod caps
as shown.
IMPORTANT: Before ridge and/or deposits are removed, turn crankshaft until piston is at bottom
of stroke and place a cloth on top of piston to collect cuttings. After ridge and/or deposits are removed, turn crankshaft until piston is at top of
stroke, then remove cloth and cuttings.
3. Mark connecting rods and bearing caps (left bank
1, 3, 5 and 7; right bank 2, 4, 6 and 8 from front
to rear on same side as piston thrust).
4. Remove connecting rod cap and install connecting rod bolt guide (3/8-24 or 7/16-20) on bolts.
Push connecting rod and piston assembly out of
top of cylinder block.
NOTE:It will be necessary to turn crankshaft slightly

to disconnect and remove some connecting rod and
piston assemblies.
72555
Connecting Rod/Piston
Assembly
Removal
a. Oil pan and dipstick tube.
b. Baffle and oil pump.
72572
a - Connecting Rod Bolt Guide 3/8-24 (J-5239) or 7/16-20

(J-35228)
c. Distributor and intake manifold.

d. Cylinder heads.
2. Use a ridge reamer to remove any ridge and/or
deposits from upper end of cylinder bore.
Index
90-823224--2 796
454 CID (7.4L) / 502 CID (8.2L) - 3A-49
Disassembly
Disassemble piston from connecting rod using piston
pin remover as shown. Follow instructions supplied
with kit.
b
5. Slip outer surface of a new top and second compression ring into respective piston ring groove
and roll ring entirely around the groove to make
sure that ring is free as shown. If binding occurs
at any point, determine cause. If caused by ring
groove, remove by dressing with a fine cut file. If
binding is caused by a distorted ring, recheck
with another ring.
e
72365
a
b
c
d
e
Piston Pin Remover and Installer Kit (J-24086-C)

Arched Base
Piston
Connecting Rod
Rod Support

CONNECTING RODS
1. Wash connecting rods in cleaning solvent and
dry with compressed air.
72366
6. Proper clearance of piston ring in its piston ring

groove is very important to provide proper ring
action and reduce wear. Therefore, when fitting
new rings, clearances between ring and groove
surfaces should be measured. See Specifications.
2. Check for twisted and bent rods and inspect for

nicks and cracks. Replace damaged connecting
rods.
PISTONS
NOTE:Cylinder bore and taper must be within specifications before pistons can be considered for re-use.
1. Clean varnish from piston skirts with a cleaning
solvent. DO NOT WIRE BRUSH ANY PART OF
PISTON. Clean ring grooves with a groove cleaner and make sure oil ring holes are clean.
2. Inspect piston for cracked ring lands, skirts and
pin bosses, wavy worn ring lands, scuffed or
damaged skirts, and eroded areas at top of piston. Replace pistons which are damaged or show
signs of excessive wear.
3. Inspect grooves for nicks and burrs that might
cause rings to hang up.
72367
4. Measure piston skirt and check clearance as outlined under Piston Selection.
Index
3A-50 - 454 C.I.D. (7.4L) / 502 C.I.D. (8.2L)
90-823224--2 796
PISTON PINS
1. Piston pin clearance is designed to maintain adequate clearance under all engine operating conditions. Because of this, piston and piston pin are
a matched set and not serviced separately.
Notch or valve relief in piston must be positioned correctly for engine that is being repaired.
2. Inspect piston pin bores and piston pins for

wear. Piston pin bores and piston pins must be
free of varnish and scuffing when measured.
Measure piston pin with a micrometer and piston pin bore with a dial bore gauge or inside micrometer. If clearance is in excess of the .001 in.
(0.025 mm) wear limit, replace piston and piston
pin assembly.
Reassembly
IMPORTANT: When reassembling pistons and
connecting rods, the following must be kept in
mind.
Piston and pin are machine fitted to each other and must remain together as a matched
set. Do not intermix pistons and pins.
If original pistons and/or connecting rods are

being used, be sure to assemble pistons and
connecting rods so they can be reinstalled in
same cylinder from which they were removed.
Connecting rod bearing tangs are always toward outside of cylinder block.
72554
7.4L Engine
a - Notch - Toward Front Of Engine
72553
454 Magnum / 502 Magnum / 8.2L

a - Valve Relief - Toward Center Of Engine
72368
a - Rod Bearing Tangs
Index
90-823224--2 796
454 CID (7.4L) / 502 CID (8.2L) - 3A-51
1. Assemble piston to connecting rod using piston

pin remover as shown. Follow instructions
supplied with kit.
3. Measure gap between ends of ring with a feeler

gauge as shown.
72372
4. If gap between ends of ring is below specifications, remove ring and try another for fit.
72371
a - Piston Pin Remover (J-24086-C)
5. Fit each compression ring to cylinder in which it

is going to be used.
6. Clean and inspect pistons, if not previously done.
2. Once assembled, check piston for freedom of

movement (back-and-forth and up-and-down) on
connecting rod. Piston should move freely in all
directions. If it does not, piston pin bore is tight
and piston/pin assembly must be replaced.
3. If a new connecting rod has been installed, mark
connecting rod and cap (on side of rod and cap
with slots for connecting rod bearing tangs) with
cylinder number in which it will be installed.
PISTON RINGS
All compression rings are marked on upper side of
ring. When installing compression rings, make sure
that marked side is toward top of piston.
Oil control rings are a three-piece type, consisting of
two rings and a spacer.
1. Select rings comparable in size to cylinder bore
and piston size.
2. Slip compression ring in cylinder bore, then press
ring down into cylinder bore about 1/4 in. (6 mm)
(below ring travel). Be sure that ring is square
with cylinder wall.
7. Install piston rings as follows:

a. Install oil ring spacer in groove and insert antirotation tang in oil hole.
b. Hold spacer ends butted and install lower
steel oil ring rail with gap properly located.
c. Install upper steel oil ring rail with gap properly located.
d. Flex the oil ring assembly to make sure ring
is free. If binding occurs at any point, the
cause should be determined and, if caused
by ring groove, removed by dressing groove
with a fine cut file. If binding is caused by a
distorted ring, use a new ring.
IMPORTANT: Use piston ring expander
(91-24697) for compression ring installation.
e. Install lower compression ring with marked
side up, using ring expander.
f.
Install top compression ring with marked side

up, using ring expander.
Index
3A-52 - 454 C.I.D. (7.4L) / 502 C.I.D. (8.2L)
90-823224--2 796
Installation
IMPORTANT: Cylinder bores must be clean before piston installation. Clean with a light honing,
as necessary. Then clean with hot water and detergent wash. After cleaning, swab bores several
times with light engine oil and clean cloth, then
wipe with a clean dry cloth.
1. Lubricate connecting rod bearings and install in
rods and rod caps.
2. Lightly coat pistons, rings and cylinder walls with
light engine oil.
IMPORTANT: Be sure to install new pistons in

same cylinders for which they were fitted, and
used pistons in same cylinder from which they
were removed. Each connecting rod and bearing
cap should be marked, beginning at front of engine (1, 3, 5 and 7 in left bank and 2, 4, 6 and 8 in
right bank). Numbers on connecting rod and
bearing cap must be on same side when installed
in cylinder bore. If a connecting rod is ever transposed from one block or cylinder to another, new
bearings should be fitted and connecting rod
should be numbered to correspond with new cylinder number.
3. With bearing caps removed, install connecting

rod bolt guide (3/8-24, use tool J-5239 or 7/16-20,
use tool J-35228) on connecting rod bolts.
a
IMPORTANT: Be sure ring gaps are properly positioned as shown.

1
b
a
d
72552
b
a - Piston Ring Compressor (J-8037)
72373
5. Remove connecting rod bolt guide.

Ring Gap Location
1
2
3
a
b
c
d
- Port Side
- Engine Front
- Starboard Side
- Oil Ring Spacer Gap (Tang In Hole Or Slot Within Arc)
- Oil Ring Gaps
- 2nd Compression Ring Gap
- Top Compression Ring Gap
6. Install bearing caps and evenly torque nuts. Refer to Specifications.

7. Check connecting rod side clearance as previously described.
NOTE:If bearing replacement is required, refer to

Connecting Rod Bearings.
8. Install as previously outlined:
4. Install each connecting rod and piston assembly

in its respective bore. Install with connecting rod
bearing tangs toward outside of cylinder block.
Use piston ring compressor to compress rings.
Guide connecting rod into place on crankshaft
journal with connecting rod bolt guide. Use a
hammer handle with light blows to install piston
into bore. Hold ring compressor firmly against
cylinder block until all piston rings have entered
cylinder bore.
a. Oil pump and baffle.

b. Dipstick and oil pan.
c. Cylinder heads.
d. Intake manifold.
e. Distributor.
9. Fill crankcase with oil. Refer to Section 1 - Maintenance.
Index
90-823224--2 796
454 CID (7.4L) / 502 CID (8.2L) - 3A-53
Crankshaft
Removal
2. Drain crankcase oil.
a. Starter.
b. Flywheel housing.
c. Drive coupler/plate and flywheel.
d. Belts.
e. Water pump.
f.
Crankshaft pulley and torsional damper.
g. Spark plugs.
h. Oil pan and dipstick tube.
i.
Baffle and oil pump.
j.
Timing chain/gear cover.
4. Turn crankshaft to align timing mark with camshaft mark.

5. Remove camshaft sprocket or gear.
6. Remove rear main seal.
7. Make sure all bearing caps (main and connecting
rods) are marked so they can be reinstalled in
their original locations.

1. Wash crankshaft in solvent and dry with compressed air.
2. Measure main bearing journals and crankpin dimensions with a micrometer for out-of-round, taper or undersize (see Specifications).
3. Check crankshaft for runout (by supporting at
front and rear main bearings journals in V-blocks)
and check at front and rear intermediate journals
with a dial indicator (see Specifications).
4. Replace or recondition crankshaft if not within
specifications.
Installation
1. If a new crankshaft is being installed, proceed as
follows:
a. Remove timing sprocket or gear from old
crankshaft and reinstall on new crankshaft as
outlined.
b. On models with drive shaft extension, if old pilot bushing is to be reused, bushing can be removed without damage by filling pilot bushing
cavity with grease, then inserting an old
transmission input shaft in bore of bushing
and hitting it with a hammer. This will create
hydraulic pressure in pilot bushing cavity
which should force bushing out.
IMPORTANT: Be sure that all bearings and crankshaft journals are clean.
2. Install main bearings in engine block as follows.
a
b
8. Remove connecting rod bearing caps, then push

piston and rod assemblies toward heads.
9. Remove main bearing caps and carefully lift
crankshaft out of cylinder block.
10. If new main and/or connecting rod bearings are
to be installed, remove main bearing inserts from
cylinder block and bearing caps, and/or connecting rod bearing inserts from connecting rod and
caps. Install new bearings following procedures
outlined.
c
72359
Main Bearing Inserts

a - Lower Bearing Insert (Install In Cap)
b - Upper Bearing Insert (Install In Block)
c - Oil Groove
Index
3A-54 - 454 C.I.D. (7.4L) / 502 C.I.D. (8.2L)
90-823224--2 796
3. Carefully lower crankshaft into place. Be careful

not to damage bearing surface.
4. Check clearance of each main bearing, following
procedure outlined under Main Bearings. If
bearing clearances are satisfactory, apply engine
oil to journals and bearings.
5. Install main bearing caps. Torque bolts to 110 lb.
ft. (149 Nm). When tightening rear main bearing
cap, follow procedure outlined under Main Bearings.
Timing Chain and Sprocket

Removal
1. Remove torsional damper, oil pan and crankcase
front cover as outlined.
2. Turn crankshaft until timing marks on crankshaft
and camshaft sprockets are in alignment as
shown.
6. Check crankshaft end play as outlined.

7. Check clearance for each connecting rod bearing, following procedure under Connecting Rod
Bearings. If bearing clearances are satisfactory,
apply engine oil to journals and bearings.
8. Install rod caps and evenly torque nuts. Refer to
Specifications.
b
9. Turn crankshaft so mark on timing sprocket or

gear is facing camshaft.
10. Install as outlined:

a. Timing chain and sprocket or gear on camshaft -align marks with crankshaft.
b. Timing chain/gear cover.
c. Oil pump and baffle.
d. Dipstick tube and oil pan.
72946
e. Spark plugs.
f.
Torsional damper and crankshaft pulley.
g. Water pump.
h. Belts.
i.
Flywheel and drive coupler/plate.
j.
Flywheel housing.
k. Starter.
11. Install new oil filter. Fill crankcase with oil.
a - Timing Marks Aligned

b - Locating Pin
3. Remove camshaft sprocket and timing chain. (If

sprocket does not come off easily, a light tap on
the lower edge of the sprocket, using a plastic
mallet, should dislodge it.)
4. If crankshaft sprocket requires replacement, remove as outlined.
Index
90-823224--2 796
454 CID (7.4L) / 502 CID (8.2L) - 3A-55
Installation
1. Clean all parts in solvent and dry with compressed air.
1. Using crankshaft gear and sprocket installer, as

shown, install sprocket on crankshaft.
2. Inspect timing chain for wear and damage.

3. Inspect sprockets for wear and damage.
Installation
1. If crankshaft sprocket was removed, install as
outlined in Crankshaft Sprocket.
2. Install timing chain on camshaft sprocket. Hold
sprocket vertical with chain hanging down. Align
marks on camshaft and crankshaft sprockets.
IMPORTANT: Do not attempt to drive sprocket on

camshaft, as welsh plug at rear of engine can be
dislodged.
3. Install sprocket on camshaft. Torque bolts to 25
lb. ft. (34 Nm).
4. Lubricate timing chain with engine oil. Install
crankcase front cover and torsional damper as
outlined.
Crankshaft Sprocket
Removal
1. Remove torsional damper and crankcase front
cover as outlined.
2. Remove camshaft timing chain as outlined.
3. Remove crankshaft sprocket using crankshaft
gear and sprocket puller (J-24420-B).
72550
a - Crankshaft Gear And Sprocket Installer (J-1058-20)
2. Install timing chain as outlined.

3. Install crankcase cover and torsional damper as
outlined.
Checking Timing Chain Deflection

With timing chain and sprockets installed, check timing chain deflection, as follows:
1. Rotate camshaft (in either direction) to place tension on one side of the chain.
2. Establish a reference point on the block (on taut
side of chain) and measure from this point to the
chain.
3. Rotate camshaft in the opposite direction to
slacken the chain, then force chain out with fingers and again measure the distance between
reference point and timing chain.
Index
3A-56 - 454 C.I.D. (7.4L) / 502 C.I.D. (8.2L)
90-823224--2 796
4. The deflection is the difference between these

two measurements. If the deflection exceeds 3/4
in. (19 mm), timing chain should be replaced.
1. Remove valve mechanism as outlined.

2. Adapt dial indicator to cylinder head by temporarily installing suitable stud in bolt hole. Position
indicator with ball socket adaptor tool, from Lift Indicator Tool Kit, on push rod. Be sure that push
rod is in lifter socket.
a
72946
72551
a - Lift Indicator Tool Kit (J-8520)

a - Reference Point
5. Install torsional damper and crankcase front

cover.
Camshaft
Measuring Lobe Lift
NOTE:Procedure is similar to checking valve timing.
If improper valve operation is indicated, measure lift
of each push rod in consecutive order and record
readings.
3. Rotate torsional damper slowly in direction of rotation until lifter is on heel of cam lobe. At this
point, push rod will be in its lowest position.
4. Set dial indicator on zero, then rotate damper
slowly (or attach an auxiliary starter switch and
bump engine over) until push rod is in fully
raised position.
5. Compare total lift, recorded from dial indicator,
with Specifications.
6. Continue to rotate engine until indicator reads
zero. This will be a check on accuracy of original
indicator reading.
7. If camshaft readings for all lobes are within specifications, remove dial indicator assembly and
hardware.
8. Install and torque valve mechanism to specifications.
Index
90-823224--2 796
454 CID (7.4L) / 502 CID (8.2L) - 3A-57
Removal
1. Remove valve lifters as outlined.
2. Remove crankcase front cover as outlined.
Also check camshaft for alignment with V-blocks and

dial indicator which indicates exact amount camshaft
is out of true. If out more than .002 in. (0.051 mm)
(dial indicator reading) camshaft should be replaced.
3. Remove camshaft as follows:

a. Remove timing chain and sprocket or timing
gears as outlined.
b. Install two 5/16-18 x 5 in. bolts in camshaft
bolt holes and carefully remove camshaft as
shown.
72382
Checking Camshaft Alignment
Installation
1. Install camshaft as follows:
a. Install two 5/16-18 x 5 in. bolts in camshaft
bolt holes, then lubricate camshaft journals
with engine oil and install camshaft, being
careful not to damage bearings.
72549
b. Lubricate camshaft lobes with General Motors Cam and Lifter Prelube or equivalent.
c. Install timing chain or gears as outlined.
2. Install crankcase front cover and valve lifters as
outlined.
Inspection
Measure camshaft bearing journals with a micrometer for out-of-round condition. If journals exceed .001
in. (0.025 mm) out-of-round, camshaft should be replaced.
Camshaft Bearings
Removal
Camshaft bearings can be replaced while engine is
disassembled for overhaul or without complete disassembly. To replace bearings without complete disassembly, remove camshaft and crankshaft, leaving
cylinder heads attached and pistons in place. Before
removing crankshaft, fasten connecting rods against
sides of engine so that they will not interfere while replacing camshaft bearings.
1. With camshaft and crankshaft removed, drive
camshaft rear plug from cylinder block.
NOTE:This procedure is based on removal of bearings from center of engine first, thus requiring a minimum amount of turns to remove all bearings.
Index
3A-58 - 454 C.I.D. (7.4L) / 502 C.I.D. (8.2L)
90-823224--2 796
2. Using camshaft bearing remover and installer set

(J-6098-01) (with nut and thrust washer installed
to end of threads), position pilot in front camshaft
bearing and install puller screw through pilot.
3. Install tool with shoulder toward bearing. Be sure
a sufficient amount of threads are engaged.
4. Using two wrenches, hold puller screw while turning nut. When bearing has been pulled from bore,
remove tool and bearing from puller screw.
5. Remove remaining bearings (except front and
rear) in same manner. It will be necessary to position pilot in rear camshaft bearing to remove rear
intermediate bearing.
Inspection
Clean camshaft bearing bores in cylinder block with
solvent and blow out with compressed air. Be sure
grooves and drilled oil passages are clean.
Installation
Front and rear bearings must be installed last as pilot
will not fit into bearing bores if bearings are installed.
Lubricate outer surface of new camshaft bearings
with engine oil to ease installation.
IMPORTANT: All camshaft bearings are not the
same. Be sure to install bearings in proper locations (Indicated by bearing manufacturer) and to
position bearings as follows (directional references are in reference to engine in its normal operating position):
d
a
b
c
d
72571
Index Point
Puller Screw
Driver
Bearing
Front bearing must be positioned so that oil

holes are equal distance from 6 oclock position in the block. Intermediate and center
bearings must be positioned so that oil holes
are at the 5 oclock position (toward left side
of block and at a position even with bottom of
cylinder bore). Rear bearing must be positioned so that oil hole is at the 12 oclock position.
1. Installing intermediate and center bearings:
6. Assemble driver on driver handle and remove

front and rear camshaft bearings by driving toward center of cylinder block.
a. Install nut and thrust washer all the way onto

puller screw, then position pilot in front camshaft bearing bore and insert screw through
pilot.
b. Index center camshaft bearing, then position
appropriate size remover and installer tool in
bearing and thread puller screw into tool. Be
sure at least 1/2 in. (13 mm) of threads are engaged.
c. Using two wrenches, hold puller screw and

turn nut until bearing has been pulled into position. Remove the remover and installer tool
and check to ensure that oil hole(s) in bearing
are positioned correctly.
b
a - Driver
b - Driver Handle
c - Bearing
72548
d. Install intermediate bearings in same manner

being sure to index bearings correctly. It will
be necessary to position pilot in rear camshaft bearing bore to install rear intermediate
bearing.
2. Installing front and rear bearings:
a. Install appropriate size remover and installer
tool on drive handle.
Index
90-823224--2 796
454 CID (7.4L) / 502 CID (8.2L) - 3A-59
b. Index front bearing (as explained in Important above), and drive it into position with
tool. Check position of oil hole(s) in bearing to
ensure bearing is positioned correctly.
c. Install rear bearing in same manner, being
sure to index bearing correctly.
3. Install a new camshaft rear plug.
7. Measure cylinder walls for taper, out-of-round or

excessive ridge at top of ring travel. This should
be done with a dial indicator or inside micrometer.
Carefully work gauge up and down cylinder to determine taper and turn it to different points around
cylinder wall to determine out-of-round condition.
If cylinders exceed specifications, boring and/or
honing will be necessary.
a
IMPORTANT: Plug must be installed flush to 1/32

in. (0.8 mm) deep and must be parallel with rear
surface of cylinder block.
4. Install crankshaft and camshaft as outlined.
Cylinder Block
a
72385
Cylinder Measurement
1. Remove all engine components as previously

outlined.
a - Equal To Right Angle To Centerline Of Engine

b - Parallel to Centerline Of Engine Out Of Round Equals
The Difference Between A and B
At Top Of Cylinder Bore and A
Measurement At Bottom Of Cylinder Bore
2. Wash cylinder block thoroughly in cleaning solvent and clean all gasket surfaces.
3. Remove oil gallery plugs and clean all oil passages.
4. Remove expansion plugs.
NOTE:These plugs may be removed with a sharp

punch, or they may be drilled and pried out.
5. Clean and inspect water passages in cylinder
block.
6. Inspect cylinder block for cracks in cylinder walls,
water jacket valve lifter bores and main bearing
webs.
72570
Measuring Cylinder Bore
Index
3A-60 - 454 C.I.D. (7.4L) / 502 C.I.D. (8.2L)
90-823224--2 796
3. If cylinders have less than .005 in. (0.127 mm) taper or wear, they can be conditioned with a hone
and fitted with high limit standard size piston. A
cylinder bore of more than .005 in. wear or taper
may not clean up entirely when fitted to a high limit piston. To entirely clean up the bore, it will be
necessary to bore for an oversize piston. If more
than .005 in. taper or wear, bore and hone to
smallest oversize that will permit complete resurfacing of all cylinders.
72569
Measuring Cylinder Bore

8. Check cylinder head gasket surfaces for warpage with a machinists straight-edge and a feeler gauge, as shown. Take measurements diagonally across surfaces (both ways) and straight
down center. If surfaces are warped more than
.003 in. (0.07 mm) in a 6 in. area or .007 in. (0.2
mm) overall, block must be resurfaced by an automotive machine shop.
4. When pistons are being fitted and honing is not

necessary, cylinder bores may be cleaned with a
hot water and detergent wash. After cleaning,
swab cylinder bores several times with light engine oil and a clean cloth, then wipe with a clean
dry cloth.
CYLINDER BORING
1. Before using any type boring bar, file off top of cylinder block to remove dirt or burrs. This is very important to prevent boring bar tilt, with result that
bored cylinder wall is not at right angles to crankshaft.
2. Measure piston to be fitted with a micrometer,
measuring at center of piston skirt and at right
angles to piston pin. Bore cylinder to same diameter as piston and hone to give specified clearance.
NOTE:Hone cylinders as outlined under Cylinder

Honing and Piston Selection, following.
3. Carefully observe instructions furnished by manufacturer of equipment being used.
b
CYLINDER HONING
72566
a - Machinists Straight Edge

b - Feeler Gauge
CYLINDER CONDITIONING
1. Performance of the following operation depends
upon engine condition at time of repair.
2. If cylinder block inspection indicates that block is
suitable for continued use (except for
out-of-round or tapered cylinders), they can be
conditioned by honing or boring.
1. Follow hone manufacturers recommendations

for use of hone and cleaning and lubrication during honing.
2. Occasionally, during the honing operation, thoroughly clean cylinder bore and check piston for
correct fit in cylinder.
3. When finish-honing a cylinder bore to fit a piston,
move hone up and down at a sufficient speed to
obtain very fine uniform surface finish marks in a
crosshatch pattern of approximately 30 degrees
to cylinder bore. Finish marks should be clean but
not sharp, free from imbedded particles and torn
or folded metal.
4. Permanently mark piston (for cylinder to which it
has been fitted) and proceed to hone cylinders
and fit remaining pistons.
Index
90-823224--2 796
454 CID (7.4L) / 502 CID (8.2L) - 3A-61
IMPORTANT: Handle pistons with care and do not

attempt to force them through cylinder until cylinder is honed to correct size, as this type piston
can be distorted by careless handling.
b. Measure piston diameter at skirt across center line of piston pin as shown.
5. Thoroughly clean cylinder bores with hot water

and detergent. Scrub well with a stiff bristle brush
and rinse thoroughly with hot water. It is extremely essential that a good cleaning operation be
performed. If any abrasive material remains in
cylinder bores, it will rapidly wear new rings and
cylinder bores in addition to bearings lubricated
by the contaminated oil. Swab bores several
times with light engine oil on a clean cloth, then
wipe with a clean dry cloth. Cylinder should not be
cleaned with kerosene or gasoline. Clean remainder of cylinder block to remove excess material spread during honing operation.
PISTON SELECTION
1. Check used piston to cylinder bore clearance as
follows:
a. Measure cylinder bore diameter with a telescope gauge 2-1/2 in. (64 mm) from top of cylinder bore as follows.
72624
c. Subtract piston diameter from cylinder bore

diameter to determine piston-to-bore clearance.
d. Determine if piston-to-bore clearance is in acceptable range shown in Specifications.
2. If used piston is not satisfactory, determine if a
new piston can be selected to fit cylinder bore
within acceptable range.
3. If cylinder bore must be reconditioned, measure
new piston diameter (across centerline of piston
pin), then hone cylinder bore to correct clearance
(preferable range).
4. Mark piston to identify cylinder for which it was
fitted.
72570
Index
3A-62 - 454 C.I.D. (7.4L) / 502 C.I.D. (8.2L)
90-823224--2 796
Oil Filter By-Pass Valve and

Adaptor
! CAUTION
Any Gen V or Gen VI engine with front mounted
vertical oil cooler MUST have a 30 PSI oil pressure relief valve installed. Severe engine damage
or failure will occur if not installed.
6. Wipe out valve chamber in cylinder block to remove any foreign material.
7. Install by-pass valve (if replaced) and connector.
Torque adaptor nut to 20 lb. ft. (27 Nm).
8. Lubricate adaptor seal with engine oil. Install
hose fitting and torque to specifications.
9. Apply Perfect Seal to hose threads. Install and
tighten securely.
Inspection and/or Replacement

Oil by-pass valve and adaptor should be inspected
whenever engine is disassembled for major repair or
whenever inadequate oil filtration is suspected.
Refer to Engine Parts List when ordering parts for
oil filter by-pass valve, adaptor assembly or remote
oil filter parts.
1. Remove oil hoses from adaptor.
2. Remove hose fitting and seal from adaptor.
3. Remove connector.
4. Clean parts in solvent and blow dry with compressed air.
5. Inspect fiber valves for cracks or other damage.
Check that valves fit tightly against seats. Push
each valve down and release it. Valves should return freely to their seats. If valve operation is
questionable, by-pass valve should be replaced.
72546
Typical By-Pass Valve and Adaptor

a - Fiber Valves (Ensure That Valves Fit Tightly Against Their
Seals
Index
90-823224--2 796
454 CID (7.4L) / 502 CID (8.2L) - 3A-63

AT A LATER DATE
Index
3A-64 - 454 C.I.D. (7.4L) / 502 C.I.D. (8.2L)
90-823224--2 796

AT A LATER DATE
Index
90-823224--2 796
454 CID (7.4L) / 502 CID (8.2L) - 3A-65

AT A LATER DATE
Index
3A-66 - 454 C.I.D. (7.4L) / 502 C.I.D. (8.2L)
90-823224--2 796

AT A LATER DATE
Index
90-823224--2 796
454 CID (7.4L) / 502 CID (8.2L) - 3A-67
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
4
A
72079
STARTING SYSTEM
Index
Table of Contents
Page
Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-1
Replacement Parts Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-1
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-1
Battery Cable Recommendations . . . . . . . . 4A-1
Lubricants/Sealants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-1
Direct Drive Starter Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-2
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-2
Lubricants/Sealants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-2
Positive Current Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-2
Starting System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-3
Starter Motor (Exploded View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-4
Periodic Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-5
Starter Motor Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-5
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-5
Solenoid Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-5
Starter Motor Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-7
Cleaning and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-8
Armature Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-8
Field Coil Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-9
Loose Electrical Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-9
Turning the Commutator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-9
Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-10
Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-10
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-12
Permanent Magnet Gear Reduction (PG200,
PG250 and PG260) Starter Motor . . . . . . . . . 4A-13
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-13
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-14
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-14
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-14
Standard Starter Slave Solenoid . . . . . . . . . .

Testing/Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Positive Current Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PG 200 and PG 250 Starter Motor
(Exploded View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Solenoid Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Periodic Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PG 200 and PG 250 Starter Motor Repair . .
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Armature Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Armature Bearing (Commutator End) . . . .
Gear Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shaft Assembly Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drive End Housing Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brushes and Brush Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PG 260 Starter Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exploded View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Solenoid Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Periodic Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PG 260 Starter Motor Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Armature Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brushes and Brush Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page
4A-15
4A-15
4A-16
4A-17
4A-17
4A-18
4A-19
4A-19
4A-19
4A-19
4A-20
4A-22
4A-22
4A-23
4A-23
4A-24
4A-24
4A-24
4A-25
4A-27
4A-28
4A-28
4A-29
4A-29
4A-29
4A-29
4A-30
4A-32
4A-33
4A-33
4A-35
4A-38
4A-38
NOTICE
For information and procedures on troubleshooting, refer to Section 1C.
Index
4A
- STARTING
SYSTEM
4A-0
- STARTING
SYSTEM
90-823224--2 796
Identification
Replacement Parts Warning
The starter identification number is located as

shown.
! WARNING
on your MerCruiser are designed and manufactured to comply with U.S. Coast Guard Rules and
Regulations to minimize risks of fire and explosion.
Use of replacement electrical, ignition or fuel system
components, which do not comply with these rules
and regulations, could result in a fire or explosion
hazard and should be avoided.
a
72789
Battery
IMPORTANT: Terminals must be soldered to
cable ends to ensure good electrical contact. Use
electrical grade (resin flux) solder only. Do not
use acid flux solder, as it may cause corrosion
and failure.
Direct Drive Starter Motor
Battery Cable Recommendations

Cable Length
72059
Up to 3-1/2 Ft. (1.1 m)

3-1/2 - 6 Ft (1.1-1.8 m)
6 - 7-1/2 Ft. (1.8-2.3 m)
7-1/2 - 9-1/2 Ft. (2.3-2.9 m)
9-1/2 - 12 Ft. (2.9-3.7 m)
12 - 15 Ft. (3.7-4.6 m)
15 - 19 Ft. (4.6-5.8 m)
Cable Gauge
(25 mm2)
(35 mm2)
(50 mm2)
(50 mm2)
(70 mm2)
(95 mm2)
(120 mm2)
4
2
1
0
00
000
0000
Both positive (+) and negative () cables

Permanent Magnet Gear Reduction (PG200 and
PG250) Starter Motor
a
Fastener Location
Starter Mounting Bolts
All Other Fasteners
lb. ft.
Nm
30
41
Tighten Securely
Lubricants/Sealants
Description
Permanent Magnet Gear Reduction (PG260)
Starter Motor
a - Starter Identification Number
Quicksilver Liquid Neoprene

Quicksilver 2 4 C Marine
Lubricant With Teflon
Part Number
92-25711-2
92-825407A3
Index
90-823224--2 796
STARTING SYSTEM - 4A-1
Direct Drive Starter Motor

Specifications
No Load Test
Delco
Identification
ifi i
Number
Engine
Rotation
Volts
Min.
Amps
Max.
Amps
Min
RPM
Max.
RPM
10455602
LH
10.6
70
120
5400
10800
Brush
Spring Tension
Oz. (Grams)
56-105
(1588-2976)
Pinion Clearance
.010-.140 (0.25-3.5 mm)
Commutator End Frame Gap
.025 Max. (0.6 mm Max.)
Fastener
Location
Lb. Ft.
Nm
50
68
Starter Motor
To Block
All Other
Fasteners
Tighten Securely
Lubricants/Sealants
Description
SAE 10W Oil
SAE 20W Oil
Part Number
Ignition switch terminal B to terminal S.
Ignition switch terminal S to neutral start

switch (YEL-RED). NEUTRAL START SWITCH
MUST BE AT NEUTRAL POSITION.
Neutral start switch to wiring harness plug

terminal 7 (YEL-RED).
Wiring harness plug to starter solenoid (small

terminal) (YEL-RED). Also ensure that black
(small terminal) wire is grounded.
Starter solenoid is now closed, completing

circuit between large terminal (RED-PUR) and
other large terminal (YEL-RED), causing
starter motor to crank.
92-25711-2
Obtain Locally
Positive Current Flow

This is a general description of the positive current
flow, from the battery and through the system until the
starter motor cranks.
Battery to the solenoid switch (on starter)

(RED battery cable).
Solenoid switch to circuit breaker (RED).
Circuit breaker to wire junction (RED-PUR).
Wire junction to wiring

(RED-PUR) terminal 6.
Wiring harness plug to 20 amp fuse

(RED-PUR).
20 amp fuse to ignition switch terminal I

(RED-PUR). At this point ignition switch is
turned to START.
harness
! CAUTION
The starter motor is designed to operate under
great overload and produce a high horsepower
for its size. It can do this only for a short time,
since considerable heat accumulates and can
cause serious damage. For this reason, the
cranking motor must never be used for more than
30 seconds at any one time. Cranking should not
be repeated without a pause of at least 2 minutes
to permit the heat to escape.
plug
Index
4A-2 - STARTING SYSTEM
90-823224--2 796
Starting System Components

b
B
S
h
f
72930
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
Ignition Switch
20 Amp Fuse
Starter Slave Solenoid
Circuit Breaker
Starter Motor
Wire Junction
Neutral Safety Switch
Index
90-823224--2 796
Starter Motor (Exploded View)

9
27
8
28
29
10
3
31
4
11
26
5
6
13
25
12
30
24
32
14
19
15
33
21
20
34
23
22
17
16
18
72806
Index
90-823224--2 796
1 - End Housing
2 - End Housing Bushing
3 - Thrust Collar
4 - Retaining Ring - Pinion Stop Collar
5 - Pinion Stop Collar
6 - Clutch Drive Assembly
7 - Bearing Plate
8 - Bearing Plate Bushing
9 - Bearing Plate Washer
10- Bearing Plate Screw
11 - Armature
12- Pole Shoe - Field Coil
13- Pole Shoe - Field Coil Screw
14- Field Coil Grommet - Field Frame
15- Field Coil Assembly
16- Leather Washer - Commutator End Frame
17- Lower Commutator End Frame
18- Thru Bolt
19- Insulator Holder - Field Frame Brush
20- Field Frame Brush - Ground Brush
21- Field Frame Brush
22- Brush Lead Screw
23- Ground And Insulated Holders Support
Package
24- Field Frame Brush Spring
25- Dowel Pin - Field Frame
26- Shift Lever
27- Shift Lever Stud
28- Shift Lever Stud Washer
29- Shift Lever Stud Nut
30- Shift Lever Plunger
31- Plunger To Shift Lever Pin
32- Plunger Return Spring
33- Solenoid Switch Screw
34- Solenoid Switch Assembly
Periodic Inspection
Cranking motor and solenoid are completely enclosed in the drive housing to prevent entrance of
moisture and dirt. However, periodic inspection is required as follows:
1. Inspect terminals for corrosion and loose connections.
2. Inspect wiring for frayed and worn insulation.
3. Check mounting bolts for tightness.
Starter Motor Repair

Removal
! WARNING
Disconnect battery cables at battery before removing starter.
2. Disconnect wires from solenoid terminals.
3. Remove starter mounting bolts.
4. Pull starter assembly away from flywheel and remove from engine.
Solenoid Switch
REMOVAL
1. Remove starter motor as outlined.
2. Remove screw from field coil connector and solenoid attaching screws.
Index
90-823224--2 796
3. Twist solenoid to disengage tab, and remove.

b
IMPORTANT: DO NOT cut starter motor connector strap terminal wire (to remove terminal) or
wire will be too short.
a
c
f
h
a
e
d
i
72631
a - Field Coil Screws

b - Attaching Screws
REPLACEMENT OF CONTACTS
72632
1. With solenoid removed from motor, remove nuts

and washers from switch terminal S and starter
motor connector strap terminal.
2. Remove solenoid end cover retaining screws
and washers and remove end cover from solenoid body.
3. Remove nut and washer from battery terminal on
end cover and remove battery terminal.
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
Solenoid Body
To Hold In Coil
Switch Terminal
Motor Connector Strap Terminal
To Pull In Coil
Contact Ring and Push Rod Assembly
Battery Terminal
Contact Finger
Screw
End Cover
4. Remove motor connector strap terminal and solder new terminal in position.
5. Remove and install new battery terminal, washer
and retaining nut to end cover.
6. Place new contact ring and push rod assembly in
solenoid housing.
7. Position end cover over switch and motor terminals and install end cover retaining screws. Also
install washers and nuts on solenoid switch and
starting motor terminals.
Index
90-823224--2 796
INSTALLATION
2. Remove end frame thru bolts, end frame, washer

and field frame.
d
1. Install solenoid onto plunger.

2. Twist solenoid to engage tab.
b
c
3. Install screws and tighten securely.

4. Install field coil connector screw.
Starter Motor Disassembly

a
1. Remove screw from field coil connector.
72633
a
b
c
d
Thru Bolt
End Frame
Washer
Field Frame
3. Remove screws, center bearing plate and armature.
a
b
c
72631
a - Connector Screw
72634
a - Screws
b - Bearing Plate
c - Armature
4. Slide thrust collar off armature shaft.

5. Drive retainer ring toward armature.
6. Remove snap ring, retainer and clutch assembly.
Index
90-823224--2 796

With starting motor completely disassembled, except for removal of field coils, component parts
should be cleaned and inspected. Field coils should
be removed only where defects are indicated by
tests. Defective parts should be replaced or repaired.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT use grease dissolving solvents for cleaning over-running clutch, armature
and field coils. Such a solvent would dissolve
grease packed in clutch mechanism and damage
armature and field coil insulation.
Armature Tests
TEST FOR SHORTS
Check armature for shorts by placing on growler and
holding hack saw blade over armature core while rotating armature. If saw blade vibrates, armature is
shorted. After cleaning between commutator bars,
recheck. If saw blade still vibrates, replace armature.
a
1. Test over-running clutch action. Pinion should

turn freely in over-running direction and must not
slip in cranking direction. Check pinion teeth.
Check spring for tension and drive collar for wear.
Replace if necessary.
b
c
2. Check that brush holders are not damaged or

bent and will hold brushes against commutator.
3. Check brushes. Replace if pitted or worn to
one-half their original length [5/16 in. (8 mm) or
less].
4. Check fit of armature shaft in bushing of drive
housing. Shaft should fit snugly. Replace bushing, if worn. Apply SAE 20 oil to bushing before
reassembly. Avoid excessive lubrication.
01440
a - Hacksaw Blade
b - Armature Core
c - Growler
5. Check fit of bushing in commutator end frame. If

bushing is damaged or worn excessively, replace
end frame assembly. Apply SAE 20 oil to bushing
before reassembly. Avoid excessive lubrication.
6. Inspect armature commutator. If rough or
out-of-round, turn down and undercut. Inspect
points (where armature conductors join commutator bars) for good, firm connection. Burned
commutator bar usually is evidence of poor connection.
Index
90-823224--2 796
TEST FOR GROUND
2. If meter does not move, field coils are open and

must be replaced.
1. With continuity meter, place one lead on armature core or shaft and other lead on commutator.
TEST FOR GROUND
2. If meter hand moves, armature is grounded and

must be replaced.
IMPORTANT: Be sure that positive brushes and

leads do not contact field frame assembly during
test, or false reading will result.
1. With continuity meter, place one lead on field

connector bar and other lead on grounded brush.
01441
a
b
c
d
Commutator
Armature Core
Shaft
Growler
72636
2. If meter hand moves, field coils are grounded and

must be replaced.
Field Coil Tests

TEST FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1. With continuity meter, place one lead on each
end of field coils (insulated brush and field connector bar).
Loose Electrical Connections

If open soldered connection of armature to commutator leads is found during inspection, resolder with resin flux.
IMPORTANT: Never use acid flux on electrical
connections.
Turning the Commutator

When inspection shows commutator roughness,
clean as follows:
1. Turn down commutator in a lathe until thoroughly
cleaned.
72635
2. Recheck armature for shorts as outlined.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Reassembly
After all parts are thoroughly tested and inspected
and worn or damaged parts replaced, reassemble
starter as follows:
1. Assemble brushes and related parts to field
frame as follows:
a. Assemble brushes to brush holders. Attach
ground wire to grounded brush and field lead
wire to insulated brush.
b. Assemble insulated and grounded brush
holders together with V-spring. Position as a
unit and install support pin. Push holders and
spring to bottom of support and rotate spring
to engage center of V-spring in slot in support.
2. Assemble over-running clutch assembly to armature shaft as follows:
e. Assemble thrust collar on shaft with shoulder

next to snap ring.
f.
Place thrust collar and retainer next to snap

ring and using two pliers squeeze both until
snap ring is forced into retainer.
3. Place 4 or 5 drops of light engine oil in drive housing bushing. Slide armature and clutch assembly
into place while engaging shift lever with clutch.
4. Position field frame over armature and apply
Quicksilver Liquid Neoprene between frame
against drive housing, observing caution to prevent damage to brushes.
5. Place 4 to 5 drops of light engine oil in bushing in
commutator end frame. Place brake washer and
commutator end frame onto shaft.
a. Lubricate drive end of armature shaft with

SAE 10W oil.
6. Install solenoid return spring on plunger.
b. Slide assist spring and clutch assembly onto

armature shaft with pinion outward.
7. Position solenoid assembly to starter motor end

frame and turn solenoid to engage flange in slot.
c. Slide retainer onto shaft with cupped surface

facing end of shaft (away from pinion).
d. Drive snap ring onto shaft and slide down into
groove.
8. Install (and tighten securely) screws which hold

solenoid assembly to end frame.
9. Secure starter motor connector strap terminal
with screw and washer.
Clearances
PINION CLEARANCE
Pinion clearance must be checked as follows after
reassembly of motor to insure proper adjustment.
a
b
72073
a - Snap Ring
b - Groove
Index
90-823224--2 796
1. Disconnect motor field coil connector from solenoid motor terminal and insulate it carefully.
4. Push pinion back toward commutator end to

eliminate slack.
5. Measure distance between pinion and pinion retainer.
6. If clearance is not within limits of .010-.140 in.
(0.25-3.5 mm), it may indicate excessive wear of
solenoid linkage shift lever yoke buttons or improper assembly of shift lever mechanism.
Check for proper assembly, and recheck gap. If
still excessive, replace worn or defective parts,
since no provision is made for adjusting pinion
clearance.
a
b
72631
a - Motor Field Coil Connector
2. Connect 12 volt battery positive (+) lead to solenoid switch and negative () lead to solenoid
frame.
3. Momentarily touch a jumper lead from solenoid
motor terminal M to starter motor frame. This
shifts pinion into cranking position where it will
remain until battery is disconnected.
72077
a - Pinion
b - Retainer
c - Feeler Gauge
COMMUTATOR END FRAME GAP
b
01447
To keep the ignition-proof and safety requirement,

the gap between the commutator end frame and field
coil housing must be checked. See specifications. If
the gap exceeds measurement when checked with
a feeler gauge, the end frame should be checked for
proper seating on the field coil housing. If properly
seated and still found to have excessive gap, the end
frame must be replaced.
a - Jumper Lead
b - Starter Motor Frame
Index
90-823224--2 796
Installation
1. Place starter motor and solenoid assembly in position and install mounting bolts. Torque bolts to
50 lb. ft. (68 Nm).
2. Fasten wires as outlined in wiring diagram.
3. Coat solenoid terminal connections with Quicksilver Liquid Neoprene.
4. Place rubber boot over positive battery cable
connection.
a
.
0
0
72637
a - Positive Battery Cable

b - Rubber Boot
Index
90-823224--2 796
Permanent Magnet Gear Reduction (PG200, PG250 and

PG260) Starter Motor
Specifications
PG 200 STARTER MOTOR
No Load Test
Delco
I.D.
Number
9000762
9000768
Volts
Min.
Amps
Max.
Amps
Min.
RPMS
Max.
RPMS
10.6
60
90
3000
3000
Brush Spring Tension
83-104 oz. (2353-2948 g.)
Pinion Clearance
.010-.160 in. (0.25-4.00 mm)
Bearing Depth (Gear)
.011-.014 in. (0.28-0.38 mm)
Bearing Depth (Drive Housing)
.009-.017in. (0.25-0.45 mm)

Delco
ID
I.D.
Number
No Load Test
Volts
Min.
Amps
Max.
Amps
Min.
RPMS
Max.
RPMS
9000789
10.6
60
95
2750
3250
83-104 oz. (2353-2948 g.)
Pinion Clearance
.010-.160 in. (0.25-4.00 mm)
.011-.014 in. (0.28-0.38 mm)
.009-.017in. (0.25-0.45 mm)

Delco
ID
I.D.
Number
No Load Test
Volts
Min.
Amps
Max.
Amps
Min.
RPMS
Max.
RPMS
9000789
10.6
60
95
3000
3000
83-104 oz. (2353-2948 g.)
Pinion Clearance
.010-.160 in. (0.25-4.00 mm)
.011-.014 in. (0.28-0.38 mm)
.009-.017in. (0.25-0.45 mm)
Index
90-823224--2 796
Maintenance
Testing
! CAUTION
! WARNING
DO NOT use jumper cables and a booster battery
to start engine. DO NOT recharge a weak battery
in the boat. Remove battery and recharge in a
well ventilated area away from fuel vapors,
sparks or flames.
! WARNING
Batteries contain acid which can cause severe
burns. Avoid contact with skin, eyes and clothing. Batteries also produce hydrogen and oxygen gases when being charged. This explosive
gas escapes fill/vent caps and may form an explosive atmosphere around the battery for several hours after it has been charged; sparks or
flames can ignite the gas and cause an explosion
which may shatter the battery and could cause
blindness or other serious injury.
Safety glasses and rubber gloves are recommended when handling batteries or filling electrolyte. Hydrogen gases that escape from the
battery during charging are explosive. When
charging batteries, be sure battery compartment,
or area where batteries are located, is well
vented. Battery electrolyte is a corrosive acid
and should be handled with care. If electrolyte is
spilled or splashed on any part of the body, immediately flush the exposed area with liberal
amounts of water and obtain medical aid as soon
as possible.
! CAUTION
To prevent damage to the electrical system be
sure to adhere to the following:
When installing battery, be sure to connect

the positive (+) battery cable to positive (+)
battery terminal first and then the negative ()
battery cable to negative () battery terminal.
Never disconnect the battery cables while the

engine is running.
If a charger or booster is to be used, be sure to

connect it in parallel with existing battery
(positive to positive and negative to negative).
When applying a booster charge to battery,

disconnect both cables from battery (to prevent damage to voltage regulator).
Check battery condition periodically.
Make sure that battery leads are kept clean

and tight.
Test battery in well ventilated area as gases given

off by battery are hazardous.
Place battery under heavy load (as during engine
cranking or with a variable resistor tester) and test
cell voltage while under load.
Certain conditions must be met before testing:
Battery must be 60 to 100F (16 to 38C).
Electrolyte level must be correct in all cells.
Battery must be at least half charged.
No obvious defects.
5. Check voltage per manufacturers specifications.

6. If readings are low, recharge and retest.
7. If readings remain low, battery should be replaced.
Storage
1. Remove battery and clean exterior.
2. Check fluid level and fill if low.
3. Cover terminals and bolts with light coat of
grease.
4. Set battery on wood or in carton; store in cool, dry
place.
5. Check every 20 days for fluid level and slow
charge.
IMPORTANT: A discharged battery can be damaged by freezing.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Standard Starter Slave

Solenoid
Testing/Replacement
1. Using continuity meter, connect test leads as
shown, and connect 12 volt battery with jumper
leads as shown.
72630
2. If no meter movement is present, replace solenoid.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Starting System Components

b
a
g
B
S
I
h
d
72929
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
ignition Switch
20 Amp. Fuse
Ground Stud
Starter Motor
Circuit Breaker
Wire Junction
Index
90-823224--2 796
Positive Current Flow
Description
This is a general description of the positive current

flow, from the battery and through the system until the
starter motor cranks.
The Permanent Magnet Gear Reduction (PG200

and PG250) starter motors feature small permanent
magnets mounted inside the field frame (NOTE: The
actual configuration of these magnets differs between the PG200, PG250 and PG260; the field
frames with permanent magnets are not interchangeable. Otherwise, the units are similar.) These
magnets take the place of current-carrying field coils
mounted on iron pole pieces. Internal gear reduction,
approximately 4 to 1, through planetary gears results
in armature speeds in the 7000 RPM range. The armature and drive shaft are mounted on roller or ball
bearings in place of bushings. The solenoid switch,
plunger, return spring, and shift lever are permanently mounted in the drive housing.
Battery to the solenoid switch (on starter)

(RED battery cable).
Solenoid switch to circuit breaker (RED).
Circuit breaker to wire junction (RED-PUR).
Wire junction to wiring

(RED-PUR) terminal 6.
Wiring harness plug to 20 amp fuse

(RED-PUR).
20 amp fuse to ignition switch terminal I

(RED-PUR). At this point ignition switch is
turned to START.
Ignition switch terminal B to terminal S.
Ignition switch terminal S to neutral start

switch (YEL-RED). NEUTRAL START SWITCH
MUST BE AT NEUTRAL POSITION.
Neutral start switch to wiring harness plug

terminal 7 (YEL-RED).
Wiring harness plug to starter solenoid (small

terminal) (YEL-RED). Also ensure that black
(small terminal) wire is grounded.
Starter solenoid is now closed, completing

circuit between large terminal (RED-PUR) and
other large terminal (YEL-RED), causing
starter motor to crank.
harness
plug
! CAUTION
The starter motor is designed to operate under
great overload and produce a high horsepower
for its size. It can do this only for a short time,
since considerable heat accumulates and can
cause serious damage. For this reason, the
cranking motor must never be used for more than
30 seconds at any one time. Cranking should not
be repeated without a pause of at least 2 minutes
to permit the heat to escape.
Index
90-823224--2 796
PG 200 and PG 250 Starter Motor (Exploded View)
19
7
18
3
10
4
8
5
11
17
12
1
13
14
16
15
72079
Index
90-823224--2 796
1 - Field Frame (with Permanent Magnets)

2 - End Frame
3 - Ball Bearing
4 - Brushes With Frame
5 - Brush Spring
6 - Armature
7 - Shield
8 - Gear
9 - Roller Bearing
10- Planetary Gear And Shaft Assembly
11 - Drive
12- Collar
13- Retaining Ring
14- Thrust Collar
15- Drive Housing
16- Roller Bearing
17- Nut
18- Screw
19- Thru Bolt
* Contains: Starter Solenoid, Plunger, Return
Spring and Shift Lever
Solenoid Switch
The solenoid switch, along with plunger, return
spring, and shift lever, are completely sealed and
permanently mounted in the drive housing. If solenoid is defective, entire drive housing must be replaced.
Periodic Inspection
3. Check starter mounting bolts for tightness.
PG 200 and PG 250 Starter

Motor Repair
Removal
! WARNING
IMPORTANT: Some starter motors may use a
special mounting shim for gaining flywheel
clearance. Do not lose this shim; it will be needed
when remounting starter on engine block.
Index
90-823224--2 796
3. Pull armature out of field frame.
Disassembly
1. Remove brush lead from solenoid and screws
from end frame.
NOTE: Permanent magnets inside field frame will be

holding armature in place.
b
b
72060
a
72062
a - Brush Lead
b - Screws
a - Armature
b - Field Frame
2. Remove thru bolts and separate field frame with

armature from drive housing.
4. Pull end frame off bearing.
b
a
72063
72061
a - End Frame
b - Bearing
a - Field Frame / Armature
b - Drive Housing
c - Thru Bolts
Index
90-823224--2 796
5. Remove shield.
7. Remove thrust collar, retaining ring and collar.

Remove drive.
b
c
d
72067
72065
a
b
c
d
a - Shield
6. Use a screwdriver, as shown, to disengage shift

lever from drive.
Thrust Collar
Retaining Ring
Collar
Drive
8. Remove gear from shaft assembly.
a
a
72066
72064
a - Shift Lever
a - Gear
b - Shaft Assembly
Index
90-823224--2 796
IMPORTANT: Do not use grease dissolving solvents to clean electrical components, planetary
gears, or drive. Solvent will damage insulation
and wash the lubricant out of the drive and gears.
Use clean rags and compressed air to clean components.
b
c
1. Test over-running clutch action of drive. Pinion

should turn freely in over-running direction and
must not slip in cranking direction. Check pinion
teeth. Check spring for tension and drive collar
for wear. Replace if necessary.
bent and hold brushes against commutator.
Check brushes for wear; refer to Brushes and
Brush Holder.
01440
a - Hacksaw Blade
b - Armature Core
c - Growler
TEST FOR GROUND

3. Inspect armature commutator. If badly grooved
or out-of-round, turn down and undercut commutator.
4. Inspect all roller bearing surfaces for wear. Check
that bearings roll freely. If any roughness is felt,
replace bearings.
must be replaced.
b
5. Inspect planetary gear assembly. Gears must

mesh easily and roll freely with no binding.
Armature Tests
TEST FOR SHORTS
01441
a
b
c
d
Commutator
Armature Core
Shaft
Growler
Index
90-823224--2 796
Armature Bearing (Commutator End)
INSTALLATION
REMOVAL
IMPORTANT: Brush holder must be installed on

armature before installing armature bearing.
Use a universal puller plate, as shown, to remove

bearing.
Using the correct size driver, press on inner bearing

race until it contacts shoulder of armature shaft.
Gear Bearing
REMOVAL
Using the correct size driver, press bearing out of
gear.
a
INSTALLATION
1. Using the correct size driver, press bearing into

gear, from direction shown, to depth (a).
72068
a
a - Universal Puller Plate
b - Bearing
INSTALLATION
DIRECTION
72625
a - See Specifications
2. Lubricate bearing and gear teeth with a small

amount of Quicksilver 2-4-C Marine Lubricant.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Shaft Assembly Bearing
2. Lubricate bearing with a small amount of Quicksilver 2-4-C Marine Lubricant.
IMPORTANT: Roller bearing is not replaceable. If

bearing is defective, replace entire shaft assembly. Apply Quicksilver 2-4-C Marine Lubricant to
bearing before starter reassembly.
Brushes and Brush Holder

INSPECTION
Replace brushes and holder when brush leads are
touching guide.
Make sure brushes move freely in guides.
a
72070
a - Roller Bearing
Drive End Housing Bearing

72069
REMOVAL
Using the correct size driver, press bearing out of
housing.
a - Brush Leads
b - Guides
INSTALLATION
REMOVAL
1. Using the correct size driver, press bearing into
housing, from direction shown, to depth (a).
1. Remove armature bearing as previously described.

2. Remove brush holder.
72626
a - See Specifications
b - Installation Direction
Index
90-823224--2 796
INSTALLATION
Reassembly
1. Push each brush up into its guide to allow spring

to hold it in place, as shown.
a
c
1. Install end frame on brush holder. Align holes of

end frame with holes of brush holder. Tighten
screws securely.
72072
a - Brush
b - Guide
c - Brush Spring
72063
2. Place brush holder on armature and push

brushes down against commutator, as shown.
a - Holes Of End Frame

b - Holes Of Brush Holder
2. Insert armature into field frame. Align brush holder lead with notch in field frame.
NOTE: Permanent magnets in field frame will pull armature in place.
b
a
b
72069
a - Brush Holder
b - Commutator
c - Brush
3. Install armature bearing as previously described.
72062
a - Brush Holder Lead

b - Notch
Index
90-823224--2 796
3. Coat roller bearings and gear with a small

amount of Quicksilver 2-4-C Marine Lubricant.
a
c
d. Position snap ring on upper end of shaft and

hold in place with block of wood. Strike wood
block with hammer, thus forcing snap ring
over end of shaft. Slide snap ring down into
groove.
a
b
b
c
72627
a - Roller Bearing
b - Roller Bearing
c - Gear
4. Assemble gear and shaft together, as shown.

72073
a - Snap Ring
b - Groove
c - Retainer
e. Assemble thrust collar on shaft with shoulder

next to snap ring.
f.
b
Position retainer and thrust collar next to

snap ring. Then, using two pliers, grip retainer
and thrust collar and squeeze until snap ring
is forced into retainer.
b
72070
a - Gear Assembly
b - Shaft Assembly
5. Assemble drive on shaft assembly as follows:
a. Lubricate drive end of shaft assembly with

SAE 10W oil.
b. Slide drive assembly onto shaft with pinion
outward.
c. Slide retainer onto shaft with cupped surface
72074
a - Retainer
b - Thrust Collar
c - Snap Ring
Index
90-823224--2 796
6. Apply a thin coating of Quicksilver 2-4-C Marine

Lubricant to roller bearing in drive housing.
9. Install thru bolts and brush lead. Tighten fasteners securely.
7. Insert shaft and drive assembly into drive housing. Pins of drive must be snapped into holes of
shift lever. Thrust collar must be in place before
shaft is inserted in housing roller bearing.
IMPORTANT: Do not overtighten thru bolts. Overtightening will bend end frame.
a
b
72628
b
72060
a - Thru Bolts
b - Brush Lead
Installation
IMPORTANT: Install special mounting shim (if
equipped) between starter motor and engine
block.
72075
1. Place starter motor in position and install mounting bolts. Torque bolts to 30 lb. ft. (41 Nm).
a - Pins Of Drive
b - Holes Of Shift Lever
c - Thrust Collar
8. Install shield. Align brush lead and solenoid terminal when inserting armature into planetary
gears.
c
2. Connect YELLOW/RED wire to terminal S of solenoid. Connect ORANGE wire, RED wire, and
battery cable to large terminal of solenoid. Tighten fasteners securely. Coat terminals with Quicksilver Liquid Neoprene. Install battery cable boot,
if so equipped.
3. Connect battery cables to battery in the following
order. Connect positive (+) cable to positive (+)
battery terminal and tighten cable clamp. Then
connect negative () cable to negative () terminal and tighten clamp.
72061
a - Shield
b - Brush Lead
c - Solenoid Terminal
Index
90-823224--2 796
PG 260 Starter Motor

Exploded View
20
3
6
7
8
4
9
5
16
10
17
11
18
12
21
13
14
15
19
74270
Index
90-823224--2 796
1 - Screw (2)
2 - End Cap
3 - Brush With Holder
4 - Armature
5 - Field Frame (With Permanent Magnets)
6 - Washer
7 - Shield
8 - Planetary Gears
9 - Shaft
10- Gear
11 - Drive
12- Collar
13- Retaining Ring
14- Trust Collar
15- Drive Housing
16- Nut
17- Solenoid
18- Solenoid Drive Arm
19- Screw (3)
20- Thru Bolt (2)
21- Rubber Grommet
Solenoid Switch
The solenoid switch can be removed and replaced if
defective.
Periodic Inspection
3. Check starter mounting bolts for tightness.
PG 260 Starter Motor Repair

Removal
! WARNING
IMPORTANT: Some starter motors may use a
special mounting shim for gaining flywheel
clearance. Do not lose this shim; it will be needed
when remounting starter on engine block.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Disassembly
4. Remove armature and field frame from drive

housing.
1. Remove brush lead from solenoid and screws

from end frame.
5. Pull armature out of field frame.
NOTE: Permanent magnets inside field frame will be

holding armature in place.
74041
a - Brush Lead
b - Screws
2. Remove thru bolts and separate end frame from

field frame and end cap.
c
74086
a - Armature
b - Field Frame
6. Remove shield and washer.
b
74040
a - End Cap
b - Thru Bolts
c - Drive Housing
a
b
74038
3. Remove brush holder from end cap.

a - Shield
b - Washer
c
a
b
74037
a - Brush Holder
b - End Cap
c - Screws (2)
Index
90-823224--2 796
7. Remove the three screws retaining the solenoid.

Remove solenoid from drive housing.
9. Remove solenoid arm and rubber grommet from

the drive housing.
a
74105
b
b
74048
74036
a
a - Drive Housing
b - Solenoid
c - Screws (3)
8. Remove drive and associated parts from drive

housing.
74018
a - Rubber Grommet
b - Solenoid
c - Drive Housing
74035
a - Drive Housing
b - Drive
Index
90-823224--2 796
10. Remove thrust collar, retaining ring and collar

from planetary shaft.
b

IMPORTANT: Do not use grease dissolving solvents to clean electrical components, planetary
gears, or drive. Solvent will damage insulation
and wash the lubricant out of the drive and gears.
Use clean rags and compressed air to clean components.
1. Test over-running clutch action of drive. Pinion
should turn freely in over-running direction and
must not slip in cranking direction. Check pinion
teeth. Check spring for tension and drive collar
for wear. Replace if necessary.
d
74016
a
b
c
d

bent and hold brushes against commutator.
Check brushes for wear; refer to Brushes and
Brush Holder.
Thrust Collar
Retaining Ring
Collar
Drive
11. Remove drive and gear from planetary shaft.
3. Inspect armature commutator. If badly grooved

or out-of-round, turn down and undercut commutator.
4. Inspect all roller bearing surfaces for wear. Check
that bearings roll freely. If any roughness is felt,
replace bearings.
5. Inspect planetary gear assembly. Gears must

mesh easily and roll freely with no binding.
b
74087
a - Gear
b - Shaft Assembly
c - Drive
Index
90-823224--2 796
Armature Tests

must be replaced.
TEST FOR SHORTS

c

a
b
c
01441
01440
a
b
c
d
Commutator
Armature Core
Shaft
Growler
Brushes and Brush Holder

a - Hacksaw Blade
b - Armature Core
c - Growler
TEST FOR GROUND

INSPECTION
Replace brushes and holder when brush leads are
touching guide.
Make sure brushes move freely in guides.
a
b
72069
a - Brush Leads
b - Guide
Index
90-823224--2 796
INSTALLATION
2. Place brush holder on armature and remove

pieces of wires from brush holder.
1. Push each brush up into its guide, use a 3 inch

piece of coat hanger wire or similar stiff wire to
retain the spring while installing armature, as
shown.
b
a
d
a
b
72069
a - Brush Holder
b - Brush
a
b
c
d
Brush
Guide
Brush Spring
3 Inch Piece Of Coat Hanger Or Stiff Wire
Index
90-823224--2 796
2. Install gear and drive over planetary shaft.
Reassembly
1. Install end frame on brush holder. Align holes of
end frame with holes of brush holder. Tighten
screws securely.
a
a
b
b
c
c
d
74087
a - Planetary Shaft
b - Gear
c - Drive
a
b
c
d
Screw (2)
End Cap
Brush Holder
Armature
3. Assemble drive on shaft assembly as follows:

a. Lubricate drive end of shaft assembly with
SAE 10W oil.
b. Place gear over shaft.
c. Slide drive assembly onto shaft with pinion
facing outward.
d. Slide retainer onto shaft with cupped surface
Index
90-823224--2 796
e. Position snap ring on upper end of shaft and

hold in place with block of wood. Strike wood
block with hammer, thus forcing snap ring
over end of shaft. Slide snap ring down into
groove.
5. Install solenoid arm and rubber grommet in the

drive housing.
a
b
c
c
72073
a - Snap Ring
b - Groove
c - Retainer
f.
Assemble thrust collar on shaft with shoulder

next to snap ring.
g. Position retainer and thrust collar next to

snap ring. Then, using two pliers, grip retainer
and thrust collar and squeeze until snap ring
is forced into retainer.
b
74135
a - Rubber Grommet
b - Solenoid
c - Drive Housing
6. Install drive and associated parts in drive housing.
72074
a - Retainer
b - Thrust Collar
c - Snap Ring
b
74035
a - Drive Housing
b - Drive
4. Install the planetary gears on planetary shaft.
Index
90-823224--2 796
7. Place solenoid in drive housing and tighten

screws.
9. Install field frame over armature. Align slot in end

cap and field frame for proper positioning of rubber grommet.
74036
a
a - Drive Housing
b - Solenoid
c - Screw (3)
10. Install field frame and end cap in drive housing

align slots in field frame with recess in drive housing.
8. Install shield and washer in drive housing.
74038
a - Shield
b - Washer
a - Drive Housing
b - End Cap And Field Frame
11. Install thru bolts and brush lead. Tighten fasteners securely.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Clearances
5. Measure distance between pinion and pinion retainer.
PINION CLEARANCE
Pinion clearance must be checked after reassembly
of starter motor.
1. Disconnect brush lead from solenoid motor and
insulate it carefully.
6. If clearance is not within limits of .010-.160 in.

(0.25-4.00 mm), it may indicate excessive wear
of solenoid linkage, shift lever yoke, or improper
assembly of shift lever mechanism. Replace
worn or defective parts, since no provision is
made for adjusting pinion clearance.
a
74041
a - Brush Lead
2. Connect 12 volt battery positive (+) lead to battery terminal and negative () lead to frame.
3. Momentarily touch a jumper lead from battery terminal to switch terminal. This shifts pinion into
cranking position where it will remain until battery
is disconnected.
72077
a - Pinion
b - Retainer
c - Feeler Gauge
Installation
IMPORTANT: Install special mounting shim (if
equipped) between starter motor and engine
block.
1. Place starter motor in position and install mounting bolts. Torque bolts to 30 lb. ft. (41 Nm).
2. Connect yellow/red wire to terminal S of solenoid. Connect orange wire, red wire, and battery
cable to large terminal of solenoid. Tighten fasteners securely. Coat terminals with Quicksilver
Liquid Neoprene. Install battery cable boot, if so
equipped.
72629
3. Connect battery cables to battery in the following

order. Connect positive (+) cable to positive (+)
battery terminal and tighten cable clamp. Then
connect negative () cable to negative () terminal and tighten clamp.
4. Push pinion back toward commutator end to

eliminate slack.
Index
90-823224--2 796

AT A LATER DATE
Index
90-823224--2 796

AT A LATER DATE
Index
90-823224--2 796
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
4
B
72722
THUNDERBOLT IV AND V
IGNITION SYSTEM
Index
4B - IGNITION SYSTEM
90-823224 692
Table of Contents
Page
Thunderbolt IV Ignition System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-1
Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-1
Replacement Parts Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-1
Thunderbolt IV (HEI) Electronic Ignition
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-1
Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-1
Tools/Lubricants/Sealants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-1
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-2
Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-2
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-2
Firing Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-2
Distributor Advance Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-3
Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-5
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-5
Distributor Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-5
Rotor/Sensor Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-6
Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-7
Thunderbolt IV Ignition Module . . . . . . . . . . 4B-8
Distributor Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-8
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-8
Thunderbolt IV Exploded View . . . . . . . . . 4B-10
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-11
Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-11
Distributor Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-12
Engine Not Disturbed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-12
Engine Disturbed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-12
Thunderbolt IV Ignition Timing . . . . . . . . . . . .

Thunderbolt V Ignition System . . . . . . . . . . . .
Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Idle Speed Spark Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Acceleration Spark Advance . . . . . . . . . . .
Mean-Best-Timing (MBT) Spark Advance
Over-Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Knock Retard Spark Control . . . . . . . . . . .
Thunderbolt V Spark Control Graph . . . . . . .
Circuit Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Knock Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition Control System Timing Lead . . . .
Ignition System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . .
Timing and Idle Adjustment Procedures
For Thunderbolt V Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Base Ignition Timing . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjusting Idle Mixture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjusting Engine Idle Speed . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Thunderbolt V Ignition . . . . .
Ignition Control Module /Coil
/Distributor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Knock Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spark Plug Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page
4B-13
4B-14
4B-14
4B-15
4B-15
4B-15
4B-15
4B-15
4B-15
4B-16
4B-17
4B-17
4B-17
4B-17
4B-18
4B-19
4B-19
4B-19
4B-19
4B-20
4B-20
4B-21
4B-22
4B-23
NOTICE
Index
4B
- IGNITION
SYSTEM
4B-0
- IGNITION
SYSTEM
90-823224--2 796
Thunderbolt IV Ignition
System

! WARNING
Identification

system components, which do not comply with
Thunderbolt IV (HEI)
Electronic Ignition System
Fastener Location
71790
DISTRIBUTOR
WITH
IGNITION
MOUNTED ON EXHAUST ELBOW
MODULE
In. Lb. Ft. Lb.
Nm
Distributor Clamp
20
27
Spark Plugs (14 mm)
15
20
Ignition Module
Retaining Screws
(Stainless Steel)
10
1.1
Tools/Lubricants/Sealants
Description
Part Number
Timing Light
91-99379
Multi-Meter / DVA
91-99750
Torch Lamp
91-63209
Insulating Compound
92-41669--1
Quicksilver Liquid
Neoprene
92-27511-2
Loctite 271
Thermalconductive
Grease
Obt i Locally
Obtain
L
ll
72722
DISTRIBUTOR
WITH
IGNITION
MOUNTED ON DISTRIBUTOR BODY
MODULE
a - Ignition Module
NOTE: Except for igntion module replacement, repair procedures for both distributors are the same.
Index
90-823224--2 796
IGNITION SYSTEM - 4B-1
Firing Order
Specifications
Coil
Firing Order 1-8-4-3-6-5-7-2

Description
Coil Part Number

Primary Resistance
Secondary Resistance
Specification
392-7803A4
.60-.80 Ohms
9,400-11,700 Ohms
Spark Plugs
Model
Spark Plug
Spark Plug Type
All MIE and MCM

.040 In. (1 mm)
AC-MR43T
NGK BR6FS
Champion RV15YC4
72008
Index
4B-2 - IGNITION SYSTEM
90-823224--2 796
Distributor Advance Curves

IMPORTANT: Distributor advance curve charts do not include the initial engine timing. Basic initial timing must be added to chart for total advance curve. The spark advance is controlled by the ignition module.
MCM 7.4L/MCM 454 MAGNUM/MIE 7.4L
Identification Mark: V8-24
Module Advance: 24 Degrees
Initial Timing: 8 Degrees BTDC
Total Advance: 32 Degrees
35
TOTAL SPARK ADVANCE

MINUS INITIAL TIMING
30
25
MAX.
MIN.
20
15
10
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
ENGINE RPM
4000
4500
5000
70808-8
Index
90-823224--2 796
MCM 502 MAGNUM/MIE 8.2L

Identification Mark: V8-20R
Module Advance: 20 Degrees
Initial Timing: 8 Degrees BTDC
Total Advance: 28 Degrees
TOTAL SPARK ADVANCE

35
30
25
MAX.
20
MIN.
15
10
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000
4500
5000
70808-14
ENGINE RPM
Index
90-823224--2 796
IMPORTANT: If high tension leads are removed

from cap refer to Spark Plug Wires in this section and the following illustrations for installation.
Repair
Precautions
! WARNING
When performing the following procedure, be
sure to observe the following:
Be sure that engine compartment is well ventilated and that no gasoline vapors are present, to avoid the possibility of fire.
Be sure to keep hands, feet and clothing clear

of moving parts.
Do not touch or disconnect any ignition system parts while engine is running.
Do not reverse battery cable connections.

System is negative () ground.
Do not disconnect battery cables while engine is running.
72726
a - Alignment Notch
Distributor Cap
1. Loosen four distributor cap retaining screws.
2. Remove distributor cap.
3. Clean cap with warm soap and water and blow off
with compressed air.
4. Check cap contact for excessive burning or corrosion. Check center contact for deterioration.
5. Check cap for cracks or carbon tracks using magneto analyzer.
72728
a - Vent
Index
90-823224--2 796
Rotor/Sensor Wheel
1. Remove distributor rotor/sensor wheel assembly
from distributor shaft. Rotor and sensor wheel
are secured to the shaft with Loctite. Use two flat
blade screwdrivers. The screwdrivers are positioned opposite each other with the blade tips on
the underside of the rotor and sensor wheel assembly. Make sure blade tips are toward distributor shaft until they come in contact with shaft. A
downward push on both screwdriver handles at
the same time will pry off rotor/sensor wheel assembly. The use of torch lamp will also aid in the
removal of the rotor/sensor wheel assembly.
! WARNING
Wear protective gloves when handling heated rotor/sensor wheel assembly to avoid severe
burns.
2. With the rotor/sensor wheel assembly removed,
inspect the locating key inside the rotor.
3. The locating key will appear as a clean edged, 1/8
in. (3 mm) wide, sloped ramp at the bottom of the
splined hole.
IMPORTANT: If there is any doubt if sensor wheel

is located properly, lay sensor wheel on top of the
figure above with sensor fingers facing up (toward you). Line up three screw holes and locating pin hole on sensor wheel with the figure. If
wheel is indexed properly all the fingers on wheel
will line up with those in the figure.
4. If there are pieces of material shaved off the key
or if it appears to have been damaged by being
forced down while misaligned with slot in distributor shaft, the rotor must be replaced.
5. Check rotor for burned or corroded center contact.
6. Check rotor for cracks and carbon tracks using
magneto analyzer and instructions supplied with
analyzer.
7. If rotor is damaged, replace rotor by removing
three hex bolts and separating sensor wheel from
rotor. Reinstall sensor wheel to new rotor making
sure locating pin on rotor is installed in locating
hole in sensor wheel. Tighten three hex bolts securely.
8. Bend carbon brush tang upward slightly until a
distance of 1/4 in. (6 mm) is obtained between rotor and tang.
a
b
a
d
72731
c
a - 1/4 in. (6 mm)
72730
a
b
c
d
Locating Key
Screws
Senor Wheel
Locating Pin
9. Put 2 drops of Loctite 271 into the rotor so it lands

on the locating key.
10. Put 2 drops of Loctite 271 in keyway on upper
portion of distributor shaft.
11. Immediately install rotor assembly onto distributor shaft. Make sure rotor locating key is aligned
with keyway in distributor shaft before pressing
rotor all the way down on the shaft, until it stops,
with the palm of your hand. Let Loctite cure overnight with distributor in inverted position.
Index
90-823224--2 796
IMPORTANT: The rotor should fit very tight. It

may be necessary to heat rotor with torch lamp
to properly install. It is important not to let any
Loctite run down distributor shaft. Loctite could
get into top distributor housing bushing.
4. Use a magnifying glass and light to inspect the

two metal jumper leads for cracks. If a crack is
found in either metal jumper lead, install a new
sensor.
12. Reinstall distributor cap on distributor.

13. Install spark plug wires (if removed). Refer to
Spark Plug Wires in this section.
Sensor
1. Remove rotor and sensor wheel.
a
2. Disconnect sensor wires.

3. Remove two screws that hold sensor into distributor housing. Remove sensor from housing.
72733
a - Jumper Leads
! CAUTION
Do not use any type of silicone sealer on the inside of the distributor. Most silicone sealers give
off an acidic vapor during the curing stage of the
sealer. This acid can cause corrosion on the ignition components.
5. Install sensor into housing and install two retaining screws.
b
a
6. Install sensor wheel, rotor, and distributor cap.

72732
7. Connect WHT/RED and WHT/GRN sensor wires

(ring terminals on engine harness wires, or bullet
connectors from ignition module wires). Tighten
hex nuts securely, if so equipped.
a - Mounting Screws
b - Senor Assembly
Index
90-823224--2 796
Thunderbolt IV Ignition Module
Distributor Repair
IGNITION MODULE MOUNTED ON EXHAUST

ELBOW
Removal
1. Unplug wiring harness connector from ignition

module.
2. Remove fasteners and hardware retaining ignition module to exhaust elbow. Remove module.
NOTE: Do not disturb spacers between ignition module plate and exhaust elbow, unless replacing
spacers.
IMPORTANT: BLACK ground () wire from engine
harness must be placed under ignition module
fastener when mounting module.
1. Unplug wiring harness from ignition module on

distributor housing, or disconnect wires from ignition module mounted on exhaust elbow. Disconnect sensor wires.
2. Remove distributor cap. Do not remove high tension leads unless necessary.
3. Crank engine over until timing marks line up and
rotor is pointing toward No. 1 cylinder on distributor cap.
4. Mark distributor housing in reference to engine
block.
3. Replace ignition module using existing hardware. Tighten fasteners securely. Be certain
BLACK ground () wire is in position.
5. Remove bolt and hold-down clamp and remove

distributor.
4. Check that terminals of wiring harness connector

are clean and free of corrosion. Plug connector
into ignition module.
IMPORTANT: To simplify distributor installation,

do not turn crankshaft when distributor is removed from engine.
IGNITION MODULE MOUNTED ON

DISTRIBUTOR
1. Unplug wiring harness connector from ignition
module.
2. Remove stainless steel screws retaining ignition
module to distributor body. Remove module.
IMPORTANT: Thermalconductive Grease must
be applied to the back of the ignition module to
conduct heat away from the module and to prevent corrosion.
3. Apply a thin coat of Thermalconductive Grease
evenly across the metal back of the ignition module.
4. Install ignition module using the stainless steel
screws. Torque screws to 10 lb. in. (1.1 Nm).
5. Check that terminals of wiring harness connector
are clean and free of corrosion. Plug connector
into ignition module.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Index
90-823224--2 796
Thunderbolt IV Exploded View
2
9
12
10
3
11
13
14
15
5
6
7
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
72058
Index
90-823224--2 796
1 - Distributor Cap
2 - Vent
3 - Gasket
4 - Rotor
5 - Senor Wheel
6 - Screws (5)
7 - E-Clip
8 - Shaft
9 - Screws (2)
10- Lockwashers (2)
11 - Sensor
12- Upper Bushing
13- Ignition Module , If Equipped (Apply Thermalconductive Grease)
14- Screws (2)
15- Distributor Housing
16- Lockwasher
17- Nut
18- Lower Bushing
19- Gasket
20- Washer
21- Gear
22- Roll Pin
Reassembly
1. Lubricate shaft with engine oil. Install E-clip (if
removed) on shaft in housing.
2. Install washer on shaft. Install original gear; slide
onto shaft and install roll pin.
IMPORTANT: Hole may be offset and gear will
only fit in one direction.
3. If installing a new gear, the gear will come drilled
on one side. Slide gear onto shaft; align hole in
gear with hole in shaft. Using these holes as
guides, drill through other side of gear with a
3/16 in. carbide tripped drill.
IMPORTANT: If a new gear has only a dimple, you
will have to drill through one side of the gear before you slide gear onto shaft. In most cases it is
recommended to have a machine shop complete
the drilling operation for new gear installation.
Disassembly
a
NOTICE
Refer to exploded view preceding for parts
identification during disassembly and reassembly.
d
b
1. Remove rotor, sensor wheel, sensor, and ignition

module (if mounted on distributor), as previously
outlined.
c
2. Remove roll pin, washer and driven gear from

distributor shaft.
3. Check for side play between shaft and distributor
housing bushings. Maximum side play is .002 in.
(0.05 mm).
4. Remove shaft from housing and check shaft for
being bent with a dial indicator and V-blocks.
Maximum runout is .002 in. (0.5 mm).
72735
a
b
c
d
Drill Press
3/16 in. Carbide Tip Drill
V-Block
New Gear
4. Install sensor, sensor wheel, rotor, and ignition

module (if mounted on distributor), as previously
outlined.
5. Install distributor as outlined in Distributor Installation.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Distributor Installation
Engine Not Disturbed
1. Install new gasket on distributor housing.
2. Turn rotor approximately 1/8-turn in a counterclockwise direction past mark previously
scratched on distributor housing.
3. Work distributor down into position in engine
block with distributor positioned as noted during
removal.
IMPORTANT: It may be necessary to move rotor
slightly to start gear into mesh with camshaft
gear, but rotor should line up with the mark when
distributor is down in place. Distributor shaft
must enter oil pump shaft for complete installation.
4. Replace and tighten distributor hold-down bolt
and clamp. Connect distributor ground () leads.
5. Install cap. Refer to Spark Plug Wires and install
wires.
6. Plug wiring harness into ignition module on distributor housing, on distributors so equipped.
Connect wires from ignition module to distributor
terminals, on all models.
7. Coat any exposed terminals with Quicksilver Liquid Neoprene.
b. Remove rocker cover and crank engine until

No. 1 intake valve closes, continuing to crank
slowly until pointer lines up with timing mark
on crankshaft pulley.
2. Position distributor to opening in block in normal
installed attitude.
IMPORTANT: Make sure oil pump shaft is engaged in the following. Position (align) oil pump
shaft end to engage bottom of distributor dive
gear prior to inserting distributor if necessary.
3. Position rotor to point toward No. 1 cylinder on
cap (with distributor housing held in installed attitude), then turn rotor counterclockwise approximately 1/8-turn more and work distributor down
to engage camshaft and oil pump shaft. It may be
necessary to rotate rotor slightly until engagement is felt.
! CAUTION
Avoid severe engine damage. Do not attempt to
force distributor into position using hold-down
clamp and bolt.
4. When distributor housing contacts intake manifold, camshaft and oil pump shaft are engaged.
Install hold-down clamp and bolt and snug up
bolt.
8. Time ignition as outlined under Ignition Timing.
5. Connect distributor ground () leads, if so

equipped.
Engine Disturbed
6. Place distributor cap in position and check that

rotor lines up with terminal for No. 1 spark plug.
Install new gasket on distributor housing. Install
cap.
1. Locate No. 1 piston in firing position by following

instructions a or b:
a. Remove No. 1 spark plug and, with finger on
plug hole, crank engine until compression is
felt in No. 1 cylinder. Continue cranking until
pointer lines up with timing mark on crankshaft pulley.
7. Refer to Spark Plug Wires and install wires. Refer to Specifications for firing order.
8. Plug wiring harness into ignition module on distributor housing, on distributors so equipped.
Connect wires from ignition module to distributor
terminals, on all models.
9. Coat any exposed terminals with Quicksilver Liquid Neoprene.
10. Time ignition as outlined under Ignition Timing.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Timing
1. Connect timing light (91-99379 or similar) to No.
1 spark plug. Connect power supply leads on
light to 12 volt battery. Refer to Specifications
for cylinder numbering and location.
5. Adjust timing by loosening distributor clamp and

rotating distributor body as required until timing
mark on damper or pulley lines up with the mark
on tab specified in Specifications. Tighten
clamp and recheck location of timing mark.
6. Stop engine and remove timing light.
2. Connect tachometer to engine.

3. Start engine and run at normal idle speed.
4. Aim timing light at timing tab, located on timing
gear cover and crankshaft torsional damper.
IMPORTANT: GM engine timing marks (on tab)
are in 2-degree increments. MCM and MIE LH engines will have A (Advance) mark to the left of
0. Timing must be set on the A side of 0
(Top Dead Center).
b
72328
72851
a - Degree Marks
b - Timing Mark
Index
90-823224--2 796
Thunderbolt V Ignition System

Identification
The Thunderbolt V ignition system uses the same distributor as the Thunderbolt IV system. The Ignition Control
Module and Knock Control Module are mounted with the ignition control module.
73999
a - Ignition Control Module

b - Knock Control Module
Index
90-823224--2 796
Idle Speed Spark Control
NOTE: The Audio Warning System is also connected

into the ignition module circuit. If the audio warning
system becomes activated by the closing of one of
the audio warning system switches, the MBT feature
is deactivated.
Acceleration Spark Advance
Over-Speed Control
Mean-Best-Timing Spark Advance
Over-Speed Control (Rev-Limiter)
Knock Retard Spark Control
The ignition module will prevent the engine speed

from exceeding a preset limit by stopping the spark.
This feature has an RPM range that varies from model to model. The over-speed limit for a particular engine is set slightly higher than the top end of the RPM
range for that model. For example, if the recommended range is 4600-5000 RPM, the over-speed
limit would be set at 5100 RPM. When RPM reaches
this limit, spark is turned-off until engine RPM drops
down to a Reset RPM, which would be approximately 4750 RPM for this example. At this point,
spark comes back on.
General Description
The Thunderbolt V ignition system has several spark
control features that will be described following:
NOTE: The Ski models do not have the Mean Best

Timing feature.
Idle Speed Spark Control

The ignition module will control ignition timing to
maintain a calibrated idle speed. This is accomplished by making small spark advance adjustments.
This feature is only active within a certain RPM
range. This range may be slightly different from one
engine model to another. The approximate range is
400-700 RPM.
Acceleration Spark Advance

This feature is active during acceleration only. When
accelerating, the ignition module may add more
spark advance to the Base Spark Timing Curve.
The amount of spark advance added, is totally dependant on how fast RPM increases (how fast the
throttle is moved). This feature is also active within a
certain RPM range. This range may be slightly different from one engine model to another. The approximate RPM range for this feature is 1200-4000 RPM.
Within this range, the module can add approximately
10 degrees of spark advance to the base spark timing
curve.
Knock Retard Spark Control

The knock control feature helps provide protection
from harmful detonation. Knock control is handled by
the Knock Control Module. This module receives a
signal from a sensor that is mounted on the engine
block. The knock control module works in conjunction with the ignition module to retard the timing if
spark knock is present.
Mean-Best-Timing (MBT)
Spark Advance
During light load cruising, the ignition module
searches for the optimal ignition timing. This is also
accomplished by small changes to the spark advance. At a given RPM, the module will try to add a
small amount of advance and wait to see if there is
an RPM change. If RPM increases, it will try to increase timing more. The module will continue to advance timing until it no longer gets an increase in
RPM. Conversely, if it senses an RPM drop, it will
start to retard some of the spark timing. The approximate RPM range for this feature is 1200-4000 RPM.
Within this range, the ignition module can add
approximately 10-15 degrees of spark advance to
the base spark timing curve.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Thunderbolt V Spark Control Graph

IMPORTANT: The graph below shows the typical advance ranges for a Thunderbolt V ignition control
module. The numbers plotted on the graph are not representative of any particular model. It is only presented to provide an understanding of how the system functions.
35
30
TOTAL SPARK ADVANCE

25
20
15
10
10
15
0
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000
4500
5000
ENGINE R.P.M.
= Base Timing Advance Curve

= Idle Speed Advance Range
= Knock Retard Range
= Acceleration Advance Range
= MBT Advance Range
Index
90-823224--2 796
Circuit Description
Knock Control Module
Refer to the circuit wiring diagram on the following

page for reference to this circuit description.
The knock control module receives its power (+)

from the PURPLE wire 4.
Knock module ground () is accomplished thru

the BLACK wire 2.
The PURPLE/WHITE wire 3 carries the signal

from the knock control module to the ignition
control module.
The BLUE wire 1 carries the signal from the

knock sensor to the knock module.
Ignition Control Module

D
The ignition module receives its power (+) thru

the PURPLE wire 9.
Ignition module ground () is accomplished thru

the BLACK wire 10.
There is also a Case Ground () wire 12 that is

connected to one of the ignition module attaching
screws.
The 12 volt signal from the ignition module to the

distributor is carried thru the WHITE/RED wire
8, to the distributor sensor and back to the
ignition module thru the WHITE/GREEN wire 7.
D
D
The tachometer signal is carried to the

instrument panel thru the GRAY wire 11.
The PURPLE/WHITE wire 3 carries the signal
from the knock control module to the ignition
control module.
There are two BLACK wires 5 that have bullet
connectors. This circuit is reserved for future
options. On current models, the two BLACK
wires must be connected for the system to
function properly.
Ignition Control System Timing Lead

The ignition control system has a lead with bullet connector 11 that is connected into the PURPLE/
WHITE wire 3. This lead is used for performing the
following tests and procedures:
D
Setting Base Ignition Timing
Setting Engine Idle Speed
Setting Idle Mixture
Testing Knock Control Circuit
This lead, when connected to an engine ground (),

locks the ignition control module into the Base Timing mode.
The TAN/BLU wire 6 carries a signal from the

Audio Warning circuit to the ignition module.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Ignition System Wiring Diagram

TO DISTRIBUTOR
TO ENGINE HARNESS
13
16 GRY
16 BLK
16 PUR
16 PUR/WHT
16 TAN/BLU
16 BLK
16 PUR/WHT
16 PUR
16 PUR/WHT
BLACK
BLUE
BROWN
GRAY
GREEN
ORANGE
PINK
PURPLE
RED
TAN
WHITE
YELLOW
LIGHT
DARK
16 BLK
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
16 BLU
BLK
BLU
BRN
GRY
GRN
ORN
PNK
PUR
RED
TAN
WHT
YEL
LIT
DRK
16 WHT/RED
16 WHT/GRN
1
16 BLK
2
3
4
6
3
10
11
16 BLK
A B C DE
12
IGNITION
CONTROL
MODULE
KNOCK
CONTROL
MODULE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Knock Sensor Wire

Ground Wire () For Knock Module
Knock Module Signal Wire
Battery (+) Positive Wire To Knock Module
Ground () For Furture Options
Audio Warning System Wire
Distributor Wire
8 9 10111213-
Distributor Wire
Battery (+) Positive Wire To Ignition Module
Ground Wire For Ignition Module
Tachometer Wire
Ignition Module Case Ground ()
Timing Lead (For Setting Timing and Other Tests)
Index
90-823224--2 796
Timing and Idle Adjustment

Procedures For Thunderbolt
V Ignition
1. Using a jumper wire, connect the ignition system

timing lead 13 (PUR/WHT wire) to a good engine ground (). This locks the ignition module
into the Base Timing Mode.
Setting Base Ignition Timing
3. Remove the jumper wire from the timing terminal.
1. Connect timing light to number 1 spark plug.

Connect timing light power supply leads (if
applicable) to 12 volt source.
Adjusting Engine Idle Speed
2. Connect a shop tachometer to engine.

4. Start engine and run at normal idle speed. Allow
engine to reach normal operating temperature.
5. Aim timing light at timing tab, located on the timing gear cover and crankshaft torsional damper.
6. Adjust timing using the conventional method.
IMPORTANT: Be sure to disconnect the jumper
wire from the ignition system test terminal before
attempting to resume normal operations. If the
jumper wire is left in place, the ignition module
will operate in the Base Timing Mode. This
means that the additional timing advance features would not function.
7. Make sure that the distributor has been tightened. Remove the jumper wire from the timing
terminal.
8. Stop engine and remove timing light.
Adjusting Idle Mixture

The procedure for adjusting carburetor idle mixture
can be found in the appropriate engine service manual. This procedure also requires that the ignition module be locked in the Base Timing Mode.
IMPORTANT: In order to properly set idle mixture,
the ignition module MUST BE locked in the Base
Timing Mode. This is necessary because of the
Idle Speed Control feature that exists in the
ignition module. See information on the previous
pages about this feature.
2. Adjust idle mixture following the procedure in the

appropriate engine service manual.
This procedure should be done with boat in the water,

drive unit in neutral and engine at normal operating
temperature. Refer to the Operation and Maintenance Manual for the correct idle speed.
1. Disconnect the throttle cable from carburetor.
IMPORTANT: In order to properly set idle speed,
4. Start engine and allow it to reach normal operating temperature.
5. Adjust idle speed to recommended RPM.
6. Stop engine. Readjust cable barrel and reinstall
the throttle.
means that the additional timing advance features would not be functioning.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Troubleshooting Thunderbolt V Ignition

Ignition Control Module / Coil / Distributor
Check to ensure that tachometer
GRY lead is not shorted to
ground () at the
tachometer or
00000
within the harness.
No Spark
and Ignition Coil.
Battery OK?
Tight?
No Spark
12 Volts
0
Volts
0
Volts
Check Engine
and Instrument
Wiring Harness,
Battery Cables,
Key Switch
Unplug WHT/
RED bullet connector
from Distributor.
Check for 12 volts
on lead coming
from module.
12 Volts
Reconnect WHT/RED
bullet connectors.
Tower to Ground. Disconnect
WHT/GRN Lead from Distributor. Place Ignition Key in RUN
Position. Rapidly strike the Terminal of the WHT/GRN Lead
that comes from module,
against Ground ().
(See IMPORTANT below)
Spark
at Coil
Replace Ignition
Sensor in
Distributor
No Spark at Coil
Substitute a New Ignition
Coil. Repeat Above Test
Spark
at Coil
Install New
Ignition Coil
No Spark at Coil
IMPORTANT: The WHT/GRN lead must be touched against ground () 2-3 times per second to simulate
a running engine. Repeat this test several times to ensure that spark is present.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Knock Control Module

The Knock Control Module contains solid state circuitry which monitors the knock sensors AC voltage
signal and then supplies an 8-10 volt signal, if no
spark knock is present, to the Ignition Control Module. If spark knock is present, the Knock module will
remove the 8-10 volt signal to the Ignition Control
Module.
a
IMPORTANT: If there is abnormal mechanical engine noise (rattles or knocks), they may give a
false knock retard signal. If fuel octane is too high
or too low, a false signal can also be sent.
TESTING KNOCK MODULE AND SENSOR
NOTE: A digital volt-ohmmeter (DVOM) and an unpowered test light (low power test light - 300mA or
less) are needed to conduct the following test.
! WARNING
Avoid fire or explosion. Ensure that engine
compartment is well ventilated and gasoline vapors are not present when performing electrical
tests inside the engine compartment. Sparks
generated by electrical tests could ignite gasoline vapors causing fire or explosion.
c
Knock Sensor System
a - Positive Lead (12 Volts)
b - 8-10 Volts To Knock Sensor
c - Knock Sensor
It is extremely important that the correct knock module and sensor be used for the engine application.
Using an incorrect knock module or sensor will result
in unrecognized spark knock and engine damage.
The Knock module terminal B is powered by 12 volts
from the ignition switch. If the 12 volt power source
is not present, the knock module cannot send an 8-10
volt signal to the ignition control module and a false
constant spark retard will result.
Terminal E of the knock module is the signal line
from the knock sensor. If this circuit opens or shorts
to ground, the knock module will never remove the
8-10 volt signal from terminal C to and no spark retard will occur. The ground circuit for the knock module is connected to terminal D. If the ground circuit
opens, the knock module will not be able to remove
the 8-10 volt signal and spark knock cannot be controlled.
IMPORTANT: If knock sensor wire is routed too
close to secondary ignition wires, the Knock
module may see the interference as a knock signal, resulting in false timing retard.
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating

temperature.
2. Connect the positive (+) lead from the DVOM to
the PURPLE/WHITE timing terminal that comes
from the engine harness (see previous wiring diagram). Connect the negative () lead from the
DVOM to a good engine ground (). With the engine running, there should be 8-10 volts on this
circuit. If voltage is not present, check to ensure
that there is 12 volts to the knock module (PURPLE wire Terminal B).
3. Advance the throttle to approximately 1500 RPM.
4. Disconnect the harness connector (BLUE wire)
from the knock sensor. Connect the unpowered
test light to a positive (+) 12 volt source. To simulate an AC voltage, rapidly tap the knock sensor
harness terminal with the test light. If knock module and wiring is functioning properly, you should
see a voltage drop on the DVOM. If a voltage drop
is not seen, check the BLUE wire from the sensor
to the knock module for a short or open circuit. If
the circuit is functioning properly to this point, the
knock sensor may not be functioning. Proceed to
the following step.
5. Reconnect the knock sensor harness connector
to the sensor.
6. While still watching the DVOM, lightly and rapidly
tap on the engine block near the knock sensor
with a small hammer. If the knock sensor is functioning properly, you should see the voltage decrease. If a voltage drop is not seen, the knock
sensor is faulty.
Index
90-823224--2 796
INSTALLATION OF KNOCK SENSOR
Spark Plugs
IMPORTANT: If installing a new knock sensor, be

sure to replace it with an identical part. Knock
sensors are very sensitive and designed for each
specific application.
IMPORTANT: It is very important that the knock
sensor be torqued to the exact specification. Incorrect torquing will result in unsatisfactory performance. DO NOT use sealer on threads.
1. Install knock sensor in engine block. Torque to
12-16 lb. ft. (16.3-21.7 Nm).
1. Inspect each plug individually for badly worn

electrodes, glazed, broken or blistered porcelain
and replace where necessary.
2. Inspect each spark plug for make and heat range.
All plugs must be the same make and number
and heat range. Refer to Specifications for
spark plug numbers.
3. Adjust spark plug gaps with a round feeler gauge.
Refer to Specifications for proper spark plug
gap.
b
c
f
a
d
e
73756
a - Knock Sensor
2. Connect electrical connector to knock sensor.
a
b
c
d
e
f
72734
Porcelain Insulator
Insulator Cracks Often At This Point
Shell
Proper Gap
Side Electrode (Bend To Adjust Gap)
Center Electrode (File When Adjusting Gap - DO NOT
Bend)
4. Clean spark plug seating area. Do not use gaskets on taper seat plugs. Install spark plugs and
torque to specifications. Where used, gasket
must be fully compressed to complete heat transfer and provide a gas- tight seal in cylinder. For
this reason, as well as the necessity of maintaining correct plug gap, correct torque is very important during installation.
IMPORTANT: Tapered seat spark plugs are not interchangeable with non-tapered (with gasket)
spark plugs.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Spark Plug Wires

1. Inspect spark plugs for damage.
2. Check spark plugs for continuity using MultiMeter / DVA (91-99750) or similar.
3. Replace any wiers that are cracked, cut, or have
damaged spark plug boots.
4. Replace any wires that do not show continuity
from end to end.
5. Reinstall wires in proper order. Observe the following:
IMPORTANT: Proper positioning in spark plug
wire supports is important to prevent crossfiring.
IMPORTANT: Before installing coil wire to coil,
apply approximately 1/2 oz. of insulating compound around top of coil lead tower. Force nipple
into coil and wipe off excess. Make sure boot
does not hydraulically back off the distributor
cap terminal.
Index
90-823224--2 796

AT A LATER DATE
Index
90-823224--2 796
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4
C
72078
CHARGING SYSTEM
Index
Table of Contents
Page
Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-1
Replacement Parts Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-1
Mando 55 and 65 Amp Alternator . . . . . . . . . . 4C-1
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-1
Tools/Sealants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-1
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-2
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-2
System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-3
Periodic Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-3
Drive Belt Tension Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-4
Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-4
Troubleshooting Tests
(Alternator on Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-4
Circuitry Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-4
Current Output Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-6
Voltage Output Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-6
Alternator Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-7
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-7
Exploded View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-8
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-9
Cleaning and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-12
Component Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-13
Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-16
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-18
Prestolite 65 Amp Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-19
Replacement Parts Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-19
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-19
Tools/Sealants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-19
Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-19
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-19
Page
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-20
System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-20
Periodic Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-21
Drive Belt Tension Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-21
V-Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-21
(Alternator on Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-22
Circuitry Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-22
Alternator Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-25
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-25
Exploded View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-26
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-27
Cleaning and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-29
Front Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-29
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-29
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-29
Slip Rings/Rear Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-30
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-30
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-30
Component Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-31
Rotor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-31
Stator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-32
Positive/Negative Rectifier and
Diode-Trio Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-33
Condenser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-34
Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-34
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-36
Battery Isolators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-37
Dual Battery Charging Systems Using
a Battery Isolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-37
Battery Isolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4C-38
Index
4C
- CHARGING
SYSTEM
4C-0
- CHARGING
SYSTEM
90-823224--2 796
Identification

! WARNING

b
72078
Mando 55 and 65 Amp

Alternator
Mando 55 and 65 Amp Alternator
Specifications
a - Excitation Wire - PURPLE

b - Sensing Wire - RED/PURPLE
c - Mando Part Number (Hidden In This View)
Description
Specification
Excitation Circuit
1.3 to 2.5 Volts
Current Output
55 Amp.
50 Amp.
Amp Min.
Min
65 Amp.
60 Amp. Min.
Voltage Output
Min. Brush Length
13.9 to 14.7 Volts

1/4 in. (6 mm)
c
73078
Tools/Sealants
Description
Prestolite 65 Amp Alternator

d - Excitation Wire - PURPLE
e - Sensing Wire - RED/PURPLE
f - Prestolite Part Number (Hidden In This View)
Bearing Removal and

Installation Kit
Part Number
91-31229A5
Magneto Analyzer
91-76032
Universal Puller Plate
91-37241
Multi-Meter/DVA Tester
91-99750
Quicksilver Liquid
Neoprene
Ammeter (0-50 mm)
92-27511-2
Obtain Locally
Index
90-823224--2 796
CHARGING SYSTEM - 4C-1
Fastener Location
in. lb.
ft. lb.
Nm
End Frame Screws
55
5.5
Brush Setscrews
18
1.5
Regulator Mounting
Screws
42
4.2
Regualtor Leads
25
2.5
Ground Terminal Nut
25
2.5
Pulley Nut
42
4.2
Alternator Brace to
Alternator
20
27
Alternator Brace to
Block
30
41
Alternator to Mounting
Bracket
35
48
Alternator Mounting
Bracket
30
41
V-Belt Tension (Note)
Depress 1/4 in.
Description
The alternator has a rotor, which is supported in two
end frames by ball bearings, and is driven by a pulley
at approximately twice engine speed. The rotor contains a field winding that is enclosed between two
multiple-finger pole pieces. The ends of the field
winding are connected to two brushes (mounted in
the rear end frame) which make continuous sliding
(or slipping) contact with the slip rings. The current
(flowing through the field winding) creates a magnetic field that causes the adjacent fingers of the pole
pieces to become alternate north and south magnetic
poles.
A 3-phase stator is mounted directly over the rotor
pole pieces and between two end frames. It consists
of three windings wound 120 degrees electrically
out-of-phase on the inside of a laminated core. The
windings are all connected together on one end,
while the other ends are connected to a full-wave rectifier bridge.
The rectifier bridge contains six diodes which are arranged so that current flows from ground, through the
stator and to the output terminal, but not in the opposite direction.
When current is supplied to the rotor field winding,

and the rotor is turned, the movement of the magnetic
fields created induces an alternating current into the
stator windings. The rectifier bridge then changes
this alternating current to direct current which appears at the output terminal. A diode trio also is connected to the stator windings to supply current to the
regulator and the rotor field during operation.
Voltage output of the alternator is controlled by regulating the current supplied to the rotor field. This is accomplished by a transistorized voltage regulator that
senses the voltage at the battery and regulates the
field current to maintain alternator voltage within prescribed limits for properly charging the battery. Current output of the alternator does not require regulation, as maximum current output is self-limited by the
design of the alternator. As long as the voltage is regulated within the prescribed limits, the alternator cannot produce excessive current. A cut-out relay in the
voltage regulator also is not required, as the rectifier
diodes (which allow current to flow in one direction
only) prevent the battery from discharging back
through the stator.
Due to the lack of residual magnetism in the rotor
pole pieces, a small amount of current must be
supplied to the rotor field to initially start the alternator
charging. This is accomplished by means of an excitation circuit in the regulator which is connected to the
ignition switch. Once the alternator begins to produce
output, field current is supplied solely by the diode
trio, as explained, preceding.
The alternator also is equipped with a fan (mounted
on the rotor shaft) which induces air flow through the
alternator to remove the heat created by the rectifiers
and stator. A capacitor protects the rectifier system
from high voltages and suppresses radio noise.
Precautions
The following precautions MUST BE observed when
working on the alternator system. Failure to observe
these precautions may result in serious damage to
the alternator or alternator system.
1. DO NOT attempt to polarize the alternator.
2. DO NOT short across or ground any of the terminals on the alternator, except as specifically instructed in the Troubleshooting Tests.
3. NEVER disconnect the alternator output lead or
battery cables when the alternator is being driven
by the engine.
Index
4C-2 - CHARGING SYSTEM
90-823224--2 796
4. NEVER disconnect regulator lead from alternator

regulator terminal when the alternator is being
driven by the engine.
5. ALWAYS remove negative () battery cable from
battery before working on alternator system.
6. When installing battery, BE SURE to connect the
positive (+) battery cable to the positive (+) battery terminal and the negative () (grounded) battery cable to negative () battery terminal.
7. If a charger or booster battery is to be used, BE
SURE to connect it in parallel with existing battery
(positive to positive; negative to negative).
Periodic Maintenance
The following maintenance check should be performed every 50 hours or 60 days (whichever comes
first) in fresh water areas or every 25 hours or 30 days
in salt water areas.
! CAUTION
Remove all battery cables from battery (before
conducting the following check) to prevent accidentally shorting out electrical system.
1. Inspect entire alternator system for corroded or
loose connectors.
System Components
2. Check wiring for frayed or worn insulation.
The alternator system consists of the alternator, battery, the ignition switch and the wiring which connects
these components.
3. Check alternator drive belt for excessive wear,

cracks, fraying and glazed surfaces. Also, check
drive belt tension and adjust, if necessary, as explained under Drive Belt Tension Adjustment.
4. Check alternator mounting bolts for adequate

tightness.
5. Inspect slip ring end frame flame arrestor screen
for debris and clean, if necessary, using compressed air or a cloth. Screen MUST BE clean, or
alternator may overheat.
g
a
b
f
c
72933
a - Ignition Switch
b - Alternator
c - Starter Motor
d - Ground Stud
e - Battery
f - Circuit Breaker
g - Harness Plug
h - Battery Meter
Index
90-823224--2 796
Drive Belt Tension

Adjustment
(Alternator on Engine)
Alternator
1. Install drive belt on pulleys and adjust tension as
follows:
a. Pivot alternator away from engine, as required, until correct tension is obtained as
shown. Belt should depress 1/4 in. (6 mm).
Use the following tests in conjunction with the Troubleshooting in Section 1. Before proceeding with the
tests, however, perform the following checks to eliminate possible problem areas. Also observe Precautions, preceding, to prevent damage to alternator
system.
1. If problem is an undercharged battery, check to
ensure that undercharged condition has not been
caused by excessive accessory current draw or
by accessories which have accidentally been left
on. Also, check that undercharged condition has
not been caused by running engine at too low a
speed for extended periods of time.
2. Check physical condition and state of charge of
battery, as outlined in Battery - Storage in Section 4A. Battery MUST BE at least 75% (1.230
specific gravity) of fully charged to obtain valid results in the following tests. If not, charge battery
before testing system.
3. Inspect entire alternator system wiring for defects. Check all connections for tightness and
cleanliness, particularly battery cable clamps
and battery terminals.
72669
a - Check Point
b. After obtaining correct tension, securely retighten alternator brace attaching bolts and
alternator mounting bolts.
2. If a new drive belt has been installed, recheck belt
tension after running for five minutes.

cracks, fraying and glazed surfaces and replace
if necessary. Also, check drive belt tension and
adjust if necessary, as outlined under Drive Belt
Tension Adjustment.
Circuitry Test
Perform the following tests, using a 0-20 volt DC voltmeter, to check that all of the circuits between the alternator and the other components within the alternator system are in good condition.
OUTPUT CIRCUIT
1. Connect positive (+) voltmeter lead to alternator
output terminal and negative () lead to a ground
terminal on alternator.
Index
90-823224--2 796
2. Wiggle engine wiring harness while observing

voltmeter. Meter should indicate approximate
battery voltage and should not vary. If no reading
is obtained, or if reading varies, check alternator
output circuit for loose or dirty connections or
damaged wiring.
If voltmeter now indicates approximate battery

voltage, voltage regulator is defective and must
be replaced. If no voltage is indicated, check excitation circuit for loose or dirty connections or
damaged wiring.
4. If reading is between .75 and 1.1 volts, rotor field
circuit probably is shorted or grounded. Disassemble alternator and test rotor as outlined under
Alternator Repair, following.
5. If reading is between 6.0 and 7.0 volts, rotor field
circuit probably is open. Remove regulator and
inspect for worn brushes or dirty slip rings. Replace brushes if less than 1/4 in. (6 mm) long. If
brushes and slip rings are in good condition, disassemble and perform rotor test as outlined under Component Testing - Rotor following.
TEST 1
TEST 2
d
c
b
72784
a
b
c
d
e
Output Wire - ORANGE

Excitation Wire - PURPLE
Sensing Wire - RED/PURPLE
Voltmeter (0-20 Volts)
Ground
b
c
EXCITATION CIRCUIT
1. Connect positive (+) voltmeter lead to tie strap
terminal on alternator and negative () lead to a
ground terminal on alternator (Test 1).
2. Turn ignition switch to ON position and note voltmeter reading. Reading should be 1.3 to 2.5
volts.
3. If no reading is obtained, an opening exists in alternator excitation lead or in excitation circuit of
regulator. Unplug PURPLE lead from regulator.
Connect positive voltmeter lead to PURPLE lead
and negative voltmeter leads to ground (Test 2).
a
72785
a
b
c
d
e

Tie Bar
Ground
SENSING CIRCUIT
1. Unplug RED/PURPLE lead from voltage regulator.
Index
90-823224--2 796
2. Connect positive (+) voltmeter lead to red/purple

lead and negative () voltmeter lead to ground
terminal.
3. Voltmeter should indicate battery voltage. If battery voltage is not present, check sensing circuit
(red/purple lead) for loose or dirty connection or
damaged wiring.
4. Remove coil wire from distributor cap tower and

ground it to block. Turn on all accessories and
crank engine over with starter motor for 15-20
seconds.
5. Turn off accessories and reinstall coil wire. Start
engine and adjust engine speed to 1500-2000
RPM. Quickly observe ammeter. Reading should
be at least 30 amps.
6. If reading is low, stop engine and connect a jumper wire between alternator output terminal and
regulator terminal. Repeat Steps 4 and 5.
7. If reading is now within specifications, diodes are

faulty. Disassemble alternator and replace
rectifier as explained under Alternator Repair,
following, to determine if fault is in regulator or
alternator.
8. If reading is still low with jumper wire connected,

perform Voltage Output Test, following, to determine if fault is in regulator or alternator.
c
a
72786
a
b
c
d
e

Ground
b
e
d
Current Output Test

Perform this test to check if alternator is capable of
producing rated current output, using a 0-50 amp DC
ammeter.
! WARNING
c
72787
a
b
c
d
e

Ammeter (0-50 Amps)
Jumper Lead
Regulator Lead
Ground
Be sure that engine compartment is well-ventilated and that there are no gasoline vapors present (during the test) to prevent the possibility of
an explosion and/or a fire, should a spark occur.
Voltage Output Test
1. Disconnect negative () battery cable from battery.
IMPORTANT: Battery MUST BE fully charged

(1.260 or above specific gravity) to obtain proper
voltage reading in this test. If necessary, charge
battery with a battery charger or allow engine to
run a sufficient length of time to fully charge battery before taking reading.
2. Disconnect orange lead from alternator output

terminal and connect ammeter in series between
lead and output terminal. Connect positive (+)
side of ammeter toward output terminal.
Perform this test to determine if voltage regulator is

operating correctly, using a 0-20 volt DC voltmeter.
3. Reconnect negative battery cable.
Index
90-823224--2 796
1. Connect positive (+) voltmeter lead to positive

battery terminal and negative () voltmeter lead
to negative terminal.
2. Start engine and run at fast idle until engine
reaches normal operating temperature. Adjust
engine speed to 1500-2000 RPM and observe
voltmeter for highest reading. Reading should be
between 13.9 and 14.7 volts.
3. If reading is high, check for a loose or dirty regulator ground lead connection. If connection is good
(and sensing circuit checked out good in Circuitry Test), voltage regulator is faulty and must be
replaced. Be sure to disconnect battery cables
before attempting to remove regulator.
4. Remove four nuts holding excitation and sensing

wires and Phillips screw. Remove regulator cover
and install wires and nuts for testing. Connect a
jumper wire from the ground stud to the brush terminal on the lower right- hand side of the brush
assembly. Restart engine and gradually increase
engine speed to 1500 RPM while observing voltmeter. DO NOT allow voltage to exceed 16 volts.
5. If a voltmeter reading of 14.5 volts or above is
now obtained, voltage regulator is faulty and
must be replaced. If voltmeter reading is below
14.5 volts, inspect brushes and slip rings for
wear, dirt or damage. If brushes and slip rings are
good, alternator is faulty internally. Disassemble
alternator and test components, as outlined under Alternator Repair, following.
a
e
b
a
d
c
72971
72788
a
b
c
d
e

Ground
! WARNING
Be sure that engine compartment is well-ventilated and that there are no gasoline vapors present (during the next steps) to prevent the possibility of an explosion and/or fire, should a spark
occur.
a
b
c
d
Ground
Brush / Regulator Assembly
Brush Terminal
Jumper Wire (Solder Connection Ground)
Alternator Repair
Removal
2. Disconnect wiring harness from alternator.
! CAUTION
DO NOT allow tie jumper wire to contact alternator end frame (in next step), as rectifier and diode
assembly may be damaged.
3. Remove alternator brace-to-alternator attaching

bolt, washer(s) and spacer (if used).
4. Loosen alternator brace-to-engine attaching bolt
and alternator mounting bolt, then pivot alternator inward and remove alternator drive belt.
5. Remove alternator mounting bolt, washers (if
used), spacer and nut, and remove alternator.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Exploded View
19
20
22
21
25
24
27
26
1
3
29
28
23
10
9
2
12
10
16
17
13
15
13
2
14
18
10
11
72276
Index
90-823224--2 796
1 - Screws (3)
2 - Nut (9)
3 - Flat Washer (4)
4 - Sensing Wire (RED / PURPLE)
5 - Excitation Wire (PURPLE)
6 - Cover
7 - Tie Strap
8 - Rubber Gasket
9 - Condenser
10- Insulator
11- Bolt (4)
12 -End Frame (Rear)
13 -Cap (2)
14- Brush / Regulator Assembly
15- Rectifier Assembly
16- Flat Washer
17- Screw
18- Stator
19- Rotor And Slip Ring
20- Retaining Plate
21- Front Bearing
22- End Frame (Front)
23- Screw (3)
24- Fan Spacer
25- Fan
26- Pulley Spacer
27- Pulley
28- Lockwasher
29- Nut
Disassembly
IMPORTANT: The following instructions are for
complete disassembly and overhaul of the alternator. In many cases, however, complete disassembly of alternator is not required and, in those
cases, it is necessary only to perform the operations required to repair or replace the faulty part.
1. Mount alternator in a vise so that rear end frame
is facing you.
2. Disconnect regulator leads from terminals on
rear end frame. Remove four nuts, Phillips head
screw and two regulator leads. Then pull regulator cover away from rear end frame.
72963
a
b
c
d
Regulator Leads
Nuts (4)
Phillips Head Screw
Regulator Cover
3. Remove stud cover insulator, two nuts and tie

strap from brush/regulator assembly.
Index
90-823224--2 796
4. Remove two brush/regulator attaching screws

and remove brush/regulator assembly.
7. Separate rear end frame and stator assembly

from front end frame and rotor assembly using
two thin blade screwdrivers (positioned 180 degrees apart from one another) at the locations
shown. Use the two slots shown to initially separate units.
c
e
a
d
a
d
a
72823
72824
a
b
c
d
Screws
Brush / Regulator Assembly
Stud Cover Insulator
Tie Strap
5. Scribe a mark on rear end frame, stator and front

end frame to ensure proper reassembly later.
6. Remove four screws which secure end frames
and stator together.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT insert screwdriver blades
more than 1/16 in. (1.5 mm) into openings (in next
step), as stator windings may be damaged.
a - DO NOT Insert Screwdriver Blades More Than 1/16 In.

(1.5 mm) Into Slots.
b - Rear End Frame
c - Stator
d - Front End Frame
e - Scribe Marks
8. Place rear end frame and stator assembly on the

bench with stator downward. Be sure that bench
is clean and free of metal chips. Remove nuts,
washers, insulators and condenser from output
and ground studs.
Index
90-823224--2 796
9. Turn end frame over (stator upward) and remove

one Phillips head screw which secures rectifiers
to end frame.
IMPORTANT: With alternator disassembled to

this point, stator, rectifier, diodes, and rotor may
be tested, as explained under Component Testing, following.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT clamp vise on rotor pole
pieces when removing pulley nut (in next step),
as pole pieces may be distorted.
12. Remove pulley retaining nut by clamping pulley

in a vise (using an oversize V-belt or protective
jaws to protect pulley) and turning nut counterclockwise with a wrench. Remove lockwasher
and slide pulley and fan from shaft. If pulley is difficult to remove, it may be necessary to use a universal puller.
b
72826
a - Rectifier Assembly
b - Phillips Head Screw
a
10. Separate stator and rectifier assembly from rear
end frame using screwdriver slots.
11. Unsolder the three stator leads from the rectifier
heat sink. Place a needle nose pliers on diode terminal between solder joint and diode body to help
prevent heat damage to diodes. Unsolder joints
as quickly as possible and allow diode terminal to
cool before removing pliers.
72828
a - Wrench
b - Over-Sized Belt To Protect Pulley
b
72827
a - Heat Sink
b - Stator Leads (3)
Index
90-823224--2 796
13. Remove the three phillips head screws and lockwashers which secure the front bearing retaining
plate.

1. Clean all parts with a clean, soft cloth. DO NOT
use solvent, or electrical components may be
damaged.
2. Inspect the following parts for wear and damage:
a. Brush/regulator assembly - inspect for

cracked casing, damaged brush leads, poor
brush lead solder connections, weak or broken brush springs or worn brushes. Replace
brush set if brushes are less than 1/4 in. (6
mm) long.
b. Rotor - inspect for stripped threads, scuffed
pole piece fingers or damaged bearing surfaces (because of bearing turning on shaft).
b
72829
a - Phillips Head Screws and Lockwashers

b - Front Bearing Retaining Plate
14. Remove front bearing from front end frame using

an arbor press and a suitable size mandrel. (Discard bearing.)
c. Rotor-slip rings - clean slip rings with 400

grain (or finer) polishing cloth while spinning
rotor in a lathe. Blow off dust with compressed air. Inspect slip rings for grooves,
pits, flat spots or out-of-round [.002 in. (0.051
mm) maximum] and replace rotor, if present.
d. Rotor shaft and front end bearings - inspect for damaged seals, lack of lubrication,
discoloration (from overheating) and excessive side or end play. Bearing should turn
freely without binding or evidence of rough
spots.
e. Stator - inspect for damaged insulation or
wires; also inspect insulating enamel for heat
discoloration, as this is usually a sign of a
shorted or grounded winding or a shorted
diode.
f.
72830
Removing Front Bearing from Front End Frame
15. If rotor slip rings or rear bearing requires replacement, entire rotor must be replaced. Parts cannot
be purchased separately.
Front and rear end frames - inspect for

cracks, distortion, stripped threads or wear in
bearing bore (from bearing outer race spinning in bore). End frame(s) MUST BE replaced, if bearing has spun. Also, inspect
bearing retainer recess in front end frame for
damage.
g. Fan - inspect for cracked or bent fins, broken

welds (bi-rotational fan only) or worn mounting hole (from fan spinning on shaft).
h. Pulley - inspect pulley mounting bore end for
wear. Inspect drive surface of pulley sheaves
for trueness, excessive wear, grooves, pits,
nicks and corrosion. Repair damaged surfaces, if possible, with a fine file and a wire
brush or replace pulley, if beyond repair.
Drive surfaces MUST BE perfectly true and
smooth or drive belt wear will be greatly accelerated.
Index
90-823224--2 796
d. If reading is low, a short exists in the field circuit. Inspect slip rings to be sure that they are
not bent and touching outer slip ring. Also, be
sure that excess solder is not shorting terminals to aft slip ring. If cause for short cannot
be found, unsolder field winding leads from
slip ring terminals and connect ohmmeter directly to leads. If correct reading is now obtained, or if reading is still low, slip rings and
rotor field windings are shorted, and complete rotor assembly must be replaced.
Component Testing
ROTOR
1. Test rotor field circuit for opens, shorts or high resistance (Test 1), using an ohmmeter (set on R x1
scale), as follows:
TEST 1
TEST 2
b
c
72831
Testing Rotor Field Circuit
a. Connect one ohmmeter lead to each slip ring.

a
b. Ohmmeter reading should be 4.2 to 5.5 ohms

with rotor at room temperature 70-80F
(21-26C).
c. If reading is high or infinite (no meter movement), high resistance or an open exists in
the field circuit. Check for poor connections
between field winding leads and slip ring terminals. If cause for open or high resistance
cannot be found, connect ohmmeter directly
to slip ring terminals. If correct reading is now
obtained, or if reading is still high or infinite,
replace complete rotor assembly.
73112
a
b
c
d
Field Winding Leads

Slip Rings
Rotor Shaft
Pole Pieces
2. Test rotor field circuit for grounds (Test 2), using

an ohmmeter (set on R x1 scale) as follows:
a. Connect one lead of ohmmeter to either slip
ring and the other lead to rotor shaft or pole
pieces.
b. Meter should indicate no continuity (meter
should not move).
c. If continuity does exist, complete rotor assembly must be replaced.
IMPORTANT: If alternator has output at low
speeds, but no output at high speeds, rotor field
winding may be shorting or grounding out, due
to centrifugal force. Replace rotor if all other electrical components test good.
Index
90-823224--2 796
RECTIFIER AND DIODE ASSEMBLY
STATOR
IMPORTANT: Stator leads MUST BE disconnected from rectifier for this test.
1. Test stator for grounds (Test 1), using an ohmmeter (set on R x1 scale) as follows:
NOTE: Failure of any component in tests following

will require replacement of entire rectifier assembly.
NEGATIVE () RECTIFIER
a. Connect one lead of ohmmeter to one of the

stator leads and the other lead to stator
frame. Be sure that lead makes good contact
with frame.
IMPORTANT: Rectifier MUST BE disconnected

from stator for this test.

should not move). If continuity does exist, stator is grounded and must be replaced.
DO NOT use a test instrument with more than a

12 volt source (in the following test), as rectifier
may be damaged.
2. Test for opens in stator (Test 2), using an ohmmeter (set on R x1 scale) as follows:
1. Connect one lead of an ohmmeter (set on R x1

scale) to negative () rectifier heat sink and the
other lead to one of the rectifier terminals. Note
the reading.
a. Connect ohmmeter between each pair of stator windings (three different ways).
b. Continuity should be present in all three
cases (meter should move). If it does not, one
or more of the windings are open and stator
must be replaced.
TEST 1
TEST 2
TEST 2
TEST 2
! CAUTION
2. Reverse leads and again note reading.

3. Meter should indicate a high or infinite resistance
(no meter movement) when connected one way
and a low reading when connected the other. If
both readings are high or infinite, rectifier is open.
If both readings are low, rectifier is shorted.
4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 for two other rectifiers
in heat sink.
5. Replace assembly if any of the rectifiers is
shorted or open.
Testing Stator
72833
3. A short in the stator is difficult to detect without

special equipment, because of the low windings
resistance. If all other electrical components test
out good, and alternator fails to produce rated
output, stator probably is shorted and should be
replaced. Also, examine stator for heat discoloration, as this usually is a sure sign of a short.
72147
a - Heat Sink
b - Rectifier Terminal
c - Test These Two Rectifiers In The Same Manner
Index
90-823224--2 796
6. Connect one lead of an ohmmeter (set on R x1)

to the common side of the diode and the other
lead to the other side, of one of the three diodes.
POSITIVE (+) RECTIFIER AND DIODES
! CAUTION
DO NOT use a test instrument with more than a
12 volt source (in the following test), as rectifier
may be damaged.
1. Connect one lead of an ohmmeter (set on R x1
scale) to 1/4 in. stud on positive (+) rectifier heat
sink and the other lead to one of the rectifier terminals. Note the meter reading.
both readings are high or infinite, rectifier is open.
If both readings are low, rectifier is shorted.
b
a
4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 for two other rectifiers

in heat sink.
72148
a - Common Side Of Diode Circuit Board

b - Repeat Test For Two Diodes

both readings are high or infinite, diode is open.
If both readings are low, diode is shorted.
9. Repeat Steps 6 through 8 for the other two

diodes.
10. Replace rectifier assembly if any one of the

diodes is shorted or open.
72834
CONDENSER
a - Stud
b - Rectifier Terminal
c - Repeat Test Between These Terminals And Stud
5. Replace assembly if any one of the rectifiers is

shorted or open.
1. Using magneto analyzer and accompanying instructions, perform the following condenser
tests:
a. Condenser Capacity Test (must be .5 mfd).
b. Condenser Short or Leakage Test.
c. Condenser Series Resistance Test.
2. Replace condenser if test results are not within
specifications.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Reassembly
3. Slide front end frame over rotor.
1. Install new front bearing into front end frame

bearing bore using an arbor press. If necessary,
use a bearing driver that contacts outer race
only.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT clamp vise on rotor pole

pieces when tightening pulley nut (in next step),
or pole pieces may be distorted.
4. Slide fan spacer onto rotor shaft. Install fan,
pulley, lockwasher and nut on shaft. Clamp pulley
in a vise, using protective jaws or an old oversize
V-belt to protect pulley, and torque nut to specifications. Tighten vise only enough to allow tightening of nut, as excessive tightening may distort
pulley.
5. Assemble stator to rectifier by soldering the three
leads to the three rectifier terminals.
72835
Installing Front Bearing into Front End Frame
a
2. Install front bearing retaining plate using three
Phillips head screws and lockwashers.
a
72826
a - Stator Lead Connections
NOTE: Be sure to connect leads to their original

positions.
6. Install assembled stator and rectifier assembly
into rear end frame, aligning scribe marks on
each (scribed during disassembly), and install
Phillips head screw and washer to retain.
b
72829
a - Philips Head Screws And Lockwashers

b - Front Bearing Retaining Plate
IMPORTANT: The insulating washers MUST BE

installed as shown or damage to the alternator
will result.
Index
90-823224--2 796
7. Position stator down with rear end frame up and

reinstall insulators, nuts and condenser.
c
9. Depress brushes flush with top of brush holder

and insert a #54,.050 in. drill bit or smaller into
hole in brush holder to hold brushes compressed
during reassembly.
b
a
72561
a
a - Insulators (3)
b - Nuts (5) - ONE REMOVED
c - Condenser
72836
8. Position rear end frame and stator assembly over

front end frame and rotor assembly and align
scribe marks on each (scribed during disassembly). Hand-press end frames together, then install four screws. Tighten screws securely.
a - Drill Bit
NOTE: Rubber gasket shown removed for clarity.

10. Install brush/regulator assembly in rear end
frame cavity and secure with two mounting
screws, as shown. Tighten screws securely. Remove drill bit to release brushes against slip
rings.
c
b
b
a
b
c
d
e
72561
Rear End Frame

Stator
Front End Frame
Scribe Marks
Insert Screws (4) (Two Hidden)
72837
a - Brush / Regulator Assembly

b - Mounting Screws
Index
90-823224--2 796
11. Install tie strap to rectifier stud and stud on brush/

rectifier assembly. Tighten nuts securely.
13. Install insulator caps.
a
b
72078
a
72823
a - Insulator Caps
Installation
a - Studs
b - Tie Straps
12. Install cover with one phillips head screw and two
nuts. Install two leads with nuts.
1. Position alternator in mounting bracket and install mounting bolt, washers (if used), spacer and
nut. Place washers (if used), on each side of
spacer. DO NOT tighten securely at this time.
2. Fasten alternator brace to alternator with bolt,
washers and spacer (if used). DO NOT tighten
bolt at this time.
3. Position alternator drive belt on pulleys and adjust tension as explained under Drive Belt Tension Adjustment.
4. Reconnect wiring harness to alternator and negative battery cable to battery.
d
c
72963
a - Phillips Head Screw

b - Nuts (4)
c - Leads
a
a
b
c
d
72838
Excitation Lead -(PURPLE)

Sensing Lead - (RED / PURLPE)
Ground Lead - (BLACK)
Output Lead - (ORANGE)
Index
90-823224--2 796
Prestolite 65 Amp Alternator

Fastener Location
Housinhg Screws
! WARNING

Specifications
Excitation Circuit
Specification
1.5 to 3.0 Volts
Current Output
51 Amp. Min.
Voltage Output
13.8 to 14.8 Volts
Condenser Capacity
Minimum Brush Length
.5 MFD
3/16 in. (5 mm)
Tools/Sealants
Description
Part Number
Magneto Analyzer
91-76032
91-37241
Multi-Meter / DVA Tester
91-99750

Ammeter (0-50 Amp.)
Index
90-823224--2 796
55
Pulley Nut

Description
In. Lb. Ft. Lb.
92-27511--2
Obtain Locally
Front Bearing Screws
Nm
5.6
35-50
30
48-68
2.8
Alternator Mount
35
48
Adjustment Bolt
16
28
V-Belt Tension (Note)
Depress 1/4 in. (13mm)
Description
The alternator has a rotor, which is supported in two
end frames by ball bearings, and is driven by a pulley
at approximately twice engine speed. The rotor contains a field winding that is enclosed between two
multiple-finger pole pieces. The ends of the field
winding are connected to two brushes (mounted in
the rear end frame) which make continuous sliding
(or slipping) contact with the slip rings. The current
(flowing through the field winding) creates a magnetic field that causes the adjacent fingers of the pole
pieces to become alternate north and south magnetic
poles.
A 3-phase stator is mounted directly over the rotor
pole pieces and between two end frames. It consists
of three windings wound 120 degrees electrically
out-of-phase on the inside of a laminated core. The
windings are all connected together on one end,
while the other ends are connected to a full-wave rectifier bridge.
The rectifier bridge contains six rectifiers which are
arranged so that current flows from ground, through
the stator and to the output terminal, but not in the opposite direction.
When current is supplied to the rotor field winding,
and the rotor is turned, the movement of the magnetic
fields created induces an alternating current into the
stator windings. The rectifier bridge then changes
this alternating current to direct current which appears at the output terminal. A diode trio also is connected to the stator windings to supply current to the
regulator and the rotor field during operation.
Voltage output of the alternator is controlled by regulating the current supplied to the rotor field. This is accomplished by a transistorized voltage regulator that
senses the voltage at the battery and regulates the
field current to maintain alternator voltage within prescribed limits for properly charging the battery. CurCHARGING SYSTEM - 4C-19
rent output of the alternator does not require regulation, as maximum current output is self-limited by the
design of the alternator. As long as the voltage is regulated within the prescribed limits, the alternator cannot produce excessive current. A cut-out relay in the
voltage regulator also is not required, as the rectifier
diodes (which allow current to flow in one direction
only) prevent the battery from discharging back
through the stator.
Due to the lack of residual magnetism in the rotor
pole pieces, a small amount of current must be
supplied to the rotor field to initially start the alternator
charging. This is accomplished by means of an excitation circuit in the regulator which is connected to the
ignition switch. Once the alternator begins to produce
output, field current is supplied solely by the diode
trio, as explained, preceding.
System Components
The alternator system consists of the alternator, battery, the ignition switch and the wiring which connects
these components.
h
g
a
The alternator also is equipped with a fan (mounted

on the rotor shaft) which induces air flow through the
alternator to remove the heat created by the rectifiers
and stator. A capacitor protects the rectifier system
from high voltages and suppresses radio noise.
b
f
Precautions
The following precautions MUST BE observed when
working on the alternator system. Failure to observe
these precautions may result in serious damage to
the alternator or alternator system.
1. DO NOT attempt to polarize the alternator.

2. DO NOT short across or ground any of the terminals on the alternator, except as specifically instructed in the Troubleshooting Tests.
3. NEVER disconnect the alternator output lead or

battery cables when the alternator is being driven
by the engine.
4. NEVER disconnect regulator lead from alternator
regulator terminal when the alternator is being
driven by the engine.
5. ALWAYS remove negative () battery cable from
battery before working on alternator system.
6. When installing battery, BE SURE to connect the
positive (+) battery cable to the positive (+) battery terminal and the negative () (grounded) battery cable to negative () battery terminal.
73079
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
Ingition Switch
Alternator
Starter Motor
Ground Stud
Battery
Circuit Breaker
Harness Plug
Battery Meter
7. If a charger or booster battery is to be used, BE

SURE to connect it in parallel with existing battery
(positive to positive; negative to negative).
Index
90-823224--2 796
Periodic Maintenance
The following maintenance check should be performed every 50 hours or 60 days (whichever comes
first) in fresh water areas or every 25 hours or 30 days
in salt water areas.
! CAUTION
Remove all battery cables from battery (before
conducting the following check) to prevent accidentally shorting out electrical system.
Drive Belt Tension

Adjustment
V-Belt
follows:
1. Inspect entire alternator system for corroded or

loose connectors.
2. Check wiring for frayed or worn insulation.

cracks, fraying and glazed surfaces. Also, check
drive belt tension and adjust, if necessary, as explained under Drive Belt Tension Adjustment.
4. Check alternator mounting bolts for adequate
tightness.
5. Inspect slip ring end frame flame arrestor screen
for debris and clean, if necessary, using compressed air or a cloth. Screen MUST BE clean, or
alternator may overheat.
72669
a - Check Point
alternator mounting bolts.
Index
90-823224--2 796
(Alternator on Engine)
Use the following tests in conjunction with the Troubleshooting in Section 1. Before proceeding with the
tests, however, perform the following checks to eliminate possible problem areas. Also observe Precautions, preceding, to prevent damage to alternator
system.
1. If problem is an undercharged battery, check to
ensure that undercharged condition has not been
caused by excessive accessory current draw or
by accessories which have accidentally been left
on. Also, check that undercharged condition has
not been caused by running engine at too low a
speed for extended periods of time.
2. Check physical condition and state of charge of
battery, as outlined in Battery - Storage in Section 4A. Battery MUST BE at least 75% (1.230
specific gravity) of fully charged to obtain valid results in the following tests. If not, charge battery
before testing system.
! WARNING
ALTERNATOR OUTPUT TEST

1. Connect positive (+) voltmeter lead to alternator
output terminal (orange wire) and negative ()
lead to a ground terminal on alternator. With engine running about 1500 RPM and all accessories turned on, voltage should be between
13.8-14.8.
2. If voltage output does not fall within specifications, alternator should be tested for probable
cause and disassembled for repair.
3. Inspect entire alternator system wiring for defects. Check all connections for tightness and
cleanliness, particularly battery cable clamps
and battery terminals.
cracks, fraying and glazed surfaces and replace
if necessary. Also, check drive belt tension and
adjust if necessary, as outlined under Drive Belt
Tension Adjustment.
c
a
Circuitry Test
Perform the following tests, using a 0-20 volt DC voltmeter, to check that all of the circuits between the alternator and the other components within the alternator system are in good condition.
73081
a
b
c
d
e
Output Wire (ORANGE)

Excitation Wire (PURPLE)
Sensing Wire (RED / PURPLE)
Voltmeter
Ground
Index
90-823224--2 796
HARNESS VOLTAGE TEST

With ignition off, unplug red/purple wire and check for
battery voltage at harness wire. No voltage at harness wire indicates wiring harness is open and
should be repaired or replaced.
2. Connect a jumper wire between regulator and

output terminal. Start engine and run at idle. If
charging voltage (13.8-14.8 volts) is present at
output terminal, the diode-trio is probably defective and alternator should be removed for repair.
a
a
d
e
d
b
c
c
73084
73082
a
b
c
d

Sensing Wire (RED / PURPLE)
Ground
a
b
c
d
e
Regulator Terminal
Output Terminal
Ground
Jumper Lead
OPEN DIODE-TRIO TEST

1. With ignition on and engine not running, check for
battery voltage at alternator output terminal (Test
1) and 1.5 to 3.0 volts at regulator terminal (Test
2).
CURRENT OUTPUT TEST

Perform this test to check if alternator is capable of
producing rated current output, using a 0-50 amp DC
ammeter.
! WARNING
a
b
c
d
2. Disconnect orange lead from alternator output

terminal and connect ammeter in series between
lead and output terminal. Connect positive (+)
side of ammeter toward output terminal.
3. Reconnect negative battery cable.
73083
a
b
c
d
Regulator Terminal
Output Terminal
Ground
4. Remove coil high-tension lead from distributor

cap tower and ground it to block. Turn on all accessories and crank engine over with starter motor for 15-20 seconds.
Index
90-823224--2 796
5. Turn off accessories and reinstall coil hi-tension

lead. Start engine and adjust engine speed to
1500-2000 RPM. Quickly observe ammeter.
Reading should be at least 30 amps.
OPEN REGULATOR TEST

IMPORTANT: This test requires removal of regulator.
6. If reading is low, stop engine and connect a jumper wire between alternator output terminal and
regulator terminal. Repeat Steps 4 and 5.
7. If reading is now within specifications, diodes are
faulty. Disassemble alternator and replace
rectifier as explained under Alternator Repair,
following, to determine if fault is in regulator or
alternator.
8. If reading is still low with jumper wire connected,
perform Voltage Output Test, following, to determine if fault is in regulator or alternator.
! CAUTION
To prevent electrical system damage and/or
sparks, disconnect battery cables at battery.
1. Remove insulator cap from regulator terminal.
2. With ignition switch on and engine not running,
check for battery voltage at alternator output terminal (Test 1) and regulator terminal (Test 2).
d
c
a
c
d
a
73109
73083
a
b
c
d
e

Ammeter (0-50 Amps.)
Jumper Lead
Regulator Terminal
Ground
a
b
c
d
Regualtor Terminal
Output Terminal
Ground
3. Remove the four screws which secure the regulator to the alternator.
Index
90-823224--2 796
4. Connect a jumper wire between field terminal

(green wire) and ground. If 1.5 to 3.0 volts are
present at regulator terminal, regulator is defective. If voltage is not present at regulator terminal,
there is an open field circuit (brushes slip rings,
etc.). Remove alternator for repair.
a
d
Alternator Repair
! WARNING
Be sure that engine compartment is well-ventilated and that there are no gasoline vapors present to prevent the possibility of an explosion and/
or a fire, should a spark occur.
Removal
! CAUTION
To prevent electrical system damage and/or

sparks, disconnect battery cables at battery.

73086
2. Disconnect wiring harness from alternator.

3. Remove alternator belt.
a
b
c
d
Field Terminal (GREEN Wire)

Regulator Terminal
Ground
4. Remove alternator.
NOTE: Felt gasket is shown removed for visual

clarity.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Exploded View
25
26
27
28
29
31
30
32
33
PURPLE
34
1
2
RED
BLACK
10
13
12
GREEN
4
5
11
14
BROWN
5
7
3
4
4
22
15
17
24
8
6
16
19
9
9
21
18
20
23
73106
Index
90-823224--2 796
1 - Regulator And Leads

2 - Screws (4)
3 - Insulator Cap
4 - Nuts (6)
5 - Washers (3)
6 - Condenser
7 - Insulator Washer (2)
8 - Nuts (2)
9 - Isualting Washer (2)
10- Felt Gasket
11 - Screws (2)
12- Brush Assembly
13- Screws (4)
14- Rear End Frame
15- Star Washers (2)
16- Insulator
17- Insulating Washer (2)
18- Nut
19- Washer
20- Insulating Washer
21- Insulator
22- Negative Rectifier
23- Positive Rectifier / Diode Trio
24- Stator
25- Rotor and Slip Rings
26- Snap Ring
27- Bearing
28- Front End Frame
29- Fan Bushing
30- Woodruff key
31- Fan
32- Pulley
33- Lockwasher
34- Nut
Disassembly
1. Using an oversized V-belt to protect the pulley,
clamp alternator in vise as shown. Remove
pulley nut and lockwasher.
b
a
72828
a - Wrench
b - Oversized V-Belt To Protect Pulley
2. Remove pulley, fan, woodruff key and spacer.

g
c
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
73087
Nut
Lockwasher
Pulley
Woodruff Key
Fan
Spacer
Alternator
Index
90-823224--2 796
3. Disconnect regulator leads from terminals on

rear end frame. Remove four regulator attaching
screws, then pull regulator away from rear end
frame and disconnect field lead.
6. Scribe a mark on rear end frame, stator and front

end frame to ensure proper reassembly later.
7. Remove the four screws which secure end
frames and stator together.
! CAUTION
Do not insert screwdriver blades deeper than

1/16 in. (1.58 mm) to avoid damaging stator windings.
8. Using a suitable holding fixture, separate front

end frame and stator assembly from rear end
frame using two thin blade screwdrivers (positioned 180 degrees apart from each other) at the
locations shown.
a
a
b
d
73088
a - Regulator Leads (2)

b - Screws (4)
c - Regulator
4. Remove brush holder.
73091
a
b
c
d
Front End Frame

Stator
Rear End Frame
Scribe Marks
9. While supporting front housing, use an arbor

press to remove rotor from front end frame.
b
c
a
73090
a - Attaching Screws
b - Brush Holder
5. Note location of remaining insulating washers

and nuts and remove.
73092
a - Front Housing
b - Rotor Shaft
c - Bearing Driver
Index
90-823224--2 796
Front Bearing
1. Clean all parts with a clean, soft cloth. Do not use

solvent, or electrical components may be damaged.
Removal
2. Inspect the following:

a. Brush Set - Inspect for cracked porcelain
casing, damaged brush leads, poor brush
springs or worn brushes. Replace brush set
if brushes are less than 3/16 in (5 mm) long.
1. Remove snap ring.

2. Use an arbor press to remove bearing from housing.
b. Rotor - Inspect for stripped threads, scuffed

pole piece fingers or damaged bearing surfaces (because of bearing turning on shaft).
c. Rotor Slip Rings - Clean slip rings with 400
grain (or finer) polishing cloth. Blow off dust
with compressed air. Inspect slip rings for
grooves, pits, flat spots or out-of-round [.002
in. (.05 mm) maximum]. Replace if defective.
d. Rotor Shaft Bearings - Inspect for damaged
seals, lack of lubrication, discoloration (from
overheating) or excessive side or end play.
Hold inner race of bearings while turning outer race. Bearing should turn freely without
binding or evidence of rough spots.
e. Stator - Inspect for damaged insulation or
wires; also inspect insulating enamel for heat
discoloration, as this is usually a sign of a
shorted or grounded winding or a shorted
diode.
f.
Regulator - Inspect leads for damaged insulation.
b
c
73093
a - Front Housing
b - Bearing Driver
c - Bearing
Installation
1. Using an arbor press, press on outer race of new
bearing until fully seated in housing.
g. Front and Rear Housings - Inspect for

cracks, distortion, stripped threads or wear in
bearing bore (from bearing outer race spinning in bore). Replace if defective.
h. Fan - Inspect for cracked or bent fins, broken
welds or worn mounting hole (from fan spinning on shaft).
i.
j.
Pulley - Inspect pulley mounting bore and for

wear. Inspect drive surface of pulley sheaves
for trueness, excessive wear, or corrosion.
Repair damaged surfaces, if possible, with a
fine file and a wire brush, or replace pulley.
Drive surfaces must be true and smooth, or
drive belt wear will be greatly accelerated.
73094
2. Install snap ring to retain bearing.
Alternator - If alternator has output at low

speeds, but no output at high speeds, rotor
field winding may be shorting or grounding
out because of centrifugal force. Replace rotor, if all other electrical components test
good.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Slip Rings/Rear Bearing
Installation
Removal
1. Press new rear bearing all the way onto rotor

shaft (until inner race contacts shoulder) with an
arbor press and a bearing driver that contacts inner bearing race only, as shown. Use extreme
care to prevent damage to field winding leads.
1. Unsolder wires and carefully unwind them from

slip ring terminals.
IMPORTANT: Do not damage rotor wires when removing slip rings or bearing.
2. Install a universal puller plate between bearing
and slip rings. Insert a 10 x 1 in. capscrew into
opening of slip ring assembly.
IMPORTANT: Be sure to support rotor on end of

shaft and not on pole pieces, as pole pieces are
only press-fit onto shaft.
a
b
c
d
a
c
73096
73095
a - Univeral Plate Puller

b - Capscrew
c - Slip Rings
a
b
c
d
Arbor Press
Bearing Driver
Bearing
Rotor
2. Insert wires through hole in slip rings as shown.
3. Using an arbor press, push against capscrew to

remove slip rings.
4. Install a universal puller plate under bearing.
5. Using an arbor press, remove bearing.
73097
Index
90-823224--2 796
IMPORTANT: Press on the center of slip rings

only. Do not bend terminals or pinch wires.
3. Using an arbor press, install slip rings. Press on
center of slip rings until they contact shoulder of
rotor.
4. Carefully wrap white wire around outer slip ring
terminal, and blue wire around inner slip ring terminal. Solder wires in place.
c. If continuity does exist, rotor field circuit is

grounded. Inspect slip ring terminals to be
sure that they are not bent and touching rotor
shaft. Also be sure that excess solder is not
grounding terminals to rotor shaft. If cause for
ground cannot be found, unsolder field winding leads from slip ring terminals and connect
ohmmeter between one of the leads and rotor
shaft or pole pieces. If continuity still exists,
replace rotor assembly. If continuity is eliminated, replace slip rings.
b
a
a
b
73098
a - WHITE Wire
b - BLUE Wire
Component Testing
73099
Rotor
1. Test rotor field circuit for grounds, using an ohmmeter (set on Rx1 scale) as follows:
a. Connect one lead of ohmmeter to either slip
ring and the other lead to rotor shaft or pole
pieces.
should not move).
a - Slip Rings
b - Ohmmeter With Leads
c - Pole Pieces
2. Test rotor field circuit for opens, shorts or high resistance, using an ohmmeter (set on Rx1 scale)
as follows:
a. Connect one ohmmeter lead to each slip ring.
b. Ohmmeter reading should be 4.1 to 4.7 ohms
with rotor at room temperature [70-80F
(21-26C)].
Index
90-823224--2 796
c. If reading is high or infinite (no meter movement), high resistance or an open exists in
the field circuit. Check for poor connections
between field winding leads and slip ring terminals. If cause for open or high resistance
cannot be found, connect ohmmeter directly
to slip ring terminals. If correct reading is now
obtained, replace slip rings. If reading is still
high or infinite, replace complete rotor assembly.
d. If reading is low, a short exists in the field circuit. Inspect slip rings to be sure that they are
not bent and touching outer slip ring. Also be
sure that excess solder is not shorting terminals to aft slip ring. If cause for short cannot
be found, unsolder field winding leads from
slip ring terminals and connect ohmmeter directly to leads. If correct reading is now obtained, slip rings are shorted and must be replaced. If reading is still low, rotor field
windings are shorted, and complete rotor assembly must be replaced.
Stator
IMPORTANT: Stator leads MUST BE disconnected from rectifiers and diode-trio for this test.
! CAUTION
Excessive heat from de-soldering may cause
damage to rectifiers or diode-trio assembly when
disconnecting leads.
1. Test stator for grounds, using an ohmmeter (set
on Rx1 scale) as follows:
a. Connect one lead of ohmmeter or test lamp
to one of the stator leads and the other lead
to stator frame. Be sure that lead makes good
contact with frame.
should not move). If continuity does exist, stator is grounded and must be replaced.
b
c
73101
73112
a
b
c
d
Field Winding Leads

Slip Rings
Rotor Shaft
Pole Pieces
NOTE: It is necessary to test only three of the six

leads on EITHER side of the stator as the leads are
interconnected in the windings.
2. Test for opens in stator, using an ohmmeter (set
on Rx1 scale) as follows:
a. Connect ohmmeter or test lamp between
each pair of stator windings (3 different
ways).
b. Continuity should be present in all three
cases (meter should move). If it does not, one
or more of the windings are open and stator
must be replaced.
Index
90-823224--2 796
3. A short in the stator is difficult to detect without

special equipment, because of the low windings
resistance. If all other electrical components test
out good, and alternator fails to produce rated
output, stator probably is shorted and should be
replaced. Also, examine stator for heat discoloration, as this usually is a sign of a short.
2. Using an ohmmeter (set on Rx1 scale), check for

continuity between rectifier terminal and heat
sink. Reverse ohmmeter leads and recheck.
Continuity should be observed in one direction
(polarity) only.
3. Check other two rectifiers in same manner.
shorted or open.
Positive/Negative Rectifier and

Diode-Trio Assembly
IDENTIFICATION
73102
73100
POSITIVE (+) RECTIFIER AND DIODE-TRIO
! CAUTION
NEGATIVE () RECTIFIER
Do not use a test instrument with more than a

12-volt source in the following test, as rectifier
may be damaged.
! CAUTION
Do not use a test instrument with more than a
12-volt source in the following test, as rectifier
may be damaged.

! CAUTION
! CAUTION
damage to rectifier when disconnecting leads.
1. Identify the leads prior to removal so they can be
reassembled to their original positions.

damage to rectifier or diode-trio assembly when
disconnecting leads.
1. Identify the leads prior to removal so they can be
reassembled to their original positions.
continuity between rectifier terminal and heat
sink. Reverse ohmmeter leads and recheck.
Continuity should be observed in one direction
(polarity) only.
Index
90-823224--2 796
3. Check other two rectifiers in same manner.
Condenser

shorted or open.
1. Using Magneto Analyzer (P/N 91-76032) and accompanying instructions, perform the following
condenser tests:
a. Condenser Capacity Test (must be .5 mfd)
b. Condenser Short or Leakage Test
c. Condenser Series Resistance Test
2. Replace condenser if test results are not within
specifications.
Reassembly
1. Solder positive/negative rectifier and diode-trio
assembly to stator. Connect leads to original location as identified during disassembly.
73103

continuity between the common side of the
diodes and one of the terminals on other side of
the diode. Reverse ohmmeter leads and recheck. Continuity should be observed in one direction (polarity) only.
6. Check other two diodes in same manner.
7. Replace diode-trio if any of the diodes is shorted
or open.
73100
2. Install rotor to front end frame.
73104
Index
90-823224--2 796
IMPORTANT: The insulators MUST BE installed

as shown or damage to the alternator will result.
4. Install brush holder into rear end frame and slide

forward to depress brushes against slip ring. Insert two screws and tighten securely.
c
a
a
b
c
d
73085
Insulating Washers
Insulators
Negative Rectifier
Positive Rectifier / Diode Trio
3. Position rear end frame and stator assembly with

insulators over front end frame and rotor assembly. Align scribe marks on each (scribed during
disassembly). Hand press end frames together,
then install four screws. Torque screws to 50-60
lb. in. (5.6-6.7 Nm).
73090
a - Attaching Screws
b - Brush Holder
5. Attach field lead to brush assembly. Install regulator and felt gasket to rear end frame. Install four
screws and tighten securely. Reconnect regulator terminal leads to appropriate stud on rear end
frame.
a
b
d
d
73105
a
b
c
d
Front End Frame

Stator
Rear End Frame
Scribe Marks
73107
a
b
c
d
Regulator
Felt Gasket
Screws(4)
Regulator Leads
Index
90-823224--2 796
6. Place condenser on ground terminal and lead on

output terminal. Install insulator cap on regulator
terminal.
8. Using an oversized belt to protect the pulley,

clamp alternator in vise as shown. Tighten pulley
nut to 35-50 lb. ft. (48-68 Nm).
b
b
73108
73088
a - Output Terminal
b - Ground Terminal
c - Condenser
a - Oversized Belt
b - Pulley
7. Install spacer, woodruff key, fan, pulley, lockwasher and nut.
Installation
1. Install alternator on engine.
3. Tighten mounting bolts to specifications.
2. Install alternator belt and adjust as outlined under

Drive Belt Tension Adjustment.
4. Reconnect wiring harness to alternator and negative battery cable to battery.
5. Coat all terminal lead connections with Quicksilver Liquid Neoprene.
c
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
73087
Nut
Lockwasher
Pulley
Woodruff Key
Fan
Spacer
Alternator
Index
90-823224--2 796
Battery Isolators
Dual Battery Charging Systems
Using a Battery Isolator
Battery isolators allow the addition of an auxiliary
(second) battery to the MerCruiser electrical system.
The auxiliary battery is primarily used as a power
source for various accessories installed on the boat.
The battery isolator will allow the alternator to charge
both the cranking and auxiliary batteries at the same
time while preventing accessories, connected to the
auxiliary battery, from drawing power from the cranking battery.
Mercury Marine does not manufacture any battery
isolator systems. Battery isolators must be bought
from an outside manufacturer. Mercury Marine suggests following the manufacturers instructions carefully.
IMPORTANT: Alternators used on MerCruiser engines ARE NOT equipped with an isolation diode.
! CAUTION
Follow battery isolator manufacturers instructions for wire gauge. Battery isolator installation
must conform to BIA Low Voltage Wiring Standard No. 125-79.
NOTE: MerCruiser engines equipped with a 3-wire,

belt driven alternator, can use a battery isolator.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Battery Isolator
BLK
BLU
BRN
GRY
GRN
ORN
PNK
PUR
RED
TAN
WHT
YEL
LIT
DRK
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
BLACK
BLUE
BROWN
GRAY
GREEN
ORANGE
PINK
PURPLE
RED
TAN
WHITE
YELLOW
LIGHT
DARK
1
3
73080
Alternator with Voltmeter Circuit (Typical Wiring Shown)
Note :Disconnect ORANGE wire from alternator Batt terminal. Splice sufficient length of proper gauge wire and
connect as shown.
A - Wiring Diagram
1
2
3
4
5
Ciruit Breaker
Wiring Harness
Alternator
Starter
Cranking Battery
B - Original Wiring
1 - Alternator
C - Wiring Connections With Isolator
1 - Isolator
2 - Use 8 Gauge Wire Minimum
3 - Auxiliary Battery
Index
90-823224--2 796

AT A LATER DATE
Index
90-823224--2 796

AT A LATER DATE
Index
90-823224--2 796
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4
D
72747
INSTRUMENTATION
Index
Table of Contents
Page
Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-1
Special Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-1
Lighting Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-1
Commodore and International Series . . 4D-1
QSI Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-2
Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-2
Oil, Fuel and Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-2
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-2
Battery Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-3
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-3
Cruiselog Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-4
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-4
Vacuum Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-4
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-4
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-4
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-4
Calibration Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-4
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-4
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-4
Gauge Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-5
Senders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-5
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-5
Dual Station Sender Identification . . . . . 4D-5
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-5
Water Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-6
Dual Station Sender identification . . . . . 4D-6
Page
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-6
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-6
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-7
Fuel Tank Sender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-7
Flange Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-7
Capsule Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-8
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-9
Ignition Key Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-9
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-9
Lanyard Stop Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-10
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-10
Start/Stop Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-11
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-11
Audio Warning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-11
Buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-11
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-11
Oil Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-12
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-12
Water Temperature Switch . . . . . . . . . . 4D-12
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-12
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-13
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-15
Transmission Fluid Temperature
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-15
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-15
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-15
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D-17
NOTICE
NOTICE
For information and procedures on Fuel Injection Engines, refer to Section 5C.
Index
4D
- INSTRUMENTATION
4D-0
- INSTRUMENTATION
90-823224--2 796
Identification
Special Information
NOTE: One of three distinct lines (Series) of Quicksilver gauges may be installed (if equipped with Quicksilver gauges). Aside from different gauge face appearances and styling, the back of the gauges and
wiring connections are different as shown.
Lighting Options
COMMODORE AND INTERNATIONAL SERIES
These gauges may be wired so that the illumination
lighting is provided from the ignition switch or a separate instrumentation lighting switch.
By removing contact strip I from between + terminal
and the screw as shown following, and supplying a
separate +12 V power supply to the screw connection, illumination lights can be operated independent
of ignition switch.
72746
Back of Commodore and International Series

Gauge - Typical
a
72966
Ignition Switch Lighting Circuit

a - Positive (+) 12 Volt Power Supply From Ignition Switch
b - Contact Strip I
c - Screw Connection
72965
b
Back of QSI Series Gauge - Typical
72967
Separate Instrumentation Lighting Circuit Wiring
Index
90-823224--2 796

b - Contact Strip I
c - Screw Connection
INSTRUMENTATION - 4D-1
QSI SERIES
Gauges
These gauges are equipped with optional illumination lighting. Light bulb socket can be removed and
contacts can be aligned to be used with ignition
switch lighting circuit +12 V or separate instrumentation lighting circuit LT.
IMPORTANT: Light socket must be removed from
gauge and turned counterclockwise (facing back
of gauge) when adjusting to desired setting.
Turning socket while still installed in gauge
could result in damage to gauge or socket.
Oil, Fuel and Temperature

IMPORTANT: If testing proves gauge to be defective, it must be replaced as there is no repair
available.
TESTING
1. Turn ignition switch to OFF.
2. Remove wire from terminal S (SEND).
NOTE: For different lighting effects, colored sleeves

are available through the Quicksilver Accessories
and can be assembled to the bulb.
72968
72965
Typical
Ignition Switch Lighting Circuit Position
a - Terminal S (SEND)
3. Turn ignition switch to RUN. Gauge being tested
must be at position A.
72969
Separate Instrumentation Lighting Circuit Position

a - Positive (+) 12 Volt Power Supply From Ignition
b - Positive (+) 12 Volt Power Supply From Separate Instrumentation Lighting Circuit
Position A
Typical
72747
4. Turn ignition switch to OFF.
Index
4D-2 - INSTRUMENTATION
90-823224--2 796
5. Connect jumper wire from terminal G (GND) to
terminal S (SEND).
Battery Gauge
TESTING
1. Remove cables from battery and fully charge bat-
tery.
2. Connect negative () jumper lead from battery to
gauge terminal G (GND).

3. Connect positive (+) jumper lead from battery to
gauge terminal I or +12 V.
72748
Typical
6. Turn ignition switch to RUN.
7. Indicator needle of gauge being tested must read
at position B. If not, replace gauge.
72750
Typical
4. Check gauge reading; if not as shown replace
gauge.
Position B
72749
Typical
72751
Typical
Index
90-823224--2 796
Cruiselog Meter
Vacuum Gauge
TESTING
TESTING
1. Connect jumper wire from negative () battery
1. Disconnect vacuum hose from engine. Connect
terminal to negative () gauge terminal.

2. Connect jumper wire from positive (+) battery ter-
minal to positive (+) gauge terminal.
service vacuum gauge to engine and record engine vacuum readings at idle, 1000, 2000 and
3000 RPM. Reconnect vacuum hose and compare vacuum gauge readings (at specified RPM)
with service gauge readings. Readings should be
within 3 inches of vacuum of each other.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that vacuum hose between gauge and engine is not leaking and that
all connections are tight.
Speedometer
TESTING
72752
3. Observe gauge run indicator. If indicator is turn-
ing, gauge is operable; if not, replace gauge.
IMPORTANT: When testing speedometer gauge

for accuracy, the air supply used for the test must
be regulated to the specified air pressure. Do not
apply excessive air pressure to speedometer
gauge.
1. Apply air pressure directly to speedometer gauge
(specified in chart) and note gauge reading. Light

tapping of pressure gauge is required during accuracy check.
2. If gauge readings are not within specifications,
gauge is defective
CALIBRATION CHART
Air Pressure Guage
PSI
Speedometer Gauge
MPH (km/Hr)
5.3
202 (321.6)
27.8
451 (721.6)
a
72753
Tachometer
TESTING
a - Indicator
1. Connect a service tachometer to engine and
compare readings.
2. Replace if not within specifications.
Tachometer
Allowance
6000 RPM
150 RPM
8000 RPM
200 RPM
Index
90-823224--2 796
Gauge Replacement
Senders

2. Remove wires from back of gauge.
Oil Pressure
3. Remove hoses (vacuum, speedometer gauge).

4. Disconnect light socket.
5. Remove holding strap and remove gauge.
6. Position gauge assembly in appropriate mount-
ing hole.
7. Install holding strap and nuts. Tighten nuts evenly
and securely.
IMPORTANT: Do not distort case or bracket by
over-tightening.
8. Connect ground (BLACK) wire to ground termi-
nal, if gauge is not mounted in metal panel.
DUAL STATION SENDER IDENTIFICATION

Sender will have 353-AM stamped on hex of sender.
TESTING
IMPORTANT: Use following test procedure for
checking accuracy of oil pressure sender only. If
oil pressure gauge indicates zero oil pressure,
refer to Section 1C - Troubleshooting.
1. Remove wire from sender terminal.
2. Connect ohmmeter between sender terminal and
sender case. Check ohms reading without engine running (zero pressure), then check reading
with engine running. Compare oil pressure and
ohms readings as shown in following chart:
9. Connect other wires to gauge as shown in Sec-
tion 4F.
10. Connect hoses (vacuum, speedometer gauges).
11. Install gauge light socket.
12. Coat all terminals with Quicksilver Liquid Neo-
prene.
b
c
13. Reconnect battery cables to battery.
a
72754
a
b
c
d
Positive Lead
Negative Lead
Wire Removed
Oil Pressure Sender
Oil
Pressure
(PSI)
0
Ohms Reading
Single
Dual
227-257
113.5-128.5
20
142-162.5
71-81.25
40
91.7-113.6
45.8-56.8
80
9-49
4.5-24.5
Index
90-823224--2 796
Water Temperature
! WARNING
REMOVAL
The following test involves the use of intense

heat. Failure to follow appropriate procedures or
warnings can cause burns which can result in severe personal injury. While performing the following test, observe these general precautions:
1. Drain coolant from closed cooling system into a
Wear personal protective clothing such as

rubber gloves, a non-flammable apron, and
eye protection - preferably full face shield or
safety glasses.
The appropriate heat source should only be

electric. Heat source should be operated by a
qualified person. Be sure to follow all instructions of the manufacturer of the heat source.
The heat source should be checked each time
it is used to be sure it is functioning properly.
The thermometer used in the test should be a

high-temperature thermometer with a maximum reading of at least 300F (150C). Under
no circumstances should the operator allow
temperatures to exceed test specifications.
Perform test only in a well ventilated area.
Use a suitable container, such as metal, to

hold the water. Avoid use of glass containers
unless the operator first confirms for himself/
herself that the glass container is an appropriate high-temperature vessel.
Because the components will reach high temperatures DO NOT handle materials or components until COMPLETELY cooled.
DUAL STATION SENDER IDENTIFICATION

Sender will have 362-BC stamped on hex.
suitable container as outlined in Section 6B.

2. Remove TAN wire from temperature sender.
a
72611
Typical Water Temperature Sender

a - TAN Wire
b - Water Temperature Sender
NOTE: Hoses are shown removed for clarity.

3. Remove temperature sender.
TESTING
1. Connect an ohmmeter between temperature
sender terminal (+) and hex (case) for ground ()

as shown.
b
72768
a - Ohmmeter Leads
Index
90-823224--2 796
2. Follow these instructions:
INSTALLATION
a. With ohmmeter connected as outlined and

using suitable container, thermometer and
heat source, suspend sender with tip in water.
b. Heat water and observe thermometer.
1. Apply Loctite Pipe Sealant with Teflon to threads
of temperature sender.
2. Install sender in thermostat housing and tighten
securely.
c. As temperature rises ohmmeter readings

must be within the ranges specified for each
temperature (see chart below).
3. Connect tan wire and coat with Liquid Neoprene.
d. Turn heat source off. Allow water and components to cool.
NOTE: While water cools you may recheck ohmmeter readings.
b
e
d
72611
Typical Water Temperature Sender

a
a - TAN Wire
4. Refill closed cooling system with approved cool72769
a
b
c
d
e
Suitable Container
Thermometer
Heat Source
Water Temperature
Ohmmeter Leads
ant as outlined in Section 6B.
Fuel Tank Sender

FLANGE TYPE
Water Temperature
Ohms Reading
140 F (60 C)
121-147
194 F (90 C)
47-55
212 F (100 C)
36-41
Testing
1. Disconnect wire from terminal on sending unit
and ground wire from sending unit mounting

screw.
2. Remove sending unit from fuel tank.
3. Connect ohmmeter between sending unit termi-
3. Replace sender if ohmmeter readings are other
nal and sending unit housing.
than as shown for each temperature.
Index
90-823224--2 796
4. With float arm in FULL position (arm horizontal),
ohmmeter should read 30 ohms (+ 5 ohms).
CAPSULE TYPE
Testing
1. Disconnect wire from terminal on fuel tank cap-
sule.
2. Remove two screws and remove capsule assem-
bly.
3. Place a magnet under fuel capsule.
4. Connect ohmmeter between fuel capsule termi-
nal and metal portion of capsule housing.

a
72755
a - Ohmmeter Leads
b - Vertical Float Arm
5. With float arm in EMPTY position (arm vertical)
meter should read 240 ohms (+ 5 ohms). Sender

is defective if not within specifications.
72757
a - Ohmmeter Leads
b - Capsule Assembly
c - Magnet
5. Turn magnet counterclockwise until fuel capsule
indicator reads EMPTY. Ohmmeter should read

240 ohms (+ 5 ohms).
72756
72758
a - Ohmmeter Leads
b - Vertical Float Arm
a - Capsule Reading Empty
Index
90-823224--2 796
6. Turn magnet clockwise until fuel capsule indica-
tor reads FULL. Ohmmeter should read 30 ohms

(+ 5 ohms). Fuel capsule is defective if not within
specifications.
3. With key switch in OFF position, there should be
no continuity between switch terminals.

4. With key switch in RUN position, continuity will
exist between switch terminals B to I. There

should no continuity between terminal S and any
other terminals.
5. With key switch in START, continuity will exist be-
tween terminals B to I and B to S.
6. Terminals are to make contact at angles shown
and to stay in contact condition as switch is rotated toward START.

7. If ignition key switch tests bad, unsolder wire con-
nections and remove switch. Test switch again,

as in Steps 2-5, preceding. If switch tests good,
wiring in harness is bad, There should be no continuity between any harness wires with key
switch removed.
72759
f
e
d
c
a - Capsule Reading Full
Switches
Ignition Key Switch
b
B
TESTING
S
I
! CAUTION
Disconnect battery cables from battery before
testing ignition key switch with wires still connected to switch.
1. Disconnect battery cables, if testing ignition key
switch with wires connected to switch.

2. Before testing key switch, check all fuses and/or
Key View
a
b
c
d
e
f
Back View
72760
Key
Off
Continuity, B to I Terminals
Run
Continuity B to S Terminals
Start
circuit breakers in electrical circuit which could

prevent operation of starter.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Lanyard Stop Switches

NOTICE
For repair procedures on MPI / EFI Engines,
refer to Section 5C.
TESTING
b
a
74062
Remote Control Mounted Style Switch - Carbureted Engines

a - Switch Leads
b - Leads (PUR)
1. Disconnect switch leads.

74061
Remote Control Mounted Style Switch - Electronic Fuel Injection (EFI) Engines
a - Switch Lanyard
b - Leads (BLK/YEL)
2. Test switch as follows.
a. Connect an ohmmeter to leads.

b. There should be continuity with switch lanyard connected and no continuity with switch
lanyard disconnected.

2. Test switch as follows.
a. Connect an ohmmeter to leads.

b. There should be no continuity with switch lanyard connected and continuity with switch
lanyard disconnected.
72762
Toggle Style Switch

a - Switch Cap
b - Switch
Index
90-823224--2 796
IMPORTANT: The BLK/YEL lead is not used. It

should be well insulated and taped to harness.
6. If continuity exists when in the OPEN (not de-
pressed) state, replace panel button.

2. Connect an ohmmeter to switch leads.
3. Switch should have continuity with toggle in the
RUN position and no continuity with toggle in the

OFF position.
Audio Warning System

NOTICE
For repair procedures on Fuel Injection
Engines, refer to Section 5C.
Start/Stop Switch
Buzzer
TESTING
! WARNING
! WARNING
Disconnect battery leads at battery before testing.
1. Disconnect battery leads.
2. Check for continuity between the terminals on the
start switch with a continuity meter.
The following test involves the use of electricity.

Failure to follow appropriate procedures can
cause burns or shock which can result in severe
personal injury or death.
TESTING
1. Turn key to RUN position (engine off).
2. Wait 7 to 14 seconds for horn to sound.
3. If horn does not sound:
a. Connect jumper wires as shown.

b. If horn does not sound, replace it.
4. If horn worked in Step 3:
a. Connect jumper wires as shown.

b. Repeat Step 2.
72763
3. No continuity should exist.

4. Depress switch button and continuity should
exist.
5. Check stop switch in the same manner.
Index
90-823224--2 796
c. If horn sounds, problem is in tan/blue wire

back to engine or switches on engine.
Oil Pressure Switch

TESTING
1. Remove wire from sender terminal.
2. Connect continuity meter between sender termi-
nal and sender hex. (Sender shown removed for

clarity.)
f
b
d
72612
Buzzer For 1994 Model And Older Carbureted Engines

a
b
c
d
e
f
g
Jumper Wire To 12 Volt (+) Step 3

Jumper Wire To Negative () Step 3
Jumper Wire To 12 Volt (+) Step 4
Jumper Wire To Negative () Step 4
PURPLE Wire
RED Wire
TAN/BLUE Wire
72764
3. With engine not running, meter should indicate
full continuity.
4. Start engine. With engine running and engine oil
pressure above 6 PSI (41 kPa), meter should indicate NO continuity.
Water Temperature Switch

REMOVAL
1. Drain coolant from closed cooling system into a
suitable container as outlined in Section 6B.

2. Remove tan/blue wire from temperature switch.
74046
Buzzer For EFI and 1995 Model And Newer Carbureted Engines (No Timer Circuit)
a
72613
a - TAN/BLUE Wire
b - Water Temperature Switch
Index
90-823224--2 796
NOTE: Coolant hoses shown removed for clarity.

3. Remove switch.
TESTING
1. Connect an ohmmeter between water tempera-
ture switch terminal (+) and hex (case) for ground

() as shown.
! WARNING

safety glasses.



hold the sand. Avoid use of glass containers
72765
a - Ohmmeter Leads
2. Switch should read no continuity.
Index
90-823224--2 796
! WARNING
Use only clean, dry sand such as used for general
sandblasting purposes. Use of sand containing
contaminants could result in hazards such as
fire, short circuiting, hot-spots, or other hazards.
a. With an ohmmeter connected as outlined and

heat source, suspend sender with tip in sand.
b. Heat sand and observe temperature on thermometer.
c. As temperature rises, switch will close and

ohmmeter will indicate continuity. Refer to
chart below for specifications.
48952 Switch
Opens
150-170 F (60-77 C)
Closes
190-200 F (88-93 C)
87-86080 Switch
Opens
175-195 F (60-77 C)
Closes
215-225 F (88-93 C)
a
e
d
a
c
72767
72766
a
b
c
d
e
Suitable Container
Thermometer
Heat Source
Water Temperature Switch
Ohmmeter Leads
Switch Identification
a - 48952 Switch With Red Mylar Sleeve
b - 87-86080 Switch With Black Mylar Sleeve
4. Turn heat source off. Allow sand to cool. Note
thermometer reading to ensure switch opens

up at specified temperature.
5. Replace switch if switch fails to either open or
close within the specified temperatures.
Index
90-823224--2 796
INSTALLATION
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect harness wires at switch.
of water temperature switch.
2. Remove switch and sealing washer.
2. Install switch in thermostat housing and tighten
securely.
3. Connect tan/blue wire and coat connection with
Liquid Neoprene.
b
a
72770
72613
a - Transmission (Typical)
b - Transmission Fluid Temperature Switch With Sealing
Washer
c - Harness Wires
TESTING
a - TAN / BLUE Wire

1. Connect one lead of an ohmmeter to one terminal
4. Refill closed cooling system with approved cool-
of transmission switch. Connect the other lead of

ohmmeter to other terminal.
ant as outlined in Section 6B.
Transmission Fluid Temperature

Switch
Switch is located on transmission. Switch is normally
open. This switch is used on all MIE engines, if so
equipped.
87-88031 Switch
Opens
180-200 F (82-93 C)
Closes
220-240 F (104-116 C)
72771
a - Ohmmeter Leads
b - Transmission Fluid Temperature Switch
2. Switch should read no continuity.
Index
90-823224--2 796
! WARNING
a. With an ohmmeter connected as outlined and

heat source, suspend sender with tip in sand.


safety glasses.



hold the sand. Avoid use of glass containers
b. Heat sand and observe thermometer.
! WARNING
Use only clean, dry sand such as used for general
sandblasting purposes. Use of sand containing
contaminants could result in hazards such as
fire, short circuiting, hot-spots, or other hazards.
a
d
c
72772
a
b
c
d
e
Sutiable Container
Thermometer
Heat Source
Transmisson Fluid Temperature Switch
Ohmmeter Leads
c. As temperature rises, switch will close and

ohmmeter will indicate continuity. Refer to
chart below for specifications.
Switch Condition
Temperature
Opens
180-200 F (82-93 C)
Closes
220-240 F (104-116 C)
4. Turn heat source off. Allow sand to cool. Note
thermometer reading to ensure switch opens up

at specified temperature.
5. Replace switch if switch fails to either open or
close within the specified temperature.
Index
90-823224--2 796
INSTALLATION
of transmission fluid temperature switch.

2. Install switch with sealing washer in transmission

3. Reconnect harness wires and coat with Liquid
Neoprene.
a
72770
a - Transmission (Typical)
b - Transmission Fluid Temperature Switch With Sealing
Washer
c - Harness Wires
4. Check transmission fluid level.
Index
90-823224--2 796

AT A LATER DATE
Index
90-823224--2 796
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4
E
72761
ELECTRICAL KITS
Index
Table of Contents
Page
Electrical Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-1
Wiring Color Code for MerCruiser Products . . 4E-1
Lanyard Stop Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-1
65503A2 Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-1
87-19674A2 or 87-814324A2 Kit . . . . . . . . . 4E-1
Audio Warning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-8
86047A14 Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E-8
NOTICE
For information and procedures on Fuel
Injection Engines, refer to Section 5C.
Index
4E
- ELECTRICAL
KITS
4E-0
- ELECTRICAL
KITS
90-823224--2 796
Wiring Color Code for

MerCruiser Products
BLK =
BLU =
BRN =
GRY =
GRN=
ORN=
PNK =
PUR =
RED =
TAN =
WHT=
YEL =
LIT =
DRK =
BLACK
BLUE
BROWN
GRAY
GREEN
ORANGE
PINK
PURPLE
RED
TAN
WHITE
YELLOW
LIGHT
DARK
Lanyard Stop Switches

! WARNING
Disconnect battery leads at battery before attempting to install ignition safety stop switch.
! CAUTION
This stop switch is to be used as a safety stop
switch only. It should not be used as the normal
engine shut-off.
! WARNING
As we cannot possibly know of and advise the
boating public of ALL conceivable boat/motor
types and/or poor operating practices, the final
decision of whether to install and use a LANYARD STOP SWITCH, rests with the owner/driver.
! CAUTION
Before cutting any holes in dashboard, check
area behind dashboard for obstructions (braces,
cables, etc.).
65503A2 Kit
INSTALLATION INFORMATION
1. Route stop switch wire harness to engine so that
it will not chafe or flex unnecessarily. Secure harness with cable ties provided.
2. Check stop switch operation after installation is
completed.
3. Coat all electrical connections with Quicksilver
Liquid Neoprene after checking switch operation.
4. Attach stop switch cap to operators person with
a suitable cord (lanyard). Length of cord should
be no longer than absolutely necessary and
should have a minimum breaking strength of 100
lbs. (45 kg).
IMPORTANT: To prevent the possibility of damage to ignition components, turn ignition switch
to OFF position as soon as possible after safety
stop switch has been activated.
5. To reset stop switch after activation, simply install
stop switch cap with a straight firm push.
87-19674A2 or 87-814324A2 Kit

1. Select a location for lanyard stop switch that will
allow lanyard to be pulled free without interference and will be within wire length limitations.
2. Mark hole locations for flush or surface mounting.
Install switch assembly as shown.
IMPORTANT: If using Surface Mount configuration (as shown following), ensure wires are
routed to the outside, as shown, to prevent
pinching of wires between the back of switch and
the mounting surface.
Drilling Tips
If dashboard is fiberglass, apply masking tape to
area that is to be drilled to prevent dashboard from
cracking.
Index
90-823224--2 796
ELECTRICAL KITS - 4E-1
If dashboard is vinyl covered, use a razor blade to remove vinyl from area to be drilled to keep vinyl from
tearing.
72809
72807
Surface Mount - Dual Engines
Surface Mount - Single Engine

a - Wires Properly Routed
b - Self-Tapping Screw - Drill Pilot Holes Appropriate Drill Bit
Aluminum - 5/32 in. (4 mm)
Wood / Fiberglass 11/64 in. (4.5 mm)
a - Self-Tapping Screw - Drill Pilot Holes Appropriate Drill Bit

Aluminum - 5/32 in. (4 mm)
Wood / Fiberglass 11/64 in. (4.5 mm)
a
b
72810
Flush Mount - Dual Engines

a - 2-1/8 in. (54 mm) Hole - Use Hole Saw
72808
Flush Mount - Single Engine

a - Secure Mounting Screws With Nuts To Aid Installation
b - 2-1/8 in. (54 mm) Hole - Use Hole Saw
IMPORTANT: Be sure to refer to appropriate wiring diagram in the following step.

IMPORTANT: Lanyard stop switch being installed at second station (flybridge) must use Extension Harness Kit (84-16866A2) to connect
switch to wiring harness at main (lower) station.
Refer to instructions in extension harness kit.
Index
4E-2 - ELECTRICAL KITS
90-823224--2 796
3. Connect lanyard stop switch wires in accordance

with appropriate wiring diagram. Route switch
wires to prevent possible chafing or flexing during
boat operation. Secure wires with Sta-Straps.
4. Secure bullet connectors with retainer and
Sta-Straps.
5. When installation is complete, reconnect battery

leads at battery and perform operational test.
IMPORTANT: On installations where gauge options will not be used, tape back and isolate any
unused leads.
a
72811
a - Join Connectors
b - Secure With Sta-Strap
Index
90-823224--2 796
LANYARD STOP SWITCH WIRING DIAGRAM - SINGLE ENGINE
a
b
72964
NOTE: Connect wires together with screw and hex nut. Apply Liquid Neoprene to connection and slide rubber
sleeve over connection.
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
Tachometer
Oil Pressure
Water Temperature
Battery Meter
Ignition Switch
Lanyard Stop Switch
This Lead Not Used On MerCruiser
Trim Indicator
Index
90-823224--2 796
LANYARD STOP SWITCH WIRING DIAGRAM - SINGLE FUEL INJECTION ENGINE

h
d
a
e
q
i
NOTE
Console Mount
Remote Control
YEL/BLK
NOTE
q
m
m l
NOTE: Lanyard stop switch and neutral start leads must be soldered and covered with shrink tube for a water
proof connection. If alternate method of connection is made (use of electrical butt connector) verify connection
is secure and sealed for waterproof connection.
a b c d e f g h i j k l mn o p q -
Lanyard Stop Switch (Use With Console Mount Remote Control)

Lead Not Used On 454 / 502 Multi-Port Injection
Lanyard Stop Switch Multi-Port / Throttle Body Injection Adapter Harness
Tachometer
Oil Pressure
Water Temperature
Battery Meter
To Engine Harness
Ignition Switch
Trim Indicator
Neutral Start Switch Leads
Trim Limit Switch Leads
Power Trim Harness Connector
Lanyard StopSwitch (Panel Mount Remote Control)
Trialer Switch (Console Mounted Remote Control)
Lanyard Stop Leads On Panel Mounted Control
Lanyard Stop Switch Multi-Port / Throttle Body Injection Adapter Harness (84-805745A2) Purchased Seperately
Index
90-823224--2 796
LANYARD STOP SWITCH WIRING DIAGRAM - DUAL ENGINES
NOTE
NOTE
YEL/RED
NOTE
PUR
THESE LEADS NOT

USED ON MERCRUISER
YEL/RED
BLK/WHT
PUR
LANYARD STOP SWITCH
BLK/WHT
PUR
D
72931
IMPORTANT: On installations where gauge options will not be used, tape back and isolate any unused
leads.
NOTE: Connect wires together with screw and hex nut. Apply Liquid Neoprene to connection and slide rubber
Index
90-823224--2 796
LANYARD STOP SWITCH WIRING DIAGRAM - DUAL ENGINES
NOTE 1
YEL/RED
BLK/WHT
PUR
NOTE 1
YEL/RED
B
C
D
72932
Index
90-823224--2 796
c. Coat connections with Quicksilver Liquid

Neoprene.
Audio Warning System
5. Reconnect water hoses.
! WARNING
before working around electrical system components to prevent injury to yourself and damage to
electrical system.
86047A14 Kit
Audio Warning Heat Switch on V-8 Engines

with Closed Cooling
1. Drain cooling system.
2. Remove TAN/BLUE wire from audio warning
heat switch in rear hole of thermostat housing.
Remove switch.
Audio Warning Heat Switch on V-8 Engines
with Standard Cooling
1. Drain cooling system.
b
2. Disconnect port hoses from thermostat housing.

3. Remove TAN/BLUE wire from water heat switch
in port side of thermostat housing. Remove
switch.
NOTE: Hoses shown removed for clarity.
71518
a - Audio Warning Heat Switch

b - TAN / BLUE Wire
a
3. Install audio warning heat switch as follows:
a. Install heat switch into thermostat housing,
using Loctite Pipe Sealant with Teflon (DO
NOT use Teflon tape) to seal threads. Tighten
securely.
b
72613
a - Audio Warning Heat Switch

b - TAN / BLUE Wire
4. Install audio warning heat switch as follows:

a. Install heat switch into aft side of thermostat
housing, using Loctite Pipe Sealant with Teflon (DO NOT use Teflon tape) to seal
threads. Tighten securely.
b. Attach TAN/BLUE wire to heat switch with nut

and lockwasher. Tighten nut securely.
c. Coat connections with Quicksilver Liquid
Neoprene.
4. Fill closed cooling system with proper water/antifreeze solution. (Refer to Filling Closed Cooling
Section in Section 6B.)
b. Attach TAN/BLUE wire to heat switch with nut

and lockwasher. Tighten nut securely.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Audio Warning Oil Pressure Switch

1. Audio warning oil pressure switch (with reducer)
is installed in place of engine block plug at the following location:
b. Coat connections with Quicksilver Liquid

Neoprene.
c. Connect TAN/BLUE wire from audio warning
heat switch to audio warning oil pressure
switch with lockwasher and nut. Torque nut to
15 lb. in. (1.7 Nm).
Warning Buzzer
a
a
72820
a - Engine Block Plug (Typical)

72813
2. Disconnect TAN/BLUE wire (from audio warning

heat switch) at audio warning oil pressure switch.
b
a
72812
a - Early Style Warning Buzzer

b - Later Style Warning Buzzer
a - TAN / BLUE Wire Location (Wire Not Shown)
b - Audio Warning Oil Pressure Switch
3. Remove audio warning oil pressure switch.

4. Install switch as follows:
a. Install switch using Loctite Pipe Sealant with
Teflon (DO NOT use Teflon tape) to seal
threads. Tighten switch securely.
! WARNING
Buzzer is not external ignition-proof; therefore,
DO NOT mount buzzer in engine or fuel tank compartments.
1. Disconnect battery leads, if not already disconnected.
Index
90-823224--2 796
2. Mount buzzer under dashboard with two screws

(from kit) in location that is not in obvious sight but
is easily accessible for installation and maintenance. Location should not restrict buzzer sound
and also should be within limits of 18 in. (460 mm)
PURPLE lead. (Lead will be connected to instrument terminal in dashboard.)
3. Attach PURPLE lead to +12 volt switched terminal of any adjacent gauge [PURPLE to PURPLE
(BIA)]. The attaching terminal should be OFF
when ignition switch is in the OFF position.
4. Plug male terminal of TAN/BLUE wire (on buzzer)
to existing TAN/BLUE wire on harness. Be sure
that wire does not chafe or get pinched and does
not come in contact with bilge water or moving
parts.
5. Connect TAN/BLUE lead from buzzer to engine
water heat switch with lockwasher and nut.
Torque nut to 15 lb. in. (1.7 Nm). (DO NOT
over-tighten).
6. Place decal (Figure 1) on bottom of glass face of
water temperature gauge and of oil pressure
gauge, if equipped.
ALARM INDICATES LOW

OIL OR OVERHEATING
Figure 1
8. Reconnect battery leads.

9. Fill closed cooling system (on engines so
equipped) with water/antifreeze solution.
10. Test switch (horn) as explained on decal (Figure
1).
11. Seal all electrical connections with Quicksilver
Liquid Neoprene.
OPERATION
Test the system (per the instructions on the dashboard decal, Figure 2) at least once every five hours
of operation.
During boat operation, if the horn sounds, look for
one or more of the following operation problems:
PROBLEM
REMEDY
Low Engine Oil (Check

Add Oil Per Instructions
Oil Pressure Gauge or
in Owners Manual
Dipstick Level)
Cooling Water Pickup is
Blocked Or Clogged
Clear The Water Pickup
(Check Water TemperaOf Foreign Material
ture Gauge)
NOTE: The horn will sound, if, while docking or otherwise maneuvering slowly, the engine stalls and is not
restarted, and the ignition key is left ON (similar to
test procedure).
7. Place decal (Figure 2) in convenient location on

dashboard.
ENGINE SENSOR HORN WILL SOUND WHEN OIL
PRESSURE IS TOO LOW OR TEMP. IS TOO HOT.
TO TEST HORN
1.TURN KEY TO ON POSITION (ENGINE OFF)
2. WAIT 7 TO 14 SEC. FOR HORN TO SOUND
Figure 2
Index
90-823224--2 796

AT A LATER DATE
Index
90-823224--2 796
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
4
F
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Index
Table of Contents
Page
Wiring Colors for MerCruiser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4F-1
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4F-2
MCM (Stern Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4F-2
MIE (Inboard) Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4F-10
Quicksilver Instrumentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4F-13
MCM (Stern Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4F-13
MIE (Inboard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4F-16
Dual Station Wiring (Using a Neutral Safety
Switch in Only One Remote Control) . . . . 4F-18
Dual Station Wiring (Using A Neutral Safety
Switch In Both Remote Controls) . . . . . . . 4F-19
Dual Station Wiring (Using a Neutral Safety
Switch in Engine Wiring Harness) . . . . . . . 4F-20
Multi-Port Injection Wiring Diagram
(Chart 1 Of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4F-21
(Chart 2 Of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4F-22
(Chart 3 Of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4F-23
(Chart 4 Of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4F-24
Throttle Body Injection Wiring Diagram
(Chart 1 Of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4F-25
(Chart 2 Of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4F-26
(Chart 3 Of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4F-27
(Chart 4 Of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4F-28
Index
4F-0 - WIRING DIAGRAMS
90-823224--2 796
Wiring Colors for MerCruiser

NOTE: Color codes listed below DO NOT apply to fuel injection system harnesses.
BIA COLOR CODE AND ABBREVIATIONS
WHERE USED
BLACK (BLK)
All Grounds
BROWN (BLU)
Reference Electrode - MerCathode
ORANGE (ORN)
Anode Electrode-MerCathode
LT. BLUE/WHITE (LT BLU/WHT)
Trim - Up Switch
GRAY (GRY)
Tachometer Signal
GREEN/WHITE (GRN/WHT)
Trim - Down Switch
TAN (TAN)
Water Temperature Sender to Gauge
LIGHT BLUE (LIT BLU)
Oil Pressure Sender to Gauge
PINK (PNK)
Fuel Gauge Sender to Gauge
BROWN/WHITE (BRN/WHT)
Trim Sender to Trim Gauge
PURPLE/WHITE (PUR/WHT)
Trim - Trailer Switch
RED (RED)
Unprotected Wires from Battery
RED/PURPLE (RED/PUR)
Protected (Fused) Wires from Battery
RED/PURPLE (RED/PUR)
Protected (+12V) to Trim Panel
ORANGE (ORN)
Alternator Output
PURPLE/YELLOW (PUR/YEL)
Ballast Bypass
PURPLE (PUR)
Ignition Switch (+12V)
YELLOW/RED (YEL/RED)
Starter Switch to Starter Solenoid to Neutral Start

Switch
Index
90-823224--2 796
WIRING DIAGRAMS - 4F-1
Engine
MCM (Stern Drive)
THUNDERBOLT IV WITH IGNITION MODULE MOUNTED ON EXHAUST ELBOW
1
3
3
1
1
6
5
4
2
3
50844
A - Ignition And Choke System
C - Audio Warning System
1 - Distributor
2 - Ignition Module
3 - Ignition Coil
1 - Oil Pressure Sender

2 - Water Temperature Sender
3 - Trim Sender
B - Starting And Charging System
D - Instrumentation System
1
2
3
4
5
6
1 - Water Temperature
2 - Oil Pressure Switch
3 - Drive Unit Oil Bottle (Old And New Style)
Alternator
Ground Stud
Battery
Starter Motor
Circuit Breaker
Index
90-823224--2 796
THUNDERBOLT IV WITH IGNITION MODULE MOUNTED ON DISTRIBUTOR
C
1
A
WHT/RED
WHT/GRN
GRY
PUR
2
1
1
6
4
5
2
B
72936
1 - Distributor With Ignition Module

2 - Ignition Module
3 - Ignition Coil

3 - Trim Sender
1
2
3
4
5
6
Alternator
Ground Stud
Battery
Starter Motor
Circuit Breaker
Index
90-823224--2 796
THUNDERBOLT V
1
3
C
A
2
1
4
3
2
D
1
7
5
6
4
73996
1
2
3
4

3 - Trim Sender
Distributor With Ignition Module

Timing Lead
Knock Sensor
Ignition Coil

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Alternator
Electric Choke
Ground Stud
Battery
Starter Motor
Circuit Breaker
Index
90-823224--2 796
ALL MCM THROTTLE BODY / MULTI-PORT INJECTION STARTING AND CHARGING DIAGRAM
2
1
c
5
b
2
4
d
71693
A - Charging And Starting System
C - Instrumentation System
1
2
3
4
5
6

3 - Trim Sender
Alternator
Ground Stud
Starter Motor
Battery
Circuit Breaker
B - Audio Warning System / Power Reduction

Circuit (Not Present On 1996 And Newer Models)
1 - Oil Pressure
2 - Drive Unit Oil Level Bottle (New And Old Style)
a - Positive (12V) Power Wire To Furl Injection System

Harness
b - Harness Connector To Fuel Injection System Harness
c - Auxiliary Tachometer Lead
d - 90 Amp. Fuse (DO NOT Remove)
Index
90-823224--2 796
ALL THROTTLE BODY / MULTI-PORT INJECTION INBOARD AND SKI ENGINES
A
2
NOTE 1
5
c
6
b
3
2
a
NOTE 1: Taped back BROWN and BLACK wire may be used for an accessory. LOAD MUST NOT EXCEED 5
AMPS
A - Audio Warning System
C - Charging And Starting System
2 - Transmission Fluid Temperature
B - Instrumentation System
1
2
3
4
5
6
Alternator
Ground Stud
Starter
Circuit Breaker
a - Positive (12V) Power Wire To Fuel Injection System

Harness
b - Harness Connector To Fuel Injection System Harness
c - Auxiliary Tachometer Lead
d - 90 Amp. System Fuse
Index
90-823224--2 796
MCM 7.4LX / MIE 7.4L THROTTLE BODY INJECTION

NOTE 1
8
12
9
10
2
7
16
11
5
17
14
18
13
15
19
1
75001
Note: All BLACK Wires With A Ground Symbol Are Interconnected Within The Fuel Injection System Harness.
NOTE 1: As a mid year (96-1/2) model change, the Throttle Body and Multi-Port Injection models have the lanyard stop connector removed from the wiring harness. The dual engine capability is relocated by routing the YEL
wire to the Data Link Connector (DLC).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10-
Fuel Pump
Throttle Body
Distributor
Coil
Electronic Spark Control (KS) Module
Data Link Connector (DLC)
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
Knock Sensor
Idle Air Control (IAC)
Throttle Position (TP) Sensor
111213141516171819-
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor

Electronic Control Module (ECM)
Fuel Pump Relay
Ignition/System Relay
Fuse (15 Amp) Fuel Pump
Fuse (15 Amp) ECM/DLC/Battery
Fuse (10 Amp) ECM/Injector/Ignition/Knock Module
Harness Connector To Starting/Charging Harness
Positive (+) Power Wire To Engine Circuit Breaker
Index
90-823224--2 796
7.4L / 7.4LX / 454 / 502 MULTI-PORT MAGNUM ENGINE DIAGRAM MODELS WITH VST
NOTE 1
3
7
8
4
2
9
11
10
20
13
18
12
17
21
15
19
14
22
16
71692
NOTE 1: As a mid year (96-1/2) model change, the Throttle Body and Multi Port Injection models have the lanyard stop connector removed from the wiring harness. The dual engine capability is relocated by routing the YEL
wire to the Data Link Connector (DLC).
NOTE 2: All BLACK wires with a ground symbol are interconnected within the fuel injection system harness.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011-
Vapor Separator Tank

Throttle Body
Distributor
Coil
Knock Sensor (KS) Module
Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor
Knock Sensor (KS)
Throttle Positive Sensor (TP)
1213141516171819202122-

Electronic Control Module (ECM) Sensor
Fuel Pump Relay
Ignition Relay
Fuel Pump Relay (15 Amp)
Injector Fuse 15 Amp.) ECM, DLC, Battery
ECM Fuse (10 Amp.) ECM, Ignition, Injectors, Knock Sensor Module
Harness Connector To Starting / Charging Harness
Harness Connector To Lanyard Stop Switch (Optional)
Harness Connector For Dual Engine Data Link Cable
Index
90-823224--2 796
7.4L / 7.4LX / 454 / 502 MULTI-PORT MAGNUM ENGINE DIAGRAM MODELS WITH COOL FUEL
SYSTEM
3
7
2
8
12
10
17
11
18
5
14
13
16
15
19
1
75146
NOTE: All BLACK wires with a ground symbol are interconnected within the EFI system harness.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10-
Fuel Pump
Throttle Body
Distributor
Coil
Electronic Spark Control (KS) Module
Knock Sensor
111213141516171819-

Fuel Pump Relay
Ignition/System Relay
Fuse (15 Amp) Fuel Pump
Fuse (15 Amp) ECM/DLC/Battery
Fuse (10 Amp) ECM/Injector/Ignition/Knock Module
Harness Connector To Starting/Charging Harness
Index
90-823224--2 796

THUNDERBOLT IV WITH IGNITION MODULE MOUNTED ON EXHAUST ELBOW
A
1
2
1
3
NOTE
1
7
5
6
2
3
50773
NOTE: Taped Back BROWN-WHITE wire may be used for an accessory. LOAD MUST NOT EXCEED 5 AMPS.
1 - Distributor
2 - Ignition Module
3 - Ignition Coil
2 - Oil Pressure
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Alternator
Ground Stud
Battery
Starter Motor
Circuit Breaker
Neutral Start Safety Switch
Index
90-823224--2 796
THUNDERBOLT IV IGNITION MODULE MOUNTED ON DISTRIBUTOR
A
1
1
WHT/RED
WHT/GRN
GRY
PUR
NOTE
1
7
3
72937
1 - Distributor
2 - Ignition Module
3 - Ignition Coil
2 - Oil Pressure
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Alternator
Ground Stud
Battery
Starter Motor
Circuit Breaker
Index
90-823224--2 796
THUNDERBOLT V
3
1
2
1
3
2
1
2
NOTE
1
7
5
8
6
4
74160
1
2
3
4

Distributor With Ignition Module

Timing Lead
Knock Sensor
Ignition Coil

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Alternator
Electric Choke
Ground Stud
Battery
Starter Motor
Circuit Breaker
Index
90-823224--2 796
Quicksilver Instrumentation
MCM (Stern Drive)
EARLIER STYLE CONTROL AND AUDIO WARNING BUZZER
8
7
NOTES 1 & 2
72938
Refer to gauge manufacturers instructions for specific connections.

NOTE 1: Connect wires together with screw and hex nut. Apply Liquid Neoprene to connection and slide rubber
NOTE 2: Power for a fused accessory panel may be taken from this connection. Load MUST NOT exceed 35-40
amps. Panel ground wire MUST BE connected to instrument terminal that has an 8 gauge BLACK (Ground) harness wire connected to it.
1
2
3
4
Audio Warning Buzzer (If So Equipped)

Tachometer
Oil Pressure
Water Temperature
5
6
7
8
Battery Meter
Ignition Switch
Trim Indicator
20 Amp. Fuse
Index
90-823224--2 796
454/502 MAGNUM MULTI-PORT INJECTION WITH EARLIER STYLE CONTROLS AND AUDIO
WARNING BUZZER
NOTES 1 & 2
71695

NOTE 2: Power for a fused accessory panel may be taken from this connection. Load MUST NOT exceed 40
1
2
3
4
Audio Warning Buzzer (If Equipped)

Tachometer
Oil Pressure
Water Temperature
5
6
7
8
Battery Meter
Ignition Switch
Trim Indicator
20 Amp. Fuse
Index
90-823224--2 796
LATER STYLE CONTROLS AND AUDIO WARNING BUZZER
NOTE 2
NOTE 1
NOTE 1
NOTE 1
74046

1
2
3
4
Audio Warning Buzzer (If Equipped)

Tachometer
Oil Pressure
Water Temperature
5
6
7
8
Battery Meter
Ignition Switch
Trim Indicator
20 Amp. Fuse
Index
90-823224--2 796
MIE (Inboard)
EARLIER STYLE AUDIO WARNING BUZZER
7
B
S
72939

1
2
3
4

Tachometer
Oil Pressure
Water Temperature
5 - Battery Meter
6 - Ignition Switch
7 - 20 Amp. Fuse
Index
90-823224--2 796
LATER STYLE AUDIO WARNING BUZZER
1
5
6
B
S
74274

NOTE 1: Connect wires together with screw and hex nut. Apply Quicksilver Liquid Neoprene to connection and
slide rubber sleeve over connection.
NOTE 2: Power for a second fused accessory panel may be taken from this connection. Load MUST NOT exceed 35-40 amps. Panel ground wire MUST BE connected to instrument terminal that has an 8 gauge BLACK
(ground) harness wire connected to it.
1
2
3
4

Tachometer
Oil Pressure
Water Temperature
5
6
7
8
Battery Meter
Ignition Switch
To 12 Volt Source (PURPLE Wire Connection)
20 Amp. Fuse
Index
90-823224--2 796
Dual Station Wiring (Using a Neutral Safety Switch in Only One Remote
Control)
GND
L
T
SW
UNSW
L
T
12V
GND
GND
L
T
12V
L
T
12V
SEND
SEND
GND
12V
SEND
SIG
BLK
PUR
PUR
TAN
BLK
PUR
GRY
PUR
YEL/RED
BLK
BLK
BLK
GRY
LT. BLU
PUR
NOTE 3
YEL/RED
RED/PUR
BRN/WHT
GND
L
T
B
SI
NOTE 1
SW UNSW
L
T
12V
GND
GND
L
T
12V
SEND
GND
L
T
12V
SEND
12V
SEND
SIG
BLK
PUR
RED/PUR
TAN
PUR
BLK
PUR
LT. BLU
BLK
BLK
GRY
PUR
PUR
YEL/RED
RED/PUR
NOTE 2
YEL/RED
NOTE 3
NOTE 3
NOTE 3
NOTE 1
YEL/RED
BRN/WHT
YEL/RED
6
72940
NOTE 1: BROWN/WHITE wire is taped back at instrument end. If installing on boat that is equipped with MerCruiser stern drive, BROWN/WHITE wire is connected to trim sender terminal block. If installing on MerCruiser
Inboard, BROWN/WHITE wire is taped back at engine end, or it may be used for an accessory (limit 5 amperes).
NOTE 2 : An accessory fuse panel may be connected at this location. The combined current draw of the primary
station and secondary station MUST NOT exceed 35 amperes.
NOTE 3 : Connect wires together with screw and hex nut. Apply Quicksilver Liquid Neoprene to connection and
B - Secondary Station
B - Primary Station
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
Start - Stop Panel

Tachometer
Oil Pressure
Water Temperature
Battery Meter
Ignition Switch
Tachometer
Oil Pressure
Water Temperature
Battery Meter
Index
90-823224--2 796
Dual Station Wiring (Using A Neutral Safety Switch In Both Remote Controls)
L
T
GND
SWUNSW
L
T
12V
L
T
GND
12V
L
T
GND
SEND
GND
12V
12V
SEND
SEND
SIG
PUR
YEL/RED
BLK
PUR
TAN
PUR
BLK
BLK
GRY
YEL/RED
BLK
BLK
PUR
GRY
LT. BLU
PUR
NOTE 3
NOTE 3
YEL/RED
RED/PUR
SW UNSW
L
T
12V
BRN/WHT
GND
L
T
B
S
NOTE 1
GND
L
T
12V
SEND
GND
GND
L
T
12V
12V
SEND
SEND
SIG
BLK
PUR
RED/PUR
TAN
PUR
BLK
PUR
LT. BLU
BLK
BLK
GRY
PUR
PUR
YEL/RED
ORN
RED/PUR
NOTE 2
NOTE 3
YEL/RED
NOTE 1
YEL/RED
NOTE 3
BRN/WHT
YEL/RED
NOTE 3
YEL/RED
72941
A - Secondary Station
B - Primary Station
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Start - Stop Panel

Tachometer
Oil Pressure
Water Temperature
Battery Meter
Ignition Switch
Tachometer
Oil Pressure
Water Temperature
Battery Meter
To Engine
20 Ampere Fuse
Index
90-823224--2 796
Dual Station Wiring (Using a Neutral Safety Switch in Engine Wiring Harness)
GND
L
T
SW
UNSW
L
T
12V
L
T
GND
L
T
GND
GND
12V
12V
12V
SEND
SEND
SEND
SIG
BLK
PUR
TAN
PUR
BLK
BLK
GRY
PUR
YEL/RED
BLK
BLK
PUR
GRY
LT. BLU
PUR
NOTE 3
YEL/RED
BRN/WHT
GND
L
T
B
S
RED/PUR
NOTE 1
SW UNSW
L
T
12V
L
T
GND
12V
SEND
GND
GND
L
T
12V
12V
SEND
SEND
SIG
BLK
PUR
RED/PUR
TAN
PUR
BLK
PUR
LT. BLU
BLK
BLK
GRY
PUR
PUR
YEL/RED
RED/PUR
NOTE 2
YEL/RED
NOTE 3
NOTE 3
NOTE 1
BRN/WHT
YEL/RED
NOTE 3
72942
A - Secondary Station
B - Primary Station
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Start - Stop Panel

Tachometer
Oil Pressure
Water Temperature
Battery Meter
Index
Ignition Switch
Tachometer
Oil Pressure
Water Temperature
Battery Meter
To Engine
20 Ampere Fuse
90-823224--2 796
Multi-Port Injection Wiring Diagram (Chart 1 Of 4)
INJECTORS 2, 3, 5, 8
467 DK BLU
10A
15A
DK GRN
PORT FUEL JUMPER IS

CONNECTED ONLY IN MPI
APPLICATIONS
15A
87a 30 85 86 87
BLK
441 BLU/WHT
IDLE AIR
CONTROL
(IAC) VALVE
SOME MODELS
WILL HAVE THE
DUAL ENGINE
DATA LINK
MOVED TO THE
DLC
442 BLU/BLK
443 GRN/WHT
444 GRN/BLK
C
DUAL ENGINE DATA LINK
(MULTIPLE ENGINE
B
APPLICATION SOME MODELS)
A
BLK
916 YEL
MASTER/SLAVE
461 ORN/BLK
916 YEL
DLC
J1-5
BLK
TO ECM/BAT
FUSE
15A
440 ORN
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP
Index
90-823224--2 796
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE

(IAT) SENSOR SIGNAL
(THIS SENSOR IS NOT ON
5.7L / 350 CID ENGINES)
INTAKE AIR
TEMPERATURE
(IAT)
B
(TP)
ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
(ECT)
C
A
ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
(ECT) SENSOR
SIGNAL
Index
90-823224--2 796
IC
MODULE
EST
MODULE
B A
ELECTRONIC
SPARK TIMING (EST)
IGNITION CONTROL
430 PUR/WHT
DIST. REFERENCE HIGH

BYPASS
DIST. REFERENCE LOW
BRN
86
TO BUZZER
TO IGN
TO AUDIO
WARNING
SWITCHES
TO TACH
TAN/
BLU
PUR
BLU/
TAN
GRY
121
TAN
3 PNK
121
WHT
COOLANT OVERTEMP
(TO BUZZER)
LOW OIL PRESSURE/LOW
I/O FLUID (TO BUZZER)
931
BRN
J1-6
TO LOW OIL PRESSURE AND

GEAR LUBE SWITCHES OR
TRANS. TEMPERATURE
Index
90-823224--2 796
TO IGN COIL TERM B

TO FUEL PUMP RELAY FUSE 15A
TO INJECTORS
SYSTEM/IGNITION RELAY
8
5
8
6
8
7
ECM BAT FUSE/
DLC 15A
10A
TO DLC CONNECTOR
439 PNK/BLK
KNOCK
SENSOR (KS)
MODULE
CONNECTOR NOT PRESENT

ON SOME MULTI-PORT MODELS
KNOCK
SENSOR (KS)
LANYARD STOP
SWITCH CIRCUIT
(OPTIONAL)
A
B
BLK
Index
90-823224--2 796
Throttle Body Injection Wiring Diagram (Chart 1 Of 4)
INJECTOR
467 DK BLU
10A
15A
INJECTOR
DK GRN
15A
87a 30 85 86 87
BLK
441 BLU/WHT
IDLE AIR
CONTROL
(IAC) VALVE
442 BLU/BLK
443 GRN/WHT
444 GRN/BLK
C
(MULTIPLE ENGINE
B
A
SOME MODELS
WILL HAVE THE
DUAL ENGINE
DATA LINK
MOVED TO THE
DLC
BLK
916 YEL
MASTER/SLAVE
461 ORN/BLK
916 YEL
DLC
J1-5
BLK
TO ECM/BAT
FUSE
15A
440 ORN
Index
90-823224--2 796
B
(TP)
ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
(ECT)
C
A
ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE (ECT)
SENSOR SIGNAL
Index
90-823224--2 796
IC
MODULE
EST
MODULE
B A
ELECTRONIC
SPARK TIMING (EST)
IGNITION CONTROL
430 PUR/WHT

BYPASS
DIST. REFERENCE LOW
BRN
86
TO BUZZER
TO IGN
TO AUDIO
WARNING
SWITCHES
TO TACH
TAN/
BLU
PUR
BLU/
TAN
GRY
121
TAN
3 PNK
121
WHT
COOLANT OVERTEMP (TO BUZZER)

931
BRN
J1-6

TRANS. TEMPERATURE
Index
90-823224--2 796
TO IGN COIL TERM B

TO INJECTORS
85
8
6
87
ECM BAT FUSE/
DLC 15A
10A
TO DLC CONNECTOR
439 PNK/BLK
KNOCK
SENSOR (KS)
MODULE

ON SOME EFI MODELS
KNOCK
SENSOR (KS)
LANYARD STOP
SWITCH CIRCUIT
(OPTIONAL)
A
B
BLK
Index
90-823224--2 796

AT A LATER DATE
Index
90-823224--2 796

AT A LATER DATE
Index
90-823224--2 796
FUEL SYSTEM
5
A
50830
FUEL DELIVERY SYSTEMS AND

FUEL PUMPS
Index
5A - FUEL DELIVERY SYSTEMS AND FUEL PUMPS
90-823224 692
Table of Contents
Page
Replacement Parts Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5A-1
Fuel Supply Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5A-1
Tools / Lubricants / Sealants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5A-1
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5A-1
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5A-2
Fuel Delivery System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5A-2
Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5A-2
Fuel System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5A-3
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5A-3
Weber 4 Barrel Carburetor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5A-3
Cool Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5A-3
Multi-Port Injection With Vapor Separator
Tank (VST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5A-4
Multi-Port Injection Cool Fuel System . . . . 5A-4
Fuel Cooler Kit For MIE Inboard
(Starboard Mounted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5A-5
Water Separating Fuel Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5A-6
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5A-7
Sight Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5A-7
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5A-7
Testing Mechanical Fuel Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5A-8
Mechanical Fuel Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5A-8
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5A-8
NOTICE
Index
5A
- FUEL
DELIVERY
SYSTEMS
AND
FUEL
PUMPS
5A-0
- FUEL
DELIVERY
SYSTEMS
AND
FUEL
PUMPS
90-823224--2 796
Fuel Supply Connections
Identification
! WARNING
fuel leak.
72677

! WARNING



OVER-TIGHTEN.

Description
Part Number
Fuel Pressure
Connector (Carburetor)
91-18078
92-34227--1
#592 Loctite Pipe

Sealant with Teflon
Obtain Locallyy
Fuel Pressure Gauge
Specifications
lb. ft.
Nm
Fuel Pump To Seawater Pickup

Pump
25
34
Fuel Lines
18
24
Fuel Fittings

TEFLON TAPE.
Tools / Lubricants / Sealants

Fastener Location
Description
Pump Pressure
Specification
3-8 PSI (21-48 kPa)
See Note
NOTE: Refer To Fuel Supply Connections Warning

following this chart.
Index
90-823224--2 796
FUEL DELIVERY SYSTEMS AND FUEL PUMPS - 5A-1
Precautions
! WARNING
or explosion.
! WARNING
Be careful when changing fuel system components; gasoline is extremely flammable and
highly explosive under certain conditions. Be
sure that ignition key is OFF. DO NOT smoke or
allow sources of spark or flame in the area while
changing fuel filters. Wipe up any spilled fuel immediately.
! WARNING
Make sure that no fuel leaks exist before closing
engine hatch.
! CAUTION
being supplied to seawater pickup pump, or
pump impeller will be damaged and subsequent
overheating damage may result.
Fuel Delivery System

Recommendations
! WARNING
Boating industry standards (BIA, ABYC, etc.)
federal standards and Coast Guard regulations
MUST BE adhered to when installing fuel delivery system.
When designing and installing fuel delivery system,
the following information MUST BE observed:
1. Fuel tank should be mounted below carburetor
level, if possible. If tank is mounted above
carburetor level, gravity feed may cause carburetor fuel inlet needle to unseat, and flooding may
result.
2. Fuel pickup should be at least 1 in. (25 mm) from
the bottom of the fuel tank to prevent picking up
water or other impurities.
3. Fuel lines used MUST BE Coast Guard approved
(USCG type A) and MUST NOT BE SMALLER
THAN 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) I.D. On installations where
long lines or numerous fittings are required, larger size lines should be used.
4. Fuel line should be installed free of stress and
firmly secured to prevent vibration and/or chafing.
5. Sharp bends in fuel line should be avoided.
6. A flexible fuel line must be used to connect fuel
line to engine to absorb deflection when engine
is running.
Index
5A-2 - FUEL DELIVERY SYSTEMS AND FUEL PUMPS
90-823224--2 796
Fuel System Components
Cool Fuel System
Description
The fuel system consists of fuel tank(s), a water separating fuel filter, a fuel pump and a carburetor.
The fuel is stored in the fuel tank. When the engine

is cranking or running, fuel is drawn from the fuel
tank, through the water separating filter, by a mechanically operated fuel pump. The fuel pump is operated by the seawater pump shaft cam rotation.
b
c
The fuel is pushed through the fuel line to the carburetor where it is metered and supplied to the engine.
d
f
g
f
b
c
1
h
e
i
74871
e
50830
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
Fuel Tank
Anti-Siphon Valve
Water Separating Fuel Filter
Fuel Pump
Carburetor
Fuel Filter
Vent Hose
Fuel Line
Sight Tube
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
Vacuum Line To Throttle Body

Fuel Pressure Regulator
Fuel Cooler
Electric Fuel Pump
Fuel From Tank
Direction Of Water Flow
Throttle Body Unit
Fuel Line To Throttle Body
Excess Fuel Return To Water Separating Fuel Filter
1 - Boat Fuel System
Index
90-823224--2 796
Multi-Port Injection With Vapor

Separator Tank (VST)
Multi-Port Injection With Cool Fuel

System
d
b
c
g
e
d
73895
e
g
74871
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
Fuel Injector (8)

Fuel Rail
Outlet Fuel Line
Return Fuel Line
Vapor Separator Tank (VST)
Fuel Line From Water Separating Fuel Filter
Fuel Line From Tank
a - Vacuum Line To Throttle Body (Multi-Port) or Flame Arrestor (Throttle Body)

b - Fuel Pressure Regulator
c - Fuel Cooler
d - Electric Fuel Pump
e - Water Separating Fuel Filter
f - Fuel From Tank
g - Direction Of Water Flow
h - Throttle Body Unit
i - Fuel Line To Throttle Body
j - Excess Fuel Return To Water Separating Fuel Filter
k - Fuel Injectors (8)
l - Fuel Rail
Index
90-823224--2 796
Fuel Cooler Kit For MIE Inboard (Starboard Mounted)
5
i
4
d
f
c
g
e
h
1
3
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i

Fuel Rail
Fuel Cooler
Fuel Pump
Fuel Line From Fuel Tank
Seawater Inlet Hose Connection Point
Seawater Hose - Cooler to Inlet Side of Seawater Pump
High Pressure Fuel Line - VST to Fuel Rail (This Fuel Line
Stays The Same)
1 - Fuel Line - Filter to Cooler [16-1/2 in. (420mm)]

2 - Fuel Line - Cooler to Fuel Pump Inlet [22-1/2 in. (572 mm)]
3 - Fuel Line - Pump Outlet to Vapor Separator Tank Supply
Fitting [57 in. (1448 mm)]
4 - Fuel Line - Fuel Rail to Cooler [32-1/2 (825 mm)]
5 - Fuel Line - Cooler to Vapor Separator Tank Fuel Return
Fitting [31 in. (787 mm)]
Index
90-823224--2 796

NOTICE
Refer to Precautions, in this section,
BEFORE proceeding.
The water separating fuel filter is standard on all engines.
b
d
The fuel filter consists of the fuel filter base and filter element.
g
e
J
c
k
b
72678
Carburetor and VST Equipped Engines

a - Fuel Filter Mounting Bracket
b - Filter Element
c - Sealing Ring
Cool Fuel System Water Separating Fuel Filter

a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
Top Cover
Insulator Plate
Fuel Outlet To Throttle Body Or Fuel Rail
Brass Fitting
Fuel Return
Brass Fitting
Fuel Filter Mounting Bracket
Nut
Inlet Fuel Fitting
Plug
Bottom Cover
Index
90-823224--2 796
Replacement
NOTICE
BEFORE proceeding.

2. Remove fuel filter from base. A filter wrench may
be needed to loosen element.
3. Lubricate sealing ring(s) of new filter with SAE
engine oil.
4. Install new filter, tightening securely by hand.
5. Reconnect battery cables, make sure water is
supplied to cooling system, start engine, and
check for fuel leaks.
Sight Tube
74109
Inspection
Fuel pump is equipped with sight tube. Evidence of
fuel in the sight tube indicates a ruptured diaphragm
and fuel pump must be replaced immediately.
a - Sight Tube
b - Vapor Separator Tank (VST)
70346
Seawater / Mechanical Fuel Pump

a - Sight Tube
b - Fuel Pump
Index
90-823224--2 796
Testing Mechanical Fuel

Pump
! CAUTION
NOTICE
BEFORE proceeding.

2. Remove fuel line from carburetor or outlet side of
fuel pump.
3. Install Fuel Pressure Connector (91-18078) to
carburetor and reinstall fuel line. Tighten connector and fuel line securely.
4. Connect fuel pressure test gauge to connector.
5. Reconnect battery cables, start engine, and run
at 1800 RPM.
6. Fuel pressure should be within specifications. If
not, replace fuel pump.
Plug fuel supply hose after removal to prevent

fuel from leaking into boat.
2. Use a wrench to stabilize brass coupling at fuel
filter inlet fitting, loosen fuel line fitting, disconnect
and suitably plug fuel line to prevent fuel in tank
from leaking into bilge.
3. Remove fuel filter.
4. Using wrench to stabilize brass couplings on fuel
pump, loosen fuel line fittings and disconnect
from fuel pump.
5. Clean gasket from seawater pump.
6. Apply Quicksilver Perfect Seal to both sides of
fuel pump gasket and install on fuel pump.
7. Install fuel pump. Torque bolts to 25 lb. ft.
(34 Nm).
8. Install fuel inlet and outlet fittings to fuel pump
as outlined next:
Mechanical Fuel Pump
! WARNING
NOTICE
BEFORE proceeding.
fuel leak.

TEFLON TAPE.


OVER-TIGHTEN.

Replacement
IMPORTANT: The fuel pump cannot be repaired.
If pump fails, it must be replaced.
9. Install sight tube.

10. Install fuel line and fuel filter.
11. Reconnect battery cables.
72677
12. Make sure water is supplied to cooling system

and start engine. Check for fuel leaks.
Index
90-823224--2 796
FUEL SYSTEM
5
B
70389
Index
Table of Contents
Page
Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-1
Replacement Parts Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-1
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-1
MCM Carburetor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-2
MIE Carburetor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-3
Jet Changes for Altitude (Change
Only Secondary Jets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-4
MCM Carburetor Adjustment
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-5
MIE Carburetor Adjustment
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-5
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-6
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-6
Important Service Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-7
Weber Carburetor Adjustable
Accelerator Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-7
Hard Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-7
Carburetor Metering Rod And Jet
Indentification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-8
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-9
Flame Arrestor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-9
Fuel Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-10
Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-11
Accelerator Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-11
Choke Pull-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-12
Float Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-12
Float Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-13
Idle Speed and Mixture Adjustments . . . . . . . 5B-14
Thunderbolt IV Equipped Engines . . . . . . 5B-14
Thunderbolt V Equipped Engines . . . . . . . 5B-16
Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-17
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-17
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-18
Exploded View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-24
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-25
Cleaning and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-34
Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-35
NOTICE
Index
5B
- WEBER
4 BARREL
CARBURETOR
5B-0
- WEBER
4 BARREL
CARBURETOR
90-823224--2 796
Identification
Fastener Location
in. lb.
Carburetor To Manifold
132
Fuel Line
To Carburetor
lb. ft.
Nm
15
18
24
Tools
Description
a
70389
a - Weber Identification Number Location
Part Number
Universal Carburetor
Gauge
91-36392
Tachometer
91-59339
Universal Carburetor
Stand
Torx Screwdriver
Obtain Locally
(15,20,25)
TORX SCREWDRIVERS
! WARNING
Weber carburetors will have a star shaped socket

in the head of some screws. A TORX screwdriver
must be used on this type of screw. The sizes used
are numbers 15, 20 and 25.

Index
90-823224--2 796
WEBER 4 BARREL CARBURETOR - 5B-1
Specifications
MCM Carburetor
Secondary
Jet Size
Metering
Rod
Number
Metering
Rod
Spring
Color
.107 in.1
.098 in.1
16-6542
Pink
3310-806969
(9780S)
.104 in.
.098 in.
16-757347
Green
3310-818659
(9772)
.107 in.1
.098 in.1
16-6542
Pink
3310-805569
(9777)
.107 in.1
.098 in.1
16-7147
Pink
3310-806969
(9780)
.104 in.
.098 in.
16-757347
Green
MCM 454 Magnum

SN OF304599 and below
3310-816917
(9773)
.107 in.
.107 in.
16-6542
Pink
MCM 454 Magnum

SN OF305000 and
Above
MCM 454 Magnum
3310-806755
(
, 9779S))
(9779,
.106 in.
.092 in.
16-757347
Green
MCM 502 Magnum
3310-805341
(9776)
3310-806791
(9776S)
.110 in.
.101 in.
16-7147
Pink
Engine Model
Carb
Type
MCM 7.4L
SN OF352105
and Below
MCM 7.4L
SN OF352106 and
Above
SN OF070156 and
Above
SN OF070155 and Below
MCM 7.4L
WFB
Mercury
Number
(Manufacturer
Number)
Primary
Jet Size
3310-818659
(9772)
7.4L Engines with the following serial numbers may have staggered jets in the main and/or secondary jets.
They should be changed to jets listed above for that respective carburetor.
MCM (Stern Drive) serial numbers OF022828 and below

MIE (Inboard ) serial number OD857999 and below
Index
5B-2 - WEBER 4 BARREL CARBURETOR
90-823224--2 796
Specification (continued)
MIE Carburetor
Engine Model
Carb
Type
MIE 7
7.4L
4L Bluewater
8 2L Bluewater
Bl
t
MIE 8.2L
WFB
Mercury
Number
(Manufacturer
Number)
Primary
Jet Size
Secondary
Jet Size
Metering
Rod
Number
Metering
Rod
Spring
Color
3310-818659
(9772)
.107 in.
.098 in.
16-6542
Pink
3310-806969
((9780, 9780S)
S)
.104
104 in.
in
.098
098 in
in.
16-757347
Green
Starboard
Side
.107 in.
098 in.
i
.098
16 6542
16-6542
Pi k
Pink
.110 iin.
i
.101 in.
16-7147
Pi k
Pink
3310-817693
(
(9774)
)
See Note 1
Port Side
.104 in.
3310-805341
(9776S)
L Bluewater
Bl
MIE 8.2L
3310-805341
(9776SA)
3310-806971
(9776SB)
Note1: This model carburetor had staggered primary jets.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Jet Changes for Altitude (Change Only Secondary Jets)

Part Number
5000 ft. (1525 m)

and below
5000-9000 ft.
(1525-2745 m)
9000 ft. (2745 m)

and above
3310-818659A
(9772)
.098 in. Port

.077 In. Starboard
.092 in. Port

.074 in. Starboard
.089 in. Port

.071 in. Starboard
3310-818659A
(9772SA)
.098 in.
.092 in.
.089 in.
3310-806969
(9780S)
Stock 3 Step
Metering Rod
7.4L Bravo Three

Electric Choke
Serial # OF838819
to OF800699
3310-805569A
(9777)
.098 in.
7.4L Bravo Three

Electric Choke
3310-806755A
(9779S)
Stock 3 Step
Metering Rod
454 Magnum
Automatic Choke
3310-816917A
(9773)
.107 in.
454 Magnum
Electric Choke
3310-806755A
(9779S)
Stock 3 Step
Metering Rods
Model
7.4L Bravo
Automatic Choke
C
7.4L Bravo
Electric Choke
g
502 Magnum
Automatic Choke
C
502 Magnum
Electric Choke
7.4L Inboard
Automatic Choke
C
7.4L Inboard
Electric Choke
8.2L Inboard
Automatic Choke
C
8.2L Inboard
Electric Choke
Elevation Kit
#1 (See Note)
.092 in.
.089 in.
Elevation Kit
#1 (See Note)
.101 in.
.098 in.
Elevation Kit
#2 (See Note)
3310-805341
(9776)
3310-806791A
(9776SA)
.101 in.
i
.095 in.
i
.092 in.
i
3310-818659A
(9772)
.098 in. Port

.077 In. Starboard
.092 in. Port

.074 in. Starboard
.089 in. Port

.071 in. Starboard
3310-818659A
(9772SA)
.098 in.
.092 in.
.089 in.
3310-806969
(9780S)
Stock 3 Step
Metering Rod
3310-806971A
(9776SB)
Elevation Kit
#1 (See Note)
3310-805341
(9776)
3310-806791A
(9776SA)
i
.101 in.
i
.095 in.
i
.092 in.
3310-806971A
(9776SB)
NOTE: Elevation Kit Number 1 (Part Number 809615)

Elevation Kit Number 2, 454 Magnum Only (Part Number 809620)
Index
90-823224--2 796
UNIT OF MEASUREMENT
In. (mm)
ALL MEASUREMENTS ARE 1/64 In. (0.4 mm).
MCM Carburetor Adjustment Specifications

Engine Model
7.4L / 7.4L Bravo Three
454 Bravo
502 Bravo
Carburetor Manufacturer
Number
9772, 9777
9779S, 9780S
9773, 9779S
9776, 9776SA,
9776SB
Float Level
1-9/32 in. (33 mm)
Float Drop
2 in. (51 mm)
Pump Rod Hole Location
Third Hole From End
Accelerator Pump
7/16 in. (11 mm) 1
Choke Pull-Off
15/64 in. (6 mm)
Choke Coil Rod
Top Of Rod Even With Bottom Of Lever Hole 2
Preliminary Mixture Idle

Screw Setting
1-1/4 Turns
MIE Carburetor Adjustment Specifications

Engine Model
7.4L
8.2L
Carburetor Manufacturer Number
9772, 9780S
9774, 9776, 9776S, 9776SB
Float Level
1-9/32 in. (33 mm)
Float Drop
2 in. (51 mm)
Pump Rod Hole Location
Third Hole From End
Accelerator Pump
7/16 in. (11 mm) 1
Choke Pull-Off
15/64 in. (6 mm)
Choke Coil Rod
Top Of Rod Even With Bottom Of Lever Hole 2
Preliminary Mixture Idle

Screw Setting
1 Measured
1-1/4 Turns
from top of carburetor to bottom of S-link
2 Remove choke rod from lever hole. Choke held closed and choke rod pushed down with top edge of rod even
with bottom edge of hole.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Description
Weber WFB carburetor is unique in design, as the
main body and flange are cast as a one piece unit.
This, along with the bowl cover, make up the two
piece construction which is made of light, durable
aluminum to dissipate heat.
There are two separate float circuits. Each float circuit supplies fuel to a primary low speed circuit and
a primary and secondary high speed circuit. The
bowls are vented to the inside of the air horn. A connecting vent passage effects a balance of the air
pressure between the two bowls.
The float needle valves are installed at an angle to
provide the best possible seating action on the
needles. This provides better needle response to
float movement, also.
The high speed circuits use staged step-up rods in
the main metering jets to control the amount of fuel
admitted to the nozzles. The position of the step-up
rod is controlled by manifold vacuum applied to the
vacuum piston.
A primary air bleed located in the venturi cluster prevents a rich condition or bog as the high speed circuit
is reactivated after deceleration.
Small L shaped metal tabs, called distribution
tab(s), are attached to some venturi clusters and
protrude into the air stream at the proper location to
aid distribution of fuel on selected applications.
Precautions
! WARNING
or explosion.
! WARNING
crankcase ventilation hose: gasoline is extremely flammable and highly explosive under certain
! WARNING
Be careful when changing fuel system components: gasoline is extremely flammable and highly explosive under certain conditions. Be sure
that ignition key is OFF. DO NOT smoke or allow
sources of spark or open flame in area while
changing fuel filter. Wipe up any spilled fuel immediately.
Fuel Supply Connections
! WARNING
fuel leak.

TEFLON TAPE.


OVER-TIGHTEN.

! WARNING
Make sure no fuel leaks exist, before closing engine hatch.
! CAUTION
housing or water pickup inlet, or water pump impeller will be damaged and subsequent overheating damage to engine may result.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Important Service
Information
Hard Starting
Weber Carburetor Adjustable

Accelerator Pump
1. Before starting engine, remove flame arrestor

then operate throttle to see if choke closes.
The accelerator pump lever on Weber Carburetors

has three holes in it. The closest hole to the levers
pivot point is the richest, the second hole is leaner
and the hole furthest away is the leanest. All production carbs have the pump rod installed in the closest
(richest) hole. If you are having a rich bog on acceleration, move the rod to the second or third hole.
Weber put the three holes in the lever so the amount
of fuel delivered by the accelerator pump could be
changed.
2. If choke is stuck open, check choke stove link rod

and choke linkage on both sides of carburetor for
cause of sticking. Possible paint or interference
to rod or linkage.
If a hard starting condition exists, after engine has not

been operated for a period of time, proceed with the
following:
3. If choke plate does not close tight step 2 or 3, then

choke link rod will have to be bent to make it
shorter so it will close choke plate completely.
73716
a - Bend Here To Shorten
a
4. After installing, ensure that the rod does not rub
against stove cover or carburetor throughout its
travel.
b
c
70472
a - Rich
b - Lean
c - Leaner
Index
90-823224--2 796
METERING JETS
Carburetor Metering Rod And Jet

Indentification
The metering jets in this carburetor are taller than the

jets in a standard carburetor.
METERING ASSEMBLY
Three Step
Two Step
The metering rod assemblies are different in the following ways:

Three Step
a
d
73728
a - Three Step Metering Rod

b - Two Step Metering Rod
METERING ROD HAS THREE STEPS -VSTWO
e
73732
Three Step
73726
Two Step
a
Two Step
73724
c
PISTON SHAPE IS DIFFERENT AND HAS
A SECOND SPRING
e
73729
a
b
c
d
e
Three Step
Piston
Metering Rod
Spring
Jet
Piston Cover
73730
Two Step
73727
Index
90-823224--2 796
PISTON ASSEMBLY COVER IS HIGHER
ELECTRIC CHOKE
The electric choke should be set with marks aligned.
73735
Three Step
Two Step
73725
74104
Maintenance
73736
PISTON BORE HAS A STEP ON THREE STEP

MODEL
Flame Arrestor
NOTICE
BEFORE proceeding.
5. Remove (in the following order):
a. Nut
b. Sealing washer
c. Carburetor cover
d. Crankcase ventilation hoses from flame arrestor and rocker arm covers
e. Flame arrestor
6. Clean and inspect:
a. Clean flame arrestor in solvent and blow dry
with compressed air.
b. Clean crankcase ventilation hoses.
73737
c. Inspect crankcase ventilation hoses for

cracks or deterioration, and replace if necessary.
Index
90-823224--2 796
7. Install (in the following order):
Fuel Filter
a. Flame arrestor
b. Crankcase ventilation hoses to flame arrestor and rocker arm covers
NOTICE
BEFORE proceeding.
c. Carburetor cover
Carburetor inlet fuel filter is installed in bottom side of
fuel inlet seat (in the carburetor top). Refer to Disassembly and Reassembly to service.
d. Sealing washer
e. Nut (tighten securely)
a
a
d
e
e
f
71372
Flame Arrestor with Carburetor Cover (Typical)

a
b
c
d
e
f
g
Nut
Sealing Washer
Carburetor Cover
Sta-Strap
Crankcase Cover
Crankcase Ventilation Hose
Flame Arrestor
70447
a - Fuel Inlet Seat (with Gasket)

b - Fuel Inlet Filter
Index
90-823224--2 796
2. Close throttle valves completely.
Adjustments
NOTICE
BEFORE proceeding.
3. Accelerator pump is set at 7/16 in. (11 mm), which

is measured from the carburetor top to the bottom
of the S-link as shown.
Accelerator Pump
IMPORTANT: Refer to Important Service Information in this section, regarding the three accelerator pump linkage holes and placement of
linkage rod.
1. Back out idle speed screw until it no longer contacts throttle lever.
70472
4. Adjustment of accelerator pump is done by bending the linkage as necessary to achieve the proper dimension as stated above.
70474
a - Idle Speed Screw

b - Throttle Lever Contact Point
a
70473
a - Bend Here
a
b
70473

b - Throttle Lever
Index
90-823224--2 796
Choke Pull-Off
1. Choke pull-off is checked by holding in on vacuum diaphragm and attempting to close choke
plate. The gap between the plate and housing is
to be set at15/64 in. (6 mm).
2. Bend choke pull-off linkage to achieve setting given in Step 1.
70471
a - linkage (Bend)
70471
Float Drop
1. Measure float drop from bottom side of carburetor top to toe of float (lowest part), as shown. It
must be set at 2 in. (51 mm).
70471
a
b
c
d
Vacuum Diaphragm
Choke Plate
Housing
Gap Measurement
70469
a - Drop Measurement
2. If float drop is not correct, hold hinge pin firmly

and bend tab shown, as needed.
Index
90-823224--2 796
IMPORTANT: Do not put pressure on fuel needle

valve and seat while bending tab, or damage may
result.
2. If float level requires adjustment, hold hinge pin

firmly and bend float arm shown, as needed.
IMPORTANT: Do not put pressure on fuel needle
valve and seat while bending tab, or damage may
result.
a
a
70470
70468
a - Float
b - Tab (Bend)
a - Float Level Tab (Bend)
Float Level
1. Measure float level from bottom side of carburetor top (with gasket in place) to toe of float as
shown. It must be set at 1-9/32 in. (33 mm).
70468
a - Float Level Measurement

b - Gasket
Index
90-823224--2 796
IMPORTANT: Do not turn idle mixture screws

tightly against seat, as damage to seat and/or
needle may result.
Idle Speed and Mixture

Adjustments
Thunderbolt IV Equipped Engines
PRELIMINARY IDLE SPEED AND MIXTURE
Initial start settings are given following. Make final adjustment with engine running (refer to Final Idle
Speed and Mixture).
1. Turn idle speed screw until it contacts throttle
lever.
71171
a - Idle Mixture Screws (Needles)
70474

b - Throttle Lever Contact Point
2. Turn idle mixture screws (needles) in (clockwise)

until LIGHTLY seated, then back out 1-1/4 turns.
Index
90-823224--2 796
FINAL IDLE SPEED AND MIXTURE
4. With boat in open water, place remote control in

forward gear, idle position.
IMPORTANT: Boat MUST BE in the water and engine at normal operating temperature to accurately check and adjust idle speed and mixture.
5. Disconnect throttle cable barrel from anchor

stud. BE SURE NOT TO LOSE SPACER ON ANCHOR STUD.
Carburetor should be set so that engine idles as

smoothly as possible, with boat in the water, engine
normal operating temperature and drive unit in forward gear. To adjust idle speed and mixture, proceed
as follows:
6. Adjust idle speed adjustment screw to obtain

specified idle RPM. (Refer to Section 1B Tune-Up Specifications charts.)
IMPORTANT: DO NOT attempt to compensate for

other engine problems (incorrect ignition timing,
faulty ignition components, low compression,
vacuum leaks, etc.) with carburetor adjustments.
This will only cover the problem, which must be
corrected if engine is to achieve maximum fuel
economy and performance.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT turn idle mixture screws
(needles) tightly into seat, as damage to needle
and/or seat may result.
2. If a new or rebuilt carburetor has been installed,
turn each idle mixture screw until it LIGHTLY contacts seat (if not already accomplished), then
back out 1-1/4 turns. This will provide a sufficient
setting to allow starting the engine.
3. Start engine and run at 1500 RPM until engine
reaches normal operating temperature.
! WARNING
DO NOT leave helm unattended while performing
idle speed and mixture adjustments, following.
BE CAREFUL NOT TO ACCIDENTALLY
ACCELERATE ENGINE WHILE PERFORMING
ADJUSTMENTS.
NOTE: Idle speed must be at specified RPM or less.

Or engine will be operating on the off idle circuit. Mixture screw adjustments will be ineffective if this
condition exists.
7. With engine running at or just below specified idle
RPM, adjust idle mixture screws as follows:
a. Turn idle mixture needle in (clockwise) until
the engine speed begins to decrease due to
LEAN mixture.
b. Turn same idle mixture screw outward (counterclockwise) until the engine speed begins to
decrease due to a RICH mixture.
c. Turn screw in to a point between these two
extremes to obtain maximum engine smoothness and RPM.
d. Repeat procedure with other mixture screw.
e. Readjust idle speed adjusting screw, if necessary, to obtain specified idle RPM.
8. Place remote control in neutral. Turn ignition
OFF.
9. Accelerator pump linkage should be rechecked
at this time. Refer to Steps 3 and 4, of Adjustments - Accelerator Pump, as previously outlined and verify pump is set at 7/16 in. (11mm) as
specified.
10. Refer to SECTION 2. Install and adjust throttle
cable following instructions appropriate to your
power package.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Thunderbolt V Equipped Engines

ADJUSTING IDLE MIXTURE
The procedure for adjusting carburetor idle mixture
can be found in the appropriate engine service manual. This procedure also requires that the ignition module be locked in the Base Timing Mode.
IMPORTANT: In order to properly set idle mixture,
2. Adjust idle mixture following the procedure in the
appropriate engine service manual.
ADJUSTING ENGINE IDLE SPEED
This procedure should be done with boat in the water,
drive unit in neutral and engine at normal operating
temperature. Refer to the Operation and Maintenance Manual for the correct idle speed.
IMPORTANT: In order to properly set idle speed,

4. Start engine and allow it to reach normal operating temperature. Place the remote control lever
in forward gear, idle position.
5. Adjust idle speed to recommended RPM.
6. Stop engine. Readjust cable barrel and reinstall
the throttle.
means that the additional timing advance features would not be functioning.
1. Disconnect the throttle cable from carburetor.
Index
90-823224--2 796
4. Disconnect retaining clip and choke linkage rod.
Repair
NOTICE
BEFORE proceeding.
Removal
b
IMPORTANT: Carburetor malfunctions are, in
many cases, caused by the presence of dirt, water or other foreign matter in carburetor. To aid in
diagnosis, carefully remove carburetor from engine without draining fuel from bowl. Contents of
fuel bowl may, then, be inspected for contamination as carburetor is disassembled.
1. Turn off fuel supply at fuel tank.
2. Remove carburetor cover. Remove crankcase
ventilation hoses from flame arrestor, then remove flame arrestor.
71096
a - Retaining Clip
b - Linkage Rod
5. Disconnect fuel pump sight tube and fuel line.
IMPORTANT: Place a clean cloth in bores of carburetor to prevent dirt and foreign material from
falling into bores.
3. Disconnect throttle cable attaching hardware

from throttle bracket and throttle lever anchor
studs. Remove throttle cable.
b
b
71171
d
a - Fuel Pump Sight Tube
b - Fuel Line
d
a
c
71097
a
b
c
d
Throttle Cable
Bracket
Attaching Hardware
Anchor Studs
Index
90-823224--2 796
6. Remove fuel line and carburetor attaching hardware. Remove carburetor and throttle bracket.
Discard old gasket from carburetor.
7. Remove adaptor/wedge plate (if so equipped)

from manifold and discard old gasket.
8. Place a clean cloth over intake manifold openings.
IMPORTANT: Covering intake manifold prevents
entry of dirt or foreign material through openings.
Installation
1. Place appropriate new gasket on intake manifold.
b
71173
2. If so equipped, install adaptor or wedge plate, depending on model. Place appropriate new gasket
on top.
c
71172
a - Fuel Line
b - Attaching Hardware
c - Throttle Bracket
Index
90-823224--2 796
IMPORTANT: Carburetor is calibrated for use with an adaptor or 15 wedge plate if the model was originally so equipped. Be certain to install adaptor or 15 wedge plate if it was present upon disassembly.
MCM 7.4L BRAVO / MIE 7.4L HURTH DOWN ANGLE, VELVET DRIVE (BORG-WARNER) 5000 AND
VELVET DRIVE V-DRIVE TRANSMISSIONS
74394
74485
74393
MIE 7.4L VELVET DRIVE (BORG-WARNER) IN-LINE TRANSMISSION [15 DEGREE WEDGE]
74395
MCM 7.4L PT BRAVO THREE
74393
Index
90-823224--2 796
MCM 454 MAGNUM
74937
74394
MCM 502 MAGNUM
74394
Index
90-823224--2 796
MIE 8.2L VELVET DRIVE (BORG-WARNER) V-DRIVE AND HURTH DOWN ANGLE TRANSMISSIONS
74395
MIE 8.2L VELVET DRIVE (BORG-WARNER) IN-LINE TRANSMISSION
74396
Index
90-823224--2 796
3. Install carburetor and throttle bracket with attaching hardware. Torque fasteners to 132 lb. in.
(15 Nm).
4. Install fuel line. To prevent over-tightening, hold

fuel inlet filter nut with suitable wrench and tighten fuel line connector securely.
b
a
a
b
71173
a - Throttle Bracket (Not Visible In This View)

71173
a - Fuel Line
b - Fuel Inlet Filter Nut
5. Connect fuel pump sight tube and fuel line.

b
a
a
71172
a - Throttle Bracket
71171
a - Fuel Pump Sight Tube

b - Fuel Line
Index
90-823224--2 796
6. Connect choke linkage rod and install retaining

clip.
71096
a - Clip
b - Linkage Rod
7. Refer to Section 2. Install and adjust throttle

cable following instructions appropriate to your
power package.
8. Install flame arrestor and tighten nut securely.
9. Reconnect battery cables to battery by first installing positive battery cable to positive (+) battery terminal. Tighten clamp securely. Then, install negative battery cable to negative () battery
terminal. Tighten clamp securely.
10. Turn on fuel supply at fuel tank.
11. Start engine and check for gasoline leaks. If leaks
exist, STOP ENGINE IMMEDIATELY and recheck connections.
12. Adjust idle speed and idle mixture, as previously
outlined under Adjustments.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Exploded View
Weber Carburetor
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
35
36
10
37
11
38
12
39
40
41
13
14
15
16
42
43
17
44
18
45
19
46
20
47
21
48
22
49
23
24
50
51
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
Index
90-823224--2 796
1-Air Deflector (2)

2-Screw (2)
3-Cover, Metering Rod (2)
4-Metering Rod Assembly (2)
5-Spring, Metering Rod (2)
6-Fuel Inlet Fitting
7-Sealing Washer
8-Screw
9-Linkage Rod, Choke Pull-Off
10- Screw
11- Air Horn (Carburetor Top)
12- Filter, Fuel Inlet (2)
13- Gasket (2)
14- Seat, Fuel Inlet (2)
15- Needle Valve, Fuel Inlet (2)
16- Pin (2)
17- Float (2)
18- Secondary Venturi Cluster (2)
19- Baffle Plate, Float Bowl (2)
20- Screw (4)
21- Primary Venturi Cluster (2)
22- Gasket (2)
23- Jet, Primary Fuel (2)
24- Screw (2)
25- Fuel Pump Injector Housing
26- Gasket
27- Check-Weight (or Check-Spring, if So Equipped)
28- Check-Ball
29- Screw
30- Diaphragm, Choke Pull-Off
31- Vacuum Hose
32- Idle Mixture Screw (2)
33- Spring, Idle Mixture Screw (2)
34- Gasket, Carburetor Base
35- Linkage Rod, Choke Plate
36- S-Link
37- Accelerator Pump Lever
38- Screw
39- Linkage Rod, Accelerator Pump
40- Wire Clip
41- Wire Clip
42- Gasket
43- Screw (4)
44- Gasket (2)
45- Jet, Secondary Fuel (2)
46- Secondary Air Valve and Weight Assembly
47- Plunger Washer
48- Plunger Guide
49- Accelerator Pump
50- Spring, Accelerator Pump
51- Float Bowl/Body (Carburetor Bottom)
Disassembly
The following is a step-by-step procedure for completely overhauling carburetor after removal from engine. In many cases, however, complete overhaul is
not necessary and, in these cases, only the steps required to repair the carburetor malfunction should be
performed. Read the instructions carefully to prevent
doing unnecessary steps.
IMPORTANT: Before performing any service on
carburetor, it is essential that carburetor be
placed in a holding fixture to prevent possible
damage to throttle valves.
1. Remove wire clip to disconnect accelerator pump
linkage.
b
a
70390
a - Wire Clip
b - Accelerator Pump Linkage Rod
Index
90-823224--2 796
2. Remove wire clip to disconnect choke plate linkage.

a
4. Remove screws from choke pull-off diaphragm

bracket to disengage choke pull-off linkage.
NOTE: Depending on amount of service required, it

may not be necessary to remove diaphragm and
bracket.
70391
b
70394
70392
a - Screws
b - Linkage Rod
a - Wire Clip
b - Choke Plate Linkage Rod
NOTE: Do not remove vacuum hose if not servicing

diaphragm.
3. Disconnect vacuum hose from choke pull-off diaphragm.
IMPORTANT: Metering rods should always be removed before separating top and bottom halves
of carburetor.
b
a
70393
a - Vacuum Hose
b - Choke Pull-Off Diaphragm
Index
90-823224--2 796
5. Loosen (not necessary to remove, depending on

amount of service required) metering rod cover
screws. Turn cover, or remove, to expose metering rod.
7. Remove metering rod springs.

IMPORTANT: Metering rod springs are color
coded and should not be interchanged with other
carburetors.
c
a
b
a
71094
70397
71095
a - Screws
b - Metering Rod Cover(s)
c - Air Deflectors If Equipped)
a - Spring(s)
IMPORTANT: Be careful not to mix metering rods

when removing them.
8. Remove nine screws to separate top and bottom

halves of carburetor.
6. Carefully lift metering rod assemblies straight

out.
a
a
70398
a - Screw(s)
70396
a - Metering Rod Assembly(s)
Index
90-823224--2 796
9. Carefully lift off carburetor top and disconnect

choke linkage.
11. Remove inlet needle from seat.

IMPORTANT: Be careful not to mix up inlet
needles and seats after removal.
70399
10. Slide pin out to remove the float.
70401
IMPORTANT: Be careful not to mix up floats after

removal.
b
b
a
a
a
70400
a - Pin(s)
b - Float(s)
70446
a - Inlets Needle(s)
b - Seat(s)
Index
90-823224--2 796
12. Remove seat, gasket, and inlet filter.
14. Remove accelerator pump lever.
IMPORTANT: Be careful not to mix up seats after

removal.
c
a
b
b
c
a
70449
a - Accelerator Pump
b - Accelerator Pump Lever
c - Retaining Screw
70447
15. Remove accelerator pump.
a - Seat
b - Gasket
c - Inlet Filter
13. Remove gasket from top of carburetor.

a
a
70448
a - Gasket
70450
b - Plunger Guide
c - Plunger Washer (Not Visible In This View)
Index
90-823224--2 796
16. Remove accelerator pump spring from bottom

half of carburetor.
17. Remove two screws that secure primary venturi

cluster.
a
b
70453
b
70451
a - Screw(s) Two On Each Side

b - Primary Venturi Cluster(s)
a - Accelerator Pump Spring

b - Carburetor Bottom
IMPORTANT: Before removing venturi clusters, it

is important to note which clusters are equipped
with a distribution tab. This distribution tab arrangement varies from one carburetor to another.
18. Remove primary venturi cluster by lifting straight

up.
70454
70452
a - Distribution Tab(s) Location And Total Number May Vary
Index
90-823224--2 796
19. Remove gasket from beneath venturi cluster.
21. Remove secondary venturi cluster by lifting it

straight up.
70455
70457
a - Gasket Primary Venturi Cluster
20. Remove two screws that secure secondary venturi clusters.
22. Remove gaskets from beneath secondary venturi clusters.
b
70456
a - Screw(s) Two Each Side

b - Secondary Venturi Cluster(s)
70458
a - Gasket, Secondary Venturi Cluster
Index
90-823224--2 796
23. Remove secondary air valve and weight assembly by lifting it straight out.
25. Remove pump jet housing.
70461
70459
a - Pump Jet Housing
26. Remove gasket from beneath pump jet housing.
a - Secondary Air Valve And Weight Assembly
24. Remove two screws that secure pump jet housing.

a
70462
a - Gasket, Pump Jet Housing
b
70460
a - Screw(s)
b - Pump Jet Housing
27. Remove check-ball and check-weight, or

check-ball and check-spring, from hole beneath
pump jet housing.
Index
90-823224--2 796
IMPORTANT: If your carburetor had a ball and

weight combination, replace with ball and
weight. If your carburetor used a ball and spring
combination, replace with ball and spring.
IMPORTANT: Do not mix up the primary and secondary jets. Make note of the jet sizes and their
location before removal to be certain that during
reassembly they are installed in the carburetor
side from which they were removed.
NOTE: If jets are difficult to remove, place a screwdriver, with the correct width, in the jet slot and lightly
tap the end of the screwdriver with a hammer.
29. Remove primary and secondary jets.
70463
a - Ball Location
70466
b
a
a - Primary Fuel Jet

b - Secondary Fuel Jet
70464
IMPORTANT: Before removing mixture screws,

check and note the number of turns from the fully
seated position. Also, do not mix up the two
screws.
a - Check Ball
b - Check Weight
c - Check Spring
28. Remove float bowl baffle plates, if necessary.
70465
a - Baffle Plate
Index
90-823224--2 796
30. Remove mixture screws.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT use a wire or drill to clean

jets, passages, or tubes in carburetor, as this
may enlarge orifices and seriously affect carburetor calibration.
3. Wipe all parts that cannot be cleaned in immersion cleaner with a clean, dry cloth.
4. Carefully inspect all carburetor parts for damage

or wear; pay particular attention to the following:
a. Idle mixture screws - Replace if damaged or
worn.
b
70467
b. Fuel inlet needle valve and seat - Replace

with new needle and seat if worn or damaged.
a - Idle Mixture Screw

b - Spring, Idle Mixture Screw
c. Casting surfaces - Inspect accelerator

pump plunger well for scoring or deposits.
Replace worn or corroded components.
d. All linkage rods and levers - Replace if

worn or damaged.
! CAUTION
Rubber, plastic parts, pump plungers or diaphragms cannot be immersed in carburetor
cleaner.
! CAUTION
e. Accelerator pump and plunger parts - Replace pump and parts if worn or damaged.
f.
Float assembly and hinge pin - Float weight

of each should be the same. Replace either
if fuel can be heard inside when shaken.
Check hinge pin and holes for wear. Replace
components if worn or defective.
Avoid damage to carburetor. Do not leave carburetor in immersion-type cleaner for more than
two hours.
g. Throttle valves and shafts - Check for binding (through entire operating range, making
sure valves open and close completely) or for
looseness in carburetor body.
IMPORTANT: Do not immerse metering rod

springs in carburetor cleaner; the color, if not
natural metal, may be removed. Clean
separately as needed.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT remove throttle valves. If

any of the throttle parts or float bowl/carburetor
body shaft bores are found to be worn or damaged, carburetor replacement is required.
1. Clean metal carburetor parts in a commercial, immersion-type cleaner, until all deposits have
been removed. Follow manufacturers instructions of cleaner being used for proper cleaning
and rinsing procedures.
h. Choke valve and shaft/lever assembly Check shaft and lever for excessive looseness in air horn. Check choke valve and
shaft/lever assembly for binding through entire operating range. Air horn assembly must
be replaced if choke valve and shaft/lever are
worn.
! CAUTION
Avoid personal injury. Always wear safety
glasses when using compressed air.
2. Blow out passages with compressed air. Do not
drill through passages.
5. Check that choke pull-off diaphragm plunger retracts when vacuum is applied to unit, and that it
holds vacuum (plunger remains seated if vacuum
is maintained).
Index
90-823224--2 796
Reassembly
1. Install mixture screws (needles) with springs in
place. Turn idle mixture screws in (clockwise) until LIGHTLY seated, then back out one and quarter (1-1/4) turns if previous settings were not
noted on disassembly.
3. Install the float bowl baffle plates, if previously

removed.
a
IMPORTANT: Do not turn idle mixture screws

tightly against seat, as damage to seat and/or
needle may result.
a
70465
c - Baffle Plate
4. Into bore beneath pump jet housing location, install check-ball and then check-weight or, if so
equipped, check-ball and check-spring.
b
70467
IMPORTANT: If your carburetor had a ball and

weight combination, replace with ball and
weight. If your carburetor used a ball and spring
combination, replace with ball and spring.
a - Idle Mixture Screw

b - Spring, Idle Mixture Screw
2. Install the primary and secondary jets. Tighten

only till snug.
IMPORTANT: Be sure that primary and secondary
jets are installed in the appropriate location. Be
sure that the size matches the same size recorded during disassembly.
70463
d
b
70466
a - Primary Fuel Jet

b - Secondary Fuel Jet
70464
a
b
c
d
Bore
Check Ball
Check Weight
Check Spring
Index
90-823224--2 796
5. Position pump jet housing gasket.
7. Install two screws that secure pump jet housing.

Tighten securely.
b
70462
70460
a - Gasket, Pump Jet Housing
6. Install pump jet housing.
a - Screws
b - Pump Jet Housing
8. Install the secondary air valve and weight assembly.
a
70461
a - Pump Jet Housing

70459
a - Secondary Air Valve And Weight Assembly
Index
90-823224--2 796
IMPORTANT: Before installing venturi clusters, it

is important to note which clusters were
equipped with a distribution tab. This distribution tab arrangement varies from one carburetor
to another.
10. Install the secondary venturi clusters.
70457
a - Secondary Venturi Cluster
70452
11. Secure each cluster with two screws. Tighten securely.
a - Distribution Tab(s) Location And Total Number May Vary
9. Position the secondary venturi cluster gaskets.
b
70456
a - Screws (Two On Each Side)

b - Secondary Venturi Cluster(s)
70458
a - Gasket, Secondary Venturi Cluster
Index
90-823224--2 796
12. Position the primary venturi cluster gaskets.
14. Secure each cluster with two screws. Tighten

securely.
a
b
70455
70453
a - Gasket, Primary Venturi Cluster
13. Install the primary venturi clusters.
a - Screws (Two Each Side)

b - Primary Venturi Cluster(s)
15. Install the accelerator pump spring into bottom

half of carburetor.
a
a
70454
a - Gasket, Primary Venturi Cluster (One Not N+Visible In

This View)
b - Primary Venturi Cluster
b
70451
a - Accelerator Pump Spring

b - Carburetor Bottom
Index
90-823224--2 796
16. Install accelerator pump in top of carburetor

housing, after placing washer and guide in position.
18. Install gasket on top of carburetor.
70448
a - Gasket
19. Install inlet filter in bottom of inlet seat. Install inlet

seat with gasket in place. Tighten securely.
70450
b - Plunger Guide
c - Plunger Washer (Not Visible In This View)
17. Connect accelerator pump lever to pump rod using the S-link. Secure pump lever with pivot
screw. Tighten securely. Check to ensure lever
actuates the accelerator pump.
70447
a - Seat
b - Gasket
c - Inlet Filter
a
b
70449
a
b
c
d
Accelerator Pump Lever

Accelerator Pump
S-Link
Retainer Screw
Index
90-823224--2 796
IMPORTANT: If using existing needles and seats,

be sure to reinstall them as matched sets, as
noted during disassembly.
20. Install appropriate inlet needles into inlet seats.
21. Install floats using hinge pins.
b
b
a
a
a
70400
a - Pin(s)
b - Floats(s)
70446
22. Carefully lower top of carburetor onto bottom

part.
70401
70399
a - Inlet Needle(s)
b - Seat(s)
IMPORTANT: If using existing floats, be sure to

reinstall them on the same side as removed.
Index
90-823224--2 796
23. Ensure gasket is properly positioned between

the two parts and secure the top to bottom with
screws (nine total). Tighten securely.
25. Carefully install metering rod assemblies in the

appropriate holes. Push down lightly on metering
rods to ensure that plunger will spring up and
down.
a
a
70398
a - Screw(s)
24. Install metering rod springs into each metering

rod hole. Be certain to install the appropriate color spring (refer to Specifications).
70396
a - Metering Rod Assembly(s)
IMPORTANT: Some carburetors are equipped

with air deflectors that are attached to the screw
that holds down the metering rod covers. Be sure
to reinstall the deflectors if your model carburetor requires them.
26. Position metering rod covers (and air deflectors,

if equipped) over metering rods and install
screws. Tighten securely.
c
a
70397
a - Spring(s)
71094
IMPORTANT: If using existing metering rods, be

sure that they are reinstalled in the same side
from which removed during disassembly.
71095
a - Screws
b - Metering Cover(s)
c - Air Deflectors (If Equipped)
Index
90-823224--2 796
27. Reconnect choke pull-off linkage to carburetor.

Reinstall choke pull-off diaphragm. Secure with
two screws and tighten securely.
29. Reconnect choke plate linkage. Secure with wire

clip.
a
b
70392
70394
a - Screw(s)
b - linkage Rod
28. Reconnect vacuum hose to choke pull-off diaphragm.
70391
a - Choke Plate Linkage Rod

b - Wire Clip
70393
a - Vacuum Hose
Index
90-823224--2 796
30. Reconnect accelerator pump linkage rod to hole

in accelerator pump lever where originally connected or refer to Important Service Information
in this section for information regarding adjustment. Accelerator pump linkage adjustment
should be checked at this time; refer to Adjustments - Accelerator Pump as previously outlined. Secure using wire clip.
a
b
70390
a - Accelerator Pump Linkage Rod

b - Wire Clip
31. Refer to Installation and install carburetor.
Index
90-823224--2 796

AT A LATER DATE
Index
90-823224--2 796

AT A LATER DATE
Index
90-823224--2 796
FUEL SYSTEMS
5
C
71692
MULTI-PORT AND THROTTLE BODY

FUEL INJECTION
Index
Table of Contents
Page
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-1
Visual/Physical Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-1
Basic Knowledge and Tools Required . . . . 5C-1
Electrostatic Discharge Damage . . . . . . . . . 5C-1
Diagnostic Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-2
Wiring Harness Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-2
Wiring Connector Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-2
Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-3
Changes In Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-4
Diagnostic Trouble Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-4
ECM Self-Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-5
Diagnostic Code Tool With Malfunction
Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-5
Intermittent Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . 5C-5
Reading Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-5
Scan Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-6
EFI Diagnostic Circuit Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-6
Scan Tool Use with Intermittents . . . . . . . . . 5C-6
Non-Scan Diagnosis of Driveability Concerns
(With No Codes Set) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-7
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-8
Service Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-9
and Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-10
General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-10
Computers and Voltage Signals . . . . . . . . 5C-10
Analog Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-10
Digital Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-11
Engine Control Module (ECM) . . . . . . . . . . 5C-11
Speed Density System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-12
ECM Input and Sensor Descriptions . . . . . 5C-13
Spark Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-18
High Energy Ignition with Ignition
Control (IC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-18
Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-18
Distributor Module Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-18
ECM Control Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-18
Base Ignition Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-18
Results of Incorrect Operation . . . . . . . . . . 5C-20
Fuel Metering System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-20
General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-20
Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-20
Fuel Metering System Components . . . . . 5C-22
Multi-Port Vapor Separator Tank (VST) . . 5C-22
Cool Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-23
Throttle Body Injection Components . . . . . 5C-24
Multi-Port Injection Components . . . . . . . . 5C-26
Throttle Body Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-27
ECM Connector and Symptom Charts . . . 5C-29
ECM Connector and EFI Symptoms Chart
(J-1 Circuits) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-30
ECM Connector and EFI Symptoms Chart
(J-2 Circuits) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-33
Multi Port Injector Balance Test . . . . . . . . . 5C-34
Fuel Injector Balance Test Set-up
(Multi-Port Injection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-35
Index
Page
Wiring Harness Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-36
MCM 7.4LX / MIE 7.4L Throttle Body Injection
Bluewater Inboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-36
MCM 7.4LX Multi-Port Injection / 454 / 502
Magnum Multi-Port Injection / MIE 454
Tournament Ski Multi-Port Injection /
502 Magnum Multi-Port Injection . . . . . . . 5C-38
(Chart 1 Of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-40
(Chart 2 Of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-41
(Chart 3 Of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-42
(Chart 4 Of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-43
(Chart 1 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-44
(Chart 2 Of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-45
(Chart 3 Of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-46
(Chart 4 Of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-47
Diagnostic Circuit Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-49
Scan Tool Normal Specifications
(Idle /Warm Engine/Closed
Throttle/Neutral) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-49
No Malfunction Indicator Lamp (Marine
Diagnostic Code Tool Installed) . . . . . . . . 5C-52
No DLC Data or Will Not Flash Code 12
Malfunction Indicator Lamp On Steady
(Marine Diagnostic Code Tool Installed)
Chart A-2 (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-54
Engine Cranks but Will Not Run
Chart A-3 (1 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-56
Multi-Port Injection Fuel System Diagnosis
Chart A-7 (1 of 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-60
Throttle Body Injection Fuel System
Diagnosis Chart A-7 (1 of 6) . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-66
EFI System/Ignition Relay Check
(1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-72
Ignition System Check (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . 5C-74
Ignition System Check (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . 5C-76
Idle Air Control (IAC) Functional Test
(1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-78
Lanyard Stop Circuit Check (Emergency Stop)
Circuit Check (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-80
Audio Warning Buzzer Circuit Check
(1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-82
Discrete Input Circuit Check
(Power Reduction Mode) (Non-Scan)
(1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5C-84
Diagnostics-Without Scan Tool . . . . . . . . . . 5C-86
Code 14: Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT)
Sensor Circuit (Non-Scan) (1 of 2) . . . . . . 5C-86
Code 21: Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Circuit
(Non-Scan) (1 Of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-88
Code 23: Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor
Circuit (Non-Scan)
(1 Of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-90
Code 33: Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP)
Sensor Circuit (Non-Scan) (1 Of 2) . . . . . . 5C-92
Code 42: Ignition Control (IC) Circuit
(Non-Scan) (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-94
5C-2 - ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION (MULTI-PORT AND THROTTLE BODY)
90-823224--2 796
Page
Code 43: Knock Sensor (KS)
(Non-Scan) (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-96
Code 51: Calibration Memory Failure Non-Scan
Diagnostics (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-98
Diagnostics -Using Scan Tool (Scan) . . 5C-100
Code 14 Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT)
Sensor Circuit (Scan) (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . 5C-100
Code 21: Throttle Position (TP) Sensor
Circuit (Scan) (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-102
Code 23: Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor
Circuit (Scan) (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-104
Code 33: Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP)
Sensor Circuit (Scan) (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . 5C-106
Code 42: Ignition Control (IC) Circuit
(Scan) (1 Of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-108
Code 43: Knock Sensor (KS)
(Scan) (1 Of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-110
Code 51: Calibration Memory Failure
(Scan) (1 Of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-112
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-114
Changes In Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-114
Diagnostic Trouble Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-114
Important Preliminary Checks . . . . . . . . . 5C-114
Troubleshooting Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-115
Fuel Delivery Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-136
Cool Fuel System Exploded View . . . . . 5C-136
Exploded View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-138
VST Fuel Pump (Exploded View) . . . . . 5C-140
Vapor Separator Tank (VST) . . . . . . . . . 5C-142
Float and Needle Assembly . . . . . . . . . . 5C-143
Diaphragm Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-144
Throttle Body Injection Repair
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-146
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-146
Lubricants/Sealants/ Adhesives . . . . . . . . . 5C-146
Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-146
Throttle Body Injection System Description 5C-147
Service Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-147
Throttle Body Exploded Views . . . . . . . . . . 5C-148
Induction System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-148
Throttle Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-149
Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure . . . . . . 5C-150
Fuel Meter Cover Assembly . . . . . . . . . . 5C-150
Page
Fuel Injectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-151
Throttle Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-152
Throttle Body Adapter Plate . . . . . . . . . . 5C-153
Multi-Port System Description . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-154
Service Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-154
Multi-Port Exploded Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-155
Flame Arrestor and Throttle Body . . . . . 5C-155
Plenum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-156
Intake Manifold and Fuel Rail . . . . . . . . 5C-158
Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure . . . . . . 5C-159
Multi-Port Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-159
Flame Arrestor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-159
Throttle Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-160
Plenum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-162
Intake Manifold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-164
Fuel Rail and Injectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-166
Fuel Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-166
Pressure Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-168
Fuel Injectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-169
Throttle Body Injection and Multi-Port Injection
Sensor and Module Servicing . . . . . . . . 5C-170
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-170
Electronic Control Module (ECM) . . . . . 5C-170
Knock Sensor (KS) Module . . . . . . . . . . 5C-171
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT)
Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-172
Throttle Body Injection Components- Manifold
Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor . . . . . 5C-173
Throttle Position (TP) Sensor . . . . . . . . . 5C-173
Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve . . . . . . . . . . 5C-174
Knock Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-175
Multi-Port Injection ComponentsManifold Absolute Pressure (MAP)
Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-177
Throttle Position (TP) Sensor . . . . . . . . . 5C-178
Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor . . 5C-179
Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve . . . . . . . . . . 5C-180
Knock Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-181
Knock Sensor (KS) Module . . . . . . . . . . 5C-182
Fuel Pump Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-184
Ignition Control (IC) System Components 5C-184
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-184
Ignition Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-185
Spark Plug Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-186
Index
90-823224--2 796
ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION (MULTI-PORT AND THROTTLE BODY) - 5C-1
Index
90-823224--2 796
Visual/Physical Inspection
General Information
! CAUTION
To reduce the chance of personal injury and/or
property damage, the following instructions
must be carefully observed: proper service and
repair are important to the safety of the service
technician and the safe, reliable operation of all
MerCruiser Electronic Fuel Injection (Multi-Port
And Throttle Body) equipped engines. If part replacement is necessary, the part must be replaced with one of the same part number or with
an equivalent part. Do not use a replacement part
of lesser quality. The service procedures recommended and described in this service manual are
effective methods of performing service and repair. Some of these procedures require the use of
tools specially designed for the purpose. Accordingly, anyone who intends to use a replacement part, service procedure or tool, which is not
recommended by the system manufacturer,
must first determine that neither his safety nor
the safe operation of the engine will be jeopardized by the replacement part, service procedure
or tool selected. It is important to note that this
manual contains various Cautions and
Notes that must be carefully observed in order
to reduce the risk of personal injury during service or repair, or the possibility that improper service or repair may damage the engine or render
it unsafe. It is also important to understand that
these Cautions and Notes are not exhaustive, because it is impossible to warn of all the
possible hazardous consequences that might result from failure to follow these instructions.
Introduction
The following manual has been prepared for effective
diagnosis of the MerCruiser Electronic Fuel Injection
system.
All information, illustrations and specifications contained in this manual are based on the latest product
information available at the time of publication approval. The right is reserved to make changes at any
time without notice.
An understanding of the material contained herein
and in subsequent publications issued when necessary, will assist service personnel in properly maintaining the quality to which MerCruiser engine control
systems are built.
A careful visual and physical inspection must be

performed as part of any diagnostic procedure.
This can often lead to fixing a problem without
further steps. Inspect all vacuum hoses for correct
routing, pinches, cuts, or disconnects. Be sure to inspect hoses that are difficult to see. Inspect all the
wires in the engine compartment for proper connections, burned or chafed spots, pinched wires, or contact with sharp edges or hot exhaust manifolds. This
visual/physical inspection is very important. It must
be done carefully and thoroughly.
Basic Knowledge and Tools Required

To use this manual most effectively, a general understanding of basic electrical circuits and circuit testing
tools is required. You should be familiar with wiring
diagrams; the meaning of volts, ohms and amperes;
the basic theories of electricity; and understand what
happens in an open or shorted wire. To perform system diagnosis, several special tools and equipment
are required. Please become acquainted with the
tools and their use before attempting to diagnose the
system. Special tools which are required for system
service are listed later in this section (see Table of
Contents).
Electrostatic Discharge Damage

Electronic components used in control systems are
often designed to carry very low voltage, and are very
susceptible to damage caused by electrostatic discharge. It is possible for less than 100 volts of static
electricity to cause damage to some electronic components. By comparison, it takes 4,000 volts for a
person to even feel the effect of a static discharge.
There are several ways for a person to become statically charged. The most common methods of charging are by friction and by induction. An example of
charging by friction is a person sliding across a seat,
in which a charge of as much as 25,000 volts can
build up. Charging by induction occurs when a person with well-insulated shoes stands near a highly
charged object and momentarily touches ground.
Charges of the same polarity are drained off, leaving
the person highly charged with the opposite polarity.
Static charges of either type can cause damage;
therefore, it is important to use care when handling
and testing electronic components.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Diagnostic Information
The diagnostic charts and functional checks in this
manual are designed to locate a faulty circuit or component through logic based on the process of elimination. The charts are prepared with the requirement that the system functioned correctly at the
time of assembly and that there are no multiple
failures.
Wiring Harness Service

Marine engine control circuits contain many special
design features not found in standard land vehicle
wiring. Environmental protection is used extensively
to protect electrical contacts and proper splicing
methods must be used when necessary.
The proper operation of low amperage input/output
circuits depends upon good continuity between circuit connectors. It is important before component replacement and/or during normal troubleshooting procedures that a visual inspection of any questionable
mating connector is performed. Mating surfaces
should be properly formed, clean and likely to make
proper contact. Some typical causes of connector
problems are listed below.
damaged. Always use jumper wires with the corresponding mating terminals between connectors for
circuit checking. NEVER probe through connector
seals, wire insulation, secondary ignition wires,
boots, nipples or covers.
Microscopic damage or holes will result in eventual
water intrusion, corrosion and/or component or circuit failure.
WIRE REPAIR
1. Locate damaged wire.
2. Remove insulation as required.
73048
3. Splice two wires together using splice clips and

rosin core solder.
73048
4. Cover splice with heat shrink sleeve to insulate

from other wires.
1. Improperly formed contacts and/or connector

housing.
2. Damaged contacts or housing due to improper
engagement.
3. Corrosion, sealer or other contaminants on the
contact mating surfaces.
4. Incomplete mating of the connector halves during initial assembly or during subsequent troubleshooting procedures.
5. Tendency for connectors to come apart due to
vibration and/or temperature cycling.
6. Terminals not fully seated in the connector body.
7. Inadequate terminal crimps to the wire.
Wire harnesses should be replaced with proper part
number harnesses. When signal wires are spliced
into a harness, use the same gauge wire with high
temperature insulation only.
With the low current and voltage levels found in the
system, it is important that the best possible bond be
made at all wire splices by soldering the splices, as
shown in the following illustrations. Use care when
probing a connector or replacing connector terminals. It is possible to short between opposite terminals. If this happens, certain components can be
73048
Wiring Connector Service

Most connectors in the engine compartment are protected against moisture and dirt which could create
oxidation and deposits on the terminals. This protection is important because of the very low voltage and
current levels found in the electronic system. The
connectors have a lock which secures the male and
female terminals together. A secondary lock holds
the seal and terminal into the connector.
When diagnosing, open circuits are often difficult to
locate by sight because oxidation or terminal misalignment are hidden by the connectors. Merely wiggling a connector on a sensor or in the wiring harness
may locate the open circuit condition. This should always be considered when an open circuit or failed
sensor is indicated. Intermittent problems may also
be caused by oxidized or loose connections.
Before making a connector repair, be certain of the
type of connector. Some connectors look similar but
are serviced differently. Replacement connectors
and terminals are listed in the Parts Catalog.
Ensure that the connector seals are not deformed or
crushed when mating the connectors together.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Abbreviations
BARO
Barometric Pressure
IGN
Ignition
BAT
Battery Positive Terminal, Battery or

System Voltage
INJ
Injection
kPa
Kilopascal
B+
Battery Positive
KS
Knock Sensor System
CKT
Circuit
KV
Kilovolts
CONN
Connector
MAP
CYL
Cylinder
Manifold Absolute
Pressure
DEG
Degrees
MIL
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
DIAG
Diagnostic
mSec
Millisecond
DIST
Distributor
N/C
Normally Closed
DLC
Data Link Connector
N/O
Normally Open
DTC
Diagnostic Trouble Code
PROM
Programmable Read Only Memory
DVOM
Digital Volt Ohm Meter
RAM
Random Access Memory
ECM
Engine Control Module
REF HI
Reference High
ECT
Engine Coolant
Temperature
REF LO
Reference Low
ROM
Read Only Memory
EEPROM
Electronic Erasable Programmable

Read Only Memory
SLV
Slave
HEI
High Energy Ignition
SW
Switch
EMI
Electromagnetic
Interference
TACH
Tachometer
TERM
Terminal
ENG
Engine
TP
Throttle Position
GND
Ground
Volts
GPH
Gallons Per Hour
VAC
Vacuum
IAC
Idle Air Control
WOT
Wide Open Throttle
IAT
Intake Air Temperature
in-hg
Inches Of Mercury
IC
Ignition Control
Index
90-823224--2 796
Changes In Terminology
Due to industry standardization of terminology for certain electronic engine controls some names and abbreviations have changed.
From
To
(CTS) Coolant Temperature Sensor
(ECT) Engine Coolant Temperature
(TPS) Throttle Position Sensor
(TP) Throttle Position
(MAT) Manifold Air Temperature
(IAT) Intake Air Temperature
(EST) Electronic Spark Timing
(IC) Ignition Control
(ESC) Electronic Spark Control
(KS) Knock Sensor
(ALDL) Assembly Line Data Link
(DLC) Data Link Connector
Diagnostic Trouble Codes

Code Number
Code Description
Code 12
Ignition On - Engine Not Running
Code 14
Code 21
(TP) Throttle Position Sensor
Code 23
Code 33
(MAP) Manifold Absolute Pressure
Code 42
Code 43
(KS) Knock Sensor
Code 51
Calibration Memory Failure
Index
90-823224--2 796
ECM Self-Diagnostics
The ECM performs a continual self-diagnosis on certain control functions. This diagnostic capability is
complemented by the diagnostic procedures contained in this manual. The ECMs language for communicating the source of a malfunction is a system of
diagnostic codes. The codes are two digit numbers
that can range from 12 to 51. When a malfunction is
detected by the ECM, a code is set and the Malfunction Indicator Lamp is illuminated.
Diagnostic Code Tool With

Malfunction Indicator Lamp
There are various manufacturers of Diagnostic Code
Tools. Most Tools are equipped with a Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL).
It informs the service technician that a problem

has occurred and that the vessel is in need of service as soon as reasonably possible.
It displays Codes stored by the ECM which help

the technician diagnose system problems.
An intermittent code may or may not reset. IF IT IS

AN INTERMITTENT FAILURE, A DIAGNOSTIC
CODE CHART IS NOT USED. Consult the Diagnostic Aids on the same page as the diagnostic code
chart. Troubleshooting also covers the topic of Intermittents. A physical inspection of the applicable
sub-system most often will resolve the problem.
Reading Codes
The provision for communicating with the ECM is the
Data Link Connector (DLC) connector. It is part of the
EFI engine wiring harness, and is a 10-pin connector,
which is electrically connected to the ECM. It is used
in the assembly plant to receive information in checking that the engine is operating properly before it
leaves the plant. The code(s) stored in the ECMs
memory can be read either through a scan tool, (a
diagnostic scanner that plugs into the DLC connector), or by counting the number of flashes of the Malfunction Indicator Lamp when the diagnostic code
tool is installed and SERVICE mode is selected.
As a bulb and system check, the lamp will come ON

with the key on and the engine not running. When the
engine is started, the light will turn OFF. If the lamp
remains ON, the self-diagnostic system has detected
a problem. If the problem goes away, the light will go
out in most cases after ten seconds, but a code will
remain stored in the ECM.
When the lamp remains ON while the engine is running, or when a malfunction is suspected due to a
driveability problem, EFI Diagnostic Circuit Check
must be performed. These checks will expose malfunctions which may not be detected if other diagnostics are performed prematurely.
Intermittent Malfunction Indicator

Lamp
In the case of an intermittent problem, the Malfunction Indicator Lamp will light for ten seconds and then
will go out. However, the corresponding code will be
stored in the memory of the ECM. When unexpected
codes appear during the code reading process, one
can assume that these codes were set by an intermittent malfunction and could be helpful in diagnosing
the system.
73053
DLC Connector
Once the diagnostic code tool has been connected,

the ignition switch must be moved to the ON position,
with the engine not running. At this point, the Malfunction Indicator Lamp should flash Code 12 three
times consecutively. This would be the following flash
sequence: flash, pause, flash-flash, long pause,
flash, pause, flash-flash, long pause, flash, pause,
flash-flash. Code 12 indicates that the ECMs diagnostic system is operating. If Code 12 is not indicated, a problem is present within the diagnostic system itself, and should be addressed by consulting the
appropriate diagnostic chart in Diagnostics.
Following the output of Code 12, the Malfunction Indicator Lamp will indicate a diagnostic code three times
if a code is present, or it will simply continue to output
Code 12. If more than one diagnostic code has been
stored in the ECMs memory, the codes will be output
from the lowest to the highest, with each code being
displayed three times.
Index
90-823224--2 796
If a scan tool is used to read the codes, follow the

manufacturers instructions.
SERVICE MODE
When the diagnostic code tool is installed at the Data
Link Connector (DLC) and the selector switch is set
at SERVICE, the system will enter what is called the
SERVICE mode. In this mode the ECM will:
1. Display a Code 12 by flashing the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (indicating the system is operating
correctly).
2. Display any stored codes by flashing the Malfunction Indicator Lamp. Each code will be
flashed three times, then Code 12 will be flashed
again.
EFI Diagnostic Circuit Check

After the visual/physical inspection, the EFI Diagnostic Circuit Check is the starting point for all diagnostic
procedures. Refer to EFI Diagnostic Circuit Check.
The correct procedure to diagnose a problem is to follow two basic steps.
1. Are the on-board diagnostics working? This is
determined by performing the EFI Diagnostic Circuit Check. Since this is the starting point for the
diagnostic procedures, always begin here. If the
on-board diagnostics are not working, the EFI
Diagnostic Circuit Check will lead to a diagnostic
chart in Diagnostics to correct the problem. If
the on-board diagnostics are working correctly,
go to step 2.
3. The IAC valve moves to its fully extended position, blocking the idle air passage. This is important to remember, as an attempt to run the vessel
while in SERVICE mode will most likely result in
an abnormally low idle speed or a stalled engine.
2. If there is a code stored: If a code is stored, go directly to the numbered code chart in Diagnostics. This will determine if the fault is still present.
4. Holds ignition advance steady.
Scan Tool Use with Intermittents
NORMAL MODE
Engines can be monitored in the normal mode. Certain parameters can be observed without changing
the engine operating characteristics.
Scan Tools
The ECM can communicate a variety of information
through the DLC connector. This data is transmitted
at a high frequency which requires a scan tool for interpretation.
With an understanding of the data which the tool displays, and knowledge of the circuits involved, the tool
can be very useful in obtaining information which
would be more difficult or impossible to obtain with
other equipment.
Scan tools do not make the use of diagnostic charts
unnecessary, nor can they indicate exactly where a
problem is in a particular circuit. Tree charts incorporate diagnosis procedures using a scan tool where
possible or a Diagnostic Code Tool (non-scan) if a
scan tool is unavailable.
The scan tool allows manipulation of wiring harnesses or components with the engine not running,
while observing the scan tool readout.
The scan tool can be plugged in and observed while
running the vessel under the condition when the Malfunction Indicator Lamp turns ON momentarily or
when the engine driveability is momentarily poor. If
the problem seems to be related to certain parameters that can be checked on the scan tool, they should
be checked while running the vessel. If there does
not seem to be any correlation between the problem
and any specific circuit, the scan tool can be checked
on each position, watching for a period of time to see
if there is any change in the readings that indicates
intermittent operation.
The scan tool is also an easy way to compare the operating parameters of a poorly operating engine with
those of a known good one. For example, a sensor
may shift in value but not set a trouble code. Comparing the senors readings with those of the typical scan
tool data readings may uncover the problem.
The scan tool has the ability to save time in diagnosis
and prevent the replacement of good parts. The key
to using the scan tool successfully for diagnosis lies
in the technicians ability to understand the system he
is trying to diagnose as well as an understanding of
the scan tool operation and limitations. The technician should read the tool manufacturers operating
manual to become familiar with the tools operation.
Index
90-823224--2 796
CLEARING CODES USING DIAGNOSTIC CODE

TOOL (NON-SCAN)
1. Install diagnostic code tool.
2. Turn key ON.
3. Select service mode on code tool.
4. To clear codes, move the throttle, while in neutral,
from 0% to 100% then back to 0%.
5. Exit Service Mode on code tool.
6. Start engine and let run for fifteen seconds.
7. Turn key OFF for 5 seconds.
8. Select Service Mode on code tool.
9. Turn key ON and read codes. If codes are still
present, check note following and repeat from
Step 1.
10. Refer to appropriate Troubleshooting and/or
Diagnostic Charts
A poorly charged battery or engine cranking problem
may result in an ECM reset and may not allow
stored trouble codes to be cleared from EEPROM
memory. If this condition exists, BE SURE the battery
is fully charged.
NOTE: If a low battery condition does exists the audio warning buzzer will come on for 2 seconds after
engine start-up.
CLEARING CODES USING SCAN TOOL (SCAN)
1. Connect scan tool.
2. Start engine.
3. Select clear codes function.
4. Clear codes.
5. Turn key OFF.
present, (there is a real fault in system) check following note and repeat Step 1.
NOTE: When clearing codes without the use of a

scan tool, the battery must be fully charged. The ability to clear codes is directly dependent on the battery
being fully charged and able to start the engine with
adequate cranking RPM.
Non-Scan Diagnosis of Driveability

Concerns (With No Codes Set)
If a driveability concern still exists after following the
diagnostic circuit check and reviewing Troubleshooting, an out-of-range sensor may be suspected. Because of the unique design of the EFI system, fail-safes have been incorporated into the ECM
to replace a sensed value with a default value in the
case of a sensor malfunction or sensor wiring concern. By allowing this to occur, limited engine performance is restored until the vessel is repaired. A basic
understanding of sensor operation is necessary in order to diagnose an out-of-range sensor.
If the sensor is within its working or acceptable parameters, as shown, the ECM does not detect a problem. If the sensor should happen to fall out of this
window, a code will be stored. A known default value will replace the sensed value to restore engine
performance.
If the sensor is out of range, but still within the operating window of the ECM, the problem will go undetected by the ECM and may result in trouble later.
A good example of this would be if the coolant sensor
was reading incorrectly and indicating to the ECM
that coolant temperature was at 20 F, but actual
coolant temperature was 175 F. This would cause
the ECM to deliver more fuel than was actually needed and result in an overly rich, rough running condition. This condition would not have caused a code to
set as the ECM interprets this as within its range.
To identify a sensor which is out of range, unplug it
while running the engine. After approximately two
minutes, the diagnostic code for that sensor will set,
a code, and replace the sensed value with a default
value. If at that point a noticeable performance increase is observed, the non-scan code chart for that
particular sensor should be followed to correct the
problem.
NOTE: Be sure to clear each code after disconnecting and reconnecting each sensor. Failure to do so
may result in a misdiagnosis of the problem.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Special Tools
Part Number
Tool Name
Description
J-34029-A(Note 1)
High Impedance Multimeter (DVM)
Minimum 10 megohm input impedance required on

all voltage ranges. As ammeter, accurately measures low value current flow. As ohmmeter, reads
0-200 ohms, 2/20/200 k, 2/20 m
J-23738
Vacuum Pump with

Gauge - 20 In. Hg
Minimum
Gauge monitors manifold engine vacuum. Hand

pump used to check fuel pressure regulator
J-34142-B (Note 2)
Unpowered Test Light
Used to check circuit wiring, short to ground, or voltage.
91-99379
Timing Light
Used to check ignition timing. Must have inductive

signal pickup.
91-16850A-1
Fuel Pressure Gauge
Used to check fuel system pressure.
J-34730-2A
Injector Harness Test

Light
Visually indicates injector electrical impulses from

the ECM.
91-823686A2
Quicksilver Scan Tool
84-822560A2
MERCRUISER Cable
91-822608--1
MERCRUISER Cartridge
94040M
EFI Scan Tool/Injector

Tester
(Rinda Technologies)
Displays problem codes stored in the ECM. It also

allows monitoring of various circuits and components in the fuel injection system. Allows for test firing injectors.
94008
Diagnostic Code Tool

(Rinda Technologies)
Flashes light to display problem codes
J-35616
Harness Test Adapter
Allows multi-meter connections with wiring harness.
91-805918
Fuel Shut Off Tool
Used to perform fuel system pressure tests
91-805747A1
Timing Tool Jumper Plug
Used to set Ignition timing. Plug connects to DLC
91-806901
Fuel Line Connector
Allows connection of Fuel Pressure Gauge
Displays problem codes stored in the ECM. It also

allows monitoring of various circuits and components in the fuel injection system
system.
NOTE 1: The High Impedance Multimeter that comes with the existing Outboard EFI Tester (91-11001A1) meets
the requirements listed above.
NOTE 2: Using a test light with 100 mA or less rating may show a faint glow when test actually states no light.
Rinda Technologies
Kent-Moore Tools, Inc.
4563 N. Elston Ave.
29784 Little Mack
Chicago, IL 60630
Roseville, MI 48066
Phone: 312-736-6633
Phone: 800-345-2233
Index
90-823224--2 796
Service Precautions
The following requirements must be observed:
1. Before removing any ECM system component,
disconnect the negative battery cable.
(such as the high impedance digital multimeter)

in series with the test light being tested, and power the test light ammeter circuit with the vehicle
battery.
2. Never start the engine without the battery being

solidly connected.
3. Never separate the battery from the on-board
electrical system while the engine is running.
4. Never separate the battery feed wire from the
charging system while the engine is running.
5. When charging the battery, disconnect it from the
boats electrical system.
6. Ensure that all cable harnesses are connected
solidly and that battery connections are thoroughly clean.
7. Never connect or disconnect the wiring harness
at the ECM when the ignition is switched ON.
a
b
8. Before attempting any electric arc welding, disconnect the battery leads and the ECM connector(s).
9. When steam cleaning engines, do not direct the
steam cleaning nozzle at ECM system components. If this happens, corrosion of the terminals
or damage of components can take place.
10. Use only the test equipment specified in the diagnostic charts, since other test equipment may either give incorrect results or damage good components.
11. All voltage measurements using a voltmeter require a digital voltmeter with a rating of 10 megohms input impedance.
12. When a test light is specified, a low-power test
light must be used. DO NOT use a high-wattage
test light. While a particular brand of test light is
not suggested, a simple test, as shown below, on
any test light will ensure it to be safe for system
circuit testing. Connect an accurate ammeter
a - Test Light
b - Battery
IMPORTANT: If the ammeter indicates LESS than

3/10 amp. current flow (.3 A or 300 mA), the test light
is SAFE to use.
If the ammeter indicates MORE than 3/10 amp. current flow (.3 A or 300 mA), the test light is NOT SAFE
to use.
NOTE: Using a test light with 100 mA or less rating

may show a faint glow when test actually states no
light.
13. When using a DVOM to perform voltage measurements, turn the ignition OFF when connecting the DVOM to the circuitry to be tested.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Electronic Control Module

(ECM) and Sensors
General Description
The MerCruiser Electronic Fuel Injection system is
equipped with a computer that provides the operator
with state-of-the-art control of fuel and spark delivery.
Computers use voltage to send and receive information.
THREE-WIRE SENSORS (MAP AND TP)

The following figure shows a schematic representation of a 3-wire sensor. All 3-wire sensors have a reference voltage, a ground and a variable wiper. The
lead coming off of the wiper will be the signal to the
Engine Control Module (ECM). As this wiper position
changes, the signal voltage returned to the computer
also changes.
Computers and Voltage Signals

Voltage is electrical pressure. Voltage does not flow
in circuits. Instead, voltage causes current. Current
does the real work in electrical circuits. It is current,
the flow of electrically charged particles, that energizes solenoids, closes relays and lights lamps.
Besides causing currents in circuits, voltage can be
used as a signal. Voltage signals can send information by changing levels, changing waveform (shape),
or changing the speed at which the signal switches
from one level to another. Computers use voltage
signals to communicate with one another. The different sections inside computers also use voltage signals to communicate with each other.
There are two kinds of voltage signals, analog and
digital. Both of these are used in computer systems.
Its important to understand the difference between
them and the different ways they are used.
3-Wire Sensor
TWO-WIRE SENSORS (ECT AND IAT)
The following figure is the schematic of a 2-wire type
sensor. This sensor is basically a variable resistor in
series with a fixed-known resistor within the computer. By knowing the values of the input voltage and the
voltage drop across the known resistor, the value of
the variable resistor can be determined. The variable
resistors that are commonly used are called thermistors. A thermistors resistance varies inversely with
temperature.
Analog Signals
An analog signal is continuously variable. This
means that the signal can be any voltage within a certain range. An analog signal usually gives information about a condition that changes continuously over
a certain range. For example, in a marine engine,
temperature is usually provided by an analog signal.
There are two general types of sensors that produce
analog signals: the 3-wire and the 2-wire sensor.
2-Wire Sensor
Index
90-823224--2 796
Digital Signals
SWITCH TYPES
Digital signals are also variable, but not continuously.

They can only be represented by distinct voltages
within a range. For example, 1 V, 2 V or 3 V would be
allowed, but 1.27 V or 2.65 V would not. Digital signals are especially useful when the information can
only refer to two conditions - YES and NO, ON
and OFF, or High and Low. This would be called
a digital binary signal. A digital binary signal is limited
to two voltage levels. One level is a positive voltage,
the other is no voltage (zero volts). As you can see
in the following figure, a digital binary signal is a
square wave.
Switched inputs (also known as discretes) to the

computer can cause one bit to change, resulting in information being communicated to the computer.
Switched inputs can come in two types: they are
pull-up and pull-down types. Both types will be
discussed.
With a pull-up type switch, the ECM will sense a voltage when the switch is CLOSED. With the pull-down
switch, the ECM recognizes the voltage when the
switch is OPEN.
Discretes can also be used to inform a computer of
FREQUENCY information.
PULSE COUNTERS
HI
LO
For the computer to determine frequency information

from a switched input, the computer must measure
the time between voltage pulses. As a number of
pulses are recorded in a set amount of time, the computer can calculate the frequency. The meaning of
the frequency number can have any number of
meanings to the computer.
YES
ON
OFF
NO
Digital Binary Signal
The computer uses digital signals in a code that contains only ones and zeros. The high voltage of the
digital signal represents a one (1), and no voltage
represents a zero (0). Each zero and each one is
called a bit of information, or just a bit. Eight bits together are called a word. A word, therefore, contains some combination of eight binary code bits:
eight ones, eight zeros, five ones and three zeros,
and so on.
Binary code is used inside a computer and between
a computer and any electronic device that understands the code. By stringing together thousands of
bits, computers can communicate and store an infinite variety of information. To a computer that understands binary, 11001011 might mean that it should reset engine RPM at a lower level. Although the
computer uses 8-bit digital codes internally and when
talking to another computer, each bit can have a
meaning.
An example of a pulse counter type of input is the distributor reference pulse input. The computer can
count a train of pulses, a given number of pulses per
engine revolution, and determine the RPM of the engine.
Engine Control Module (ECM)

The Engine Control Module (ECM) is the control center of the fuel injection system. It constantly monitors
information from various sensors, and controls the
systems that affect engine performance.
The ECM also performs a diagnostic function check
of the system. It can recognize operational problems
and store a code or codes which identify the problem
areas to aid the technician in making repairs.
72801
Index
90-823224--2 796
ECM FUNCTION
SPEED
The ECM supplies 5 or 12 volts to power various sensors or switches. This is done through resistances in
the ECM which are so high in value that a test light
will not light when connected to the circuit. In some
cases, even an ordinary shop voltmeter will not give
an accurate reading because its resistance is too low.
Therefore, the use of a 10 megohm input impedance digital voltmeter is required to assure accurate voltage readings.
The engine speed signal comes from the distributors

High Energy Ignition (HEI) module to the ECM on the
distributor reference high circuit. The ECM uses this
information to determine the speed or RPM factor
for fuel and ignition management.
MEMORY
There are three types of memory storage within the
ECM: ROM, RAM and EEPROM.
ROM
Read Only Memory (ROM) is a permanent memory
that is physically soldered to the circuit boards within
the ECM. The ROM contains the overall control programs. Once the ROM is programmed, it cannot be
changed. The ROM memory is non-erasable, and
does not need power to be retained.
RAM
Random Access Memory (RAM) is the microprocessor scratch pad. The processor can write into, or
read from, this memory as needed. This memory is
erasable and needs a constant supply of voltage to
be retained.
EEPROM
Electronic Erasable Programmable Read Only
Memory (EEPROM) is the portion of the ECM that
contains the different engine calibration information
that is specific to each marine application.
Speed Density System
DENSITY
Two sensors contribute to the density factor, the Intake Air Temperature (IAT) [Multi-Port models only]
and the Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensors.
The IAT sensor is a 2-wire sensor that measures the
temperature of the air entering the intake manifold.
The IAT sensor is a thermistor that changes its resistance depending on the air temperature. When the
temperature is low, the resistance is high, and when
the temperature is high, the resistance is low.
The Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor is a
3-wire sensor that monitors the changes in intake
manifold pressure which results from changes in engine loads. These pressure changes are supplied to
the ECM in the form of electrical signals.
As intake manifold pressure increases (vacuum decreases), the air density in the intake manifold also
increases, and additional fuel is required.
The MAP sensor sends this pressure information to
the ECM, and the ECM increases the amount of fuel
injected by increasing the injector pulse width. As
manifold pressure decreases (vacuum increases),
the amount of fuel is decreased.
These three inputs MAP, IAT and RPM are the major
determinants of the air/fuel mixture, delivered by the
fuel injection system.
The remaining sensors and switches provide electrical inputs to the ECM which are used for modification
of the air/fuel mixture, as well as for other ECM control functions, such as Idle Air Control (IAC).
The Electronic Fuel Injection system is a speed and

air density system. The system is based on speed/
density fuel management.
Three specific data sensors provide the ECM with the
basic information for the fuel management portion of
its operation. That is, three specific signals to the
ECM establish the engine speed and air density factors.
Index
90-823224--2 796
ECM Input and Sensor Descriptions

The following lists the sensors, switches, and other inputs used by the ECM to control its various systems. Although we will not cover them all in great detail, there will be a brief description of each.
DISCRETE SWITCHES
(AUDIO WARNING)
KNOCK
MODULE
SYSTEM
RELAY
DIST.
FOR
REF RPM
TP
KNOCK
SENSOR
MAP
ECT
IAT (MULTI-PORT
MODELS ONLY)
INPUTS
ECM
OUTPUTS
FUEL
PUMP
RELAY
FUEL
PUMP
IGNITION
CONTROL
MODULE
IAC
MOTOR
FUEL
INJECTORS
AUDIO
WARNING
BUZZER
SERIAL
DATA
Index
90-823224--2 796
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT)

SENSOR
The Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor is a
thermistor (a resistor which changes value based on
temperature) immersed in the engine coolant
stream. Low coolant temperature produces a high resistance, while high temperature causes low resistance.
The ECM supplies a 5 volt signal to the sensor

through a resistor in the ECM and measures the voltage. The voltage will be high when the intake air is
cold, and low when the intake manifold air is hot.
A failure in the IAT sensor circuit should set a Code
23.
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP)
SENSOR
The Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor is a
pressure transducer that measures the changes in
the intake manifold pressure. The pressure changes
as a result of engine load and speed change, and the
MAP sensor converts this to a voltage output.
73052
c
a - Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
b - Harness Connector
c - Locking Tab
The ECM supplies a 5 volt signal to the ECT through

a resistor in the ECM and measures the voltage. The
voltage will be high when the engine is cold, and low
when the engine is hot. By measuring the voltage, the
ECM knows the engine coolant temperature. Engine
coolant temperature affects most systems the ECM
controls.
A failure in the ECT circuit should set Code 14. Remember, this code indicates a failure in the coolant
temperature sensor circuit, so proper use of the chart
will lead to either repairing a wiring problem or replacing the sensor.
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT) SENSOR
[MULTI-PORT INJECTION MODELS ONLY]
The Intake Air Temperature (IAT) sensor is a thermistor (a resistor which changes value based on temperature) mounted on the underside of the plenum. Low
temperature produces a high resistance, while high
temperature causes a low resistance.
c
b
a
73047
a - Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor

b - Harness Connector
c - Locking Tab
b
73046
a - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor

b - Electrical Connector
A closed throttle on engine coast-down would produce a relatively low MAP output voltage, while a
wide open throttle would produce a high MAP output
voltage. This high output voltage is produced because the pressure inside the manifold is the same
as outside the manifold, so 100% of outside air pressure is measured. When manifold pressure is high,
vacuum is low. The MAP sensor is also used to measure barometric pressure under certain conditions,
which allows the ECM to automatically adjust for different altitudes.
The ECM sends a 5 volt reference signal to the MAP
sensor. As the manifold pressure changes, the electrical resistance of the MAP sensor also changes. By
monitoring the sensor output voltage, the ECM
knows the manifold pressure. A higher pressure, low
vacuum (high voltage) requires more fuel, while a
lower pressure, higher vacuum (low voltage) requires less fuel. The ECM uses the MAP sensor to
control fuel delivery and ignition timing.
A failure in the MAP sensor circuit should set a Code
33.
Index
90-823224--2 796
KNOCK SENSOR
The knock sensor is mounted on the lower right side
of the engine block.
73051
When abnormal engine vibrations (spark knock) are

present, the sensor produces a voltage signal which
is sent to the KS Module and then to the ECM. The
ECM uses this signal to aid in calculating ignition timing.
It is extremely important that the correct KS sensor

and module be used for the engine application. Using
an incorrect KS module will result in unrecognized
spark knock and engine damage. The KS module terminal B is powered by 12 volts from the ignition
switch thru system relay. If the 12 volt power source
is not present, the KS module cannot send an 8-10
volt signal to the ECM and a false constant spark retard will result. A code 43 will be set.
Terminal E of the KS module is the signal line from the
knock sensor. If this circuit opens or shorts to ground,
the KS module will never remove the 8-10 volt signal
from terminal C to the ECM and no spark retard will
occur. The ground circuit for the KS module is connected to terminal D. If the ground circuit opens, the
KS module will not be able to remove the 8-10 volt
signal to the ECM and spark knock cannot be controlled.
On certain models (serial number OF417516 and
below), the ECM will do a self test when the following
conditions are reached:
Engine temperature above 150 F (66 C).
Engine RPM above 4000 RPM.
5.024 Hg in. (80 kPa) manifold pressure
KNOCK SENSOR (KS) MODULE
THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR
The KS module contains solid state circuitry which

monitors the knock sensors AC voltage signal and
then supplies an 8-10 volt signal, if no spark knock is
present, to the ECM. If spark knock is present, the KS
module will remove the 8-10 volt signal to the ECM.
The Throttle Position (TP) Sensor is a potentiometer

connected to the throttle shaft on the throttle body.
The TP has one end connected to 5 volts from the
ECM and the other to ECM ground. A third wire is
connected to the ECM to measure the voltage from
the TP. As the throttle valve angle is changed, the
voltage output of the TP also changes. At a closed
throttle position, the voltage output of the TP is low
(approximately .5 volt). As the throttle valve opens,
the output increases so that at wide-open-throttle
(W.O.T.), the output voltage should be near 4.5 volts.
By monitoring the output voltage from the TP, the
ECM can determine fuel delivery based on throttle
valve angle (driver demand). A broken or loose TP
can cause intermittent bursts of fuel from the injector
and an unstable idle, because the ECM thinks the
throttle is moving.
b
c
a
e
d
Knock Sensor System
a
b
c
d
e

12 Volts Battery Positive
8-12 Volts
Knock Sensor
Knock Sensor Module
73049
Index
90-823224--2 796
If the TP circuit is open, the ECM will set a Code 21.

If the TP circuit is shorted, and a trouble Code 21 will
be set. A problem in any of the TP circuits will set a
Code 21. Once a trouble code is set, the ECM will use
a default value for TP.
DISTRIBUTOR REFERENCE (DIST REF)
The distributor reference (engine speed signal) is
supplied to the ECM by way of the Dist Ref Hi line
from the High Energy Ignition (HEI). This pulse
counter type input creates the timing signal for the
pulsing of the fuel injectors, as well as the Ignition
Control (IC) functions. This signal is used for a number of control and testing functions within the ECM.
DISCRETE SWITCH INPUTS - POWER
REDUCTION MODE
(1996 AND OLDER MODELS)
Several discrete switch inputs are utilized by the system to identify abnormal conditions that may affect
engine operation. Pull-down switches are used in
conjunction with the ECM to detect critical conditions
to engine operation.
Switches which are used with the Fuel Injection system to detect critical engine operation parameters
are:
Switch
Normal State
Oil Pressure
N/O
I/O Fluid Level on Stern

Drive
N/O
Transmission Temperature
on MIE Models
N/O
Engine Coolant Temperature
N/O
IMPORTANT: Models equipped with multiple engines must use dual engine data link kit and common ground between engine blocks. Otherwise
there will be no serial data communication between engines and the power reduction mode
will not control both engines.
Triple (three) engine applications should connect

the outboard engines.
Quad (four) engine applications Should link the

outer two outboard engines with one link and the
two inboard engines with another link.
If a switch changes state from its normal at rest position, that is normally open to closed, the ECM senses
a change in voltage and responds by entering power
reduction mode.
This engine protection feature allows the operator full
engine power up to 2800 RPM, but disables half of
the fuel injectors above 2800 RPM until the engine
RPM drops to 1200 RPMS.
This feature allows the operator a comfortable maneuvering speed while removing the possibility of
high RPM engine operation until the problem is corrected.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Index
90-823224--2 796
Spark Management
High Energy Ignition with Ignition
Control (IC)
The Electronic Fuel Injection is controlled by an Engine Control Module (ECM). This module is the
nerve/decision center of the system. It uses all the information it gathers to manage ignition spark, delivering increased fuel economy and maximum engine
performance.
The system uses inputs from sensors to make decisions on the amount of spark advance or retard allowed.
The system has been designed to control ignition advance and retard electronically by the ECM.
In order for the ECM to properly calculate spark advance, it must always know at what speed the engine
is running. The engine speed signal is accomplished
by a circuit within the distributor module which converts the pickup coil voltage to a square wave reference signal that can be used by the ECM. This
square wave engine speed reference signal is known
as REF HI. The ECM must also have something to
compare the REF HI value against. Therefore, an
additional line is provided between the ECM and the
distributor module that is known as REF LO. These
two lines, between the ECM and the distributor, provide a precise indication of engine speed.
The two other lines between the ECM and distributor
which control the Ignition Control (IC) operation are
known as the bypass and IC circuits.
Modes Of Operation
There are two modes of ignition system operation:
DISTRIBUTOR MODULE MODE
The ignition system operates independent of the
ECM. The distributor module module in the distributor maintains a base ignition timing and is able to advance timing to a total of 27 degrees. This mode is in
control when a Code 42 is detected while engine is
running and will have a noticeable affect on engine
operation.
ECM CONTROL MODE
The ECM control mode controls the ignition timing.
The ECM calculates the desired ignition timing based
on information it gets from its input sensors.
Distributor Module Mode

The following describes IC operation during cranking
and when the engine starts running. To help understand how IC circuits operate, a relay with a double
set of contact points is shown in the IC module (refer
to the figures Ignition Control Mode and ECM Control Mode). Solid state circuitry is used in the module,
but showing the relay makes it easier to visualize how
the IC module functions.
During cranking, the relay is in the de-energized position (see figure Distributor Module Mode). This connects the pickup coil to the base of the transistor via
the signal converter. When the pickup coil applies a
positive voltage to the transistor, the transistor turns
ON. When voltage is removed, the transistor turns
OFF. When the transistor turns ON, current flows
through the primary winding of the ignition coil. When
it turns OFF, the primary current stops and a spark is
developed at the spark plug. A small amount of advance is built into the IC module via a timing circuit,
in case the engine remains in the ignition module timing mode.
With the relay de-energized, a set of contacts (shown
closed) would ground the IC line signal.
ECM Control Mode

When the engine RPM reaches a predetermined value (for this example, 300 RPM), the ECM considers
the engine running and applies five volts on the bypass line to the IC module. This energizes the relay
and causes the contacts from the pickup coil as well
as the grounding contacts for the IC line to open (see
figure ECM Control Mode). This connects the IC
line to the base of the transistor, and bypasses the
ignition module timing control.
The IC system is now controlled by the IC signal from
the ECM and the time at which the spark occurs can
be determined by a variable time circuit in the ECM.
Base Ignition Timing

In order to check or change base timing on a HEI system the ECM has to be entered into the service mode
by using a scan tool or code tool. The IC module will
go to base timing. The ECM will stabilize timing to allow timing adjustment. The ECM incorporates a
spark control override, which allows timing to be lowered if spark knock (detonation) is encountered during normal operation. At this time, the timing can be
adjusted by turning the distributor.
Index
90-823224--2 796
TRANSISTOR
BASE
MODULE
ADVANCE
IC
Distributor Module Mode
Module
Advance
IC
ECM Control Mode
Index
90-823224--2 796
Results of Incorrect Operation

Open IC Line from the ECM to the Distributor
Module - While the engine is cranking, the ECM expects to see the IC signal pulled to virtually zero because it is grounded in the distributor module. Since
the IC line is open, it cannot be grounded by the module and the IC signal will be able to rise and fall, or do
what is called toggling. The ECM recognizes the toggling as an abnormal condition, and will not apply bypass voltage to the distributor module when the engine reaches run RPM.
Since bypass voltage is not applied to the relay, it remains open and the engine continues to run on the
pickup coil triggering in the ignition module timing
mode.
If this condition occurs while the engine is running,
the engine will stop, but it will restart and run in the
ignition module timing mode with reduced power.
Grounded IC Line - During cranking, the IC voltage
is at virtually zero so the ECM does not recognize a
problem. When engine RPM reaches the value for
the run condition, the ECM applies bypass voltage to
the distributor module. Bypass voltage on the module
switches the distributor power transistor to the IC
line. Because the IC line is grounded, it will have no
voltage applied so it cannot operate the power transistor to enter the IC mode.
If the IC line becomes grounded while the engine is
being operated, the engine will stop and will be difficult to restart.
An open or ground in the IC or bypass will cause the
engine to run on the distributor module timing. This
will cause reduced performance, poor fuel economy
and erratic idle.
Grounded or Open Bypass Line - While the engine
is cranking, the IC line will be grounded and the ECM
will not notice anything abnormal. When run RPM is
reached, the ECM applies bypass voltage to the bypass line but because of the ground or open, it will not
be able to energize the relay. Therefore, the relay will
stay de-energized and the IC line will remain
grounded.
When the ECM sees the IC line not toggling, it will not
enter the IC mode. Since the relay is de-energized,
the engine will continue to run in the ignition module
timing mode.
Open or Grounded REF HI Line - This line provides

the ECM with engine speed information. If this line is
open or grounded, the ECM will not know that the engine is cranking or running and will not run.
Open or Grounded REF LO Line - This wire is
grounded in the ignition module and provides a reference ground from the ignition module to the ECM.
The ECM compares reference ground with reference
high voltage. If this circuit is open, or grounded at any
other location than through the module, it may cause
poor performance.
Fuel Metering System

General Description
The function of the fuel metering system is to deliver
the correct amount of fuel to the engine under all operating conditions.
Multi-Port Injection, fuel is delivered to the engine
by individual fuel injectors mounted in the intake
manifold near each cylinder.
Throttle Body Injection, fuel is delivered from two
injectors mounted atop the intake manifold.
Modes of Operation
The ECM looks at voltages from several sensors to
determine how much fuel to give the engine. The fuel
is delivered under one of several conditions, called
modes. All the modes are controlled by the ECM and
are described below.
STARTING MODE
When the ignition switch is turned to the crank position, the ECM turns ON the fuel pump relay and the
fuel pump builds up pressure. The ECM then checks
the Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor and
Throttle Position (TP) sensor and determines the
proper air/fuel ratio for starting. The ECM controls the
amount of fuel delivered in the starting mode by
changing how long the injectors are turned ON and
OFF. This is done by pulsing the injectors for very
short times.
If this condition occurs while the engine is running,

the engine will simply operate in the ignition module
timing mode.
Index
90-823224--2 796
CLEAR FLOOD MODE

If the engine floods, it can be cleared by opening the
throttle half way (50%). (Open throttle handle until resistance from secondary throttle [Multi-Port only] is
felt.) The ECM discontinues fuel injector pulsation as
long as the throttle is between 50 to 75 % and the engine RPM is below 300. If the throttle position becomes more than 75% or less than 50%, the ECM returns to the starting mode.
POWER REDUCTION MODE

(1996 AND OLDER MODELS)
The ECM will go into power reduction mode when the
following conditions are met:
1. Low oil pressure
2. Engine overheat
3. Low I/O fluid level (MCM)
4. High transmission temperature (MIE)
RUN MODE
When the engine is started and RPM is above 300,
the system operates in the run mode. The ECM will
calculate the desired air/fuel ratio based on these
ECM inputs: RPM, Manifold Absolute Pressure
(MAP) sensor, Intake Air Temperature (IAT) sensor
and Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor .
Higher engine load (from MAP) and colder engine
temperature (from ECT) requires more fuel, or a richer air/fuel ratio.
ACCELERATION MODE
The ECM looks at rapid changes in Throttle Position
(TP) and provides extra fuel by increasing the injector
pulse width.
FUEL CUTOFF MODE
The ECM recognizes change of state in a discrete

switch input that identifies an abnormal condition that
may affect proper drive train operation.
As an engine protection feature, power reduction
mode allows normal fuel injection up to 2800 RPM.
Above 2800 RPM, fuel delivery is limited to half of the
injectors until RPM lowers to 1200 RPM when normal
fuel injection resumes.
This feature maintains maneuverability of the vessel
while removing the possibility of high RPM operation
until the problem is corrected.
DECELERATION MODE
The IAC is similar to a carburetor dashpot. It provides
additional air when the throttle is rapidly moved to the
idle position to prevent the engine from dying.
No fuel is delivered by the injectors when the ignition

is OFF, to prevent dieseling. Also, fuel pulses are not
delivered if the ECM receives no distributor reference
pulses, which means the engine is not running. The
fuel cutoff mode is also enabled at high engine RPM,
as an overspeed protection for the engine. When cutoff is in effect due to high RPM, injection pulses will
resume after engine RPM drops slightly.
Index
90-823224--2 796
FUEL SUPPLY COMPONENTS

Components
Multi-Port Vapor Separator Tank
(VST)
The fuel metering system is made up of the following
components:
Fuel supply components (fuel tank, mechanical

pump, lines, etc.).
Vapor Separator Tank (VST).
Fuel pump electrical circuit.
Fuel rail assembly, including:
Fuel is drawn from the boats fuel supply tank,

through a water separating fuel filter, by a mechanical
fuel pump mounted on and driven by a seawater
pump, and is delivered to the Vapor Separator Tank
(VST).
VAPOR SEPARATOR TANK (VST)
An electric fuel pump located in the VST pumps fuel
to the fuel rail assembly. The pump is designed to
provide fuel at a pressure greater than that required
by the injectors. The pressure regulator, part of the
fuel rail assembly, regulates fuel pressure to the fuel
injectors. Unused fuel is returned to the VST.
NOTE: MCM 454 Magnum Multi-Port with serial

number (0F130438) and MCM 502 Magnum MultiPort with serial number (0F128962) and higher will
be equipped with fuel lines as shown in figure A. Fuel
line shown in figure B is a replacement line per Service Bulletin 93-26. If VST does not have style A or
B refer to to this service bulletin.
Fuel injectors.
Pressure regulator assembly.
b
a
d
f
e
h
ENGINE
g
73054

a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
Mechanical Fuel Pump

Electronic Control Module
Network Of Engine Sensors
Fuel Rail Assembly
Fuel Tank
73797
Index
90-823224--2 796
FUEL FLOW DIAGRAM
Cool Fuel System

The Cool Fuel System consists of an electrical fuel
pump, water separating fuel filter and port mounted
fuel cooler.
Fuel is drawn from the boat fuel tank through a water
separating fuel filter by an electric fuel pump then
through fuel cooler. Fuel is fed to fuel injectors in the
throttle body (or fuel rail on multi-port injection system). Excess fuel is routed back to water separating
fuel filter from the pressure regulator mounted on the
fuel cooler.
b
c
g
74871
e
Throttle Body Injection System (Typical)
a - Vacuum Line To Flame Arrestor (Throttle Body Injection)
Or Fuel Rail (Multi-Port Injection)
b - Fuel Pressure Regulator
c - Fuel Cooler
d - Electric Fuel Pump
e - Water Separating Fuel Filter
f - Fuel From Tank
g - Direction Of Water Flow
h - Fuel Line To Fuel Pump
i - Fuel Line To Throttle Body (Throttle Body Injection) Or Fuel
Rail (Multi-Port Injection)
j - Excess Fuel Return To Water Separating Fuel Filter
Index
90-823224--2 796
Throttle Body Injection Components
THROTTLE BODY UNIT EXPLODED VIEW
FUEL PUMP ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

When the ignition switch is turned to the RUN position, the ECM will turn ON the fuel pump relay for two
seconds.
When the ignition switch is turned to the crank position, the ECM turns the fuel pump relay ON causing
the fuel pump to start.
If the ECM does not receive ignition reference pulses

(engine cranking or running), it shuts Off the fuel
pump relay, causing the fuel pump to stop.
THROTTLE BODY UNIT

The throttle body unit consists of three assemblies.
Fuel meter cover and fuel damper
Fuel meter body and fuel injectors

Throttle Body
-Two Throttle Valves To Control Air Flow
Into The Engine
-Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve
-Throttle Position (Tp) Sensor
73766
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
Throttle Body
Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve
Fuel Meter Cover
Fuel Damper
Fuel Meter Body
Fuel Injector (2)
Index
90-823224--2 796
FUEL INJECTORS
IDLE AIR CONTROL (IAC) VALVE
The injector assembly is a solenoid operated device,

controlled by the ECM, that meters pressurized fuel
to the intake manifold. The ECM energizes the injector solenoid, which opens a ball valve, allowing fuel
to flow past the ball valve, and through a recessed
flow director plate.
The purpose of the IAC valve assembly is to control

engine idle speed, while preventing stalls due to
changes in engine load. The IAC valve, mounted in
the throttle body, controls bypass air around the
throttle valves.
The director plate has six machined holes that control

the fuel flow, generating a conical spray pattern of
finely atomized fuel at the injector tip. Fuel is directed
at the throttle, causing it to become further atomized
before entering the intake manifold.
72800
a
b
c
73773
a
b
c
d
Fuel Injector
Fuel Filter
Seal Ring
Fuel Meter Body
IAC Valve Air Flow Diagram
FUEL DAMPER
The fuel damper acts as an equalization device to reduce the pressure spikes caused by the fuel injectors.
73766
Throttle Body Injection Shown

a - Fuel Damper
Index
90-823224--2 796
By moving a conical valve known as a pintle, IN, toward the seat (to decrease air flow), or OUT, away
from the seat (to increase air flow), a controlled
amount of air moves around the throttle valve. If RPM
is too low, more air is bypassed around the throttle
valve to increase it. If RPM is too high, less air is bypassed around the throttle valve to decrease it.
Multi-Port Injection Components
The ECM moves the IAC valve in small steps, called

counts. These can be measured by scan tool test
equipment, which plugs into the DLC.
When the ignition switch is turned to the crank position, the ECM turns the fuel pump relay ON causing
the fuel pump to start.
During idle, the proper position of the IAC valve is

based on engine RPM. If the RPM drops below specification and the throttle valve is closed, the ECM
senses a near stall condition and calculates a new
valve position to prevent stalling.
If the ECM does not receive ignition reference pulses

(engine cranking or running), it shuts OFF the fuel
pump relay, causing the fuel pump to stop.
Engine idle speed is a function of total air flow into

the engine based on IAC valve pintle position +
throttle valve stop screws and PCV.
Controlled idle speed is programmed into the

ECM, which determines the correct IAC valve
pintle position to maintain the desired idle speed
for all engine operating conditions and loads.
The fuel rail performs several functions. It positions

the injectors in the intake manifold, distributes fuel
evenly to the injectors, and integrates the fuel pressure regulator into the fuel metering system.
The minimum idle air rate is set at the factory with

stop screws. This setting allows enough air flow
by the throttle valves to cause the IAC valve pintle
to be positioned a calibrated number of steps
(counts) from the seat during controlled idle operation.
FUEL PUMP ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT

When the ignition switch is turned to the RUN position, the ECM will turn ON the fuel pump relay for two
(2) seconds.
FUEL RAIL/INTAKE MANIFOLD ASSEMBLY
a
b
If the IAC valve is disconnected and reconnected

with the engine running, the idle speed may be
wrong. In this case, the IAC valve can be reset by
doing the following: turn off engine, wait ten seconds, and restart engine.
c
d
72799
a
b
c
d
Fuel Rail
Pressure Regulator
Fuel Injector
Intake Manifold
Index
90-823224--2 796
FUEL INJECTORS
PRESSURE REGULATOR ASSEMBLY
The EFI injector assembly is a solenoid-operated device, controlled by the ECM, that meters pressurized
fuel to a single engine cylinder. The ECM grounds the
injector solenoid, which opens a pintle valve, allowing fuel to flow past the pintle valve. The injector tip
has holes that control the fuel flow, generating a conical spray pattern of finely atomized fuel at the injector
tip. Fuel is directed at the intake valve, causing it to
become further atomized and vaporized before entering the combustion chamber.
The pressure regulator is a diaphragm-operated relief valve with fuel pump pressure on one side, and
regulator spring pressure and intake manifold vacuum on the other. The regulators function is to maintain a constant pressure differential across the injectors at all times. The pressure regulator
compensates for engine load by increasing fuel pressure as engine vacuum drops.
An injector that is stuck partly open will cause loss of

pressure after engine shutdown. This can result in
long cranking times. Dieseling can also occur, because some fuel might be delivered to the engine after the ignition is turned OFF.
71716
Throttle Body Assembly

p
o
n
The throttle body also provides the location for

mounting the Throttle Position (TP) sensor for sensing throttle valve position.
g
h
f
e
a
a b c d e f g h i j k l mn o p q r s -
Needle Valve
Nozzle
Cap
O-Ring
Valve Stopper
Core
O-Ring
Spring
Housing
Solenoid Coil
Tape
Bobbin
O-Ring
Inner Collar
Sleeve
Terminal
Connector
Filter
O-Ring
The throttle body assembly is attached to the plenum, and is used to control air flow into the engine,
thereby controlling engine output. The throttle valves
within the throttle body are opened by the operator
through the accelerator controls. During engine idle,
the throttle valves are almost closed, and air flow
control is handled by the Idle Air Control (IAC) valve,
described below.
72970
b
c
72800
a - Throttle Body
b - Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve
c - Throttle Position Sensor
Index
90-823224--2 796
IDLE AIR CONTROL (IAC) VALVE

The purpose of the IAC valve assembly is to control
engine idle speed, while preventing stalls due to
changes in engine load. The IAC valve, mounted in
the throttle body, controls bypass air around the
throttle valves.
If the IAC valve is disconnected and reconnected

with the engine running, the idle speed may be
wrong. In this case, the IAC valve can be reset by
doing the following: Turn off engine, wait ten seconds, and restart engine.
IAC Valve Air Flow Diagram
72800
Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve Assembly
By moving a conical valve known as a pintle, IN, toward the seat (to decrease air flow), or OUT, away
from the seat (to increase air flow), a controlled
amount of air moves around the throttle valve. If RPM
is too low, more air is bypassed around the throttle
valve to increase it. If RPM is too high, less air is bypassed around the throttle valve to decrease it.
The ECM moves the IAC valve in small steps, called
counts. These can be measured by scan tool test
equipment, which plugs into the DLC connector.
During idle, the proper position of the IAC valve is engine load, and engine RPM. If the RPM drops below
specification and the throttle valve is closed, the ECM
senses a near stall condition and calculates a new
valve position to prevent stalling.
Engine idle speed is a function of total air flow into

the engine based on IAC valve pintle position.
Controlled idle speed is programmed into the

ECM, which determines the correct IAC valve
pintle position to maintain the desired idle speed
for all engine operating conditions and loads.
The minimum idle air rate is set at the factory with

stop screws. This setting allows enough air flow
by the throttle valves to cause the IAC valve pintle
to be positioned a calibrated number of steps
(counts) from the seat during controlled idle operation.
7.4L / 454 Throttle Body
a
454 / 502 Throttle Body
a - Air Hole
b - Air Tube (Models With VST)
72986
NOTE: Not all 454 / 502 Magnums have the air hole
located in the secondary throttle plate.
Index
90-823224--2 796
ECM Connector and Symptom Charts

The following chart will aid in diagnosis of symptoms. These voltages were derived from a known good engine.
The voltages shown were done with the electrical system intact and operational. These are voltage requirements
to operate the different circuits.
! CAUTION
Do not attempt to obtain these voltages by probing wires and connectors. Serious damage could
result in loss of engine operation or wiring damage. Voltages can vary with battery conditions.
J-1
J-1 Front Pin 32 Pin Input Connector
J-2
J-2 Rear 32 Pin Output Connector

a - Shaded Area Denotes Pin Connector Location Used On
Terminal
NOTE: The Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor

[J1-24], Port Fuel Jumper J2-7 and J2-22] is not used
on the 7.4L / 7.4LX Throttle Body Injection system
IMPORTANT: The following conditions must be
meet before testing.
1. Engine at operating temperature.
2. Ignition on or engine running.
3. Scan tool not connected.
THESE NOTES APPLY TO FOLLOWING ECM

CONNECTOR AND SYMPTOM CHARTS.
The B+ Symbol indicates a system voltage
(battery).
NOTE 1: Battery voltage for first two seconds,
then 0 volts.
NOTE 2: Varies with temperature.
NOTE 3: Varies with manifold vacuum.
NOTE 4: Varies with throttle movement.
NOTE 5: Less than .5 volt (500 mV).
NOTE 6: Dual or multiple engines must share a common ground () for proper serial data communications.
Index
90-823224--2 796
ECM Connector and EFI Symptoms Chart (J-1 Circuits)

Pi
Pin
Pin
Function
Circuit
((CKT))
N
Number
(#)
Ignition
ON
Engine
Running
Diag
nostic
T
bl
Trouble
Codes
DTC(s)
J1-1
Knock
Sensor
Signal
485
BLK
9.5V
9.5V
43
Poor Fuel Economy,

Poor Performance
Detonation
J1-2
ECT
Signal
410
YEL
1.95V
1.95V
(NOTE 2)
(NOTE 2)
14
Poor Performance,
Exhaust Odor, Rough Idle
RPM Reduction
J1-3
Not
Used
J1-4
Not
Used
J1-5
Master/
Slave
916
YEL
B+
B+
None
Lack Of Data From Other Engine

(Dual Engine Only)
J1-6
Discrete
Switch
931
BRN
None
Power Reduction Mode
J1-7
Diagnostic
Test
451
WHT/
BLK
B+
B+
None
Incorrect Idle, Poor Performance
J1-8
Not
Used
J1-9
Map
Signal
432
LT
GRN
4.9V
33
Poor Performance, Surge, Poor

Fuel Economy, Exhaust Odor
J1-10
TP
Signal
417
DK
BLU
21
Poor Performance And Acceleration, Incorrect Idle
J1-11
Ignition
Fused
439
J1-12
Not
Used
J1-13
Normal Voltage
Wire
Color
1.46V
(NOTE 3)
Possible
Symptoms
.62V
.62V
(NOTE 4)
(NOTE 4)
PNK/
BLK
B+
B+
None
No Start
TP and
IAT
Ground
813
BLK
21,23
High Idle, Rough Idle, Poor Performance Exhaust Odor
J1-14
ECM
Ground
450
BLK/
WHT
(NOTE 5)
(NOTE 5)
None
No Start
J1-15
TP 5V
Reference
416
GRY
5V
5V
21
Lack Of Power, Idle High
J1-16
Battery
440
ORN
B+
B+
None
No Start
(NOTE 5)
(NOTE 5)
See Page 5C-29 For NOTES
Index
90-823224--2 796

Pi
Pin
Pin
Function
Circuit
((CKT))
N
Number
(#)
Ignition
ON
Engine
Running
Diagnostic
T
bl
Trouble
Codes
DTC(s)
J1-17
Not
Used
J1-18
Serial
Data
461
ORN/
BLK
5V
5V
None
No Serial Data
(NOTE 6)
J1-19
Not
Used
J1-20
Not
Used
J1-21
Lanyard
Stop
Switch
942
PNK
NONE
No Start
J1-22
Not
Used
J1-23
Not
Used
J1-24
IAT
Sensor
472
TAN
5V
(NOTE 2)
23
Poor Fuel Economy, Exhaust

Odor
J1-25
Not
Used
J1-26
Not
Used
J1-27
Not
Used
J1-28
Not
Used
J1-29
MAP
Ground
814
BLK
33
Lack Of Performance,Exhaust
Odor, Stall
J1-30
ECM
Ground
450
BLK/
WHT
(NOTE 5)
(NOTE 5)
None
No Start
J1-31
MAP 5V
Reference
416
GRY
5V
5V
33
Lack Of Power, Surge, Rough

Idle, Exhaust Odor
J1-32
Battery
440
ORN
B+
B+
None
No Start
Normal Voltage
Wire
Color
(NOTE 5)
(NOTE 5)
Possible
Symptoms
NOTE: The Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor [J1-24] is not used on the 7.4L / 7.4LX Throttle Body Injection
system. J1-21 is not used on 1997 and newer models.
See page 5C-29 for NOTES
Index
90-823224--2 796

Pi
Pin
Pin
Function
Circuit
((CKT))
N
Number
(#)
Ignition
ON
Engine
Running
Diagnostic
T
bl
Trouble
Codes
DTC(s)
Wire
Color
J2-1
Not
Used
J2-2
Not
Used
J2-3
Not
Used
J2-4
Not
Used
J2-5
Injector
Driver
468
LT
GRN
B+
B+
None
Rough Idle, Lack Of Power, Stall
J2-6
Ignition
Control
Ref.
Low
463
BLK/
RED
(NOTE 5)
(NOTE 5)
None
Poor Performance
J2-7
Port
Fuel
Jumper
901
WHT
None
J2-8
Ignition
Control
Ref.
High
430
PUR/
WHT
5V
1.6V
None
No Restart
J2-9
Fuel
Pump
Relay
Driver
465
DK
GRN/
WHT
(NOTE
1&5)
B+
None
No Start
J2-10
Not
Used
J2-11
Coolant
Over
temp.
112
DK
GRN
NONE
Power Reduction Mode or Improper Audio Warning
J2-12
Not
Used
J2-13
IAC A
Low
442
BLU/
BLK
Not
Usable
Not
Usable
None
Rough Unstable or Incorrect Idle
J2-14
IAC B
Low
443
GRN/
WHT
Not
Usable
Not
Usable
None
J2-15
Injector
Ground
450
BLK/
WHT
(NOTE 5)
(NOTE 5)
None
Rough Running, Lack Of Power,

Poor Performance
J2-16
Not
Used
Normal Voltage
Possible
Symptoms
NOTE: J2-7 is not used on the 7.4L / 7.4LX Throttle Body Injection system.
Index
90-823224--2 796

Pi
Pin
Pin
Function
Circuit
((CKT))
N
Number
(#)
Ignition
ON
Engine
Running
Diagnostic
T
bl
Trouble
Codes
DTC(s)
J2-17
Not
Used
J2-18
Not
Used
J2-19
Not
Used
J2-20
Fuel
Injector
Ground
450
BLK/
WHT
(NOTE 5)
(NOTE 5)
None
Rough Running, Poor Idle, Lack

Of Performance
J2-21
Injector
Driver
467
DK
BLU
B+
B+
None
Rough Idle, Lack Of Power,

Stalling
J2-22
Port
Fuel
Jumper
901
WHT
J2-23
Ignition
Control
Signal
423
WHT
1.2V
42
Stall, Will Restart In Bypass

Mode, Lack Of Power
J2-24
Ignition
Control
Bypass
424
TAN/
BLK
(NOTE 5)
4.5V
42
Lack Of Power, Fixed Timing
J2-25
Not
Used
J2-26
Not
Used
J2-27
Discrete
Switch
Signal
31
TAN
Audio Warning System Activated
J2-28
IAC
A
High
441
BLU/
WHT
Not
Usable
Not
Usable
None
J2-29
IAC
B
Low
444
GRN/
BLK
Not
Usable
Not
Usable
None
J2-30
Not
Used
J2-31
MIL
Lamp
419
BRN/
WHT
(NOTE 5)
(NOTE 5)
None
Lamp Inoperative
J2-32
Not
Used
Normal Voltage
Wire
Color
0
(NOTE 5)
Possible
Symptoms
NOTE: J2-22 is not used on the 7.4L / 7.4LX Throttle Body Injection system
See page 5C-29 for NOTES
Index
90-823224--2 796
Multi Port Injector Balance Test

(Refer to the following figure for test set-up.)
The injector balance tester is a tool used to turn the
injector ON for a precise amount of time, thus spraying a measured amount of fuel into the manifold. This
causes a drop in fuel rail pressure that we can record
and compare between each injector. All injectors
should have the same amount of pressure drop. Any
injector with a pressure drop that is 1.5 PSI (or more)
greater or less than the average drop of the other injectors should be considered faulty and replaced. Injector testers are available for various manufacturers. For 7.4L / 454 and 502 engines: the tester must
be capable of selecting an injector pulse width in the
range of 200-400 milliseconds (m sec). The recommended starting point for these engines is approximately 300 m sec. In any case a pulse width that
drops the fuel rail pressure to half the normal operating pressure, should be used.
STEP 1
Engine cool down period (ten minutes) is necessary
to avoid irregular readings due to hot soak fuel boiling. Relieve fuel pressure in the fuel rail as outlined
in Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure in Repair Procedures. Remove plenum as outlined in Repair Procedures. With ignition OFF, connect fuel pressure
gauge to fuel pressure tap.
Disconnect harness connectors at all injectors, and
connect injector tester to one injector. Use adaptor
harness furnished with injector tester to energize injectors. Follow manufacturers instructions for use of
adaptor harness. Ignition must be OFF at least ten
seconds to complete ECM shutdown cycle. Fuel
pump should run about two seconds after ignition is
turned ON.
At this point, insert clear tubing attached to vent valve

into a suitable container and bleed air from gauge
and hose to ensure accurate gauge operation. Repeat this step until all air is bled from gauge.
STEP 2
Turn ignition OFF for ten seconds and then ON again
several times to get fuel pressure to its maximum.
Record this initial pressure reading. Energize tester
one time and note pressure drop at its lowest point.
(Disregard any slight pressure increase after drop
hits low point.) By subtracting this second pressure
reading from the initial pressure, we have the actual
amount of injector pressure drop.
STEP 3
Repeat Step 2 on each injector and compare the
amount of drop. Usually, good injectors will have
virtually the same drop. Retest any injector that has
a pressure difference of 1.5 PSI (10 kPa), either more
or less than the average of the other injectors on the
engine. Replace any injector that also fails the retest.
If the pressure drop of all injectors is within 1.5 PSI
(10 kPa) of this average, the injectors appear to be
flowing properly. Reconnect them and review Troubleshooting.
NOTE: The entire test should not be repeated more

than once without running the engine to prevent
flooding. (This includes any retest on faulty injectors.)
Index
90-823224--2 796
Fuel Injector Balance Test Set-up (Multi-Port Injection)
300ms
EXAMPLE
Cylinder
1st.
Reading
38 PSI
(262 kPa)
38 PSI
(262 kPa)
38 PSI
(262 kPa)
38 PSI
(262 kPa)
38 PSI
(262 kPa)
38 PSI
(262 kPa)
38 PSI
(262 kPa)
38 PSI
(262 kPa)
2nd
Reading
19 PSI
(131 kPa)
17 PSI
(117 kPa)
21 PSI
(145 kPa)
19 PSI
(131 kPa)
19 PSI
(131 kPa)
19 PSI
(131 kPa)
19 PSI
(131 kPa)
19 PSI
(131 kPa)
Amount of
Drop
19 PSI
(131 kPa)
21 PSI
(145 kPa)
17 PSI
(117 kPa)
19 PSI
(131 kPa)
19 PSI
(131 kPa)
19 PSI
(131 kPa)
19 PSI
(131 kPa)
19 PSI
(131 kPa)
OK
Rich
(Too Much
Fuel Drop)
Lean
(Too Little
Fuel Drop)
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Index
90-823224--2 796
Wiring Harness Diagrams

MCM 7.4LX / MIE 7.4L Throttle Body Injection Bluewater Inboard
3
NOTE 1
8
12
4
9
10
2
7
16
11
5
17
14
18
13
15
19
1
75001
Note: All BLACK wires with a ground symbol are interconnected within the fuel injection system harness.
NOTE 1: As a mid year (1996-1/2) model change, the Throttle Body Injection models have the lanyard stop connector removed from the wiring harness. The dual engine capability is relocated by routing the YEL wire to the
Data Link Connector (DLC).
Index
90-823224--2 796
1 -Fuel Pump
2 -Throttle Body
3 -Distributor
4 -Coil
5 -Electronic Spark Control (KS) Module
6 -Data Link Connector (DLC)
7 -Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
8 -Knock Sensor
9 -Idle Air Control (IAC)
10-Throttle Position (TP) Sensor
11 -Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
12-Electronic Control Module (ECM)
13-Fuel Pump Relay
14-Ignition/System Relay
15-Fuse (15 Amp) Fuel Pump
16-Fuse (15 Amp) ECM/DLC/Battery
17-Fuse (10 Amp) ECM/Injector/Ignition/Knock
Module
18-Harness Connector To Starting/Charging Harness
19-Positive (+) Power Wire To Engine Circuit
Breaker
Index
90-823224--2 796
MCM 7.4LX Multi-Port Injection / 454 / 502 Magnum Multi-Port Injection / MIE
454 Tournament Ski Multi-Port Injection / 502 Magnum Multi-Port Injection
NOTE 1
3
7
8
4
2
9
11
10
20
13
18
12
17
21
15
19
14
16
22
71692
NOTE: All BLACK wires with a ground symbol are interconnected within the fuel injection system harness.
NOTE 1: As a mid year (1996-1/2) model change, the Multi Port Injection models have the lanyard stop connector
removed from the wiring harness. The dual engine capability is relocated by routing the YEL wire to the Data
Link Connector (DLC).
Index
90-823224--2 796
1 -Vapor Separator Tank (VST)

2 -Throttle Body
3 -Distributor
4 -Coil
5 -Knock Sensor (KS) Module
6 -Data Link Connector (DLC)
7 -Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
8 -Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor
9 -Knock Sensor
10-Idle Air Control (IAC)
11 -Throttle Position (TP) Sensor
12-Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
13-Electronic Control Module (ECM)
14-Fuel Pump Relay
15-Ignition Relay
16-Fuel Pump Fuse (15 Amp)
17-Injector Fuse (15 Amp) ECM, DLC, Battery
18-ECM Fuse (10 Amp) ECM/Ignition/Injector/
Knock Sensor Module
19-Harness Connector to Starting/Charging Harness
20-Harness Connector to Lanyard Stop Switch
(Optional)
21-Harness Connector for Dual Engine Data Link
Cable (1996-1/2 And Earlier Models)
22-Positive (+) Power Wire to Engine Circuit
Breaker
Index
90-823224--2 796
467 DK BLU
10A
15A
DK GRN
15A
87a 30 85
86 87
BLK
441 BLU/WHT
IDLE AIR
CONTROL
(IAC) VALVE
SOME MODELS
WILL HAVE THE
DUAL ENGINE
DATA LINK
MOVED TO THE
DLC
442 BLU/BLK
443 GRN/WHT
444 GRN/BLK
C
B
(MULTIPLE ENGINE
A
BLK
916 YEL
MASTER/SLAVE
461 ORN/BLK
916 YEL
DLC
J1-5
BLK
TO ECM/BAT
FUSE
15A
440 ORN
Index
90-823224--2 796
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE

(IAT) SENSOR SIGNAL
INTAKE AIR
TEMPERATURE
(IAT) SENSOR
B
(TP)
ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE (ECT)
SENSOR
C
A
ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE (ECT)
SENSOR SIGNAL
Index
90-823224--2 796
IC
MODULE
EST
MODULE
B A
ELECTRONIC
SPARK TIMING (EST)
IGNITION CONTROL
430 PUR/WHT

BYPASS
DIST. REFERENCE LOW
BRN
86
TO BUZZER
TO IGN
TO AUDIO
WARNING
SWITCHES
TO TACH
TAN/BLU
PUR
BLU/TAN
GRY
121 TAN
3 PNK
121 WHT
COOLANT OVERTEMP
(TO BUZZER)
931 BRN
J1-6

TRANS. TEMPERATURE
Index
90-823224--2 796
TO IGN COIL TERM B

TO INJECTORS
85
86
87
ECM BAT FUSE/
DLC 15A
10A
TO DLC CONNECTOR
439 PNK/BLK
KNOCK
SENSOR (KS)
MODULE

KNOCK
SENSOR (KS)
LANYARD STOP
SWITCH CIRCUIT
(OPTIONAL)
A
B
BLK
Index
90-823224--2 796
Throttle Body Injection Wiring Diagram (Chart 1 of 4)
INJECTOR
467 DK BLU
10A
15A
INJECTOR
DK GRN
15A
87a 30 85 86 87
BLK
441 BLU/WHT
IDLE AIR
CONTROL
(IAC) VALVE
442 BLU/BLK
443 GRN/WHT
444 GRN/BLK
C
(MULTIPLE ENGINE
B
A
SOME MODELS
WILL HAVE THE
DUAL ENGINE
DATA LINK
MOVED TO THE
DLC
BLK
916 YEL
MASTER/SLAVE
461 ORN/BLK
916 YEL
DLC
J1-5
BLK
TO ECM/BAT
FUSE
15A
440 ORN
Index
90-823224--2 796
B
(TP)
ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
(ECT) SENSOR
C
A
ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE (ECT)
SENSOR SIGNAL
Index
90-823224--2 796
IC
MODULE
EST
MODULE
B A
ELECTRONIC
SPARK TIMING (EST)
IGNITION CONTROL
430 PUR/WHT

BYPASS
DIST. REFERENCE LOW
BRN
86
TO BUZZER
TAN/BLU
TO IGN
TO AUDIO
WARNING
SWITCHES
TO TACH
PUR
BLU/TAN
GRY
121 TAN
D
C
3 PNK
B
A
121 WHT
COOLANT OVERTEMP
(TO BUZZER)
931 BRN
J1-6

TRANS. TEMPERATURE
Index
90-823224--2 796
TO IGN COIL TERM B

TO INJECTORS
85
86
87
ECM BAT FUSE/
DLC 15A
10A
TO DLC CONNECTOR
439 PNK/BLK
KNOCK
SENSOR (KS)
MODULE

KNOCK
SENSOR (KS)
LANYARD STOP
SWITCH CIRCUIT
(OPTIONAL)
A
B
BLK
BLK
Index
90-823224--2 796
Index
90-823224--2 796
The Diagnostic Circuit Check is an organized approach to identifying a problem created by an electronic engine control system malfunction. It must be
the starting point for any driveability complaint diagnosis because it directs the service technician to the
next logical step in diagnosing the complaint.
The scan tool data listed in the table may be used for
comparison. After completing the diagnostic circuit
check and finding the on-board diagnostics functioning properly and no trouble codes displayed. The
Typical Data Values are an average of display values recorded from normally operating vessels and
are intended to represent what a normally functioning
system would typically display.
NOTE: A scan tool that displays faulty data should

not be used, and the problem should be reported to
the manufacturer. The use of a faulty scan tool can
result in misdiagnosis and unnecessary parts replacement.
Only the parameters listed below are used in this

manual for diagnosing. If a scan reads other parameters, the values are not recommended for use in diagnosing. If all values are within the range illustrated,
refer to Troubleshooting.
Diagnostic Circuit Check
Scan Tool Normal Specifications

(Idle / Warm Engine / Closed Throttle / Neutral)
Scan Position
Units Displayed
Typical Data Value
RPM
RPM
600-700 RPM
Desired RPM
RPM
600 RPM
Coolant Temp.
F( C)
150-170 F (66-77 C)
Manifold Air Temp.
F ( C)
Varies with Ambient Temperature
Throttle Position
Volts
.4 to .8 Volts
Throttle Angle
0-100 %
0-1%
MAP
Volts or kPa
1-3 Volts or (45-55 kPa) (Depends on

Vacuum and Baro Pressure)
Baro
Volts or kPa
3-5 Volts (Depends on Altitude and

Barometric Pressure)
Bat
Volts
12.0-14.5 Volts
Spark Advance
Degrees
-10 to 30
Knock Retard
Degrees
Idle Air Control IAC
Counts (Steps)
0-40 Counts
Minimum IAC Position
Counts (Steps)
0-40 Counts
Idle Air Control Follower
Counts (Steps)
0 Counts
Injector Pulse Width
msec.
2-3 msec.
Injector On Time Cranking
msec.
2.53.5 msec. (Depends on Water/Air

Temperature)
Fuel Consumption
GPH (L/h)
1-2 GPH(3.7-7.5 L/h)
Time From Start
0:00:00-1092:00
Varies
Memory Calibration Check Sum
Calibration and Check Sum
Varies with Software revision in ECM
Oil Press/IO Level (See Note)
OK/LO
OK
Engine Overtemp
OK/Overheating
OK
Power Reduction Mode
OFF/ON
OFF
Lanyard Stop Mode
OFF/ON
OFF
NOTE: MCM will read I/O Level and MIE will read Trans.
Index
90-823224--2 796
CLEARING CODES USING DIAGNOSTIC CODE

TOOL (NON-SCAN)
10. Refer to appropriate Troubleshooting and/or

Diagnostic Charts
1. Install diagnostic code tool.
NOTE: When clearing codes without the use of a

scan tool, the battery must be fully charged and
cranking speed must be at least 300 RPM. The ability
to clear codes is directly dependent on the battery being fully charged and able to start the engine with adequate cranking RPM.
2. Turn key ON.

3. Select service mode on code tool.
4. To clear codes, move the throttle, while in neutral,
from 0% to 100% then back to 0%.
A poorly charged battery or engine cranking problem

may result in an ECM reset and may not allow
stored trouble codes to be cleared from EEPROM
memory. If this condition exists, BE SURE the battery
is fully charged. If a low battery condition does exists
the audio warning buzzer will come on for 2 seconds
after engine start-up.
5. Exit Service Mode on code tool.

6. Start engine and let run for fifteen seconds.
7. Turn key OFF for 5 seconds.
8. Select Service Mode on code tool.
present, check note following and repeat from
Step 1.
IGNITION OFF.
INSTALL MARINE DIAGNOSTIC CODE TOOL.
SWITCH TO NORMAL MODE.
IGNITION ON.
NOTE MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP.
MARINE DIAGNOSTIC CODE TOOL
STEADY LAMP
YES
NO LAMP
FLASHING CODE 12
USE CHART A-1.
CHECK FOR GROUNDED

DIAGNOSTIC TEST CKT 451.
OR FAULTY TOOL.
NO
DID ENGINE START PRIOR

TO DIAGNOSTIC CIRCUIT CHECK
USE CHART A-2.
YES
NO
SWITCH CODE TOOL SERVICE
MODEARE ANY CODES OTHER
THAN CODE 12 DISPLAYED?
NO
USE CHART A-3.
YES
DOES A CUSTOMER COMPLAINT OR

DRIVEABILITY PROBLEM CURRENTLY EXIST?
YES
NO
REFER TO TROUBLESHOOTING SECTION.
FAULT IS NOT
PRESENT AT
THIS TIME.
REFER TO APPLICABLE
NON-SCAN CODE
CHART. START WITH
LOWEST CODE FIRST.
Index
90-823224--2 796
CLEARING CODES USING SCAN TOOL (SCAN)
4. Clear codes.
1. Connect scan tool.
5. Turn key OFF.
2. Start engine.

present, (there is a real fault in system) check
note preceding and repeat Step 1.
3. Select clear codes function.
LINK SCAN TOOL AND

CHECK FOR CODES
SCAN TOOL
DOES SCAN TOOL DISPLAY ECM DATA?

YES
NO
DID ENGINE START PRIOR

TO DIAGNOSTIC CIRCUIT CHECK
USE CHART A-2.
YES
NO
ARE ANY CODES

DISPLAYED?
USE CHART A-3.
NO
YES
DOES A CUSTOMER COMPLAINT OR

DRIVEABILITY PROBLEM CURRENTLY EXIST?
YES
NO
REFER TO TROUBLESHOOTING SECTION.
FAULT IS NOT
PRESENT AT
THIS TIME.
REFER TO APPLICABLE
SCAN CODE CHART.
START WITH LOWEST
CODE FIRST.
Index
90-823224--2 796
No Malfunction Indicator Lamp (Marine Diagnostic Code Tool Installed)

Chart A-1 (1 of 2)
(DUAL ENGINE APPLICATION
ONLY)
B
C
A
916 YEL
J1-5
MASTER/SLAVE
461 ORN/BLK
DLC
ECM/DLC
TO
ECM FUSE
15A
15AMP
BATTERY
FUSE
451 WHT/BLK
DIAGNOSTIC TEST
TERMINAL

ECM, INJECTOR KNOCK
SENSOR MODULE
10 AMP FUSE
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR
LAMP
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION:
DIAGNOSTIC AIDS:
There should always be a steady Malfunction Indicator Lamp when the ignition is ON and engine
stopped. Ignition voltage is supplied directly to the
light bulb. The Electronic Control Module (ECM) will
control the light and turn it ON by providing a ground
path through CKT 419 to the ECM.
Engine runs OK, check:
Faulty light bulb.
CKT 419 open.
Engine cranks but will not run, check:
Continuous battery - 50 amp circuit breaker

open.
Open ECM fuse.
Battery circuit to ECM open.
1. This step insures that battery voltage is available

to terminal F of the DLC connector.
Ignition circuit to ECM open.
Poor connection to ECM.
2. This step checks for ground present in DLC connector terminal E. This indicates that the ECM
is capable of completing the ground to the Malfunction Indicator Lamp.
Faulty ECM ground circuit(s).
TEST DESCRIPTION:
Number(s) below refer to circled number(s) on the
diagnostic chart.
Engine will not crank.
Perform EFI system relay check.
3. This step isolates the cause of incomplete

ground to either a wiring or ECM circuitry.
4. If the engine fails to crank, this may indicate a failure in the starting system circuit.
Index
90-823224--2 796
No Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Chart A-1: (2 of 2)
DOES THE ENGINE START?
YES
NO
IS THE 10 AND 15 AMP
ECM FUSE OK?
IGNITION ON.
REMOVE MARINE DIAGNOSTIC CODE TOOL.
USING A TEST LIGHT CONNECTED TO
GROUND, PROBE TERMINAL F OF THE
DLC CONNECTOR.
LIGHT SHOULD BE ON. IS IT?
YES
NO
REPAIR OPEN OR
SHORTED CKT 440.
CONNECT TEST LIGHT TO

B+BATTERY POSITIVE.
PROBE DLC TERMINAL E.
1
YES
NO
CONNECT TEST LIGHT BETWEEN

DLC TERMINALS F AND E.
LIGHT SHOULD BE ON.
IS IT?
YES
FAULTY DIAGNOSTIC CODE
TOOL.
NO
REFER TO
DIAGNOSTIC
AIDS ON
FACING
PAGE.
IGNITION OFF.
DISCONNECT ECM
J2 CONNECTOR.
USING DVM,
MEASURE
RESISTANCE
BETWEEN ECM
CONNECTOR
TERMINAL J2-31
AND DLC
CONNECTOR
TERMINAL E.
RESISTANCE
SHOULD BE CLOSE
TO 0 OHMS.
IS IT?
YES
FAULTY ECM
CONNECTIONS OR
FAULTY ECM.
YES
NO
DOES THE ENGINE CRANK?
LOCATE AND CORRECT

SHORT TO GROUND IN
CIRCUIT.
YES
NO
IGNITION OFF.
DISCONNECT ECM
CONNECTORS.
IGNITION ON.
PROBE ECM CONNECTOR
PINS J1-16, J1-32, AND
J1-11 WITH TEST LIGHT
TO GROUND.
IS THE LIGHT ON, ON
ALL CIRCUITS?
PERFORM TESTS ON
STARTING SYSTEM CIRCUIT. SEE TROUBLESHOOTING IN SECTION
1C.
YES
NO
FAULTY ECM GROUNDS

OR ECM.
YES
PERFORM EFI SYSTEM

RELAY CHECK. DOES
ENGINE START?
NO
REPEAT STEP 1
OF THIS CHART
REPAIR OPEN IN CIRCUIT

THAT DID NOT LIGHT
THE TEST LIGHT.
NO
CHECK FOR SHORT IN
WIRE 419 BETWEEN J2-31
AND DLC TERMINAL E
Index
90-823224--2 796
No DLC Data or Will Not Flash Code 12 Malfunction Indicator Lamp On

Steady (Marine Diagnostic Code Tool Installed)
Chart A-2 (1 of 2)

(DUAL ENGINE APPLICATION
ONLY)
C
B
A
916 YEL
J1-5
MASTER/SLAVE
461ORN/BLK
DLC
TO ECM 15A
BATTERY
FUSE
451 WHT/BLK
LAMP
LAMP
TEST DESCRIPTION:
There should always be a steady Malfunction Indicator Lamp when the ignition is ON and engine
stopped. Ignition voltage is supplied to the light bulb.
The Engine Control Module (ECM) will turn the lamp
ON by grounding CKT 419 in the ECM.

diagnostic chart.
With the diagnostic test terminal grounded CKT

419, the lamp should flash a Code 12, followed by
any trouble code(s) stored in memory.
1. If there is a problem with the ECM that causes a

scan tool to not read serial data, the ECM should
not flash a Code 12. If Code 12 is flashing, check
CKT 451 for short to ground. If Code 12 does
flash, make sure that the scan tool is working
properly on another engine.
A steady light suggests a short to ground in the lamp

control CKT 419 or an open in diagnostic CKT 451.
2. If the light goes OFF when the ECM connector is

disconnected, CKT 419 is not shorted to ground.
3. This step will check for an open diagnostic CKT
451.
4. At this point, the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
wiring is OK. If Code 12 does not flash, the ECM
should be replaced.
Index
90-823224--2 796
No DLC Data or Will Not Flash Code 12

Chart A-2: (2 of 2)
MARINE DIAGNOSTIC CODE TOOL INSTALLED.
IGNITION ON, ENGINE OFF.
IS THE MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT ON?
YES
NO
ENTER SERVICE MODE ON DIAGNOSTIC

CODE TOOL.
DOES MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP
FLASH CODE 12?
SEE
CHART A-1
NO
YES
IGNITION OFF.
DISCONNECT ECM J-2 CONNECTOR.
IGNITION ON AND NOTE MALFUNCTION INDICATOR
LAMP
IF PROBLEM WAS NO DLC DATA (USING SCAN TOOL)

CHECK SERIAL DATA CKT 461 FOR OPENS OR SHORTS
TO GROUND. IF OK, IT IS A FAULTY ECM.
LIGHT OFF
LIGHT ON
IGNITION OFF.
JUMPER TERMINALS A TO B AT DLC CONNECTOR.
CONNECT TEST LIGHT BETWEEN ECM CONNECTOR
TERMINAL J1-7 AND B+ BATTERY POSITIVE.
REPAIR SHORT TO
GROUND IN CKT 419.
LIGHT ON
LIGHT OFF
REPLACE ECM.
RECHECK FOR CODE 12.
CHECK FOR OPEN IN DLC DIAGNOSTIC

TERMINALS A AND B (CKT 450 AND
CKT 451), REPAIR AS NECESSARY.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Engine Cranks but Will Not Run Chart A-3 (1 of 4)

INJ/ECM/KS
MODULE FUSE
10A
IGNITION CONTROL
DIST. REFERENCE
HIGH
BYPASS
DIST. REFERENCE
LOW
This chart assumes that battery condition and engine
cranking speed are OK, and there is adequate fuel in
the tank.
TEST DESCRIPTION:
diagnostic chart.
1. An ECT sensor that indicates coolant temperature less than actual temperature can flood the
engine with fuel. An ECT sensor that indicates
coolant temperature greater than actual can
starve the engine of fuel. If the TP sensor is at 50
to 75% of its range, the engine may be in the clear
flood mode, which will cause starting problems.
The engine will not start without reference pulses
and, therefore, the scan tool should read engine
RPM (reference) during cranking.
2. No spark may be caused by one of several components related to the high energy ignition/IC
system. The ignition system will address all problems related to the causes of a no spark condition.
3. The test light should blink, indicating the ECM is
controlling the injectors OK.
Index
4. All injectors should be within 1.0 ohm of each other and should not be less than 12 ohms at 70F
(21C). If an injector is suspected for a no start
condition, unhook the suspected injector and try
to start the engine.
5. Use fuel pressure gauge 91-16850 or J-34730-1.
Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure tap
to absorb any small amount of fuel leakage that
may occur when installing the gauge.
DIAGNOSTIC AIDS:
Unless engine enters Clear Flood at the first indication of a flooding condition, it can result in a
no start.
Check for fouled plugs.
Water or foreign material in fuel line, VST, water

separating fuel filter can cause a no start in cold
weather.
A defective MAP sensor may cause a no start or

a stall after start. To determine if the sensor is
causing the problem, disconnect it. The ECM will
then use a default value for the sensor, and if the
condition is corrected and the connections are
OK, replace the sensor.
Using injector harness test light (J-34730-2A)

check for blinking light at injector harness on both
banks of the engine. If not OK, check injector
fuses.
If above are all OK, refer to Troubleshooting.
90-823224--2 796
Engine Cranks but Will Not Run (Continued)

Chart A-3: (2 of 4)
1
ENSURE THE ENGINE IS NOT IN SERVICE OR BASE TIMING
MODE
CHECK THAT LANYARD STOP SWITCH IS NOT ACTIVATED
CHECK THE FOLLOWING. (NOTE 1)
ACTUAL ENGINE TEMPERATURE AND ECT TEMPERATURE
ON THE SCAN TOOL SHOULD BE CLOSE TO THE SAME, IF
NOT REFER TO CODE 14.
TP SENSOR - IF OVER 2.5 VOLTS AT CLOSED THROTTLE,
USE THE CODE 21 CHART.
IS RPM INDICATED DURING CRANKING? (NOTE 2)
NOTE 1: IF A SCAN TOOL IS NOT AVAILABLE WHILE

CHECKING TP AND ECT READINGS, USE THE
CODE 21 AND 14 NON-SCAN DIAGNOSTIC
CHARTS TO ENSURE PROPER OPERATION
OF THOSE COMPONENTS.
NOTE 2: A TACHOMETER MAY BE USED IF A SCAN TOOL
IS NOT AVAILABLE.
PLACE THE LANYARD STOP

SWITCH IN THE RUN POSITION
YES
NO
USING AN INDUCTIVE PICKUP TIMING

LIGHT CONNECTED TO ANY SPARK
PLUG WIRE, CHECK FOR SPARK
WHILE CRANKING (CHECK TWO WIRES).
IS SPARK PRESENT?
USING AN INDUCTIVE PICKUP TIMING LIGHT

CONNECTED TO ANY SPARK PLUG WIRE,
CHECK FOR SPARK WHILE CRANKING
(CHECK TWO WIRES).IS SPARK PRESENT?
YES
NO
YES
BASIC HEI
PROBLEM. REFER TO
IGNITION SYSTEM
CHECK.
3
DISCONNECT ALL
INJECTORS.
CONNECT TEST LIGHT
J-34730-2 OR EQUIVALENT
TO INJECTOR HARNESS
CONNECTOR. (TEST ONE
INJECTOR HARNESS FROM
EACH GROUPING OF
INJECTORS.)
CHECK FOR BLINKING LIGHT
WHILE CRANKING.
IGNITION OFF.
DISCONNECT DISTRIBUTOR
4-WAY CONNECTOR.
IGNITION ON.
MOMENTARILY TOUCH
HARNESS CONNECTOR
TERMINAL (CKT 430) WITH A
TEST LIGHT TO 12 VOLTS.
SCAN TOOL OR
TACHOMETER SHOULD
INDICATE RPM WHEN TEST
IS PERFORMED.
DOES IT?
NO
CHECK FOR
BATTERY
VOLTAGE TO
IGNITION SYSTEM.
IF OK, THERE IS A
BASIC HEI
PROBLEM. THEN
REFER TO IGNITION SYSTEM
CHECK.
NO BLINKING LIGHT
BLINKING LIGHT
REFER TO LANYARD
STOP CIRCUIT CHECK
CHECK RESISTANCE ACROSS

EACH INJECTOR AND COMPARE
VALUES.
IS RESISTANCE 12 OHMS .4?
NO BLINKING LIGHT
YES
USE CHART
A-3 (4 OF 4)
FAULTY CONNECTION
OR IGNITION MODULE.
5
OK
NOT OK
IGNITION OFF.
INSTALL FUEL PRESSURE GAUGE AND NOTE
PRESSURE WHILE CRANKING ENGINE
SHOULD BE 36 PSI (248 kPa) NOMINAL.
REPLACE INJECTOR(S)
THAT IS OUT OF RANGE.
OK
REVIEW THE DIAGNOSTIC AIDS ON FACING
PAGE FOR ADDITIONAL ITEMS TO CHECK. IF ALL
ARE OK, EFI SYSTEM IS OK.
REFER TO HARD START IN THE
TROUBLESHOOTING SECTION.
NO
CKT 430 OPEN,
SHORTED TO
GROUND,
OR FAULTY ECM.
NOT OK
USE APPROPRIATE CHART A-7
MULTI-PORT OR THROTTLE BODY
Index
90-823224--2 796

Chart A-3 (3 of 4)
INJ/ECM
FUSE 10A
INJECTORS
IGNITION CONTROL
BYPASS
DIST. REFERENCE LOW
INJECTORS
A
THROTTLE BODY
MULTI-PORT
TEST DESCRIPTION:
To test for this condition:

diagnostic chart.
Disconnect all injectors.
Ignition ON.
1. Check for 12 volt supply to injectors. Due to the

injectors wired in parallel, there should be a light
ON on both terminals.
Probe CKT 467 and CKT 468 on the ECM

side of injector harness with a test light connected to ground. (Test one injector harness
on each side of engine.) There should be no
light. If light is ON, repair short to voltage.
If OK, check the resistance of the injectors.

Should be 12 ohms + 4.
Check injector harness connector. Be sure

terminals are not backed out of connector
and contacting each other.
If all OK, replace ECM.
2. Check continuity of CKT 467 and CKT 468.

3. All checks made to this point would indicate that
the ECM is at fault. However, there is a possibility
of CKT 467 or CKT 468 being shorted to a voltage
source either in the engine harness or in the injector harness.
Index
90-823224--2 796

Chart A-3: (4 of 4)
FROM
A-3
(2 OF 4)
NO BLINKING LIGHT
AT INJECTOR
NO LIGHT
STEADY LIGHT
IGNITION ON.
PROBE INJECTOR HARNESS
TERMINALS WITH A TEST LIGHT TO
GROUND.
LIGHT SHOULD BE ON AT BOTH
TERMINALS.
CHECK INJECTOR DRIVER CIRCUIT WITH TEST

LIGHT FOR SHORT TO GROUND.
IF CIRCUIT IS NOT SHORTED, CHECK RESISTANCE
ACROSS EACH INJECTOR IN THE CIRCUIT.
RESISTANCE SHOULD BE 12 OHMS + .4.
OK
NOT OK
FAULTY ECM
REPAIR SHORT TO GROUND

OR REPLACE ANY INJECTOR
THAT MEASURES UNDER 12
OHMS .4 OHMS.
LIGHT ON BOTH
LIGHT ON ONE
LIGHT OFF BOTH
DUE TO INJECTORS WIRED IN

PARALLEL, THERE SHOULD BE A
LIGHT ON BOTH TERMINALS.
REPAIR OPEN IN INJECTOR

FEED CIRCUIT.
RECONNECT INJECTOR(S)
IGNITION OFF.
DISCONNECT ECM
IGNITION ON.
PROBE TERMINALS J2-21 AND J2-5
WITH A TEST LIGHT TO GROUND.
IF NOT, THE PROBLEM IS AN OPEN

IN THE HARNESS TO THE TESTED
INJECTOR.
LIGHT ON
LIGHT OFF
REFER TO FACING PAGE.
OPEN CKT 467 OR 468
Index
90-823224--2 796
Multi-Port Injection Fuel System Diagnosis

Chart A-7 (1 of 6)
RETURN LINE
SUPPLY LINE
ONE PIECE FUEL RAIL ASSEMBLY
72573
Ignition ON, pump pressure should be 34-38 PSI

(234-262 kPa). This pressure is controlled by
spring pressure within the regulator assembly.
During engine cranking, the Engine Control Module
(ECM) will turn ON the electric fuel pump in the vapor
separator tank. It will remain ON as long as the engine is cranking or running, and the ECM is receiving
reference pulses. If there are no reference pulses,
the ECM will shut OFF the fuel pump.
The pump will deliver fuel to the fuel rail and injectors,
then to the pressure regulator, where the system
pressure is controlled to about 36 PSI (248 kPa)
nominal. Excess fuel is then returned to the vapor
separator tank.
3. When the engine is idling, high vacuum is applied

to the fuel regulator diaphragm. This will offset
the spring and result in a lower fuel pressure. This
idle vacuum will vary somewhat depending on
barometric pressure; however, the fuel pressure
at idle should be less, indicating fuel pressure
regulator control.
4. Pressure that leaks down is caused by one of the
following:
TEST DESCRIPTION:
diagnostic chart.
1. If pump does not run check fuel pump relay and
fuse.
2. Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connector to absorb any small amount of fuel leakage that may occur when installing the gauge.
Fuel pressure regulator valve leaking.
Injector(s) sticking open.
Check vent line from VST to see if diaphragm

is leaking.
5. If an injector is stuck open, it will send fuel to its

respective cylinder, which may saturate or foul
spark plug(s). In order to determine which injector is leaking, the spark plugs must be removed
and inspected for fouling or saturation. Once the
saturated spark plug(s) is found, replace the corresponding injector(s) and install new spark
plug(s).
Index
90-823224--2 796
Multi-Port Injection Fuel System Diagnosis (Continued)

Chart A-7: (2 of 6)
FROM
CHART A-3
(2 OF 4)
NOTE: THE IGNITION MAY HAVE TO BE CYCLED

ON MORE THAN ONCE TO OBTAIN MAXIMUM
PRESSURE. ALSO, IT IS NORMAL FOR THE PRESSURE
INSTALL FUEL PRESSURE GAUGE, 91-16850 .

IGNITION OFF FOR 10 SECONDS.
IGNITION ON. FUEL PUMP WILL RUN FOR ABOUT 2 SECONDS.
NOTE FUEL PRESSURE, WITH PUMP RUNNING, SHOULD BE
34-38 PSI (234-262 kPa) AND HOLD STEADY WHEN PUMP STOPS.
OK
NOT OK
START AND IDLE ENGINE AT

NORMAL OPERATING
TEMPERATURE.
PRESSURE SHOULD BE LOWER
BY 3-10 PSI (21-69 kPa).
NOT OK
OK
NO TROUBLE FOUND.
REVIEW THE TROUBLESHOOTING SECTION.
TO DROP SLIGHTLY WHEN THE PUMP STOPS.
PRESSURE BUT
NOT HOLDING
PRESSURE BELOW
34 PSI (234 kPa)
IGNITION OFF FOR

10 SECONDS.
IGNITION ON.
BLOCK FUEL PRESSURE LINE USING
SPECIAL TOOL (SHUT-OFF VALVE)
PRESSURE SHOULD HOLD.
SEE
CHART A-7
4 OF 6
NOT HOLDING
USING AN EXTERNAL
VACUUM SOURCE, APPLY 10
INCHES OF VACUUM TO FUEL
PRESSURE REGULATOR.
FUEL PRESSURE SHOULD DROP
3-10 PSI (21-69 kPa).
PRESSURE ABOVE
38 PSI (262 kPa)
NO
PRESSURE
IGNITION OFF.
APPLY 12 VOLTS TO FUEL
PUMP CONNECTOR(GRAY
WIRE).
LISTEN FOR FUEL PUMP
RUNNING.
HOLDS

IGNITION ON.
BLOCK FUEL RETURN LINE USING
RECHECK PRESSURE.
OK
NOT OK
HOLDS
REPAIR VACUUM
SOURCE TO
REGULATOR.
REPLACE
REGULATOR
ASSEMBLY.
FAULTY FUEL PRESSURE

REGULATOR.
CHECK:
LEAKING PUMP FITTINGS,
OR HOSE.
FAULTY VST PUMP.
NOT HOLDING
LOCATE AND CORRECT

LEAKING INJECTOR(S).
PUMP RUNS
PUMP NOT RUNNING
CHECK FOR:
RESTRICTED FUEL LINE.
DISCONNECTED HOSE
IF OK
CHECK FOR:
OPEN WIRE IN CKT 120.
OPEN PUMP GROUND
CKT 150.
IF OK
REPLACE ELECTRIC FUEL PUMP.
Index
90-823224--2 796

Chart A-7 (3 of 6)
RETURN
SUPPLY
ONE PIECE FUEL RAIL ASSEMBLY
72573
Check for contaminated fuel tank, struck anti siphon

valve or vacuum leak anywhere before the mechanical fuel pump. Also possible slipping seawater/fuel
pump drive belt.
TEST DESCRIPTION:
diagnostic chart.
1. Pressure less than 34 PSI (234 kPa) falls into two
areas:
Regulated pressure less than 34 PSI (234 kPa).

The system will be running lean. Also, hard starting when cold and overall poor performance will
be noticed.
Restricted flow causing pressure drop. Normally,

an engine with a fuel pressure of less than 24 PSI
(165 kPa) at idle will not be driveable. However,
if the pressure drop occurs only while underway,
the engine will surge then stop running as pressure begins to drop rapidly. This is most likely
caused by a restricted fuel line or plugged water
2. Restricting the fuel return line (Using Special Tool

- Shut-Off Valve) allows the fuel pressure to build
above regulated pressure. With battery voltage
applied to the fuel pump, pressure should rise to
60 PSI (414 kPa) as the fuel return hose is gradually pinched.
NOTE: Do not allow fuel pressure to exceed 60 PSI

(414 kPa); damage to the pressure regulator may result.
3. This test determines if the high fuel pressure is
due to a restricted fuel return line or a pressure
regulator problem.
Index
90-823224--2 796

Chart A-7: (4 of 6)
* NOTE: THE IGNITION MAY HAVE TO BE CYCLED
ON MORE THAN ONCE TO OBTAIN MAXIMUM PRESSURE.
CONTINUED FROM
CHART A-7
(2 OF 6)
ABOVE 38 PSI (262 kPa)
HAS PRESSURE, BUT LESS

THAN 34 PSI (234 kPa)
3
CHECK FOR RESTRICTED
FUEL LINES.
OK
IGNITION OFF.
BLOCK FUEL RETURN LINE FOLLOWING
INSTRUCTIONS.
CYCLE IGNITION ON. PRESSURE
SHOULD RISE ABOVE 38 PSI (262 kPa).
ABOVE 38 PSI
(262 kPa)
FAULTY PRESSURE
REGULATOR.
DISCONNECT FUEL RETURN LINE.

FOLLOWING MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS, ATTACH
FLEX HOSE TO RETURN LINE. INSERT THE OTHER END IN AN
APPROVED GASOLINE CONTAINER. NOTE FUEL PRESSURE
WITHIN 2 SECONDS AFTER IGNITION IS TURNED ON.
NOT OK
REPAIR FUEL LINE
AND RECHECK.
34-38 PSI (234-262 kPa)
CHECK FOR RESTRICTED FUEL

RETURN LINE FROM FUEL
PRESSURE REGULATOR TO
POINT WHERE FUEL LINE WAS
DISCONNECTED.
LOCATE AND CORRECT

RESTRICTED FUEL RETURN
LINE TO VAPOR SEPARATOR
TANK.
IF LINE OK, REPLACE FUEL

PRESSURE REGULATOR.

FAULTY
FUEL PUMP
Index
90-823224--2 796

Chart A-7 (5 of 6)
TO
SYSTEM
RELAY
902 RED
ECM
339 PNK/BLK
FUEL PUMP
RELAY FUSE
15A
87a
FUEL
PUMP
RELAY
30
85
86
465 DK GRN/WHT
J2-9
FUEL PUMP
RELAY DRIVER
450 BLK/WHT
87
120 GRY
150 BLK
FUEL PUMP
TEST DESCRIPTION:
diagnostic chart.
1. This step checks if there is power to the fuel pump
relay.
2. Bypassing the relay circuit should cause the fuel
pump to run. This step should identify if the fault
is in the relay or in the fuel pump circuit.
3. This step checks if there is an open in the ground
circuit.
4. This step checks if the ECM is functioning properly.
Index
90-823224--2 796

Chart A-7: (6 of 6)
FROM CHART
A-7
(4 OF 6)
IGNITION OFF.
REMOVE FUEL PUMP RELAY.
IGNITION ON.
WITH TEST LIGHT CONNECTED TO
GROUND, PROBE FUEL PUMP RELAY
CONNECTOR CAVITY 30 TEST LIGHT
SHOULD BE ON. IS IT?
YES
NO
IGNITION OFF.
USING FUSED JUMPER, CONNECT
TERMINALS 30 AND 87 OF FUEL
PUMP RELAY CONNECTOR TOGETHER.
IGNITION ON.
FUEL PUMP SHOULD RUN. DOES IT?
CHECK FUEL PUMP RELAY FUSE.

IS IT OK?
YES
REPAIR OPEN CKT
339 OR 902
YES
CHECK FOR:
OPEN PUMP GROUND CKT 150. IF OK,
REPLACE FUEL PUMP.
NO
YES
CONNECT TEST LIGHT TO GROUND

AND PROBE CAVITY 85 OF THE FUEL
PUMP RELAY CONNECTOR.
IGNITION ON.
TEST LIGHT SHOULD BE ON FOR
2 SECONDS AND THEN GO OFF.
DOES IT?
REPAIR OPEN
GROUND CKT 450
YES
REPAIR SHORT TO
GROUND IN CKT 339
AND REPLACE FUSE
NO
IGNITION OFF.
DISCONNECT FUSED JUMPER.
CONNECT TEST LIGHT TO BATTERY POSITIVE
B+ AND PROBE CAVITY 86 OF THE
FUEL PUMP RELAY CONNECTOR.
NO
NO
REPLACE FUEL PUMP RELAY AND RETEST.

IF STILL NO PRESSURE, CHECK THE FOLLOWING:
VAPOR LOCK CONDITION.
DISCONNECTED HOSES.
PROPER FUEL LEVEL.
IF OK, REPLACE FUEL PUMP.
CHECK FOR OPEN

IN CKT 465. IF OK,
REPLACE ECM.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Throttle Body Injection Fuel System Diagnosis

Chart A-7 (1 of 6)
FUEL LINE TO
ELECTRIC FUEL PUMP
WATER SEPARATING
FUEL FILTER
SHUT-OFF TOOL
IMPORTANT: Check for contaminated fuel tank,

stuck anti-siphon valve or fuel system vacuum
leak anywhere before the electrical fuel pump
and after the fuel pressure regulator.
NOTE: If pump does not run, check fuel pump relay

and fuse.
2. Wrap a shop towel around the fuel pressure connector to absorb any small amount of fuel leakage that may occur when installing the gauge.
During engine cranking, the Engine Control Module

(ECM) will turn ON the electric fuel pump. It will remain ON as long as the engine is cranking or running,
and the ECM is receiving reference pulses. If there
are no reference pulses, the ECM will shut OFF the
fuel pump.
The pump will deliver fuel to the injectors and pressure regulator, where the system pressure is controlled to about 30 PSI (207 kPa) nominal. Excess
fuel is then returned to the water separating fuel filter.
TEST DESCRIPTION:
diagnostic chart.
1. Install the fuel pressure adapter in-line at the

throttle body.
Ignition ON, pump pressure should be 28-32 PSI

(234-207 kPa). This pressure is controlled by
spring pressure within the regulator assembly.
3. Pressure that leaks down is caused by one of the
following:
Fuel pressure regulator valve leaking.
Injector(s) sticking open.
Check valve in fuel pump leaking.
4. An injector that is stuck open will leak or drip fuel

into the plenum of intake manifold, which may
saturate or foul spark plug(s). In order to determine which injector is leaking, remove the flame
arrestor and observe both fuel injectors with key
on and engine off.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Throttle Body Injection Fuel System Diagnosis (Continued)

Chart A-7: (2 of 6)
NOTE: THE IGNITION MAY HAVE TO BE CYCLED
ON MORE THAN ONCE TO OBTAIN MAXIMUM
PRESSURE. ALSO, IT IS NORMAL FOR THE PRESSURE
FROM
CHART A-3
(2 OF 4)
TO DROP SLIGHTLY WHEN THE PUMP STOPS.
INSTALL FUEL PRESSURE GAUGE, 91-16850 AND FUEL PRESSURE ADAPTER

IGNITION ON. FUEL PUMP WILL RUN FOR ABOUT 2 SECONDS.
NOTE FUEL PRESSURE, WITH PUMP RUNNING, SHOULD BE
28-32 PSI (193-221 kPa) AND HOLD STEADY WHEN PUMP STOPS.
NOT OK
OK
NO TROUBLE FOUND.
REVIEW THE TROUBLESHOOTING SECTION.
PRESSURE BUT
NOT HOLDING
REMOVE FLAME
ARRESTOR AND VISUALLY
CHECK FOR LEAKAGE
FROM INJECTORS
PRESSURE ABOVE
32 PSI (221 kPa)
SEE
CHART A-7
4 OF 6
NO LEAKAGE
LEAKAGE
PRESSURE BELOW
28 PSI (193 kPa)
REPLACE LEAKING
INJECTOR
NO
PRESSURE
IGNITION OFF.
APPLY 12 VOLTS TO FUEL
PUMP CONNECTOR (GRAY
WIRE).
LISTEN FOR FUEL PUMP
RUNNING.
INSTALL FUEL SHUT-OFF TOOL

IGNITION ON.
BLOCK FUEL RETURN LINE USING
PRESSURE SHOULD HOLD
HOLDS
NOT HOLDING
FAULTY FUEL PRESSURE
REGULATOR.
CHECK:
LEAKING PUMP FITTINGS,
OR HOSE.
REPLACE FUEL PUMP
PUMP RUNS
PUMP NOT RUNNING
CHECK FOR:
DISCONNECTED HOSE
CHECK FOR:
OPEN PUMP GROUND
CKT 150.
IF OK
IF OK
REPLACE ELECTRIC FUEL PUMP.
Index
90-823224--2 796

Chart A-7 (3 of 6)
PRESSURE REGULATOR
WATER SEPARATING
FUEL FILTER
SHUT-OFF TOOL
IMPORTANT: Check for contaminated fuel tank,

stuck anti-siphon valve or fuel system vacuum
leak anywhere before the electrical fuel pump
and after the fuel pressure regulator.
2. Restricting the fuel return line (Shut-Off Valve) allows the fuel pressure to build above regulated
pressure. With battery voltage applied to the fuel
pump, pressure should rise to 60 PSI (414 kPa)
as the fuel return hose is shut off with special tool.
TEST DESCRIPTION:
NOTE: Do not allow fuel pressure to exceed 60 PSI

(414 kPa); damage to the pressure regulator may result.

diagnostic chart.
1. Pressure less than 28 PSI (193 kPa) falls into two
areas:
Regulated pressure less than 28 PSI (193 kPa).

The system will be running lean. Also, hard starting when cold and overall poor performance will
be noticed.
Restricted flow causing pressure drop. Normally,

an engine with a fuel pressure of less than 24 PSI
(165 kPa) at idle will not be driveable. However,
if the pressure drop occurs only while underway,
the engine will surge then stop running as pressure begins to drop rapidly. This is most likely
caused by a restricted fuel line or plugged water
3. This test determines if the high fuel pressure is

due to a restricted fuel return line or a pressure
regulator problem.
Index
90-823224--2 796

Chart A-7: (4 of 6)
* NOTE: THE IGNITION MAY HAVE TO BE CYCLED
ON MORE THAN ONCE TO OBTAIN MAXIMUM PRESSURE.
CONTINUED FROM
CHART A-7
(2 OF 6)

3
CHECK FOR RESTRICTED
FUEL LINES.
OK
IGNITION OFF.
BLOCK FUEL RETURN LINE FOLLOWING
INSTRUCTIONS.
CYCLE IGNITION ON. PRESSURE
SHOULD RISE ABOVE 32 PSI (231 kPa).
ABOVE 32 PSI
(231 kPa)
FAULTY PRESSURE
REGULATOR.
DISCONNECT FUEL RETURN LINE.

ATTACH FLEX HOSE TO RETURN LINE. INSERT THE OTHER END
IN AN APPROVED GASOLINE CONTAINER. NOTE FUEL PRES
SURE WITHIN 2 SECONDS AFTER IGNITION IS TURNED ON.
NOT OK
REPAIR FUEL LINE
AND RECHECK.
28-32 PSI (193-231 kPa)
CHECK FOR RESTRICTED FUEL

PRESSURE REGULATOR TO
POINT WHERE FUEL LINE WAS
DISCONNECTED.
LOCATE AND CORRECT

RESTRICTION IN WATER SEPARATING FUEL FILTER
IF LINE OK, REPLACE FUEL

PRESSURE REGULATOR.

FAULTY
FUEL PUMP
Index
90-823224--2 796

Chart A-7 (5 of 6)
TO
SYSTEM
RELAY
902 RED
ECM
339 PNK/BLK
FUEL PUMP
RELAY FUSE
15A
87a
FUEL
PUMP
RELAY
30
85
86
465 DK GRN/WHT
J2-9
FUEL PUMP
RELAY DRIVER
450 BLK/WHT
87
120 GRY
150 BLK
FUEL PUMP
TEST DESCRIPTION:
diagnostic chart.
1. This step checks if there is power to the fuel pump
relay.
2. Bypassing the relay circuit should cause the fuel
pump to run. This step should identify if the fault
is in the relay or in the fuel pump circuit.
3. This step checks if there is an open in the ground
circuit.
4. This step checks if the ECM is functioning properly.
Index
90-823224--2 796

Chart A-7: (6 of 6)
FROM CHART
A-7 (4 OF 6)
IGNITION OFF.
REMOVE FUEL PUMP RELAY.
IGNITION ON.
WITH TEST LIGHT CONNECTED TO
GROUND, PROBE FUEL PUMP RELAY
CONNECTOR CAVITY 30 TEST LIGHT
SHOULD BE ON. IS IT?
YES
NO
IGNITION OFF.
USING FUSED JUMPER, CONNECT
TERMINALS 30 AND 87 OF FUEL
PUMP RELAY CONNECTOR TOGETHER.
IGNITION ON.
FUEL PUMP SHOULD RUN. DOES IT?
CHECK FUEL PUMP RELAY FUSE.

IS IT OK?
YES
REPAIR OPEN CKT
339 OR 902
YES
CHECK FOR:
OPEN PUMP GROUND CKT 150. IF OK,
REPLACE FUEL PUMP.
NO
YES
CONNECT TEST LIGHT TO GROUND

AND PROBE CAVITY 85 OF THE FUEL
PUMP RELAY CONNECTOR.
IGNITION ON.
TEST LIGHT SHOULD BE ON FOR
2 SECONDS AND THEN GO OFF.
DOES IT?
REPAIR OPEN
GROUND CKT 450
YES
REPAIR SHORT TO
GROUND IN CKT 339
AND REPLACE FUSE
NO
IGNITION OFF.
DISCONNECT FUSED JUMPER.
B+ AND PROBE CAVITY 86 OF THE
FUEL PUMP RELAY CONNECTOR.
NO
NO
REPLACE FUEL PUMP RELAY AND RETEST.

IF STILL NO PRESSURE, CHECK THE FOLLOWING:
VAPOR LOCK CONDITION.
DISCONNECTED HOSES.
PROPER FUEL LEVEL.
IF OK, REPLACE FUEL PUMP.
CHECK FOR OPEN

IN CKT 465. IF OK,
REPLACE ECM.
Index
90-823224--2 796
EFI System/Ignition Relay Check

(1 of 2)
TO IN-LINE BOAT HARNESS
50A
CIRCUIT
BREAKER
90 AMP
FUSE
86
85
30
87
15A
INJ/ECM/KS
MODULE FUSE
10A
Battery voltage is constantly supplied to terminal 30
of the system relay. When the ignition switch is
moved to the run position, battery voltage is supplied
to terminal 86 of the system relay. The pull-in coil is
then energized, creating a magnetic field which
closes the contacts of the system relay. Voltage and
current are then supplied to the ignition coil, injectors,
ECM and fuel pump relay fuse through terminal 87 of
the system relay.
TEST DESCRIPTION:
2. This step ensures that battery and ignition voltage are available at the relay. An open or shorted
condition in either supply would cause the relay
not to operate.
3. This step ensures that a good ground exists to
terminal 85 of the system relay. An open ground
to this terminal would not allow current to flow
through the pull-in coil.
4. At this point, the circuits leading to the relay have
been checked, and a careful visual inspection of
the relay terminals should be preformed prior to
replacement of the system relay.

diagnostic chart.
1. This step identifies if the relay is functioning properly. If a fault in the relay circuit were present, voltage would not be available at terminal B of the
ignition coil.
Index
90-823224--2 796
EFI System / Ignition Relay Check (Continued)

(2 of 2)
1
IGNITION ON.
USING A TEST LIGHT CONNECTED TO
GROUND, PROBE IGNITION COIL
CONNECTOR TERMINAL B.
LIGHT SHOULD BE ON.
IS IT?
NO
YES
IGNITION OFF.
REMOVE SYSTEM RELAY CONNECTOR.
IGNITION ON.
WITH TEST LIGHT STILL CONNECTED TO
GROUND, PROBE RELAY CONNECTOR
CAVITIES 86 AND 30.
TEST LIGHT SHOULD LIGHT ON BOTH
TERMINAL CAVITIES.
DID IT?
REFER TO IGNITION
SYSTEM CHECK CHART
YES

(B+) AND PROBE RELAY CONNECTOR CAVITY 85.
TEST LIGHT SHOULD LIGHT. DID IT?
YES
NO
CHECK RELAY CONNECTOR FOR

POOR CONTACT OR
CORROSION. IF OK, REPLACE
SYSTEM RELAY.
REPAIR OPEN OR SHORT

TO GROUND IN CIRCUIT
THAT DID NOT LIGHT
NO
REPAIR OPEN OR GROUND
CKT 150 AND RETEST
Index
90-823224--2 796
Ignition System Check

(1 of 2)
IGNITION CONTROL
BYPASS
DIST. REFERENCE LOW
TO TACH
TO DISTRIBUTOR
TEST DESCRIPTION:
diagnostic chart.
4. Checks for a shorted module or grounded circuit

from the ignition coil to the module. The distributor module should be turned OFF, so normal voltage should be about 12 volts.
1. Two spark plug wires are checked, to ensure that

an open is not present in a spark plug wire.
If spark occurs with Ignition Control (IC) connector disconnected, magnetic field output is too low
for Ignition Control (IC) operation.
2. A spark indicates the problem must be the distributor cap or rotor.
If the module is turned ON, the voltage would be

low, but above 1 volt. This could cause the ignition coil to fail from excessive heat.
With an open ignition coil primary winding, a
small amount of voltage will leak through the
module from the Battery Positive (B+) to the
Tach terminal.
3. Normally, there should be battery voltage at the

C and + terminals. Low voltage would indicate
an open or a high resistance circuit from the distributor to the coil or ignition switch. If C terminal
voltage was low, but + terminal voltage is 10
volts or more, circuit from C terminal to ignition
coil or ignition coil primary winding is open.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Ignition System Check(1 of 2)

1
DISCONNECT TACH BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH THE TEST.

CHECK SPARK AT PLUG WIRE USING AN INDUCTIVE PICKUP TIMING LIGHT
WHILE CRANKING. A FLASHING LIGHT INDICATES SPARK. (IF NO SPARK ON FIRST
WIRE, CHECK SECOND WIRE.) A FEW SPARKS AND THEN NOTHING
IS CONSIDERED NO SPARK.
NO SPARK
1A
SPARK
DISCONNECT 4 TERMINAL CONNECTOR

ON DISTRIBUTOR AND CHECK FOR
SPARK.
CHECK FUEL, SPARK PLUGS, ETC.

SEE TROUBLESHOOTING.
NO SPARK
SPARK
CHECK FOR SPARK AT COIL WIRE WITH TIMING

LIGHT WHILE CRANKING. (LEAVE TIMING LIGHT
CONNECTED TO COIL WIRE FOR STEPS 3-6).
REPLACE MAGNETIC
SHAFT ASSEMBLY.
NO SPARK
SPARK
DISCONNECT DISTRIBUTOR 2 WIRE TERMINAL

C/+ PNK/BRN CONNECTOR.
IGNITION SWITCH ON, ENGINE STOPPED.
CHECK VOLTAGE AT + BRN AND C PNK TERMI
NALS OF DISTRIBUTOR HARNESS CONNECTION.
INSPECT CAP FOR WATER,

CRACKS, ETC. IF OK,
REPLACE ROTOR.
UNDER 10 VOLTS C
PNKTERMINAL ONLY
BOTH TERMINALS
UNDER 10 VOLTS
BOTH TERMINALS 10
VOLTS OR MORE
RECONNECT DISTRIBUTOR 2
TERMINAL CONNECTOR.
WITH IGNITION ON, CHECK VOLTAGE FROM TACH. TERMINAL TO
GROUND
REPAIR WIRE FROM MODULE + TERMINAL TO B

TERMINAL OF BLACK IGNITION COIL CONNECTOR
OR PRIMARY CKT. TO IGNITION SWITCH.
CHECK FOR OPEN OR

GROUND IN CKT. FROM C
TERMINAL TO IGNITION COIL.
IF CKT IS OK, FAULT IS IGNITION COIL OR CONNECTION.
OVER 10 VOLTS
UNDER 1 VOLT
1 TO 10 VOLTS
CONNECT TEST LIGHT FROM TACH.

TERMINAL TO GROUND.
CRANK ENGINE AND OBSERVE
LIGHT.
REPAIR OPEN TACH.

LEAD OR CONNECTION AND REPEAT
TEST #4.
REPLACE MODULE AND

CHECK FOR SPARK FROM
COIL AS IN STEP 6.
SPARK
SYSTEM
OK
CHART CONTINUED
ON PAGE 77
NO
SPARK
REPLACE
IGNITION
COIL.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Ignition System Check

(2 of 2)
IGNITION CONTROL
BYPASS
DIST. REFERENCE LOW
TO IN-LINE HARNESS (TACH)
TO DISTRIBUTOR
TEST DESCRIPTION:
diagnostic chart.
5. Applying a voltage (1.5 to 8 volts) to module terminal P should turn the module ON and the
Tach terminal voltage should drop to about 7-9
volts. This test will determine whether the module
or coil is faulty or if the pick-up coil is not generating the proper signal to turn the module ON.
This test can be performed by using a DC battery
with a rating of 1.5 to 8 volts. The use of the test
light is mainly to allow the P terminal to be
probed more easily. Some digital multimeter can
also be used to trigger the module by selecting
ohms, usually the diode position. In this position,
the meter may have a voltage across its terminals
which can be used to trigger the module. The voltage in the ohms position can be checked by using
a second meter or by checking the manufacturers specification of the tool being used.
6. This should turn OFF the module and cause a

spark. If no spark occurs, the fault is most likely
in the ignition coil because most module problems would have been found before this point in
the procedure.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Ignition System Check (2 of 2)

TEST LIGHT
CHART CONTINUED
FROM PAGE 75
TO DC
POWER
SUPPLY
(1.5 to 8 V)
LIGHT
BLINKS
LIGHT ON
STEADY
Fig. 1
DISCONNECT DISTRIBUTOR 4 TERMINAL CONNECTOR.

REMOVE DISTRIBUTOR CAP.
DISCONNECT PICK-UP COIL CONNECTOR FROM MODULE.
CONNECT VOLTMETER FROM TACH. TERMINAL TO GROUND.
IGNITION ON.
INSULATE A TEST LIGHT PROBE TO 1/4, FROM TIP AND NOTE
VOLTAGE, AS TEST LIGHT IS MOMENTARILY CONNECTED FROM A
VOLTAGE SOURCE (1.5 TO 8 V) TO MODULE TERMINAL P (CHART
1 OF 2 PAGE 78).
REPLACE IGNITION COIL AND

RECHECK
FOR SPARK WITH TIMING
LIGHT. IF STILL
NO SPARK, REINSTALL ORIGINAL COIL
AND REPLACE DISTRIBUTOR
MODULE.
VOLTAGE DROPS
NO DROP IN VOLTAGE
CHECK FOR SPARK FROM COIL WIRE

WITH TIMING LIGHT AS TEST LIGHT IS
REMOVED FROM MODULE TERMINAL
CHECK MODULE GROUND.

IF OK, REPLACE MODULE.
SPARK
NO SPARK
IS ROTATING POLE
PIECE STILL MAGNETIZED?
REPLACE IGNITION COIL

AND REPEAT STEP 5.
NO SPARK
SPARK
YES
IGNITION COIL REMOVED IS OK,

REINSTALL COIL AND CHECK COIL
WIRE FROM DIST. CAP. IF OK, REPLACE DISTRIBUTOR MODULE.
NO
SYSTEM OK
CHECK PICK-UP COIL OR
CONNECTIONS (COIL
RESISTANCE SHOULD BE
500-1500 OHMS AND
NOT GROUNDED.)
REPLACE POLE
PIECE AND
SHAFT ASSEMBLY.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Idle Air Control (IAC) Functional Test

(1 of 2)
IDLE AIR
CONTROL
(IAC) VALVE
441 BLU/WHT
442 BLU/BLK
443 GRN/WHT
444 GRN/BLK
DIAGNOSTIC AIDS:
The ECM controls idle speed to a calculated, desired RPM based on sensor inputs and actual engine RPM, determined by the time between successive ignition reference pulses from the ignition
module. The ECM uses four circuits to move an Idle
Air Control (IAC) valve, which allows varying
amounts of air flow into the intake manifold, controlling idle speed.
Check for vacuum leaks, unconnected or brittle vacuum hoses, cuts, etc. Examine manifold and throttle
body gaskets for proper seal. Check for cracked intake manifold/plenum. Check open, shorts, or poor
connections to IAC valve in CKTs 441, 442, 443 and
444.
IMPORTANT: Improper IAC readings or improper

idle speed can result from other faults ie: flooding VST, fouled spark plugs, bad sensors. These
items should be in proper working order to ensure correct diagnosis.
An open, short, or poor connection in CKTs 441, 442,

443, or 444 will result in improper idle control and
may cause improper idle.
An IAC valve which is stopped and cannot respond
to the ECM, a throttle stop screw which has been
tampered with, or a damaged throttle body or linkage
could cause improper idle.
TEST DESCRIPTION:
functional check chart.
1. This step determines if the IAC valve is functioning properly.
2. This step determines if the circuitry or the IAC
valve is faulty.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Idle Air Control Functional Test

(2 of 2)
START ENGINE, ALLOW IDLE TO STABILIZE, AND RECORD ENGINE RPM.
PLACE ENGINE IN BASE TIMING OR SERVICE MODE.. DOES A
1A
NOTICEABLE DROP IN RPM OCCUR OR DOES ENGINE DIE? SEE NOTE.
YES
1B
NOTE IN STEP 1A:

A 502/BLACKHAWK MAY NOT
DIE, BUT IDLE WILL DROP
DRASTICALLY.
EXIT SERVICE MODE AND

RESTART ENGINE. ENGINE SPEED SHOULD
GRADUALLY RETURN WITHIN 75 RPM OF
RECORDED RPM WITHIN 30 SECONDS.
DOES IT?
NO
YES
IAC CIRCUIT FUNCTIONING PROPERLY.

UNPLUG IAC CONNECTOR
IF CONNECTED.
RESTART ENGINE WITH A TEST LIGHT

CONNECTED TO GROUND.
PROBE EACH ONE OF THE FOUR IAC

TERMINALS, AND THE TEST LIGHT
SHOULD BLINK WHEN TOUCHED TO
ALL TERMINALS. DOES IT?
NO
CHECK IAC CIRCUIT

THAT DID NOT BLINK FOR
OPEN OR SHORTED
FROM IAC HARNESS TO
J-2 CONNECTOR
CIRCUIT. IF OK,
REPLACE ECM.
YES
STICKY OR
FAULTY
IAC VALVE.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Lanyard Stop Circuit Check (Emergency Stop) Circuit Check

(1 of 2)
ECM
NORMALLY
OPEN
IN LINE 2 WAY
CONNECTOR
A
B
J1-21
942 PNK
LANYARD STOP SWITCH CIRCUIT

1996 AND EARLIER MODELS
BLK
LANYARD STOP SWITCH
NOTE: Some models are no longer equipped with

this option in the wiring harness. Connection of the
lanyard stop switch (if equipped) is performed at the
instrument panel.
The Lanyard Stop circuit is a safety feature incorporated in boats to stop the engine in the event that the
operator is removed from a safe control position during normal operation. The Lanyard Stop switch is a
normally open switch that is physically connected to
the operator by a tether. In the event that the operator
is removed from a control position, the tether connected to the switch will be pulled out, closing the
switch. This information from the Lanyard Stop
switch will then be used by the ECM to cease engine
operation until the position of the switch is restored
to its normally open position and the ignition key
switch has been cycled.
4. This step identifies which half of the circuitry is

shorted to ground; i.e., ECM side or switch side.
5. This step identifies if the circuitry or ECM is the
cause of the short to ground.
DIAGNOSTIC AIDS:
An intermittent problem may be caused by a poor or
corroded connection, rubbed through wire connection, a wire that is broken inside the insulation, or a
corroded wire.
Any circuitry that is suspected as causing the intermittent complaint should be thoroughly checked for
backed-out terminals, improper mating, broken
locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, poor
terminal-to-wiring connections, corroded terminals
and/or wiring, or physical damage to the wiring harness.
TEST DESCRIPTION:
1. If a Lanyard Stop was recognized by the ECM,
cycling the ignition will clear the Lanyard Stop
condition in the ECM.
2. This step checks to see if the Lanyard Stop switch
is in the correct position. If the switch is closed, a
Lanyard Stop condition will exist.
3. This step checks for Lanyard Stop switch or Lanyard Stop circuitry that is shorted to ground.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Lanyard Stop (Emergency Stop) Circuit Check

(2 of 2)
NOTE: THIS CHART ASSUMES THE ENGINE CRANKS BUT WILL NOT START.
TURN IGNITION OFF.

TURN IGNITION ON AND CRANK ENGINE DOES ENGINE START?
NO
YES
CHECK LANYARD STOP SWITCH TO MAKE
LANYARD STOP CIRCUIT FUNCTIONING

PROPERLY. REFER TO DIAGNOSTIC AIDS
ON FACING PAGE.
SURE SWITCH IS IN ITS NORMAL POSITION.

IS IT?
YES
NO
NO
IGNITION OFF.
DISCONNECT 2 WAY HARNESS CONNECTOR.
USING A DVOM, MEASURE RESISTANCE
POSITION SWITCH CORRECTLY AND

REPEAT STEP #1.
BETWEEN PIN A (CKT 942) AND PIN B (GRD) OF

OF 2 WAY CONNECTOR. RESISTANCE SHOULD
BE LESS THAN 5K OHMS IS IT?
RESISTANCE SHOULD BE INFINITE ON LANYARD
STOP HARNESS SIDE. IS IT?
YES
YES
NO
NO
RESISTANCE LOWER ON
ECM SIDE OF CONNECTOR.
DISCONNECT ECM J-1
CONNECTOR.
MEASURE RESISTANCE
BETWEEN PIN J1-21 OF
ECM CONNECTOR AND
GROUND. RESISTANCE
SHOULD BE INFINITE.
IS IT?
YES
YES
YES
FAULTY ECM. REPLACE ECM

AND RETEST LANYARD STOP
CIRCUIT.
RESISTANCE LOWER ON
LANYARD STOP SWITCH
SIDE OF CONNECTOR.
BASIC HEI PROBLEM.

REFER TO IGNITION
SYSTEM CHECK.
CHECK FOR FAULTY

LANYARD STOP SWITCH.
IF OK, REPAIR SHORT TO
GROUND IN CKT 942
AND RETEST.
NO
NO
NO
REPAIR SHORT TO GROUND

IN CKT 942 BETWEEN ECM
J1 CONNECTOR AND LANYARD STOP SWITCH.
Index
90-823224--2 796

(1 of 2)
TO BUZZER
TO IGN
TO AUDIO
WARNING
SWITCHES
TO TACH
TAN/
BLU
PPL
PUR
BLU/
TAN
GRY
121 TAN
3 PNK
TO SYSTEM
RELAY TERM
87
A
COOLANT OVERTEMP
(TO BUZZER)
121 WHT
TO
IGN
COIL
LOW OIL PRESSURE/

LOW I/O FLUID (TO BUZZER)
(TRANS. TEMP. MIE)
J1-6
931 BRN
The audio warning buzzer function of the ECM is
used to alert the operator of a critical engine function
parameter. Used in conjunction with the discrete input circuitry, the ECM will supply ignition current to
activate the buzzer if a change of state is indicated by
any of the discrete inputs. When a discrete switch
changes state from normally open to closed, the
ECM interprets that an anomaly is present and will
complete the ground to the affected buzzer circuit,
energizing the buzzer.
TEST DESCRIPTION:
functional check chart.
1. This step performs a functional check of the
buzzer circuit.
2. This step identifies a short to ground in the control
circuit.
TO LOW OIL PRESSURE

AND GEAR LUBE SWITCHES
(TRANS. TEMP. MIE)
4. This step identifies if the fault is a short in the harness or a faulty ECM.
5. This step checks for an open in the circuitry from
the harness connector to the ignition fuse.
6. This step identifies if the open circuit is due to a
faulty ECM or warning buzzer circuitry.
DIAGNOSTIC AIDS:
corroded wire.
and/or wiring, or physical damage to the wiring harness.
3. This step identifies an open in the control circuit.
Index
90-823224--2 796

(2 of 2)
1
IGNITION ON.
BUZZER SHOULD SOUND AND THEN
SILENCE WITHIN 2 SECONDS.
DOES IT?
NO
YES
NO PROBLEM FOUND. REFER TO DIAGNOSTIC AIDS
ON FACING PAGE.
BUZZER REMAINS ON CONSTANTLY

WITH IGNITION ON.
BUZZER NEVER SOUNDS.
DISCONNECT HARNESS CONNECTOR TO

BUZZER, BUZZER SHOULD SILENCE.
DOES IT?
CHECK CIRCUIT BREAKER IN

STARTING/CHARGING SYSTEM.
YES
NO
NO
REPAIR SHORT TO
GROUND IN
AFFECTED CIRCUIT
BETWEEN BUZZER
AND CONNECTOR.
RECONNECT
HARNESS
CONNECTOR.
IGNITION OFF.
DISCONNECT ECM
J2 CONNECTOR.
IGNITION ON.
BUZZER SHOULD BE
SILENT. IS IT?
YES
CHECK FOR
SHORT TO
GROUND IN
AFFECTED CIRCUIT. IF CIRCUIT IS
NOT SHORTED, REPLACE FUSE.
DISCONNECT
HARNESS CONNECTOR.
USING FUSED JUMPER
CONNECTED TO
GROUND, PROBE
CONNECTOR (BUZZER
SIDE) OF AFFECTED
CIRCUIT. BUZZER
SHOULD SOUND.
DOES IT?
NO
YES
NO
YES
REPAIR SHORT
TO GROUND
BETWEEN
HARNESS
CONNECTOR
AND ECM J2
CONNECTOR.
FAULTY ECM.
REPLACE ECM
AND RETEST
BUZZER CIRCUIT.
REPLACE BUZZER
AND RECHECK. IF
BUZZER STILL DOES
NOT SOUND, REPAIR
OPEN IN AFFECTED
CIRCUIT.
IGNITION OFF.
RECONNECT HARNESS
CONNECTOR.
DISCONNECT ECM J2
CONNECTOR.
WITH FUSED JUMPER
STILL CONNECTED TO
GROUND, PROBE ECM
HARNESS ON AFFECTED
CIRCUITS. BUZZER
SHOULD SOUND.
DOES IT?
YES
NO
FAULTY ECM.
REPLACE ECM
AND RETEST.
REPAIR
OPEN WIRE
OR FAULTY
CONNECTOR
IN AFFECTED
CIRCUIT.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Discrete Input Circuit Check (Power Reduction Mode) (Non-Scan)

(1 of 2)
TO SYSTEM
RELAY TERM 87
TO BUZZER
TO IGN
TO AUDIO
WARNING
SWITCHES
TO TACH
TAN/
BLU
PPL
PUR
121 TAN
D
3 PNK
BLU/
TAN
GRY
A
COOLANT OVERTEMP
(TO BUZZER)
121 WHT
LOW OIL PRESSURE/

LOW I/O FLUID (TO BUZZER)
TO
IGN
COIL
931 BRN
J1-6
TO LOW OIL PRESSURE,

GEAR LUBE SWITCHES
AND TRANS. TEMPERATURE
(MIE)
TEST DESCRIPTION:
Several discrete switch inputs are utilized by the fuel

injection system to identify abnormal conditions that
may affect engine operation. A pull-up switch is currently used in conjunction with the ECM to detect critical conditions to engine operation.
NOTE:Refer to Section 4C to test transmission temperature switch.
If a switch changes states from its normal at-rest

position, that is normally open to closed, the ECM
senses a change in voltage and responds by entering
power reduction mode. (And activating the audio
warning system.)
1. This step checks if wiring from the engine

switches to the ECM is not shorted to ground.
2. This step ensures that the discrete switches are
functioning properly by changing state.(I/O oil
level, transmission temperature will not change
state.)
DIAGNOSTIC AIDS:
NOTE: Power reduction mode is not used 1997 and

later models.
Check engine oil and I/O fluid levels, transmission fluid, overheat.
This engine protection feature allows the driver full

engine power up to 2800 RPM, but disables four fuel
injectors above 2800 RPM until the engine RPM
drops to 1200 RPM.
If above diagnostics are performed and no

change in performance is made, refer to Troubleshooting.
This feature allows the operator a comfortable maneuvering speed while removing the possibility of
high RPM engine operation until the problem is corrected.

corroded connection, rubbed through wire connection, or a wire that is broken inside the insulation.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Discrete Input Circuit Check

(2 of 2)
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
DISCONNECT TAN/BLU WIRE FROM OIL PRESSURE SWITCH. START ENGINE, THERE SHOULD BE
RESISTANCE (NO CONTINUITY) FROM OIL PRESSURE SWITCH AND GROUND (ENGINE BLOCK).
ENGINE OFF, IGNITION ON, CHECK RESISTANCE FROM OIL PRESSURE SWITCH AND GROUND
(ENGINE BLOCK). RESISTANCE SHOULD BE NEAR ZERO (CONTINUITY CIRCUIT).
NO
YES
DISCONNECT ECM J1 CONNECTOR FROM ECM. CHECK
FOR CONTINUITY BETWEEN J1-6 AND TAN/BLU WIRE
FROM OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
REPLACE FAULTY
SWITCH IN CIRCUIT.
NO
YES
DISCRETE INPUT CIRCUIT
FUNCTIONING PROPERLY.
DISCONNECT IN-LINE HARNESS AND CHECK CONTINUITY ON TAN/BLU

WIRE FROM OIL PRESSURE SWITCH TO IN-LINE HARNESS CONNECTOR
NO
YES
CHECK CONTINUITY ON TAN/BLU WIRE FROM IN-LINE HARNESS
CONNECTOR TO J1-6 TERMINAL ON ECM CONNECTOR
REPAIR SHORT
IN CIRCUIT.
YES
NO
REPLACE ECM
AND RETEST.
REPAIR SHORT
IN CIRCUIT.
I/O LEVEL SWITCH (GEAR LUBE MONITOR)

DISCONNECT TAN/BLU WIRE FROM I/O OIL LEVEL SWITCH. START ENGINE, CHECK RESISTANCE
FROM TAN/BLU WIRE AND BLK GROUND WIRE. RESISTANCE SHOULD BE NEAR ZERO.
NO
YES
DISCONNECT ECM J1 CONNECTOR FROM ECM. CHECK
FOR CONTINUITY BETWEEN J1-6 AND TAN/BLU WIRE
FROM OIL LEVEL SWITCH
REPLACE GEAR
LUBE BOTTLE.
NO
YES
DISCRETE INPUT CIRCUIT
FUNCTIONING PROPERLY.
DISCONNECT IN-LINE HARNESS AND CHECK CONTINUITY ON TAN/BLU

WIRE FROM OIL LEVEL SWITCH TO IN-LINE HARNESS CONNECTOR.
NO
YES
CHECK CONTINUITY ON TAN/BLU WIRE FROM IN-LINE HARNESS
CONNECTOR TO J1-6 TERMINAL ON ECM CONNECTOR.
YES
REPLACE ECM
AND RETEST.
REPAIR SHORT
IN CIRCUIT.
NO
REPAIR SHORT
IN CIRCUIT.
REFER TO REPAIR PORTION OF THIS SECTION FOR TESTING OF TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SWITCH.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Diagnostics-Without Scan Tool

Code 14: Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor Circuit (Non-Scan)
(1 of 2)
ENGINE
ENGINE
The Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor uses
a thermistor to control the signal voltage to the ECM.
The ECM applies a voltage on CKT 410 to the sensor.
When the engine coolant is cold, the sensor (thermistor) resistance is high; therefore, the ECM will see
high signal voltage.
As the engine coolant warms, the sensor resistance
becomes less, and the voltage drops.
TEST DESCRIPTION:
diagnostic chart.
1. This step checks if there is a problem with the
ECM and wiring or if the problem is the coolant
sensor.
2. Check the harness terminals thoroughly for loose
connection. If the resistance or the coolant sensor is monitored, the resistance should steadily
decrease as the engine coolant warms up. The
resistance reading would stabilize when the thermostat opens.
3. This step will isolate the problem to CKT 410 (5

volt reference) or to the sensor ground.
4. This step identifies if CKT 410 is open or shorted
to ground.
DIAGNOSTIC AIDS:
corroded wire.
and/or wiring, or physical damage to the wiring harness. After repairs, clear codes following Clearing
Codes in ECM Self-Diagnostics. Failure to do so
may result in codes not properly being cleared.
Check harness routing for a potential short to ground
in CKT 410. See Intermittents in Troubleshooting.
IMPORTANT: If replacing the ECT, tighten hand
tight plus 2-1/2 turns maximum.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Code 14: ECT Circuit (Non-Scan)

(2 of 2)
1
IGNITION OFF.
DISCONNECT ECT SENSOR CONNECTOR.
IGNITION ON.
CONNECT DVM ACROSS COOLANT SENSOR HARNESS TERMINALS.
IS VOLTAGE ABOVE 4 VOLTS?
NO
YES
CONNECT POSITIVE DVM LEAD FROM HARNESS

TERMINAL B CKT 410 (5 VOLT REFERENCE).
CONNECT NEGATIVE DVM LEAD TO A GOOD
GROUND ON ENGINE.
IS VOLTAGE ABOVE 4 VOLTS?
NO
INTERMITTENT CONNECTIONS
OR
FAULTY ECT SENSOR. REFER
TO DIAGNOSTIC AID CHART
FOR SENSOR VALUES
YES
OPEN SENSOR GROUND CKT 814
OR
FAULTY CONNECTION AT ECM
OR FAULTY ECM.
REMOVE DOVM.
IGNITION ON.
CONNECT A TEST LIGHT TO BATTERY
POSITIVE (B+).
TOUCH TEST LIGHT TO SENSOR
HARNESS TERMINAL B (CKT 410).
IS TEST LIGHT ON?
NO
YES
CKT 410 OPEN

OR
OR
FAULTY ECM.
DISCONNECT ECMJ-1
CONNECTOR.
IS TEST LIGHT ON?
YES
CKT 410 SHORTED
TO GROUND.
DIAGNOSTIC AID
NO
CKT 410 SHORTED TO SENSOR GROUND
OR
FAULTY ECM.
ECT SENSOR
TEMPERATURE TO RESISTANCE VALUES
(APPROXIMATE)
F
210
160
100
70
40
20
0
-40
C
100
70
38
20
4
-7
-18
-40
OHMS
185
450
1,800
3,400
7,500
13,500
25,000
100,700
Index
90-823224--2 796
Code 21: Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Circuit (Non-Scan)

(1 Of 2)
B
B
TP
A
A
DIAGNOSTIC AIDS:
The Throttle Position (TP) sensor provides a voltage

signal that changes, relative to the throttle blade. Signal voltage should vary from about .7 volts at idle to
about 4.5 volts at Wide Open Throttle (W.O.T.).

corroded wire.
TEST DESCRIPTION:
diagnostic chart.
1. This step checks for a voltage from terminal C
(5 volt reference) to terminal A (sensor ground).
2. This step will identify if the problem is in the supply or ground circuit.
3. This step determines if the TP sensor signal circuit to the ECM is open.
may result in codes not properly being cleared. If
Code 23 is also set, check CKT 813 for faulty wiring
or connections. Check terminals at sensor for good
contact.
4. This step completes the test for the ECM and wiring. If the test light is not ON, the TP sensor has
an internal problem.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Code 21: Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Circuit (Non Scan)

1
IGNITION OFF.
DISCONNECT THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR.
IGNITION ON.
CONNECT A DVM FROM HARNESS TERMINAL A
(5 VOLT REFERENCE TO HARNESS TERMINAL B
SENSOR GROUND).
IS VOLTAGE READING OVER 4 VOLTS?
YES
NO
CONNECT DVM FROM HARNESS TERMINAL A

(CKT 416) TO HARNESS TERMINAL C (THROTTLE
POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL, CKT 417).
CONNECT DVM FROM THROTTLE POSITION

SENSOR HARNESS TERMINAL A TO A GOOD
GROUND ON ENGINE.
IS VOLTAGE OVER 4 VOLTS?
YES
NO
NO
FAULTY CONNECTION
AT ECM
OR
CKT 416 OPEN
OR
SHORTED TO GROUND
OR
FAULTY ECM.
IGNITION OFF.
CONNECT A TEST LIGHT
TO B+ BATTERY POSITIVE.
TOUCH TEST LIGHT TO
HARNESS TERMINAL C
(THROTTLE POSITION
SENSOR SIGNAL).
IS TEST LIGHT ON?
CONNECT DVM
BETWEEN HARNESS
TERMINAL C AND
ENGINE GROUND.
IS VOLTAGE OVER 4
VOLTS?
YES
NO
CKT 417 SHORTED

TO VOLTAGE.
OPEN CKT 417

OR
FAULTY CONNECTION
AT ECM
OR
FAULTY ECM.
YES
NO
THROTTLE POSITION
SENSOR FAULTY.
DISCONNECT ECM.
TOUCH TEST LIGHT
CONNECTED TO B+ (BAT
TERY POSITIVE) TO
HARNESS TERMINAL C.
IS TEST LIGHT ON?
YES
NO
CKT 417 SHORTED

TO GROUND.
FAULTY ECM.
YES
FAULTY CONNECTION
AT ECM
OR CKT 813 OPEN
OR
FAULTY ECM.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Code 23: Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Circuit (Non-Scan)

(1 Of 2)
INTAKE AIR
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
B
IAT
DIAGNOSTIC AIDS:
The Intake Air Temperature (IAT) sensor uses a

thermistor to control the signal voltage to the Electronic Control Module (ECM). The ECM applies a
voltage (about 5 volts) on CKT 472 to the sensor.
When the air is cold, the sensor (thermistor) resistance is high; therefore, the ECM will see a high signal voltage. If the air is warm, the sensor resistance
is low; therefore, the ECM will see a low voltage.

corroded wire.
TEST DESCRIPTION:
diagnostic chart.
1. A Code 23 will set due to an open sensor, wire,
or connection. This step will determine if the wiring and ECM are OK.
Code 21 is also set, check CKT 813 for faulty wiring
contact.
2. If the resistance is greater than 25,000 ohms, replace the sensor.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Code 23: Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Circuit (Non-Scan)

(1 of 2)
DISCONNECT IAT SENSOR.

IGNITION ON, ENGINE STOPPED.
CHECK VOLTAGE BETWEEN IAT SENSOR HARNESS TERMINALS
USING A DIGITAL VOLTMETER.
4 VOLTS OR OVER
BELOW 4 VOLTS
CHECK RESISTANCE ACROSS IAT SENSOR

TERMINALS. SHOULD BE LESS THAN 25,000
OHMS, SEE TABLE FOR APPROXIMATE
TEMPERATURE TO RESISTANCE VALUES.
OK
NOT OK
CHECK FOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT BEING

SHORTED TO VOLTAGE. IF NOT
SHORTED TO VOLTAGE, CODE 23 IS
INTERMITTENT.
REPLACE
SENSOR
CHECK VOLTAGE BETWEEN HARNESS CONNECTOR

SIGNAL CIRCUIT AND GROUND.
4 VOLTS OR OVER
FAULTY SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
OR
FAULTY CONNECTION(S)
OR
FAULTY ECM.
BELOW 4 VOLTS
OPEN SIGNAL CIRCUIT
OR
FAULTY CONNECTION
OR
FAULTY ECM.
IAT SENSOR
TEMPERATURE TO RESISTANCE VALUES
(APPROXIMATE)
F
C
OHMS
210
100
185
160
70
450
100
38
1,800
70
20
3,400
40
4
7,500
20
-7
13,500
0
-18
25,000
-40
-40
100,700
Index
90-823224--2 796
Code 33: Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Circuit (Non-Scan)

(1 Of 2)
814 BLK
MAP AND
ECT
GROUND
ECT SENSOR
DIAGNOSTIC AIDS:
The Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor responds to changes in manifold pressure (vacuum).
The ECM receives this information as a signal voltage that will vary from about 1-1.5 volts at closed
throttle idle, to 4-4.8 volts at Wide Open Throttle
(W.O.T.) (low vacuum).

corroded wire.
If the MAP sensor fails, the ECM will substitute a fixed

MAP value and use the engine RPM to control fuel
delivery.
TEST DESCRIPTION:
diagnostic chart.
Code 14 is also set, check for open ground CKT 814.
1. This step will determine if there is an adequate

vacuum supply to the MAP sensor. If the gauge
reading is erratic, refer to Stalling, Rough, Unstable or Incorrect Idle in Troubleshooting.
MAP SENSOR
ALTITUDE
Feet
Meters
VOLTAGE
RANGE
Below 1,000
Below 305
3.8-5.5 V
2. Low manifold vacuum may result from vacuum

leaks in the engine induction system.
1,000-2,000
305-610
3.6-5.3 V
2,000-3,000
610-914
3.5-5.1 V
3. This step checks for a voltage from terminal C

(5 volt reference) to terminal A (sensor ground).
3,000-4,000
914-1219
3.3-5.0 V
4,000-5,000
1219-1524
3.2-4.8 V
4. This step will identify if the problem is in the supply 5 V reference or ground circuit.
5,000-6,000
1524-1829
3.0-4.6 V
6,000-7,000
1829-2133
2.9-4.5 V
5. This step determines if the MAP signal circuit to

the ECM is open.
7,000-8,000
2133-2438
2.8-4.3 V
8,000-9,000
2438-2743
2.6-4.2 V
9,000-10,000
2743-3048
2.5-4.0 V
6. This step completes the test for the ECM and wiring. If the test light is not ON, the MAP sensor has
an internal problem. To confirm an internal MAP
sensor problem, use the MAP output voltage
check chart.
LOW ALTITUDE = HIGH PRESSURE = HIGH VOLTAGE
Index
90-823224--2 796
Code 33: MAP Circuit (Non-Scan)

(2 of 2)
1
IGNITION OFF.
DISCONNECT VACUUM PLUG LOCATED UNDER
PLENUM AT FRONT AND INSTALL A VACUUM
GAUGE IN THE VACUUM PORT.
START ENGINE AND RAISE RPM TO ABOUT 1000
RPM. VACUUM GAUGE READING SHOULD BE 14in.
Hg (45.5 kPa) OR MORE AND STEADY. IS IT?
YES
NO
IGNITION OFF.
REMOVE VACUUM GAUGE AND REINSTALL VACUUM
PLUG IN VACUUM PORT.
DISCONNECT MAP SENSOR ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR.
IGNITION ON.
CONNECT A DVM FROM HARNESS TERMINAL C (CKT
416, 5 VOLT REFERENCE) TO HARNESS TERMINAL A
(CKT 814, SENSOR GROUND).
YES
REPAIR LOW OR UNSTEADY

VACUUM PROBLEM.
NO
CONNECT DVM FROM HARNESS TERMINAL C

(CKT 416) TO HARNESS TERMINAL B (MAP
SENSOR SIGNAL, CKT 432).
CONNECT DVM FROM MAP SENSOR HARNESS

TERMINAL C TO A GOOD GROUND ON ENGINE.
YES
NO
NO
CONNECT DVM
BETWEEN HARNESS
TERMINAL B AND
ENGINE GROUND.
IS VOLTAGE OVER 4
VOLTS?

OR
CKT 416 OPEN
OR
SHORTED TO GROUND
OR
FAULTY ECM.
IGNITION OFF.
CONNECT A TEST LIGHT TO
BATTERY POSITIVE B+.
TOUCH TEST LIGHT TO HARNESS
TERMINAL B (MAP SENSOR
SIGNAL). IS TEST LIGHT ON?
YES
DISCONNECT ECM.
TOUCH TEST LIGHT
CONNECTED TO
BATTERY POSITIVE
B+ TO HARNESS
TERMINAL B.
IS TEST LIGHT
ON? SEE NOTE
NO
YES
NO
MAP
SENSOR
FAULTY.
CKT 432
SHORTED
TO VOLTAGE.
OPEN CKT 432

OR
FAULTY
CONNECTION
AT ECM
OR
FAULTY ECM.
YES
FAULTY CONNECTION
AT ECM
OR
CKT 814 OPEN
OR
FAULTY ECM.
NO
CKT 432 SHORTED
TO GROUND.
FAULTY ECM.
NOTE: USING A TEST LIGHT WITH 100 mA OR LESS RATING MAY

SHOW A FAINT GLOW WHEN TEST ACTUALLY STATES NO LIGHT.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Code 42: Ignition Control (IC) Circuit (Non-Scan)

(1 of 2)
IGNITION CONTROL (IC)

MODULE
902 RED
BA
3 PNK
BYPASS
DIST. REFERENCE
LOW
121 GRY
121 WHT
TO DISTRIBUTOR
TEST DESCRIPTION:
When the system is running on the ignition module,

that is, no voltage on the bypass line, the ignition
module grounds the IC signal. The ECM expects to
detect no voltage on the IC line during this condition.
If it detects a voltage, it sets Code 42 and will not go
into the IC mode.

diagnostic chart.
When the RPM for IC is reached (about 300 RPM),

and bypass voltage applied, the IC should no longer
be grounded in the ignition module, so the IC voltage
should be varying.
If the bypass line is open or grounded, the ignition
module will not switch to IC mode so the IC voltage
will be low and Code 42 will be set.
If the IC line is grounded, the ignition module will
switch to IC but, because the line is grounded, there
will be no IC signal. A Code 42 will be set.
1. Code 42 means the ECM has seen an open or

short to ground in the IC or bypass circuits. This
test confirms Code 42 and that the fault causing
the code is present.
2. Check for a normal IC ground path through the
ignition module. An IC CKT 423 shorted to
ground will also read more than 3000 ohms; however, this will be checked later.
3. As the test light voltage touches CKT 424, the
module should switch, causing the DVM reading
to go from over 3000 ohms to under 1000 ohms.
The important thing is that the module switched.
4. The module did not switch and this step checks
for:
IC CKT 423 shorted to ground.
Bypass CKT 424 open.
Faulty ignition module connection or module.
5. Confirms that Coded 42 is a faulty ECM and not

an intermittent in CKT 423 or CKT 424.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Code 42: IC Circuit (Non-Scan) (2 of 2)

DIAGNOSTIC AIDS:
corroded wire.
1
INSTALL MARINE DIAGNOSTIC CODE TOOL.

CLEAR CODES (REFER TO CLEARING CODES).
00000
IDLE ENGINE FOR 1 MINUTE OR UNTIL MALFUNCTION INDICATOR
LAMP COMES ON.
IGNITION ON, ENGINE STOPPED.
ENTER SERVICE MODE ON CODE TOOL AND NOTE CODES.

CODE 42
NO CODE 42
CODE 42 INTERMITTENT. IF NO
ADDITIONAL CODES WERE STORED,
REFER TO INTERMITTENTS IN TROUBLESHOOTING SECTION, OR DIAGNOSTIC AIDS
ABOVE WHERE APPLICABLE.
IGNITION OFF.
DISCONNECT ECM CONNECTORS J1 AND J2
IGNITION ON.
DVOM SELECTOR SWITCH IN THE OHM RANGE
PROBE ECM HARNESS CONNECTOR CKT 423 WITH AN
OHMMETER TO GROUND.
IT SHOULD READ MORE THAN 3K OHMS.
DOES IT?
YES
NO
OPEN CKT 423. FAULTY CONNECTION

OR FAULTY IGNITION MODULE.
PROBE ECM HARNESS CONNECTOR CKT 424 WITH

A TEST LIGHT TO 12 VOLTS AND NOTE LIGHT.
LIGHT OFF
LIGHT ON
WITH OHMMETER STILL CONNECTED TO ECM HARNESS

CKT 423 AND GROUND, AGAIN PROBE ECM HARNESS
CKT 424 WITH THE TEST LIGHT CONNECTED TO 12
VOLTS. AS TEST LIGHT CONTACTS CKT 424,
RESISTANCE SHOULD SWITCH FROM OVER 3K TO
UNDER 1K OHMS.
DOES IT?
DISCONNECT IGNITION MODULE 4-WAY

CONNECTOR.
LIGHT ON
LIGHT OFF
CKT 424 SHORTED

TO GROUND.
NO
FAULTY IGNITION
MODULE.
YES
DISCONNECT DIST. 4-WAY CONNECTOR. NOTE OHM

METER THAT IS STILL CONNECTED TO CKT 423 AND
GROUND. RESISTANCE SHOULD HAVE GONE HIGH (OPEN
CIRCUIT). DOES IT?
YES
NO
CKT 424 OPEN. FAULTY

CONNECTIONS OR FAULTY
IGNITION MODULE.
CKT 423
SHORTED TO
GROUND.
RECONNECT ECM AND IDLE ENGINE FOR

ONE MINUTE OR UNTIL MALFUNCTION IN
DICATOR LAMP COMES ON.
LIGHT ON
LIGHT OFF
CODE 42
CODE 42 INTERMITTENT.
FAULTY ECM
NO TROUBLE FOUND. CHECK

HARNESS AND CONNECTORS FOR AN
INTERMITTENT OPEN OR SHORT TO
GROUND IN CKT 423 AND 424.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Code 43: Knock Sensor (KS) (Non-Scan)

(1 of 2)
TO SYSTEM
FUSE 15A
RELAY
KNOCK SENSOR
MODULE
KNOCK SENSOR
SIGNAL
DIAGNOSTIC AIDS:
The ability to sense engine knock or detonation is accomplished with a module that sends a voltage signal
to the ECM. As the knock sensor detects engine
knock, the voltage from the KS module to the ECM
drops, and this signals the ECM to retard timing.
If CKT 496 is routed too close to secondary ignition

wires, the KS module may see the interference as a
knock signal, resulting in false retard.
TEST DESCRIPTION:
diagnostic chart.
1. This step ensures that the knock sensor circuitry
is within the proper resistance value.
2. Applying 12 volts with a test light to CKT 496 simulates a signal from the knock sensor. The knock
sensor is faulty if a response occurs.
3. This step checks if a voltage signal from the KS
module is present at the ECM.

corroded wire.
4. This step determines if ignition voltage is available to power up the KS module.

5. This step confirms the ability of the KS module to
remove the voltage from the signal line when it
sees spark knock. Since the knock sensor produces an AC voltage signal, it may be necessary
to repeatedly touch the harness connector with
the test light probe to simulate this type of signal.
6. This step checks the ground circuit from the KS
module. If the test light is dim, check ground (CKT
486) for excessive resistance.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Code 43: Knock Sensor (KS) Circuit (Non-Scan)

(2 of 2)
1
DISCONNECT 5 WAY KS MODULE CONNECTOR.

USING DVM, MEASURE RESISTANCE BETWEEN
TERMINAL E AND GROUND.
RESISTANCE SHOULD BE BETWEEN 3.3K AND 4.5K
OHMS.
IS IT?
YES
NO
RECONNECT 5 WAY KS MODULE CONNECTOR.

DISCONNECT KNOCK SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR.
CONNECT A TEST LIGHT TO BATTERY POSITIVE BATTERY POSITIVE (B+).
START ENGINE.
HOLD ENGINE SPEED STEADY AT 2500 RPM.
REPEATEDLY TOUCH TEST LIGHT TO KNOCK SENSOR HARNESS
CONNECTOR TERMINAL (CKT 496).
DOES A NOTICEABLE RPM DROP OCCUR OR USING TIMING LIGHT DID TIMING DROP?
NO
YES
INSPECT KNOCK SENSOR TERMINAL

CONTACTS. IF OK, REPLACE KNOCK
SENSOR.
IGNITION OFF.
DISCONNECT ECM CONNECTOR J-2
IGNITION ON.
CONNECT DVOM FROM ECM HARNESS
CONNECTOR TERMINAL C (CKT 485) TO
GROUND.
ARE 8-10 VOLTS PRESENT?
YES
CHECK FOR OPEN OR SHORT

IN CKT 496.
IF OK, REPLACE KNOCK
SENSOR.
NO
ALLOW DVM VOLTAGE TO STABILIZE.

TOUCH A TEST LIGHT CONNECTED TO
B+ TO THE KNOCK SENSOR HARNESS
DOES THE VOLTAGE VALUE CHANGE?
CONNECT A TEST LIGHT TO GROUND.

DISCONNECT KS MODULE HARNESS CONNECTOR.
TOUCH THE TEST LIGHT TO KS MODULE HARNESS
CONNECTOR TERMINAL B (CKT 439).
IS THE TEST LIGHT ON?
NO
YES
YES
FAULTY ECM.
CKT 485 OPEN

OR
SHORTED TO GROUND
OR
FAULTY KS MODULE.
DISCONNECT KS MODULE HARNESS

CONNECTOR.
POSITIVE B+.
TOUCH THE TEST LIGHT TO KS HARNESS
CONNECTOR TERMINAL D (CKT 486).
YES
NO
CKT 496 OPEN

OR
SHORTED TO GROUND
OR
FAULTY KS MODULE.
REPAIR OPEN
GROUND CKT
486.
NO
REPAIR OPEN
OR
GROUNDED
CKT 439.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Code 51: Calibration Memory Failure Non-Scan Diagnostics

(1 of 2)
72801
DIAGNOSTIC AIDS:
This test allows the ECM to check for a calibration

failure by comparing the calibration value to a known
value stored in the EEPROM.
An intermittent Code 51 may be caused by a bad cell

in the EEPROM that is sensitive to temperature
changes. If Code 51 failed more than once, but is intermittent, replace ECM.
This test is also used as a security measure to prevent improper use of calibrations or changes to these
calibrations that may alter the designed function of
the EFI system.
TEST DESCRIPTION:
diagnostic chart.
1. This step checks to see if the fault is present during diagnosis. If present, the ECM is not functioning correctly and must be replaced.
IMPORTANT: At the time of printing, vessels with
Fuel Injection were not being field reprogrammed to correct this failure. Replacement of
the ECM with a factory reprogrammed ECM is
necessary if Code 51 is current and resets when
clearing codes is completed.

corroded wire.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Code 51: Calibration Memory Failure (Non-Scan)

(2 of 2)
1
IGNITION ON.
USING CLEAR CODE PROCEDURE, CLEAR CODES.
DOES CODE 51 RESET?
YES
NO
REPLACE ECM AND VERIFY CODE DOES NOT RESET.
FAULT IS NOT PRESENT AT THIS TIME.

REFER TO DIAGNOSTIC AIDS ON
FACING PAGE.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Diagnostics - Using Scan Tool (Scan)

Code 14 Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor Circuit (Scan)
(1 of 2)
ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR
ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE (ECT)
DIAGNOSTIC AIDS:
The Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor

uses a thermistor to control the signal voltage to the
ECM. The ECM applies a voltage on CKT 410 to the
sensor. When the engine coolant is cold, the sensor
(thermistor) resistance is high, therefore, the ECM
will see high signal voltage. As the engine coolant
warms, the sensor resistance becomes less, and the
voltage drops. At normal engine operating temperature, 160-180F (71-82C), the voltage will measure
about 1.5 to 2.0 volts.
Check harness routing for a potential short to ground

in CKT 410.
TEST DESCRIPTION:
diagnostic chart.
1. Code 14 will set if:
Signal voltage indicates a coolant temperature above 266F (130C).
Signal voltage indicates a coolant temperature below 22F (30C).
2. This test will determine if CKT 410 is shorted to

ground, which will cause the condition for Code
14.
Scan tool displays engine temperature in degrees

Fahrenheit and Celsius. After engine is started, the
temperature should rise steadily, reach normal operating temperature, and then stabilize when thermostat opens.
See Intermittents in Troubleshooting.
corroded wire.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Code 14: ECT Circuit (Scan)

(2 of 2)
1
IGNITION ON.
DOES SCAN TOOL DISPLAY A COOLANT
TEMPERATURE VALUE GREATER THAN
266F (130C) OR LESS THAN 22F (30C)?
YES
NO
CODE 14 IS INTERMITTENT. IF NO
FACING PAGE.
COOLANT TEMPERATURE
SCAN DISPLAY GREATER
THAN 266F (130C).
COOLANT TEMPERATURE
SCAN DISPLAY LESS
THAN 22F (30C).
IGNITION OFF.
DISCONNECT ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT)
SENSOR.
IGNITION ON.
SCAN TOOL SHOULD DISPLAY COOLANT
TEMPERATURE BELOW 22F (30C).
DOES IT?
IGNITION OFF.
DISCONNECT COOLANT TEMPERATURE
SENSOR.
JUMPER TERMINALS A AND B
TOGETHER.
IGNITION ON.
SCAN TOOL SHOULD DISPLAY
COOLANT TEMPERATURE ABOVE 266F
(130C).
DOES IT?
NO
YES
NO
YES
CKT 410 SHORTED TO GROUND

OR
FAULTY ECM.
REPLACE ENGINE
COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR.
CKT 410 OPEN

OR
SENSOR GROUND
OPEN
OR
FAULTY ECM.
REPLACE ENGINE
COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Code 21: Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Circuit (Scan)

(1 of 2)
B
B
TP
A
A
DIAGNOSTIC AIDS:
The Throttle Position (TP) Sensor provides a voltage

signal that changes as throttle blades open or close.
Signal voltage should vary from about .7 volts at idle
to about 4.5 volts at Wide Open Throttle (W.O.T.).
The scan tool reads throttle position in voltage and

percentage of throttle blade opening. With ignition
ON or at idle, TP signal voltage should read between
.3 and .8 volt with the throttle closed, and increase at
a steady rate as throttle is moved toward Wide Open
Throttle (W.O.T.).
The TP signal is one of the most important inputs

used by the Electronic Control Module (ECM) for fuel
control and for most of the ECM controlled outputs.
TEST DESCRIPTION:
diagnostic chart.
1. With throttle closed the TP sensor should read
between .3 and .8 volt. If it does not, check throttle
cable adjustment or for bent linkage.
2. With the TP sensor disconnected, the TP voltage
should go low if the ECM and wiring are OK.
3. Probing CKT 813 with a DVOM to CKT 416
checks the sensor ground. A faulty sensor
ground will cause a Code 21.
If Code 23 is also set, check CKT 813 for faulty wiring

contact.
corroded wire.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Code 21: TP Sensor Circuit (Scan)

(2 of 2)
1
THROTTLE CLOSED.
IGNITION ON.
DOES SCAN TOOL INDICATE THROTTLE
POSITION SENSOR VOLTAGE GREATER
THAN 4 VOLTS OR LESS THAN .36 VOLT?
YES
NO
CODE 21 IS INTERMITTENT, REFER TO
DIAGNOSTIC AIDS ON FACING PAGE.
VOLTAGE LESS THAN .36 VOLT.
VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 4 VOLTS.
IGNITION OFF.
DISCONNECT THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR. JUMPER THROTTLE
POSITION SENSOR HARNESS TERMINALS A AND C
TOGETHER.
IGNITION ON.
SCAN TOOL SHOULD INDICATE THROTTLE
POSITION SENSOR VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 4 VOLTS.
DOES IT?
NO
YES
REPLACE THROTTLE
POSITION SENSOR.
IGNITION OFF.
CONNECT DVM BETWEEN
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
HARNESS TERMINAL A AND
GROUND.
IGNITION ON.
NO
YES
CKT 416 OPEN

OR
FAULTY ECM CONNECTION
OR
FAULTY ECM.
THROTTLE POSITION
SENSOR SIGNAL (CKT
417) OPEN OR
SHORTED TO
GROUND
OR
FAULTY CONNECTION
AT ECM
OR
FAULTY ECM.
IGNITION OFF.
DISCONNECT THROTTLE POSITION
SENSOR CONNECTOR.
IGNITION ON.
DOES SCAN TOOL INDICATE
VOLTAGE OVER 4 VOLTS?
NO
YES
CONNECT DVOM
BETWEEN THROTTLE
POSITION HARNESS
CONNECTOR
TERMINALS C AND
A. VOLTAGE
SHOULD BE GREATER
THAN 4 VOLTS.
IS IT?
CKT 417 SHORTED

TO VOLTAGE
OR
FAULTY ECM
CONNECTION
OR
FAULTY ECM.
YES
NO
REPLACE THROTTLE
POSITION SENSOR
OPEN SENSOR GROUND

CKT 813
OR
FAULTY ECM
CONNECTION
OR
FAULTY ECM.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Code 23: Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Circuit (Scan)

(1 of 2)
INTAKE
IAT SENSOR SIGNAL
REFERENCE
DIAGNOSTIC AIDS:
The Intake Air Temperature (IAT) sensor uses a

thermistor to control the signal voltage to the Electronic Control Module (ECM). The ECM applies a
voltage (about 5 volts) on CKT 472 to the sensor.
When the air is cold, the sensor (thermistor) resistance is high; therefore, the ECM will see a high signal voltage. If the air is warm, the sensor resistance
is low; therefore, the ECM will see a low voltage.
The scan tool reads temperature of the air entering

the engine and should read close to ambient air temperature when engine is cold, and rises as engine
compartment temperature increases.
TEST DESCRIPTION:
If the engine has been allowed to sit overnight, the intake air temperature and coolant temperature values
should read within a few degrees of each other.

diagnostic chart.
1. A Code 23 will set, due to an open sensor, wire
or connection. This test will determine if the wiring and ECM are OK. If the scan tool indicates a
temperature of over 266F (130C), the jumper
harness to the sensor should be checked before
replacing the sensor.
2. This will determine if the IAT sensor signal (CKT
472) or the IAT sensor ground (CKT 813) is open.
3. This step will determine if the fault is in the IAT
sensor or the circuit.
The IAT sensor in this engine is located on the starboard underside of the plenum.
Carefully check harness and connections for possible open.

corroded wire.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Code 23: IAT Circuit (Scan)

(2 of 2)
IGNITION ON.
DOES SCAN TOOL DISPLAY IAT
TEMPERATURE OF LESS THAN 22F (30C)
OR GREATER THAN 266F (130C).
YES
NO
CODE 23 IS INTERMITTENT, REFER TO
DIAGNOSTIC AIDS ON FACING PAGE.
TEMPERATURE LESS THAN 22F (30C)
IGNITION OFF.
JUMPER HARNESS TERMINALS TOGETHER.
IGNITION ON.
TEMPERATURE GREATER THAN 266F (130C).
DOES IT?
NO
TEMPERATURE GREATER THAN 266F (130C).
IGNITION OFF.
JUMPER CKT 472 TO ENGINE
GROUND.
IGNITION ON.
SCAN TOOL SHOULD
DISPLAY TEMPERATURE
GREATER THAN 266F (130C).
DOES IT?
IGNITION OFF.
IGNITION ON.
TEMPERATURE LESS THAN 22F (30C).
DOES IT?
YES
NO
YES
FAULTY CONNECTION
OR
IAT SENSOR.
CKT 472 SHORTED TO

GROUND
OR
FAULTY ECM.
FAULTY IAT
SENSOR.
YES
NO
OPEN SENSOR
GROUND CIRCUIT
FAULTY CONNECTION
OR
FAULTY ECM.
OPEN CKT 472

FAULTY CONNECTION
OR
FAULTY ECM.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Code 33: Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Circuit (Scan)

(1 of 2)
814 BLK
MAP AND ECT

GROUND
ECT
DIAGNOSTIC AIDS:
The Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor responds to changes in manifold pressure (vacuum).
The ECM receives this information as a signal voltage that will vary from about 1-1.5 volts at closed
throttle idle, to 4.0-4.8 volts at Wide Open Throttle
(W.O.T.) (low vacuum).
If the idle is rough or unstable, refer to Troubleshooting for items which can cause an unstable idle.
The scan tool displays manifold pressure in kPa of

pressure and voltage. Low pressure (high vacuum)
reads a low voltage while a high pressure (low vacuum) reads a high voltage.
If the MAP sensor fails, the ECM will substitute a fixed
MAP value and use engine RPM to control fuel delivery.
TEST DESCRIPTION:
diagnostic chart.
1. Engine misfire or a low unstable idle may set
Code 33. Disconnect MAP sensor and system
will go into backup mode. If the misfire or idle
condition remains, refer to Troubleshooting.
2. If the ECM recognizes the low MAP signal, the
ECM and wiring are OK.
With the ignition ON and the engine OFF, the manifold pressure is equal to atmospheric pressure and
the signal voltage will be high. This information is
used by the ECM as an indication of vessel altitude
and is referred to as BARO. Comparison of this
BARO reading, with a known good vessel with the
same sensor, is a good way to check accuracy of a
suspect sensor. Reading should be the same, + .4
volt.
corroded wire.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Code 33: MAP Circuit (Scan)

(2 of 2)
IF ENGINE IDLE IS ROUGH, UNSTABLE, OR
INCORRECT, CORRECT CONDITION
BEFORE USING CHART, SEE THE
TROUBLESHOOTING SECTION.
ENGINE IDLING.
DOES SCAN TOOL DISPLAY A MAP
SENSOR VOLTAGE OF LESS THAN 1 VOLT
OR GREATER THAN 4 VOLTS?
YES
NO
CODE 33 IS INTERMITTENT, IF NOT
FACING PAGE.
VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 4 VOLTS.
VOLTAGE LESS THAN 1 VOLT.
IGNITION OFF.
DISCONNECT MAP SENSOR ELECTRICAL
CONNECTOR.
JUMPER MAP SENSOR HARNESS TERMINALS
C AND B TOGETHER.
START ENGINE.
DOES SCAN TOOL DISPLAY MAP SENSOR
VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 4 VOLTS?
IGNITION OFF.
DISCONNECT MAP SENSOR ELECTRICAL
CONNECTOR.
START ENGINE.
SCAN TOOL SHOULD DISPLAY A
VOLTAGE OF LESS THAN 1 VOLT.
DOES IT?
NO
YES
YES
NO
CHECK FOR MAP

SENSOR SIGNAL CKT
432 SHORTED TO
GROUND. IF OK,
REPLACE MAP
SENSOR.
IGNITION OFF.
CONNECT DVOM BETWEEN
MAP SENSOR HARNESS
TERMINAL C AND A.
IGNITION ON.
NO
YES
CKT 416 OPEN FAULTY

ECM CONNECTION
OR
FAULTY ECM.
MAP SENSOR SIGNAL

CKT 432 OPEN OR
SHORTED TO
GROUND
OR
FAULTY CONNECTION
AT ECM
OR
FAULTY ECM.
IGNITION OFF.
CONNECT DVM
BETWEEN MAP
SENSOR HARNESS
TERMINAL A
AND C.
IGNITION ON.
VOLTAGE SHOULD
BE GREATER THAN
4 VOLTS.
IS IT?
IGNITION OFF.
MAP SENSOR
SIGNAL CKT 432
SHORTED TO
VOLTAGE
OR
FAULTY ECM
CONNECTIONS
OR
FAULTY ECM.
YES
NO
FAULTY MAP SENSOR
OPEN SENSOR
GROUND CIRCUIT
Index
90-823224--2 796
Code 42: Ignition Control (IC) Circuit (Scan)

(1 Of 2)
IGNITION CONTROL
(IC)
MODULE
902 RED
BA
3 PNK
BYPASS
DIST. REFERENCE LOW
121 GRY
121 WHT
TO DISTRIBUTOR
TEST DESCRIPTION:
When the system is running on the ignition module,

that is, no voltage on the bypass line, the ignition
module grounds the IC signal. The ECM expects to
detect a low voltage on the IC line during this condition. If it detects a voltage, it sets Code 42 and will not
go into the IC mode.

diagnostic chart.
When the RPM for IC is reached (about 300 RPM),

and bypass voltage applied, the IC should no longer
be grounded in the ignition module, so the IC voltage
should be varying.
If the bypass line is open or grounded, the ignition
module will not switch to IC mode so the IC voltage
will be low and Code 42 will be set.
If the IC line is grounded, the ignition module will
switch to IC but, because the line is grounded, there
will be no IC signal. A Code 42 will be set.
1. Code 42 means the ECM has seen an open or

short to ground in the IC or bypass circuits. This
test confirms Code 42 and that the fault causing
the code is present.
2. Check for a normal IC ground path through the
ignition module. An IC CKT 423 shorted to
ground will also read more than 3000 ohms; however, this will be checked later.
3. As the test light voltage touches CKT 424, the
module should switch, causing the DVOM reading to go from over 3000 ohms to under 1000
ohms. The important thing is that the module
switched.
4. The module did not switch and this step checks
for:
IC CKT 423 shorted to ground.
Bypass CKT 424 open.
Faulty ignition module connection or module.
5. Confirms that Coded 42 is a faulty ECM and not

an intermittent in CKT 423 or CKT 424.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Code 42: IC Circuit (Scan)

(2 of 2)
DIAGNOSTIC AIDS:
Refer to Intermittents in Troubleshooting.
corroded wire.
CLEAR CODES.
IDLE ENGINE FOR 1 MINUTE OR UNTIL CODE 42 SETS.
DOES CODE 42 SET?
YES
NO
IGNITION OFF.
DISCONNECT ECM CONNECTORS.
IGNITION ON.
USE DVM WITH SELECTOR IN OHMS RANGE.
DVM TO GROUND.
IT SHOULD READ MORE THAN 3000 OHMS.
DOES IT?
CODE 42 INTERMITTENT. REFER TO

DIAGNOSTIC AIDS ABOVE.
YES
NO

A TEST LIGHT TO BATTERY VOLTAGE.
OPEN CKT 423. FAULTY CONNECTION

OR FAULTY IGNITION MODULE.
LIGHT OFF
LIGHT ON
WITH OHMMETER STILL CONNECTED TO ECM HARNESS CKT

423 AND GROUND, AGAIN PROBE ECM HARNESS CKT 424
WITH THE TEST LIGHT CONNECTED TO BATTERY VOLTAGE.
(AS TEST LIGHT CONTACTS CKT 424, RESISTANCE SHOULD
SWITCH FROM OVER 3000 TO UNDER 1000 OHMS.)
DOES IT?
NO
DISCONNECT IGNITION MODULE 4-WAY CONNECTOR.
LIGHT ON
LIGHT OFF
CKT 424 SHORTED

TO GROUND.
FAULTY IGNITION
MODULE.
YES
DISCONNECT DIST. 4-WAY CONNECTOR. NOTE

OHMMETER THAT IS STILL CONNECTED TO CKT
423 AND GROUND. RESISTANCE SHOULD HAVE
GONE HIGH (OPEN CIRCUIT).
DOES IT?
RECONNECT ECM AND IDLE ENGINE FOR

ONE MINUTE OR UNTIL MALFUNCTION IN
DICATOR ON.
YES
NO
YES
NO
CKT 424 OPEN. FAULTY

CONNECTIONS OR FAULTY
IGNITION MODULE.
CKT 423
SHORTED TO
GROUND.
FAULTY ECM
CODE 42 INTERMITTENT.
REFER TO DIAGNOSTIC
AIDS ON FACING PAGE.
NOTE:CLEAR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) STOP ENGINE FOR AT LEAST ONE MINUTE AFTER REPAIR IS PERFORMED. RESTART ENGINE AND CHECK FOR CODES.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Code 43: Knock Sensor (KS) (Scan)

(1 Of 2)
FUSE 15A
TO SYSTEM
RELAY
KNOCK SENSOR
(KS) SIGNAL
KNOCK SIGNAL
MODULE
DIAGNOSTIC AIDS:
Sensing engine detonation or spark knock is accomplished with a module that sends a voltage signal to
the ECM. As the knock sensor detects engine knock,
the voltage from the KS module to the ECM drops,
and this signals the ECM to retard timing. The ECM
will retard the timing when knock is detected and
RPM is above a certain value.
If CKT 496 is routed too close to secondary ignition

wires, the KS module may see the interference as a
knock signal, resulting in false retard.
TEST DESCRIPTION:

diagnostic chart.
1. This step determines if there is a problem in the
circuit. When an KS circuit fails, the ECM will
switch to a default value of about 3.2 degrees of
timing retard.

corroded wire.
2. This step checks if there is a voltage source to the

knock sensor from the KS module.
3. This step will determine if the knock sensor is
faulty.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Code 43: KS Circuit (Scan)

(2 of 2)
1
YES
NO
CHECK FOR OPEN OR SHORT

IN CKT 496.
IF OK, REPLACE KNOCK
SENSOR.
INSTALL SCAN TOOL.

ENGINE IDLING, COOLANT TEMP. ABOVE 150F (66C).
DOES SCAN TOOL INDICATE A FIXED VALUE GREATER
THAN ZERO DEGREES OF KNOCK RETARD?
RECONNECT 5 WAY KS MODULE CONNECTOR.

DISCONNECT KNOCK SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR.
CONNECT A TEST LIGHT TO BATTERY POSITIVE (B+).
START ENGINE.
HOLD ENGINE SPEED STEADY AT 2500 RPM.
RAPIDLY TOUCH TEST LIGHT TO KNOCK SENSOR HARNESS
DOES A NOTICEABLE RPM DROP OCCUR OR USING TIMING LIGHT,
DID TIMING DROP ?
NO
YES
INSPECT KNOCK SENSOR TERMINAL

CONTACTS. IF OK, REPLACE KNOCK
SENSOR.
IGNITION OFF.
DISCONNECT ECM CONNECTOR J-2
IGNITION ON.
CONNECT DVOM FROM ECM HARNESS
CONNECTOR TERMINAL C (CKT 485) TO
GROUND.
ARE 8-10 VOLTS PRESENT?
YES
NO
ALLOW DVM VOLTAGE TO STABILIZE.

RAPIDLY TOUCH A TEST LIGHT CONNECTED TO
BATTERY POSITIVE (B+) TO THE KNOCK
SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINAL (CKT 496).
DOES THE VOLTAGE VALUE CHANGE?
CONNECT A TEST LIGHT TO GROUND.

DISCONNECT KS MODULE HARNESS CONNECTOR.
TOUCH THE TEST LIGHT TO KS MODULE HARNESS
CONNECTOR TERMINAL B (CKT 439).
NO
YES
YES
FAULTY ECM.
CKT 485 OPEN

OR
SHORTED TO GROUND
OR
FAULTY KS MODULE.
DISCONNECT KS MODULE HARNESS

CONNECTOR.
POSITIVE (B+).
TOUCH THE TEST LIGHT TO KS HARNESS
CONNECTOR TERMINAL D (CKT 486).
YES
NO
CKT 496 OPEN

OR
SHORTED TO GROUND
OR
FAULTY KS MODULE.
REPAIR OPEN
GROUND CKT
486.
NO
REPAIR OPEN
OR
GROUNDED
CKT 439.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Code 51: Calibration Memory Failure

(Scan) (1 Of 2)
72801
DIAGNOSTIC AIDS:
This test allows the ECM to check for a calibration

failure by comparing the calibration value to a known
value stored in the EEPROM.
An intermittent Code 51 may be caused by a bad cell

in the EEPROM that is sensitive to temperature
changes. If Code 51 failed more than once, but is intermittent, replace ECM.
This test is also used as a security measure to prevent improper use of calibrations or changes to these
calibrations that may alter the designed function of
EFI.
TEST DESCRIPTION:
diagnostic chart.
1. This step checks to see if the fault is present during diagnosis. If present, the ECM is not functioning correctly and must be replaced.
IMPORTANT: At the time of printing, vessels with
fuel injection were not being field reprogrammed
to correct this failure. Replacement of the ECM
with a factory reprogrammed ECM is necessary
if Code 51 is current and resets when clearing
codes is completed.

corroded wire.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Code 51: Calibration Memory Failure (Scan)

(2 of 2)
1
IGNITION ON.
USING SCAN TOOL, CLEAR CODES.
DOES CODE 51 RESET?
NO
YES
REPLACE ECM AND VERIFY CODE DOES NOT RESET.
FAULT IS NOT PRESENT AT THIS TIME.

FACING PAGE.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Troubleshooting
Changes In Terminology
Due to industry standardization of terminology for certain electronic engine controls some names and abbreviations have changed.
From
To
(CTS) Coolant Temperature Sensor
(TPS) Throttle Position Sensor
(TP) Throttle Position
(MAT) Manifold Air Temperature
(EST) Electronic Spark Timing
(ESC) Electronic Spark Control
(KS) Knock Sensor
(ALDL) Assembly Line Data Link
(DLC) Data Link Connector
Diagnostic Trouble Codes

Code Number
Code Description
Code 14
Code 21
(TP) Throttle Position Sensor
Code 23
Code 33
(MAP) Manifold Absolute Pressure
Code 42
Code 43
(KS) Knock Sensor
Code 51
Calibration Memory Failure
Important Preliminary Checks

Before using this section, you should verify the customer complaint, and locate the correct symptom.
Check the items indicated under that symptom.
Several of the following symptom procedures call for
a careful visual/physical check.
The importance of this step cannot be stressed too
strongly, it can lead to correcting a problem without
further checks and can save valuable time.
1. Ensure that engine is in good mechanical condition.
2. Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and proper connections

3. Air leaks at throttle body, plenum and intake manifold.
4. Ignition wires for cracking, hardness and proper
routing.
5. Wiring for proper connections, pinches, and cuts.
If wiring harness or connector repair is necessary.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Troubleshooting Charts
IMPORTANT PRELIMINARY CHECKS
BEFORE USING THIS SECTION
Before using this section you should have performed the EFI Diagnostic Circuit Check and determined that:
1. The ECM is operating correctly.
2. There are no diagnostic trouble codes (DTC) stored.
SYMPTOM
Verify the customer complaint, and locate the correct symptom. Check the items indicated under that
symptom.
VISUAL/PHYSICAL CHECK
Several of the symptom procedures call for a careful visual/physical check. The importance of
this step cannot be stressed too strongly. It can lead to correcting a problem without further
checks and can save valuable time. These checks should include:
1.
ECM grounds and sensors for being clean, tight and in their proper locations.
2. Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks, and proper connections. Check thoroughly for any type of leak
or restriction.
3. Air leaks at throttle body mounting area and intake manifold sealing surfaces.
4. Ignition wires for cracking, hardness, proper routing and carbon tracking.
5. Wiring for proper connections, pinches and cuts.
6. Moisture in distributor cap, primary or secondary ignition circuit connections.
7. Salt corrosion on electrical connections and exposed throttle body linkages.
8. Ensure engine is in good mechanical condition.
Index
90-823224--2 796
INTERMITTENTS
Definition: Problem occurs randomly. May or may not store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).
DO NOT use the diagnostic trouble code charts for intermittent problems, unless instructed to do
so. If a fault is intermittent, incorrect use of diagnostic trouble code charts may result in replacement
of good parts.
Most intermittent problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Perform careful
check of suspected circuits for:
1. Poor mating of the connector halves or terminals not fully seated in the connector body (backed
out or loose).
2. Improperly formed or damaged terminals and or connectors. All connector terminals and connectors in problem circuit should be carefully reformed or replaced to insure proper contact tension.
3. Poor terminal to wire connection (crimping).
An intermittent may be caused by:

1. Electrical system interference caused by a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the problem will occur when the faulty component is operated.
2. Improper installation of electrical options, such as lights, ship to shore radios, sonar, etc.
3. Improperly routed knock sensor wires. Wires should be routed AWAY from spark plug wires, ignition and charging system components.
4. Secondary ignition shorted to ground.
5. Arching at spark plug wires, spark plugs or open ignition coil ground (coil mounting brackets).
Part of internal circuitry shorted to ground such as in starters, relays and alternators.
If a visual/physical check does not find the cause of the problem, the EFI system can be tested with
a voltmeter or a scan tool connected while observing the suspected circuit. An abnormal reading,
when the problem occurs, indicates the problem may be in that circuit.
Index
90-823224--2 796
HARD START
Definition: Engine cranks OK, but does not start for a long time. Engine does eventually run, or
may start but immediately dies.
PRELIMINARY CHECKS
Make sure proper starting procedure is being used. See Owners Manual.
Perform the careful visual/physical checks as described at the start of Troubleshooting Charts
section.
CHECK FUEL SYSTEM FOR:

1. Proper operation of fuel pump relay. Relay will operate fuel pump for 2 seconds when ignition is
turned ON. Also look for open in CKT 465, fuel pump relay driver.
2.
Clogged or dirty water separating fuel filter.
3. Contaminated fuel or winter grade fuel during warm weather.

4. Vapor lock condition or engine flooding. Check fuel pressure.
5. VST fault-stuck float, leaking vapor regulator.
6. Electric fuel pump check valve or fuel pressure regulator and / or fuel damper leaking.
CHECK IGNITION SYSTEM FOR:

1. Proper ignition timing.
2. Ignition wires for cracking, hardness and proper connections at both distributor cap and spark
plugs.
3. Wet plugs, cracks, wear, improper gap, burned electrodes, or heavy deposits. Repair or replace
as necessary.
4. Distributor cap inside and out for moisture, dust, cracks, burns, and arcing to coil mounting screws.
5. Worn distributor shaft. Bare and shorted wires. Pick-up coil resistance and connections. Try to turn
distributor shaft by hand. Drive pin may be broken.
Index
90-823224--2 796
HARD START (continued)

CHECK SENSORS AND CONTROLS FOR:
1. Possible open in Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor and Manifold Absolute Pressure
(MAP) sensor Ground CKT 814. Also may have set a DTC 14 and/or DTC 33.
2. Throttle Position (TP) sensor,ground CKT 813 could have a possible open and set DTC 21.
3. A sticking throttle shaft or binding linkage causes a high Throttle Position (TP) sensor voltage.
Using a scan tool and/or voltmeter, TP sensor voltage should read less than .7 volt with throttle
closed.
4. Proper Idle Air Control (IAC) operation.
CHECK ENGINE FOR:

1. Restricted exhaust.
2. Proper cylinder compression.
3. Proper camshaft timing/valve train problem.
Index
90-823224--2 796
SURGES
Definition: Engine power variation under steady throttle or cruise. Feels like the engine speeds up
and slows down with no change in the throttle control.
PRELIMINARY CHECKS
Perform the visual/physical checks as described at the start of Troubleshooting Charts section.

1. Fuel pressure to be within specification while condition exists.

1. Condition of 4-terminal Ignition Control (IC) connector at distributor. Connector wires must not
be routed near spark plug wires.
2. Intermittent ground connection on ignition coil.
3. Proper operation (advancing or retarding) of Ignition Control (IC).
4. Condition of distributor cap, rotor, and spark plug wires.
5. Proper and clean connection on distributor pick-up coil terminal.
6. Spark plugs that may be fuel fouled, cracked, worn, improperly gapped, burned electrodes, or
heavy deposits. Repair or replace as necessary.

1. Intermittent opens in Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) or Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT)
sensor grounds CKT 814. If intermittent for a very brief period, will not set DTC.
2. Intermittent short to grounds or opens in Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor 5 volt reference CKT 416 and Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor signal CKT 432. If intermittent for
a very brief period, will not set DTC.
Index
90-823224--2 796
SURGES (continued)
ADDITIONAL CHECKS FOR:
1. Proper alternator output voltage.
2. Leaks or kinks in vacuum lines.
3. Power reduction mode activated (if equipped)
4. Clean and tight ECM grounds and in their proper locations.
Index
90-823224--2 796
HESITATION, SAG OR STUMBLE

Definition: Momentary lack of response as the throttle is opened. Can occur at all engine speeds.
May cause engine to stall if severe enough.
PRELIMINARY CHECKS

1. Water contaminated fuel and dirty or restricted fuel filter
2. Fuel pressure within specification.
3. Proper functioning of fuel injectors.
4. Worn throttle linkage.

1. Ignition Control (IC) system for proper timing and advancing.
2. Faulty spark plug wires, fouled or improperly gapped spark plugs.
3. Power reduction mode activated (if equipped)
4. Knock Sensor (KS) system operational.
Index
90-823224--2 796
HESITATION, SAG OR STUMBLE (continued)

1. Binding or sticking Throttle Position (TP) sensor or salt corrosion. Throttle Position (TP) sensor
voltage should increase as throttle is moved toward Wide Open Throttle (WOT).
2. Throttle Position (TP) sensor-5 volt reference CKT 416 for open, DTC 21 may be set.
3. Throttle Position (TP) sensor circuit for open or grounds, DTC 21 may be set.
4.
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) output voltage check.
5. Coolant sensor out of specification (Hi or low)
ADDITIONAL CHECKS
2. Faulty or incorrect thermostat.
3. Throttle linkage sticking, binding, or worn.
Index
90-823224--2 796
DETONATION/SPARK KNOCK
Definition: A mild to severe ping, usually worse under acceleration or heavy load. The engine
makes sharp metallic knocks that change with throttle opening.
PRELIMINARY CHECKS

1. Contaminated fuel.
2. Poor fuel quality and proper octane rating.

1. Proper ignition timing.
2. Proper operation of Knock Sensor ( KS) system. Ensure wires are routed AWAY from secondary
or primary ignition wires.
3. Ignition system ground.
4. Proper heat range and gapped spark plugs.
5. Incorrect knock sensor or knock sensor module.

1. Engine Coolant temperature (ECT) has shifted value.
2. Binding or sticking Throttle Position (TP) sensor or salt corrosion. Voltage should increase as
throttle is moved toward Wide Open Throttle (WOT).
Index
90-823224--2 796
DETONATION/SPARK KNOCK (continued)

CHECK ENGINE FOR:
1. Low oil level.
2. Excessive oil in the combustion chamber. Valve seals for leaking.
3. Perform a compression test.
4. Combustion chambers for excessive carbon build-up. Remove carbon with top engine cleaner.
5. Proper camshaft timing.
6. Incorrect basic engine parts such as cam, heads, pistons, etc.
Index
90-823224--2 796
LACK OF POWER, SLUGGISH OR SPONGY

Definition: Engine delivers less than expected power. Little or no increase in speed when
throttle control is moved toward Wide Open Throttle (WOT).
PRELIMINARY CHECKS
Perform the careful visual/physical checks as described at the start of Troubleshooting Charts
section.
Remove flame arrestor and check for dirt, or for being plugged. Replace as necessary.

1. Dirty or plugged water separating fuel filter.
2. Contaminated fuel
3. Possible open in injector driver CKTs 467 or 468.
4. Improper fuel pressure.
5. Flooded VST (if equipped)

1. Proper initial engine timing.
2. Secondary ignition voltage.
3. Proper operation of Ignition Control (IC)/Knock Sensor (KS),open or short to ground in CKT 423
or 485 will set a DTC 42 or 43.
Index
90-823224--2 796
LACK OF POWER, SLUGGISH OR SPONGY

(continued)
1.
Possible open in Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) and Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP)
sensors (Ground CKT 814). Also could have and set a DTC 14 and/or 33.
2. Throttle Position (TP) sensor circuit if DTC 21 set for open or grounds.
3. Using a scan tool and/or voltmeter record Throttle Position (TP) sensor voltage. It should read
less than .7 volt with throttle closed or at idle position. A sticky throttle shaft or binding linkage
causes a high voltage
4. Power reduction mode activated.
5. Diagnostic test CKT 451 for being grounded, (maximum RPMs be will lower).
CHECK ENGINE FOR:

1. Restricted exhaust system.
3. Proper valve timing and worn camshaft.
ADDITIONAL CHECKS:
1. Proper alternator output voltage..
2. Clean, tight and properly located ECM grounds.
3. Excessive resistance on bottom of boat (dirt, barnacles, etc.).
4. Proper size and pitch propeller for application.
Index
90-823224--2 796
CUTS OUT AND MISSES

Definition: Steady pulsation or jerking that follows engine speed, usually more pronounced
as engine load increases.
PRELIMINARY CHECKS
Perform the important preliminary checks as described at the start of the Troubleshooting
Charts section

1. Cylinder miss
a. Start engine, allow engine to stabilize, record RPM, then disconnect IAC motor. Stop engine,
ground one spark plug wire at a time. Restart engine and record RPM.
b. If there is an RPM drop on all cylinders, go to Stalling, Rough, or Incorrect Idle section. With
engine OFF reconnect IAC motor
c. If there is no RPM drop on one or more cylinders, or excessive variation in RPM drop, check
for spark on the suspected cylinder(s).
d. If there is a spark, remove spark plug(s) in these cylinders and check for: Insulation cracks,
insulator cracks,wear, improper gap, burned electrodes, heavy deposits.
e. Spark plug wire resistance (should not exceed 30,000 ohms).
f.
Faulty ignition coil.
g. With engine running, spray distributor cap and spark plug wires with a fine mist of water to
check for shorts.

1. Contaminated or restricted water separating fuel filter.
2. Fuel pressure within specification. (Fuel pressure can be checked on fuel rail at the schrader
valve. Mechanical pump can be checked with a carburetor fuel pressure gauge downstream
from the pump prior to VST.
3. Faulty fuel injectors.
Index
90-823224--2 796
CUTS OUT AND MISSES (continued)

1. Open or grounds in CKT 417 Throttle Position (TP) sensor signal.
2. Open or grounds in CKT 416 Throttle Position (TP) sensor 5 volt reference.
CHECK ENGINE MECHANICAL FOR:

2. Bent push rods, worn rocker arms, broken valve springs, worn camshaft lobes. Repair or replace
as necessary.
ADDITIONAL CHECKS:
A miss-fire can be caused by Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) on the reference circuit. EMI can
usually be detected by monitoring engine RPM with a scan tool or a tachometer. A sudden increase
in RPM with little change in actual engine RPM change, indicates EMI is present. If the problem exists, check routing of secondary wires, check ground circuit.
Index
90-823224--2 796
ROUGH, UNSTABLE, OR INCORRECT IDLE, STALLING

Definition: Engine runs unevenly or rough at idle, also the idle may vary in RPM (called hunting). Either condition may be severe enough to cause stalling. Engine idles at incorrect
speed.
PRELIMINARY CHECKS
Perform the important preliminary checks as described at the start ofTroubleshooting Charts
section.

1. Open in CKTs 467 or 468.
2. Fuel injector(s) leaking.

1. Correct ignition timing
2. Possible opens in the following circuits, CKTs 424,430 and 423.
3. Possible short to ground in the following circuits, CKTs 430, 424, and 423.
4. Faulty spark plugs, wires, etc.
Index
90-823224--2 796
ROUGH, UNSTABLE, OR INCORRECT IDLE,

STALLING
(continued)
1. Proper Idle Air Control (IAC) operation.
2. Possible open the in following circuits for CKTs 410, 417, 416, 813 and 814.
3. Possible short to ground in CKT 417, Throttle Position (TP) sensor signal, CKT 416 Throttle
Position (TP) sensor 5 volt reference and CKT 451 diagnostic test circuit.
4. A sticking throttle shaft, binding linkage or salt corrosion will cause a high Throttle Position (TP)
sensor voltage (open throttle indication), the ECM will not control idle. Using a scan tool or voltmeter record Throttle Position (TP) sensor voltage. It should read approximately .7 volt closed
throttle and approximately 4.5 volts at Wide Open Throttle (WOT).
CHECK ENGINE FOR:

2. Proper camshaft or weak valve springs
ADDITIONAL CHECKS:
1. Sticking or binding throttle linkage and salt corrosion.
3. Battery cables and ground straps should be clean and secure. Erratic voltage will cause Idle Air
Control (IAC) to change its position, resulting in poor idle quality.
Index
90-823224--2 796
BACKFIRE (INTAKE)
Definition: Fuel ignites in the manifold, making a loud popping noise.
PRELIMINARY CHECKS
Perform the important preliminary checks as described at the start of Troubleshooting Charts
section.

1. An abnormal fuel system condition: If necessary perform fuel system diagnosis.
2.
Properly functioning fuel injectors.

1. Opens and grounds in CKTs 423, 424 and 430.
2. Proper output voltage of ignition coil.
3. Cross-fire between spark plugs, (distributor cap, spark plug wires and proper routing of plug
wires).
4. Faulty or corroded spark plug wires and boots.
5. Faulty spark plugs.
6. Power reduction mode activated. (1996 Models and Older)
CHECK ENGINE FOR:

1. Sticking or leaking valves.
2. Proper valve timing, broken or worn valve train parts.
Index
90-823224--2 796
BACKFIRE (EXHAUST)
Definition: Fuel ignites in the manifold, making a loud popping noise.
PRELIMINARY CHECKS
Perform the important preliminary checks as described at the start of Troubleshooting section.

1. An abnormal fuel system condition: If necessary perform fuel system diagnosis.
2. Proper functioning of fuel injectors.

1. Opens and grounds in CKTs 423, 424 and 430.
2. Properly functioning (advancing and retarding of timing) Ignition Control (IC).
3. Proper output voltage of ignition coil.
4. Faulty or corroded spark plug wires and boots.
5. Faulty spark plugs.
CHECK ENGINE FOR:

1. Possible sticking or leaking valves.
Index
90-823224--2 796
DIESELING, RUN-ON
Definition: Engine continues to run after key is turned OFF, but runs very roughly. If engine
runs smoothly, check ignition switch and adjustment.
PRELIMINARY CHECKS
Perform the important preliminary checks as described at the start ofTroubleshooting section.

1. Leaking injectors.
2. Flooded VST

2. Correct heat range spark plugs.
3. Proper operation of system relay.
CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR:

1. Faulty or incorrect thermostat.
2. Cooling system restriction causing overheating.
3. Loose belts.
Index
90-823224--2 796
POOR FUEL ECONOMY

Definition: Fuel economy is noticeably lower than expected.
PRELIMINARY CHECKS
Perform the important preliminary checks as described at the start of Troubleshooting section.
1. Operators driving habits.
2. Dirty or plugged flame arrestor.
3. Fuel leaks.

1. Quality and type of fuel.
2. Flooded VST.

1. Correct base timing
3. Fuel fouled, cracked, worn, improperly gapped spark plugs, burned electrodes, or heavy deposits. Repair or replace as necessary.
4. Knock sensor system operation.
Index
90-823224--2 796
POOR FUEL ECONOMY (continued)

1. If MAP, TP, or Coolant Sensor are erratic there will be poor economy.
CHECK ENGINE FOR:

1. Exhaust system restriction.
2. Excessive resistance on bottom of boat (dirt, barnacles, etc.)
3. Proper size and pitch propeller for application.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Fuel Delivery Systems

Cool Fuel System Exploded View
1
2
3
7
8
15
9
16
11
10
12
17
14
18
13
19
21
25
26
20
22
27
23
24
Index
90-823224--2 796
1 -Screws (4)
2 -Nut (2)
3 -Bracket
4 -Cover Base
5 -Reference Line To Plenum Or Flame Arrestor
6 -Fitting
7 -Tubing
8 -Fuel Pressure Regulator
9 -Screw (2)
10-Washer (2)
11 -Washer
12-Fuel Return Line Fitting
13-Rubber Bushing (8)
14-Filter
15-Outlet Fuel Line To Fuel Rail Or Throttle Body
16-O-Ring
17-Fuel Cooler
18-O-Ring
19-Drain Plug
20-Elbow Fitting
21-O-Rings (4)
22-Electric Fuel Pump
23-O-Ring
24-Fuel Pump Inlet Fitting
25-Retainer Bracket
26-Nut (2)
27-Cover
Index
90-823224--2 796
Vapor Separator Tank (VST) Exploded View

32
23
38
22
31
21
30
39
24
40
25
29
19
33
28
47
20
41
48
34
46
49
35
36
45
37
1
27
18
44
17
16
15
3
2
6
43
8
26
7
9
13
10
11
42
14
12
72803
Index
90-823224--2 796
1 -Cover
2 -Seal
3 -Spring
4 -Diaphragm
5 -O-ring
6 -Diaphragm Cover
7 -Screw
8 -Valve Seat
9 -Float Valve
10-Float Valve Pin
11 -Clip
12-Float
13-Float Arm Pin
14-VST Body
15-Fuel Screen
16-Plate
17-Rubber Cushion
18-Electric Fuel Pump
19-Plate
20-O-ring
21-Adapter
22-O-ring
23-Collar
24-O-ring
25-Adapter
26-Lockwasher
27-Screw
28-O-ring
29-Insulator
30-Lockwasher
31-Nut
32-Electrical Connector
33-Screw
34-Lockwasher
35-L-Joint
36-O-ring
37-O-ring
38-Nut
39-Lockwasher
40-Insulator
41-O-ring
42-Screw
43-Grommet
44-Lockwasher
45-Clip
46-Lockwasher
47-Screw
48-Plug
49-O-ring
Torque Sequence For VST

3
a
73895
a - Tighten Screws Securely
a - A VST equipped with elbow fitting on top of VST

will have this configuration diaphragm and
spring.
Index
90-823224--2 796
VST Fuel Pump (Exploded View)

16
15
14
13
l
12
23
17
18
24
5
19
20
21
25
22
10
11
72803
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112-
Collar
O-Rings (2)
Adapters (2)
O-Ring
Plate
Electric Fuel Pump
Rubber Cushion
Plate
Fuel Filter
Seal
Chamber Body
O-Rings (2)
13141516171819202122232425-
Insulators (2)
Lockwashers (2)
Nuts (2)
Electrical Connector
Screw
Spring Washer
L-Joint
O-Ring
O-Ring
Cover
Screws (6)
Lockwashers (6)
Clip
Index
90-823224--2 796
VAPOR SEPARATOR TANK (VST)
a
5
1
6
1
73797
11
9
10
11
12
73719
NOTE: Later model VST (MCM 454 Magnum EFI Serial Number-0F130438 and MCM 502 Magnum EFI Serial
Number 0F128962 and higher) will be equipped with the fuel line as shown. Earlier VSTs will have fuel lines
as shown in figure 2.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112-

Grommet
Hose
Fuel Line Return
Plug
O-Ring
Fuel Line VST Supply
Grommet
Bushing
Screw
O-Ring
Fuel Line Supply
Index
90-823224--2 796
INSTALLATION

NOTICE
Refer to Service Precautions, in Repair
Procedures, BEFORE proceeding.
1. Install VST to intake manifold. Apply Loctite 8831

to threads of attaching screw. Torque bolt to 105
lb. in. (12 Nm).
2. Connect all lines to cover of vapor separator tank.
Torque fuel line fittings to 23 lb. ft. (31 Nm).
REMOVAL
3. Connect fuel pump electrical connector.
1. Disconnect fuel pump electrical connector.
4. With engine off, cycle ignition switch to on,waiting

2 seconds and then off, four times waiting 10 seconds after each key off to prime the fuel system
and check for leaks.
2. Label and then disconnect all fuel lines from cover of vapor separator tank.
NOTE: If VST is dry, remove the vent screw and fill

with fuel.
a
REMOVAL - VST FUEL PUMP
d
c
1. Disconnect fuel pump electrical connector.
2. Label and then disconnect all lines from cover of

vapor separator tank.
b
4. Remove screw from L-joint and pull L-joint from

cover.
e
72804
a
b
c
d
e
3. Remove electrical line from retaining clip.
VST
Intake Manifold
Screw
Bushing
Grommet
3. Remove screw and VST from intake manifold.
5. Disconnect fuel pump electrical connectors as

follows:
a. Gently pry each side of connector cover up
and over retaining tabs.
b. Remove connector retaining nuts and remove connectors.
6. Remove cover screws and remove cover and
electrical line retaining clip.
7. Carefully slide fuel pump assembly from cover.
8. Remove O-ring, plate, adaptors and collar from
fuel pump.
9. Remove screen from fuel pump.
10. Remove plate and rubber cushion.
NOTE: When replacing fuel pump, make certain to

replace with a fuel pump of the identical part number.
Index
90-823224--2 796
INSTALLATION
Float and Needle Assembly
1. Install rubber cushion and plate, making sure to

align cutout in plate with pump inlet.
REMOVAL
2. Install screen on fuel pump.

3. Install adaptors, collar, plate and new O-ring on
fuel pump. Be sure that fuel pump relief valve fits
through hole in plate.
1. Disconnect fuel pump electrical connector. (Electric fuel pump removed for visual clarity.)
1
4. Slide fuel pump into cover.

5. Apply Loctite Type 8831 to threads of cover
screws. Install cover and electrical line retainer
clip and tighten cover screws securely.
6. Connect fuel pump electrical connectors. Snap

connector covers in place. Secure electrical line
in retainer clip.
7. Install L-joint onto cover. Tighten screw securely.
8. Connect all fuel lines to cover of vapor separator

tank. Torque fuel line fittings to 23 lb. ft. (31 Nm).

10. With engine OFF, cycle ignition switch to ON, wait
2 seconds and then OFF, four times waiting 10
seconds after each key off to prime the fuel system and check for leaks.
NOTE: If VST is dry, remove the vent screw and fill

with fuel.
6f
8
11
12
9
10
72803
a -
A VST equipped with elbow fitting on top of VST

spring.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112-
Cover
Lockwashers (6)
Screws (6)
Clip
Valve Seat
Float Valve
Float Valve Pin
Clip
Float
Float Arm Pin
Screw
Index
90-823224--2 796
Diaphragm Assembly
3. Remove electrical line from retaining clip. (some

models)
REMOVAL

electrical line retainer clip.
1. Disconnect fuel pump electrical connector. (Electric fuel pump removed for visual clarity.)
1
5. Remove float arm pin retaining fastener and remove float and needle assembly.
6. Disassemble float and needle assembly; i.e.,
float valve, float valve pin, clip and float.
CLEANING AND INSPECTION
1. Clean components with carburetor cleaner.
IMPORTANT: Do not soak float or float valve in
carburetor cleaner.
4
7
3
5
2. Inspect float valve seat for wear. Replace if necessary.
3. Inspect float and needle assembly; i.e., float

valve, float valve pin, clip and float. Replace parts
as necessary.
INSTALLATION
1. Assemble float and needle assembly; i.e., float

valve, float valve pin, clip and float.
NOTE: Float is not adjustable.
10
12
2. Install float and needle assembly and secure float

arm pin using fastener.
11
3. Apply Loctite 8831 to threads of cover screws.

Install cover and electrical line retainer clip and
tighten cover screws securely.
4. Secure electrical line in retainer clip.
7. With engine OFF, cycle ignition switch to ON waiting for 2 seconds, and then OFF, waiting 10 seconds after each key off four times to prime the
fuel system and check for leaks.
NOTE: IF VST is dry. remove vent screw and fill with

fuel.
72803
a -
A VST equipped with elbow fitting on top of VST

spring.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112-
Cover
Lockwashers (6)
Screws (6)
Clip
Spring
Diaphragm
O-Ring
Diaphragm Cover
O-Ring
Screw
Lockwasher
Index
90-823224--2 796
3. Remove electrical line from retainer clip.
electrical line retaining clip.
5. Remove float arm pin retaining fastener and remove float and needle assembly.
6. Remove diaphragm cover screws and remove diaphragm cover, O-ring, diaphragm and spring.
7. Clean and inspect all parts. Check diaphragm for
damage. Replace if necessary.
8. Inspect spring for wear. Replace if necessary.
INSTALLATION
1. Install spring, diaphragm, O-ring and diaphragm
cover using diaphragm cover screws. Tighten
screws.
2. Install float and needle assembly and secure float
arm pin using fastener.
3. Apply Loctite 8831 to threads of cover screws.
Install cover and electrical line retainer clip and
tighten cover screws securely.
3
4
73895
Torque Sequence For VST

4. Secure electrical line in retainer clip.
7. With engine OFF, cycle ignition switch to ON,wait
for 2 seconds, then OFF, four times, waiting 10
Index
90-823224--2 796

Repair Procedures
! WARNING
on your MerCruiser are designed and manufactured to comply with U.S Coast Guard Rules and
Regulations to minimize risks of fire and explosion. Use of replacement electrical, ignition or
fuel system components, which do not comply
with these rules and regulations, could result in
a fire or explosion hazard and should be avoided.
Special Tools
Description
Fuel Pressure Gauge
Loctite 8831
Loctite 262
Loctite 242
Fastener Location
Lb. Ft.
Nm
Lb. In.
50
30
40
Intake Manifold To
Heads
25
34
VST Cover To Body
Spark Plugs
11
15
VST To Throttle Body
23
31
Sensors And Plugs To

Thermostat Housing
Hand Tight Plus 2-1/2

Turns Maximum
Flame Arrestor To
Throttle Body
Throttle Body To
Adapter
Adapter To Intake
Manifold
Part Number
Knock Sensor
91-168850A1
TP Sensor
Lubricants/Sealants/
Adhesives
Description
14
20
19
2
IAC Valve
13
18
Distributor Hold-Down
Clamp
30
40
MAP Sensor
53
Part Number
92-823089-1
Obtain Locally
Index
90-823224--2 796

System Description
! WARNING
The fuel system consists of a fuel supply, tank, water

separating fuel filter, electric fuel pump, pressure regulator, fuel injectors, throttle body and throttle position (TP) sensor.
Fuel is drawn from the boats fuel supply tank,
through a water separating fuel filter and fuel cooler,
by a electrical fuel pump.
Be sure that the engine compartment is well ventilated and that no gasoline vapors are present to
avoid the possibility of fire.
! WARNING
Make sure no fuel leaks exist before closing engine hatch.
! CAUTION
A pressure regulator located on the fuel cooler maintains a constant fuel pressure. The fuel bled off from
the pressure regulator is delivered back to the water
Fuel pressure MUST BE relieved before servicing

any component in the fuel system.
The throttle body is the component of the system

which supplies the air required for optimum fuel combustion. The throttle body consists of a housing, two
injectors, two throttle plates, throttle plate linkage,
idle air control (IAC) valve and throttle position (TP)
sensor.

being supplied to seawater pump or water pump
impeller will be damaged and subsequent overheating damage to engine may result.
Service Precautions
! WARNING
or explosion.
! WARNING
crankcase ventilation hoses; gasoline is extremely flammable and highly explosive under
certain conditions. Be sure that ignition key is
OFF. DO NOT smoke or allow sources of spark or
open flame in area when cleaning flame arrestor
and crankcase ventilation hoses.
! CAUTION
The following information MUST BE adhered to

when working on the fuel system:
Always keep a dry chemical fire extinguisher

at the work area.
Always install new O-rings when assembling

fuel system parts.
DO NOT replace fuel pipe with fuel hose.
Always relieve system fuel pressure prior to

servicing any component in the fuel system.
DO NOT attempt any repair to the fuel system

until instructions and illustrations relating to
that repair are thoroughly understood.
Observe all Notes and Cautions.
! WARNING
Be careful when changing fuel system components; gasoline is extremely flammable and highly explosive under certain conditions. Be sure
sources of spark or open flame in the area while
changing fuel filter(s). Wipe up any spilled fuel
immediately.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Throttle Body Exploded Views

Induction System
1
7
3
8
9
75038
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Screws (3)
Throttle Body Unit
Gasket
Throttle Body Adapter Plate
Gasket
Intake Manifold
Screws (2)
Throttle Linkage
Index
90-823224--2 796
Throttle Body
1
2
4
3
5
7
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
20
13
14
17
15
18
16
73766
19
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10-
Cap Screw
Cover Assembly
Cover Assembly Gasket
Upper O-Ring
Fuel Meter Outlet Gasket
Fuel Injector (2)
Fuel Filter (2)
Lower O-Ring
Screw
11121314151617181920-
Body
Throttle Body To Fuel Meter Body Gasket
Throttle Body
Screws (2)
Seal
O-Ring
Screws (2)
Fuel Inlet
Index
90-823224--2 796
Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure
4. Remove fuel meter cover assembly.

d
NOTICE
a
1. Disconnect electrical connector from fuel pump.
2. Crank engine for ten seconds (if engine starts allow it to run until it dies) to relieve any fuel pressure in the system.
b
c
Fuel Meter Cover Assembly
73767
NOTICE
! CAUTION
DO NOT remove the four screws securing the
pressure regulator to the fuel meter cover. The
fuel pressure regulator includes a large spring
under heavy compression which, if accidentally
released, could cause personal injury.
REMOVAL
1. Remove the flame arrestor from the throttle body.
2. Disconnect electrical connectors to fuel injectors.
(Squeeze plastic tabs and pull straight up.)
3. Remove the fuel meter cover screw assemblies.
a
b
c
d
e
Fuel Meter Cover

Fuel Damper
Gaskets (Regulator Passages)
Screws
Fuel Meter Outlet Gasket

IMPORTANT: DO NOT immerse the fuel meter
cover (with pressure regulator) in cleaner, as
damage to the regulator diaphragm and gasket
could occur.
1. Inspect pressure regulator seating area for pitting, nicks, burrs or irregularities. Use a magnifying glass if necessary. If any of the above is present, replace the cover assembly.
Index
90-823224--2 796
INSTALLATION
1. Install new pressure regulator seal, fuel meter
outlet passage gasket, and cover gasket.
2. Install fuel meter cover assembly.
3. Install attaching screws, precoated with appropriate locking compound to threads. (Short screws
are next to injectors.)
1. Remove flame arrestor and fuel meter cover as

outlined in this section.
2. Using a screwdriver carefully pry up on fuel injector to remove it from the fuel meter body (Use a
screwdriver or rod under the the screwdriver
when prying up. Leave old gasket in place to prevent damage to fuel meter body).
4. Torque screws to 28 lb. in. (3 Nm).

5. Connect electrical connectors to fuel injectors.
6. With engine OFF, and ignition ON, check for
leaks around gasket and fuel line couplings.
d
a
73770

b
Inspect fuel injectors for damage; replace if necessary.
73767
IMPORTANT: When replacing injectors, be certain to replace with the identical part and part
number. Other injectors may have the same appearance, yet have a different part number and be
calibrated for a different flow rate, and if installed,
would cause performance difficulty or damage to
the ECM.
a
a
b
c
d
Fuel Meter Cover

Pressure Regulator Assembly
Gaskets (Regulator Passages)
Screws
73772
Fuel Injectors
NOTICE
a - Part Indentification Number
REMOVAL
NOTE: Use care in removing fuel injectors to prevent

damage to the electrical connector and nozzle.
IMPORTANT: The fuel injector is an electrical
component. DO NOT soak in any liquid cleaner or
solvent, as damage may result.
Index
90-823224--2 796
INSTALLATION
Throttle Body
1. Install new lower O-rings on fuel injectors. Lubricate O-rings using a water soap solution.
REMOVAL
! CAUTION
Ensure that fuel pressure is relieved before removing the fuel inlet and return lines.
b
a
IMPORTANT: DO NOT allow the TP sensor, fuel

pressure regulator, fuel injectors and IAC valve
to come into contact with solvent or cleaner.
These components should be removed prior to
immersion in solvent.
c
d
1. Remove the flame arrestor from the throttle body.

2. Disconnect throttle cable.
73766
a
b
c
d
Fuel Injector
Upper O-Ring
Lower O-Ring
Fuel Filter
3. Disconnect the electrical connections from the

TP sensor, IAC and fuel injectors. (Squeeze plastic tabs on injectors and pull straight up).
a
2. Install upper O-rings in fuel meter body. Lubricate

O-rings with water soap solution.
3. Install fuel injectors into the fuel meter body. Align
the raised lug on the injector base with the notch
in fuel meter cavity.
73750
a
a - Electrical Connections
4. Remove fuel inlet and outlet lines from throttle

body.
73771
NOTE: The electrical terminals of the injectors

should be parallel with throttle shaft.
4. Install gasket and fuel meter cover, torque
screws to 28 in. lb. (3.0 Nm) and flame arrestor
as outlined in this section.
5. Remove screws retaining the throttle body to

adapter plate.
NOTE: Place a shop rag over the intake manifold

opening to prevent debris from entering intake manifold.
5. Connect electrical connections to fuel injectors.

6. With engine OFF, and ignition ON, check for
leaks around gasket and fuel line couplings
Index
90-823224--2 796
1. Thoroughly clean metal parts of throttle body in

a cold immersion type cleaner. Dry with compressed air. Make certain that all passages are
free of dirt and burrs.
2. Inspect mating surfaces for damage that could
affect gasket sealing.
3. Inspect throttle body for cracks in casting.
4. Inspect throttle plates, linkage, return springs,
etc., for damage, wear and foreign material.
NOTICE
REMOVAL
IMPORTANT: Place a clean shop towel over the
intake manifold opening to prevent foreign material from entering the engine.
5. Check intake manifold plenum for loose parts

and foreign material.
INSTALLATION
3. Remove screws and the throttle body adapter

from the intake manifold.
1. Install fuel injectors and fuel meter body as previously described in this section.
2. Remove throttle body refer to Throttle Body Section.
2. Install a new gasket on adapter plate.

3. Install throttle body on adapter plate and torque
the screws. 30 ft. lb. (40 Nm).
4. Connect throttle linkage to throttle body.
5. Move throttle from idle to WOT and check that the

throttle movement is not binding.
6. Connect the fuel inlet and return lines. Torque to
23 ft. lb. (31 Nm).
7
3
7. Connect TP sensor, IAC, and fuel injectors connections.
8. Turn key to on position and check for fuel leaks

around the inlet and return line connections.
9. Start engine and check for fuel leaks.
73965
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Screws (3)
Throttle Body Unit
Gasket
Gasket
Intake Manifold
Screws (2)
Index
90-823224--2 796
Multi-Port System
Description
! WARNING
The MerCruiser EFI Fuel System consists of a fuel

supply, water separating fuel filter, mechanical fuel
pump, vapor separator tank (VST), electric fuel
pump, injector fuel filter, fuel rail, pressure regulator,
fuel injectors, throttle body and throttle position (TP)
sensor.

crankcase ventilation hose; gasoline is extremely flammable and highly explosive under certain
Sight Tube to
Throttle Body
to Intake
! WARNING
Be careful when changing fuel system components; gasoline is extremely flammable and highly explosive under certain conditions. Be sure
sources of spark or open flame in the area while
changing fuel filter(s). Wipe up any spilled fuel
immediately.
! WARNING
Be sure that the engine compartment is well ventilated and that no gasoline vapors are present to
avoid the possibility of fire.
! WARNING
Fuel is drawn from the boats fuel supply (tank),
through a water separating fuel filter, by a mechanical
fuel pump mounted on and driven by a seawater
pump, and is delivered to the vapor separator tank
(VST).
Make sure no fuel leaks exist, before closing engine hatch.
! CAUTION
The VST consists of a reservoir, float, needle and

seat assembly, fuel pump pickup screen, electric fuel
pump. The electric fuel pump located in the VST,
pumps the fuel rail supplying pressurized fuel to the
fuel injectors.
Fuel pressure MUST BE relieved before servicing

high pressure component in the fuel system.
A pressure regulator located on the fuel rail maintains

a constant fuel pressure in the fuel rail. The fuel bled
off from the pressure regulator is delivered back to
the VST.

housing, or water pump impeller will be damaged
and subsequent overheating damage to engine
may result.
The throttle body is the component of the system

which supplies the air required for optimum fuel combustion. The throttle body consists of a housing, two
throttle plates, throttle plate linkage, idle air control
(IAC) valve and throttle position (TP) sensor.
! CAUTION
The following information MUST BE adhered to

when working on the fuel system:
Always keep a dry chemical fire extinguisher

at the work area.
Service Precautions
Always install new O-rings when assembling

fuel pipe fittings.
! WARNING
DO NOT replace fuel pipe with fuel hose.
DO NOT attempt any repair to the fuel system

until instructions and illustrations relating to
that repair are thoroughly understood.
Observe all Notes and Cautions.

or explosion.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Multi-Port Exploded Views

Flame Arrestor and Throttle Body
12
13
14
4
15
3
5
2
1
11
10
9
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Cap Nut
Flame Arrestor
Stud
Throttle Body
Gasket
Washer
Screw
72800
9 101112131415-
O-Ring
Screw
Mounting Bracket (1997 and Newer Models)
Screw (1997 and Newer Models)
Flame Arrestor (1997 and Newer Models)
Screw (1997 and Newer Models)
Index
90-823224--2 796
Plenum
1
2
3
14
13
12
11
8
10
9
72802
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314-
Screw
Screw
Plenum
Sleeve
Drain Line To Intake
Nut
Bracket
Stud
Screw
Gasket
Seal
Screw
Index
90-823224--2 796
Index
90-823224--2 796
Intake Manifold and Fuel Rail
17
16
15
18
12
14
19
21
20
22
9
23
8
5
10
24
4
11
25
13
26
29
27
28
33
30
2
31
3
29
32
72799
Index
90-823224--2 796
1 -Intake Manifold
2 -Bolt
3 -Washer
4 -Bolt
5 -Retainer
6 -Fuel Rail
7 -Bolt
8 -Filter
9 -O-Ring
10-Pressure Regulator (VST Models) Or Fuel
Damper (Cool Fuel Models)
11 -O-Ring
12-Screw
13-Nut
14-Schrader Valve
15-Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
16-Plug
17-Bolt
18-Thermostat Housing
19-Plug
20-Water Temperature Sender
21-Gasket
22-Thermostat
23-Sleeve
24-Gasket
25-Bolt
26-Washer
27-Bolt
28-Washer
29-Fuel Injector
30-O-Ring
31-Grommet
32-Grommet
33-Fitting
Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure

NOTICE
1. Disconnect electrical connector at fuel pump.
2. Crank engine for ten seconds (if engine starts allow it run until it dies) to relieve any fuel pressure
in the system.
Multi-Port Components
Flame Arrestor
NOTICE
REMOVAL
Remove four flame arrestor mounting cap nuts and
remove flame arrestor from throttle body.
a
b
72790
a - Flame Arrestor
b - Cap Nuts (4)

Clean flame arrestor in solvent and dry with compressed air.
INSTALLATION
1. Install flame arrestor to throttle body.
2. Apply Loctite 242 to threads of studs. Install four
flame arrestor mounting cap nuts. Torque cap
nuts to 50 lb. in. (6 Nm).
Index
90-823224--2 796
3. Remove four throttle body mounting studs using

a stud driver.
Throttle Body
NOTICE
a
REMOVAL
1. Remove four flame arrestor mounting cap nuts
and remove flame arrestor from throttle body.
a
b
b
72792
a - Throttle Body
b - Throttle Body Mounting Studs
4. Turn throttle body as shown and disconnect TP, drain

tube and IAC electrical connectors.
72790
b
a - Flame Arrestor
b - Cap Nuts (4)
2. Disconnect throttle linkage.
72793
72791
a - Throttle Linkage Connections
a
b
c
d
Throttle Body
Drain Tube
IMPORTANT: To prevent damage to throttle

valve, it is essential that throttle body be placed
on a holding fixture before performing service.
IMPORTANT: Insert a clean shop towel into the
opening of the plenum to prevent foreign material from entering the engine.
Index
90-823224--2 796
5. Remove TP with O-ring and IAC valve with O-ring

from throttle body.
INSTALLATION
NOTE: To prevent difficult removal of fasteners and

damage to fastener heads, do not use a higher
strength thread locking compound than recommended.
7. Connect TP and IAC electrical connectors, then
install throttle body with new gasket using four
throttle body mounting studs.
b
a
d
72794
72793
a - Throttle Position (TP) Sensor

b - Idle Air Control (IAC) valve
a
b
c
d

IMPORTANT: DO NOT use cleaners containing
methyl ethyl ketone. It is not necessary for cleaning throttle bore and valve deposits.
Throttle Body
Sight Tube
8. Apply Loctite 242 to threads of studs. Using a stud

driver, torque studs to 165 lb. in. (18.6 Nm).
IMPORTANT: DO NOT allow the TP and IAC valve

to come into contact with solvent or cleaner.
IMPORTANT: Use care when removing gasket
material from plenum and throttle body. Failure
to do so could result in damage to the plenum
and throttle body.
1. Carefully remove all gasket material from plenum

and throttle body.
2. Thoroughly clean all parts of throttle body. Make
certain that all passages are free of dirt and burrs.
72792
a - Throttle Body
b - Throttle Body Mounting Studs

4. Inspect throttle body for cracks in casting.
5. Inspect throttle plates, linkage, return springs,
etc., for damage, wear and foreign material.
6. Check plenum for loose parts and foreign material.
Index
90-823224--2 796
10. Install flame arrestor to throttle body. Apply Loctite 242 to threads of studs. Install four flame arrestor mounting cap nuts. Torque cap nuts to 50
lb. in. (6 Nm).
a
73855
72790
9. Connect throttle linkage. Secure cable barrel anchor stud with locknut and tighten securely. Secure cable end guide to lever stud. Thread locknut on stud until it contacts end guide.
a - Flame Arrestor
b - Cap Nuts (4)
Plenum
NOTICE
REMOVAL
1. Remove flame arrestor and throttle body as outlined previously.
2. Disconnect IAT and MAP sensor electrical connectors
72791
a - Cable Barrel Anchor Stud

b - Locknut
b
a
72795
.
b - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
Index
90-823224--2 796
3. Disconnect reference line at pressure regulator.
2. Clean plenum in solvent and dry with compressed air.

4. Inspect plenum for cracks in casting.
INSTALLATION
1. Install one gasket onto each of the four intake

manifold trumpets.
2. Rest plenum on intake manifold as shown. Connect drain line at plenum. Lower plenum evenly
onto intake manifold and install twelve plenum
mounting fasteners. Torque fasteners to 150 lb.
in. (17 Nm).
72796
a
a - Reference Line
b - Pressure Regulator
4. Remove twelve plenum mounting fasteners and

lift straight up from intake manifold. Turn plenum
slightly and rest on intake manifold as shown.
Disconnect drain line at plenum and remove plenum.
a
72797
a - Plenum
b - Intake Manifold
c - Drain Line
3. Connect reference line to pressure regulator.

b
72797
a - Plenum
b - Intake Manifold
c - Drain Line
IMPORTANT: Place a clean shop towel over each

of the eight intake manifold openings to prevent
foreign material from entering the engine.
72796

IMPORTANT: Use care when removing gasket
material from intake manifold and plenum. Failure to do so could result in damage to the intake
manifold and plenum.
a - Reference Line
b - Pressure Regulator (VST Models) Or Fuel Damper (Cool
Fuel Models)
4. Connect IAT and MAP sensor electrical connectors.
1. Carefully remove all gasket material from intake

manifold and plenum.
Index
90-823224--2 796
10. Remove distributor from intake manifold.

IMPORTANT: DO NOT crank engine over after
distributor has been removed.
11. Disconnect inlet fuel line at vapor separator tank
(VST) and mechanical fuel pump and remove inlet fuel line.
12. Disconnect all miscellaneous items that will prevent removal of manifold.
a
72795
IMPORTANT: It may be necessary to pry intake

manifold away from cylinder heads and block in
next step. Use extreme care to prevent damage to
sealing surfaces.
13. Remove intake manifold bolts, then remove intake manifold along with VST, fuel rail and injectors.
b

b
b
5. Install throttle body and flame arrestor as outlined

previously.
b
b
Intake Manifold
b
b
NOTICE
b
b
REMOVAL
1. Drain engine cooling system. Refer to Section

6A, Seawater Cooled Models.
b
b
2. Remove flame arrestor, throttle body and plenum

as outlined previously.
3. Disconnect hoses from thermostat housing.
4. Disconnect intake manifold to circulating pump

by-pass hose from circulating pump.
5. Disconnect all electrical leads necessary for intake manifold removal, including fuel injector and
distributor connections. Carefully move wiring
away from intake manifold.
a - Intake Manifold
b - Bolt Locations
6. Disconnect crankcase ventilation hoses from

rocker arm covers.
NOTE: If intake manifold requires replacement,

transfer all remaining parts to new manifold.
72916
7. Remove distributor cap.

8. Scribe a line on the distributor housing marking
rotor position. Also, mark position of distributor
housing on intake manifold.
9. Remove distributor housing hold-down bolt and
clamp.
Index
90-823224--2 796

1. Clean gasket material from all mating surfaces.
3. Apply a small amount of RTV Sealer on neoprene

gasket ends.
IMPORTANT: When cleaning cylinder head mating surface, DO NOT allow gasket material to enter engine crankcase or intake ports.
2. Clean excessive scale and deposits from the water passages.

3. Inspect manifold for cracks or scratches. Machined surfaces must be clean and free of all
marks or deep scratches or leaks may result.
c
b
4. Inspect intake passages for varnish buildup or

other foreign material. Clean as necessary.
INSTALLATION
IMPORTANT: When installing intake manifold

gaskets in the next step, be sure to install gasket
with marked side up. Also, both gaskets are NOT
identical. Install gaskets on their respective
sides of the engine. DO NOT use ANY other gasket than that which is recommended.
1. Apply Quicksilver Perfect Seal to both sides of intake manifold gasket around coolant passages.
72514
a - Neoprene Gaskets
b - RTV Sealer
c - Gaskets
4. Set intake manifold gaskets in place, aligning bolt

holes.
5. Carefully install intake manifold assembly and
torque bolts to 25 lb. ft. (34 Nm) in the sequence
shown.
15
13
a
14
12
16
11
4
72514
a - Coolant Passages
3
1
! WARNING
2
Be sure to read and follow package label directions when using bellows adhesive.
2. Using Quicksilver Bellows Adhesive, glue neoprene gaskets to engine block between cylinder
heads.
5
10
6
8
9
7
72916
Intake Manifold Torque Sequence
Index
90-823224--2 796
6. Connect all miscellaneous items which were disconnected from manifold during removal.
7. Connect inlet fuel line at vapor separator tank
(VST) and mechanical fuel pump.
Fuel Rail and Injectors

Fuel Rail
8. Align rotor, housing and intake manifold using

scribe marks.
9. Slowly lower distributor through intake manifold
and into position. If distributor shaft wont drop
into position, back it out and insert a screwdriver
into the hole to turn the oil pump drive shaft. Repeat this adjustment as many times as needed
until the distributor can be firmly seated and all
components are in alignment.
10. Install hold-down clamp over distributor and bolt
it securely to engine surface. Torque bolt to 30 lb.
ft. (40 Nm).
11. Install distributor cap and secure in place with two
screws.
NOTICE
REMOVAL
1. Remove flame arrestor, throttle body, and plenum as outlined in this section.
2. Disconnect electrical connector at each fuel injector.
3. Remove fuel line retainer from fuel rail. Remove
inlet and outlet fuel lines from fuel rail.

arm covers.
g
13. Install all electrical leads, including fuel injector

and distributor connections. (Refer to wiring diagrams.)
14. Connect intake manifold to circulating pump bypass hose.
15. Connect hoses to thermostat housing.

16. Install plenum, throttle body and flame arrestor
as outlined previously.
IMPORTANT: Before proceeding to the following
step, be certain that engine will obtain an adequate supply of water for cooling. Refer to Section 6A, Seawater Cooled Models.
17. Start engine. Adjust ignition timing and check
hose connections, gaskets and seals for leaks.
18. Inspect fuel line connections for fuel leaks.
c
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
72915
Fuel Rail
Fuel Inlet Line
Fuel Outlet Line
O-Rings
Fuel Line Retainer
Screw
Fuel Rail Mounting Screws
Index
90-823224--2 796
4. Remove fuel rail mounting screws.
INSTALLATION
5. When facing front of engine, remove fuel rail as

follows:
NOTE: Before installing fuel injectors, lubricate new

fuel injector O-rings using a water/soap solution.
NOTE: The left bank fuel injectors are to remain fully

seated in the fuel rail throughout removal, while the
right bank fuel injectors are to remain fully seated in
the intake manifold throughout removal.
1. When standing at front of engine, install fuel rail

as follows:
a. Install four left bank fuel injectors into left
bank of fuel rail.
a. Working from front of engine to rear, slide the

first front right bank fuel injector from the fuel
rail. Next, slide the first front left bank fuel injector from the intake manifold. Continue sliding fuel injectors from their respective bores
working back and forth toward rear of engine
until fuel rail is free.
b. Install four right bank fuel injectors into right

bank of intake manifold.
c. Working from rear of engine to front, insert
the first rear left bank fuel injector into the intake manifold. Next, insert the first rear right
bank fuel injector into the fuel rail. Continue
inserting fuel injectors into their respective
bores working back and forth toward front of
engine until all fuel injectors are in place.
b
a
b
a
c
d
72798
a
b
c
d
Fuel Rail
Intake Manifold
Front Right Bank Fuel Injector
Front Left Bank Fuel Injector
d
72798

Inspect fuel injector seating area in fuel rail for pitting,
nicks, burrs or irregularities, use a magnifying glass
if necessary. If any of the above is present, replace
the fuel rail.
a
b
c
d
Fuel Rail
Intake Manifold
Rear Right Bank Fuel Injector
Rear Left Bank Fuel Injector
2. Install fuel rail mounting bolts and torque to 105

lb. in. (12 Nm).
Index
90-823224--2 796
3. Install new O-rings on fuel inlet and outlet lines.

Lubricate O-rings using a water soap solution
and install lines to fuel rail. Secure fuel line retainer to fuel rail using screw.
2. Remove pressure regulator attaching screws

and nuts, and remove pressure regulator.
c
g
d
a
b
e
d
f
72915
c
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
e
f
72915
Fuel Rail
Fuel Inlet Line
Fuel Outlet
O-Rings
Fuel Line Retainer
Screw
Fuel Rail Retaining Screws
a
b
c
d
e
f
Fuel Rail
Pressure Regulator
Screw
Filter
O-Rings
Nut
3. Carefully remove filter from fuel rail using an awl

or equivalent tool.
4. Connect electrical connector at each fuel injector.

5. Install plenum, throttle body and flame arrestor
as outlined in this section.
Pressure Regulator
NOTICE
1. Inspect pressure regulator seating area on fuel

rail for pitting, nicks, burrs or irregularities. Use a
magnifying glass if necessary. If any of the above
is present, replace the fuel rail.
2. Clean filter of any debris using solvent. Dry using
compressed air.
INSTALLATION
1. Install filter into appropriate bore of fuel rail.
REMOVAL
2. Install new pressure regulator O-rings using a

water and soap solution.
1. Remove flame arrestor, throttle body, plenum

and fuel rail as outlined in this section.
3. Carefully slide pressure regulator into fuel rail.

4. Apply Loctite 8831 to threads of attaching
screws. Install screws and nuts and torque to
88-124 lb. in. (10-14 Nm).
5. Install fuel rail, plenum, throttle body and flame
arrestor as outlined in this section.
6. With engine OFF, cycle ignition switch to ON wait
2 seconds, and then OFF, four times waiting 10
Index
90-823224--2 796
1. Install new O-rings on fuel injectors. Lubricate Orings using a water soap solution.
Fuel Injectors
NOTICE
REMOVAL
NOTE: Use care in removing fuel injectors to prevent

damage to the electrical connector and nozzle.
a
IMPORTANT: The fuel injector is an electrical

solvent, as damage may result.
72799
1. Remove flame arrestor, throttle body, plenum

and fuel rail as outlined in this section.
2. Remove fuel injectors from fuel rail and intake
manifold.
a - Fuel Injector
b - O-Ring
2. Install fuel injectors as outlined in Fuel Rail and

Intake Manifold.
Inspect fuel injectors for damage; replace if necessary.
3. Install fuel rail, plenum, throttle body and flame

arrestor as outlined in this section.
INSTALLATION
IMPORTANT: When replacing injectors, be certain to replace with the identical part and part
number. Other injectors may have the same appearance, yet have a different part number and be
calibrated for a different flow rate, and if installed,
would cause performance difficulty or damage to
the ECM.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Throttle Body Injection and

Multi-Port Injection Sensor
and Module Servicing
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect J1 and J2 electrical connectors at engine control module (ECM).
Precautions
! WARNING
BEFORE attempting to disconnect and remove
any module or sensor, check to make sure that
the engine ignition system is OFF. Then disconnect the negative () battery cable from the terminal. DO NOT reconnect the negative () battery
cable until the module or sensor removed has
been re-installed with secure connections.
IMPORTANT: Modules and sensors are electrical

devices easily damaged by contact with liquid
cleaners or solvents. Clean with a dry cloth unless specifically directed to do otherwise.
d

IMPORTANT: The ECM is a sensitive electrical device, subject to electrostatic damage. Therefore,
take care not to touch connector pins when removing or installing the module.
NOTICE
c
b
a
b
c
d
72801
Electrical Bracket
ECM
J1- Electrical Connector (Front Connector)
J2- Electrical Connector (Rear Connector)
2. Remove ECM from electrical bracket.

1. Clean the exterior of the ECM with a dry cloth being careful to avoid contact with connector pins.
2. Inspect outer surfaces for any obvious damage
3. Visually inspect electrical pins at both ends of
ECM for straightness and corrosion.
4. Visually inspect J1 and J2 connectors on the wiring harness for corrosion and terminals that may
have backed of the harness.
NOTE: The ECM is a sealed electrical component. If

a Code 51 check has shown it to be defective, replace the unit with another ECM having the same part
number and service number as the original.
Index
90-823224--2 796
INSTALLATION
1. Mount new ECM to electrical bracket.

2. Connect J1 and J2 electrical connectors to the
ECM.
NOTICE
REMOVAL
1. Remove Knock Sensor from electrical bracket.
c
b
72801
72801
a
b
c
d
Electrical Bracket
ECM
J1- Electrical Connector (Front Connector)
J2- Electrical Connector (Rear Connector)
a - Electrical Bracket
b - Knock Sensor (KS) Sensor
2. Disconnect electrical connector at Knock Sensor

(KS) module.
1. Clean the external surfaces of the KS module
with a dry cloth.
2. Inspect surfaces of KS module for evidence of
damage.
Index
90-823224--2 796
INSTALLATION
1. Connect electrical connector to the Knock Sensor (KS) module.
1. Disconnect electrical connector at Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor.
2. Mount KS module to electrical bracket.
72799
a - Thermostat Housing
b - Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
2. Remove ECT from thermostat housing.

1. Clean with a dry cloth, removing any excess sealant from the base threads.
2. Look for evidence of any physical damage to
base or connector surfaces of the ECT.
INSTALLATION
72801
1. Install ECT in thermostat housing. TIGHTEN

HAND TIGHT PLUS 2-1/2 TURNS MAXIMUM.
b - Knock Sensor (KS) Sensor
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT)

Sensor
NOTICE
REMOVAL
NOTE: Handle the ECT carefully as any damage to

it will affect operation of the system.
72799
b - Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
2. Connect electrical connector to ECT.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Throttle Body Injection ComponentsManifold Absolute Pressure (MAP)

Sensor
2. Connect electrical connector to MAP sensor.
NOTICE
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect electrical connector at manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor.
a
b
74939
a - Throttle Body Adapter Plate


NOTICE
a
74939
a - Throttle Body Adapter Plate

REMOVAL
1. Disconnect electrical connector at throttle position (TP) sensor.
2. Remove MAP sensor from throttle body adapter.

2. Remove TP sensor from throttle body.

a
c
1. Clean off any foreign matter with a dry cloth.

2. Inspect for any obvious signs of physical damage
to the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. Install MAP sensor to throttle body adapter using
screws. Torque screws to 44-62 lb. in. (5-7 Nm).
b
73758
a - Throttle Body
b - Throttle Position (TP) Sensor
c - Screws

1. Clean the surfaces of the TP sensor with a dry
cloth.
2. Inspect the TP sensor for signs of wear or damage.
Index
90-823224--2 796
INSTALLATION
IMPORTANT: If the TP sensor is to be replaced

with a new unit, be sure to secure it in place with
the new screws which are included in the service
package.
1. Install TP sensor to throttle body using screws
with washers and Loctite 242 applied to threads.
Torque screws to 20 lb. in (2 Nm).
NOTICE
REMOVAL
1. Remove flame arrestor, throttle cable and throttle
body as outlined in Throttle Body.
2. Disconnect electrical connector at idle air control
(IAC) valve.
a
a
b
c
b
d
c
73754
73758
a - Throttle Body
a
b
c
d
Throttle Body
Screws With Lockwashers
Seal
2. Connect electrical connector to TP sensor.

3. Install throttle body, throttle linkage and flame arrestor as outlined in Throttle Body.
4. Start engine and check for TP sensor output voltage. It should be approximately .7V at idle and
4.5V at W.O.T.
3. Remove IAC from throttle body.

1. Remove and discard sealing O-ring from IAC
valve. Clean sealing surfaces, pintle valve seat,
and air passage with a carburetor cleaner to remove carbon deposits, being careful not to push
or pull on the IAC valve pintle. Force exerted on
the pintle might damage the worm drive. DO NOT
use a cleaner that contains the extremely strong
solvent methyl ethyl ketone.
NOTE: Shiny spots on the pintle, or seat, are normal

and do not indicate misalignment or a bent pintle
shaft.
2. Inspect the entire assembly for any obvious
physical damage.
Index
90-823224--2 796
INSTALLATION
IMPORTANT: If installing a new IAC valve, be sure
to replace it with the correct IAC valve pintle
shape and diameter are designed for the specific
application.
4. Reset IAC valve pintle position after reconnecting negative () battery cable.
a. Turn ignition key ON for ten seconds.
b. Turn ignition key OFF for ten seconds.
c. Restart engine and check for proper idle operation.
1. Install new O-ring on IAC valve.
Knock Sensor
NOTICE
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect electrical connector at knock sensor

located just ahead of starter motor.
d
73766
a
b
c
d
Throttle Body
O-Ring
Screws
2. Install IAC valve in throttle body using screws.

Torque to 20 lb. in. (2 Nm).
3. Connect electrical connector to IAC valve.
a
73757
a - Knock Sensor
2. Remove knock sensor from engine block.
b
73754
a - Throttle Body
Index
90-823224--2 796

1. Clean knock sensor with a dry cloth, paying special attention to threads on base.
2. Inspect surfaces of knock sensor for signs of
wear or physical damage.
INSTALLATION
IMPORTANT: In the following step, it is very important that the knock sensor be torqued to the
precise specification. Incorrect torquing will result in unsatisfactory performance. DO NOT use
sealer on threads.
IMPORTANT: Ensure that the knock sensor is
installed in the upper location on the Y-fitting.
12-16 lb. ft. (16.3-21.7 Nm).
a
73756
a - Knock Sensor
Index
90-823224--2 796
Multi-Port Injection ComponentsManifold Absolute Pressure (MAP)

Sensor
1. Clean off any foreign matter with a dry cloth.
NOTICE
2. Inspect for any obvious signs of physical damage

to the sensor.
3. Inspect seal for damage.
INSTALLATION
1. Install MAP sensor to plenum using screws.
Torque screws to 44-62 lb. in. (5-7 Nm).
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect electrical connector at manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor.
a
a
c
b
c
b
72802
72802
a
b
c
d
Plenum
Screws
Seal
a - Plenum
c - Screws
2. Connect electrical connector to MAP sensor.
2. Remove screws from MAP sensor.

3. Remove MAP sensor from plenum.
Index
90-823224--2 796
INSTALLATION
NOTICE
1. Install TP sensor to throttle body using screws

with washers and Loctite 242 applied to threads.
Torque screws to 20 lb. in (2 Nm).
REMOVAL
a
b
c
72800
c
72800
a
b
c
d
Throttle Body
O-Ring
2. Remove TP from throttle body.
a
b
c
d
Throttle Body
O-Ring
2. Install throttle body, throttle cable and flame arrestor as outlined in Throttle Body.
3. When negative () battery cable has been reconnected, start engine and check for TP sensor output voltage. It should be approximately .7 V at idle
and 4.5 V at W.O.T.

1. Clean the surfaces of the TP with a dry cloth.
2. Inspect the TP for signs of wear or damage.
Index
90-823224--2 796

NOTICE

1. Clean the surfaces of the IAT with a dry cloth.
2. Inspect the IAT for signs of wear or damage.
INSTALLATION
1. Install IAT in plenum. Tighten 2-1/2 turns maximum.
REMOVAL
1. Remove flame arrestor, throttle linkage, throttle
body and plenum as outlined in Plenum.
2. Remove IAT from plenum.
b
72802
b
72802
a - Plenum
b - Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor
a - Plenum
b - Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor
2. Install plenum, throttle body, throttle cable and

flame arrestor as outlined in Plenum.
3. Connect electrical connector to IAT.
Index
90-823224--2 796
INSTALLATION
NOTICE
IMPORTANT: If installing a new IAC valve, be sure

to replace it with an identical part. IAC valve
pintle shape and diameter are designed for the
1. Install new O-ring on IAC valve.
REMOVAL
2. Disconnect electrical connector at idle air control
(IAC) valve.
a
a
d
b
a
b
c
d
d
b
a
b
c
d
72800
Throttle Body
O-Ring
Screws
72800
Throttle Body
O-Ring
Screws
2. Install IAC valve in throttle body using screws.

Torque to 20 lb. in. (2 Nm).
3. Install throttle body, throttle linkage and flame arrestor as outlined in Throttle Body.
4. Reset IAC valve pintle position.
3. Remove IAC from throttle body.
a. Turn ignition key ON for ten seconds.
b. Turn ignition key OFF for ten seconds.
1. Remove and discard sealing O-ring from IAC

valve. Clean sealing surfaces, pintle valve seat,
and air passage with a carburetor cleaner to remove carbon deposits, being careful not to push
or pull on the IAC valve pintle. Force exerted on
the pintle might damage the worm drive. DO NOT
use a cleaner that contains the extremely strong
solvent methyl ethyl ketone.
c. Restart engine and check for proper idle operation.
NOTE: Shiny spots on the pintle, or seat, are normal

and do not indicate misalignment or a bent pintle
shaft.
2. Inspect the entire assembly for any obvious
physical damage.
Index
90-823224--2 796
INSTALLATION
Knock Sensor
NOTICE
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect electrical connector at knock sensor
located just ahead of starter motor.

IMPORTANT: In the following step, it is very important that the knock sensor be torqued to the
precise specification. Incorrect torquing will result in unsatisfactory performance. DO NOT use
sealer on threads.
12-16 lb. ft. (16.3-21.7 Nm).
a
72846
a - Knock Sensor
72846
2. Remove knock sensor from engine block.

a - Knock Sensor

1. Clean knock sensor with a dry cloth, paying special attention to threads on base.
2. Inspect surfaces of knock sensor for signs of

wear or physical damage.
Index
90-823224--2 796
INSTALLATION

NOTICE
1. Mount KS module to electrical bracket.

2. Connect electrical connector to the KS module.
REMOVAL
b
1. Remove KS module from electrical bracket.
b
a
72801
b - Knock Sensor Module
72801
b - Knock Sensor Module
2. Disconnect electrical connector at Knock Sensor

(KS) module.
1. Clean the external surfaces of the KS module
with a dry cloth.
2. Inspect surfaces of KS module for evidence of
damage.
Index
90-823224--2 796
ELECTRICAL BOX (TYPICAL)
7
6
3
4
11
12
10
1
13
14
18
16
17
15
19
72801
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516171819-
Bracket
Relay
Relay
Screw
Knock Sensor (KS) Sensor
Screw
Slave Solenoid
Nut
Circuit Breaker
Screw
Screw
MerCathode
Circuit Breaker Fuse
Screw
Nut
Engine Control Module (ECM)
Index
90-823224--2 796
Fuel Pump Relay

NOTICE
Ignition Control (IC) System

Components
Precautions
! WARNING
REMOVAL
1. Detach fuel pump relay from bracket.
a
When performing the following procedures, be

sure to observe the following precautions to
avoid damage to equipment or personal injury:
DO NOT touch or disconnect any ignition system
parts while the engine is running.
DO NOT reverse battery cable connections. System is negative () ground.
DO NOT disconnect battery cables while engine
is running.
When it is necessary to move any of the wiring,
whether to lift wires away from their harnesses or
move harnesses to reach components, take care
that all wiring is replaced in its original position
and all harnesses are routed correctly. Electrical
problems can result from wiring or harnesses becoming loose and moving from their original
positions or from being re-routed.
72801
a - Fuel Pump Relay

b - Bracket
2. Disconnect electrical connector and remove fuel

pump relay.
IMPORTANT: The fuel pump relay is an electrical
solvent; damage may result.
INSTALLATION
1. Insert electrical connector into fuel pump relay.
2. Attach fuel pump relay to bracket.
Index
90-823224--2 796
RESISTANCE CHECK
Ignition Coil
NOTICE
Use an ohmmeter or the ohms function of a DVM for

the following check.
1. Connect meter as shown with meter 1 in the figure below.
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect wire harness connectors at coil.
3
72920
72921
2. Setting the meter to its highest ohms scale, check

resistance. The reading should indicate infinite
resistance. If it does not, replace the coil.
a - Wire Harness Connection

b - High Tension Coil Lead Connection
2. Remove high tension coil lead.

3. Remove coil bracket fasteners and remove coil
bracket with coil.
3. Connect meter as shown with meter 2 in the figure above.

4. Setting the meter to its lowest ohms scale, check
resistance. The reading should be very low or
zero resistance. If it is not, replace the coil.
5. Connect meter as shown with meter 3 in the figure above.
6. Setting the meter to its highest ohms scale, check
resistance. The reading should not indicate infinite resistance. If it does, replace the coil.
INSTALLATION
7. Install coil bracket with coil to engine bracket using fasteners.
Index
90-823224--2 796
8. Connect high tension coil lead.
8. Manually close throttle to bring engine down to

idle state.
Spark Plug Replacement

SPARK PLUG WIRING AND BOOT
PRECAUTIONS
1. Twist boots one-half turn before removing.

2. When removing boot, DO NOT use pliers or
other sharp tools which might tear the boot.
72921
3. DO NOT force any object between the wire

and the boot or through the silicone jacket of
the wiring.
4. DO NOT pull on the wires to remove the boot.
Pull on the boot or use a tool designed for this
purpose.
a - Wire Harness Connection

b - High Tension Coil Lead Connection
9. Connect wire harness connectors.

IGNITION TIMING SET PROCEDURE
The engine must be at NORMAL OPERATING TEMPERATURE for this adjustment. Two items of test
equipment are required: an inductive pickup timing
light and either a Scan Tool, Diagnostic Code Tool, or
MerCruiser Special Timing Tool (91-805747A1).
1. Connect timing light to number 1 ignition wire.
2. Connect the appropriate tool (as listed above) to
the DLC connector of the wiring harness.
3. Manually adjust the engine throttle to 1800 RPM
+ 200.
5. Special care must be used when installing

spark plug boots to ensure that the metal terminal within the boot is fully seated on the
spark plug terminal and that the boot has not
moved on the wire. If boot-to-wire movement
has occurred, the boot will give a fast visual
impression of being seated. To make sure
that boots have been properly installed, push
sideways on them. If they have been correctly
installed, the boots will fit tightly with only a
slight looseness. If the terminal has not been
firmly seated on the spark plug, only the resistance of the rubber boot will be felt when
pushed sideways.
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect spark plug wires from spark plugs.
4. If Not Using MerCruiser Timing Tool: With engine running, set the scan tool or Diagnostic
Code Tool to service mode.
2. Remove spark plugs.
5. Shine the timing light at the timing mark indicator

located on the timing chain cover.
1. Clean spark plugs and spark plug wires with a dry

cloth.
NOTE: If adjustment is needed, loosen the distributor

hold-down bolt and rotate the distributor clockwise or
counterclockwise to adjust the timing. Then repeat
the timing light check until the specification (8 degrees BTDC) is met.
2. Check each spark plug for wear and gap width

per MerCruiser specifications. Replace any
which fail to meet the standards.
3. Check spark plug wires for damage to insulation,

boots and connectors. Replace if necessary.
6. Torque distributor hold-down bolt to 30 lb. ft. (40

Nm).
7. Set Scan Tool or Diagnostic Code Tool to normal
mode. If using the MerCruiser Special Timing
Tool, disconnect it from DLC connector.
Index
90-823224--2 796
INSTALLATION
1. Install spark plugs. Torque to 11 lb. ft. (15 Nm).
2. Connect spark plug wires to their respective
spark plug.
IMPORTANT: Wire routing must be kept intact
during service and followed exactly when wires
have been disconnected or when wire replacement is necessary. Failure to route wires properly
can lead to radio frequency interference, cross
firing of the plugs, and/or shorting of leads to
ground.
NOTE: When replacing spark plug wires, it is good

practice to replace one wire at a time to reduce the
risk of error.
1. Disconnect one spark plug wire at spark plug and
distributor.
2. Connect new spark plug wire at spark plug and
distributor.
3. Continue steps 1 and 2 until all spark wires have
been replaced.
8
1
7
6
4
F
R
O
N
T
3
2
1
Engine Rotation and Firing Order
Index
90-823224--2 796

AT A LATER DATE
Index
90-823224--2 796

AT A LATER DATE
Index
90-823224--2 796

AT A LATER DATE
Index
90-823224--2 796
COOLING SYSTEM
6
A
SEAWATER COOLED MODELS
Index
Table of Contents
Page
Tools/Lubricants/Sealants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-1
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-1
Cooling System Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-1
Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-1
Combination Seawater / Mechanical
Fuel Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-2
Seawater Pump With Cool Fuel System . . 6A-2
Seawater Inlet Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 6A-2
Transom Mounted or Thru-Hull Seawater
Pickups and Hose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-2
Seacock (Seawater Inlet Valve) . . . . . . . . . . 6A-3
Sea Strainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-3
Seawater Pickups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-3
Thru-Hull Mounted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-3
Transom Mounted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-4
Sea Strainer (Quicksilver) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-4
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-4
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-5
Seawater Pickup Pump Output Test . . . . . . . . 6A-6
Belt Driven Combination Seawater /
Fuel Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-7
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-7
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-8
Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-17
Seawater Pump Bearing Housing . . . . . . . . . 6A-25
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-25
Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-27
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-32
Water Circulating Pump Replacement . . . . . . 6A-33
Page
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-33
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-34
Drive Belt Tension Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-34
Belt Driven Combination Seawater /
Fuel Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-34
Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-35
Power Steering Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-35
Flushing Seawater Cooling System . . . . . . . . 6A-36
Belt Driven Seawater Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-36
Check/Clean Seawater Strainer . . . . . . . . 6A-37
Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-38
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-38
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-39
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-40
Draining Seawater Cooling System . . . . . . . . 6A-41
Draining Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-41
MCM (Stern Drive) Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-41
MIE (Inboard) Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-44
Auxiliary Hot Water Heater Installation . . . . . 6A-47
1997 Model MCM and MIE Engines . . . . . 6A-49
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-49
Water Flow Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-52
MCM7.4L / 454 Magnum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-52
7.4L/454 Magnum/7.4LX Multi-Port Injection/
454 Magnum Multi-Port Injection / 502
Magnum Multi-Port Injection Bravo and
Blackhawk Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-56
7.4LX Throttle Body Injection
Bravo Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-57
Index
6A-0 - SEAWATER COOLED SYSTEMS
90-823224--2 796
Fastener Location
Alternator Brace To
Alternator
Lb. In.
Lb. Ft.
192
Nm
28
Alternator Brace To
Block
Power Steering Pump

Brace To Block
Seawater Pump Brace
30
41
Seawater Pump
Bracket To Block
Seawater Pump Cover
Thermostat Cover
Thermostat Housing
Thru-Hull Pickup Nut
Alternator To Mounting
Bracket
Water Circulating
Pump
Seawater Pump
Clamping Screw On
Casting Bracket
Water Temperature
Sender
Petcocks
35
48
20
27
S
Securely
l
Pulleys
NOTE: Coat threads with Quicksilver Perfect Seal

before installing.
91-37241
92-823089-1
92-34227-1
92-825407A3
73971A2
Pulley Puller
(Kent Moore)
J-25034
Quicksilver High Performance Gear Lube
92-816026A
Quicksilver Liquid
Neoprene
92-27511-2
Quicksilver Special
Lubricant 101
92-13872A1
Loctite 514
92-75505-1
Silicone Sealant
Or Equivalent
Drain Plug (Note)

Hose Clamps
Part Number
Quicksilver 2-4-C
Marine Lubricant
With Teflon
Quicksilver Flushing
Attachment
Alternator Mounting
Bracket
Power Steering Pump

Bracket
Description
Obtain Locally
Shell Alvania No. 2

Grease
Kent-Moore Tools, Inc.
29784 Little Mack
Roseville, MI 48066
Phone: (313) 574-2332
Specifications
Cooling System Capacity
Engine
U.S. Qt. (L)
All
15 (14.1)
Thermostat
Engine
Specification
All Engines (Except

Stainless Steel
Thermostat Housing)
Stainless Steel
Thermostat Housing
143F (62C)
160F (71C)
Index
90-823324--2 796
SEAWATER COOLED SYSTEMS - 6A-1
Identification
Seawater Inlet
Recommendations
Combination Seawater / Mechanical

Fuel Pump
Water pickup must be large enough to permit sufficient water flow to engine seawater pickup pump for
adequate engine cooling [30 gal. per min. (114 L per
min.) minimum]. Pickup also must supply a positive
head while underway.
! CAUTION
c
d
70346
b
a
b
c
d
e
Transom Mounted or Thru-Hull

Seawater Pickups and Hose
Do not install water pickup directly in line with

propeller, as pickup may create turbulence and
allow air to flow into the propeller slipstream.
This will cause propeller ventilation and will adversely affect boat performance.
Water pickup should be located as close to seawater
pickup pump inlet as possible and in an area where
an uninterrupted, solid stream of water will flow past
when boat is underway. Connect water pickup to seawater pickup pump inlet with 1-1/4 in. (32 mm) I.D.
wire reinforced hose of adequate wall thickness to
prevent it from collapsing from pump suction. Be sure
to secure hose connections with hose clamps.
Fuel Pump
Seawater Pump
Vent Screw
Drain Screw, If Equipped
Inlet Hose
Seawater Pump With Cool Fuel

System
a
b
72352
a - Inlet Hose
b - Seawater Pump
Index
90-823224--2 796
Seacock (Seawater Inlet Valve)
Seawater Pickups
If a seacock is being used, it must be installed between water pickup and seawater pickup pump (or
sea strainer), to allow operator to shut off the seawater in case of a leak or when boat is not in use. This
will allow the operator to flush or drain the engine, or
clean the sea strainer while boat is in the water. Seacock used must have an internal cross-sectional
area equal to or greater than hose to prevent restricting water flow. Install seacock in an area where it will
be easily accessible and self-supporting to prevent
hose fatigue.
NOTICE
Refer to manufacturers instructions for information on removal and installation of
other than Quicksilver Seawater Pickups.
IMPORTANT: Seal the inside edges of any hole
made through the hull with a suitable sealant to
prevent water absorption and deterioration.
Thru-Hull Mounted
b
d
b
c
a
c
d
70355
72639
a - Seawater Pickup
b - Seawater Inlet Slots (Must Face Forward - Parallel With
Water Flow
c - Mounting Screw Holes (If Equipped)
d - Nut
Seacock (with Thru-Hull Pickup Shown)
1. Seal inside edges of 1-3/4 in. (44 mm) hole in hull

using a suitable sealer.
a - Hose Connector 1-1/4 In. (32 mm) I.D. To Seawater Pump

Inlet
b - Seacock 1-1/4 In. (32 mm) Brass Ball Or Gate Valve
c - Seawater Pickup
d - Direction Of Seawater Flow
2. Apply marine caulking (sealer) to mounting surface on seawater pickup where hull contact will
occur when installed.
Sea Strainer
If boat is equipped with a sea strainer, it must be of
sufficient size to ensure that an adequate supply of
water is maintained for engine cooling. Install
seawater strainer in an area where it will be easily
accessible for inspection and cleaning. Strainer
should be installed in water inlet hose after water inlet
valve to allow operator to shut off water when
cleaning strainer.
3. Ensure slots in seawater pickup are facing forward (toward bow of boat) and install seawater
pickup through hull. The slots must be parallel
with flow of water.
4. Fasten pickup with four appropriate mounting
screws (if so designed).
5. Apply marine caulking as needed inside boat.
Apply Loctite to threads of nut and install on pickup on inside of boat and torque nut to 35 lb. ft.
(42 Nm).
NOTE: If pickup being installed does not have

mounting screws on underside where mounted to
hull, be certain, after nut is torqued, that slots are still
facing forward.
Index
90-823324--2 796
NOTE: Some installations may have 7/32 in. (5.6

mm) holes drilled in transom using four 5/16 in. diameter stainless steel lag bolts in place of round head
screws. In any case, flat washers and O-rings are required as outlined.
Transom Mounted
a
c
d
e
f
i
J
72641
72640
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
Hose Nipple
Nut (4)
Gasket - Between Pickup and Transom
O-Ring (4)
Washer (4)
Screw (4)
Plastic Pug
Pickup
Screen
Screw (2)
Water Pickup Installed on Transom

a - Diagonal Mount - Leading Edge Of Pickup 1/8 In. (3.2 mm)
From Boat Bottom.
b - Vertical Mount - Corner Of Leading Edge Of Pickup 1/8 In.
3.2 mm) From Boat Bottom
5. Secure water pickup from inside with locknuts

and washers (unless using lag bolts).
1. Seal the inside edges of the 1-1/2 in. (38 mm)

hole hose nipple.
6. Tighten fasteners securely.
2. Be certain hose nipple and plastic plug are in

place and threads have been sealed with Loctite
Pipe Sealant with Teflon prior to tightening each
securely.
Sea Strainer (Quicksilver)
NOTE: Use a sharp knife or wood chisel to remove

excess plastic plug material so that plug is flush with
pickup casting.
3. Position one flat washer and one rubber O-ring
on each 5/16 in. x 4 in. (102 mm) long, round head
screw as shown. Coat each screw shaft with silicone sealant or equivalent.
4. Place new gasket on pickup housing and hold
pickup in place on transom. Install four round
head screws (with washers and O-rings in place)
into pickup mounting holes and through drilled
21/64 in. (8.4 mm) holes in transom.
NOTICE
Refer to manufacturers instructions for information on removal and installation of
other than Quicksilver Sea Strainer.
Removal
! CAUTION
If boat is in water while working on seawater
strainer, close seacock, if so equipped. If boat is
not equipped with a seacock, remove and plug
seawater inlet hose to prevent a siphoning action
that may occur, allowing seawater to flow from
the drain holes or removed hoses and enter boat.
IMPORTANT: Be certain engine is off and cooling
system is cold.
Index
90-823224--2 796
1. Follow a or b instructions:
Installation
a. Models Equipped with Seacock:

(1) Close seacock (seawater inlet valve).
(2) Disconnect seawater inlet hose from seawater strainer.
a
IMPORTANT: Mount seawater strainer in a vibration-free location. Never mount it on the engine
or transmission. Hoses must not be kinked or allowed to come in contact with hot or moving engine or transmission parts.
1. Mount seawater strainer.
Arrow indicates required water flow direction and
must point toward seawater pump.
Tighten mounting bolts securely.
b
72691

b - Seawater Strainer
b. Models without Seacock:

(1) Disconnect seawater inlet hose from seawater strainer inlet and plug seawater inlet hose.
a
c
c
72644
a
b
c
d
c d
a
70062
Seawater Inlet Hose

Seawater Strainer
Seawater Strainer Inlet
Plug
2. Remove outlet hose. Drain into a suitable container.
a - Seawater Strainer
b - Arrow
c - Mounting Bolt Hole Location (Bolts Not Shown)
2. Remove plug from seawater inlet hose (if

installed previously) and install hose on strainer.
Install seawater outlet hose. Use two hose
clamps on each hose connection. Tighten
clamps securely.
c
c
b
a
a
72645
b
72643

b - Seawater Outlet Hose
c - Double Hose Clamps

b - Seawater Strainer
3. Remove mounting bolts. Remove strainer.
Index
90-823324--2 796
3. Check drain plug and lens cover bolts. Tighten

securely. Do not over-tighten cover bolts or cover
may warp and leak water into boat.
Due to the manner in which this test is performed, it may not be possible to detect a
marginal condition or a high-speed water
pump output problem.
1. Remove water hose, which runs between pump

outlet and engine, and replace with another hose
of same diameter, but approximately 3 ft. (1 m)
longer. Hose should be wire reinforced or of adequate wall thickness to prevent it from kinking
when performing test. Clamp hose at pump outlet
only. Do not clamp hose at engine end.
72644
a - Drain Plug
b - Lens Cover Bolts (2, One Hidden In This View)
4. Open seacock, if equipped.

71170
Seawater Pickup Pump

Output Test
If an overheating problem exists, use this test to determine if a sufficient amount of water is being
supplied to cool engine.
b
b - Hose To Cooler
IMPORTANT: The following information should

be observed before proceeding with test:
BOAT MUST BE IN THE WATER FOR THIS

TEST. This test CANNOT BE performed with a
flush-test device and water hose.
The ability of this test to detect a problem is
greatly dependent upon the accuracy in
which it is performed. An error in setting the
engine RPM, timing the test or measuring the
water output will affect the overall accuracy
of the test and may produce misleading results. To help ensure accurate results, a shop
tachometer with an error of less than 5%
should be used. The boat tachometer definitely should not be used as its accuracy is
questionable. A stop watch should be used to
time the duration of the test to help ensure
that the accuracy is maintained within one
second. An 8 qt. (7.6 L) or larger capacity container should be used to measure water output.
b
a
72352

b - Hose To Cooler
2. Place an 8 qt. (7.6 L) or larger container near unclamped end of hose.
Index
90-823224--2 796
2. Disconnect water hoses from seawater pump.
! CAUTION
Do not run engine for more than 15 seconds with
hose disconnected, in next step, as internal damage to engine and exhaust system may result.
3. With assistance of another person, start engine

and adjust speed to exactly 1000 RPM while
holding unclamped end of hose on connection on
engine. Remove hose from connection on engine
and direct water flow into container for exactly 15
seconds. At the end of 15 seconds, direct the water flow overboard, return engine to idle and stop
engine. Reconnect hose to engine.
71170
4. Measure quantity of water discharged into container and compare with specifications given in
chart following.
5. Repeat test four times to check repeatability of
results.
b
b - Hose To Cooler
Belt Driven Pump Output For

a 15 Second Period
7.5 U.S. Qt. (7.1 L) Minimum
Belt Driven Combination

Seawater/Fuel Pump
Removal
1. Remove drive belt by loosening idler pulley.
72352

b - Hose To Cooler
c
71167
a - Idler Pulley
b - Adjusting Bolt
c - Locknut
Index
90-823324--2 796
Disassembly
! WARNING
Be careful when working on fuel system components. Gasoline is extremely flammable under
certain conditions. Be sure ignition key is OFF.
Do not smoke or allow spark or open flame in
area when working on fuel system components.
Wipe up any spilled fuel immediately.
NOTE: Later models may be equipped with a one

piece seawater pump body. Disassembly will be similar to two piece seawater pump body but reassembly
will differ in certain areas.
3. Disconnect fuel lines from fuel pump.
1. Remove idler pulley bracket from pump housing.
IDLER PULLEY ASSEMBLY
a
a
b
71102
71169
a - Fuel Lines
a - Bracket
b - Main Bracket Bolts (2)
4. Remove seawater/fuel pump assembly.
2. Remove retaining clip from adjusting bolt.
71103
71161
71102
71104
a - Idler Bracket Bolt

a - Retaining Clip
Index
90-823224--2 796
3. Loosen locknut while holding adjusting bolt.
SEAWATER PUMP DISASSEMBLY (TWO PIECE

BODY)
1. Loosen bolts that secure water pump to housing.
NOTE: One of these bolts is secured with a nut and

lockwasher.
b
71105
a - Locknut
b - Adjusting Bolt
4. Remove idler pulley, bushing and adjusting bolt.
a
71108
71106
71109
a - Bolts (5)
b - Nut and Lockwasher
b
a
71107
a - Bushing
b - Adjusting Bolt
Index
90-823324--2 796
2. Remove bracket from pump housing.
4. Remove gaskets and separator plate.
c
b
a
71113
71110
a - Bracket
3. Remove water pump end cover from housing.
71114
71112
a - End Cover
a - Gasket (With Large Opening)

b - Separator Plate
c - Gasket (With Two Opening)
Index
90-823224--2 796
5. Remove rubber plug from end of impeller.
7. Remove impeller from housing.
a
b
a
71117
71115
a - Rubber Plug
b - Impeller
6. Lift pump housing off of pump base.
a
71118
a - Impeller
8. Remove end plate and gasket from pump base.

71116
a
71119
a - End Plate
b - Gasket
Index
90-823324--2 796
SEAWATER PUMP DISASSEMBLY (ONE PIECE

BODY)
SEAWATER PUMP REASSEMBLY (ONE PIECE

BODY)
1. Remove the five screws from the seawater pump

body.
1. Lubricate seawater pump impeller with a water

and soap solution. Install impeller into housing by
rotating and pushing it into place. Push it down
until flush with housing.
71118
a
b
75277
a - Screws (5)
b - Seawater Pump Body
2. Remove seawater pump body and wear plate

from bearing housing.
71150
a - Impeller
2. Place wear plate over bearing housing shaft.

3. Place quad ring in groove in seawater pump
body.
c
b
a - Quad Ring
b - Seawater Pump
a
75275
a - Seawater Pump Body

b - Wear Plate
c - Bearing Housing
4. Align flats on impeller and bearing housing shaft,

slide seawater pump body on shaft.
3. Remove the impeller from seawater pump body.
Index
90-823224--2 796
NOTE: Reassembly for the combination mechanical

fuel pump requires the mounting bracket to be
installed while performing the following step.
5. Install two screws in seawater pump body holes
as shown. Use these two screws to align pump,
then install the remaining screws.
IMPORTANT: Drain screw is equipped with a

magnet to attract metallic particles from inside of
housing. A small amount will be present as a result of normal wear. Larger amounts of metallic
particles may indicate abnormal wear.
71121
a - Fill Screw
b - Drain Screw (Magnet)
2. Remove fuel pump from housing.

75277
a - Bolt Holes For Alignment
FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY

1. Remove fill and drain screws with sealing washers from pump housing and drain lubricant.
71122
a - Bolts and Lockwashers (2)
3. Remove fuel pump from housing and remove

gasket.
71120
a
a - Fill Screw
b - Drain Screw
71123
a - Gasket
Index
90-823324--2 796
4. Remove pulley using appropriate puller.
SEAWATER/FUEL PUMP HOUSING

1. Remove quad ring seal from water pump end of
housing.
a
b
71126
71128
71127
a - Puller
b - Pulley
71129
a - Quad Ring Seal
Index
90-823224--2 796
IMPORTANT: Oil seal on pulley end of housing

will be damaged during removal. Do not attempt
to reuse seal.
3. Remove the snap ring that secures the shaft and

bearing assembly.
2. Remove oil seal by prying out with a screwdriver.

Be careful not to damage bore.
a
71132
71130
71131
71133
a - Snap Ring
a - Oil Seal
Index
90-823324--2 796
4. Lift shaft and bearing assembly from housing.
6. Slide washer and slip ring off of shaft.
71141
a - Washer
b - Slip Ring
IMPORTANT: Oil and water seals on water pump

end of housing will be damaged during removal.
Do not attempt to reuse these seals.
71134
a - Shaft and Bearing Assembly
7. Remove outer (water) seal and inner (oil) seal by

prying out or by tapping out using a suitable mandrel. Be careful not to damage bore.
5. Remove bearings from shaft using a universal

puller plate.
a
b
71139
b
71142
a - Inner Oil Seal

b - Outer Water Seal
a - Washer
b - Bearings
Index
90-823224--2 796

! CAUTION
Always wear safety glasses when using compressed air.
1. Clean metal parts in solvent and blow dry with
compressed air.
IMPORTANT: Do not spin bearings at high speed
when drying with compressed air, as bearings
may be scored.
Reassembly
SEAWATER/FUEL PUMP HOUSING
IMPORTANT: Seals in water pump end of housing
must be facing in the proper direction. The lip on
inner (oil) seal must be facing inward toward oil
pump. The lip on outer (water) seal must be facing outward toward the water pump.
2. After cleaning, apply a coat of light engine oil to

shaft and bearings to prevent rust.
3. Clean all gasket material and sealer from sealing
surfaces.
4. Inspect bearing housing. Examine surfaces

(where bearings contact housing) for evidence of
bearing outer races turning in housing.
5. Inspect seals in bearing housing.

6. Inspect pump shaft bearings.
7. Inspect pump shaft for grooves in surface where
seals contact shaft. Inspect keyway in shaft.
Also, inspect surface, where bearings contact
shaft, for evidence of inner races turning on shaft.
8. Inspect impeller drive key.
9. Inspect pump body.
10. Inspect inner and outer wear plate.
71143
a - Inner Oil Seal - Lip Inward Toward Oil Pump

b - Outer Water Seal - Lip Outward Toward Water Pump
1. Apply a light coat of Loctite 514 to O.D. of seal

and install inner (oil) seal using a suitable mandrel. Seal is properly positioned when edge of
seal is even with edge of bore.
71144
a - Inner Oil Seal
Index
90-823324--2 796
b. Place slip ring and washer over shaft from

water pump impeller end.

and install outer (water) seal using a suitable
mandrel. Seal is properly positioned when edge
of seal is flush with face of housing. Do not install
seal deeper. Fill cavity between the two seals with
Quicksilver Special Lubricant 101.
a
71141
b
d
71145
c
71140
a - Outer Water Seal

b - Face Of Housing
3. Reassemble shaft and bearing assembly as follows:

a. Lubricate all shaft components and bearings
with Quicksilver High Performance Gear
Lube.
a
b
c
d
Slip Ring
Washer
Bearings
Water Pump Impeller End
c. Press bearings onto shaft until seated.
71139
a - Bearings
Index
90-823224--2 796
4. Lower shaft and bearing assembly onto housing.

Use care when guiding shaft through oil and water seals to avoid turning over seal lips. To avoid
this, rotate shaft as it is lowered through seals.
5. Push shaft and bearing assembly down until

seated. Shaft is properly seated when the snap
ring groove is visible above the outer bearing.
6. Install snap ring to secure shaft and bearing assembly.
71146
71133
71147
a - Shaft and Bearing Assembly

b - Rotate When Moving Through Seals
71132
a - Snap Ring
Index
90-823324--2 796

and install oil seal on pulley end of housing using
a suitable mandrel. Seal lip should be facing inward toward snap ring. Lubricate lip of seal with
Quicksilver Special Lubricant 101. Seal is properly positioned when it bottoms.
8. Install quad ring seal on water pump end of

housing.
71129
71148
a
71128
71130
a - Quad Ring Seal
a - OIl Seal - Lip Toward Snap Ring
Index
90-823224--2 796
FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY

IMPORTANT: Pulley must be pressed on exactly
as described in the following step to avoid rapid
belt wear.
2. Apply a light coat of Quicksilver Perfect Seal to

fuel pump gasket. Position gasket on fuel pump.
1. Carefully press pulley onto shaft. Pulley is properly positioned when end of shaft is located 1/2 in.
(13 mm) from front edge of pulley.
71124
71127
a - Gasket
3. Turn on pulley to bring the low spot of fuel pump

cam toward fuel pump lever.
a
a
71123
71149
a - Pulley 1/2 In. (13 mm) Measurement
a - Fuel Pump Cam
Index
90-823324--2 796
4. Install fuel pump on housing. Secure with

bolts and lockwashers. Torque to 25-28 lb. ft.
(34-38 Nm).
6. Fill fuel pump housing with Quicksilver High Performance Gear Lube. Gear lube level should
come up to bottom edge of top hole. Install fill
screw with sealing washer and tighten securely
[approximately 18 lb. in. (2 Nm)].
71120
71122
a - Fill Screw
5. Install drain screw (with magnet) and sealing

washer. Tighten securely [approximately 18 lb.
in. (2 Nm)].
71121
a - Drain Screw (With Magnet)
Index
90-823224--2 796
SEAWATER PUMP ASSEMBLY (ONE PIECE

BODY)
1. Lubricate seawater pump impeller with a water
and soap solution. Install impeller into housing by
rotating and pushing it into place. Push it down
until flush with housing.
2. Install bolts with flat washers through water pump

end cover. Position gaskets and wear plate as
shown.
a
71151
a
b
c
d
71118
End Cover
Gasket With Two Openings
Wear Plate
Gasket With Large Opening
3. Place rubber plug in end of impeller that will be

facing end cover.
71152
71150
a - Rubber Plug
a - Impeller
Index
90-823324--2 796
a. Slide water pump housing over bolts and

join to end cover.
(2) Rotate shaft so that flat spot on shaft will

be in the approximate position to line up
with flat spot inside impeller.
71155
a - Flat Spot On Shaft
b
71153
a - End Cover
b - Water Pump Housing
(3) While holding wear plate and gasket up

against housing, carefully lower water
pump assembly down onto shaft. Rotate
assembly from side to side to align shaft
and impeller.
(1) Place gasket and wear plate over bolts

and slide up against housing.
b
71154
71156
a - Gasket (With Large Opening)

b - Wear Plate
Index
90-823224--2 796
2. Press hub off shaft with Universal Puller Plate

and an arbor press.
Seawater Pump Bearing

Housing
Disassembly
1. Remove gasket, inner wear plate and quad ring
seal. Discard gasket and quad ring seal.
72648
a - Universal Puller Plate (91-37241)
a
72655
3. Puncture front oil seal with a tool and pry from

bearing housing.
72656
72649
a - Quad Ring Seal
Index
90-823324--2 796
4. Remove snap ring from bearing housing bore

and press shaft and bearings out pulley end of
housing. Bearings have a slip fit in housing; do
not use excessive force.
5. If bearings require replacement, remove bearings from shaft with Universal Puller Plate and an
arbor press. Bearings must be replaced, if removed.
72657
72659
6. If rear seals require replacement, press seals

from bearing housing with an appropriate tool.
72658
a - Snap Ring
Index
90-823224--2 796
Reassembly
1. Clean metal parts in solvent and blow dry with

compressed air.
1. Apply a thin coat of Quicksilver Loctite Type 8831

to outside diameter of two new bearing housing
rear seals; then install seals in housing with seal
lips facing impeller end. (Press first seal in until it
bottoms out and second seal in until flush with
housing.)
IMPORTANT: Do not spin bearings at high speed

when drying with compressed air, as bearings
may be scored.
2. After cleaning, apply a coat of light engine oil to
shaft and bearings to prevent rust.
3. Clean all gasket material and sealer from sealing

surfaces.
4. Inspect bearing housing. Examine surfaces

(where bearings contact housing) for evidence of
bearing outer races turning in housing.
5. Inspect seals in bearing housing.
6. Inspect pump shaft bearings.
7. Inspect pump shaft for grooves in surface where
seals contact shaft. Also inspect surface where
bearings contact shaft for evidence of inner races
turning on shaft.
8. Inspect pump body.
72660
9. Inspect inner and outer wear plate.

10. Inspect pump impeller for wear on sides and tips
of blades. Also inspect blades for cracks in area
where blades flex. Replace impeller if blades
have taken a set (remain in curved position).
11. Inspect pump pulley.
12. Check drive belt for excessive wear.
a - Outer (Water) Seal

b - Face of Housing
IMPORTANT: It is recommended that Shell Alvania No. 2 Grease be used when packing seal and
bearings in the following steps. If Shell Alvania
No. 2 Grease is not available, it is permissible to
use Quicksilver 2-4-C With Teflon. However,
Quicksilver 2-4-C Marine Lubricant With Teflon is
not recommended for applications where continuous high speed heavy-duty operation will be encountered.
Index
90-823324--2 796
2. Pack cavity between seals with Shell Alvania No.

2 Grease or substitute.
3. Using an arbor press and suitable tool, press ball
bearings onto shaft until they seat. Press on inner
race of bearing only.
4. Pack bearings and cavity between bearings with

Shell Alvania No. 2 Grease or substitute. Slide
bearings and shaft into bearing housing bore and
install snap ring.
a
72661
72663
a - Shaft With Bearings

a - Bearings
72658
a - Snap Ring
Index
90-823224--2 796
5. Apply a thin coat of Quicksilver Loctite 8831 to

outside diameter of new bearing housing front oil
seal and press seal into housing (with seal lip facing inward) until it bottoms out.
IMPORTANT: Pulley hub must be pressed onto

shaft to exact dimension on pumps with stamped
steel mounting bracket as this establishes proper drive belt alignment.
7. Clamp bearing housing in a soft jaw vise with
flange end up.
8. Coat quad ring seal with Quicksilver 2-4-C Marine Lubricant With Teflon and install into groove
in housing.
72662
a - Front Oil Seal
IMPORTANT: Be sure to support impeller end of

pump shaft when installing pulley hub in next
step to prevent placing a load on bearings.
a
72656
6. Apply Quicksilver Special Lubricant 101 to pump

shaft. Using an arbor press and appropriate tool,
press pulley hub onto pump shaft to dimension
shown.
a
a
72655
72664
a - Quad Ring Seal
a - .260 Inch (6.6 mm)
Index
90-823324--2 796
9. Place the wear plate over the bearing housing.
PUMP BRACKET ATTACHMENT

1. Position main bracket as shown and install. Secure the water pump assembly to the bracket with
four of the five bolts.
72660
a - Bearing Housing
b - Wear Plate
71111
71110
a - Bracket
Index
90-823224--2 796
2. Secure the fifth bolt with a nut and lockwasher.
IDLER PULLEY ASSEMBLY

1. Install idler pulley adjusting bolt and bushing.
b
71109
a - Nut and Lockwasher
3. Torque all of these fasteners to 10-15 lb. ft.

(14-20 Nm).
71106
a - Adjusting Bolt
b - Bushing
2. Install idler pulley and secure with locknut. Tighten locknut while holding adjusting bolt. Do not
tighten completely at this time as adjustment will
be necessary when installing belt.
a
71108
a - Bolts
71105
Index
90-823324--2 796
3. Install retaining clip on adjusting bolt.
4. Install idler assembly bracket on pump housing.

Secure with bolts and lockwashers. Torque to
30-35 lb. ft. (41-47 Nm).
71104
71102
Installation
a
1. Install seawater/fuel pump assembly. Secure

with bolts and lockwashers as shown. Torque to
30 lb. ft. (41 Nm).
b
71103
a - Retaining Clip
71161
71102
a - Idler Bracket Bolt

Index
90-823224--2 796
! WARNING
Be careful when working on fuel system components. Gasoline is extremely flammable under
certain conditions. Be sure ignition key is OFF.
Do not smoke or allow spark or open flame in
area when working on fuel system components.
Wipe up any spilled fuel immediately.
b
a
2. Connect fuel lines to fuel pump and tighten securely.
72352

b - Hose To Cooler
4. Install drive belt. Adjust belt tension using the adjusting bolt and locknut. When adjustment is correct, torque locknut to 30 lb. ft. (41 Nm). Tension
is checked by pushing on belt in area opposite the
idler pulley. Belt should depress approximately
1/4 in. (6 mm).
71169
a - Fuel Lines
3. Connect water hoses to seawater pump.
a
b
c
71167
a
b
c
d
Idler Pulley
Adjusting Bolt
Locknut
Belt Deflection Measurement
71170

b - Hose To Cooler
Water Circulating Pump

Replacement
Removal
1. Drain water from cylinder block.
2. Break loose circulating pump pulley attaching
bolts. Do not remove bolts at this time.
Index
90-823324--2 796
3. Power Steering Models: Loosen power steering pump brace and pump mounting bolts, then
pivot pump inward and remove drive belts (some
models).
Drive Belt Tension

Adjustment
4. Loosen alternator brace attaching bolts and alternator mounting bolt, then pivot alternator inward
and remove drive belt.
Belt Driven Combination Seawater/

Fuel Pump
5. Remove pump pulley attaching bolts, lockwashers, clamping ring (if so equipped) and pulley.
IDLER PULLEY
6. Disconnect hose(s) from pump.
1. Belt should depress 1/4 in. (6 mm) at location

shown.
7. Remove bolts, which secure pump to cylinder

block, and remove pump and old gaskets (discard gaskets).

1. Clean gasket surfaces on water pump and cylinder block.
2. To adjust belt tension, adjust idler pulley.
! CAUTION
DO NOT over-adjust idler pulley. Too much tension on belt will cause bearings in seawater
pump to fail.
2. Inspect water pump for blockage, cracks, sand

holes, corrosion or other damage. Inspect pump
impeller for cracks and erosion. Replace complete pump if any damage exists.
3. Check impeller shaft and bearings for excessive
side play. If play can be felt, replace complete
pump.
4. Inspect pump pulley for bends, cracks, corrosion

or other physical damage. Inspect pulley for rotational trueness. Replace pulley if damaged or untrue.
Installation
1. Coat both sides of new circulating pump gasket
with Quicksilver Perfect Seal, then position gaskets and circulating pump on cylinder block. Coat
threads of circulating pump attaching bolts with
Quicksilver Perfect Seal and install bolts and alternator brace (if applicable). Torque bolts to
specifications.
72851
a - Power Steering Belt

b - Idler Pulley

2. Reconnect hoses to pump.

3. Install pump pulley and clamping ring (if used) on
pump hub and secure with bolts and lockwashers. Tighten bolts securely.
4. Install drive belts and adjust tension as outlined
in Drive Belt Tension Adjustment.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Alternator
Power Steering Pump

follows:
IMPORTANT: Do not pry on pump with pry bar or

screwdriver.

shown.
a. Pivot pump away from engine, as required,

until correct tension is obtained.
b. After obtaining correct tension, securely retighten pump brace and pump mounting
bolts.
tension after running for five minutes. Belt should
depress 1/4 in. (6 mm).
72669
a - Depress Here
alternator mounting bolt.
72851
a - Depress Here
Index
90-823324--2 796
Flushing Seawater Cooling

System
If engine is operated in salty, polluted or mineral-laden waters, seawater cooling system should be
flushed periodically (preferably after each use) with
fresh water to reduce corrosion and prevent the accumulation of deposits in the system. Seawater cooling system also should be thoroughly flushed prior to
storage.
Belt Driven Seawater Pump

1. Close seacock (if so equipped) or remove and
plug seawater inlet hose.
2. Loosen hose clamp and remove seawater inlet
hose at location shown. Connect tap water hose
to inlet fitting.
! WARNING
! CAUTION
overheat.
IMPORTANT: If cooling system is to be flushed
with boat in the water, seacock (if so equipped)
must be closed, or water inlet hose must be disconnected and plugged to prevent water from
flowing into boat.
b
a
70346
With Combination Seawater / Mechanical Fuel

Pump
a - Hose To Cooler
b - Seawater Inlet Hose
! CAUTION
Watch temperature gauge at dash to ensure the
b
a
72352
Without Mechanical Fuel Pump

b - Hose To Cooler
Index
90-823224--2 796
3. Partially open water tap (approx. 1/2 maximum

capacity) and allow cooling system to fill completely. Cooling system is full when water is discharged through the exhaust. Do not use full tap
water pressure.
4. Place the remote control lever in NEUTRAL position and start the engine. Operate engine at idle
speed in NEUTRAL gear for 10 minutes or until
discharge water is clear, then stop engine.
! CAUTION
If boat is in the water, seacock (if so equipped)
must be left closed until engine is to be restarted,
to prevent water from flowing back into cooling
system. If boat is not fitted with a seacock, water
inlet hose must be left disconnected and
plugged, to prevent water from flowing into cooling system and/or boat. As a precautionary measure, attach a tag to the ignition switch or steering wheel with the warning that the seacock must
be opened or the water inlet hose reconnected
prior to starting the engine.
! CAUTION
Do not over-tighten cover screws or cover will
warp and leak.
2. With engine off, close seacock, if so equipped, or
remove and plug seawater inlet hose, if no seacock exists. Remove two screws and washers,
and cover. Remove strainer, and drain plug and
washer. Clean any debris from strainer housing;
flush both strainer and housing with clean water.
Check gasket; replace when necessary (if it
leaks). Reinstall strainer, drain plug and washer.
Reattach cover with screws and washers. Open
seacock, or unplug and reconnect seawater inlet
hose. Tighten hose clamps securely. After starting engine, check for leaks and/or air in system,
which would indicate an external leak.
b
c
d
5. Shut off tap water. Remove flushing connector

from pump inlet. Refer to preceding precautionary statement and then follow instructions a or
b.
e
h
a. If equipped with seacock: Reconnect water

inlet hose and tighten hose clamp securely.
Open seacock accordingly.
f
g
b. If NOT equipped with seacock: Unplug and

reconnect seawater inlet hose accordingly.
Tighten hose clamp securely.
Check/Clean Seawater Strainer

NOTICE
Refer to manufacturers instructions for
information on checking and cleaning of
other than Quicksilver Seawater Strainer.
1. Visually inspect seawater strainer through glass
top.
72673
Quicksilver Seawater Strainer Shown

a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
Screws and Washers

Cover
Glass
O-Ring
Strainer
Housing
Drain Plug and Sealing Washer
Gasket
! WARNING
When cleaning seawater strainer, close seacock,
if so equipped. If boat is not equipped with a seacock, remove and plug seawater inlet hose to
prevent a siphoning action that may occur, allowing seawater to flow from the drain holes or removed hoses.
Index
90-823324--2 796
Thermostat
a
Removal
1. Drain water from cylinder block and exhaust
manifolds.
b
2. On all models except stainless steel thermostat

housing, remove thermostat cover attaching
bolts and lockwashers, then remove cover and
gasket. On stainless steel thermostat housing,
remove thermostat housing.
c
d
3. Remove thermostat from thermostat housing or

cover.
71758
b
Stainless Steel Thermostat Housing
a
b
c
d
e
d
e
f
Housing
O-Ring
Thermostat (Stainless Steel)
Spacer
Gasket
72589
All Engines Except Stainless Steel Thermostat

Housings.
a
b
c
d
e
f
Cover
Gasket
Spacer
Thermostat (Typical)
O-Ring
Housing
Index
90-823224--2 796
Testing
1. Clean thermostat in soap and water to remove
any deposits or debris.
2. Inspect thermostat for corrosion or other visible
damage.
b
b. Open thermostat valve and insert nylon

string. Position thermostat on string so that it
will be just below water level when suspended, then allow valve to close. Suspend
thermostat in water.
c. Place thermometer in container and position
so that bottom of thermometer is even with
bottom of thermostat. Do not allow thermometer to touch container.
a
72674
71801
a - Brass Thermostat
b - Stainless Steel Thermostat
3. If thermostat is suspected of producing insufficient engine temperature, check thermostat for

leakage by holding it up to a lighted background.
Light leakage around the thermostat valve indicates that thermostat is not closing completely
and should be replaced. (A small amount of leakage at one or two points around the valve perimeter is acceptable.)
72675
a - Thermometer
b - Nylon String
c - Thermostat
IMPORTANT: When performing procedures

d-f, water must be agitated thoroughly to obtain accurate results.
d. Plug in tester and observe temperature at
which thermostat opens (thermostat drops off
thread). Thermostat must open at specified
temperature stamped on thermostat.
a
72717
Brass Thermostat Shown (Stainless Similar)

a - Check For Light Leakage Around Perimeter Of Valve
4. Check opening and closing temperature of thermostat (using a tester similar to the one shown)
as follows:
a. Fill tester to within 1 in. (25mm) of top with tap
water. Do not use distilled water.
e. Continue to heat water until a temperature

25F (14C) above temperature specified on
thermostat is obtained. Thermostat valve
must be completely open at this temperature.
f.
Unplug tester and allow water to cool to a

temperature 10F (5C) below specified temperature on thermostat. Thermostat must be
completely closed at this temperature.
g. Replace a thermostat that fails to meet all of

the preceding tests.
Index
90-823324--2 796
Installation
9. Start engine and inspect for leaks.

a
ALL MODELS EXCEPT STAINLESS STEEL

THERMOSTAT HOUSING
1. Clean gasket surfaces on thermostat cover and

thermostat housing.
2. If thermostat housing was disturbed during removal of thermostat, remove thermostat housing. Clean gasket surfaces on thermostat housing and intake manifold and replace thermostat
housing-to-intake manifold gasket.
d
e
f
IMPORTANT: Gasket has continuity rivets. Do not

coat with Quicksilver Perfect Seal, or audio warning temperature switch may not work properly.
3. Place O-ring in the thermostat housing. Be certain it is positioned properly on mounting flange
in housing.
4. Place thermostat in thermostat housing with thermostatic element end toward housing bottom, as
shown.
5. Align tang on sleeve with groove in thermostat
housing bore and install sleeve into housing.
6. Coat both sides of new thermostat cover-to-thermostat housing gasket with Quicksilver Perfect
Seal and position on housing.
7. Reinstall thermostat cover (with engine lifting
eye, if so equipped) and torque screws with lockwashers to 30 lb. ft. (41 Nm).
8. Reconnect hose(s) to thermostat housing. Tighten hose clamps securely.
72589
a
b
c
d
e
f
Cover
Gasket
Spacer
O-Ring
Housing
MODELS WITH STAINLESS STEEL

THERMOSTAT HOUSING
1. Clean gasket surfaces on thermostat housing
and intake manifold.
IMPORTANT: Gasket has continuity rivets. Do not
coat with Quicksilver Perfect Seal, or audio warning temperature switch may not work properly.
2. Place O-ring in the thermostat housing. Be certain it is positioned properly in housing.
3. Place thermostat in thermostat housing with thermostatic element end toward housing bottom, as
shown.
4. Align tang on sleeve with groove in thermostat
housing bore and install sleeve into housing.
5. Coat both sides of new thermostat housing gasket with Quicksilver Perfect Seal and position on
intake manifold.
6. Reinstall thermostat housing and torque screws
with lockwashers to 30 lb. ft. (41 Nm).
7. Reconnect hose(s) to thermostat housing. Tighten hose clamps securely.
Index
90-823224--2 796
8. Start engine and inspect for leaks.
IMPORTANT: Observe the following information

Engine must be as level as possible.
A wire should be repeatedly inserted into all

drain holes to ensure there are no obstructions in passages.
IMPORTANT: To prevent threads in manifolds, elbows and cylinder blocks from rusting out during storage, reinstall plugs using Quicksilver
Perfect Seal on threads. Never leave drain plugs
out during storage.
c
d
NOTE: If possible, place a container under drains

and hoses to prevent water from draining into boat.
e
71758
MCM (Stern Drive) Models

a
b
c
d
e
Housing
O-Ring
Thermostat (Stainless Steel)
Spacer
Gasket
NOTICE
Refer to Draining Precautions, in this section,
BEFORE proceeding.
1. Ensure engine is as level as possible to ensure

Draining Seawater Cooling

System

cylinder block.
Draining Precautions
! CAUTION
If boat is in the water, seacock, if so equipped,
must remain closed until engine is to be restarted
to prevent water from flowing back into cooling
system and/or boat. If boat is not fitted with a
seacock, water inlet hose must be disconnected
and plugged to prevent water from flowing back
into cooling system and/or boat. As a
precautionary measure, attach a tag to the
ignition switch or steering wheel of the boat with
the warning that the seacock must be opened or
the water inlet hose reconnected prior to starting
the engine.
NOTICE
For cold weather or extended storage information and procedures, refer to SECTION 1B.
72609

a - Drain Plug

drained.

or drain plugs are disconnected.
Index
90-823324--2 796
4. Remove hose or drain plug from bottom of port

and starboard manifolds.

as shown.
72587
72609
6. On 7.4L and 454 Magnum Engines: Remove

the oil/power steering fluid cooler seawater hose
or drain plug, as shown.
74130

b - Drain Plug In Elbow (Later Models)
72925
74152

b - Drain Plug In Elbow (Later Models)
Index
90-823224--2 796
7. 502 Magnum Engines: Remove the oil/power

steering fluid cooler seawater hoses, as shown.
8. Engines with Cool Fuel System: Remove drain

plug from aft end of fuel cooler.
75081
72926

a - Drain Plug
9. Insert a small wire (repeatedly) to make sure that

speedometer pitot tube, trim tab cavity vent hole,
and trim tab cavity drain passage are unobstructed and open.
c
70585
a - Hose, Oil / Power Steering Cooler To Heat Exchanger

71217

Index
90-823324--2 796

NOTICE
Refer to Draining Precautions, in this
section, BEFORE proceeding.
1. Engine must be level or front of engine slightly

higher to properly drain cooling system.
cylinder block.
71170
b
With Combination Seawater / Mechanical Fuel
Pump
b - Hose To Cooler
b
a
72609
a
72352

b - Hose To Cooler
11. Crank engine over SLIGHTLY with starter motor

12. After cooling system has been drained completely, install and tighten securely all petcocks or
drain plugs. Reconnect all hoses and tighten all
hose clamps securely.

a - Drain Plug

drained.

are disconnected.
4. Remove hose or drain cock from bottom of port
and starboard manifolds.
Index
90-823224--2 796

manifolds will occur when exhaust manifold-to-thermostat housing hoses are removed.

as shown.
72609
72587
6. Remove seawater inlet hose from seawater

pump as shown.
b
71170

a - Drain Plug
With Mechanical Fuel Pump

b - Hose To Cooler
b
a
72352

b - Hose To Cooler
Index
90-823324--2 796
7. Remove the transmission fluid cooler hose as

shown.
a
72721
71782
Typical Transmission Fluid Cooler Locations

a - Hose
8. Crank engine over SLIGHTLY, with starter motor,

9. After cooling system has been drained completely, install and tighten securely all petcocks and
drain plugs. Reconnect all hoses and tighten all
hose clamps securely.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Auxiliary Hot Water Heater

Installation
IMPORTANT: When connecting a cabin heater or
hot water heater, certain requirements must be
met:
Supply hose (from engine to heater) and

return hose (from heater to engine) MUST
NOT EXCEED 5/8 in. (15.8 mm) I.D. (inside
diameter).
Make heater connections ONLY at locations

described in the following instructions.
Check complete system for leaks after heater

is connected into cooling system.
Check for overheating condition (of engine)

after heater is connected.
1. Hot water heater supply hose can be connected

at several different locations. On some models,
there may be other accessories and options that
are using these hot water supply locations. One
of the following should be available for use when
installing a hot water heater system.
a. Port side of thermostat housing.
NOTE: On some models it may be necessary to remove the audio warning heat switch from port side of
thermostat housing and reposition to water circulating pump opening as outlined following.
b. Starboard side of thermostat housing, unless
being used for engine temperature switch
a. On Models with Pipe Plug in Thermostat

Housing (Port or Starboard):
(1) Remove pipe plug.
(2) Coat threads of fitting(s) (obtained locally) with Quicksilver Perfect Seal and install fitting(s) in threaded hole from which
pipe plug was removed.
(3) Connect hot water heat supply hose to fitting and secure with a hose clamp (not
provided).
b. On Models with Audio Warning Heat
Switch in Thermostat Housing (Port
Side):
(1) Disconnect tan/blue wire from audio
warning switch.
(2) Remove audio warning switch from thermostat housing.
(3) Coat threads of fitting(s) (obtained locally) with Quicksilver Perfect Seal and install fitting(s) in threaded hole from which
pipe plug was removed.
(4) Connect hot water heater supply hose to
fitting and secure with a hose clamp (not
provided).
(5) Remove pipe plug from starboard side of
engine water circulating pump.
a
IMPORTANT: Do not reposition engine temperature switch, it must remain where installed by factory.
b
72702
72613
Thermostat Housing - Port Side Shown

(Starboard Similar)
2. Connect hot water heater SUPPLY hose to desired location following instructions a or b:
a - Engine Water Circulating Pump

b - Pipe Plug
(6) Apply Loctite Pipe Sealant with Teflon to

threads of reducer bushing (obtain locally) and audio warning heat switch.
(7) Install reducer bushing in circulating
pump and tighten securely.
Index
90-823324--2 796
(8) Install audio warning switch in reducer

bushing and tighten securely.
(9) Connect tan/blue wire to switch and secure with nut and lockwasher. Coat terminal with Quicksilver Liquid Neoprene.
b. Secure T-fitting in hose with hose clamps

(provided in kit) and tighten securely.
72705
72703
a - T- Fitting
c. Connect hot water heater return hose to T-fitting and secure with hose clamp (provided).
b - Reducer Bushing (Hidden In This View)

c - Audio Warning Heat Switch
d - TAN / BLUE Wire
4. Secure hoses, as required, to ensure they do not

rub or chafe against engine components.
3. Connect hot water heater return hose into system

as follows (refer to figures):
5. With boat in water, start engine and check for

leaks and overheating.
a. Cut approximately 3/4 in. (19 mm) out of hose

to maintain proper hose configuration.
72704
a - Cut Here
Index
90-823224--2 796
1997 Model MCM and MIE Engines
3. The heater supply hose can then be connected

to the fitting at the aft side of the intake manifold.
Installation
Refer to the illustrations on the following pages for

specific supply and return hose connection points.
MCM 7.4LX EFI, AND MIE 7.4L EFI ENGINES

hot water heater on these engines, the following
additional requirements must be met:
DO NOT install any valves, or similar devices,
which could restrict or stop the flow of supply
and return coolant from a cabin heater and/or
hot water heater.
DO NOT install T-fittings, or similar devices, in
the existing intake manifold-to-engine water
circulating pump hose. This hose must be removed and discarded.
! CAUTION
Avoid a performance loss and/or possible engine
damage. Engine coolant must flow continuously
from the engine intake manifold to the engine water circulating pump. NEVER close-off or block
the coolant flow to or from a heater.
All heater installations must be plumbed in series with the supply and return connections.
75045
a - Hose Connector
b - Connect Supply Hose Here
4. If engine is equipped with a fitting at the circulating pump that is smaller than 5/8 in. (16
mm) I.D., remove the fitting and apply Quicksilver Perfect Seal to threads and install return hose
connector from kit, as follows:
a. Remove the plug from circulating pump.
b. Install reducer bushing into circulating pump.
c. Install 90 degree fitting into reducer bushing.
d. Install hose connector into 90 degree fitting.
1. Remove and discard the existing hose that is

connected from the fitting at the aft side of the intake manifold to the water circulating pump.
2. If engine is equipped with a fitting that is
smaller than 5/8 in. (16 mm) I.D., remove the fitting and apply Quicksilver Perfect Seal to threads
and install fitting from kit.
Index
90-823324--2 796
e. Connect heater return hose to connector and

tighten securely.
b
MCM 454 AND 502 MAGNUM MPI ENGINES

1. Remove the plug from the starboard side of thermostat housing.
2. Apply Quicksilver Perfect Seal to threads and
install the supply hose connector into thermostat
housing. Tighten securely.
a
c
71758
b - Hose Connector
72702
3. Apply Quicksilver Perfect Seal to threads and

install return hose connector as follows:
a. Remove the plug from circulating pump.
b. Install reducer bushing into circulating pump.
c. Install 90 degree fitting into reducer bushing.
d. Install hose connector into 90 degree fitting.
c
75075
a
b
c
d
e
Plug
Reducer Bushing
90 Degree Fitting
Hose Connector
Connect Return Hose from Heater Here
72702
a
b
c
d
Plug
Reducer Bushing
90 Degree Fitting
Hose Connector
4. Connect hoses to supply and return fittings in

accordance
with
heater
manufacturers
instructions.
Index
90-823224--2 796
a. On 454 CID V8 Models - Install return hose

fittings as follows:
(1) Install reducer bushing into circulating
pump.
(2) Install 90 degree fitting into reducer bushing.
(3) Install hose connector into 90 degree fitting.
b
72702
a
b
c
d
Plug
Reducer Bushing
90 Degree Fitting
Hose Connector
5. Connect hoses to supply and return fittings in

accordance
with
heater
manufacturers
instructions.
6. Connect hot water heater return hose to T-fitting
and secure with hose clamps (provided).
7. Secure hoses, as required, to ensure they do not
rub or chafe against engine components.
8. With boat in water, start engine and check for
leaks and overheating.
Index
90-823324--2 796
Water Flow Diagrams

MCM7.4L / 454 Magnum
4
3
6
7
1
5
8
2
10
11
9
13
72972
12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213-
Thermostat Housing
Engine Circulating Pump
Seawater Inlet
Engine Oil and Power Steering Fluid Cooler
Exhaust Elbow
Restrictor
Exhaust Manifold
To Exhaust Manifolds
To Exhaust Elbows
Form Water Inlet (Via Fluid Cooler)
To Engine Circulating Pump
From Engine
Index
90-823224--2 796
MCM 502 Magnum

4
3
6
7
1
8
2
10
72973
11
9
13
12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213-
Thermostat Housing
Seawater Inlet
Engine Oil and Power Steering Fluid Cooler
Exhaust Elbow
Restrictor
Exhaust Manifold
To Exhaust Elbows
From Engine
Index
90-823324--2 796
MCM / MIE Models With Stainless Steel Thermostat Housing

4
3
6
1
7
71694
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Thermostat Housing
Seawater Inlet
Engine Oil Cooler
Exhaust Elbow
Restrictor
Exhaust Manifold
Index
90-823224--2 796
MIE 7.4L/8.2L Inboard
7
1
8
72974
10
11
9
13
12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213-
Thermostat Housing
Seawater Inlet
Engine Oil Cooler
Exhaust Elbow
Restrictor
Exhaust Manifold
To Exhaust Elbows
From Engine
Index
90-823324--2 796
7.4L/454 Magnum/7.4LX Multi-Port Injection /454 Magnum Multi-Port Injection /

502 Magnum Multi-Port Injection Bravo and Blackhawk Engines
1
3
11
2
10
5
9
7
4
6
75150
NOTE: Certain components in the following diagram may look different than on your particular power package,
but the water flow paths remain similar on all engines.
1 - Seawater Intake (From Stern Drive)
2 - Seawater Pump
3 - Power Steering Cooler, If Equipped
4 - Engine Oil Cooler
5 - Thermostat Housing and Cover Assembly
6 - Engine Water Circulating Pump
7 - Engine Block and Cylinder Head Assembly
8 - Exhaust Manifold, Typical
9 - Restrictor Gasket
10- Exhaust Elbow Assembly, Typical
11- Water Flow Overboard
Index
90-823224--2 796
7.4LX Throttle Body Injection Bravo Engines

1
3
12
2
11
6
10
8
5
7
4
75151
NOTE: Certain components in the following diagram may look different than on your particular power package,
but the water flow paths remain similar on all engines.
1 - Seawater Intake (From Stern Drive)
2 - Seawater Pump
3 - Power Steering Cooler, If Equipped
4 - Fuel Cooler
5 - Engine Oil Cooler
6 - Thermostat Housing and Cover Assembly
7 - Engine Water Circulating Pump
8 - Engine Block and Cylinder Head Assembly
9 - Exhaust Manifold, Typical
10- Restrictor Gasket
11- Exhaust Elbow Assembly, Typical
12- Water Flow Overboard
Index
90-823324--2 796

AT A LATER DATE
Index
90-823224--2 796

AT A LATER DATE
Index
90-823324--2 796
COOLING SYSTEM
6
B
71726
CLOSED COOLED MODELS
Index
Table of Contents
Page
Lubricants/Sealants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-1
Closed Cooling System Capacity . . . . . . . . 6B-1
Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-1
Pressure Cap Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-1
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-2
Maintaining Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-2
Pressure Cap Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-3
Seawater Pickup Pump Maintenance . . . . . . . 6B-3
Heat Exchanger Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-3
Testing Closed Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-4
Testing Coolant for Alkalinity . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-4
Pressure Testing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-4
Testing for Cylinder Head Gasket Leak . . . 6B-5
Testing Heat Exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-5
Testing Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-5
Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-7
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-7
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-8
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-9
Changing Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-10
Closed Cooling Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-10
Coolant Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-10
Change Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-10
Draining Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-10
Draining Diagrams - Coolant Side . . . . . . . 6B-11
Cleaning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-14
Closed Cooling Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-14
Seawater Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-14
Filling Closed Cooling Section . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-15
Fresh Water Flow Thru Exhaust Manifold 6B-15
Seawater Flow Thru Exhaust Manifolds . . 6B-16
Auxiliary Hot Water Heater Installation . . . . . 6B-17
Recommended Supply Locations . . . . . . . 6B-17
Recommended Return Locations . . . . . . . 6B-18
Closed Cooling System Flow Diagrams . . . . 6B-19
MCM Bravo Models - 7.4L/454 Magnum . 6B-19
MCM Model - 502 Magnum . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-20
MIE Models - 7.4L / 8.2L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-21
MIE 454 CID / 7.4L 502 CID / 8.2L with
Vertical Mounted Oil Cooler / Port Side
Mounted Transmission Cooler / Optional
Fuel Cooler And MCM 454 CID / 7.4L
Without Coolant Flow Through Exhaust
Manifolds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-22
Index
6B-0 - CLOSED COOLING SYSTEMS
90-823224--2 796
Thermostat
Fastener Location
Heat Exchanger End
Cap
Thermostat Cover
Lb. In. Lb. Ft.
Nm
36-72
4-8
30
41
Heat Exchanger
Mounting Brackets
Hose Clamps
Securely
Drain Plugs
Engine
Specification
Engines With
143F (62C)
Engines With Thunderbolt V Or Fuel Injection
160F (71C)
Pressure Cap Rating

Engine
All Engines
Specifications
16 PSI (110 kPa)_
Lubricants/Sealants
Description
Quicksilver 2-4-C
Marine Lubricant
With Teflon
Quicksilver Liquid
Neoprene
Loctite Pipe Sealant
With Teflon
Part Number
92-825407A3
92-34227-1
92-25711-2
Obtain Locally
Specifications
Closed Cooling System Capacity
MODEL
Seawater
Cooling
System2
Closed
Cooling
System
MCM AND
MIE
454 CID /
7.4L
MCM AND
MIE
7.4L MPI
MCM AND
MIE
502 CID /
8.2L
20 (19)
28 (26.5) 1
18 (17) 2
18 (17) 2
28 (26.5) 2
1 Closed cooling system with manifolds included in

coolant side of system.
2 Closed cooling system without manifolds included
in coolant side of system.
Index
90-823324--2 796
CLOSED COOLING SYSTEMS - 6B-1
Before starting engine each day, check to ensure that

coolant is visible in coolant recovery bottle.
Description
There are several configurations of this cooling system, but the operation is essentially identical. Basically, the system is composed of two separate subsystems: the seawater system and the closed
cooling system. The seawater system is similar in
function to the fan used in an automobile because it
absorbs heat (from the closed cooling system) as it
passes through the heat exchanger. The closed cooling system is similar in function to the rest of the cooling system in an automobile.
The coolant recovery system keeps the reservoir full.
Normal coolant overflow into recovery bottle is approximately 1/2 pint (230 mL) during warm-up. The
coolant recovery system draws coolant back into the
reservoir from the recovery bottle as the engine
cools. As long as there is coolant in the recovery
bottle, the reservoir should remain completely full. If
not, theres a vacuum leak, usually at the hose leaving the reservoir, or the gasket under the recovery filler cap. The gasket seals against the outer rim of the
filler neck.
IMPORTANT: The coolant (antifreeze) flows
around the outside of the cooling tubes while
seawater flows through the inside of the cooling
tubes in the heat exchanger.
Maintaining Coolant Level

a
If coolant is not visible, check fresh water section of

cooling system (including coolant recovery system)
for leaks and repair, as necessary. Refill fresh water
section with recommended coolant solution, as outlined under Changing Coolant, following.
If coolant is visible, start engine and run until it reaches normal operating temperature, then recheck coolant level in coolant recovery bottle. Coolant level
MUST BE between the ADD and FULL marks (on
front of bottle).
! WARNING
Allow engine to cool before removing pressure
cap, as sudden loss of pressure could cause hot
coolant to boil and discharge violently. After engine has cooled, turn cap 1/4 turn to allow any
If level is low, remove fill cap from coolant recovery
bottle and add required amount of coolant solution.
Use a 50/50 mixture of ethylene glycol antifreeze and
pure, soft water for coolant additions. If frequent additions of coolant are required, check fresh water section for leaks.
IMPORTANT: ALCOHOL OR METHANOL BASE
ANTIFREEZE OR PLAIN WATER ARE NOT RECOMMENDED FOR USE IN COOLING SYSTEM AT
ANY TIME. In areas where ethylene glycol is not
available, and the possibility of freezing does not
exist, it is permissible to use a solution of rust inhibitor and pure, soft water (mixed to manufacturers recommendations).
Occasionally, check to ensure that coolant recovery
system is functioning properly by removing pressure
cap from heat exchanger and checking level. Coolant
level should be up to bottom of heat exchanger filler
neck. If low, examine entire fresh water section (especially coolant recovery system) for leaks and repair, if necessary.
72520
Coolant Recovery Bottle

a - Fill Cap
IMPORTANT: When reinstalling pressure cap, be

sure to tighten it until it contacts stops on filler
neck.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Pressure Cap Maintenance

Pressure cap is designed to maintain pressure in
fresh water section of closed cooling system once the
engine has attained normal operating temperature.
This raises the boiling point of the coolant, thereby increasing the efficiency of the cooling system. To help
ensure proper operation, cap should be cleaned, inspected and pressure tested periodically as follows:
7. Clean sealing surfaces on heat exchanger filler

neck with a cloth. Inspect surfaces for any damage or deposits that may prevent cap from sealing properly.
8. Clean coolant recovery passage in heat exchanger filler neck with a wire and blow out with
compressed air.
! WARNING

cap (in next step), as sudden loss of pressure
could cause hot coolant to boil and discharge violently. After engine has cooled, turn cap 1/4 turn
to allow any pressure to escape slowly, then
push down and turn cap all the way off.
1. Remove pressure cap from heat exchanger.

2. Wash cap with clean water to remove any deposits or debris from sealing surfaces.
3. Inspect rubber seal on cap for cuts, cracks or other signs of deterioration. If seal is damaged, cap
MUST BE replaced.
4. Inspect coolant recovery gasket for deterioration
and replace if bad.
5. Check condition of locking tabs on cap. Replace
cap if tabs are bent or cracked.
72715
a - Inspect for Damage

b - Clean Coolant Recovery Passages
9. Reinstall pressure cap, being sure to tighten until

it contacts stops on filler neck.

Maintenance
Whenever insufficient water flow is suspected, seawater pickup pump should be disassembled and inspected (by an authorized MerCruiser Dealer).
Heat Exchanger Repair

IMPORTANT: Braze with BCUP 2 rod or silver solder. Care must be taken not to melt other joints
during repair.
72714
a - Rubber Seal (cap MUST BE Replaced If Damaged)

b - Gasket (Look For Cracks Under Gasket)
c - Locking Tabs (1 Hidden)
6. Refer to Testing Pressure Cap and test pressure cap as outlined.
1. Internal leaks can be repaired by brazing shut the

ends of the leaking tube. This is only a temporary
fix because usually another tube will start leaking
after a short period of time and this also causes
a reduction in cooling capacity. Do not close more
than three tubes.
2. Nipples and drains that have been broken off the
heat exchanger can be reattached by brazing.
Index
90-823324--2 796
Testing Closed Cooling

System
Testing Coolant for Alkalinity
! WARNING
cap as sudden loss of pressure could cause hot
Coolant in fresh water section should be changed every two years and should be checked for alkalinity at
least once between change intervals. To check coolant for alkalinity, proceed as follows:
1. Obtain pink litmus paper from a local supplier
(drug store, pet shop, etc.).
2. Remove pressure cap from heat exchanger and
insert one end of litmus paper into coolant.
3. If pink litmus paper turns blue, coolant is alkaline and need not be replaced.
4. If pink litmus paper remains pink, coolant is
not alkaline and MUST BE REPLACED, as explained under Changing Coolant.
Pressure Testing System

! WARNING
cap. Sudden loss of pressure could cause hot
If coolant section of closed cooling system is suspected of leaking or not holding sufficient pressure,
and no visible signs of leakage can be found, perform
the following test:
1. Remove pressure cap from heat exchanger or
reservoir.
2. Clean, inspect and pressure test pressure cap,
as outlined under Testing Pressure Cap, to
eliminate the possibility that cap is not maintaining proper pressure in system and is causing
coolant to boil over.
Index
3. Clean inside of filler neck to remove any deposits

or debris. Examine lower inside sealing surface
for nicks or other damage. Surface must be perfectly smooth to achieve a good seal between it
and rubber seal on cap. Also check locking cams
on sides of filler neck to be sure that they are not
bent or damaged. If locking cams are bent or
damaged, pressure cap will not hold the proper
pressure.
4. Adjust coolant level in fresh water section to 1 in.
(25 mm) below filler neck.
5. Attach an automotive-type cooling system
pressure tester to filler neck and pressurize
closed cooling section to amount specified in
following chart, based on pressure cap rating for
your engine.
Pressure Cap Rating
16 PSI (110 kPa)
Amount of Pressure
Applied to Closed
Cooling System
20 PSI (138 kPa)
6. Observe gauge reading for approximately two

minutes; pressure should not drop during this
time. If pressure drops, proceed with the following steps until leakage is found.
7. While maintaining specified pressure on closed
cooling section, visually inspect external portion
of cooling system (hoses, gaskets, drain plugs,
petcocks, core plugs, circulating pump seal, etc.)
for leakage. Also listen closely for bubbling or
hissing, as they usually are a sure indication of a
leak.
8. Refer to Testing Heat Exchanger in this section
and test as outlined.
9. If no leakage could be found in above steps, engine is leaking internally, and it probably is due to
one or more of the following: (1) loose cylinder
head bolts or damaged gasket, (2) loose intake
manifold bolts or damaged gasket, (3) loose exhaust elbow or distribution block retaining nuts or
damaged gasket, (4) cracked or porous cylinder
head or block, or (5) cracked or porous exhaust
manifold. Proceed as follows until location of internal leak is found.
a. Start engine. Re-pressurize system to previously specified amount and observe pressure gauge on tester. If needle in gauge vibrates, compression or combustion is leaking
into closed cooling section from a leak in the
combustion chamber. Exact cylinders, where
leakage is taking place, sometimes can be
found by removing spark plug wires (one at a
time) while observing pressure gauge. Vibra90-823224--2 796
tion will decrease or stop when plug wire is removed from leaking cylinder. Stop engine.
b. Remove spark plugs (one at a time) from cylinders and examine for presence of coolant.
A spark plug that is perfectly clean or milky
appearing is a sure indication of a leak.
c. Drain oil from engine and examine for presence of coolant. Oil usually will be milky if
coolant is present. If coolant is present, remove engine from boat and drop the oil pan.
With engine in the upright position, re-pressurize closed cooling section to previously
specified amount and examine internal surfaces of engine to locate leak.
d. If no leakage can be found in above steps, entire engine must be disassembled and inspected for leakage.
Testing for Cylinder Head Gasket

Leak
A leaking head gasket will cause combustion gas to
be forced into the cooling system. The mixture of
coolant and tiny air bubbles is a poor heat conductor
and will overheat an engine quickly. Compression
tests or cooling system pressure check normally will
not detect the leak because the test pressure is far
below the combustion pressures which cause the
leak. An effective test is as follows:
IMPORTANT: Run boat in lake for this test. It is
best to run the engine at or above cruising speed
during this test. Usually a failed head gasket will
not cause the engine to overheat below cruising
speed.
c. At Higher Speeds (4000+ RPM): Normal operation is the same as described in b above.
A failed head gasket will cause the bubbles to
come faster and may be accompanied by violent, intermittent bursts of coolant.
It is important not to confuse normal warm-up expansion with a failed head gasket. Normal warm-up produces an intermittent flow of coolant which will stop
within approximately five minutes at a given RPM. A
head gasket leak will not stop because the one thing
that marks a failed head gasket is the continued passage of air. This may be accompanied by violent, intermittent bursts of coolant leaving the reservoir. If
coolant continues to flow (not in violent, intermittent
bursts) from the reservoir at cruising speed, something else besides the head gasket is causing the engine to overheat.
Testing Heat Exchanger

FOR INTERNAL LEAK: An internal leak will cause
coolant to go into the seawater circuit when pressure
is put on the closed cooling circuit.
1. Remove a seawater hose from the exchanger.
Do not drain the exchanger.
2. Pressurize the closed cooling circuit to 16-20 PSI
(110-138 kPa) with a radiator tester.
3. If seawater begins to flow from the nipple there is
a leak.
FOR BLOCKAGE:
IMPORTANT: Seawater flows THROUGH the
tubes in the exchanger. Closed cooling coolant
flows AROUND the tubes.
1. Install a clear plastic hose between the reservoir

and coolant recovery bottle. Use a 2-3 ft.
(610-910 mm) long hose for this test.
1. Remove end caps and inspect for any blockage

in the seawater circuit (broken impeller blades,
weeds, etc.).
2. Route this hose so a U is formed.
2. Remove closed cooling circuit hoses and inspect

the tubes just inside the nipples. Because the
complete exchanger cannot be inspected, the
heat exchanger should be replaced if blockage is
suspected.
3. Put enough coolant into hose to fill the center 4

or 5 inches (100-130 mm) of the U.
4. Observe the U while the engine is running.
a. During Idle and Warm-Up: Some coolant
and/or air will leave the reservoir.
b. During Cruising Speed (2500-3500 RPM):
Coolant and/or air leaving the reservoir
should stop after approximately five minutes
running at a given RPM. A leaking head gasket will produce air bubbling through the U,
going to the coolant recovery bottle. The frequency and size of the bubbles will depend
on the size of the leak.
Testing Pressure Cap

Pressure cap is designed to maintain a pressure of
approximately its rated capacity (refer to Specifications) in closed cooling section once engine has attained operating temperature. Cap should be
cleaned, inspected and pressure-tested at regular
tune-up intervals or whenever cap is suspected of
maintaining improper pressure as follows:
Index
90-823324--2 796
! WARNING
IMPORTANT: Before reinstalling cap in next step,

examine lower inside sealing surface in filler
neck to ensure that it is perfectly smooth and free
of debris. Also, inspect cam lock flanges on sides
of filler neck to be sure that they are not
bent.
1. Carefully remove pressure cap from reservoir or

heat exchanger.
2. Wash cap with clean water to remove any deposits or debris from sealing surfaces.
3. Inspect gasket (if used) and rubber seal on cap
for tears, cuts, cracks or other signs of deterioration. Replace gasket, if damaged, or entire cap if
rubber seal is damaged.
a
b
72715
a - Inspect For Damage

b - Cam Lock Flange
6. Reinstall cap on reservoir or heat exchanger.

72714
a - Rubber Seal (cap MUST BE Replaced If Damaged)

b - Gasket (Look For Cracks Under Gasket)
c - Locking Tabs (1 Hidden)
4. Check that locking tabs on cap are not bent or

damaged.
5. Using a cooling system pressure tester (similar to
one shown), test cap to be sure that it releases at
proper pressure and does not leak. (Refer to instructions which accompany tester for correct
test procedure.) Cap must relieve pressure at 16
PSI (110 kPa), and must hold rated pressure for
30 seconds without going below 11 PSI. Replace
cap if it fails to fall within these limits.
72716
Index
90-823224--2 796
2. Disconnect hoses from thermostat cover.
Thermostat
3. Remove thermostat cover attaching bolts and

lockwashers, then remove cover and gasket.
Removal
4. Remove thermostat from thermostat housing.
1. Follow instructions a and b:
a. Drain coolant from exhaust manifolds by removing lower hose or plug from each manifold. Be sure to drain both port and starboard
sides.
b
NOTE: If coolant flow is restricted or fails to occur, a

wire should be repeatedly inserted into all drain holes
to insure there are no obstructions in passages. Remove petcock, if necessary, to insert wire completely
into drain hole.
c
d
e
b. Drain engine block by removing drain plug.

Be sure to drain both port and starboard
sides.
f
g
h
i
72719
MCM Model Shown - MIE Models Not Equipped

with Lifting Eye
72609
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
Bolts
Lockwashers
Lifting Eye (MCM Models Only)
Hex Head Bleeder
Cover
Gasket
Housing
Gasket With Continuity Rivets
74130
Starboard Side Shown (Port Side Similar)

a - Hose
b - Drain Plug In Exhaust Manifold Elbow
Index
90-823324--2 796
3. If thermostat is suspected of producing insufficient engine temperature, check thermostat for

leakage by holding it up to lighted background.
Light leakage around the thermostat valve indicates that thermostat is not closing completely
and should be replaced. (A small amount of leakage at one or two points around the valve perimeter is acceptable.)
a
b
c
75083
d
MCM / MIE Models With Seawater Flow Through
Exhaust Manifolds
a
b
c
d
Thermostat Housing
Thermostat
Gasket
Thermostat Housing Cover
72717
Brass Thermostat Shown (Stainless Similar)

a - Check For Light Leakage Around Perimeter Of Valve
Testing
1. Clean thermostat in soap and water to remove
any deposits or debris.
2. Inspect thermostat for corrosion or other visible
damage.
b
4. Check opening and closing temperature of thermostat (using a tester similar to the one shown),
as follows:
a. Fill tester to within 1 in. (25 mm) of top with tap
water. Do not use distilled water.
b. Open thermostat valve and insert thread. Position thermostat on nylon string so that it will
be just below water level when suspended,
then allow valve to close. Suspend thermostat in water.
b
72674
71801
c
72675
75083
a - Brass Thermostat
b - Stainless Steel Thermostat
c - Stainless Steel Thermostat With Disc
a - Thermometer
b - Nylon String
c - Thermostat (Typical)
Index
90-823224--2 796
c. Place thermometer in container and position

so that bottom of thermometer is even with
bottom of thermostat. Do not allow thermometer to touch container.
IMPORTANT: When performing instructions d
and e, water must be agitated thoroughly to obtain accurate results.
warning temperature switch may not work properly.

4. Install thermostat, as previously shown, into thermostat housing.
5. Position gasket on thermostat housing and reinstall thermostat cover. Torque bolts to 30 lb. ft.
(41 Nm).
d. Plug in tester and observe temperature at

which thermostat opens (thermostat drops off
thread).
e. Unplug tester and allow water to cool to a

temperature 10F (5C) below specified temperature on thermostat. Thermostat must be
completely closed at this temperature.
f.
Replace a thermostat that fails to meet all of

the preceding tests.
c
d
e
Installation
f
g
h
72674
71801
a
a
1 - Brass Thermostat
2 - Stainless Steel Thermostat
a - Install Thermostat with This End Toward Thermostat Housing
! CAUTION
Do not operate engine without cooling water being supplied to the seawater pickup pump, or
pump impeller will be damaged.
1. Remove thermostat housing and gaskets. Discard gaskets.
2. Clean gasket surfaces on thermostat cover, thermostat housing and intake manifold.
3. Position lower gasket (with continuity rivets) on
intake manifold. Place thermostat housing on
gasket.
IMPORTANT: If gasket has continuity rivets, do
not coat with Quicksilver Perfect Seal, or audio
72719
MCM Model Shown - MIE Models Not Equipped

with Lifting Eye
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
Bolts
Lockwashers
Lifting Eye (MCM Models Only)
Hex Head Bleeder
Cover
Gasket
Housing
Gasket With Continuity Rivets
6. Connect hoses to thermostat cover. Tighten hose

clamps securely.
! CAUTION
Avoid seawater pickup pump impeller damage.
being supplied to seawater pickup pump.
7. With boat in the water and/or cooling water properly supplied to seawater pickup pump, start engine and inspect for leaks.
Index
90-823324--2 796
Changing Coolant
NOTICE
For information and procedures on draining
the seawater cooling system of Seawater
Cooled (Raw-water) Cooled Models, refer to
SECTION 6A. For information and procedures
on draining the Seawater Section of Closed
Cooling (Coolant) Models refer to SECTION
1B. For cold weather or extended storage, refer to SECTION 1B.
Closed Cooling Section

Closed cooling section of closed cooling system
should be kept filled year-round with recommended
coolant solution. Do not drain closed cooling section
for storage, as this will promote rusting of internal surfaces. If engine will be exposed to freezing temperatures, make sure that closed cooling section is filled
with an ethylene glycol antifreeze and water solution,
mixed to manufacturers recommended proportions,
to protect engine to lowest temperature to which it will
be exposed. If necessary, change coolant.
Coolant Recommendations
! CAUTION
Alcohol or Methanol base antifreeze or plain water are not recommended for use in fresh water
section of cooling system at any time.
It is recommended that the coolant section of closed
cooling system be filled with 50/50 mixture of ethylene glycol antifreeze and water. In areas where the
possibility of freezing DOES NOT exist, it is permissible to use solution of rust inhibitor and water (mixed
to manufacturers recommendations).
Draining Instructions
! WARNING
IMPORTANT: A wire should be inserted into drain
holes to ensure that foreign material is not obstructing the drain holes. On some models with
two piece petcock, removal of petcock may be required so that wire can be inserted completely
into drain hole.
IMPORTANT: Engine must be as level as possible
IMPORTANT: Closed cooling section must be
kept filled year round with recommended coolant. If engine will be exposed to freezing temperatures, make sure closed cooling section is filled
with an ethylene glycol antifreeze and water solution properly mixed to protect engine to lowest
temperature to which it will be exposed.
IMPORTANT: Do not use Propylene Glycol Antifreeze in the closed cooling section of the
engine.
The following draining instructions apply to all engines equipped with closed cooling. The location of
petcocks that require opening and hoses that require
removal are represented on the following pages for
the individual engines.
IMPORTANT: Observe precautions previously
outlined before proceeding.
1. Remove pressure cap from coolant tank.
2. Drain coolant from locations as shown for your
model and engine. (Refer to the appropriate diagram on the following Draining Diagrams
pages.)
Change Intervals
3. After coolant has drained completely, reinstall

petcocks and hoses. Tighten clamps and petcocks securely.
Drain and flush coolant from the closed cooling system at least every two years or whenever exhaust
gases have entered the system.
4. Remove coolant recovery bottle from mounting

bracket and pour out coolant.
5. Clean system as outlined in Cleaning System.
6. Fill system as outlined in Filling Closed Cooling
Section.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Draining Diagrams - Coolant Side

FRONT MOUNTED CLOSED COOLING WITH COOLANT FLOW THROUGH EXHAUST MANIFOLDS
10
9
8
12
13
b
6
14
7
b
5
4
15
3
a
11
a
a
2
1
ENGINE BLOCK
LEGEND
FRESHWATER
SEAWATER
71726
a - Remove Hoses (Lift, Lower or Bend To Completely Drain).

b - Remove Block Plugs (Repeatedly Clean Out Holes Using A Stiff Wire Until Entire System Is Drained).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112131415-

Heat Exchanger
Thermostat Housing
Thermostat
Bleeder Valve
Transmission Cooler
Seawater Inlet
Overboard
Circulating Pump
Oil Cooler
Exhaust Elbow
Separator Gasket
Exhaust Manifold
Index
90-823324--2 796
REAR MOUNTED CLOSED COOLING WITH COOLANT FLOW THRU EXHAUST MANIFOLDS
10
2
1
a
a
12
6
5
13
14
9
a
11
72985

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314-

Heat Exchanger
Thermostat Housing
Thermostat
Transmission Cooler
Seawater Inlet
Oil Cooler
Overboard
Circulating Pump
Exhaust Elbow
Separator Gasket
Exhaust Manifold
Index
90-823224--2 796
MIE 454 CID / 7.4L 502 CID / 8.2L WITH VERTICAL MOUNTED OIL COOLER / PORT SIDE MOUNTED
TRANSMISSION COOLER / OPTIONAL FUEL COOLER AND MCM 454 CID / 7.4L WITHOUT COOLANT
FLOW THROUGH EXHAUST MANIFOLDS
10
9
6
b
12
5
13
b
14
11
4
7
74745

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314-

Heat Exchanger
Thermostat Housing
Thermostat
Fuel Cooler
Transmission Cooler
Vertical Mounted OIl Cooler
Seawater Inlet
Overboard
Circulating Pump
Exhaust Elbow
Separator Gasket
Exhaust Manifold
Index
90-823324--2 796
Cleaning System
Closed Cooling Section
1. Remove seawater drain plug from bottom of heat

exchanger and allow water to drain. After water
has drained completely, coat threads of drain
plug with Quicksilver Perfect Seal and reinstall.
Closed cooling section of closed cooling system

should be cleaned at least once every two years or
whenever decreased cooling efficiency is experienced.
A good grade automotive cooling system cleaning
solution may be used to remove rust, scale or other
foreign material. Always follow manufacturers instructions for the cleaner.
If closed cooling section is extremely dirty, a pressure

flushing device may be used to flush out remaining
deposits. Flushing should be done in direction opposite normal coolant flow to allow water to get behind
deposits and force them out. Refer to instructions
which accompany flushing device for proper hookup
and flushing procedure.
NOTICE
For information and procedures for draining
and flushing Seawater Section of Closed
Cooling (Coolant) Models, refer to SECTION
1B. For cold weather or extended storage, refer to SECTION 1B.
Seawater Section
Cooling efficiency of an engine with closed cooling is
greatly dependent upon heat transfer through the
tubes within the heat exchanger. During engine operation, contaminants within the seawater (such as
salt, silt, lime, etc.) collect on the inside of the tubes,
thus reducing heat transfer and greatly decreasing
heat exchanger efficiency. It is, therefore, recommended that the seawater section of the heat exchanger be cleaned at least once every two years or
whenever decreased cooling efficiency is suspected,
as follows:
IMPORTANT: It may be necessary to remove heat
exchanger on some models. If heat exchanger is
removed, be sure to refill closed cooling section
with coolant.
d
b
72718
Typical V-8 Engine

a
b
c
d
e
Bolt
End Cap
Sealing Washer
Gasket
Drain Plug
2. Remove bolts which secure end plates to each

end of heat exchanger, then remove end plates,
seal washers and gaskets. Discard seal washers
and gaskets. Clean gasket material from end
plates and heat exchanger.
3. Clean water passages in heat exchanger by inserting a suitable size wire brush into each passage. Use compressed air to blow loose particles
out of water passages.
4. Apply Quicksilver Perfect Seal to both sides of
new end plate gaskets, then reinstall end plates,
using new gaskets and seal washers. (Be sure to
install seal washers between end plates and gaskets.) Torque end plate bolts to specifications.
! CAUTION
Avoid seawater pickup pump impeller damage.
supplied to seawater pickup pump.
5. With boat in the water and/or cooling water properly supplied to seawater pickup pump, start engine and inspect for leaks.
Index
90-823224--2 796
5. Continue filling closed cooling section until coolant level is 1 in. (25 mm) below filler neck.
Filling Closed Cooling

Section
! CAUTION
Avoid seawater pickup pump impeller damage
and subsequent overheating damage to stern
drive unit. DO NOT operate engine without water
being supplied to seawater pickup pump.
Fresh Water Flow Thru Exhaust

Manifold
NOTICE
! CAUTION
See Specifications for approximate

closed cooling system capacity and coolant recommendation.
! WARNING
Do not remove coolant cap when engine is hot.
Coolant may discharge violently.
! CAUTION
Alcohol or Methanol based antifreeze or plain
water are not recommended for use in fresh water section of cooling system at any time.
! CAUTION
Front of engine should be higher than rear to
purge trapped air out of the system during initial
filling. This will minimize the possibility of air being trapped in the closed cooling section which
can cause engine to overheat.
1. Remove coolant cap on heat exchanger.
Models with belt drive seawater pickup pump

must be in the water when running engine because garden hose will not supply enough water
to system at higher RPM.
6. With pressure cap off, start engine and run at fast
idle (1500-1800 RPM). Add coolant solution to
heat exchanger, as required, to maintain coolant
level 1 in. (25 mm) below filler neck.
7. After engine has reached normal operating temperature (thermostat is fully open), and coolant
level remains constant, fill heat exchanger to bottom of filler neck.
8. Observe engine temperature gauge to make
sure that engine operating temperature is normal. If gauge indicates excessive temperature,
stop engine immediately and examine for cause.
9. Install pressure cap on heat exchanger.
10. Remove cap from coolant recovery reservoir and
fill to FULL mark with coolant solution. Reinstall
cap.
11. With engine still running, check hose connection,
fittings and gaskets for leaks. Repeat Step 4.
IMPORTANT: Engine overheating is often due to
air being trapped in closed cooling section.
Purge air by running engine at 2000 RPM for 10
minutes.
! WARNING
a - Hex Head Bleeder

2. Open hex bleeder on thermostat.
12. Recheck coolant level after first open-throttle

boat test and add coolant, if necessary.
3. Fill closed cooling system with coolant mixture

through heat exchanger fill neck until coolant appears at bleeder valve.
13. Maintain coolant level in coolant recovery reservoir between ADD and FULL marks with engine
at normal operating temperature.
71518
4. Close bleeder securely.
Index
90-823324--2 796
Seawater Flow Thru Exhaust

Manifolds
! CAUTION
Alcohol or Methanol base antifreeze or plain water, are not recommended for use in coolant section of Closed Cooling System at any time.
It is recommended that coolant section of Closed
Cooling System be filled with a 50/50 mixture of ethylene glycol antifreeze and pure, soft water. Antifreeze
MUST BE used regardless of whether freezing temperatures are or are not expected to provide adequate corrosion protection. In areas where ethylene
glycol antifreeze is not available and the possibility of
freezing DOES NOT exist, it is permissible to use a
solution of rust inhibitor and pure, soft water (mixed
to manufacturers recommendations).
NOTE: Coolant section capacity is approximately 4

U.S. Gallons (15 L).
1. Fill coolant section of Closed Cooling System
with coolant mixture as follows:
a. Open bleeder valve on thermostat housing.
b. Fill with coolant mixture through heat exchanger fill neck until coolant appears at
bleeder valve opening.
c. Close bleeder valve securely.
d. Continue filling until coolant level is into filler
neck and begins to flow into coolant recovery
bottle plastic tubing.
! CAUTION
DO NOT operate engine without water flowing
thru seawater pickup pump, as pump impeller
may be damaged and subsequent overheating
damage to engine or stern drive unit may result.
Front of engine should be higher than rear to
purge trapped air out of the system during initial
filling. This will minimize the possibility of air being trapped in the closed cooling section which
can cause engine to overheat.
IMPORTANT: This closed cooling system flows
coolant at a high rate. Higher idle speeds increase dispersion of trapped air into system
making it more difficult to purge trapped air. Operate at idle during filling and air purging when
specified.
2. Start engine and run AT IDLE. Add coolant

solution to heat exchanger, as required, to
maintain coolant level at filler neck. After engine
has reached normal operating temperature (thermostat is fully open), and coolant level remains
constant, fill heat exchanger until coolant level is
into filler neck and begins to flow into coolant
recovery bottle plastic tubing.
3. Remove cap from coolant recovery reservoir and
fill to Full mark with coolant solution. Reinstall
cap.
4. Lift recovery bottle and plastic tubing above heat
exchanger filler neck. Allow coolant to flow down
through tubing to purge air through filler neck
fitting.
5. Install pressure cap on heat exchanger.
6. With engine still running, check hose connections, fittings and gaskets for leaks. Also observe
engine temperature gauge to make sure that
engine operating temperature is normal. If gauge
indicates excessive temperature, stop engine
immediately and examine for cause.
! WARNING
Allow engine to cool down before removing pressure cap. Sudden loss of pressure could cause
hot coolant to boil and discharge violently. After
engine has cooled down, turn cap 1/4-turn to allow any pressure to escape slowly, then, push
down and turn cap all-the-way off.
7. Recheck coolant level after first open-throttle
boat test and add coolant, if necessary.
8. Maintain coolant level in coolant recovery reservoir between Add and Full marks with engine
at normal operating temperature.
Coolant section of Closed Cooling System should be
kept filled year around with recommended coolant
solution. DO NOT drain coolant, fresh water section,
for storage, as this will promote rusting of internal surfaces. If engine will be exposed to freezing temperatures, make sure that coolant section is filled with
ethylene glycol antifreeze and water solution, mixed
to manufacturers recommended proportion, to protect engine to lowest temperature to which it will be
exposed.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Auxiliary Hot Water Heater

Installation
Recommended Supply Locations

hot water heater, certain requirements must be
met.
Supply hose (from engine to heater) and return hose (from heater to engine) MUST NOT
EXCEED 5/8 in. (15.8 mm) I.D. (inside diameter).
Engine with a Closed Cooling System: Heater

MUST BE LOWER than fill cap on the heat exchanger. If the heater is higher than the fill cap
on the heat exchanger and some coolant is
lost in the system, an air pocket may form in
the closed cooling system. This, in turn, can
cause the engine to overheat.
Make heater connections ONLY at locations

described in the following instructions.
Check complete system for leaks after heater

is connected into cooling system.
Check for overheating condition (of engine)

after heater is connected.
b
71518
1. Refer to Changing Coolant - Draining Instructions; drain closed cooling system.

2. Inspect for appropriate location of supply hose at
following:
72702
! CAUTION
Avoid a performance loss and/or possible engine
damage. Engine coolant must flow continuously
from the engine intake manifold to the engine water circulating pump. NEVER close-off or block
the coolant flow to or from a heater.
All heater installations must be plumbed in series with the supply and return connections.
NOTE: Hot water heater supply hose can be connected at several different locations. On some models, there may be other accessories and options that
are utilizing these hot water supply locations. One of
the following should be available for use when installing a hot water heater system.
NOTE: On some models it may be necessary to remove the audio warning heat switch from port side of
thermostat housing and reposition to water circulating pump opening as outlined following.
IMPORTANT: Do not reposition engine temperature switch; it must remain where installed by
factory.
Thermostat Housing With Two Hose Connection

a - Audio Warning Switch Relocation
b - Water Supply Location
75045
MIE 7.4L / MCM 7.4LX Throttle Body Injection

a - Location For Hot Water Supply
b - Factory Hose
Index
90-823324--2 796
b
b
a
74639
a
75075
Multi-Port Injection Models Models Seawater

Flow Through Exhaust Manifolds
a - Location for Hot Water Supply (Bayonet Fitting Replaces
Brass Plug)
b - Thermostat Housing
MIE 7.4L / MCM 7.4LX Throttle Body Injection

a - Location For Hot Water Return
b - Factory Hose
Recommended Return Locations

a
b
b
b
a
74137
72705
Thermostat Housing With Two Hose Connection

a - T-Fitting
b - Hose Clamps
MIE Rear Mounted Closed Cooling (Starboard

View)
a - T-Fitting
b - Hose Clamps
72702
Multi-Port Injection Models Models Seawater

Flow Through Exhaust Manifolds
Index
90-823224--2 796
Closed Cooling System Flow Diagrams

MCM Bravo Models - 7.4L/454 Magnum
ENGINE BLOCK
LEGEND
FRESHWATER
SEAWATER
72962
BLEEDER
BLEEDER
TO EXHAUST
MANIFOLDS
THERMOSTAT
HOUSING COVER
TO EXHAUST
MANIFOLDS
THERMOSTAT
HOUSING COVER
THERMOSTAT
THERMOSTAT
THERMOSTAT
HOUSING
THERMOSTAT
LEGEND
THERMOSTAT
HOUSING
COLD
WARM
FROM INTAKE
MANIFOLD
COOLANT FLOW THROUGH THERMOSTAT HOUSING
WITH THERMOSTAT CLOSED (ENGINE COLD)
FROM INTAKE
MANIFOLD
WITH THERMOSTAT OPEN (ENGINE WARM)
Index
90-823324--2 796
MCM Model - 502 Magnum

OVERBOARD
SEAWATER
INLET
EXHAUST ELBOW
OVERBOARD
OIL &
P/S
COOLER
STAINLESS
STEEL
SEPARATOR
PLATE
SEAWATER
PICKUP PUMP
THERMOSTAT
HOUSING
COVER
ENGINE BLOCK,
INTAKE MANIFOLD AND
CYLINDER BLOCK ASSY.
THERMOSTAT
EXHAUST
MANIFOLD
THERMOSTAT
HOUSING
CIRCULATING
PUMP
HEAT
EXCHANGER
ENGINE BLOCK
LEGEND
FRESHWATER
COOLANT RECOVERY
BOTTLE
SEAWATER
BLEEDER
BLEEDER
THERMOSTAT
HOUSING COVER
TO EXHAUST
MANIFOLDS
TO EXHAUST
MANIFOLDS
THERMOSTAT
HOUSING COVER
THERMOSTAT
THERMOSTAT
THERMOSTAT
HOUSING
THERMOSTAT
LEGEND
THERMOSTAT
HOUSING
COLD
WARM
FROM INTAKE
MANIFOLD
FROM INTAKE
MANIFOLD
Index
90-823224--2 796
MIE Models - 7.4L / 8.2L

NOTE: ON ENGINES WITH V-DRIVE
TRANSMISSIONS, EXHAUST ELBOWS
WILL BE REVERSED; COOLANT FLOW
REMAINS THE SAME.
OVERBOARD
SEAWATER
INLET
TRANSMISSION
COOLER
EXHAUST ELBOW
BLEEDER
VALVE
OIL
COOLER
THERMOSTAT
HOUSING
COVER
OVERBOARD
STAINLESS STEEL
SEPARATOR PLATE
SEAWATER
PICKUP PUMP
THERMOSTAT
THERMOSTAT
HOUSING
EXHAUST
MANIFOLD
CIRCULATING
PUMP
HEAT
EXCHANGER
ENGINE BLOCK
LEGEND
COOLANT RECOVERY
BOTTLE
FRESHWATER
SEAWATER
BLEEDER
VALVE
BLEEDER
VALVE
TO EXHAUST
MANIFOLDS
TO EXHAUST
MANIFOLDS
THERMOSTAT
HOUSING COVER
THERMOSTAT
HOUSING COVER
THERMOSTAT
THERMOSTAT
THERMOSTAT
LEGEND
COLD
WARM
THERMOSTAT
HOUSING
THERMOSTAT
HOUSING
FROM INTAKE
MANIFOLD
FROM INTAKE
MANIFOLD
71726

Index
90-823324--2 796
MIE 454 CID / 7.4L 502 CID / 8.2L with Vertical Mounted Oil Cooler / Port Side
Mounted Transmission Cooler / Optional Fuel Cooler And MCM 454 CID / 7.4L
Without Coolant Flow Through Exhaust Manifolds
OVERBOARD
SEAWATER
INLET
OVERBOARD
EXHAUST ELBOW
OPTIONAL FUEL
COOLER
SEAWATER
PICKUP PUMP
STAINLESS STEEL
SEPARATOR PLATE
BLEEDER
VALVE
THERMOSTAT
HOUSING
EXHAUST
MANIFOLD
THERMOSTAT
CIRCULATING
PUMP
HEAT
EXCHANGER
OILCOOLER
COOLANT RECOVERY
BOTTLE
TRANSMISSION
COOLER
74745
Index
90-823224--2 796

AT A LATER DATE
Index
90-823324--2 796

AT A LATER DATE
Index
90-823224--2 796
EXHAUST SYSTEM
72699
GENERAL
Index
7
A
Table of Contents
Page
Exhaust System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7A-1
Determining If Exhaust Elbow Risers
Are Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7A-1
MCM (Stern Drive) Engines With Thru
Transom Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7A-1
MIE (Inboard) Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7A-2
Exhaust Hose Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7A-2
Exhaust Tube Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7A-3
Index
7A-0 - GENERAL
90-823224--2 796
MCM (Stern Drive) Engines With Thru

Transom Exhaust
Exhaust System
Requirements
IMPORTANT: It is the responsibility of the boat
manufacturer or installing dealer to properly locate the engine and install the exhaust system.
Improper installation may allow water to enter the
exhaust manifolds and combustion chambers
and severely damage the engine. Damage
caused by water in the engine will not be covered
by MerCruiser Limited Warranty, unless this
damage is the result of defective part(s).
Determining If Exhaust Elbow Risers

Are Required
On all engines to determine if exhaust elbow risers
are required, take measurements (a) and (b), with
boat at rest in the water and maximum load aboard.
Subtract (b) from (a). If (a) minus (b) is less than specified in chart, select appropriate size exhaust elbow
riser kit and exhaust extension kit that will correctly
position exhaust elbow.
When designing and installing exhaust system, the

following must be observed:
Minimum Hose Size
Model
Single Outlet
Dual Outlet
All (Except
Magnums)
5 in. (127 mm)
4 in. (102 mm)
4 in. (102 mm)
Magnum
1. Exhaust flanges must be of proper size to accommodate 4 in. (102 mm) I.D. exhaust hoses. They
must also be equipped with internal water shutters, and use an exhaust flapper over each outlet.
2. The exhaust hoses and pipes must not be higher
than exhaust elbows at any point.
3. The exhaust outlet must be located so that a minimum of 1/2 in. (13 mm) drop per foot (305 mm)
downward pitch exists in the exhaust hose from
the engine exhaust elbow to the outlet. (This is an
American Boat & Yacht Council recommendation.) The drop must be constant so that a low
spot does not exist at any point in the exhaust
hose.
4. Exhaust outlet must be slightly above the waterline with boat at rest in the water and full load
aboard.
72700
Exhaust Elbow Measurement

a - From Waterline To Top Of Transom
b - From Highest Point On Exhaust Elbow To Top Of Transom
Model
(a) Minus (b) Must Be

at Least
All
13 In. (330 mm)
5. Back pressure must not exceed 4 in. (102 mm) of

mercury when measured with a mercury manometer to exhaust elbow outlets.
Index
90-823224--2 796
GENERAL - 7A-1
MIE (Inboard) Engines
Exhaust Hose Connection
When designing and installing exhaust system, it is

very important that the following additional points be
taken into consideration:
1. Exhaust hoses must be connected to exhaust elbows so that they do not restrict the flow of discharge water from the elbow. If hoses are connected incorrectly, a hot spot in the hose can
occur, and can eventually burn through.
1. System layout and construction must prevent

cooling system discharge water from flowing
back into engine and also must prevent seawater
from entering engine via exhaust at any point.
2. The exhaust hoses and pipes must not be higher
than exhaust elbows at any point.
3. The exhaust outlet (for routing exhaust to outside
of boat) must be located so that a minimum of 1/2
in. (13 mm) per foot (305 mm) downward pitch
(drop) exists in the exhaust hose or pipe from the
engine exhaust elbow to the outlet, with a minimum drop of 4 in. (102 mm) overall. (This is an
American Boat & Yacht Council recommendation.) The drop must be constant so that a low
spot does not exist at any point in the exhaust
hose or pipe.
4. Exhaust outlet must be slightly above the waterline with boat at rest in the water and full load
aboard. Exhaust outlet should be equipped with
an internal shutter to prevent seawater from running back into exhaust system. The use of an exhaust flapper on each outlet also is recommended.
5. System must not cause excessive back pressure. Back pressure MUST NOT exceed 4 in.
(102 mm) of mercury when measured with a mercury manometer at exhaust elbow outlets. Minimum exhaust hose sizes are given in chart.
72538
a - Correct Connection
b - Incorrect Connection
2. Exhaust hoses must be secured at each connection with two hose clamps.
Minimum Hose Size

Model
Single Outlet
Dual Outlet
All (Except
Magnums)
5 in. (127 mm)
4 in. (102 mm)
Index
7A-2 - GENERAL
90-823224--2 796
Exhaust Tube Requirements

IMPORTANT: When installing thru-transom exhaust, it is recommended that the exhaust
bellows on the transom assembly be removed.
This is necessary to avoid creating a vacuum at
the exhaust outlet in the propeller at higher boat
speeds. This vacuum could degrade propeller
performance on some boats.
IMPORTANT: When installing thru-propeller exhaust:
With any application, installation of an exhaust tube will increase exhaust noise.
With Bravo One and Bravo Two Drives an exhaust tube MAY BE INSTALLED for a slight increase in performance.
With a Silent Choice Exhaust System the exhaust bellows must be removed and an exhaust tube MUST BE INSTALLED.
With most Bravo Three Drive Models an exhaust tube MAY BE INSTALLED for a slight increase in performance. On the following Bravo Three Models, the exhaust bellows must be
removed and an exhaust tube MUST BE
INSTALLED:
MCM 7.4LX EFI
MCM 7.4LX MPI
MCM 454 Magnum
MCM 454 Magnum MPI
MCM 502 Magnum MPI
Index
90-823224--2 796
GENERAL - 7A-3

AT A LATER DATE
Index
7A-4 - GENERAL
90-823224--2 796
EXHAUST SYSTEM
72695
MANIFOLDS AND ELBOWS
Index
7
B
Table of Contents
Page
Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sealants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7B-1
7B-1
7B-1
7B-2
7B-2
Index
7B
- MANIFOLDS
AND
ELBOWS
7B-0
- MANIFOLDS
AND
ELBOWS
90-823224--2 796
Fastener Location
Lb. Ft.
Hose Clamp
Nm
7. Remove exhaust manifold fasteners; remove

manifold assembly and discard gaskets.
a
Securely
Exhaust Elbow
25
Exhaust Manifold
34
Sealants
Description
Part Number
c
d
92-34227-1
Removal
f
! WARNING
Avoid possible injury or damage to equipment
should wires be accidentally shorted. Disconnect BOTH battery cables from battery before
proceeding.
! CAUTION
72695
Stainless Steel Elbow With Restrictor Gasket

a
b
c
d
e
Exhaust Elbow
Bolts (4)
Gasket-Seawater Cooled (Aligned As Shown)
Exhaust Manifold Assembly
Plug
To avoid severe engine damage. Exhaust elbows

and manifolds MUST BE drained to prevent water
(or coolant) from entering combustion chambers
when exhaust elbows are removed.
2. Drain water from manifold and exhaust elbow.

(Refer to SECTION 6A or 6B.)
3. Disconnect exhaust bellows and cooling hoses.
4. Starboard Manifold:
a. Disconnect both shift cables (MCM only).
b. Disconnect instrument harness plug from engine harness, if mounted on exhaust elbow.
c. Remove shift plate assembly from exhaust
elbow (MCM only).
d. Remove bolt holding bracket for Quicksilver
Water Separating Fuel Filter to exhaust manifold.
5. Port Manifold:
a. Remove remote oil filter and bracket.
b. Remove ignition module from exhaust elbow
(if so equipped)
72696
Stainless Steel Elbow With Separator Gasket

a
b
c
d
e
Exhaust Elbow
Bolts (4)
Manifold Separator Gasket
Exhaust Manifold Assembly
Plug
6. Remove exhaust elbow.
Index
90-823224--2 796
MANIFOLDS AND ELBOWS - 7B-1
5. Install exhaust elbows and cooling hoses.
1. Clean gasket material from all surfaces and wash

parts in solvent.
6. On Closed Cooled Models: Refill closed cooling system to operating level with properly mixed
coolant. Refer to SECTION 6B.
2. Inspect all parts carefully. Machined surfaces

must be clean and free of all marks and deep
scratches, or water and exhaust leaks may result.
7. Reconnect battery cables to battery. Tighten securely.
3. Check water passages for foreign material. Passages must be clean for efficient cooling.
8. Start engine and check for fuel, exhaust and water leaks.
4. If more thorough inspection is desired, pipe plugs

may be removed from exhaust manifold and exhaust elbow.
b
IMPORTANT: If plugs are removed, coat threads

with Quicksilver Perfect Seal before reinstalling.
5. Check for cracks.

6. To test manifold body for leaks, block-off plates,
plugs, or short hoses with plugged ends must be
used. One block-off plate must have a threaded
hole for attaching compressed air hose. Use new
gaskets when installing block-off plate(s). Apply
40 PSI (276 kPa) of air pressure and submerge
manifold in water. Air bubbles will indicate a leak.
c
d
Installation
72695
1. Using new gasket, install exhaust manifold to cylinder head. Torque fasteners to 25 lb. ft. (34 Nm).
IMPORTANT: See Section 7C if exhaust risers are
used.
2. Using a new gasket, install exhaust elbow to exhaust manifold. Torque fasteners to 25 lb. ft.
(34 Nm).
3. Port Manifold:
Stainless Steel Elbow With Restrictor Gasket

(Cast Iron Elbow Similar)
a
b
c
d
e
Exhaust Elbow
Bolts (4)
Gasket - Seawater Cooled (Aligned As Shown)
Exhaust Manifold
Plug
a. Install remote oil filter and bracket.

b. Install ignition module on exhaust elbow (if so
equipped)
4. Starboard Manifold:
a. Install bolt to secure Quicksilver Water Separating Fuel Filter bracket to exhaust manifold.
b. Install shift plate assembly on exhaust elbow
(MCM only).
c. Connect instrument harness plug to engine
harness, if disconnected previously.
d. Connect both shift cables (MCM only).
Index
7B-2 - MANIFOLDS AND ELBOWS
90-823224--2 796
b
a
c
d
f
72696
Stainless Steel Elbow With Separator Gasket

(Cast Iron Elbow Similar)
a
b
c
d
e
f
Exhaust Elbow
Bolts (4)
Gasket - Seawater Cooled (Aligned As Shown)
Exhaust Manifold
Plug
Bolts (4)
Index
90-823224--2 796
MANIFOLDS AND ELBOWS - 7B-3

AT A LATER DATE
Index
7B-4 - MANIFOLDS AND ELBOWS
90-823224--2 796
EXHAUST SYSTEM
70593
RISERS
Index
7
C
Table of Contents
Page
Exhaust Riser (Kit) Identification . . . . . . . . . . . .

Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sealants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Preparation and Parts Removal . . .
Engine Preparation and Component
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exhaust Extension Kit Installation . . . . . . . .
Installation Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cast Iron Elbows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cast Iron Elbows With Mufflers . . . . . . . . . .
Stainless Steel Elbows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stainless Steel Elbows With Mufflers . . . . .
7C-1
7C-1
7C-1
7C-1
7C-1
7C-2
7C-3
7C-3
7C-4
7C-4
7C-5
7C-5
Index
7C
- RISERS
7C-0
- RISERS
90-823224-2 796
Exhaust Riser (Kit)

Identification
Replacement Information
IMPORTANT: All listed MCM and MIE Models can

be adapted to 9 inch (228 mm) exhaust risers by
stacking 3 inch (76 mm) riser kit (93320A7) and
the 6 inch (152 mm) riser kit (9322A4) with stainless steel elbows.
Fastener Location
Exhaust Elbow
Exhaust Riser
Lb. Ft.
Nm
27
37
Engine Preparation and Parts

Removal
! WARNING
Avoid possible injury or damage to equipment
should wires be accidentally shorted. Disconnect BOTH battery cables from battery before
proceeding.
! CAUTION
Avoid severe engine damage. Exhaust elbows
and manifolds MUST BE drained to prevent water
(or coolant) from entering combustion chambers
when exhaust elbows are removed.
Sealants
Description
Part Number
92-34227-1
2. Drain exhaust elbows and exhaust manifolds.

3. Remove any items attached to the elbows on the
engine and carefully lay them aside. Remember
their positioning for reassembly later.
4. Remove fasteners retaining exhaust elbows and
risers to manifolds and retain. Remove exhaust
elbows.
5. Remove and discard old gaskets. Clean gasket
mating surfaces on elbows, manifolds and risers.
Index
90-823224-2 796
RISERS - 7C-1
Engine Preparation and

Component Removal
6. Assemble harness bracket and plastic backup

plate, if so equipped, using four small screws.
1. Assemble studs to exhaust manifold and position

all gaskets as shown between risers. Refer to Installation Diagrams at the end of this section.
IMPORTANT: Restrictor gaskets or manifold separator gaskets must be installed in order shown.
! CAUTION
c
If engine is equipped with closed cooling, MANIFOLD SEPARATOR GASKET MUST BE INSTALLED ONLY ON EXHAUST MANIFOLD. Failure to install separator gaskets on exhaust
manifolds, or to install in a location other than
shown, will result in severe engine damage.
2. Install elbow on riser(s) and studs. Attach using
nuts and washers.
NOTE: Drain plugs in risers must be positioned facing flywheel end of engine, unless otherwise noted.
3. Torque all fasteners, in a diagonal pattern, to 27
lb.ft. (37 Nm).
4. Place spacers between riser plate, if so
equipped, and fasten with existing nuts. Tighten
securely.
d
e
70244
Bracket For 6 Inch (152 mm) Riser

a
b
c
d
e
Riser Bracket
Harness Plate
Back-Up Plate (1) - Screws (4) 7/8 In. (22 mm)
Screws (6) 3/4 In. (19 mm)
Nuts (6)
7. Refill closed cooling system, if so equipped. (Refer to SECTION 6B - Closed Cooled Models.)
8. Upon first start-up of engine check for leaks.
5. Reattach and tighten securely all parts previously

removed from elbow to appropriate position on
riser bracket, if so equipped.
IMPORTANT: On elbows with ignition amplifier,
be sure to reconnect amplifier and wiring harness ground wires to one of the attaching screws
and that amplifier spacers are installed between
amplifier and exhaust elbow. Tighten screws securely.
IMPORTANT: On elbows with shift plate (MCM
only) reinstall shift plate and tighten fasteners
securely, then readjust shift cables as outlined in
Index
7C-2 - RISERS
90-823224-2 796
Exhaust Extension Kit Installation

1. Install appropriate exhaust extension (see Additional Kits) for MCM Models with thru prop exhaust, using two hose clamps at each end.
Installation Diagrams
IMPORTANT: Remember what type of gasket
(open, restrictor or separator) is on exhaust manifold after removing the exhaust elbow.
70622
A
b
50930
a - Cut Along Bottom Edge Of Welt For With 3in. (76 mm)
Riser
b - Leave Full Length For Use With 6 In. (152 mm) Riser
a - Restrictor and Open Gasket

b - Separator Gasket
1. Position gaskets (REFER TO EXPLODED

VIEWS A OR B ON FOLLOWING PAGES),
install elbows to risers and attach using nuts
and washers from kit. Torque to 23-32 Ft. Lb.
(32-43 Nm).
Typical Exhaust Extension (See Additional

Kits at Front of Section for Kit Part Number)
2. Tighten hose clamps securely.
3. Upon first start-up of engine check for leaks.
Index
90-823224-2 796
RISERS - 7C-3
Cast Iron Elbows
Cast Iron Elbows With Mufflers
i
a
f
d
b
c
e
g
J
k
B
A
70621
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
Exhaust Elbow
Separator Gasket
3 Inch (76 mm) Exhaust Riser
Open Gasket
Restrictor Gasket
Nut (8)
Stud (8) 9-3/8 Inch (238 mm)
Stud (8) 10-3/8 Inch (264 mm) Used With Remote Oil Filter
Washer (8)
Exhaust Manifold
B
70622
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
Exhaust Elbow
Muffler Spacer 1-1/4 Inch (32 mm)
Open Gasket
Exhaust Riser 3 Inch (76 mm)
Separator Gasket
Restrictor Gasket
Nut (8)
Stud (8) 9-3/8 Inch (238 mm)
Stud (8) 10-3/8 Inch (264 mm) Used With Remote Oil Filter
Washer (8)
Exhaust Manifold
Index
7C-4 - RISERS
90-823224-2 796
Stainless Steel Elbows

e
Stainless Steel Elbows With Mufflers

e
f
b
i
g
i
h
g
d
h
J
i
c
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
Exhaust Manifold
Exhaust Elbow
Stud 6-1/2 Inch (165 mm)
Stud 7-1/2 Inch (191 mm) For Use With Remote Oil Filter
Nuts (8)
Washers (8)
Open Gasket
3 Inch (76 mm) Riser
Restrictor Gasket
Separator Gasket
70593
A
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
Exhaust Manifold
Exhaust Elbow
Stud 10-3/8 Inch (264 mm) For USe With Remote Oil Filter
Washers (8)
Nuts (8)
Muffler Spacer
Open Gasket
Restrictor Gasket
Separator Gasket
Index
90-823224-2 796
RISERS - 7C-5
Special Procedure For MCM

454 / 502 Magnum and
MIE 8. 2L Bluewater Inboard
With Front Mounted Closed
Cooling (Serial Number
OF801699 and Below)
IMPORTANT: Drain plugs in risers must be positioned toward the flywheel.

IMPORTANT: The hoses supplied with the kit for
connection between heat exchanger and T-fitting, must be cut to appropriate length.
1. It is necessary to route from back of elbow to front
of riser using parts supplied in Kit 17833A7.
2. Install block off plug to fitting in elbow with clamp.
3. Use a soft jaw vise to hold riser and remove 3/4
inch plug from riser.
a
b

of fittings in kit and install in riser.
c
d
IMPORTANT: On 454/502 Magnum engines riser

fittings point toward flywheel end of engine. On
8.2L MIE Engines the riser fitting points toward
the water pump end of engine and there are individual port and starboard hoses from the heat exchanger (no T- fitting).
e
J
i
5. Install gaskets between risers as shown.

Torque fasteners in a diagonal pattern, to 20-25
(27-34 Nm).
6. Install parts previously removed from engine in
appropriate locations using existing fasteners.
7. Install Exhaust Extension Kit for MCM models

per instructions in provided in kit.
8. Install heat exchanger to exhaust riser hoses.

Secure with hose clamps provided in kit.
k
70601
abc def ghi j k l m-
Nut
Washer
Exhaust Elbow
Hose Clamp
Block-Off Plug
Open Gasket
Separator
Hose Clamp
Hose 19-1/2 Inch (495 mm) To Heat Exchanger
Exhaust Manifold
Stud 7-1/2 Inch (191 mm) For Use With Remote Oil Filter
Index
7C-6 - RISERS
90-823224-2 796
Maintenance Instructions
Maintenance inspection is owners responsibility and
must be performed at intervals specified in owners
Operation and Maintenance Manual.
1. Check to ensure exhaust elbow and manifold fasteners are adequately tightened.
2. Check to ensure hose clamps are adequately
tightened.
3. Check area around exhaust elbows, manifolds
and riser gaskets for leakage. Replace gaskets,
if necessary.
4. IF THE POSSIBILITY OF FREEZING EXISTS,
remove drain plug from the exhaust elbow riser
and allow water to drain completely. Install drain
plug with Quicksilver Perfect Seal applied to
threads. In closed cooling MCM 454 / 502 Magnum and MIE 8.2L Bluewater Inboard engines, remove water hose to allow water to
drain.
! CAUTION
Water must be completely drained from exhaust
elbow riser during freezing temperatures. Failure
to perform draining procedures can cause severe damage.
Index
90-823224-2 796
RISERS - 7C-7

AT A LATER DATE
Index
7C-8 - RISERS
90-823224-2 796
EXHAUST SYSTEM
72737
COLLECTORS
Index
7
D
Table of Contents
Page
Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7D-1
Lubricants/Sealants/ Adhesives . . . . . . . . . . . . 7D-1
Shutter Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7D-1
Component Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7D-2
Thru-Transom Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7D-3
Shutter Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7D-3
Component Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7D-3
Below Swim Platform Exhaust Pipe Kit . . . . . . 7D-3
Modifying Swim Platform Exhaust Pipe,
If Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7D-4
Silent Choice Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7D-4
Exhaust Bellows Removal and Exhaust
Tube Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7D-4
Air Tube Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7D-6
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7D-6
Exhaust Muffler Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7D-7
Cleaning and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7D-8
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7D-8
Maintenance Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7D-8
Index
7D-0 - COLLECTORS
90-823224--2 796
Shutter Replacement
Fastener Location
Lb. Ft.
Nm
IMPORTANT: Engine does not have to be removed to change shutters.

1. Loosen clamps and remove exhaust pipe elbow
and exhaust hose.
Block-Off Plate
Exhaust Pipe to Gimbal
Housing
2. Replace water shutter as shown.
Exhaust Pipe to Tee Pipe

20-25
27-34
3. Reinstall pipe elbow and hose. Tighten clamps

securely.
Tee Pipe to Gimbal Housing

Upper Exhaust Pipe to Lower
Exhaust Pipe
Exhaust Elbow
Air Pump Mount
b
c
Muffler End Plate

Mode Switch
S
Securely
l
Hose Clamps
Water Shutter Screw/Nut
Lubricants/Sealants/
Adhesives
a
c
Description
Quicksilver 2-4-C Marine
Lubricant With Teflon
Part Number
92-825407A3
Loctite 35
92-59328-1
Loctite Primer
92-59327-1
Quicksilver Bellows Adhesive
92-86166
92-34227-1
92-25711-2
Quicksilver Sound Blanket

Glue
92-25234
72729
Earlier Style Shutter

a
b
c
d
Top Of Pipe
Shoulder Bushing
Water Shutter
Shaft
Index
90-823224--2 796
COLLECTORS - 7D-1
b
a
a
a
b
d
e
f
Later Style Shutter
a - Exhaust Flapper
b - Rubber Grommets
72737
Component Replacement
To replace any components(s) in exhaust system,
the following must be adhered to:
All mating joint surfaces must be clean.
O-ring must remain in groove to properly seal

joints to prevent leakage.
Torque all bolts to 20-25 lb. ft. (27-34 Nm).
Tighten all clamps securely.
a
b
c
d
e
f
Clamps
Exhaust Pipe Elbow
Exhaust Hose
Water Shutters
Bolts and Lockwashers
Exhaust Pipe
b
72736
a - Mating Surface
b - O-Ring
Index
7D-2 - COLLECTORS
90-823224--2 796
Component Replacement
Thru-Transom Exhaust
Shutter Replacement
d
e
IMPORTANT: A block off plate must be installed

when using thru-transom exhaust or below swim
platform kits.
g
h
b
72740
Transom Exhaust Kit
22057
a - Block Off Plate

b - Bolts (4)
1. Remove exhaust hose clamps, then hose.
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
Screw And Nut (4)

Support Member
Water Shutter (Hinge Must Be Vertical)
Gasket
Exhaust Flange
Bolts, Washers and Nuts (3)
Clamp
Cover (Flapper)
2. Chisel rivets away from both support members.
Below Swim Platform

Exhaust Pipe Kit
c
d
This exhaust kit may be used on any MerCruiser Bravo installation having a 4 in. (102 mm) exhaust elbow.
a
b
d
c
a
b
c
d
27761
Shutter Hinge
Water Shutter - Opens Toward Outside Of Boat
Support Member
Rivets (4)
3. Install new shutter as shown in Component Replacement following. Tighten screws and nut securely.
72742
b
a - 8 Per Kit
b - 2 Per Kit
4. Reinstall exhaust hose. Tighten clamps securely.
Index
90-823224--2 796
COLLECTORS - 7D-3
Modifying Swim Platform Exhaust

Pipe, If Required
Silent Choice Exhaust

System
If engine is equipped with thru-prop exhaust, a
thru-transom kit [4 in. (102 mm)], two exhaust bellows, and eight bellows hose clamps, are required.
ENGINE
If engine is equipped with thru-transom exhaust, an

exhaust pipe kit (P/N 44266A6) is required, containing the exhaust pipe and necessary parts.
IMPORTANT: When installing Silent Choice exhaust, it is recommended that the exhaust bellows on the transom assembly be removed. This
is necessary to avoid creating a vacuum at the
exhaust outlet in the propeller at higher boat
speeds. This vacuum could degrade propeller
performance on some boats.
TRANSOM
72743
a - Cut Line (See Notes)
NOTE: If riser kits are installed, or if more vertical

drop is required, cut a must be made, and the upper
and lower sections of the pipe rejoined with a 4 in.
(102 mm) I.D. exhaust hose of the required length.
Secure with hose clamps.
! CAUTION
It is the responsibility of the boat manufacturer or
installing dealer to properly locate the engine
and install exhaust system. Improper installation
may allow water to enter the exhaust manifolds
and combustion chambers, and severely damage the engine. Damage caused by water in the
engine will not be covered by MerCruiser Warranty, unless this damage is the result of defective
part(s).
NOTE: Prime/paint any raw (cut) aluminum surface.

IMPORTANT: Each exhaust bellows must be
double clamped at each connection, and the
hose clamps tightened to 30-40 lb. in. (3-5 Nm).
Exhaust Bellows Removal and

Exhaust Tube Installation
1. If required, remove and discard clamps and bellows from gimbal housing.
a
22116
Index
7D-4 - COLLECTORS
90-823224--2 796
2. If required, install exhaust tube on gimbal housing as follows:

3. Remove and discard clamps and exhaust bellows.
! CAUTION
Exhaust tube clamp may corrode if grounding
clip is not installed.
a. Install grounding clip on tube.
NOTE: Bellows adhesive is not used when installing

an exhaust tube.
! CAUTION
part(s).
b
(1) Position tube so that SIDE markings on

tube are facing toward the right and left
sides.
(2) Install clamp.
(3) Tighten clamp. Torque to 35 lb. in.
(4 Nm).
72539
22184
a - Silencer Valve Assembly

b - Hose Clamps
c
a
b
22184
a
b
c
d
e
Exhaust Tube
Clamp
Side Marking
Exhaust Tube
Grounding Clip
Index
90-823224--2 796
COLLECTORS - 7D-5
Air Tube Routing
Maintenance
1. Route air tubing from air pump to silencer valve

cylinders. Do not route air tubing close to hot surfaces - excessive heat will damage air tubes.
1. Air Intake Filter (32-17272) must be checked

once each year. If filter is clogged or partially
clogged, replace. The filter pad is glued in, and
may be removed with a needle-nose pliers.
Clean surface in casting, apply a single dot of
Quicksilver Sound Blanket Glue to center of casting, and install new filter. Be careful not to coat filter or clog air intake holes with adhesive.
a
d
d
b
g
c
e
72775
Single Engine
a
b
c
d
Air Tube
T-Fittings
Air Pump Assembly
Air Tube To Air Cylinder - On Each Silencer Valve
i
d
72534
b
72776
Dual Engine
a
b
c
d
Air Tube
T-Fittings
Air Pump Assembly
Air Tube To Air Cylinder - On Each Silencer Valve
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
Mode Switch
Keyway - Install In DOWN Position
BROWN Wire To Terminal 3 - Activates Compressor
PURPLE Wire - 12 Volt; Connect To 12 Volt Source In
Control Panel Area
- GRAY Wire To Terminal 1 - Activates Solenoid
- Air Pump
- Solenoid
- Check Valve
- Relief Valve - 30 PSI
- 2 Ft. (610 mm) Ground Wire - Connect To Terminal 2 Must
Be Grounded To Engine
- Air Intake Filter
Index
7D-6 - COLLECTORS
90-823224--2 796
2. Lubricate air cylinder-to-silencer pipe flapper at

clevis and pin, as needed, with Quicksilver 2-4-C
Marine Lubricant.
1-1/4 INCH MUFFLER RISER INSTALLATION, ONLY
IMPORTANT: Restrictor gaskets or separator

gaskets must be installed in order shown.
c
d
b
g
e
f
h
a
72778
a - Lubricate Clevis and Pin with Quicksilver 2-4-C Marine

Lubricant
Exhaust Muffler Kit

This muffler, designed for use on all V-8 engines with
Plus Power exhaust systems (4 in., 7 degrees
downward outlets), requires the installation of 1-1/4
in. (32 mm) exhaust elbow risers, which are included
in the kit.
IMPORTANT: If a thru-transom exhaust kit other
than the one from Mercury Marine is used, the exhaust kit must be equipped with internal shutters
and external flappers.
! CAUTION
B
72780
A - Without Separator Gasket

B - With Separator Gasket
a
b
c
d
e
Exhaust Manifold
Exhaust Elbow
Bolt (4 Each Manifold)
Bolt, Remote OIl Filter Bracket (2)
Gasket - Lightly Coat Both Sides With Quicksilver Perfect
Seal
f - Riser 1-1/4 Inch (32 mm) Height
g - Restrictor Gasket
h - Manifold Separator Gasket
NOTE: Drain plugs in risers face toward stern.

part(s).
Index
90-823224--2 796
COLLECTORS - 7D-7
IMPORTANT: A MOLDED exhaust tube MUST be

used at exhaust elbow connection to maintain
positive separation of exhaust outlet and muffler
inlet.

1. Disassemble muffler as shown.
b
c
a
a
c
d
d
72782
d
a
b
c
d
Removable End Plate

4 Screws Secure End Plate
O-Ring Seal
Element - When Reassembling, Seat Tab In Slot In Casting
2. Clean (using pressurized water) and inspect

parts, including filter element and O-ring seal. If
required, replace O-ring, securing in place with
Quicksilver Sound Blanket Glue.
3. Reassemble as shown above. Tighten end plate
screws securely.
72781
a - Muffler
b - Molded Exhaust Tube - Muffler To Elbow
c - Exhaust Hose - Muffler To Thru Transom Fitting - Cut To
Length
d - Double Clamp Each Connection (Not Shown On Hose C)
2. Double clamp each connection; tighten each

clamp securely.
IMPORTANT: After starting engine, check installation for leaks.
Installation
1. Install muffler, as shown, into exhaust hose and
molded tube. Fabricate muffler to transom using
4-inch I.D. exhaust hose, cut to required length.
NOTE: Removable end of muffler ALWAYS goes toward exhaust elbow. This places direction marks on
muffler body casting at the upper rear corner on the
port side.
Maintenance Instructions
Maintenance inspection is owners responsibility and
must be performed at intervals specified in owners
Operation and Maintenance Manual.
1. Check exhaust elbow attaching nuts for adequate tightness [20-25 lb. ft. (27-34 Nm)].
2. Check hose clamps for adequate tightness.
3. Periodically check tubes/hoses for soft spots,
brittleness, cracks, and general condition. Replace as necessary.
72783
Index
7D-8 - COLLECTORS
90-823224--2 796
4. As needed, depending on use conditions, remove mufflers, then remove four screws securing forward end plate, and remove end plate and
element and interior of muffler. Clean thoroughly,
at least once each year, using pressurized water.
5. Reinstall muffler end plate with four screws.

Tighten securely.
6. Reinstall muffler into tubes/hoses. Double clamp.
Tighten securely.
7. Check area around exhaust elbow and riser gaskets for leakage. Replace gaskets, if necessary.
8. If the possibility of freezing exists, remove drain

plug from exhaust elbow riser and allow water to
drain completely. Reinstall drain plug with Quicksilver Perfect Seal applied to threads.
! CAUTION
Water must be completely drained from exhaust

elbow riser during freezing temperatures, or water may freeze and cause severe damage to riser.
d
72782
a
b
c
d
Removable End Plate

4 Screws Secure End Plate
O-Ring Seal
Element - When Reassembling, Seat Tab In Slot In Casting
a. Check condition of O-ring seal; if dried out or

shrunk below mating surface, remove and replace. Clean groove thoroughly.
b. Glue new O-ring seal in groove, using Sound
Blanket Glue. Wipe off excess glue immediately.
Index
90-823224--2 796
COLLECTORS - 7D-9

AT A LATER DATE
Index
7D-10 - COLLECTORS
90-823224--2 796
DRIVES
VELVET DRIVE IN-LINE

TRANSMISSION
index
8
A
Table of Contents
Page
Velvet Drive In-Line (71C and 72C)
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission Ratios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission Pressure Specifications . . . .
Transmission Output Shaft Rolling
Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission Fluid Specification . . . . . . . . .
Important Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shift Control and Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Propeller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission Shift Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shift Cable Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Transmission Fluid Level . . . . . . . . .
Changing Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Draining Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filling Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pump Indexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shift Lever Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8A-1
8A-1
8A-1
8A-2
8A-2
8A-2
8A-2
8A-3
8A-3
8A-3
8A-3
8A-3
8A-4
8A-4
8A-4
8A-5
8A-5
8A-6
8A-7
8A-8
8A-9
8A-9
8A-9
index
8A-0 VELVET DRIVE IN-LINE TRANSMISSION
90-823224-2 796
Velvet Drive In-Line (71C and 72C) Specifications

The transmission identification plate is located on the top left side of the transmission. Refer to charts following
to determine engine and transmission combinations
a
b c
72839
Transmission Identification Plate

a
b
c
d
Model Number
Ratio (in Forward Gear)
Serial Number
Identification Plate Model Color Code
Transmission Ratios
Ratio in Forward Gear (NOTE 1 & 2)
Identification Plate
Color Code
1:1
Red
1:1
Green
1.5:1
2.5:1
2.91:1
Green
NOTE: 1. This ratio is shown on identification plate. Ratio may be rounded off in some cases.
NOTE 2: These transmissions are for LH (standard) rotation engines, and the propeller shaft rotation is LH
(standard) when in forward gear.
DESCRIPTION
Lb. Ft.
Nm
Drain Plug (Bushing)
25
34
Fluid Hose to Bushing
25
34
17-22
23-29
45
61
8-11
11-15
50
68
8-11
11-14
Pump Housing to Adapter

Rear Mounts to Transmission
Shift Lever to Valve
Transmission to Flywheel Housing
Neutral Start Switch
index
90-823224--2 796
VELVET DRIVE IN-LINE TRANSMISSION - 8A-1
Transmission Fluid Capacities

MODEL
U.S. QTS. (LITRES)
71C and 72C
1-1/2 (1.3) (See Note)
71C and 72C Reduction
2-1/2 (2.4) (See Note)
NOTE: Use dipstick to determine fluid exact level.

Warm Fluid Level Check: The transmission should be at operating temperature [190 F(90 C)] maximum to
receive an accurate oil level reading.
Cold Fluid Level Check: To ease checking fluid level, the dipstick can be marked or scribed. First the procedure
for warm fluid level must be performed, then allow boat to sit overnight. Remove and wipe clean the dipstick.
Insert clean dipstick and mark the cold fluid level.
Transmission Pressure Specifications

Neutral Gear
PSI (kPa)
g
Engine
RPM
MIn.
Max.
250
Forward Gear
PSI (kPa)
Min.
Reverse Gear
PSI (kPa)
Max.
Min.
70 (483)
600
115 (793)
135 (931)
Max.
70 (483)
115 (793)
140 (965)
120 (827)
140 (965)
2000
125 (862)
160 (1103)
125 (862)
160 (1103)
3000
135 (931)
180 (1241)
Transmission Output Shaft Rolling Torque

NOTE: Transmission is not installed on engine, no fluid in transmission. Use torque wrench and socket on coupling nut.
MODEL
RATIO
Lb. In.
Nm
71C
1:1
50 Max.
68 Max.
72C
1:1
50
70
Transmission Fluid Specification

Transmission Type
71C Direct Drive
ATF (Dexron III)
Mobil 424
71C Reduction Drive
71C V-Drive
72C Direct Drive
72C Reduction Drive
72C V-Drive
NOTE: Transmissions (except reduction drive transmissions) supplied with Mobil 424 can be changed to ATF
Dexron III, but transmission must be flushed and refilled at least twice (this includes lines and cooler).
index
90-823224-2 796
Shift Control and Cables
! CAUTION
Shift control and shift cable must position transmission shift lever exactly as stated in this manual, or transmission, as a result of improper shift
lever positioning, will not be covered by
Borg-Warner Warranty.
IMPORTANT: Velvet Drive Warranty is jeopardized if the shift lever poppet ball or spring is
permanently removed, or if shift lever is repositioned or changed in any manner.
Remote control used must position transmission shift
lever over the letter F embossed on transmission
case when remote control is placed in forward gear
position. Transmission failure will occur if transmission shift lever is positioned over the letter R and the
wrong rotation propeller is used to propel boat forward.
Remote control also must provide a total shift cable
travel (at transmission end) of at least 2-3/4 in. (70
mm). This is necessary to position transmission shift
lever fully in the forward and reverse gear positions.
Insufficient shift cable travel will cause transmission
to slip and eventually fail.
Engine
Engine rotation is indicated on engine specifications
and serial number decal on flame arrestor cover. Engine rotation is described when observed from the
rear of the engine (transmission end) looking forward
(water pump end).
Installed angle of MIE inboard transmission and engine should not exceed a maximum of 18 of the water line.
Transmission
Transmission gear ratio (in forward gear) is marked
on transmission identification plate, which is located
on the port (left) side of transmission. Transmission
output shaft rotation and propeller rotation required
is indicated on a decal on transmission case. Transmission rotation is described when viewed from the
rear of transmission with transmission in forward
gear selector position.
On MIE engines equipped with in-line transmissions

having 1:1 or 3:1 gear ratios, transmission output
shaft rotation is the same as engine rotation with
transmission in forward gear. Engine rotation is LH
(CCW), so a LH propeller is required.
1. DO NOT start or crank engine without fluid in
transmission.
2. Use only recommended fluid in transmission.
3. Except in an emergency, never shift transmission
at engine speeds above 1000 RPM.
4. Free wheeling of one propeller (in a twin engine
boat), at trolling speeds, will not cause damage
to the transmission; however, boat operation
above trolling speed should be avoided. Be sure
proper fluid level exists before free wheeling propeller.
5. DO NOT paint shift lever poppet ball and spring.
An accumulation of paint here will prevent proper
action of the detent.
6. Always replace oil cooler and hoses after a transmission failure or prior to installing a new or rebuilt transmission. Metallic particles from a failure
tend to collect in the cooler and hoses and will
gradually flow back into the fluid system and
damage transmission.
7. Always use specified oil cooler, hoses and fittings. Hoses must be at least 13/32 in. (10.5 mm)
I.D. Oil cooler, hoses and fittings must be sufficient size to maintain transmission fluid (in sump)
at 140-190F (60-88C).
Propeller
Propeller rotation is described when observed from
the rear of the boat (stern) looking forward (bow end).
The term left-hand (LH) refers to rotation in the
counterclockwise (CCW) direction. The term
right-hand (RH) refers to rotation in the clockwise
(CW) direction. A LH propeller will move the boat forward when rotated counterclockwise. A RH propeller
will move the boat forward when rotated clockwise.
Propeller rotation is not necessarily the same as engine rotation.
index
90-823224--2 796
IMPORTANT: To accurately check fluid level, engine must be run at 1500 RPM for 2 minutes immediately prior to checking level.
Transmission Shift Lever

The lever has three holes as illustrated following.
a
b
72526
71304
Shift Cable Adjustment

Refer to Section 2C - MIE Models - Borg-Warner
Transmissions.
Checking Transmission
Fluid Level
IMPORTANT: Use only specified transmission
fluid (see Specifications).
a - Dipstick
b - Full Mark
c - Dipstick Tube

to fill all hydraulic circuits.
down into dipstick tube when checking fluid level.
2. Stop engine and check fluid level. Add transmission fluid, if necessary, to bring level up to full
mark on dipstick.
3. Reinstall dipstick. Be sure to tighten T-handle securely. DO NOT over tighten.
4. If transmission fluid level was extremely low,
carefully check transmission, fluid cooler and
hoses for leaks.
index
90-823224-2 796
Changing Transmission
Fluid
Draining Transmission
1. Clean area around cooler hose shown and proceed as follows:
a. Disconnect hose from elbow fitting.
a
b. Remove elbow fitting from bushing.

c. Drain oil from transmission, cooler, and cooler hoses into a suitable container.
72841
Transmission with Reduction Ratios

a - Hose
b - Bushing
2. Remove bushing, spring and strainer tube from

transmission case. Allow transmission to drain
completely.
3. Clean strainer tube in suitable solvent.

72840
Transmission With 1:1 Ratio

a - Hose
b - Elbow Fitting
c
71307
a - Bushing
b - Spring
c - Plastic Strainer Tube
index
90-823224--2 796
4. Check oil for the following foreign matter:
Filling Transmission
Metal Particles - A few small particles are

normal. Larger metal chips are an early sign
of transmission failure which may mean
transmission should be disassembled and inspected for internal damage.

1. Remove dipstick. Fill transmission with fluid,
through dipstick hole, to bring up to full mark.
Rubber Particles - Indication of cooler hose

wear. Hoses should be inspected for cracks
or fraying. Replace damaged hoses.
! CAUTION
Avoid severe transmission damage or possible
failure of transmission. Strainer must be properly
installed as follows.
a
b
5. Install plastic strainer tube with the notch DOWN

and OUT toward the side of the case.
c
72526
a
71306
a - Plastic Strainer Tube

b - Notch
6. Install spring.
7. Coat bushing threads with Quicksilver Perfect
Seal. Install and torque bushing to 25 lb. ft. (34
Nm).
8. Coat elbow fitting threads with Quicksilver Perfect Seal and install in bushing. Tighten securely.
9. Reconnect hose and tighten securely.
a - Dipstick
b - Full Mark
c - Dipstick Tube
IMPORTANT: To accurately check fluid level, run

engine at 1500 RPM for 2 minutes immediately
prior to checking level.
NOTE: Be sure to push dipstick all the way down into
dipstick tube when checking fluid level.
3. Stop engine and quickly check fluid level. Add
transmission fluid, if necessary, to bring level up
to full mark on dipstick.
4. Reinstall dipstick. Be sure to tighten T-handle
securely.
index
90-823224-2 796
Removal and Installation

NOTICE
The following procedure describes removal
of transmission without removing engine. If
engine must be removed, refer to Section 2
(see Table of Contents).
1. Drain transmission fluid.
2. Disconnect fluid cooler hoses.
3. Disconnect shift cable.
4. Disconnect wires from neutral start safety switch.
5. Disconnect TAN/BLUE wire from fluid temperature switch.
20. Connect wires to neutral start safety switch.

21. Connect tan/blue wire to fluid temperature
switch.
22. Connect fluid cooler hoses to transmission.
23. Connect and adjust shift cable(s) as outlined in
Section 2C - MIE Models - Velvet Drive Transmissions.
is repositioned or changed in any manner, or if remote control and shift cable do not position shift
lever exactly as shown.
FNR
6. Disconnect propeller shaft coupling.
7. Remove four rear mount (to engine bed) bolts.

d
8. Support rear part of engine with either a hoist or

by using wooden blocks under flywheel housing.
9. Remove two center transmission-to-flywheel
housing attaching bolts and install two long
studs.
IMPORTANT: These two long studs will help support weight of transmission during removal and
installation.
10. Remove remaining transmission attaching bolts.
11. Pull transmission straight back and off engine.
12. Before installing transmission, check transmission pump indexing for correct rotation. Refer to
Pump Indexing.
13. Check transmission output shaft rolling torque.
See Specifications.
14. Apply Quicksilver Engine Coupler Spline Grease
to transmission input shaft splines and engine
drive plate splines.
15. If removed, install rear engine mounting brackets
(to transmission) as outlined in Section 3 (see
Table of Contents). Torque to 45 lb. ft. (61 Nm).
16. Align transmission splines with drive plate
splines.
F
R
c
72601

b - Shift Lever Must Be Over This Letter when Propelling Boat
FORWARD
c - Shift Lever Must Be Over This Letter when Propelling Boat
in REVERSE
d - Poppet Ball Must Be Centered in Detent Hole for Each
F-N-R Position (Forward Gear Shown)
24. Refer to Section 2C - MIE Models - Velvet Drive

Transmissions and check engine final alignment
as outlined.
25. After engine has been properly aligned, connect
propeller shaft coupler to transmission output
flange. Attach couplers together with bolts, lockwashers and nuts. Torque to 50 lb. ft. (68 Nm).
26. Refill transmission with specified fluid. Refer to
Filling Transmission.
27. Check for leaks and check fluid level after first engine start-up.
17. Slide transmission into place and secure with

bolts.
18. Remove two long studs (installed in Step 9) and
install remaining two bolts. Torque all bolts to 50
lb. ft. (68 Nm).
19. Relieve hoist tension and fasten rear engine
mounts to engine bed. Tighten bolts securely.
index
90-823224--2 796
Pump Indexing
5. Reinstall four pump-to-adaptor attaching bolts

and torque to 204-264 lb. in. (23-29 Nm).
Pump must be correctly indexed to correspond with

engine rotation. If pump is not indexed correctly,
pump will not create fluid pressure allowing the transmission to shift. Pump housing has two arrows, each
pointing in a different direction. Pump must be positioned so that the arrow (pointing in the direction that
input shaft and pump will be turned by engine) is at
the top of transmission.
a
b
! CAUTION
d
Position pump housing with cast arrow at top

pointing in the same direction as engine rotation.
c
IMPORTANT: Some transmissions have letters

RH and LH on pump housing. Letters DO
NOT indicate shaft rotation.
If pump must be indexed, proceed as follows:

1. Remove four pump attaching bolts.
2. Loosen the pump housing. A soft tip mallet may
be used to tap the fluid passage boss. Do not
strike the bolt bosses.
IMPORTANT: Do not remove the pump from the
shaft unless a seal protector is used to prevent
the shaft splines from cutting the pump seal.
Care must be taken to ensure that seal, gasket,
seal and bolt bosses are kept in good condition
to prevent leaks in those critical areas.
72842
MIE LH (Standard) Rotation Engine

a
b
c
d
e
Top Of Transmission
Word Top and Cast Arrow
Pump Attaching Bolts
Input Shaft
Pump Assembly
3. Make sure that pump gasket is not sticking to

housing (to prevent gasket from tearing or folding) when rotating pump.
4. Rotate pump until arrow indicating the proper direction of pump rotation is near the top of transmission.
index
90-823224-2 796
Shift Lever Installation
Pressure Test
IMPORTANT: Borg-Warner Warranty is jeopardized if the shift lever poppet spring and/or ball
is permanently removed, or if the shift lever is
changed in any manner, or repositioned, or if the
linkage between the remote control and the
transmission shift lever does not have sufficient
travel in both directions.
1. Install pressure gauge.
Shift lever and related parts must be assembled as

shown.
1. Lubricate poppet ball, spring, and holes in shift lever with Quicksilver 2-4-C Marine Lubricant.
2. Install poppet spring and ball. Retain ball by placing shift lever on shaft.
3. Install flat washer, lockwasher and nut on shaft.
4. Torque nut to 96-132 lb. in. (11-15 Nm).
72845
a - Main Line Pressure Tap - Remove Temperature Switch
2. With boat in water, start engine and run until normal operating temperature is reached.
3. Refer to Specifications (see Table of Contents) for pressure readings.
a b
Transmission Repair
Mercury Marine does not stock or sell replacement

parts for the in-line transmission. Velvet Drive has a
network of distributors throughout the world to service their product. These distributors, in turn, have a
dealer network to service the transmissions. Also,
service manuals (for each transmission) can be obtained from .
72844
Typical Shift Lever

a
b
c
d
e
f
Nut
Lockwasher
Flat Washer
Shift Lever
Poppet Ball
Poppet Spring
5. After installation, move shift lever through forward, neutral and reverse positions. No more
than finger-tip effort should be required. If valve
binds, cause for binding must be found and corrected.
IMPORTANT: Refer to Special Replacement Part

Information before working on transmission.
For the location of your closest distributor or service
literature contact:
Velvet Drive Transmissions
Division Of Regal Beloit
Theodore Rice Boulevard
Industrial Park
New Bedford, MA 02745
Phone: (508) 995-2616
index
90-823224--2 796

AT A LATER DATE
index
90-823224-2 796

AT A LATER DATE
index
90-823224--2 796
DRIVES
VELVET DRIVE V-DRIVE TRANSMISSION
Index
8
B
Table of Contents
Page
Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8B-1
Transmission Ratios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8B-1
Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8B-1
Transmission Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . 8B-2
Transmission Pressure Specifications . . . . 8B-2
Transmission Output Shaft Rolling
Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8B-2
Transmission Fluid Specification . . . . . . . . . 8B-2
Important Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8B-3
Shift Control and Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8B-3
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8B-3
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8B-3
Propeller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8B-3
Transmission Shift Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8B-4
Shift Cable Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8B-4
Checking Transmission Fluid Level . . . . . . . . . 8B-4
Changing Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8B-5
Draining Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8B-5
Filling Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8B-5
Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8B-6
Pump Indexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8B-7
Shift Lever Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8B-8
Pressure Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8B-8
Transmission Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8B-8
V-Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8B-8
Index
8B-0 - VELVET DRIVE V-DRVIE TRANSMISSION
90-823224--2 796
Identification
The transmission identification plate is located on the top left side of the transmission. Refer to charts following
to determine engine and transmission combinations.
a
b c
72839
Transmission Identification Plate

a
b
c
d
Model Number
Ratio (in Forward Gear)
Serial Number
Identification Plate Model Color Code
Transmission Ratios
Identification Plate
Color Code
Ratio in Forward Gear (NOTE 1 & 2)

1.5:1
1 99:1
1.99:1
R d
Red
2.49:1
NOTE: 1. This ratio is shown on identification plate. Ratio may be rounded off in some cases.
DESCRIPTION
Lb. Ft.
Nm
Drain Plug (Bushing)
25
34
Fluid Hose to Bushing
25
34
17-22
23-29
45
61
8-11
11-15
50
68
8-11
11-14
Pump Housing to Adapter

Rear Mounts to Transmission
Shift Lever to Valve
Transmission to Flywheel Housing
Neutral Start Switch
Index
90-823224--2 796
VELVET DRIVE V-DRIVE TRANSMISSION - 8B-1
Transmission Fluid Capacities

MODEL
U.S. QTS. (LITRES)
71C V-Drive and 72C V-Drive
3 (2-3/4) (See Note)
NOTE: Use dipstick to determine fluid exact level.

Warm Fluid Level Check: The transmission should be at operating temperature [190 F(90 C)] maximum to
receive an accurate oil level reading.
Cold Fluid Level Check: To ease checking fluid level, the dipstick can be marked or scribed. First the procedure
for warm fluid level must be performed, then allow boat to sit overnight. Remove and wipe clean the dipstick.
Insert clean dipstick and mark the cold fluid level.
Transmission Pressure Specifications

g
Engine
RPM
Neutral Gear
PSI (kPa)
MIn.
Max.
250
600
Forward Gear
PSI (kPa)
Min.
Reverse Gear
PSI (kPa)
Max.
Min.
70 (483)
115 (793)
135 (931)
Max.
70 (483)
115 (793)
140 (965)
120 (827)
140 (965)
2000
125 (862)
160 (1103)
125 (862)
160 (1103)
3000
135 (931)
180 (1241)
Transmission Output Shaft Rolling Torque

NOTE: Transmission is not installed on engine, no fluid in transmission. Use torque wrench and socket on coupling nut.
MODEL
Lb. In.
Nm
71C V-Drive (All Ratios)
50 Max.
68 Max.
72C V-Drive (All Ratios)
50
70

71C V-Drive and 72C V-Drive
Mobil 424
NOTE: Transmissions (except reduction drive transmissions) supplied with Mobil 424 can be changed to ATF
Dexron III, but transmission must be flushed and refilled at least twice (this includes lines and cooler .
Index
90-823224--2 796
Shift Control and Cables
! CAUTION
Shift control and shift cable must position transmission shift lever exactly as stated in this manual, or transmission, as a result of improper shift
lever positioning, will not be covered by Velvet
Drive Warranty.
IMPORTANT: Velvet Drive Warranty is jeopardized if the shift lever poppet ball or spring is
permanently removed, or if shift lever is repositioned or changed in any manner.
Remote control used must position transmission shift
lever over the letter F embossed on transmission
case when remote control is placed in forward gear
position. Transmission failure will occur if transmission shift lever is positioned over the letter R and the
wrong rotation propeller is used to propel boat forward.
Remote control also must provide a total shift cable
travel (at transmission end) of at least 2-3/4 in. (70
mm). This is necessary to position transmission shift
lever fully in the forward and reverse gear positions.
Insufficient shift cable travel will cause transmission
to slip and eventually fail.
Engine
Engine rotation is indicated on engine specifications
and serial number decal on flame arrestor cover. Engine rotation is described when observed from the
rear of the engine (transmission end) looking forward
(water pump end).
Installed angle of MIE inboard transmission and engine should not exceed a maximum of 18 of the water line.
Transmission
Transmission gear ratio (in forward gear) is marked
on transmission identification plate, which is located
on the port (left) side of transmission. Transmission
output shaft rotation and propeller rotation required
is indicated on a decal on transmission case.
Transmission rotation is described when viewed
from the rear of transmission with transmission in
forward gear selector position.
On MIE engines which are equipped with V-drive

transmissions, transmission output shaft rotation is
the same as engine rotation with transmission in forward gear. Because of reversed engine mounting position, however, a RH propeller is required, if engine
is LH (CCW) rotation; or a LH rotation propeller is required, if engine is RH (CW) rotation.
1. DO NOT start or crank engine without fluid in
transmission.
2. Use only recommended fluid in transmission.
3. Except in an emergency, never shift transmission
at engine speeds above 1000 RPM.
4. Free wheeling of one propeller (in a twin engine
boat), at trolling speeds, will not cause damage
to the transmission; however, boat operation
above trolling speed should be avoided. Be sure
proper fluid level exists before free wheeling propeller.
5. DO NOT paint shift lever poppet ball and spring.
An accumulation of paint here will prevent proper
action of the detent.
6. Always replace oil cooler and hoses after a transmission failure or prior to installing a new or rebuilt transmission. Metallic particles from a failure
tend to collect in the cooler and hoses and will
gradually flow back into the fluid system and
damage transmission.
7. Always use specified oil cooler, hoses and fittings. Hoses must be at least 13/32 in. (10.5 mm)
I.D. Oil cooler, hoses and fittings must be sufficient size to maintain transmission fluid (in sump)
at 140-190F (60-88C).
Propeller
Propeller rotation is described when observed from
the rear of the boat (stern) looking forward (bow end).
The term left-hand (LH) refers to rotation in the
counterclockwise (CCW) direction. The term
right-hand (RH) refers to rotation in the clockwise
(CW) direction. A LH propeller will move the boat
forward when rotated counterclockwise. A RH propeller will move the boat forward when rotated clockwise. Propeller rotation is not necessarily the same
as engine rotation.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Transmission Shift Lever

The lever has three holes as illustrated following.
Check transmission fluid before starting engine each

day, as follows:
1. Remove dipstick. Check fluid level as indicated
on dipstick. Fluid level may be somewhat over full
mark, as some of the fluid from transmission fluid
cooler and hoses may have drained back into
transmission. If low, add specified transmission
fluid to bring level up to full mark on dipstick.
c
71304
Shift Cable Adjustment

Refer to Section 2E - MIE Models - Velvet Drive
Transmissions.
Fluid Level
72526
a - Dipstick
b - Full Mark
c - Dipstick Tube
IMPORTANT: To accurately check fluid level, engine must be run at 1500 RPM for 2 minutes immediately prior to checking level.
transmission fluid, if necessary, to bring level up
to full mark on dipstick.
4. Reinstall dipstick.
hoses for leaks.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Changing Transmission
Fluid

1. Clean area around cooler hose shown and proceed as follows:

a. Disconnect hose from elbow fitting.
b. Remove elbow fitting from bushing.
c. Drain oil from transmission, cooler, and cooler lines into a suitable container.
IMPORTANT: Use only specified automatic transmission fluid (see Specifications).

1. Remove dipstick. Fill transmission with fluid,
through dipstick hole, to bring up to full mark.
c
a
b
72526
c
Typical MIE Transmission
71305
a - Hose
b - Elbow Fitting
c - Bushing
2. Check oil for the following foreign matter:
a - Dipstick
b - Full Mark
c - Dipstick Tube
IMPORTANT: To accurately check fluid level, run

engine at 1500 RPM for 2 minutes immediately
prior to checking level.
Metal Particles - A few small particles are

normal. Larger metal chips are an early sign
of transmission failure which may mean
transmission should be disassembled and inspected for internal damage.
NOTE: Be sure to push dipstick all the way down into

dipstick tube when checking fluid level.
Rubber Particles - Indication of cooler hose

wear. Hoses should be inspected for cracks
or fraying. Replace damaged hoses.

automatic transmission fluid, if necessary, to
bring level up to full mark on dipstick.
NOTE: Coat threads of bushing with Quicksilver Perfect Seal and install in transmission case if bushing
came loose with elbow fitting. Torque bushing to 25
lb. ft. (34 Nm).
4. Reinstall dipstick. Be sure to tighten T-handle

securely.

3. Coat elbow fitting threads with Quicksilver Perfect Seal and install in bushing. Tighten securely.
4. Reconnect hose and tighten securely.
Index
90-823224--2 796

NOTICE
The following procedure describes removal
of transmission without removing engine. If
engine must be removed, refer to Section 2
(see Table of Contents).
1. Drain transmission fluid,

2. Disconnect fluid cooler hoses.
3. Disconnect shift cable.
4. Disconnect wires from neutral start safety switch.
20. Connect wires to neutral start safety switch.

21. Connect tan/blue wire to fluid temperature
switch.
22. Connect fluid cooler hoses to transmission.
23. Connect and adjust shift cable(s) as outlined in
Section 2E - MIE Models - Velvet Drive Transmissions.
is repositioned or changed in any manner, or if remote control and shift cables do not position
shift lever exactly as shown.
5. Disconnect wire from fluid temperature switch.
FNR
6. Disconnect propeller shaft coupling.
7. Remove four rear mount (to engine bed) bolts.

d
8. Support rear part of engine with either a hoist or

by using wooden blocks under flywheel housing.
9. Remove two center transmission-to-flywheel
housing attaching bolts and install two long
studs.
IMPORTANT: These two long studs will help support weight of transmission during removal and
installation.
10. Remove remaining transmission attaching bolts.
11. Pull transmission straight back and off engine.
12. Before installing transmission, check transmission pump indexing for correct rotation. Refer to
Pump Indexing.
13. Check transmission output shaft rolling torque.
See Specifications.
to transmission input shaft splines and engine
drive plate splines.
15. If removed, install rear engine mounting brackets
(to transmission) as outlined in Section 3 (see
Table of Contents). Torque to 45 lb. ft. (61 Nm).
16. Align transmission splines with drive plate
splines.
F
R
c
72601

b - Shift Lever Must Be Over This Letter When Propelling Boat
FORWARD
c - Shift Lever Must Be Over This Letter When Propelling Boat
REVERSE
d - Poppet Ball Must Be Centered In Detent Hole For Each
F-N-R position (Forward Gear Shown)
24. Refer to Section 2E - MIE Models - Velvet Drive

Transmissions and check engine final alignment
as outlined.
25. After engine has been properly aligned, connect
propeller shaft coupler to transmission output
flange. Attach couplers together with bolts, lockwashers and nuts. Torque to 50 lb. ft. (68 Nm).
27. Check for leaks and check fluid level after first engine start-up.
17. Slide transmission into place and secure with

bolts.
18. Remove two long studs (installed in Step 9) and
install remaining two bolts. Torque all bolts to 50
lb. ft. (68 Nm).
19. Relieve hoist tension and fasten rear engine
mounts to engine bed. Tighten bolts securely.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Pump Indexing
5. Reinstall four pump-to-adaptor attaching bolts

and torque to 204-264 lb. in. (23-29 Nm).
Pump must be correctly indexed to correspond with

engine rotation. If pump is not indexed correctly,
pump will not create oil pressure and transmission
will not shift. Pump housing has two arrows, each
pointing in a different direction. Pump must be positioned so that the arrow (pointing in the direction that
input shaft and pump will be turned by engine) is at
the top of transmission.
a
b
c
IMPORTANT: Some transmissions have letters
RH and LH on pump housing. Letters DO
NOT indicate engine rotation.
If pump must be reindexed, proceed as follows:
1. Remove four pump attaching bolts.
2. Loosen the pump housing. A soft tip mallet may

be used to tap the fluid passage boss. Do not
strike the bolt bosses.
IMPORTANT: Do not remove the pump from the
shaft unless a seal protector is used to prevent
the shaft splines from cutting the pump seal.
Care must be taken to ensure that seal, gasket,
seal and bolt bosses are kept in good condition
to prevent leaks in those critical areas.
3. Make sure that pump gasket is not sticking to
housing (to prevent gasket from tearing or folding) when rotating pump.
72842
MIE LH (Standard) Rotation Engine

a
b
c
d
e
Top of Transmission
Top (Or Top RH)
Input Shaft
Fluid Passage Boss
4. Rotate pump until arrow indicating the proper direction of pump rotation is near the top of transmission.
b
e
c
d
c
72843
MIE RH (Opposite) Rotation Engine

a
b
c
d
e
Top of Transmission
Top (Or Top RH)
Input Shaft
Fluid Passage Boss
Index
90-823224--2 796
Shift Lever Installation
Pressure Test
1. Install pressure gauge.
IMPORTANT: Velvet Drive Warranty is jeopardized if the shift lever poppet spring and/or ball
is permanently removed, or if the shift lever is
changed in any manner, or repositioned, or if the
linkage between the remote control and the
transmission shift lever does not have sufficient
travel in both directions.
Shift lever and related parts must be assembled as
shown.
1. Lubricate poppet ball, spring, and holes in shift lever with Quicksilver 2-4-C Marine Lubricant.
2. Install poppet spring and ball. Retain ball by placing shift lever on shaft.
72845
3. Install flat washer, lockwasher and nut on shaft.
a - Main Line Pressure Tap - Models with Audio Warning System,
4. Torque nut to 96-132 lb. in. (11-15 Nm).
Remove Temperature Switch; Models without Switch, Remove

3/8 In. Pipe Plug
2. With boat in water, start engine and run until normal operating temperature is reached.
3. Refer to Specifications (see Table of Contents) for pressure readings.
Transmission Repair
V-Drive
Mercury Marine does not stock or sell replacement

parts for the V-drive transmission. Velvet Drive has a
network of distributors throughout the world to service their product. These distributors, in turn, have a
dealer network to service the transmissions. Also,
service manuals (for each transmission) can be obtained from Velvet Drive.
72844
Typical Shift Lever

a
b
c
d
e
f
Nut
Lockwasher
Flat Washer
Shift Lever
Poppet Ball
Poppet Spring
5. After installation, move shift lever through forward, neutral and reverse positions. No more
than finger-tip effort should be required. If valve
binds, cause for binding must be found and corrected.
IMPORTANT: Refer to Special Replacement Part

Information before working on transmission.
For the location of your closest distributor or service
literature, contact:
Velvet Drive Transmission
Division of Regal Beloit
Theodore Rice Boulevard
Industrial Park
New Bedford, MA 02745
Phone: (508) 995-2616
Index
90-823224--2 796

AT A LATER DATE
Index
90-823224--2 796

AT A LATER DATE
Index
90-823224--2 796
DRIVES
25280
HURTH DOWN ANGLE

TRANSMISSION
Index
8
C
Table of Contents
Page
Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8C-1
Tools/Lubricants/Sealants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8C-1
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8C-2
Transmission Fluid Specification . . . . . . . . . 8C-2
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8C-2
Operating Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8C-2
Transmission Ratios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8C-2
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8C-3
Shift Cable Installation and Adjustment . . . . . . 8C-3
Checking Transmission Fluid Level . . . . . . . . . 8C-8
Draining Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8C-9
Filling Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8C-9
Transmission Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8C-10
Transmission Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8C-11
Transmission Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8C-12
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8C-12
Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8C-26
Final Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8C-41
Functional Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8C-46
Index
8C
- HURTH
DOWN
ANGLE
TRANSMISSION
8C-0
- HURTH
DOWN
ANGLE
TRANSMISSION
90-823224--2 796
Identification
The transmission identification plate is located on the

top rear of the transmission.
Part Number
Tapered Roller Bearing

Inner Race Puller
91-813950

Outer Bearing Puller
91-813951
Pressure Plate
Removal Tool Reversing Clutch
Inner Race Puller Plate
72957
a - Transmission Identification Plate

(Stating: Gear Ratio, Serial Number and Model)
Getr.-Nr.
iB = 1,58
71038
91-813952
91-813953
Mandrel - Input Shaft

Seal
91-813955
Mandrel - Output Shaft

Seal
91-813956
Preload Tool- Input

Shaft
91-813957
Preload Tool Intermediate Shaft
91-816958
92-823089-1
Quicksilver Engine
Coupler Grease
91-823089-1
Thermometer [(3/8 In,

Thread 0-270F (-18 to
-132C)]
Loctite 515 (Split-Line)
Sealer
HSW 630A 1,6

iA = 1,56
Description
Obtain
Ob i Locally
L
ll
Pressure Gauge
(M10x1 Thread)
Typical Identification Plate
Fastener Location
Lb. Ft.
Nm
Transmission Halves Bolts And

Nuts
36
49
Control Block To Housing Bolts
18
25
Output Flange To Output Shaft
63
85
Mounts
50
63
Transmission To Flywheel
Housing
50
68
Index
90-823224--2 796
HURTH DOWN ANGLE TRANSMISSION - 8C-1
Operating Specifications
Specifications
Description

Description
ATF Dexron II-D Or
Dexron lll
Specification
312-377 PSI
(2151-2599 kPa)
Shifting Pressure
Part Number
Operating Temperature
130-176F (54-80C)
Obtain Locally
Maximum Temperature
220F (105C)
Transmission Ratios
Capacity
Model
U.S. Qt (L)
Hurth - 630A
8 Down Angle
3-1/4 (3.0)1
Hurth - 800A2
8 Down Angle
5-3/4 (5.5)1
Always use dipstick to determine exact quantity of

fluid required.
Transmission
Model
Nominal
Transmission
Ratio
Transmission
Ratio Shifting
Position A
(Forward Gear)
Transmission
Ratio Shifting
Position B
(Reverse Gear)
630A
1.5
800AM
2.0
2.5
2.5
2.8
1.56 2.04
2.52
2.5
2.85
1.58 2.10
2.53
2.46
2.80
Index
8C-2 - HURTH DOWN ANGLE TRANSMISSION
90-823224--2 796
General
The Hurth transmission is a full power reversing
transmission, allowing a standard (LH rotation) engine to be used for both rotations. Propeller rotation
is determined by shift cable attachment at the remote
control.
! CAUTION
Avoid severe transmission damage. ALL Hurth
transmissions require standard left-hand rotation engines. NEVER connect a Hurth transmission to a right-hand rotation engine.
IMPORTANT: Transmission propeller rotation is
determined by the shift cable installation in the
remote control.
RIGHT-HAND PROPELLER ROTATION - Control cable will have to be installed in remote control so that cable end will move in direction (A)
when shift handle is placed in the forward position.
LEFT-HAND PROPELLER ROTATION - Control
cable will have to be installed in remote control so
that cable end will move in direction (B) when shift
handle is placed in the forward position.
A
B
23242
Shift Cable Installation and

Adjustment
parts. DO NOT fasten any items to shift cables.
IMPORTANT: These Hurth transmissions are full
reversing transmissions. Direction of output/
propeller rotation is determined by hookup of
shift cable at remote control.
NOTE: Shift cable must be hooked up to remote control before starting installation and adjustment procedures.
For Standard Left-Hand Rotation shift cable
end guide moving in direction (B), when remote control handle is placed in forward position.
For Right-Hand Rotation shift cable hookup at remote control must result in shift cable end guide moving in direction (A), when remote control handle is
placed in forward position.
A
B
23242
1. Be certain anchor stud is installed in the hole

marked for transmission (Model 630A, or 800AM,
respectively).
72709
Shifting
Lever in
Position
Propeller
Rotation
Propeller
Opposite to
Engine Rotation
Right Hand
(RH)
Same as Engine
Rotation
Left-Hand
(LH)
Index
90-823224--2 796
! WARNING
Avoid serious personal injury or property damage caused by improper shifting. Anchor stud for
shift cable must be installed in the correct hole.
b
b

approximately 10 degrees aft of vertical when in
the neutral detent position and that the distance
(c) between studs in the following is set at 7-1/8
in. (318 mm). If necessary, loosen clamping bolt
and position lever so that dimension (c) is as
shown when in the neutral detent position and
retighten bolt.
a
a
74090
71020
Shift Cable Bracket - Anchor Stud Position

Shown for 630A Transmission
c

b - Anchor Stud Location
c - Bracket Mounting Bolts
72958
a
74090
c
a
71181

Shown for 800AM or 800 A2 Transmission
b - Anchor Stud Location
c - Bracket Mounting Bolts
d
50228
a - Shift Lever
b - Lever In Neutral Detent, Must Be Approximately 10 Degrees Of Vertical
c - Dimension Between Studs - 7-1/8 In. (318 mm)
d - Clamping Bolt
Index
90-823224--2 796
2. Place remote control shift lever, and transmission

shift lever, in neutral position.
IMPORTANT: Transmission is fully in gear when

shift lever comes to a stop, in either direction.

gear, as follows:

(a) on tube.
c. Pull out on control cable end with enough effort to remove play, and mark position (b) on
tube.
d. Measure distance between marks (a) and (b),
and mark position (c), halfway between
marks (a) and (b).

b. Carefully slide shift cable off of anchor points.
8. Place remote control shift lever in reverse gear
position and again check to ensure transmission
is fully in gear as follows:
adjustment. If transmission shift lever will not position properly in both gears, move transmission
shift lever stud, from top hole in shift lever to bottom hole, and recheck for proper positioning. If
proper positioning is still not obtained, remote
control does not provide sufficient shift cable travel and must be replaced.
b
72603

align holes in barrel and in cable end guide with
this time.
50228

b - Lever In Neutral Position, Must Be Approximately 10 Degrees Aft Of Vertical
Index
90-823224--2 796
10. Install nut and washer to cable end guide stud.

Tighten until snug, then back off one full turn.
SINGLE CABLE - FORWARD ENTRY
11. Install nut and washer to cable barrel stud.

but do not over- tighten.
c
a
d
c
b
72955
50229
a - Cable End Guide

b - Locknut and Washer (Tighten Until Bottoms Out, Then
Back Off 1/2 Turn)
c - Spacer
d - Bushings
e - Cable Barrel
12. Once shift cable adjustment is correct, secure

shift cable(s) with hardware as shown, referring
to appropriate configuration following:
NOTE: To change cable approach direction on single

or dual station installations, only the spacer/bushings
have to be switched to the opposite stud (the studs
are identical).
c
b
a
b
71210
1 - Cable Barrel Stud

2 - Cable End Guide Stud
a - Cable End Guide
Back Off 1/2 Turn)
c - Spacer (Fits Over Bushings)
d - Bushing
e - Cable Barrel
f - Spacers (Fits Over Stud)
Index
90-823224--2 796
SINGLE CABLE - REAR ENTRY
DUAL CABLE - FORWARD ENTRY
72957
72956
f
a
b
b
1
1
d
2
2
b
50229

a - Cable End Guide
Back Off 1/2 Turn)
d - Bushing
e - Cable Barrel
71211

a - Cable End Guide
Back Off 1/2 Turn)
d - Bushing
e - Cable Barrel
Index
90-823224--2 796
DUAL CABLE - REAR ENTRY
Fluid Level
day, as follows:

transmission. If low, add transmission fluid to
72960
c
b
a
27661
1
d
2
b
50073

a - Cable End Guide
Back Off 1/2 Turn)
d - Bushing
e - Cable Barrel
IMPORTANT: To accurately check fluid level, engine must be run at 1500 RPM for two minutes immediately prior to checking level.
2. Start engine and run at 1500 RPM for two minutes to fill all hydraulic circuits.
bring level up to full mark on dipstick. (Refer to
Filling Transmission, following.)
Index

hoses for leaks.
90-823224--2 796
1. Clean the exterior of transmission before disassembly.
NOTE: Later model Hurth transmissions have a allen

head socket screw on oil filter cover.
IMPORTANT: Use only Automatic Transmission

Fluid (ATF) as recommended in Specifications.
1. Fill transmission to proper level, through oil filter
cavity. (Refer to Capacity.)
2. Install filter as follows:
2. Remove oil filter from housing by turning (counterclockwise) and pulling at the same time.
a. Coat O-ring on filter cover with transmission

fluid.
a
b
27666
27662
a - Set Screw (Later Models)
a - Filter Cover
b - O-Ring
3. Push hose of suction pump through suction pipe

and down to the bottom of the housing. Pump
fluid from housing.
71043
Index
90-823224--2 796
Transmission Removal
! CAUTION
Transmission fluid filter and cover must be properly seated to avoid fluid foaming and/or loss of
fluid, thus resulting in decreased efficiency and/
or damage to transmission.
1. Disconnect wires from neutral safety switch and

audio warning temperature switch.
b. Push down until cover is fully seated (top of

cover flush with housing), then turn T-handle
or tighten allen head screw clockwise until
tight.
a
b
50686
27666
a - Neutral Safety Switch

b - Audio Warning Temperature Switch
2. Disconnect seawater hoses from transmission

fluid cooler.
a
3. Start engine and run for two minutes to fill system

with fluid.
4. Stop engine and check fluid level. Fluid should be
between min. and max. lines on dipstick.
a
72721
a - Seawater Hoses
b - Transmission Fluid Cooler
27661
Index
90-823224--2 796
3. Remove bolts and locknuts and remove transmission.

a
2. Install transmission on flywheel housing and secure with hardware shown. Torque fasteners to
50 lb. ft. (68 Nm).
a
b
b
72720
a - Bolts (2), One On Each Side

b - Locknuts (4), Two On Each Side
72720

Transmission Installation
1. Coat splines on input shaft with Quicksilver Engine Coupler Spline Grease.
3. Connect seawater hoses to transmission fluid

cooler and tighten hose clamps securely.
a
c
71044
a - Input Shaft
a
c
72721
a - Seawater Hoses
b - Transmission Fluid Cooler
c - Clamps
Index
90-823224--2 796
4. Connect wires to neutral safety switch and to audio warning temperature switch. Coat connections on neutral safety switch with Quicksilver
Liquid Neoprene.
TRANSMISSION FLUID COOLER

1. Disconnect transmission fluid hoses from cooler
and remove clamps that secure cooler to housing.
a
b
50686
72721

Transmission Repair
a - Transmission Fluid Hoses

b - Clamps
OIL FILTER AND DIPSTICK
Disassembly
IMPORTANT: Ensure work area is clean before
disassembly is started. Be sure to use lint free
cloths when cleaning and/or handling parts.
1. Remove oil filter from housing by turning T-handle or allen head screw (counterclockwise) and
pulling at the same time.
27666
Index
90-823224--2 796
2. Remove cover and filter element from transmission.
5. Remove dipstick by turning (counterclockwise)

and pulling at the same time.
27662
3. Remove filter element from cover and inspect

O-rings for wear. Replace if necessary.
27661
6. Inspect seal for wear and replace if necessary.

a
50975
a - O-Rings
4. Push hose of suction pump through suction pipe

and down to the bottom of the housing. Pump
fluid from housing.
27659
a - Seal
71043
Index
90-823224--2 796
BREATHER VALVE
OUTPUT FLANGE
1. Remove breather valve. Clean with suitable

cleaner, allow to dry and coat with oil.
1. Remove bolt, washer and O-ring.
71049
71048
a - Breather Valve
MOUNTS
1. Remove mounts from transmission housing. Inspect mounts for damage and replace if necessary.
c
a
71050
a - Bolt
b - Washer
c - O-Ring
72711
a - Transmission Mount
b - Retaining Screws (4 Total On Each Mount - One Hidden In
This View)
Index
90-823224--2 796
2. Reinstall bolt and remove flange using appropriate puller.
CONTROL BLOCK
1. Remove hex head bolts.
a
27661
a - Hex Head Bolts (6)
71051
2. Remove control block and gasket from housing.
b
27666
71052
a - Bolt
b - Flange
c - Puller
Index
90-823224--2 796
! CAUTION
Be careful not to allow dirt to enter control block
from front side.
3. Cover openings in control block with a protective
cloth.
2. Remove input side of housing. Be sure to locate

and save locator pins.
a
71053
27665
a - Locator Pins
a - Openings
3. Remove input shaft assembly.
HOUSING
1. Remove hex head bolts from input side of housing.
71044
a - Bolts (12)
71054
Index
90-823224--2 796
4. Remove intermediate shaft assembly.
6. Remove output shaft assembly.
71055
5. Remove baffle plate as follows:
71058
a. Bend tabs up away from screws.

b. Remove screws, then remove baffle plate.
BEARING, GEAR AND SEAL INSPECTION
1. Inspect all tapered roller bearings, the piston
rings on the input shaft and all gears for wear. If
damage has been found on the gearing of the intermediate or output shaft, it is ALWAYS necessary to replace the complete shaft.
When gears on the input shaft have to be replaced,

the tapered roller bearings and needle bearings
MUST BE replaced as well.
71056
2. Turn gears of input shaft to check correct operation of the reversing clutch. If it is hard to turn the
gears, the clutch is probably damaged.
c
a
b
a
b
71057
a - Tab
b - Screws
c - Baffle Plate
Index
90-823224--2 796
SEALS
b. Remove screws and hold-down plate.
1. Remove suction pipe seal as follows:
c. Remove suction pipe by pulling downward

out of seal.
71060
a - Screws
b - Hold Down Plate
d. Remove seal from top side.

27666
a - Seal
a
27660
71059
a - Tabs
a - Seal
Index
90-823224--2 796
2. Remove input shaft seal using appropriate mandrel.
TAPERED ROLLER BEARING CUPS

IMPORTANT: Do not remove tapered roller bearing cups unless replacing tapered roller bearings. Bearing and cup must be replaced as a set.
IMPORTANT: Do not mix up shims under cups on
the input housing side. Shims are required for adjusting the bearing preload.
1. Pull tapered roller bearing cups from housing using special puller as follows:
a. Position appropriate puller guide (large diameter or small diameter) over cup as shown.
27670
a - Seal
3. Remove output shaft seals using appropriate

mandrel.
a
27681
71061
a - Seal
72712
a - Small Diameter Puller Guide

b - Large Diameter Puller Guide
Index
90-823224--2 796
b. Pull bearing cup from housing using tool as

shown.
TAPERED ROLLER BEARINGS
! CAUTION
Gears should never be removed from intermediate shaft or output shaft, as this will affect proper
gear alignment.
1. Remove tapered roller bearings from intermediate shaft and output shaft by using a universal
puller plate and pressing bearings off.
27681
c. Input Housing Side: Remove and retain

shims. DO NOT MIX UP.
71045
27682
71046
Index
90-823224--2 796
REVERSING CLUTCH, GEARS AND TAPERED

ROLLER BEARINGS
b. Tighten jaws onto bearing by turning on

knurled part of tool. Tighten assembly.
1. Remove tapered roller bearing from splined end

of input shaft using special tool as follows:
a. Place tool over tapered roller bearing. Ensure
jaws of tool will be pulling on bottom edge of
rollers and NOT on the cage.
b
27671
c. Pull tapered roller bearing from shaft using

tool as shown.
b
27671
a - Jaws
b - Bottom Edge Of Rollers
27672
a - Hold Tool Stationary

b - Turn Top Nut
Index
90-823224--2 796
2. Remove butting ring from splined end of input

shaft by installing special tool as shown and lightly tapping upward on tool.
4. Remove needle bearings.
27673
a - Special Tool
b - Butting Ring
27680
3. Remove butting ring and gear assembly.
5. Remove piston rings from shaft.
a
b
27675
a - Butting Ring
b - Gear Assembly
27679
Index
90-823224--2 796
6. Remove tapered roller bearing, butting ring and

gear from piston end of shaft using special tool as
shown. Press all components off at the same
time. Then remove needle bearings.
1. Position snap ring compression tool on clutch assembly so that compression screws are centered
over slots in clutch housing.
2. Remove end disc and snap ring as follows:
a. Tighten all compression screws until a slight
resistance is felt.
b. Tighten compression screws evenly (approximately 1/2 turn at a time).
c. Tap up lightly on bottom edge of compression
tool until snap ring pops up and out of groove
in clutch housing.
b
27673
CLUTCH DISCS
NOTE: Discs on both sides of clutch are removed in

the same manner.
IMPORTANT: Reference marks are placed on the

clutch housing and end disc to aid in locating the
snap ring opening.
27674
a - Snap Ring Compression Tool

b - Compression Screws (6)
c - Slots
27675
a - Reference Marks
Index
90-823224--2 796
d. If necessary, remove end disc and snap ring

from tool.
b
a
27675
NOTE: For ease of reassembly, end disc and snap

ring should not be removed from tool unless their
condition is questionable.
27676
a - End Disc
b - Snap Ring
27676
a - End Disc (Snap Ring Compressed)
Index
90-823224--2 796
IMPORTANT: Thrust discs have a wave pattern.

These discs must be reinstalled in a specific pattern when reassembled. Make note of notches in
thrust disc tabs, and how they are arranged.
3. Remove discs.
50248
27680
4. Inspect thrust discs and inner discs for wear. Replace if there is any questionable wear.
5. Remove and inspect disc on opposite side of

clutch in same manner.
27679
630A Clutch Arrangement Shown (800AM Similar)

a - Thrust Discs (5 Per Side) See Note
b - Inner Discs (4 Per Side) See Note
c - Notches
NOTE: 800AM transmissions have additional thrust

discs (6 total per side) and inner discs (5 total per
side).
Index
90-823224--2 796
2. Install discs in clutch housing.
Reassembly
CLUTCH DISCS
These discs must be reinstalled in a specific
manner as explained following.
27680
50248
1. Arrange thrust discs and inner discs as shown.

Ensure notches on thrust disc tabs are aligned as
shown.
3. Align snap ring opening with reference marks on

end disc and clutch housing.
27679
630A Clutch Arrangement Shown (800AM Similar)

c - Notches
NOTE: 800AM transmissions have additional thrust

discs (6 total per side) and inner discs (5 total per
side).
a
27678
a - Snap Ring Opening

b - Reference Marks
Index
90-823224--2 796
4. If end disc and snap ring were removed from tool,

reinstall as follows:
c. Tighten compression screws evenly to completely compress snap ring into end disc.
a. Loosen all compression screws on tool.
a
27677
a - Compression Screws
b. Place snap ring into groove in end disc and

compress by hand so that compression dogs
will hold in on snap ring.
27677
a - End Disc
b - Compression Screws
d. Carefully lower end disc and special tool onto

clutch housing and align compression dogs
with slots in housing.
b
c
b
27677
a - End Disc
b - Snap Ring
c - Compression Dogs
27675
a - Slots
b - Compression Dogs
Index
90-823224--2 796
5. Tap lightly around top of tool until end disc bottoms. Loosen compression screws and remove
tool.
6. Double check that snap ring has been properly

seated by prying up lightly on end disc.
27679
7. Reinstall discs on opposite side of clutch in same

manner.
27678
NEEDLE BEARINGS
1. Reinstall needle bearings.
27675
27680
Index
90-823224--2 796
GEAR ASSEMBLY
TAPERED ROLLER BEARING
1. Reinstall gear assembly. Twist gear assembly

from side to side to allow splines to engage with
inner discs. Ensure all inner discs are engaged
with splines by observing through slots in clutch
housing.
! CAUTION
Do not touch bearing once it has been heated. Severe burns could result. Use special protective
gloves to handle bearing.
1. Heat inner race of tapered roller bearing using a
torch lamp and press bearing onto shaft. When
bearing has cooled (DO NOT cool with water),
carefully tap bearing down to ensure proper
seating against butting ring, using a soft (copper)
punch. Tap on inner race only.
27673
2. Reinstall butting ring.
27674
a - Tapered Roller Bearing

b - Butting Ring
2. Install components on opposite side of clutch assembly in same manner.
! CAUTION
Use care in reinstalling piston rings on input
shaft. Piston rings are brittle and may snap if
spread too far open.
3. Reinstall piston rings on input shaft. Ensure ends
of rings are coupled as shown. Then position
rings so that ends are staggered so no two are
aligned.
27672
Index
90-823224--2 796
OUTPUT SHAFT
! WARNING
drive bearing down against gear using a soft
(copper) punch. Tap on inner race only.
27679
INTERMEDIATE SHAFT
! WARNING
carefully tap bearing to ensure proper seating
against gear, using a soft (copper) punch. Tap on
inner race only.
71046
2. Install tapered roller bearing on opposite end of

shaft in the same manner.
NOTE: Tap bearing on splined end of shaft until it is

seated against shoulder on shaft.
71045

Index
90-823224--2 796
PREASSEMBLY OF OUTPUT HALF OF

HOUSING
! WARNING
IMPORTANT: If tapered roller bearing cups were

removed, ensure output shaft seal IS NOT in
place, as it will be necessary to heat housing
prior to installing bearing cups.
IMPORTANT: The tapered roller bearing cup on
the input shaft (control block end) is properly positioned by bottoming out on the face of the control block assembly. It will be necessary to temporarily install control block to install this
tapered roller bearing cup.
Use care in handling housing once it has been

heated. Severe burns could result. Use special
protective gloves to handle housing.
2. Heat bearing bores of housing using a torch lamp
and install bearing cups using a suitable mandrel.
1. Temporarily install control block on outer housing. Tighten bolts securely.
27681
a - Bearing Cups
b - Torch Lamp
3. Allow housing to cool (DO NOT cool with water)

and then tap bearing cup with suitable mandrel to
ensure it is properly seated.
4. Remove control block assembly.
27682
b
a
27666
a - Input Shaft Bearing Cup

b - Control Block Face
Index
90-823224--2 796
Output Shaft Seal

1. If bearing were not replaced and no shimming
is required, push new seal onto special mandrel.
Ensure seal will be positioned with lip of seal facing inward. Drive seal uniformly into bore of housing to the point that it is countersunk .040 in. (1
mm) with reference to housing surface.
2. Reinstall suction pipe. Place one drop of Quicksilver Loctite 8831 on screw threads. Then secure suction pipe down with retainer plate. Tighten screws securely.
3. Bend tabs down over screws.
71060
71061
Shafts and Baffle Plate

Suction Pipe
1. Coat tapered roller bearings with ATF.
a - Seal
1. Reinstall suction pipe seal in bottom of oil filter

bore. Coat seal with ATF (automatic transmission
fluid).
2. Install output shaft.
71058
a
27660
a - Seal
Index
90-823224--2 796
3. Install baffle plate. Apply one drop of Quicksilver

Loctite 8831 to screws. Tighten screws securely
and bend tabs down over screws.
5. Install input shaft. Ensure all gears mesh as

shown.
c
a
b
a
b
71057
a - Tabs
b - Screws
c - Baffle Plate
4. Install intermediate shaft.

71054
71055
71062
Index
90-823224--2 796
PREASSEMBLY OF INPUT HALF OF HOUSING
! WARNING
1. Install breather valve (do not overtighten).
3. Heat each tapered roller bearing cup bore with a

torch lamp. Insert shims (less those removed)
and bearing cups into appropriate bearing bores.
When housing has cooled (DO NOT cool with water), tap bearing cups with a suitable mandrel to
ensure that cups are fully seated.
a
71048
Bearing Preload Adjustment

IMPORTANT: If new tapered roller bearings have
been installed, the preload must be readjusted. If
bearings were not replaced, proceed to the final
reassembly section.
71063
NOTE: The required preload of bearings of the individual shafts is obtained by using shims beneath the
tapered roller bearing cups in the input half of the
housing.
NOTE: Shims which have been removed during disassembly may be reused.
2. Subtract approximately .008 in. (0.2 mm) of
shims from each bearing cup bore. Remove and
set aside, but do not mix up.
27681
a - Bearing Cups
b - Torch Lamp
Index
90-823224--2 796
4. Install input half of housing onto output half. Ensure locator pins are in place. Install bolts and
lockwashers and torque to 36 lb. ft. (49 Nm).
b. Mount dial indicator on input shaft. Turn input

shaft several times to seat bearing.
71064
27685
Input Shaft Preload
c. Zero the dial indicator.
1. Measure bearing clearance as follows:

a. Install special tool as shown. Tighten
hold-down bolts securely.
b
a
27863
a - Special Tool
b - Hold Down Bolts
27685
IMPORTANT: The following step should be done

very carefully to obtain the actual bearing clearance. Avoid bumping the input shaft and turn
very slowly on the special tool knob. (Shaft will
only be moving a very small amount.)
Index
90-823224--2 796
d. Slowly turn the special tool knob clockwise to

push the shaft upward. (Perform the above
sequence several times to ensure an accurate reading.)
e. Make note of reading. The bearing clearance

measured PLUS the preload required is
equal to the amount of shim thickness to be
ADDED.
27685
Example:
27682
Bearing Clearance Measured.009 in.

+
Bearing Preload Required.004 in.
= Shims to Be Added
.013 in.
Intermediate Shaft Preload
Index
90-823224--2 796
d. Zero dial indicator.
a. Remove hex plug from housing.
71065
b. Screw special bolt with nut into intermediate

shaft and tighten snugly. Turn nut up until it
touches bolt head.
c. Mount dial indicator on bolt head. Turn output
shaft several times to ensure bearing is
seated.
27685

very carefully, to obtain the actual bearing clearance. Turn nut very slowly as shaft will only be
moving a small amount.
e. Hold bolt with one wrench and slowly turn
down nut to pull shaft upward. (Perform the
above sequence several times to ensure accurate reading.)
71066
a - Special Bolt with Nut
72869
a - Bolt - Hold Stationary

b - Nut - Turn To Move Shaft
Index
90-823224--2 796
f.
Make note of the reading. The bearing clearance measured PLUS the preload required is
ADDED.
Output Shaft Preload

1. Measure the bearing clearance as follows:
a. Install flange washer and bolt. Tighten snugly.
b. Mount dial indicator on bolt head. Turn output
seated.
71069
27686
a - Flange Washer and Bolt
Example:
c. Zero dial indicator.
Bearing Clearance Measured
.007 in.
Bearing Preload Required
.004 in.
Shims to Be Added
.011 in.
g. Remove dial indicator, special bolt and nut,

and reinstall hex plug. Tighten securely.
27685

very carefully to obtain the actual bearing clearance. Pry up gently and evenly to lift shaft. Shaft
will only move a small amount.
Index
90-823224--2 796
2. When thickness of shims to be ADDED has been

determined, the input half of housing must again
be removed. Remove bolts and lockwashers,
then lift off input half of housing.
d. Pry up on washer to lift output shaft.
71068
e. Make note of the reading. The bearing clearance measured PLUS the preload required is
ADDED.
71044
a - Bolts
3. Remove tapered roller bearing cups from housing using special puller as follows:
a. Position appropriate puller guide (large or
small diameter) over cup as shown.
27686
Example:
+
.010 in.
.004 in.
27681
a - Puller Plate
Shims to Be Added
f.
.014 in.
Remove dial indicator. Remove bolt and

flange washer.
Index
90-823224--2 796
b. Pull bearing cup from housing as shown.

torch lamp. Install bearing cups into appropriate
bore and tap into place using a suitable mandrel.
When housing has cooled (DO NOT cool with water), tap bearing cups to ensure they are fully
seated.
a
27681
4. Add the necessary amount of shims as determined previously to the appropriate bearing
bores.
27681
27682
! WARNING
71063
a - Torch Lamp
b - Bearing Cups
Index
90-823224--2 796
4. Install bolts and lockwashers and torque to 36 lb.

ft. (49 Nm).
Final Assembly
INPUT SHAFT SEAL
1. Push new seal onto special mandrel. Ensure seal
will be positioned with lip of seal facing inward.
Drive seal uniformly into bore of housing to the
point that it is countersunk .040 in. (1 mm) with
reference to housing surface.
71064
5. Double check to ensure that there is no shaft

clearance on all three shafts. Refer back to previous steps if necessary, and use dial indicator.
27670
6. Remove intermediate shaft hex plug. Apply a

drop of Quicksilver Loctite 8831 to threads and
reinstall in housing. Tighten securely.
2. Coat lips of seals on input and output shafts with

ATF.
3. Apply a thin layer of Loctite 515 Sealer to machined surfaces on housing halves. Reinstall input half of housing. Ensure locator pins are properly positioned.
a
b
71065
71053
a - Locator Pins
b - Machined Surface
Index
90-823224--2 796
CONTROL BLOCK
FLUID FILTER
1. Ensure piston rings are in place and the key is in

keyway. Align key on shaft with keyway in control
block.
1. Coat new O-rings with ATF.
2. Install new gasket between control block and

housing.
a
50975
a - O-Rings
2. Reassemble filter assembly as shown. DO NOT

tighten and compress upper O-ring.
a
27666
a - Key
b - Piston Rings
3. Carefully push control block onto input shaft.

4. Coat each hex socket head bolt with a drop of
Quicksilver Loctite 8831. Secure control block to
housing with bolts and lockwashers. Torque to 18
lb. ft. (25 Nm).
72805
a - O-Rings
27661
a - Hex Socket Head Bolts (6)
Index
90-823224--2 796
DIPSTICK
4. Install O-ring into flange and coat with ATF.
1. Coat sealing ring on dipstick with ATF.
5. Install washer and bolt. Torque to 63 lb. ft. (85

Nm).
2. Install dipstick into transmission and tighten by

pressing down and turning clockwise at the same
time.
b a
71050
27661
OUTPUT FLANGE
1. Coat output shaft splines with a thin coat of
Quicksilver Engine Coupler Spline Grease.
b
2. Coat lip of output shaft seal with ATF.
3. Install output shaft flange. Be careful not to damage output shaft seal.
71049
a - Bolt
b - Washer
c - O-Ring
a
b
71052
a - Splines
b - Output Shaft Seal
Index
90-823224--2 796

1. Install transmission fluid cooler on housing. Secure with clamps and screws as shown. Torque
to 18 lb. ft. (25 Nm).
a. Bring flat spot on filter into agreement with flat

surface inside of housing.
2. Connect transmission fluid hoses to cooler as

shown. Tighten securely.
a
a
b
27662
a - Filter Cover
b - O-Ring
72721

b - Clamps
FILLING WITH TRANSMISSION FLUID

IMPORTANT: Use only ATF (Automatic Transmission Fluid), such as Dexron II-D or lll.
1. Fill transmission to proper level, through fluid filter cavity. (Refer to Transmission Fluid Capacity.)
27666
a - Flat Spot
Index
90-823224--2 796
NOTE: Later model Hurth transmissions have a allen

head socket screw on oil filter cover.
27666
4. Check fluid level. Fluid should be between min.

and max. marks on dipstick.
27661
Index
90-823224--2 796
Functional Test
1. Connect a pressure gauge and thermometer to
fluid pump at locations shown.
2. Perform functional tests as shown in chart following. Refer to Operating Specifications for correct readings.
Tests to Be Carried Out:
1. Leakages
2. Noise emission
3. Direction of rotation, LH/RH
4. Fluid temperature
5. Shifting pressure
b
a
50686
a - Pressure Gauge (m10x1 Thread - Remove Plug)

b - Thermometer (3/8 In. Thread) - Remove Temperature
Sender
Motor Speed RPM
Shift Lever Position
Duration Minutes
Tests
800-1000
Neutral
1 2
600-800
(Idling Speed)
AB Position
Repeatedly
1 2 3
1500-2500
B Position
1 2 4
600-800
(Idling Speed)
AB Position
Repeatedly
1 2 3
Idling
Maximum Speed
A Position
1 2 5**
600 -800
From A B Position
1 2
Idling
Maximum Speed
B Position
1 2 5**
*Until fluid temperature of 167-176F (75-80C) has been reached

**At different speeds
Index
90-823224--2 796

AT A LATER DATE
Index
90-823224--2 796

AT A LATER DATE
Index
90-823224--2 796
DRIVES
72959
HURTH V-DRIVE TRANSMISSION
Index
8
D
Table of Contents
Page
Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8D-1
Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8D-1
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8D-1
Lubricants/Sealants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8D-1
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8D-1
Tools/Lubricants/Sealants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8D-2
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8D-2
Shift Cable Installation and Adjustment . . . . . . 8D-3
Checking Transmission Fluid Level . . . . . . . . . 8D-7
Draining Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8D-8
Filling Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8D-8
Transmission Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8D-9
Transmission Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8D-10
Transmission Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8D-11
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8D-11
Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8D-24
Final Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8D-39
Functional Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8D-44
Index
8D-0 - HURTH V-DRIVE TRANSMISSION
90-823224--2 796
Identification
Mounts
The transmission identification plate is located on the

top rear of the transmission.
Transmission To Flywheel
Housing
50
68
Specifications
a
Description
Specification
Shifting Pressure
312-377 PSI
(2151-2599 kPa)
Operating Temperature
130-200F (54-94C)
Lubricants/Sealants
Description
Specification
Quicksilver Engine
Coupler Spline Grease
92-816391A4
Quicksilver Liquid
Neoprene
92-27511-2
ATF Dexron ll-D or lll

Loctite Type A
Ob i Locally
Obtain
L
ll
Loctite 515
72959
Capacity
Model
U.S. Qt. (L)
Hurth 630V
5 (4.7)
Always use dipstick to determine exact quantity of

fluid required.
HSW 630V 1,5

Getr.-Nr.
iA
A = 1,56
iB
B = 1,58
71039
MADE IN WEST-GERMANY
Late Style Identification Plate
a - (Stating: Serial Number and Gear Ratio)
Fastener Location
Lb. Ft.
Nm
Transmission Housing Halves

Bolts and Nuts
36
49
Control Block To Housing
18
25
Output Flange
14
18
Index
90-823224--2 796
HURTH V-DRIVE TRANSMISSION -8D-1
Description
Part Number

Inner Race Puller
91-813950

Outer Bearing Puller
91-813951
Pressure Plate
Removal Tool Reversing Clutch
Inner Race Puller Plate
General
The Hurth transmission is a full power reversing
transmission, allowing a standard (LH rotation) engine to be used for both rotations. Propeller rotation
is determined by shift cable attachment at the remote
control.
! CAUTION
91-813952
91-813953
Avoid severe transmission damage. All Hurth

Transmissions require Standard Left-Hand rotation engines. NEVER connect a Hurth Transmission to a Right-Hand rotation engine.
Mandrel - Input Shaft

Seal
91-813955
Mandrel - Output Shaft

Seal
91-813956
Preload Tool- Input

Shaft
IMPORTANT: Transmission propeller rotation is

determined by the shift cable installation in the
remote control.
91-813957
Preload Tool Intermediate Shaft
91-816958
RIGHT-HAND PROPELLER ROTATION - Control cable will have to be installed in remote control so that cable end will move in direction A
when shift handle is placed in the forward position.
LEFT-HAND PROPELLER ROTATION - Control

cable will have to be installed in remote control so
that cable end will move in direction B when shift
handle is placed in the forward position.
92-823089-1
Quicksilver Engine
Coupler Grease
91-823089-1
Thermometer [(3/8 In,

Thread 0-270F (-18 to
-132C)]
Loctite 515 (Split-Line)
Sealer
Obtain
Locally
Ob i L
ll
Pressure Gauge
(M10x1 Thread)
Index
90-823224--2 796
Shift Cable Installation and

Adjustment
approximately 10 aft of vertical as shown when
in the neutral detent position and that the
distance between studs in the following is set at
7-1/8 in. (181 mm). If necessary, loosen clamping
bolt and position lever so that dimension (c) is as
shown when in the neutral detent position, and
retighten clamping bolt.
1. On bracket with two anchor location holes:

Be certain anchor stud is installed in the hole
marked 630.
! WARNING
Avoid serious personal injury or property damage caused by improper shifting. Anchor stud for
shift cable must be installed in the correct hole
when using bracket with two anchor location
holes.
b
a
a
c
c
71041
a
d
71020
72958

Shown for 630 Transmission
b

b - Shift Cable Anchor Stud
c - Bracket To Transmission Fasteners
50228

a - Shift Lever
b - Lever, In Neutral Detent, Must Be Approximately 10 Degrees Aft Of Vertical
c - Dimension Between Studs - 7-1/8 In. (181 mm)
d - Clamping Bolt
Index
90-823224--2 796
2. Place remote control shift lever and transmission

shift lever in neutral position.
IMPORTANT: Transmission is fully in gear when

shift lever comes to a stop, in either direction.

gear, as follows:

pressure to remove play and mark position
(a) on tube.
c. Pull out on control cable end with enough effort to remove play and mark position (b) on
tube.
d. Measure distance between marks (a) and (b),
and mark position (c), halfway between
marks (a) and (b).
b

8. Place remote control shift lever in reverse gear
position and again check to ensure transmission
is fully in gear as follows:
adjustment. If transmission shift lever will not position properly in both gears, move transmission
shift lever stud, from top hole in shift lever, to bottom hole, and recheck for proper positioning. If
proper positioning is still not obtained, remote
control does not provide sufficient shift cable travel and must be replaced.
22024

align holes in barrel and in cable end guide with
this time.
50228

b - Lever, In Neutral Detent, Must Be Approximately 10 Degrees Of Vertical
Index
90-823224--2 796
10. Install nut and washer to cable end guide stud.

Tighten until snug, then back off one full turn.
SINGLE CABLE - FORWARD ENTRY
11. Install nut and washer to cable barrel stud.

but do not over- tighten.
c
a
d
c
b
72955
50229
a - Cable End Guide

Back Off 1/2 Turn)
c - Spacer
d - Bushings
e - Cable Barrel
12. Once shift cable adjustment is correct, secure

shift cable(s) with hardware as shown, referring
to appropriate configuration following:
d
c
b
NOTE: To change cable approach direction on single

or dual station installations, only the spacer/bushings
have to be switched to the opposite stud (the studs
are identical).
a
b
71210

a - Cable End Guide
Back Off 1/2 Turn)
d - Bushing
e - Cable Barrel
Index
90-823224--2 796
SINGLE CABLE - REAR ENTRY
DUAL CABLE - FORWARD ENTRY
e
e
72957
72956
f
a
b
b
1
1
d
2
c
b
2
50229

a - Cable End Guide
Back Off 1/2 Turn)
d - Bushing
e - Cable Barrel
71211
a - Cable End Guide

a - Cable End Guide
Back Off 1/2 Turn)
d - Bushing
e - Cable Barrel
Index
90-823224--2 796
DUAL CABLE - REAR ENTRY
Fluid Level
fluid (see Lubricants/Sealants).
IMPORTANT: The dipstick to check fluid level is

located on the port side of transmission. DO NOT
remove T-handle on starboard side of transmission.
day, as follows:
72960

transmission. If low, add transmission fluid to
c
b
a
1
27661
2
b
50073

a - Cable End Guide
Back Off 1/2 Turn)
d - Bushing
e - Cable Barrel

IMPORTANT: To accurately check fluid level, engine must be run at 1500 RPM for two minutes immediately prior to checking level.
2. Start engine and run at 1500 RPM for two minutes to fill all hydraulic circuits.
bring level up to full mark on dipstick. (Refer to
Filling Transmission, following.)
Index
90-823224--2 796

hoses for leaks.
1. Clean the exterior of transmission before disassembly.
NOTE: Later model Hurth transmissions will be

equipped with an allen head socket screw on the oil
filter cover.
IMPORTANT: Use only Automatic Transmission
Fluid (ATF) as recommended in Lubricants/Sealants.
1. Fill transmission to proper level, through oil filter
cavity. (Refer to Capacity.)
a. Coat O-ring on filter cover with transmission
fluid.
a
b
27666
27662
a - Filter Cover
b - O-Ring
! CAUTION
3. Remove drain plug from transmission and allow

fluid to drain. Reinstall drain plug and tighten securely.
Transmission fluid filter and cover must be properly seated to avoid fluid foaming and/or loss of
fluid, thus resulting in decreased efficiency and/
or damage to transmission.
73013
a - Drain Plug
Index
90-823224--2 796
b. Push down until cover is fully seated (top of

cover flush with housing), then, Turn T-handle clockwise until tight.
Transmission Removal
1. Disconnect wires from neutral safety switch and
audio warning temperature switch.
2. Disconnect seawater hoses from transmission
fluid cooler.
a
27666
a
72711
a - Seawater Hoses
3. Start engine and run for two minutes to fill system

with fluid.
3. Remove bolts and locknuts and remove transmission.
4. Stop engine and check fluid level. Fluid should be

between min. and max. lines on dipstick.
72720

27661
Index
90-823224--2 796
3. Connect seawater hoses to transmission fluid

cooler and tighten hose clamps securely.
Transmission Installation
1. Coat splines on input shaft with Quicksilver Engine Coupler Spline Grease.
71044
a - Input Shaft
2. Install transmission on flywheel housing and secure with hardware shown. Torque fasteners to
50 lb. ft. (68 Nm).
a
a
72711
b
a - Seawater Hoses
b - Hose Clamps
4. Connect wires to neutral safety switch and to audio warning temperature switch. Coat connections on neutral safety switch with Quicksilver
Liquid Neoprene.
72720

a
b
50686

Index
90-823224--2 796
OIL FILTER AND DIPSTICK
Transmission Repair
Disassembly
IMPORTANT: Ensure work area is clean before
disassembly is started. Be sure to use lint free
cloths when cleaning and/or handling parts.
1. Disconnect transmission fluid hoses from cooler
and remove clamps that secure cooler to housing.
27666
c - Set Screw (Later Models)
2. Remove cover and filter element from transmission.
72711

b - Clamps
27662
Index
90-823224--2 796
3. Remove filter element from cover and inspect

O-rings for wear. Replace if necessary.
6. Inspect seal for wear and replace if necessary.
a
50975
a - O-Rings
4. Remove drain plug from transmission and allow

fluid to drain. Reinstall drain plug and tighten securely.
27659
a - Seal
BREATHER VALVE
a
1. Remove breather valve. Clean with suitable

cleaner, allow to dry and coat with oil.
73013
a - Drain Plug
5. Remove dipstick by turning (counterclockwise)

and pulling at the same time.
71048
a - Breather Valve
27661
Index
90-823224--2 796
MOUNTS
OUTPUT FLANGE
1. Remove mounts from transmission housing. Inspect mounts for damage and replace if necessary.
1. Remove four bolts as shown and loosen but DO

NOT remove four remaining bolts. Install flange
puller plate on output flange and secure with bolts
and nuts.
b
a
a
73014
d
b
72711
a - Transmission Mount
b - Retaining Screws (4 Total On Each Mount - One Hidden In
This View)
73015
a
b
c
d
Bolts - Remove
Bolts - Loosen (DO NOT REMOVE)
Flange Puller Plate
Bolts and Nuts
70158
Index
90-823224--2 796
2. Turn four remaining bolts out until they just contact flange puller plate. Then continue to turn
bolts out evenly (to push on puller plate) to remove flange.
CONTROL BLOCK
1. Remove hex head bolts.
c
a
a
27661
2. Remove control block and gasket from housing.

b
73016
27666
73017
a - Hex Wrench
b - Flange
c - Flange Puller Plate
Index
90-823224--2 796
2. Remove input side of housing. Be sure to locate

and save locator pins.
! CAUTION
Be careful not to allow dirt to enter control block
from front side.
3. Cover openings in control block with a protective
cloth.
73019
27665
a - Openings
a - Locator Pins
HOUSING
3. Remove input shaft assembly.
1. Remove hex head bolts from input side of housing.
73020
73018
a - Hex Bolts (16)
Index
90-823224--2 796
4. Remove intermediate shaft assembly.
6. Remove output shaft assembly.
73021
5. Remove reversing shaft assembly.
73023
BEARING, GEAR AND SEAL INSPECTION

1. Inspect all tapered roller bearings, the piston
rings on the input shaft and all gears for wear. If
damage has been found on the gearing of the intermediate or output shaft, it is ALWAYS necessary to replace the complete shaft.
When gears on the input shaft have to be replaced, the tapered roller bearings and needle
bearings MUST BE replaced as well.
73022
2. Turn gears of input shaft to check correct operation of the reversing clutch. If it is hard to turn the
gears, the clutch is probably damaged.
Index
90-823224--2 796
SEALS
b. Remove screws and hold down plate.
1. Remove suction pipe seal as follows:
c. Remove suction pipe by pulling downward

out of seal.
b
a
a
27666
73025
a - Seal
a - Screws
b - Hold Down Plate
d. Remove seal from top side.
a
27660
73024
a - Seal
a - Tabs
Index
90-823224--2 796
2. Remove input shaft seal using appropriate mandrel.
TAPERED ROLLER BEARING CUPS

IMPORTANT: Do not remove tapered roller bearing cups unless replacing tapered roller bearings. Bearing and cup must be replaced as a set.
IMPORTANT: Do not mix up shims under cups on
the input housing side. Shims are required for adjusting the bearing preload.
1. Pull tapered roller bearing cups from housing using special puller as follows:
a. Position appropriate puller guide (large diameter or small diameter) over cup as shown.
27670
a - Seal
3. Remove output shaft seals using appropriate

mandrel.
27681
a
b
73026
72712

b - Large Diameter Puller Guide
73027
a - Seals
Index
90-823224--2 796
b. Pull bearing cup from housing using tool as

shown.
TAPERED ROLLER BEARINGS

IMPORTANT: Bearings and gear on output shaft
are not replaceable. Replace output shaft, gear
and bearings as a complete assembly only.
27681
c. Input Housing Side: Remove and retain

shims. DO NOT MIX UP.
73028
! CAUTION
Gears should never be removed from intermediate shaft or output shaft, as this will affect proper
gear alignment.
1. Remove tapered roller bearings from intermediate shaft and output shaft by using a universal
puller plate and pressing bearings off.
Intermediate
Shaft
27682
73029
Reversing
Shaft
73030
Index
90-823224--2 796
REVERSING CLUTCH, GEARS AND TAPERED

ROLLER BEARINGS
b. Tighten jaws onto bearing by turning on

knurled part of tool. Tighten assembly.
1. Remove tapered roller bearing from splined end

of input shaft using special tool as follows:
a. Place tool over tapered roller bearing. Ensure
jaws of tool will be pulling on bottom edge of
rollers and NOT on the cage.
27671
c. Pull tapered roller bearing from shaft using

tool as shown.
27671
a - Jaws
b - Bottom Edge Of Rollers
27672
a - Hold Tool Stationary

b - Turn Top Nut
Index
90-823224--2 796
2. Remove butting ring from splined end of input

shaft by installing special tool as shown and lightly tapping upward on tool.
4. Remove needle bearings.
27673
a - Special Tool
b - Butting Ring
27680
3. Remove butting ring and gear assembly.

5. Remove piston rings from shaft.
a
b
27675
a - Butting Ring
b - Gear Assembly
27679
Index
90-823224--2 796
6. Remove tapered roller bearing, butting ring and

gear from piston end of shaft using special tool as
shown. Press all components off at the same
time. Then, remove needle bearings.
1. Position snap ring compression tool on clutch assembly so that compression screws are centered
over slots in clutch housing.
2. Remove end disc and snap ring as follows:
a. Tighten all compression screws until a slight
resistance is felt.
b. Tighten compression screws evenly (approximately 1/2 turn at a time).
c. Tap up lightly on bottom edge of compression
tool until snap ring pops up and out of groove
in clutch housing.
b
27673
a
CLUTCH DISCS
NOTE: Discs on both sides of clutch are removed in

the same manner.
IMPORTANT: Reference marks are placed on the

clutch housing and end disc to aid in locating the
snap ring opening.
27674
a - Snap Ring Compression Tool

b - Compression Screws (6)
c - Slots
27675
27675
a - Reference Marks
Index
90-823224--2 796
NOTE: For ease of reassembly, end disc and snap

ring should not be removed from tool unless their
condition is questionable.

These discs must be reinstalled in a specific pattern, when reassembled. Make note of notches in
thrust disc tabs, and how they are arranged.
50248
27676
a - End Disc (Snap Ring Compressed)
d. If necessary, remove end disc and snap ring

from tool.
c
b
a
27679
630V Clutch Arrangement

c - Notches
27676
a - End Disc
b - Snap Ring
Index
90-823224--2 796
3. Remove discs.
Reassembly
CLUTCH DISCS
These discs must be reinstalled in a specific
manner as explained following.
27680
50248
4. Inspect thrust discs and inner discs for wear. Replace if there is any questionable wear.
5. Remove and inspect discs on opposite side of
clutch in same manner.
1. Arrange thrust discs and inner discs as shown.

Ensure notches on thrust disc tabs are aligned as
shown.
27679
630V Clutch Arrangement

c - Notches
Index
90-823224--2 796
2. Install discs in clutch housing.
4. If end disc and snap ring were removed from tool,

reinstall as follows:
a. Loosen all compression screws on tool.
a
27677
a - Compression Screws
b. Place snap ring into groove in end disc and

compress by hand so that compression dogs
will hold in on snap ring.
27680
3. Align snap ring opening with reference marks on

end disc and clutch housing.
c
b
27677
a - End Disc
b - Snap Ring
c - Compression Dogs
b
a - Snap Ring Opening
b - Reference Marks
a
27678
Index
90-823224--2 796
c. Tighten compression screws evenly to completely compress snap ring into end disc.
5. Tap lightly around top of tool until end disc bottoms. Loosen compression screws and remove
tool.
b
27677
a - End Disc
b - Compression Screws
27678
d. Carefully lower end disc and special tool onto

clutch housing and align compression dogs
with slots in housing.
b
a
27675
27675
a - Slots
b - Compression Dogs
Index
90-823224--2 796
6. Double check that snap ring has been properly

seated by prying up lightly on end disc.
GEAR ASSEMBLY
1. Reinstall gear assembly. Twist gear assembly
from side to side to allow splines to engage with
inner discs. Ensure all inner discs are engaged
with splines by observing through slots in clutch
housing.
27679
7. Reinstall discs on opposite side of clutch in same

manner.
NEEDLE BEARINGS
1. Reinstall needle bearings.
27673
2. Reinstall butting ring.
27680
27672
Index
90-823224--2 796
TAPERED ROLLER BEARING
! CAUTION
! CAUTION
bearing has cooled down (DO NOT cool with water), tap bearing carefully down to ensure proper
seating against butting ring, using a soft (copper)
punch. Tap on inner race only.
Use care in reinstalling piston rings on input

shaft. Piston rings are brittle and may snap if
spread too far open.
3. Reinstall piston rings on input shaft. Ensure ends
of rings are coupled as shown. Then position
rings so that ends are staggered so no two are
aligned.
27679
INTERMEDIATE SHAFT
! WARNING
27674
a - Tapered Roller Bearing

b - Butting Ring
2. Install components on opposite side of clutch assembly in same manner.
bearing has cooled down (DO NOT cool with water), tap bearing carefully down to ensure proper
seating against gear, using a soft (copper) punch.
Index
90-823224--2 796
IMPORTANT: The tapered roller bearing cup on

the input shaft (control block end) is properly positioned by bottoming out on the face of the control block assembly. It will be necessary to temporarily install control block to install this
tapered roller bearing cup.
Tap on inner race only.
1. Temporarily install control block on outer housing. Tighten bolts securely.
a
73029

REVERSING SHAFT
! WARNING
drive bearing down against gear using a soft
(copper) punch. Tap on inner race only.
27682
b
a
73030
27666

a - Input Shaft Bearing Cup

b - Control Block Face
NOTE: Bearing on splined end of shaft is tapped until

seated against shoulder on shaft.
PREASSEMBLY OF OUTPUT HALF OF
HOUSING
IMPORTANT: If tapered roller bearing cups were
removed, ensure output shaft seal IS NOT in
place, as it will be necessary to heat housing
prior to installing bearing cups.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Suction Pipe
! WARNING
Use care in handling housing, once it is heated
with torch lamp. Severe burns could result. Use
special protective gloves when handling housing.
1. Reinstall suction pipe seal in bottom of oil filter

bore. Coat seal with ATF.
2. Heat bearing bores of housing using a torch lamp

and install bearing cups using a suitable mandrel.
b
a
a
27660
a - Seal
27681
a - Bearing Cups
b - Torch Lamp
3. Allow housing to cool (DO NOT cool with water)

and then tap bearing cup with suitable mandrel to
ensure it is properly seated.
2. Reinstall suction pipe. Place one drop of Loctite

Type A on screw threads. Then secure suction
pipe down with retainer plate. Tighten screws securely.
3. Bend tabs down over screws.
4. Remove control block assembly.

Output Shaft Seal
1. If bearing were not replaced and no shimming
is required, push new seal onto special mandrel.
Ensure seal will be positioned with lip of seal facing inward. Drive seal uniformly into bore of housing to the point that it is countersunk .040 in. (1
mm) with reference to housing surface.
73027
73025
a - Seal
Index
90-823224--2 796
Shafts
4. Install intermediate shaft.
1. Coat tapered roller bearings with ATF.

2. Install output shaft.
73021
5. Install input shaft. Ensure all gears mesh as

shown.
73023
3. Install reversing shaft.
73020
73022
73031
Index
90-823224--2 796
PREASSEMBLY OF INPUT HALF OF HOUSING

1. Install breather valve (do not over-tighten).
! WARNING
heated with a torch lamp. Severe burns could result. Use special protective gloves when handling housing.
torch lamp. Insert shims (less those removed)
and bearing cups into appropriate bearing bores.
When housing has cooled (DO NOT cool with water), tap bearing cups with a suitable mandrel to
ensure that cups are fully seated.
a
71048
Bearing Preload Adjustment

IMPORTANT: If new tapered roller bearings have
been installed, the preload must be readjusted. If
bearings were not replaced, proceed to the Final
Assembly.
27681
NOTE: The required preload of bearings of the individual shafts is obtained by using shims beneath the
tapered roller bearing cups in the input half of the
housing.
a - Torch Lamp
NOTE: Shims which have been removed during disassembly may be reused.
1. Subtract approximately .008 in. (.2 mm) of shims
from each bearing cup bore. Remove and set
aside, but do not mix up.
73032
a - Bearing Cups
Index
90-823224--2 796
3. Install input half of housing onto output half. Ensure locator pins are in place. Install bolts and
lockwashers and torque to 36 lb. ft. (49 Nm).
b. Mount dial indicator on input shaft. Turn input

shaft several times to seat bearing.
73033
27685
Input Shaft Preload

a. Install special tool as shown. Tighten hold
down bolts securely.
c. Zero the dial indicator.
b
a
27863
27685
a - Special Tool
b - Hold Down Bolts
Index
90-823224--2 796

very carefully to obtain the actual bearing clearance. Avoid bumping the input shaft and turn
very slowly on the special tool knob. (Shaft will
only be moving a very small amount.)
e. Make note of reading. The bearing clearance

measured PLUS the preload required is
ADDED.
d. Slowly turn the special tool knob clockwise to

push the shaft upward. (Perform the above
sequence several times to ensure on accurate reading.)
27685
Example:
+
Bearing Clearances Measured

.009 in.
.004 in.
Shims to Be Added
.013 in.
27682
Index
90-823224--2 796
Intermediate Shaft Preload
d. Zero dial indicator.

a. Remove hex plug from housing.
73034
b. Screw special bolt with nut into intermediate

shaft and tighten snugly. Turn nut up until it
touches bolt head.
c. Mount dial indicator on bolt head. Turn output
seated.
27685

very carefully, to obtain the actual bearing clearance. Turn nut very slowly as shaft will only be
moving a small amount.
e. Hold bolt with one wrench and slowly turn
down nut to pull shaft upward. (Perform the
above sequence several times to ensure accurate reading.)
73035
a
a - Special Bolt With Nut
73036
a - Bolt - Hold Stationary

b - Nut - Turn To Move Shaft
Index
90-823224--2 796
f.
Make note of the reading. The bearing clearance measured PLUS the preload required is
ADDED.
Reversing Shaft Preload

The reversing shaft preload is adjusted exactly the
same as the intermediate shaft. Refer to that procedure for adjusting reversing shaft.
73037
a - Reversing Shaft Location

b - Intermediate Shaft Location
Output Shaft Preload

27686
1. Measure the bearing clearance as follows:

a. Install flange with bolts and washers. Tighten
snugly.
Example:
+

.007 in.
.004 in.
Shims to Be Added
.011 in.
b. Mount dial indicator on flange. Turn output

seated.
g. Remove dial indicator, special bolt and nut,

and reinstall hex plug. Tighten securely.
73038
a - Flange
Index
90-823224--2 796
c. Zero dial indicator.
e. Make note of the reading. The bearing clearance measured PLUS the preload required is
ADDED.
27685
27686
Example:
+

.010 in.
.004 in.
Shims to Be Added
.014 in.

very carefully to obtain the actual bearing clearance. Pry up gently and evenly to lift shaft. Shaft
will only move a small amount.
d. Pry up on flange to lift output shaft.
73039
Index
90-823224--2 796
2. When thickness of shims to be ADDED has been

determined, the input half of housing must again
be removed. Remove bolts and lockwashers,
then lift off input half of housing.
b. Pull bearing cup from housing as shown.
27681
73018
4. Add the necessary amount of shims as determined previously to the appropriate bearing
bores.
a - Hex Bolts (16)
3. Remove tapered roller bearing cups from housing using special puller as follows:
a. Position appropriate puller guide (large or
small diameter) over cup as shown.
a
27682
27681
Index
90-823224--2 796
Final Assembly
! WARNING
torch lamp. Install bearing cups into appropriate
bore and tap into place using a suitable mandrel.
When housing has cooled (DO NOT cool with water), tap bearing cups to ensure they are fully
seated.
INPUT SHAFT SEAL

1. Push new seal onto special mandrel. Ensure seal
will be positioned with lip of seal facing inward.
Drive seal uniformly into bore of housing to the
point that it is countersunk .040 in. (1 mm) with
reference to housing surface.
27681
27670
IMPORTANT: Transmissions with 2.0 or 2.5 Gear

Ratios - The input shaft seal should not be installed until after the input shaft is installed and
housing halves have been joined. (The input
shaft must be tilted in order to install the other
shafts and this could damage the seal.)
73032
a - Torch Lamp
b - Bearing Cups
73040
a - Input Shaft
b - Seal
Index
90-823224--2 796
2. Coat lips of seals on input and output shafts with

ATF.
3. Apply a thin layer of Loctite 515 Sealer to machined surfaces on housing halves. Reinstall input half of housing. Ensure locator pins are properly positioned.
5. Double check to ensure that there is no shaft

clearance on all three shafts. Refer back to previous steps if necessary, and use dial indicator.
6. Remove intermediate shaft hex plug. Apply a
drop of Quicksilver Loctite Type A to threads and
reinstall in housing. Tighten securely.
73041
73019
CONTROL BLOCK
a - Locator Pins
b - Machined Surface
1. Ensure piston rings are in place and the key is in

keyway. Align key on shaft with keyway in control
block.
4. Install bolts and lockwashers and torque to 36 lb.

ft. (49 Nm).
2. Install new gasket between control block and

housing.
a
73033
27666
a - Key
b - Piston Rings
3. Carefully push control block onto input shaft.
Index
90-823224--2 796
4. Coat each hex socket head bolt with a drop of

Quicksilver Loctite Type A. Secure control block
to housing with bolts and lockwashers. Torque to
18 lb. ft. (25 Nm).
2. Reassemble filter assembly as shown. DO NOT

tighten and compress upper O-ring.
72805
27661
a - O-Rings
DIPSTICK
1. Coat sealing ring on dipstick with ATF.
FLUID FILTER
2. Install dipstick into transmission and tighten by

pressing down and turning clockwise at the same
time.
1. Coat new O-rings with ATF.
a
50975
73042
a - O-Rings
Index
90-823224--2 796
OUTPUT FLANGE
1. Install locator pins into output shaft.
1. Install transmission fluid cooler on housing. Secure with clamps and screws as shown. Torque
to 18 lb. ft. (25 Nm).
2. Connect transmission fluid hoses to cooler as
shown. Tighten securely.
a
a
73017
a - Locator Pins (4)
2. Install flange on output shaft. Apply Loctite Type

A to threads of bolts and torque to 14 lb. ft. (18
Nm).
72711

b - Clamps
73013
a - Flange
b - Bolts (6)
Index
90-823224--2 796
FILLING WITH TRANSMISSION FLUID

IMPORTANT: Use only ATF (Automatic Transmission Fluid), such as Dexron II or Dexron III.
1. Fill transmission to proper level, through fluid filter cavity. (Refer to Capacity.)
a. Bring flat spot on filter into agreement with flat
surface inside of housing.
b. Tighten filter by pushing down and turning
clockwise at the same time.
27666
a
b
b
a - Flat Spot
b - Set Screws (Later Models)
27662
a - Filter Cover
b - O-Ring
3. Check fluid level. Fluid should be between min.

and max. marks on dipstick.
27666
27661
Index
90-823224--2 796
Functional Test
1. Connect a pressure gauge and thermometer to
fluid pump at locations shown.
2. Perform functional tests as shown in chart following. Refer to Operating Specifications for correct readings.
Tests to Be Carried Out:
1. Leakages
2. Noise emission
3. Direction of rotation, LH/RH
4. Fluid temperature
5. Shifting pressure
b
a
50686
a - Pressure Gauge (m10x1 Thread - Remove Plug)

b - Thermometer (3/8 In. Thread) - Remove Temperature
Sender
Motor Speed RPM
Shift Lever Position
Duration Minutes
Tests
800-1000
Neutral
1 2
600-800
(Idling Speed)
AB Position
Repeatedly
1 2 3
1500-2500
B Position
1 2 4
600-800
(Idling Speed)
AB Position
Repeatedly
1 2 3
Idling
Maximum Speed
A Position
1 2 5**
600 -800
From A B Position
1 2
Idling
Maximum Speed
B Position
1 2 5**
*Until fluid temperature of 167-176F (75-80C) has been reached

**At different speeds
Index
90-823224--2 796

AT A LATER DATE
Index
90-823224--2 796

AT A LATER DATE
Index
90-823224--2 796
DRIVES
DRIVE SHAFT / PROPELLER

SHAFT MODELS
Index
8
E
Table of Contents
Page
Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8E-1
Tools/Lubricants/Sealants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8E-1
Flywheel Housing/Output Shaft Housing
Repair (MCM Stern Drive Models) . . . . . . . . . 8E-2
Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8E-2
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8E-2
Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8E-2
Drive Shaft Repair
(MCM Stern Drive Models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8E-3
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8E-3
Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8E-4
Replacement Drive Shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8E-4
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8E-5
Bearing Support Repair
(MCM Stern Drive Models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8E-6
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8E-6
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8E-6
Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8E-7
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8E-8
Propeller Shaft
(MIE Inboard Models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8E-9
Checks Made with Boat In Water . . . . . . . . 8E-9
Checks Made with Boat Out of Water
and Shaft Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8E-10
Checks Made with Propeller Shaft
Removed from Boat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8E-11
Strut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8E-12
Index
8E-0 - DRIVE SHAFT / PROPELLER SHAFT MODELS
90-823224--2 796
Fastener Location
Lb. Ft.
Nm
Drive Shaft To Bearing Support

Flange (MCM Models)
Drive Shaft To Output Shaft
(MCM Models)
Propeller Shaft Coupling To
Transmission Coupling
(MIE Models)
Flywheel Housing To Block
(MCM Models)
Output Shaft Housing To Flywheel Housing (MCM Models)
Engine Coupling
Coupling Setscrews
(If Equipped)
50
68
30
41
35
48
Description
Part Number
Quicksilver Alignment
Tool
91-805475A1
Quicksilver Slide
Hammer Puller
91-34569A1
2-4-C Marine Lubricant

With Teflon
92-825407A3
U-Joint and Gimbal

Bearing Grease
92-828052A2
Quicksilver Engine
Coupler Spline Grease
91-816391A4
Quicksilver Loctite 8831 92-823089-1

Loctite 290
Obtain Locally
Securely
(NOTE)
NOTE: Safety wire set screws.
Index
90-823224--2 796
DRIVE SHAFT / PROPELLER SHAFT MODELS - 8E-1
Flywheel Housing/Output
Shaft Housing Repair
(MCM Stern Drive Models)
NOTICE
The following repair procedure requires removal of the drive shaft. In most cases, because of engine compartment space limitations, the engine also must be removed.
Reassembly
1. Install engine coupling. Torque to 35 lb. ft. (48
Nm).
2. Install flywheel housing. Torque to 30 lb. ft. (41
Nm).
3. Using new gasket, install flywheel cover. Tighten
screws securely.
IMPORTANT: Groove in outside diameter of ball
bearing must align with grease fitting hole.
4. Install ball bearing into output shaft housing, then
install snap ring.

1. Remove drive shaft as outlined following in this
section.
2. If engine must be removed, refer to appropriate
instructions in Section 2, Removal and Installation.
Disassembly
IMPORTANT: This disassembly procedure, beginning with Step 1, assumes that engine does
not require removal from boat. If, however, engine removal is required, refer to Section 2 for removal and installation instructions. With engine
removed from boat, proceed with disassembly,
beginning with Step 3.
5. Apply Quicksilver 2-4-C Marine Lubricant With

Teflon to O-rings (on output shaft), then slide
shaft through bearing. Secure shaft with snap
ring.
to splines on output shaft.
7. Install output shaft housing to flywheel housing.
Torque screws to 30 lb. ft. (48 Nm).
8. Secure rear engine mounts to stringer with bolts.
Tighten securely.
9. Remove hoist (or wooden blocks).
10. Install drive shaft and check alignment. (Refer to
Section 2 for engine and drive shaft alignment if
engine was removed.)
1. Support rear of engine with overhead hoist or

wooden blocks under the rear of the engine.
2. Remove stringer bolts (rear engine mounts).
3. Remove output shaft housing attaching screws,
then remove housing.
4. Remove snap ring, then pull output shaft out of
housing.
5. Remove snap ring from housing.
6. Using Quicksilver Slide Hammer Puller, remove
bearing from housing.
7. Remove flywheel cover.
8. Remove flywheel housing.
9. Remove engine coupling.
10. Clean and inspect all parts. Replace any damaged parts.
Index
90-823224--2 796
11. Using Quicksilver U-Joint and Gimbal Bearing

Grease, grease ball bearing through grease fitting.
1
Removal
2
10
15

engine to service the drive shaft.
1. Remove top and bottom drive shaft shields
around transom end and engine end of drive
shaft.
14 13
Drive Shaft Repair

a
8
12
7
11
17
16
18
23
19
20
d
21
22
Flywheel Housing/Output Shaft Housing

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314151617181920212223-
Output Shaft
O-Rings
Snap Ring - Ball Bearing
Ball Bearing
Shaft Bearing
Snap Ring - Output Shaft
Rear Engine Mount
Lockwasher
Screw (4)
Screw (6)
Flywheel Housing
Plate
Screw (2)
Nut (1)
Bolt (4)
Washer (1)
Clamp (1)
Stud (1)
Gasket
Cover - Flywheel
Screw (7)
Coupling - Engine
Bushing
70245

a
b
c
d
e
Top Shield
Bottom Shield
Bolt 3/3-16 x 7/8 In. (22.2 mm); 4 Used
Nut 3/8 16: 4 Used
Screws (3 Used Hidden In This View)
Index
90-823224--2 796
2. Suitably mark drive shaft U-joint yokes/flange

connections (engine output and drive unit input)
to assist in exact same positioning during assembly at engine and transom end.
Repair
! CAUTION
Be sure U-joint locking rings are seated properly
after replacing U-joints.
1. Replace U-joints, if required.
2. Replace flange, if required.

c
70237
a - Flange
b - U-Joint
c - Drive Shaft
Engine End Shown (Transom End Similar)

a - Suitable Mark On Flange and Drive Shaft Connection
b - Extension Drive Shaft U-Joint Yoke
c - Flange
3. Remove drive shaft fasteners and drive shaft.

a
Replacement Drive Shafts

MerCruiser furnishes a 58 in. (1473 mm) or 34-1/2 in.
(876 mm) long drive shaft with extension shaft models. Some boat manufacturers modify the drive
shafts to a shorter length. Because of this, use the following procedure to obtain replacement drive shafts.
X
a
c
b
a - Output Shaft Flange
b - Drive Shaft
c - Bolt With Nut (4 Total)
70237
a
b
c
d
e
c
d
Tube
Yoke - Tube
Flange
Universal Joint
Sound Deadener (Cardboard Tube)
The complete drive shaft can be ordered from Mercury Marine.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Drive Shafts Modified to Shorter Lengths

The complete modified (shortened) drive shaft has to
be ordered from the boat manufacturer that installed
the MerCruiser Power Package.
IMPORTANT: Dana Corporation - Spicer Regional
Drive Shaft Centers will not shorten replacement
drive shafts for dealers or consumers.
If a boat manufacturer is currently having extension
drive shafts modified, they must be modified by one
of Dana Corporation - Spicer Regional Drive Shaft
Centers to maintain MerCruiser warranty. The modified drive shaft must meet the following specifications.
U-joints aligned radially within 0 ( 1/2).
U-joints greased, after welding, with Quicksilver

U-Joint and Gimbal Bearing Grease.
Assembly balanced to within 1.5 oz. in. (0.01

Nm) to 4500 RPM.
Tube to have .005 in. (0.127 mm) to .010 in.

(0.254 mm) interference fit with tube yoke.
Tube must be straight and round within .015 in.

(0.381 mm).
! CAUTION
Failure to properly align shaft flanges with
matching marks made on disassembly may
cause improperly aligned drive unit and extension drive shaft U-joint centerlines resulting in a
severe vibration problem.
2. As shown, attach drive shaft output flange and input shaft flange exactly as marked upon disassembly. Torque fasteners to 50 lb. ft. (68 Nm).
e
d
Installation
IMPORTANT: The following instructions are to be

used if ONLY the drive shaft was removed for service. Refer to appropriate sections for installation of other components which require special
alignment.
1. Grease both drive shaft universal joints with
Quicksilver U-Joint and Gimbal Bearing Grease.
70237

a
b
c
d
e
Output Shaft Flange

Drive Shaft
Screw 7/16-20 x 1-1/2 In. (38 mm) Long (4 Used)
Nut 7/16-20 (4 Used)
Suitable Matching Marks Made upon Disassembly Aligned
! CAUTION
When attaching shaft in next step, BE SURE that
the pilot on drive shaft flanges are engaged in
input shaft and output shaft flanges. Flanges
MUST BE flush with each other prior to tightening
screws or screws may come loose during
operation.
Index
90-823224--2 796

shield retaining screws and install bottom shields
on engine and transom end. Then install both top
shields as shown. Torque all fasteners to 30 lb. ft.
(41 Nm).
a
! CAUTION
If bearing support is removed, you must remove
the stern drive unit so you can properly align
drive unit U-joint centerline with extension drive
shaft U-joint centerline. Lack of alignment will
cause a severe vibration problem.
1. Remove drive shaft as previously outlined.
2. Remove stern drive unit (refer to appropriate
Stern Drive Service Manual).
3. Remove bearing support and retain hardware.

a
b
c
d
70245

a
b
c
d
e
Top Shield
Bottom Shield
Bolt 3/8-16 x 7/8 in. (22 mm); 4 Used
Nut 3/8-16; 4 Used
Screws (3 Used - Hidden in This View)
Bearing Support Repair

c
e
a
b
c
d
e
75279
Bolt, Bearing Support (2)

Flat Washer (2)
Spherical Washer (4)
Bearing Support (Tailstock)
Nut (2)
Disassembly
Removal
1. Remove snap ring, then remove input shaft.

engine to service the drive shaft and/or bearing
support.
2. Remove larger snap ring.

3. Using Quicksilver Slide Hammer Puller, remove
ball bearing.
4. Remove oil seal.
5. If required, remove plug from end of input shaft.
6. Clean and inspect all parts.
Index
90-823224--2 796
5. Install bearing (with sealed side toward snap

ring) by using a press. After installation, wipe up
excessive Loctite. Install snap ring.
7. Replace any damaged parts.

a
6. Apply Loctite 290 to outer diameter of input shaft

(bearing area) and inside diameter of bearing
race.
c
f
h
7. Install input shaft, then install snap ring. Wipe up

excessive Loctite.
IMPORTANT: Do not let Loctite get into ball bearing.
8. Fill bearing area with Quicksilver U-Joint and
Gimbal Bearing Grease through grease fitting.
d
Magnum

to splines of input shaft before installing drive
unit.
75280
e
c
g
f
a
c
e
f
d
i
d
i
Standard
75281
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
Snap Ring - Input Shaft

Ball Bearing
Bearing Support
Grease Fitting
Oil Seal
Grease Fitting
Input Shaft
Plug - Input Shaft
Spacer
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
75281
Snap Ring - Input Shaft

Ball Bearing
Bearing Support
Grease Fitting
Oil Seal
Grease Fitting
Input Shaft
Plug - Input Shaft
Reassembly
1. If removed, install new plug in end of input shaft.
2. Apply Quicksilver Loctite 8831 to outer diameter
of new oil seal.
3. Press oil seal into bearing support. Lip of seal
faces away from ball bearing.
4. Apply Loctite 290 to outer diameter of ball bearing and inner diameter of bearing support.
Index
90-823224--2 796
Installation
1. Install bearing support assembly (tailstock) on
transom plate using hardware as shown. Tighten
bolts until snug. DO NOT TORQUE BOLTS AT
THIS TIME.
IMPORTANT: The spherical washers MUST BE
positioned so that the rounded side of the washers are toward the bearing support assembly as
shown.
2. Insert solid end of Quicksilver Alignment Tool

through bearing in gimbal housing and into input
shaft splines of bearing support.
g
h
a
b
d
e
f
75279
71401
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
Bolts 1/2-20 x 4 In. (102 mm) Long

Steel Washer (Flat)
Spherical Washer (Rounded On One Side)
Bearing Support
Spherical Washer (Rounded On One Side)
Nut 1/2-20
Transom Plate
Bearing Support (Tailstock)
Typical Stern Drive Unit Shown

a - Quicksilver Alignment Tool
b - Insert This End Of Alignment Tool Through Gimbal Housing Assembly
3. DO NOT remove alignment tool from gimbal

housing.
! CAUTION
Both attaching bolts MUST BE struck firmly in the
following step to properly seat spherical washers. If procedure is not followed, difficulty in the
installation of the stern drive may be experienced
and subsequent damage to input bearing may result.
Index
90-823224--2 796
4. Strike the head of BOTH bearing support attaching bolts firmly with a hammer.
Propeller Shaft
(MIE Inboard Models)
NOTICE
71098
5. Torque bolts to 35-54 lb. ft. (47-54 Nm) as

shown.
The following information can be used as a

guide for determining vibration problems
on boats powered by inboard engines (MIE
models). For installation, alignment and repairs to shafts, struts, shaft logs and rudders, refer to boat manufacturers service
manual. If boat is equipped with V-drive, or
a remote mounted V-drive, refer to Section
8B or boat manufacturers service manual
for all servicing and troubleshooting. For
MIE engine installation and alignment, refer to Sections 2E and 2F.
Checks Made with Boat In Water

1. Disconnect propeller shaft coupling from transmission coupling.
2. Check fit of coupling to propeller shaft.
Straight Bore Type:
a. Loosen setscrews.
b. Try to move coupling by hand. The bore of the
coupling should be a semi press fit to shaft.
c. Check shaft for wear. If worn, replacement of
shaft may be necessary.
d. If shaft is not worn, try another coupling.
71099

and install drive unit.
7. Refer to appropriate Section 2 - Removal and Installation - Engine Installation/Alignment, if engine was removed.
Tapered Bore Type:

a. Check nut on shaft for tightness.
b. If nut was loose, remove coupling and check
for damage to taper on shaft or in coupling.
c. Replace worn parts.
d. Always make sure key is not sticking out of
coupling.
e. Install coupling on shaft without the key.
f.
Mark the shaft (behind the coupling), then remove the coupling.
g. Now install the key and coupling. Make sure

coupling still lines up with the mark. This ensures that key is not oversize and holding the
tapers apart.
Index
90-823224--2 796
3. Check output coupling flange of transmission.
Checks Made with Boat Out of Water

and Shaft Installed
Possible causes for vibration may be propeller shaft,
propeller to shaft fit or propeller. All three can be
checked by using the rudder, a strong metal straight
edge and a C- clamp.
1. Check installation of propeller to shaft.
a. Remove propeller.
b. Check for chipped or cracked keyway in propeller on shaft without key.
c. Install propeller on shaft without key.
d. Mark the shaft (behind the propeller), then remove propeller.
e. Install the key and propeller. Make sure propeller still lines up with mark. This ensures
that key is not oversize and holding the tapers
apart. Retighten propeller nut.
Checking Coupling Outside Diameter - Rotate

One Complete Turn
f.
Be sure key is not sticking out of propeller.
2. Check for propeller shaft being bent behind the

strut.
b
a
Checking Coupling Face - Rotate One Complete
Turn
4. If there is movement in Step 3, replace output
coupling.
a - Metal Straight Edge (Held T Rudder With C-Clamp) - Position Corner Of Straight Edge At Center Of Shaft. Rotate
Shaft One Complete Turn. If Shaft Wobbles, Replace
Shaft.
b - Rudder
5. Replace damaged parts and realign engine as

outlined.
6. Torque propeller shaft coupling and transmission
coupling (output flange) to 50 lb. ft. (68 Nm).
Tighten setscrews securely, if so equipped.
Safety wire setscrews, if so equipped.
Index
90-823224--2 796
3. Check the diameter of all propeller blades. If not

the same, repair propeller.
Checks Made with Propeller Shaft

Removed from Boat
1. Check propeller shaft for straightness. Check at
three or four places. If dial indicator deflects over
.004 in. (0.1 mm), replace shaft.
b
c
c
a - Metal Straight Edge (Held T Rudder With C-Clamp)
b - Rudder
c - Rotate Propeller One Complete Turn
4. Check that all propeller blades are the same pitch

and that propeller is properly seated on shaft. Repair or replace if necessary.
a - V-Blocks
b - Dial Indicator
c - Shaft - Rotate One Complete Turn
2. Check that bore of coupling is 90 degrees from

coupling flange. Replace coupling if needle
moves.
d
a - Metal Straight Edge (Held T Rudder With C-Clamp)

b - Rudder
c - Rotate Propeller One Complete Turn. Check At Three Different Points On Blades
a
b
c
d
V-Blocks
Dial Indicator
Coupling Flange - Rotate One Complete Turn
Shaft Against Block To Prevent Fore And Aft Movement
Index
90-823224--2 796
Strut
Refer to boat manufacturers service manual for
alignment and replacement. Normally, the shaft
should be centered in the cutlass bearing. Shims
(placed between the strut and hull) are used to align
the strut to the shaft.
71091
a - Strut
b - Cutlass Bearing
Index
90-823224--2 796

AT A LATER DATE
Index
90-823224--2 796
POWER STEERING
72951
PUMP
Index
9
A
Table of Contents
Page
Tools/Sealants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9A-1
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9A-1
Power Steering Pump and Components
(Exploded View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9A-2
Important Service Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9A-3
Pump Pulley Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9A-3
Testing and Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9A-4
Checking Pump Fluid Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9A-4
Filling and Air Bleeding System . . . . . . . . . . . . 9A-4
Pump Drive Belt Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9A-4
Pump Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9A-4
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9A-4
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9A-5
Mounting Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9A-6
Hydraulic Hoses and Fluid Cooler . . . . . . . . . . 9A-6
High Pressure Hose
(Pump-to-Control Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9A-6
Low Pressure Hose (Cooler-to-Pump) . . . . 9A-8
Low Pressure Hose
(Control Valve-to-Cooler) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9A-9
Priority Valve Kit (79691A1) Information . . . . 9A-11
Installing Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9A-11
Installing Priority Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9A-13
Filling System with Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9A-16
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9A-16
System Flow Diagram (Typical) . . . . . . . . . 9A-17
Index
9A-0 - POWER STEERING PUMP
90-823224--2 796
Fastener Location
Precautions
Lb. Ft. Lb. In.
Nm
Crankshaft Pulley To
Torsional Damper
35
42
Torsional Damper To
Crankshaft
60
81
Pump Mounting
Bracket To Engine
30
41
Recirculation Pump
Pulley
Early Style
Power
Steering
Hose Fittings
Early Style
Power
Steering
Hose Fittings
Large
240
20-25
27
! CAUTION
Do not operate engine without cooling water being supplied to water pickup pump or water pump
impeller will be damaged and subsequent overheating damage to engine may result.
! WARNING
before working on engine to prevent fire or explosion.
27-34
! CAUTION
Small
Later Style
Power Steering
Hose Fittings
96-108
11-12
23
Do not pry on power steering pump or alternator

when adjusting belt tension. Serious damage
may result.
31
Tools/Sealants
Description
Part Number
Pulley Installer
91-93656A1
92-34227-1
Pulley Removal Tool

(Kent-Moore)
J-25034
Kent-Moore Special Tools

29784 Little Mack
Roseville, MI 48066
(313) 574-2332
Index
90-823224--2 796
POWER STEERING - 9A-1
Power Steering Pump and Components

(Exploded View)
6
16
22
21
23
3
4
22
20
19
23
18
9
17
11
12
10
14
5
7
8
15
13
22
23
14
72951
24
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112-
Power Steering Pump Assembly

Stud
Cap
Spacer
Brace
Spacer
Lockwasher
Bolt, Pump To Brace
Pulley
Belt
O-Ring, High Pressure Hose Fitting
Hose, High Pressure (Fittings on Both Ends)
131415161718192021222324-
Hose, Pump To Fluid Cooler

Clamp
Hose, Control Valve To Fluid Cooler (Fitting On One End)
Mounting Bracket, Cast
Bolt
Spacer (Barrel Shaped)
Lockwasher
Nut (For Item 17)
Nut (For Item 21)
Lockwasher
Bolt To Cylinder Block
Power Steering Cooler
Index
90-823224--2 796
INSTALLATION
Important Service
Information
Install pulley, as follows, using pulley installer tool (P/

N 91-93656A1), and a long straight edge:
1. Place pulley on pump shaft.
Pump Pulley Replacement
2. Thread stud all the way into pump shaft. Place

bearing over stud. Do not use spacer from kit.
REMOVAL
3. Thread nut onto shaft. Thread tool shaft (and nut)

all the way onto stud (threaded into pump pulley).
IMPORTANT: Kent-Moore Tool J-25034 must be

used to remove the pressed-on pulleys used on
power steering pumps. This tool has an end on it
that will not mushroom the end of the pump shaft.
DO NOT use Kent-Moore Tool J-21239 to remove
these pulleys. This tool has a tapered end and will
damage the shaft.
1. Install Kent-Moore Tool J-25034 on end of pulley
and shaft as shown.
4. Using a long straight edge (to check drive belt

alignment), turn large pusher nut until drive belt
is parallel to straight edge.
5. Check pulley installation for correct alignment.
d
c
e
f
b
2. While holding tool with suitable wrench, turn

threaded screw until pulley is removed.
a
a
i
72822
g
72821
a - Kent-Moore Pulley Removal Tool (P/N J-25034)
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
Power Steering Pump Pulley

Stud
Do Not Use Spacer
Bearing
Nut
Tool Shaft
Crankshaft Pulley (shown) Or Water Circulating Pump
Pulley
h - Long Straight Edge
i - Drive Belt Parallel
Index
90-823224--2 796
Testing and Repair
Pump Assembly
Refer to appropriate MerCruiser Stern Drive

Service Manual.
Removal
Checking Pump Fluid Level
1. Loosen pump brace and pump mounting fasteners. Pivot pump to loosen belt. Remove drive
belt.
Refer to Section 1B - Maintenance (see Table of

Contents).
2. Remove mounting fasteners from pump.
Filling and Air Bleeding

System
Refer to Section 1B - Maintenance (see Table of
Contents).
Pump Drive Belt Adjustment

IMPORTANT: Do not pry on power steering pump
with pry bar or screwdriver. Serious damage may
result.
a
72950

follows:
a. Pivot pump away from engine, as required,
until correct tension is obtained, as shown.
b. After obtaining correct tension, securely
tighten pump brace and pump mounting
bolts.
a
b
72949
a - Screws
b - Nuts
72847
j - Belt Should Depress 1/4 In (6 mm)

k - Screws and Nuts
Index
90-823224--2 796
3. Remove pump assembly from bracket to gain access to fluid hoses.

4. Remove high pressure hose threaded fitting and
O-ring. Disconnect low pressure hose from back
of pump assembly.
NOTE: Catch fluid that drains from pump and hoses

in a suitable container.
Installation
IMPORTANT: Be careful to not cross-thread or
over-tighten hose fittings.
1. Be certain a new high pressure hose O-ring is
present, and install threaded fitting in back of
pump assembly. Tighten fitting securely. Connect
low pressure hose on back of pump. Tighten
hose clamp securely.
b
b
c
c
a
72850
a
a
b
c
d
Pump
Bracket
Threaded Fitting
Low Pressure Hose

for power steering pump repair procedures.
a
b
c
d
72850
Pump
Bracket
Threaded Fitting
Low Pressure Hose
Index
90-823224--2 796
2. Install mounting hardware and fasteners to retain

pump to bracket. (Refer to Exploded View for
specific details on your engine.)
Hydraulic Hoses and Fluid

Cooler
Refer to Section 6A - Seawater Cooled Models or
Section 6B - Closed Cooled Models for information
on testing or servicing power steering fluid coolers.
The following is provided to assist in replacement of
power steering fluid hoses and to assure proper routing and connection to the cooler.
Replace high or low pressure hoses following:
b
72950

High Pressure Hose

(Pump-to-Control Valve)
a - Bolt and Lockwasher

b - Metric Bolt and Lockwasher
REMOVAL
NOTE: Catch fluid that drains from pump and hoses

in a suitable container.
1. Remove high pressure hose fitting with O-ring

seal from pump fitting on rear of pump.
a
72949
a - Metric Nuts
b - Washers
3. Install drive belt and adjust tension. Refer to

Pump Drive Belt Adjustment as previously outlined.
b
a
4. Fill and air bleed system. Refer to Section 1B Maintenance (see Table of Contents).
72848
Mounting Bracket
Mounting bracket is removable after pump (refer to
previous instructions) and alternator (refer to Section
4C - Charging System) have been removed. See
Exploded View and Torque Specifications.
a - High Pressure Hose Fitting (With O-Ring - Not Visible In

This View)
b - Pump Fitting
Index
90-823224--2 796
2. Remove hose where routed and secured (port or

starboard side), across top of engine, near valve
cover.
3. Remove small fitting from control valve at transom. Remove hose.
2. If equipped with later style control valve, install fittings and torque to 23 ft. in. (21 Nm).
73786
Later Style - All Models Except 502 Magnum EFI

a
b - Power Steering Hose Fittings
b
50912
Early Style
a - Control Valve
b - Small Fitting and Hose
INSTALLATION
! CAUTION
73860

help avoid kinks in the hoses.
Later Style - 502 Magnum EFI With return Lines

On Starboard Side Power Steering Cooler
a - Power Steering Hose Fittings

1. Thread small fitting into control valve. Position
hose properly (as prior to removal) and torque fitting to 96-108 lb. in. (11-12 Nm). Do not
cross-thread or over-tighten.
50912
Early Style
a - Small Fitting
Index
90-823224--2 796
3. Route hose along valve cover and secure with

J-clamp(s) provided.
Low Pressure Hose (Cooler-to-Pump)
4. Be certain a new high pressure hose O-ring is

present, and install threaded hose fitting in back
of pump assembly fitting. Tighten hose fitting securely. Do not cross-thread or over-tighten.
REMOVAL
NOTE: Catch fluid that drains from hose, cooler and

pump in a suitable container.
1. Loosen hose clamp and remove hose from fluid
cooler.
b
a
a
b
72925
72848
a - High Pressure Hose Fitting (With O-Ring - Not Visible In

This View)
b - Pump Fitting
a - Fluid Cooler
b - Hose Clamp
c - Hose
2. Loosen hose clamp and remove hose from back

of pump.
a
b
72848
a - Hose Clamp
b - Hose
Index
90-823224--2 796
INSTALLATION
1. Using hose clamp, install new hose on back of
pump. Tighten clamp securely.
Low Pressure Hose

(Control Valve-to-Cooler)
REMOVAL
NOTE: Catch fluid that drains from hose, cooler and

pump in a suitable container.
1. Loosen hose clamp and remove hose from fluid
cooler.
b
a
72925
b
72848
a - Hose Clamp
b - Hose
2. Using hose clamp, install hose on fluid cooler.

a - Fluid Cooler
b - Hose Clamp
c - Hose
2. Remove hose where routed and secured across

top of engine flywheel housing.
b
a
72925
72853
a - Fluid Cooler
b - Hose Clamp
c - Hose
a - J-Clamps
Index
90-823224--2 796
3. Remove large fitting from control valve at transom. Remove hose.
2. If equipped with later style control valve, install fittings and torque to 23 ft. in. (21 Nm).
b
a
73786
Later Style - All Models Except 502 Magnum EFI

50912
c - Power Steering Hose Fittings
a - Control Valve
b - Large Fitting and Hose
INSTALLATION
a
! CAUTION
help avoid kinks in the hoses.
1. Thread large fitting into control valve. Position
hose properly (as prior to removal) and torque fitting to 20-25 lb. ft. (27-34 Nm). Do not
cross-thread or over-tighten.
73860
Later Style - 502 Magnum EFI With return Lines

On Starboard Side Power Steering Cooler
a - Power Steering Hose Fittings
b
a
50912
Early Style
a - Control Valve
b - Large Fitting and Hose
Index
90-823224--2 796
b. Install reservoir mounting bracket with hardware supplied.

3. Route hose along flywheel housing and secure
with J-clamp(s) provided.
4. Using hose clamp, install hose on fluid cooler.
71402
b
a
a - Measurement - 6 In. (152 mm) Minimum

72925
a - Fluid Cooler
b - Hose Clamp
c - Hose
2. Position bottle reservoir in mounting bracket and

secure with retainer spring.
Priority Valve Kit (79691A1)

Information
This kit information (in Installation Instruction form)

is provided to assist personnel when servicing dual
installations where both engines are equipped with
power steering pumps, coolers, related hardware
and hoses, and one transom assembly is equipped
with power steering.
Although the system may already be installed, refer

to appropriate sections and follow instructions that
relate to your task when servicing those components.
e
d
NOTE: A system flow diagram is located on the last

page of this section.
Installing Reservoir
1. Mount reservoir bracket.
a. Find a location between both power steering
pumps that affords both accessibility and
easy visual inspection of fluid level. Location
must be at least 6 in. (152 mm) higher than
pump cap to allow fluid from reservoir to flow
freely to pumps (preferably on transom or on
forward engine compartment wall).
72854
a
b
c
d
e
Reservoir Bracket
Reservoir Spring Retainer Tab
Screw And Washer (Not Shown In This View)
Reservoir Bottle
Retainer Spring
IMPORTANT: A two-way valve is required on the

reservoir cap for cold weather operation below
40F (4C).
Index
90-823224--2 796
3. If required, install two-way valve in reservoir cap

by removing vent from cover and replacing it with
a two-way check valve.
6. Secure hoses with Sta-Straps to keep them below reservoir fluid level line and away from heat
and moving parts.
b
a
b
c
d
72855
a - Reservoir Cap
b - Vent
72857
a
b
c
d
e
Power Steering Pump Cap (Port And Starboard)

Hose To Reservoir
Hose Clamp
Sta-Straps
Bend Radius (Port and Starboard)
72856
a - Reservoir Cap
b - Two-Way Valve (Installed)
4. Cut two hoses (from bulk hose supplied) of sufficient length to extend from bottom fittings on reservoir to fill caps on power steering pumps. Allow
extra hose for routing.
IMPORTANT: When routing and installing hoses
in the following steps, be sure that the bend radius in the hose is sufficient to eliminate a load
being placed on power steering pump fill cap.
5. Connect hoses, that were just cut, to reservoir
and power steering pump caps (from kit). Secure
with hose clamps. Tighten securely.
b
c
72858
a - Reservoir
b - Hoses From Pumps
c - Hose Clamps
Index
90-823224--2 796
Installing Priority Valve

NOTE: Priority valve mounting bracket can be used
in various mounting configurations.
NOTE: The 90 elbow locations on priority valve are

marked with a T stamped into the valve.
2. Apply liquid pipe joint sealer to threads and install
fittings into priority valve.
b
c
c
a
71404
71403
1. Install priority valve mounting bracket.

a. Find a central location that will be accessible
for making and checking hose connections.
Ensure that location will allow 2 in. (51 mm)
or more, above and below priority valve for
hose connections and routing (preferably on
a stringer near transom).
a - 90 Degree Elbow
b - Large Inverted Flare Fitting
c - Small Inverted Flare Fitting
3. Mount priority valve on bracket. Torque bolt to

120 lb. in. (14 Nm).
b
b. Mount bracket using lag bolts and washers

supplied.
a
a
d
c
b
72860
a
b
c
d
Bolt and Washer

Washer and Nut (Not Shown In This View)
Bracket
Priority Valve
72859
a - Mounting Bracket
b - Lag Bolts and Washers
Index
90-823224--2 796
NOTE: Engines with power steering are equipped

with a hose that is connected to the power steering
fluid cooler. A fitting on the other end of the hose
would normally be connected to the power steering
control valve. These hoses are not used and are replaced with bulk hose supplied with priority valve kit.
7. Install return hose (large fitting on one end only,

from kit) to power steering control valve. Route
hose to priority valve, cut hose to length, and connect to fitting on priority valve. Secure with hose
clamp. Tighten securely.
4. Remove and discard old hoses which are connected to power steering cooler (port and starboard).
5. Cut two hoses (from bulk hose supplied) of sufficient length to extend from power steering coolers to respective fittings on priority valve.
6. Connect one end of each hose to its respective

power steering fluid cooler and other ends to fittings on priority valve. Secure with hose clamps.
Tighten securely.
b
b
72863
a - Power Steering Control Valve

b - Hose Fitting
72925
a - Power Steering Fluid Cooler

b - Hose
c - Hose Clamp
b
b
a
72864
a - Priority Valve
b - Hose
c - Hose Clamp
c
72862
b
a - Priority Valve
b - Hose
c - Hose Clamp
Index
90-823224--2 796
8. Install pressure hose (fittings on both ends, from

kit) between power steering control valve and
large inverted flare fitting on priority valve. (This
fitting location is marked with an S.) Secure with
hose clamp. Tighten securely.
9. Connect No. 1 (starboard) engine pressure hose

(from pump) to inverted flare fitting marked by 1
on priority valve. Connect No. 2 (port) pressure
hose (from pump) to inverted flare fitting marked
by 2 on priority valve. Secure with hose clamps.
Tighten securely.
a
b
72865
a - Power Steering Control Valve

b - Hose Fitting
72867
b
a - Priority Valve
b - No. 1 (Starboard) Pressure Hose
c - No. 2 (Port) Pressure Hose
10. Secure all hoses with Sta-Straps provided.
72866
a - Priority Valve
b - Hose Fitting
Index
90-823224--2 796
Filling System with Fluid
Maintenance
1. Fill pump reservoirs with automatic transmission

fluid (ATF) Dexron ll or Dexron lll.
Maintenance inspection is the owners responsibility

and must be performed at the following intervals:
2. Install and tighten pump cap by turning cap clockwise approximately 120 degrees.
Normal Service - Every 50 hrs. of operation or

60 days (whichever comes first)
Severe Service - Every 25 hrs. of operation or
30 days (whichever comes first)
NOTE: Operation in salt water is considered severe

service.
1. Check all connections and hose clamps for adequate tightness. Tighten, if loose.
2. Check all mounting bolts and tighten if necessary.
3. Be sure to check reservoir oil level periodically.
72868
a - Cap
3. Fill reservoir bottle to full mark, then (one at a

time) slightly loosen pump cap to allow fluid to
flow from reservoir to pump until pump just starts
to overflow, then quickly tighten pump cap. Fill
bottle reservoir and repeat this process for the
other pump.
4. Double check both caps to ensure they are both
tight.
Index
90-823224--2 796
System Flow Diagram (Typical)

3
c
c
d
5
e
f
4
1
d
f
Pressure Line
Return Line
Gravity Feed Line
1
2
3
4
5
Reservoir Bottle and Bracket

Priority Valve and Mounting Bracket
Power Steering Control Valve
Power Steering Pump
Power Steering Fluid Cooler
a
b
c
d
e
f
Pressure Hose (Fitting on Both Ends - Supplied in Kit)

Return Hose (Fitting on One End - Supplied in Kit)
Return Hose from Pump (Cut from Bulk Hose Supplied)
Pressure Hose from Pump
Return Hose from Pump
Gravity Feed Hose (Cut from Bulk Hose Supplied)
4
71405
Index
90-823224--2 796

AT A LATER DATE
Index
90-823224--2 796

7.4L 454 Mercruiser Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

7.4L 454 Mercruiser Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

7.4L 454 Mercruiser Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What safety alerts are mentioned?

What safety alerts are mentioned?

What type of fluid is recommended for filling the power steering system?

What type of fluid is recommended for filling the power steering system?

MAIN MENU

1996, Mercury Marine

We could not possibly know of and advise the service

Notice to Users of This

Electrical, ignition and fuel system components

V-8 Models Covered in This Manual

MCM 7.4L Bravo

MCM 7.4L Bravo Three

MCM 7.4LX MPI

MCM 454 Magnum (Carburetor)

MCM 454 Magnum EFI, EFI/MP and MPI

MCM 502 Magnum (Carburetor)

MCM 502 Magnum EFI, EFI/MP, MPI

MIE 7.4L (Carburetor)

MIE 7.4L EFI/MP and MPI

MIE 8.2L (Carburetor)

MIE 454 Magnum EFI, EFI/MP and MPI Tournament

MCM Bravo 7.4L (Carburetor)

OF800700 and above

MCM 7.4LX EFI

OF820000 and above

MCM 7.4LX MPI

OF802000 and above

MCM 454 Magnum (Carburetor)

OF801700 and Above

MCM 454 MPI

OF802350 and above

MCM 502 MPI

OF802600 and above

MIE 7.4L (Carburetor)

OF820142 and above

MIE 7.4L EFI

OF874815 and above

MIE 7.4L MPI

OF820104 and above

MIE 8.2L MPI

OF775694 and OF775695

MIE 8.2L MPI

OF819620 and above

Service Manual Outline

Section 1 - Important Information

How to Use This Manual

This comprehensive overhaul and repair manual is

This manual is divided into sections which represent

Before attempting repairs or tune-up, it is suggested

Some sections are further divided into parts which

GENERAL INFORMATION - 1A-1

How To Read Parts Manual

CYLINDER BLOCK AND CAMSHAFT

CYLINDER BLOCK ASSEMBLY

841-8163 Cylinder Block Assembly includes only standard pistons,

D. Quantity: Quantity that has to be ordered.

Front of boat is bow; rear is stern. Starboard side is

Engine rotation is determined by observing flywheel

Standard Left-Hand Rotation